Khanacademy Class 10 Physics

MOST POPULAR AROUND THE WORLD
SUCCESS
PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

SERIES
CLASS 10 PHYSICS
KHANACADEMY & NCERT BLOCKBUSTER
DESIGNED FOR SURE SUCCESS

MCQ EDITION
NARAYAN CHANGDER
2 + S
2 O N
S
55 STI ER
E W
QU NS
A
USEFUL FOR
4STUDENTS 4
□ □TEACHERS 4
□PARENTS 4□KIDS 4
□QUIZ TEST
□EXAM 4
4 □TRIVIA TEST 4
□COMPETITIVE EXAM 4
□OTHERS
2
Preface:
This book has undergone rigorous scrutiny to ensure its accuracy. I eagerly invite constructive
feedback on its content. Feel free to reach out to me via Facebook at https://www.facebook.
com/narayanchangder. Additionally, you can access all of my books on Google Play Books at
https://play.google.com/store/books/author?id=Narayan+Changder.
JAI SHREE RAM
NARAYAN CHANGDER
This E-book is dedicated to the loving memory of my mother:

my guiding light, my shining star,
forever
It is my deepest gratitude and warmest

affection that I dedicate this Ebook.
To my mother JOYTSNA CHANGDER

who could not see this Ebook.
who has been a constant source of Knowledge and in-

spiration. Mom, Covid did not take you, it took our
many dreams. wherever you are we will meet again.
Disclaimer
The aim of this publication is to sup-

ply information taken from sources be-
lieved to be valid, reliable and authen-
ticate. The author bear no responsibil-
ity for any damage arising from inad-
verent omissions, negligence or inac-
curacies (typographical or factual) that
♣
NARAYAN CHANGDER
may have found their way into this PDF
booklet.
Due care has been taken to ensure that
the information provided in this book
is correct. Author is not responsible
for any errors, omissions or damage
arising out of use of this information.
nt
Importa inter-
s , s e ar ch the de
er to inclu -
i t h t h e answ w a n t
w u au
atisfied . If yo ontact
If not s rrect answers klet, please c t s:
p
net for
co
i n t h is boo F a c e b ook ht
estions on
tact him arayanchangd
er/
new qu a n c o n n
ou c om/
thor. Y acebook.c
. f
//www
CRUCIAL INFORMATION: PLEASE READ BEFORE
CONTINUING:

1. If you require practice sets on various sub-
jects, kindly send us a message on Facebook
with the subject name. Our team will be happy
to create them for you. Message us on Face-
book at https://www.facebook.com/
narayanchangder
2. Additionally, you can access all of my books
with answers on Google Play Books at »>
https://play.google.com/store/books/
author?id=Narayan+Changder
3. Answers are given at the end of every page
to help you identify your strengths and weak-
nesses.
4. It shows you how to build your own techni-
cal and pedagogical skills to enable them to
create their own materials and activities for
students.
5. It helps you to see how you can make the
transition from classroom teaching to blended
and online teaching.
6. It’s the cheapest good quality ebook that you
can buy online on google play books.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
7. The money raised from creating the sales of
the book will help to ensure that I’m able to
produce similar books like this at a compara-
ble price.
8. YOU CAN DOWNLOAD 4000+ FREE PRACTICE
SET PDF EBOOK ON VARIOUS SUBJECTS (NURS-
ERY to UNIVERSITY LEVEL) FROM GOOGLE
DRIVE LINK https://drive.google.com/
drive/u/1/folders/19TbUXltOSN5S7FV3sL
Contents
1 Light – reflection & refraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.1 Reflection of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.3 Spherical mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.4 Spherical mirrors image formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.5 Sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.6 Mirror formula derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.8 Refraction of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.9 Absolute & relative refractive index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
1.11 Image formation by spherical lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
1.12 Lens formula derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
1.13 Dioptres & power of a lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
2 The human eye and the colourful world . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

2.1 The human eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.2 Power of accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
2.3 Defects of vision and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
2.4 Defects of vision and correction numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
2.5 Dispersion of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
2.6 Atmospheric refraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
2.7 Scattering of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
2.8 Tyndall effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
1
3 Electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3.1 Electric current & circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

3.2 Electric potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
3.3 Electric potential difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
3.5 Factors on which resistance of a conductor depends on . . . . . . . . . . 341
3.6 Series and parallel resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
4 Magnetic effects of electric current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric current . . . . . 458
4.3 Force on current carrying wire in magnetic field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
4.4 Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
4.5 Electromagnetic induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
4.7 Domestic circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
1. Light – reflection & refraction
NARAYAN CHANGDER
1.1 Reflection of light
1. Which term is used to refer to the scatter- A. 10◦ less than
ing of light by a rough surface? B. 10◦ more than
A. Diffuse reflection C. equal to
B. Specular reflection D. The opposite obtuse angle to
C. Regular reflection
5. How does the light travels?
D. none of above
A. in parallel
2. The Laws of reflection are, B. in a straight line
A. The normal is imaginary C. on its own orbit
B. The angle of incidence is equal to the D. on its own path
angle of reflection
6. When distance of object from a mirror is
C. The image is virtual
gradually increased then image formed by
D. The incident ray, the reflected ray and it becomes inverted which was erect in the
the normal at the point of incidence lie in beginning. Which type of mirror is this?
the same plane.
A. Plane mirror
3. the image of an object formed by a plain B. Concave mirror
mirror is
C. Convex mirror
A. virtual
D. none of the above
B. real
7. What is reflection of light?
C. diminished
A. Reflection is the bouncing of light off
D. upside-down the surface that it strikes on.
4. The angle of incidence will be the angle B. Reflection is the absorbing of light off
of reflection. the surface that it strikes on.
1. A 2. B 2. D 3. A 4. C 5. B 6. B 7. A
1.1 Reflection of light 3
C. Reflection is the bending of light off the 13. Name of the straight lines that represent
surface that it strikes on. light waves

D. Reflection is the scattering of light off A. Rays
the surface that it strikes on. B. image
8. The velocity of light in vacuum is m/s C. lines

D. visible light
A. 3x108
B. 3x1012 14. If you are wearing a yellow shirt, what is
true of the light that strikes it?
C. 3x106
A. Yellow is absorbed; everything else is
D. 3x1010 reflected
B. Yellow is reflected; everything else is
9. What is the name of the angle between
absorbed
the incident ray and the normal?
C. All colors are reflected
A. angle of incidence
D. All colors are absorbed
B. angle of reflection
C. angle of convergent 15. What is a ray of light?
A. A curved line of light
D. angle of divergent
B. A type of fish
10. Which optical device bends light inward? C. A straight beam of light
A. convex lens D. The entire spectrum of colors within
B. concave lens white light
C. plane mirror 16. MCQ 04 Tracing paper is an example for

object.
D. convex mirror
A. a transparent
11. Which of the following characteristic of an B. a translucent
image formed for a convex mirror?
C. an opaque
A. Enlarged size
D. a luminous
B. virtual image
17. What are luminous objects?
C. Real image
A. objects that generate their own light
D. inverted image
B. objects that do not generate their own
light
12. When you look in a mirror, which of these
is correct about the image? C. objects that do not reflect any light
A. further away than the object D. objects that let light pass through them
B. real 18. A ray is reflected in turn by three plain mir-

rors mutually at right angles to each other.
C. same size as the object
The angle between the incident and the re-
D. flipped upside down flected rays is
8. A 9. A 10. A 11. B 12. C 13. A 14. B 15. C 16. B 17. A 18. D 19. B
A. 60◦ C. Absorbed
B. 90◦ D. Optical Density
C. 150◦ 24. The point on the spherical mirror at the
D. 180◦ middle of the surface is called
19. Which of the following correctly describes A. focus

the image produced by a plane mirror? B. centre of curvature
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. The image is real and upright. C. pole
B. The image will move twice as fast to- D. radius of curvature
wards the plane of the mirror as the object
moves. 25. MCQ 05 Light is a form of energy produced
by a
C. The image is the same size as the ob-
ject with no lateral inversion. A. luminous object
D. The image undergoes vertical inver- B. transparent object

sion. C. non-luminous object
20. The angle produced as a source of light D. opaque object

bounces off a reflecting surface is called 26. Ray diagramming techniques involves the
drawing of the principal , focal ray, and
A. angle of crookedness the central ray.
B. angle of reflection A. axis
C. angle of incidence B. ray
D. angle of bounce C. vertex
21. Light exhibits D. length
A. Ray nature only 27. What is the angle between the normal and
B. Wave nature only the incident ray know as?
C. Dual nature ( ray & wave both ) A. angle of reflection
D. particle nature only B. angle of incidence

C. right angle
22. A student wants to investigate the reflec-
tion of light. Which objects can be used to D. angle of deviation
reflect light? 28. Which of the following is an example of
A. Clear glass diffuse reflection? A. Reflection off a still
B. Paper pondB. Reflection off a gravel roadC. Re-
flection off the sand on a beachD. Reflec-
C. Silver Plate tion from a window pane
D. Black cloth A. A and D
23. When light bounces back it is B. B and C
A. Reflected C. A and B
B. Refracted D. C and D
20. B 21. C 22. C 23. A 24. C 25. A 26. B 27. B 28. B 29. B
29. The reflection by the rough surfaces is C. N= (360/angle between mirrors)-1

called D. N= (180/angle between mirrors)-1

A. regular reflection
35. What surface best reflects light?
B. irregular reflection
A. dull
C. reflection
B. shiny
D. lateral inversion
C. clear
30. What is the relation between radius of cur-
D. black
vature R and focal length f of a mirror?
A. R = 2f 36. If the angle between the reflected ray and
the surface is 50 degree, then what is the
B. R=2/f
angle of incidence?
C. R=1/2f
A. 90 degree
D. f=2R
B. 50 degree
31. What particles make up light? C. 40 degree
A. Photons D. 30 degree
B. Neutrons
37. What is incident ray?
C. Protons
A. the ray which forms 90 degree with
D. none of above surface
32. When does the light is refracted? B. the ray which passes through the sur-
face
A. When light travels in a straight line
C. the ray which strikes any surface
B. When light is bounced
D. the ray which is deflected by a smooth
C. When light travels in two different
surface
mediums
D. When light cannot pass through an 38. The is the angle between the normal
opaque object and the incident ray.
A. Angle of incidence
33. The splitting of sunlight into seven con-
stituent colours is called B. Angle of reflection
A. refraction C. Angle of coincidence
B. dispersion D. Angle of direction
C. deviation 39. A ray of light is seen to be reflected from
D. reflection a plane mirror at an angle of 30◦ with the
mirror.The angle of incidence must be
34. What is the correct formula in determining
the number of images between two plane A. 30◦
mirrors? B. 120◦
A. N= 1-(360/angle between mirrors) C. 90◦
B. N= (360/90o)-1 D. 60◦
30. A 31. A 32. C 33. B 34. C 35. B 36. C 37. C 38. A 39. D 40. B
40. How big will the angle of reflection be if 46. The imaginary line perpendicular to a re-
the angle of incidence is 30 ◦ ? flecting surface is called
A. 20 ◦ A. crooked line
B. 30 ◦ B. parallel line
C. 40 ◦ C. angular line
D. 60 ◦ D. normal line
NARAYAN CHANGDER
41. What is the mirror formula? 47. Why the rear-view mirrors in vehicles are
convex mirrors?
A. 1/f = 1/v + 1/u
A. These mirrors give virtual erect image
B. 1/f = 1/u-1/v
and slightly diminished image
C. 1/u = 1/f + 1/v B. Concave mirror also gives virtual erect
D. 1/f = u + v image but these are highly magnified
42. A positive sign in the value of magnifica- C. Both of these

tion indicates that the image is D. None of these
A. real 48. If the angle between the angle of incidence
B. virtual and the angle of reflection is 100 degree
then, what is the angle between the angle
C. enlarged
of incidence and the normal?
D. near
A. 50 degree
43. The Angle between the reflected ray and B. 100 degree
the normal line is known as the
C. 40 degree
A. Angle of Incidence
D. 90 degree
B. Angle of Reflection
49. Light is a form of
C. Normal Line
A. energy
D. none of above
B. radiation
44. What do you call a flat mirror? C. reflection
A. plane mirror D. none of above
B. convex mirror
50. a copy of an object formed by reflected or
C. concave mirror refracted rays of light
D. none of above A. image
45. A transparent material B. reflection
A. Allows no light to pass through it C. regular reflection
B. Allows some light to pass through it D. diffuse reflection
C. Allows light to pass through it 51. Which of the following is NOT a property
D. Allows light to pass through it, but de- of the image formed by a plane mirror?
pending on how bright it is A. virtual and upright
41. A 42. B 43. B 44. A 45. C 46. D 47. A 48. A 49. A 50. A 51. D
B. object size = image size B. (d) Concave mirror as well as concave

C. object distance = image distance lens

D. real and inverted C. (b) Convex mirror as well as concave
lens
52. An object is placed at a distance of 12cm D. c) Two plane mirrors placed at 90◦ to
in front of a concave mirror.It forms a each other
real image four times larger than the ob-
ject.calculate the distance of the image 57. What is the main light and heat source?
from the mirror?
A. sun
A. v =-53cm
B. rain
B. v =-48cm
C. light bulb
C. v = 53cm
D. none of above
D. v = 48cm
58. A lens that is thicker in the middle than on
53. When light hits an area and bounces back the outside is called
it is called:
A. diverging
A. echo
B. concave
B. refraction
C. convex
C. reflection
D. achromatic
D. absorbing
54. The image formed in a plane mirror is 59. Objects which emit their own light are de-
scribed as:
A. real image
A. Luminous
B. the same size as the object
B. Non-luminous
C. bigger than the object
C. Transparent
D. virtual image
D. Translucent
E. in front of the mirror.
60. What is the name of a line drawn at 90◦
55. MCQ 011 According to the laws of reflec-
to the surface of a material?
tion, if i = angle of incidence and r = angle
of reflection, A. Boundary
A. i = r B. Incident
B. i > r C. Normal
C. r > i D. none of above
D. i is not equal to r
61. Why can you see most objects?
56. Which of the following can make a paral- A. they emit light
lel beam of light when light from a point
B. light refracts through them
source is incident on it?
A. (a) Concave mirror as well as convex C. light reflects off them
lens D. they absorb light
52. B 53. C 54. B 54. D 55. A 56. A 57. A 58. C 59. A 60. C 61. C 62. C
62. Power of the lens is-5D, its focal length is B. A convex lens has-4 dioptre power hav-
A. 4m ing a focal length 0.25 m
B. -40m C. A concave lens has-4 dioptre power

having a focal length 0.25 m
C. -0.2m
D. -25m D. A concave lens has 4 dioptre power
having a focal length 0.25 m
63. Apart from a prism, light can also be sep-
68. What is the distance of your image from
NARAYAN CHANGDER
arated by
you if you stand 1.5 m in front of a plane
A. air
mirror?
B. plastic
A. 1.5 m
C. metal
B. 2.0 m
D. rain drop
C. 3.0 m
64. Which of the following are examples of
specular reflection? A. Reflection off a mir- D. 4.5 m
rorB. Reflection off a flowing riverC. Re-
flection off a glass tabletopD. Reflection 69. A ray of light that strikes a plane mir-
off a carpet ror PQ at an angle of incidence of 30o, is
reflected from the plane mirror and then
A. A and C strikes a second plane mirror QR placed at
B. B and D right angles to the first mirror. The angle
C. A and B of reflection at the second mirror is:
D. C and D A. 30o
65. Which term means to bounce off the sur- B. 45o

face of something? C. 60o
A. Refract D. 90o
B. Absorb
70. Why can you see non-luminous objects?
C. Reflect
D. prism A. They emit light
B. Light travels through them
66. is a from of energy that we can see
with our eyes. C. Light reflects off them
A. shadow D. They absorb light
B. light
71. When light hits a barrier that is
C. energy
solid/opaque what is usually created?
D. reflection
A. a hot object
67. Which of the following statements is B. a shadow
true?
C. nothing
A. A convex lens has 4 dioptre power hav-
ing a focal length 0.25 m D. none of above
63. D 64. A 65. C 66. B 67. A 68. C 69. C 70. C 71. B 72. A
72. If the angle of incidence is 45o, what is A. 1.33

the angle between the incident ray and re- B. 1.0
flecting surface

C. 1.523
A. 45o
D. 2.45
B. 90o
78. If the angle of incidence is 30 degree, then
C. 180o
the angle of reflections is?
A. 30 degree
73. Which of the following is an example of B. 90 degree
the use of a concave mirror
C. 60 degree
A. shaving mirrors
D. 120 degree
B. security cameras
79. Zed stands 1.5-m tall in front of a plane
C. side mirrors of automobiles mirror. What is the height of his image?
D. optical instruments A. 4.5 m
74. A copy of an object formed by reflected or B. 3.0 m
refracted rays of light is called an C. 2.0 m
A. image D. 1.5 m
B. reflection
80. An object is placed at the centre of curva-
C. regular reflection ture of a concave mirror.The distance be-
D. diffuse reflection tween the object and its image is
A. Equal to f
75. An insect is sitting 80 cm in front of a plane
mirror m if the mirror is now moved 0.2 m B. Equal to 2f
away from the insect how does the image C. Zero
of the insect from its previous image D. Equal to 4f
A. 0.2 m
81. Glasses have a , which is a curved piece
B. 0.4 m of glass or plastic that will refract light.
C. 0.6 m A. medium
D. 1.2 m B. prism
76. MCQ 06 An example for non-luminous ob- C. lens
ject is D. none of above
A. a candle
82. When light passes at an angle to the nor-
B. the sun mal from one material into another mate-
C. an electric bulb rial in which its speed is higher
D. the moon A. it is bent toward the normal.
B. it always lies along the normal.
77. Light travels through a liquid at 2.25 x
108 m/s. What is the absolute refractive C. it is unaffected.
index of the liquid? D. it is bent away from the normal.
73. A 74. A 75. D 76. D 77. A 78. A 79. D 80. C 81. C 82. D 83. C
83. Which of the following does not have light 88. Name the colors in the visible spectrum.
of its own?
A. red, orange, yellow, green, blue, in-
A. a torch digo, violet
B. a lamp B. red, orange, blue, violet, green
C. the moon C. red, yellow, indigo, orange
D. the sun D. red, blue, green, yellow, purple,
brown, pink
NARAYAN CHANGDER
84. List the characteristics of image formed by
a plane mirror 89. The law of states that the incident and
A. Real, Erect, Small reflected rays lie in the same plane with
the normal and that the angle of reflection
B. Virtual, Erect, Same size equals the angle of incidence.
C. Real, Inverted, Large A. Refraction
D. Virtual, Inverted, large B. Concave
85. what is the difference between convergent C. Convex

and divergent lens? D. Reflection
A. convergent-focus light together,
divergent-refracts light into different di- 90. You can see an object like a book because
rections the book
B. convergent-focus light into different di- A. glows

rections, divergent-refracts light together B. reflects light
C. no difference C. is a light source is a light source
D. none of above D. absorbs light
86. straight lines that represent light waves 91. What “color” do we sense when there is
A. rays no light in a room?
B. image A. Black
C. reflection B. White
D. visible light C. Rainbow
D. Periwinkle
87. Which of the following characteristics are
correct for the image formed in a plane E. Gray
mirror? I. Upright II. InvertedIII. Real IV.
Same size as the objectV. Virtual 92. Light behaves like both a particle and a
A. I, II, III A. Mass
B. I, III, IV B. Wave
C. I, IV, V C. Current
D. III, IV, V D. none of above
84. B 85. A 86. A 87. C 88. A 89. D 90. B 91. A 92. B 93. D
93. Best regular reflection of light takes place 98. The radius of curvature of a mirror is 20cm
when it strikes the focal length is

A. Smooth opaque surface A. 20 cm
B. Rough opaque surface B. 10 cm
C. Smooth transparent surface C. 40 cm
D. Smooth & silvered opaque surface D. 5 cm
99. Why can’t you see your face on the pages

94. Name the type of mirror used as a back-
of your lecture notebook? When light hits
view mirror.
paper,
A. Plane mirror A. the waves are reflected in only one di-
B. Concave mirror rection.
C. Convex mirror B. the waves are reflected in all direc-
tions.
D. None of these
C. . the waves are refracted.
95. A lens of focal length 12 cm forms an erect D. the waves are dispersed.
image, three times the size of the object.
The distance between the object and image 100. what is reflections
is: A. is a form of energy
A. 8 cm B. takes place on a new moon day
B. 16 cm C. when light bounces off an object
C. 24 cm D. travelling in a straight line
D. 36 cm 101. Light emerging from water to air will
bend due to the speed as it crosses
96. How is a rainbow created? the boundary.
A. All colors are reflected off of an object. A. toward the normal, increases
B. White light is refracted through a B. toward the normal, decreases
prism.
C. away from the normal, increases
C. White light is reflected off of a mirror. D. away from the normal, decreases
D. All colors are absorbed by a prism.
102. what is the angle between the incident
97. You are given water, mustard oil, glycer- ray and the normal called as
ine and kerosene. In which of these media A. angle of incidence
a ray of light incident obliquely at same B. angle of reflection
angle would bend the most
C. angle of convergent
A. kerosene
B. water
103. The angle between the mirror and the in-
C. mustard
cident ray is 30 degree, the angle of reflec-
D. glycerine tion is?
94. C 95. A 96. B 97. D 98. B 99. B 100. C 101. C 102. A 103. C 104. B
A. 30 C. Almost all of the light rays that reach

B. 45 it are reflected.
C. 60 D. Almost all of the light rays that reach

it pass through it.
D. none of above
109. These are straight lines that represent
104. Objects that reflect well are light waves:
A. Matte surfaces A. Rays
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. Smooth, shiny surfaces B. Image
C. Dark coloured surfaces
C. Luminous
D. Medium coloured surfaces
D. Visible light
105. If the image is formed in front of the mir-
110. First law of reflection states that the an-
ror, then the image distance will be
gle of incidence is angle of reflection.
A. positive or negative depending on the
A. Greater than
size of the object
B. neither positive nor negative B. Less than
C. positive C. Equal to
D. negative D. None of these
106. The reflectivity of a mirror coating can be 111. The angle of incidence for a ray of light
measured using a: having zero reflection angle is:
A. Reflectivator A. 0
B. Laws of Reflection B. 30◦
C. Concave and Convex mirrors C. 45◦
D. Reflectometer D. 90◦
107. What instruments use lenses or mirrors 112. Linear Magnification Produced By A Con-
to collect and focus light from distant ob- cave Mirror May Be:
jects? A. Less than 1 or equal to 1
A. Microscopes B. More than 1 or equal to 1
B. Optical fibers C. Less than 1, more than 1 or equal to 1
C. Telescopes
D. Less than 1 or more than 1
D. Lasers
113. Light passing through a lens and bending
108. What is a property of a transparent ob- is an example of
ject?
A. reflection
A. Almost all of the light rays that reach
B. refraction
it are scattered.
B. Almost all of the light rays that reach C. transmission
it are absorbed. D. absorption
CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

114. Law of reflection is A. plane

A. incident angle = reflected angle B. Concave

B. incident angle > reflected angle C. Convex
C. incident angle < reflected angle D. Diffused
D. mirror are cool 120. When the object is at infinity, a point
115. No matter how far you stand from a sized image is formed at by the con-
spherical mirror, your image appears erect. vex mirror
The mirror may be A. focus behind the mirror
A. only plane B. focus in front of the mirror
B. only concave C. radius of curvature
C. either plane or convex D. principal axis
D. only convex 121. Which one of the following is true accord-
ing to laws of reflection?
116. A point object is placed at a distance of
20 cm from a convex mirror of focal length A. angle of incidence > angle of reflec-
20 cm. The image will form at tion
A. at infinity B. angle of incidence < angle of reflec-
tion
B. at focus
C. angle of incidence = angle of reflec-
C. at the pole
tion
D. behind the mirror
D. angle of incidence can be both more or
117. Light hitting a mirror and bouncing off is less than angle of reflection
an example of
122. Images in a plane mirror are
A. reflection
A. real
B. refraction
B. larger
C. transmission
C. smaller
D. absorption D. same size
118. An object at a distance of 30 cm from 123. Where will be the images of the Sun or
aconcave mirror gets its image at the same the moon are formed by a concave mir-
point. The focal length of the mirror is ror?
A. -30 cm A. Focus
B. 30 cm B. Pole
C. -15 cm C. centre of curvature
D. +15 cm D. beyond centre of curvature
119. A mirror is a curved mirror wherein 124. Smooth surfaces a lot of light.
the reflecting surface is on the outer sur-
face of the sphere so that the center of A. reflect
the mirror bulges towards the viewer. B. bend

C. absorb 130. A concave mirror gives real, inverted and

D. twist same size image if the object is placed
A. At F
125. Absolute refractive index of any medium
B. At infinity
is always
C. At C
A. less than 1
D. Beyond C
B. greater than 1
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 1 131. Regular reflection of light takes place
when it strikes
D. 0
A. Smooth opaque surface
126. The relation between focal length and ra- B. Rough opaque surface
dius of curvature is
C. Smooth transparent surface
A. R = 2f D. Smooth & silvered opaque surface
B. 1/f = 2R
132. Which of the following waves in the elec-
C. f = R/2 tromagnetic spectrum has the highest en-
D. R = 2/f ergy?
A. Radio Waves
127. Which of the following would be an ex-
ample of using a convex mirror effec- B. Ultraviolet Rays
tively? C. Gamma Rays
A. Satellite dishes for collecting radio D. Infrared Waves
waves
133. An object 8cm in length is placed at a dis-
B. Otoscopic mirror for concentrating tance of 40cm in front of a concave mirror
light of radius of curvature 30cm.Find the posi-
C. Dental mirror for closer examination tion of the image and its size
D. Security mirror in store to increase A. v =-24cm, h =-4.8cm
range of view B. v = 24cm, h = 4.8cm
128. Why the rainbow forms in the nature? C. v =-32cm, h =-5.2cm
A. Because of refraction D. v-32cm, h = 5.2cm
B. Because of dispersion 134. The law of reflection states that when a

ray of light reflects off a surface
C. Because of reflection
A. the angle of incidence is not equal to
D. Because of colours
the angle of reflection
129. The unit of power of lens is B. the angle of incidence is greater than
angle of reflection
A. Metre
C. the angle of incidence is equal to the
B. Centimetre
angle of reflection
C. Diopter D. the angle of incidence is less than an-
D. M-1 gle of reflection

135. What happens when light hits an object 141. What do we call a material that light can
you can see? travel through?
A. air

A. The light turns corners.
B. The light curves around the object. B. water
C. The object reflects the light. C. medium
D. The light and the object do not form a D. pathway
shadow. 142. To get real magnified image in convex
136. Which phrase best completes the follow- lens, the object position is
ing sentence? We see things because: A. in between lens and F
A. light from our eyes shines on them. B. in between F and 2F
B. they are luminous. C. at 2F
C. the Sun shines on them. D. beyond 2F
D. light from them enters our eyes. 143. As wavelength decreases in the electro-
magnetic spectrum the frequency
137. In order to see a picture it must
A. decreases
A. produce light
B. stays the same
B. reflect light
C. increases
C. absorb light D. doubles
D. none of above
144. Is the parallel light rays reflect in paral-
138. Swimming pools and the ocean look shal- lel.
lower than they really are due to: A. Spectacular Reflection
A. reflection B. Specular Reflection
B. dispersion C. Incident Ray
C. refraction D. none of above
D. total internal reflection 145. If you stand 3 m in front of a plane mir-
139. What does transparent mean? ror, how far away would you see yourself
in the mirror?
A. some light is able to pass through
A. 1.5 m
B. no light is able to pass through
B. 3 m
C. all light is able to pass through C. 6 m
D. none of above D. 12 m
140. The image formed by a mirror is upright 146. The is the angle between the normal
and magnified. The mirror is and the reflected ray.
A. plane A. Angle of incidence
B. concave B. Angle of reflection
C. convex C. Angle of coincidence
D. obtuse D. Angle of direction

147. What occurs when light hits a medium C. opposite

with a different optical density?
D. equal
A. reflection
B. optical density reaction 152. Which of the following uses the principle
of reflection of light?
C. electromagnetic spectrum
A. Glasses
D. refraction
B. Magnifying glass
148. What is reflection?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. Mirror
A. Reflection is the bouncing of light off
the surface that it strikes on. D. Binoculars
B. Reflection is the absorbing of light off
153. Light travels in straight line paths called
the surface that it strikes on.
, and travels a path which uses the
C. Reflection is the bending of light off the shortest time which is an idea of Fermat’s
surface that it strikes on. principle of least time.
D. Reflection is the scattering of light off A. Rays
the surface that it strikes on.
B. Concave
149. Which of the following is true with re-
spect to magnification of spherical mir- C. Convex
rorsa. It is the ratio of height of object D. Reflection
to height of imageb. It can be also ex-
pressed as negative ratio of image dis- 154. The law of reflection states that
tance to object distancec. Magnification is
A. Angle of incidence = Angle of reflec-
always greater than zero
tion
A. a and c
B. Angle of incidence = Angle of inci-
B. a and b dence
C. b and c C. Angle of reflection = Angle of translu-
D. All are true cence
150. What does it mean to reflect? D. Angle of reflection = Angle of reflec-
tion
A. a polished surface which reflects an
image
155. A child is standing in front of a magic mir-
B. a transparent crystal used to separate ror. She finds the imageof her head bigger,
light the middle portion of her body of the same
C. to form or reproduce an image by mir- size and that of the legs smaller. The fol-
roring it lowing is the order of combinations for the
magic mirror from the top.
D. to bend something, almost always light
A. Plane, convex and concave
151. The angle of incidence and the angle of
reflection are: B. Convex, concave and plane
A. both negative C. Concave, plane and convex
B. not equal D. Convex, plane and concave

156. A lens makes objects appear bigger. C. real, inverted and magnified
A. concave D. real, inverted and diminished

B. convex 162. A mirror is a curved mirror wherein
C. prism the reflecting surface is on the inner sur-
D. flat face of the sphere.
A. Refraction
157. When we look in the plane mirror, we
B. Concave
will have our own image. What is the phe-
nomenon involved? C. Convex
A. Refraction D. Reflection mirror is a curved mirror
wherein the reflecting surface is on the in-
B. Reflection
ner surface of the sphere.
C. Light travels in bent position
163. If the angle of incidence is 45 degree,
D. Inferens
what is the angle between the incident ray
158. What is the reflected ray? and reflecting ray
A. The ray which forms 90 degree angle A. 45
with the surface B. 90
B. The ray which gets deflected from the C. 180
surface D. none of the above
C. The ray which passes through the sur-
face 164. The focal length of a spherical mirror or
radius of curvature 30 cm is:
D. The ray which strikes the surface
A. 10 cm
159. MCQ 01Which of the following is the B. 15 cm
speed of light?
C. 20 cm
A. 3 metres per second
D. 30 cm
B. 30 metres per second
165. Which of the following best describes the
C. 300 metres per second
image formed by a plane mirror?
D. 300 000 000 metres per second
A. virtual, inverted and enlarged
160. Irregular reflection can take place on- B. real, inverted and reduced
A. plane mirror C. virtual, upright and the same size as
B. shined steel plate object
C. uneven ground D. real, upright and the same size as ob-
ject
D. polished marble floor
166. Another name for light bending is
161. The image formed by a concave mirror
when the object is placed between the pole A. Reflaction
and the focus is B. Absorbing
A. virtual, erect and magnified C. Refraction
B. virtual, erect and diminished D. mirror

167. Which of the following factors con- 172. Types of Reflection are and specular
tributes to the bending of light? reflection.
A. Change of speed of light A. Diffuse
B. Change of density of light B. concave
C. Change of colour of light C. convex
D. Change of energy of light D. focal
NARAYAN CHANGDER
173. A ray of light is reflected from a plane
168. When an object is placed between two
mirror. The angle of incidence is 20o. The
mirrors kept perpendicular to each other,
angle between the incident and the re-
the number of images formed is
flected ray is
A. 2
A. 10o
B. 3
B. 20o
C. 4 C. 30o
D. infinite D. 40o
169. The normal or norm is: 174. the band of colours that is produced when
A. an imaginary line at right angles to a white light splits up is called
reflecting surface A. spectrum
B. where light enters and leaves a mirror B. dispesion
during reflections C. refraction
C. at the same angle as the reflected ray D. reflection
of light
D. always the same for all flat surfaces 175. What is regular reflection of light?
A. A beam of light falls on a very smooth
170. A light ray meets a plane mirror at 60◦ . surface and get reflected in only one direc-
What is the angle of reflection? tion.
A. 60◦ B. A beam of light falls on an object with
an uneven surface and get reflected in dif-
B. 30◦
ferent directions.
C. 120◦
C. The point at which the incident ray
D. none of above strikes the surface.
D. none of above
171. Refraction is the bending of a wave dis-
turbance as it passes from one into an- 176. Which of the following may happen to
other. light if it strikes different materials?
A. glass A. absorbed
B. medium B. transmitted
C. area C. reflected
D. boundary D. all choices are possible

177. Light has the highest velocity in which B. Diffuse Reflection

medium? flint glass n=1.70barium
C. Refraction
glass n=1.60crown glass n=1.523water

n=1.33diamond n=2.45 D. Diffraction
A. diamond
182. The created images in convex mirrors are
B. water always located behind the mirror-virtual,
C. flint glass upright and diminished, than the ob-
ject.
D. barium glass
A. bigger
178. A student obtains a blured image of a
distant object on a screen using a con- B. Smaller
vex lens.To obtain a distinct image on the C. blurred
screen he should move the lens
D. diffused
A. away from the screen
B. towards the screen 183. An object is at a distance of 25 cm in front
C. to a point very far away from the of a plane mirror.The mirror is shifted 5
screen cm away from the object.Find the new dis-
tance between the object and it’s image.
D. either towards or away from the
screen depending upon the position of the A. 30 cm
object. B. 60 cm
179. MCQ 017When a parallel beam of light C. 20 cm
falls on polished silver,
D. 40 cm
A. the light will be scattered
B. a convergent beam of light will be re- 184. A plane mirror is approaching you at a
flected speed of 10 cm/sec .You can see your im-
C. a divergent beam of light will be re- age in it. At what speed will your image
flected approach you
D. a parallel beam of light will be re- A. 20 cm/sec

flected B. 15 cm/sec
180. The angle of incidence of a ray of light C. 10 cm/sec
passing through the centre of curvature of
D. 5 cm/sec
a concave mirror is degree
A. 105 185. The bouncing off of light rays from the
B. 180 surface of an object such as a mirror or
other shiny surface is called:
C. 90
A. mirror
D. 0
B. laser
181. What occurs when parallel rays of light
hit a rough or bumpy surface? C. reflection
A. Regular Reflection D. refraction

186. The bouncing back of light that strike a 192. A pin is placed 40cm in front of a concave
clear surface. mirror of focal length 15 cm. Choose the
A. Refraction correct characteristics of the image formed
by the mirror.Choose all answers that ap-
B. Reflection ply:
C. Radiation A. The image forms between F and P.
D. Vibration B. The image is virtual and erect.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
187. An object which allows light to pass C. The image is magnified in size.
through it partially is described as: D. The image forms between C and F
A. Opaque
193. the bouncing of light
B. Translucent
A. refraction
C. Transparent
B. reflection
D. Reflection
C. absorption
188. How are we able to see the color white? D. shadow
A. All colors except red are absorbed
194. the angle between the normal and the
B. All colors are absorbed incident ray.
C. All colors are reflected A. Angle of incidence
D. All colors except red are reflected B. Angle of reflection
189. When you stand 3 m in front of a full C. Angle of coincidence

length mirror, your image is D. Angle of direction
A. real and 1 m behind the mirror 195. When a small object is placed on the prin-
B. real and 3 m behind the mirror cipal axis of a concave mirror between the
focus and the pole, the image formed is
C. virtual and 2 m behind the mirror
A. erect, diminished and real
D. virtual and 3 m behind the mirror
B. inverted, magnified and real
190. Light travels
C. erect, magnified and virtual
A. around corners
D. inverted, diminished and virtual
B. in a straight line
196. Non-luminous objects cannot
C. in waves
A. bend light
D. in circles
B. bury light
191. What is the name of the angle between
C. stop light
the reflected ray and the normal?
D. emit light
B. angle of reflection 197. When the object is in between the centre
of curvature (C) and focus (F) of a concave
C. angle of convergent mirror, then the position of the image is

A. At focus 203. MCQ 013A ray of light is incident on a

B. At the centre of curvature plane mirror and the angle of incidence is
25 degrees. What is the angle of reflec-

C. at infinity tion?
D. beyond the centre of curvature A. 0 degrees
198. Which statement is true? B. 50 degrees
A. Light travels faster than sound. C. 90 degrees
B. Light and sound travel at the same D. 25 degrees

speed. 204. MCQ 03Objects that allow only some
C. Sound will not travel. Only light can light to pass through them are considered
travel.
D. Sound travels faster than light. A. transparent
B. translucent
199. The Law of Reflection states that the an-
gle of the incident light ray is equal to C. opaque
A. the angle of the refracted light ray D. solid
B. the angle of the reflected light ray 205. When light hits an area and it bounces
C. 90 degrees back its called
A. echo
D. the angle of the normal line
B. reflection
200. Dispersion of light referred to as
C. refraction
A. Bending of light
D. absorbing
B. Splitting of light in seven colours
206. MCQ 02Why can you see most objects?
C. Splitting of light in primary colours
A. they emit light
D. Bouncing back of light
B. light refracts through them
201. Which would you rather walk on bare- C. light reflects off them
foot if the sun is out all day long?
D. they absorb light
A. grass
207. In regular reflection all reflected rays are
B. black top
C. sand at the beach A. irregular
D. concrete sidewalk B. parallel
202. Which of the following optical equipment C. transversals
applies the principle of Full Reflection? D. none of above
A. binocular
208. We can see the objects only when:
B. periscope
A. The objects absorb all the light.
C. telescope B. Reflected light from the object reaches
D. projector our eye.

C. When the objects allow all the light to 214. Shadows are cast when:
pass through them. A. an object blocks the path of light rays
D. None of these B. the Sun sets in the east
C. light reflects off a mirror
209. A lens makes objects appear smaller
and further away. D. light passes from one material into an-
other
A. convex
215. A smooth shining surface, which re-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. concave
bounds the light back in same or in differ-
C. prism ent direction, is called
D. flat A. a mirror
B. a lens
210. Opaque means
C. reflection of light
A. No light passes through it
D. point of incidence
B. All light passes through it
216. Convex mirror is also called as
C. Some light passes through it
A. converging mirror
D. none of above
B. diverging mirror
211. A ray of light coming parallel to the prin- C. plane mirror
cipal axis after passing through a convex D. silver mirror
lens, has passed through its
217. If a man’s face is 25 cm in front of con-
A. optical centre
cave shaving mirror producing erect image
B. focus 1.5 times the size of face, focal length of
the mirror would be
C. center of curvature
A. 75 cm
D. mid point
B. 25 cm
212. Luminous objects can C. 15 cm
A. bend light D. 60 cm
B. emit light 218. This is a reflection of light on smooth sur-
C. cancel light faces such as mirrors or a calm body of
water.
D. bury light
A. Regular
213. What are Luminous Object? B. Irregular
A. Objects that give off light of their own C. Diffused
B. Objects that do not give the light of D. none of above

their own 219. Fire fly is a
C. None of them above A. Non-living luminous body
D. none of above B. Plant body

C. Living luminous body 225. Light is refracted and spread out by a

D. Heavenly body A. concave lens

B. convex mirror
220. a reflection that occurs when parallel
rays of light hit an uneven surface C. concave mirror
A. regular reflection D. convex lens
B. diffuse reflection 226. Your light-sensing organ is your

C. real image A. ear
D. virtual image B. finger
C. brain
221. which of the following is not a property
of the image formed by a [lane mirror? D. eye
A. virtual and erect 227. Beam of light striking the reflecting sur-
B. Object size = image size face is called
A. reflecting ray
C. object distance = image distance
B. refracted ray
D. Real and inverted
C. normal ray
222. A light ray is incident 40 degrees from D. incident ray
the surface of the mirror. What is the an-
gle of reflection? 228. A person is in a room whose ceiling and
A. 40 degrees two adjacent walls are mirrors. How
many images are formed
B. 50 degrees
A. 5
C. 90 degrees
B. 6
D. 100 degrees
C. 7
223. A concave mirror gives virtual, refract D. 8
and enlarged image of the object but image
of smaller size than the size of the object 229. MCQ 019Which of the following is used
is to make a cheap periscope?
A. At infinity A. Concave mirror

B. Convex mirror
B. Between F and C
C. Plane mirror
C. Between P and F
D. Lens
D. At E
230. When light passes from air to water,
224. A plane mirror produces a/an what happens to the speed of the light?
A. a small, real image A. speeds up
B. a large, real image B. slows down
C. a small, virtual image C. stays the same
D. a same sized, virtual image D. none of above

231. The ray of light that reflects from surface B. concave mirror
is called C. convex mirror
A. Refracted ray D. not possible
B. Incident ray
237. If an object is placed at 12 cm from the
C. Reflected ray pole of mirror and F is 6 cm. Calculate the
D. Accident ray size of the image and it’s nature if the mir-
ror is concave
NARAYAN CHANGDER
232. Which is a natural source of light?
A. 6 cm and real, diminished
A. flashlight
B. 12 cm and real, larger than the object
B. cell phone
C. 12 cm and real, same size as the object
C. lightning
D. 6 cm and virtual, erect and same size
D. headlights as the object
233. Magnification produced by a rear view 238. An object which allows light to pass
mirror fitted in vehicles through it clearly is described as:
A. is less than one A. Opaque
B. is more than one B. Translucent
C. is equal to one C. Transparent
D. can be more than or less than one de- D. Reflection
pending upon the position of the object in
front of it. 239. What happens to blue light when it hits
a shirt that appears blue?
234. Law of reflection state that-The angle of
incidence is to the angle of reflection. A. The light is reflected.
A. equal B. The light is absorbed.
B. double C. The light is refracted.
C. half D. The light is blocked.
D. none of above 240. The image formed in a plane mirror is

(Select more than 1)
235. An image that you can see, but does not
really exist is called which of the follow- A. real image
ing? B. the same size as the object
A. Real Image C. bigger than the object
B. Fake Image D. virtual image
C. Virtual Image E. in front of the mirror.
D. Digital Image 241. Light travels through air, water, glass
236. A mirror always forms same size image and many other materials.What path does
irrespective of the position of the object it travel to get from one place to another?
in-front of it, then the mirror is:- A. sideways
A. Plane mirror B. straight

C. back and forth 247. is a copy of the object formed by re-

flected or refracted rays of light
D. up and down

A. reflection
242. Image formed by plane mirror is B. refraction
A. Real and erect C. object
B. Real and inverted D. image
C. Virtual and erect 248. bouncing of a polished surface by a ray
D. Virtual and inverted of light is called
A. reflecton
243. An object of size 5 cm is kept 20cm away
from a concave mirror of focal length 15 B. dispertion
cm . Size of its image shall be C. human eye
A. + 5 cm D. excretion
B. -10 cm 249. Characteristics of the image formed by a
C. -15 cm plane mirror
D. -5 cm A. virtual
B. upright
244. What is the size of the image formed C. same size as the object
when an object is kept at the focus in front
of concave mirror? D. laterally inverted
A. enlarged E. same distance behind the mirror as the

object in the front of it
B. diminished
250. Convex lens focus a real, point sized im-
C. highly enlarged age at focus, the object is placed
D. highly diminished A. At focus
245. What are Non-luminous object? B. Between F and 2F
A. Object that give off light of their own C. At infinity

D. At 2F
B. Object that do not have their own light
C. None of these above 251. Value of Magnification (m) of a mirror is
always + 1, then the mirror is definitely
D. none of above
A. a concave mirror
246. In order for an object to be seen, it must B. a plane mirror
either give off its own light (be a source
C. a convex mirror
of light) or it must reflect light.
A. Spectrum
252. An image that forms where light seems
B. Energy
to come from a point but light rays don’t
C. Visible actually meet is a
D. none of above A. virtual image

B. real image 258. A pin is placed between the focus F and

C. Inverted Image pole P of a concave mirror.Choose the cor-
rect characteristics of the image formed by
D. Pizza the mirror.Choose all answers that apply:
253. What happens to light after it hits a mir- A. The image forms between F and P
ror? B. The image is erect.
A. It goes through the mirror and bend. C. The image is real.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. It goes straight through the mirror. D. The image is diminished in size.
C. It goes around the mirror.
259. An object that produces its own light is
D. It bounces off the mirror.
254. A copy of an object formed by reflected A. luminous

rays of light is called the:
B. non luminous
A. Image
C. artificial
B. Mirror
D. none of above
C. Translucent
260. Light rays bend when they go from air to
D. Transparent
water because of a change in
255. Which device is used in submarines to see A. color
objects above the surface of water?
B. wavelength
A. Kaleidoscope
C. density
B. Stethoscope
D. speed
C. Periscope
261. Which of the following mirror is used by
D. Binoculars
a dentist to examine a small cavity?
256. MCQ 012A ray of light is incident on a A. Convex mirror
plane mirror and the angle of reflection is
B. Plane mirror
50 degrees. What is the angle between
the incident ray and the reflected ray? C. Concave mirror
A. 50 degrees D. Combination of convex and concave
B. 25 degrees mirror
C. 90 degrees 262. Two plane mirrors are placed parallel and

D. 100 degrees facing each other.A light ray incident on
one of the plane mirror at an angle of 45◦
257. When light goes from one mate- after reflection from it strikes the other
rial(medium) to another it becomes bent, mirror.What is the angle between the inci-
what term means bent? dent ray and final reflected ray
A. reflected A. 45◦
B. refracted B. 60◦
C. absorbed C. 90◦
D. turned D. 75◦

263. What relationship exists between the 268. Which color shirt would you rather wear
number of images formed and the angle outside on a sunny 90 degree day?
between two mirrors?

A. black
A. As the Angle between two mirrors de-
B. white
crease, the number of images also de-
crease. C. gray
B. As the Angle between two mirrors de- D. navy blue
crease, the number of images increase.
269. What is the law of reflection?
C. As the Angle between two mirrors in-
crease, the number of images also in- A. Angle of incidence = angle of reflec-
crease. tion
D. none of above B. Angle of incidence < angle of reflec-

tion
264. Which one is the correct answer? C. Angle of incidence > angle of reflec-
A. Incident light perpendicular to the Re- tion
flected ray D. none of above
B. Rough surface is specular reflection
270. What is the formula for Law of Reflection
C. Specular Reflection are scattered in
different directions A. θr = θi
D. Rough surface is like Wavy Water B. A = cos θ

C. θr = θr
265. Which is true of a green grape?
D. θb = θa
A. It absorbs green light.
B. It absorbs white light. 271. A dentist uses a small dental mirror to
help magnify teeth in your mouth. What
C. It reflects green light. type of mirror is this?
D. It reflects white light. A. a convex mirror
266. light travels in what lines B. a concave mirror
A. vertical C. a plane mirror
B. straight D. a plano-convex mirror
C. horizondal 272. MCQ 09When you look at your face in
D. circular a mirror, where does your face appear to
be?
267. The formula to calculate the refractive in-
A. an equal distance behind the mirror to
dex is
what you are in front
A. n=cv
B. a long way behind the surface of the
B. n=v/c mirror
C. n=c/v C. on the surface of the mirror
D. v=nc D. just in front of the mirror

273. what is the angle between the reflected C. 180◦

ray and the normal called as D. none of the above
279. is when a surface directs light beams
B. angle of reflection in many different directions.
C. angle of convergent A. Refraction
D. angle of divergent B. Scattering
274. The name of the straight lines that repre- C. Absorption
NARAYAN CHANGDER
sent light waves on diagrams D. Transmission
A. rays 280. Which of the following best describes the
B. images image formed by a convex mirror when
the object distance from the mirror is less
C. reflection
than the absolute value of the focal length
D. beams (f)?
275. Light travels in lines A. virtual, upright and enlarged
A. wavy B. real, inverted and reduced
B. bent C. virtual, upright and reduced
C. straight D. real, inverted and enlarged
D. backwards 281. What tool is use to reflect the rays of the

torch
276. If ‘R’ is radius of curvature and ‘f’ is fo-
A. comb
cal length of a spherical mirror then the
correct relation between the two is B. headphone
A. R = f C. plane mirror
B. R = f/2 D. car
C. f = 2R 282. The type of refection coming from ‘your

face’ is:
D. f = R/2
A. a clear reflection
277. To get the best reflection from a mirror
B. a specular reflection
you need
C. a diffuse reflection
A. a very shiny surface to reflect lots of
light D. non-existant. Your face does not re-
flect.
B. to stand right in front of it
283. Which of these best demonstrates the re-
C. to shine a bright light on it
flection of light? (5.6C)
D. it to produce light
A. Looking through the glass of a large
278. If the angle of incidence is 45◦ ,
what is window
the angle between the incident ray and the B. Looking at an image formed on a silver
normal? spoon
A. 45◦ C. Looking at a lightbulb that is glowing
B. 90◦ D. Looking at a star on a clear night

284. Angles are always measured from the: 290. which is best reflector iof ight
A. Boundary A. platinum

B. Normal B. silver
C. Incident Ray C. aluminium
D. Reflected Ray D. gold

291. Which of the following is a beneficial re-
285. The image in a plane mirror is always
sult of left-right reversal characteristic of
A. erect but reversed. the image in a plane mirror?
B. erect but not reversed. A. the image is larger than the object
C. inverted and reversed. B. the use of eyeglasses to improve vi-
sion
D. inverted but not reversed.
C. the use of side mirror for driving
286. Three mirrors inclined at an angle of 600 D. the word ambulance written in reverse
is used in a
292. What is light?
A. periscope
A. clear or easy to see through
B. kaleidoscope
B. to put forth or send out
C. solar heater
C. a type of energy that makes things vis-
D. barber’s shop ible
287. Light is a kind of D. a transparent crystal used to separate-
light
A. reflection
B. energy 293. a clear, triangular device made up of plas-
tic or glass that refracts light
C. heat
A. medium
D. matter
B. prism
288. A divergent lens will produce C. lens
A. always real image D. none of above
B. always virtual image 294. A mirror having focal length-15 cm is
C. both real and virtual image A. Plane mirror
D. none of these B. Concave mirror
C. Convex mirror
289. What is the relation between angle of in-
cidence and angle of refraction when light D. None of these
goes from optically rarer to denser 295. Which is transparent?
A. Angle I is equal to angle r A. a wooden fence
B. Angle I is greater than angle r B. clean water
C. Angle I is less than angle r C. aluminum foil
D. No relation between these angles D. a purple balloon

296. The speed of light in vacuum is m/s B. I and III

A. 3 x 106 C. I, III, and IV
B. 3 x 108 D. II and IV
C. 3 x 1010
302. When the Sun is behind you, your shadow
D. 3 x 1012
is
297. When light hits a smooth surface, it is A. behind you
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. bent around corners B. in front of you
B. polarized
C. at the side of you
C. reflected
D. not there
D. refracted
303. Which term is used to refer to an incom-
298. Which term describes when light bounces
ing light ray?
off of a smooth surface?
A. Refracted
A. Refraction
B. Transmission B. Incident
C. Absorption C. Reflected
D. Reflection D. none of above
299. According to laws of reflection, 304. The bouncing of light off an object is
A. angle of incidence > angle of reflec- A. a mirror
tion
B. absorption
B. angle of incidence < angle of reflec-
tion C. reflection
C. angle of incidence = angle of reflec- D. refraction
tion
305. Which of the following would be de-
D. both 1 and 2
scribed as LUMINOUS?
300. Which of the following is an example of A. Earth
the use of convex mirrors?
B. Wind
A. lenses in glasses
C. Fire
B. solar cookers
C. dental mirrors D. Water
D. telescopes 306. When the image of an object is seen in a

plane mirror, the image is
301. Which of the following images can be
formed by a concave mirror? I. real, in- A. real and upright.
verted, and enlargedII. virtual, upright,
B. real and inverted.
and enlargedIII. real, upright, and reduce-
dIV. virtual, inverted, and enlarged C. virtual and upright.
A. I and II D. virtual and inverted.

307. Fill in the blank with the best an- C. Refraction

swer:After light passes through a convex D. Color Reflection
lens the light comes together at a

A. Spot 313. A full length image of a distance tall build-
ing can definitely be seen by using
B. Focal point
A. a concave mirror
C. point
B. a convex mirror
D. Local Point
C. a plane mirror
308. Lens formula is given as
D. both palane and concave mirror
A. 1/v-1/u = 1/f
B. 1/v + 1/u = 1/f 314. An imaginary line that can be drawn per-
pendicular to the surface of the mirror
C. 1/u-1/v = 1/f at the point of incidence where the ray
D. None of these strikes the mirror.
309. The image of an object formed by a plane A. Incident Ray

mirror is: B. Reflected Ray
A. virtual C. Normal Line
B. real D. none of above
C. diminished
315. What are illuminated objects?
D. upside down
A. objects are objects that generate their
310. Which of these statements is true? own light
A. Light travels in straight lines. B. objects that are capable of reflecting
B. Light is stopped when it meets a solid light (but don’t generate it)
object. C. objects that do not reflect any light
C. Light does not travel in straight lines. D. objects that let light pass through them
D. Light will only travel for about 2000km
316. Concave mirrors have surfaces that are
before it stops.
A. curved inwards
311. What happens when light passes from air
into water? B. bulging outwards
A. The light speeds up C. flat
B. The light continues at the same speed D. rectangular

C. The light slows down 317. If an object is placed at infinity where is
D. The light forms a mirage the image formed if the mirror is convex?
A. At C
312. When light reflects off of a completely
smooth surface it reflects in which way? B. At F
A. Regular Reflection C. At P
B. Diffuse Reflection D. between F and C

318. An object which does not allow light to C. light striking a plane mirror
pass through it is described as: D. light passing through a transparent
A. Opaque glass
B. Translucent 324. Which description is NOT applicable to an
C. Transparent image formed by a plane mirror?
D. Reflection A. virtual
B. left-right reversal
NARAYAN CHANGDER
319. When light rays strike a dull or rough sur-
face C. larger than the object
A. they are absorbed D. same orientation as the object
B. they do not form an image 325. Which of these describes how light trav-
C. they are reflected els through an empty space?
D. they are bent A. It travels straight but may change di-
rection to avoid objects.
320. A reflection is when energy B. It changes direction often even if there
A. bounces are no objects.
B. falls C. It comes to a stop after it travels a cer-
C. twists tain distance.
D. bends D. It travels in a straight line without

stopping.
321. How the pond appears to be, when it is
seen from outside? 326. Which of the following is NOT a luminous
object?
A. Seems Deeper
A. Sun & stars
B. Seems shallower
B. The moon
C. Seems very deep
C. Lamp
D. No change is there
D. Candle flame
322. Why do we see objects as white?
327. The two kinds of reflection are
A. They absorb all light
A. transparent and translucent
B. They reflect all light
B. opaque and translucent
C. They absorb some light and reflect C. regular and diffuse
some light
D. none of above
D. they transmit all light
328. Which word means to bend light rays to-
323. Which of the following situations illus- ward each other?
trates a diffuse reflection?
A. Converging light
A. image of a mountain on a calm water
in a lake B. Diverging light
B. sunlight illuminating a a room inside C. Virtual Light

the house D. Real Light

329. When the light passes out of the glass, 334. An object is placed at a distance of
back into the air 10cm from a convex mirror of focal length
15cm.find the position and nature of the

A. It bends away from the normal
image
B. It does not bend
A. v =-6cm, real & inverted
C. It bends towards the normal B. v =-3cm, real & inverted
D. It continues to be the normal C. v = +6cm, virtual & erect
330. Tick all the characteristics true for a real D. v = +15cm, virtual & erect
image 335. A 10 mm long awl pin is placed vertically
A. can be obtained on a screen in front of a concave mirror. A 5 mm long
image of the awl pin is formed at 30 cm
B. inverted with respect to the object
in front of the mirror. The focal length of
C. formed by a concave mirror for a dis- this mirror is
tant object A. 30cm
D. cannot be obtained on a screen B. 20cm
E. formed by the actual intersection of C. 60cm
the reflected rays
D. 40cm
331. How does light travel within the same 336. When an object is kept between two mir-
medium? rors parallel to each other, the number of
A. It curves around corners images formed is
B. Really slow A. 2
C. In a straight line B. 3
C. 4
D. In circles
D. infinite
332. A convex mirror has a focal length 12 cm.
Then its radius of curvature is cm 337. Second law of reflection states that?
A. 24 A. The incident angle, the reflected angle

and the normal all lie in same plane
B. 12
B. The incident ray, the reflected ray and
C. 6 the surface of object all lie in same plane
D. 1.2 C. The incident angle, the incident ray
and the normal all lie in same plane
333. MCQ 010 When light is incident on a pol- D. The incident ray, the reflected ray and
ished surface reflection takes place. the normal all lie in same plane
A. regular
338. ....the angle between the normal and the
B. irregular reflected ray.
C. diffused A. A, Angle of incidence
D. normal B. B. Angle of reflection

C. C. Angle of coincidence 344. Which of the following are the properties

D. D. Angle of direction of a plane mirror image? 1. The image is
the same size as the object.2. The image
339. Why can we sometimes see only parts of is virtual.3. The image is inverted.4. The
the moon? image is laterally inverted.
A. The path of light can only reach half of A. 1
the moon at a time. B. 1, 2 and 4
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. The path of light from Earth to the Sun C. 1, 2 and 3
is blocked. D. 2 and 4
C. The moon is partially eaten by giant
zombie rodents, but it can regrow. 345. Which of the following would not reflect
light?
D. Our brain just wants to make things up
A. Mirror
to confuse us.
B. Water
340. Objects that light can easily pass through
C. Glasses
are said to be:
D. Brick Wall
A. apparent.
B. opaque. 346. Define ‘Normal’
A. light ray striking the reflecting surface
C. oblong.
B. perpendicular drawn to the surface at
D. transparent.
the point of incidence
341. Bouncing of a light ray when it strikes a C. light ray obtained after reflection
reflecting surface is called D. none of above
A. Refraction
347. Light enters the eye through
B. Dispersion
A. cornea
C. Reflection
B. eye lens
D. Diffraction
C. pupil
342. Real images are: D. retina
A. Always inverted 348. Where will the image be formed if the ob-
B. Magnified or Diminished ject is placed at C (concave mirror)
C. can be obtained on screen A. At F
D. all the above B. virtual image
C. At C
343. Laws of reflection hold good for
D. At infinity
A. plane mirror only
349. The phenomenon by which the light
B. concave mirror only
falling on a surface is sent back into the
C. convex mirror only same medium is known as
D. all mirror irrespective of their shape A. polarization

B. reflection A. Plane mirror

C. refraction B. concave mirror

D. absorption C. convex mirror
350. White light can be separated into differ- D. not possible

ent colors by using a 355. The ray of light that strikes a reflecting
A. microscope surface is called
B. prism A. incident ray
C. mirror B. reflected ray
D. convex lens C. normal ray
351. What is the definition of ‘normal’ D. none of the above
A. The Ray of light from the surface that 356. Which of the following are the properties
strikes a given surface of a plane mirror image? 1. The image is
B. The point at which the incident ray the same size as the object.2. The image
strike the surface is virtual.3. The image is inverted.
C. The perpendicular to the surface at the A. 1
point of incidence B. 1 and 2
D. none of above C. 1 and 3
352. When the image of an object is seen in D. 1, 2, and 3
a plane mirror, the distance from the mir-
357. The focal length of a plane mirror is
ror to the image depends on(a) the wave-
length of light used for viewing. (b) the A. infinite
distance from the object to the mirror. (c) B. zero
the distance of both the observer and the
C. 1m
object to the mirror.
D. 100m
A. Only a
B. Only b 358. Objects that generate/emit their own
light are called:
C. Only c
A. luminous objects.
D. Both b and c
B. shiny objects.
353. How many colours does the white light
consist of? C. non-luminous objects.
A. 5 D. reflective objects.
B. 6 359. Which object allows you to see your re-

C. 7 flection?
D. 8 A. rock
B. mirror
354. A mirror always form diminished image
irrespective of the position of the object C. paper
in-front of it, then the mirror is:- D. none of above

360. Through what kind of matter does light 366. the angle between the normal and the
move fastest? reflected ray.
A. liquids A. Angle of incidence
B. air
B. Angle of reflection
C. matter that is lighter in color
C. Angle of coincidence
D. matter that is in larger objects
D. Angle of direction
361. When light cannot pass through an object,
NARAYAN CHANGDER
we say that that object is 367. The Angle between the incident ray and
A. opaque the normal line is known as the
B. transparent A. angle of incidence
C. translucent B. angle of reflection
D. translated
C. normal line
362. A ray of light is incident normally on a
D. none of above
plane mirror. The angle of reflection will
be
368. What does the F on a ray diagram repre-
A. 0◦ sent?
B. 90◦
A. The focal point
C. Will not be reflected
B. The location of the virtual image
D. can not be determined
C. The location of the objecthe location of
363. We can see objects because of the object
A. reflection
D. The centre of the mirror
B. refraction
C. transmission 369. How does light travel
D. diffraction A. It curves around corners
364. It is the bouncing off of light rays when B. Really slow
it hits smooth or rough surfaces like plane
C. In a straight line
mirrors, paper, concrete walls, etc.
A. Reflection D. In circles
B. Refraction
370. THINK FAST!
C. Dispersion
A. Specular Reflection = Diffuse Reflec-
D. Diffraction tion
365. Convex Mirrors produce B. Specular Reflection almost equal to
A. only virtual images Diffuse Reflection
B. virtual or real images C. Specular Reflection ̸= Diffuse Reflec-
C. only real images tion
D. inverted images D. none of above

371. If a man wishes to use a plane mirror on 376. A student who is standing 0.5 meters
a wall to view both his head and his feet from a plane mirror moves at a velocity
as he stands in front of the mirror, the re- of 0.75 meters per second for 3 seconds

quired length of the mirror away from the mirror. How much further
is the student from her image than when
A. is equal to the height of the man.
she first started moving?
B. is equal to one half the height of the
A. 5 meters
man.
1
B. 3 4 meters
C. is equal to double the height of the
1
man. C. 2 4 meters
1
D. depends on the distance the man D. 4 2 meters
stands from the mirror. 377. Which mirror is used as a make-up mir-
ror?
372. If the angle of incidence is 45o, what is
the angle of reflection? A. Convex mirror
A. 45o B. plane mirror
C. concave mirror
B. 90o
D. plano-concave
C. 180o
D. none of the above 378. The Law of reflection states that “The an-
gle of incidence is the angle of reflec-
373. For a real object, which of the following tion”.
can produce a real image? A. equal to
A. Plane mirror B. double
B. concave mirror C. half
C. Concave lens D. a lot like
D. Convex mirror 379. In which of the following, the image of
an object placed at infinity will be highly
374. This is a reflection of light on rough sur- diminished and point sized?
faces such as clothing, paper, wavy water,
A. concave mirror only
and the asphalt roadway.
B. convex mirror only
A. Regular
C. convex lens
B. Specular
D. concave mirror, convex mirror, con-
C. Irregular or Diffused cave lens and convex lens.
D. none of above 380. An object is kept 30cm away from the
pole of a mirror. Its inverted image at the
375. Focal length of plane mirror is
same position as that of object then it is
A. At infinity A. a concave mirror of focal length 15 cm
B. Zero B. a convex mirror of focal length 15 cm
C. Negative C. a plane mirror
D. None of these D. a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm

1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 38
381. If an object is placed between F and C A. 2 meters

where is the image formed if the mirror B. 4 meters
is concave?
C. 5 meters
A. At C
D. 10 meters
B. beyond C
C. between F and P 385. The two types of spherical mirrors are
D. between F and C
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. flat and plane
382. MCQ 07The phenomenon by which the in-
cident light falling on a surface is sent back B. concave and plane
into the same medium is known as C. convex and concave
A. polarization D. plane and rectangular
B. reflection
386. What is the angle of reflection?
C. refraction
A. The angle formed between the normal
D. absorption and the surface.
383. If an object is placed 21 cm from a con- B. The and formed between the incident
verging lens, the image formed is slightly ray and the normal.
smaller than the object. If the object is C. The angle formed between the inci-
placed at a distance of 19 cm from the lens, dent ray and the reflected ray.
the image formed is slightly larger than
the object. The approximate focal length D. The angle between the normal and the
of the lens is: reflected ray.
A. 20 cm 387. Which position of the object will produce
B. 18 cm a magnified virtual image, if a concave mir-
ror of focal length 15 cm is being used?
C. 10 cm
A. 10 cm
D. 5 cm
B. 20 cm
384. A 5 feet tall student stands two meters
in front of a plane mirror. How far is the C. 30 cm
image from the student? D. 35 cm
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications

1. Which mirror concept explains why the to the normal. What is the angle between
word AMBULANCE is written in reverse in the incident and reflected beams?
an ambulance car?
A. 13.5◦
A. Multiple image
B. 27◦
B. Lateral inversion
C. 54◦
C. Virtual image and real image
D. All of the above D. 41.5◦
2. A beam of light strikes a mirror at a 27◦ 3. a real image is

A. produced by virtual rays and can be D. none of above

projected on a screen
8. ) Banks, groceries, department store and

B. produced by real rays and CANNOT be
ATM’s uses mirrors because it gives a
projected on a screen
wide area of view thus shoplifters and rob-
C. produced by virtual images and CAN- beries should be avoided.
NOT be projected on a screen
A. Concave Mirrors
D. produced by real rays and can be pro-
B. Convex Mirrors
jected on a screen
C. Plane Mirrors
4. When an object is placed between the focal
point and the optical centre of the convex D. none of above
lens, the image produced is 9. What kind of mirror is used in automobiles
A. real, diminished, and inverted and trucks to give the driver a wider area
B. real, enlarged, and inverted and smaller image of traffic behind him?
C. virtual, enlarged, and erect A. plane mirror
D. virtual, diminished and erect B. convex mirror
C. concave mirror
5. A converging lens is also known as a
lens. D. none of the above
A. convex 10. Where is the angle of incidence located?
B. concave A. Between the mirror and the incident
C. double ray
D. refracted B. Between the mirror and the reflected
ray
6. What is the main function of your lens and
cornea? C. Between the normal line and incident
ray
A. They transmit images from your eyes
to your brain. D. Between the normal line and reflected
ray
B. They focus light onto the backs of your
eyes. 11. A flat mirror is an example of a
C. They resolve random colors and A. plane mirror
shapes into images.
B. concave mirror
D. They allow you to see objects in three
dimensions instead of two. C. convex mirror
D. spherical mirror
7. ) Dentists mirror, eyeglasses, telescopes,
cameras and make-up mirrors useful and 12. Why does light refract when it encounters
helpful optical instruments in our daily the glass in a lens?
lives that uses mirror.
A. because it speeds up, which causes it
A. Concave Mirrors to bend
B. Convex Mirrors B. because it slows down, which causes
C. Plane Mirrors it to bend

C. because it hits a dense medium, which 18. All rays that are parallel to the principle
causes it to bounce off axis in a concave mirror reflects
D. because it gets absorbed, which A. Towards the focal point
causes it to lessen in intensity B. Away from the focal point
13. An object is situated between a concave C. Towards the center of curvature
mirror’s surface and its focal point. The D. Away from the center of curvature
image formed in this case is
19. Which describes a concave lens?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. real and inverted.
A. more transparent in the middle
B. real and erect.
B. thinner in the middle than on the edges
C. virtual and erect.
C. thinner on the edges than in the middle
D. virtual and inverted
D. triangular in shape
14. What type of image is produced by a flat
mirror? 20. Which of the following optical instruments
will be used to produce a reduced and in-
A. Real and upright verted image of a distant object?
B. Real and inverted A. camera
C. Virtual and upright B. projector
D. Virtual and inverted C. microscope
15. Which term describes lenses that are thin- D. refracting telescope
ner at the edges than at the center?
21. Which of the following uses concave lens?
A. converging lenses A. Magnifying glasses
B. diverging lenses B. Person with hyperopia
C. concave lenses C. Nearsighted corrective eyeglasses
D. none of above D. All of the above
16. The image you see in a plane mirror is 22. Which type of mirror has a surface that
called a image because it is not a real, curves inward?
physical object.
A. convex mirror
A. imaginary
B. concave mirror
B. physical
C. plane mirror
C. reflected
D. none of above
D. virtual
23. What is the position of the image when an
17. In a spherical concave mirror, light that is object is placed between the centre of cur-
parallel to the optical axis will be reflected vature and the focus of a concave mirror?
A. At the focus
A. parallel to the optical axis B. At the centre of curvature
B. through the center of curvature C. Beyond the centre of curvature
C. through the focal point D. Between the focus and the centre of
D. back to the origin curvature

24. Vehicle’s side mirrors are B. Reflected ray

A. plane mirror C. Normal line

B. concave mirror D. Source ray
C. convex mirror 30. occurs when light hits an irregular sur-
D. None of the above face.
25. ) Which of the following is NOT an optical A. diffuse reflection

instruments that converges light towards B. regular reflection
the inner side of a curved mirror giving a C. no reflection
focus point of an object
D. none of above
A. Eye glasses
31. Where would an object be placed to get an
B. Shaving mirror
image at the centre of the curvature of a
C. Opthalmoscope concave mirror?
D. Rear View Mirror A. At the Focus point (F)
26. if the object is beyond C (2F) B. Very far away
A. image is real, smaller and upright C. At the Centre of Curvature (C)
B. image is real, smaller and upside down D. Between F and C
C. image is virtual, smaller and upside 32. How much larger will your classroom seem
down to appear if the entire two adjacent walls
D. image is real, bigger and upright of your classroom consist of plane mir-
rors?
27. Where is the image located if an object is
A. 2x larger
30 cm in front of convex mirror with a fo-
cal length of 20 cm? B. 3x larger
A. between F and V C. 4x larger
B. between C and F D. can’t be determined
C. in front of the mirror 33. If a person is nearsighted what devices can
D. can’t be determined correct his/her eye defects?
A. convex lens
28. An object is placed 10 m from a convex
mirror. The image formed is 5 m behind B. concave lens
the mirror. What is the focal length? C. concave mirror
A. -5 cm D. convex mirror
B. 5 cm 34. The mirror which forms virtual, up-right
C. 10 cm and magnified image is
D. -10cm A. Converging Mirror
29. A light ray that bounces off of the mirror B. Convex Mirror
is known as C. Plane Mirror
A. Incident ray D. Diverging Mirror

35. If a candle is placed at 2f in front of a con- 40. If the object is beyond C (2F)
verging lens, the image A. image is real, smaller and inverted
A. will appear at f on the opposite side of B. image is real, smaller and upright
the lens
C. image is virtual, smaller and inverted
B. the image will appear at 2f on the op-
posite side of the lens D. image is real, bigger and upright
C. the image will appear between f and 2f 41. Why does your eye have a convex lens in
NARAYAN CHANGDER
on the opposite side of the lens it?
D. the image will not appear A. To make light spread out on the retina
36. If you wish to have a magnified image of B. To make light focus on the retina
your face for applying makeup or shaving, C. To collect all the possible light
the mirror you will use must be:
D. To create a larger upright real images
A. Convex mirror
42. How much does a flat mirror magnify an
B. Concave mirror
image?
C. Plane mirror
A. 1x
D. any of these
B. 2x
37. A Shiny spoon can create C. 3x
A. erect image D. 4x
B. inverted image 43. What Does a Concave Lens Do?
C. both erect and inverted images A. Make things bigger
D. neither inverted nor erect image B. Make things smaller
38. An object is placed on the focal point in C. Make things closer
front of a convex lens. What image is pro- D. Make things happy
duced?
A. virtual, reduced, inverted 44. What does the word “diverging” mean?
B. real, enlarged, inverted A. to spread apart
C. virtual, enlarged, inverted B. to come together
D. No image C. parallel
D. perpendicular
39. In ray diagrams for spherical mirrors,
which term refers to the distance between 45. What is the focal length of a convex mirror
the mirror and the focal point? that has a radius of curvature of 64cm?
A. focal length A. -32cm
B. principal axis B. 32cm
C. radius of curvature C. 128cm
D. vertex D. 8cm

46. plane mirror image size 51. Which of the following is NOT a use of a
A. same concave mirror?

B. smaller A. car lights
C. bigger B. torches
D. none of above C. security mirrors
47. If the angle of incidence is 60 degrees from D. mirrors used by dentist
the normal line, what is the angle of re-
flection and the total angle between the 52. What is the radius of curvature of a con-
incident and reflected ray? cave mirror with a focal length 22cm
A. Angle of reflection = 30Total angle = A. 12cm
90
B. 44cm
B. Angle of reflection = 60Total angle =
90 C. 11cm
C. Angle of reflection = 30Total angle = D. 34.5cm
120
D. Angle of reflection = 60Total angle = 53. A real image having a size of 10 cm is
120 formed by a concave mirror. The size of
the object is 5 cm. The magnification of
48. What kind of mirror is used by department the object is
stores to give a wider area and smaller im-
age of the shoppers? A. -5
A. Plane mirror B. 5
B. Convex mirror C. 2
C. Concave mirror D. -2
D. None of the above
54. Which lens is used to magnify objects and
49. When light travels through a lens and the refract light? This type of lens is curved
image produced from the lens cannot be outward.
projected onto the screen, which type of
image is produced? A. concave lens
A. real B. convex lens
B. refracted C. parabolic lens
C. virtual D. plane lens
D. inverted
55. The focal length is equal to the:
50. a mirror with a surface that curves inward
like the inside of a bowl A. Curve of Curvature
A. concave mirror B. double the Curve of Curvature
B. convex mirror C. half the Curve of Curvature
C. plane mirror D. point where all the lines meet that run
D. flat mirror perpendicular from the mirror

56. Makeup and tweezer mirrors use which 62. As an object moves towards a flat mirror,
type of mirror? its image
A. Concave A. moves closer to the mirror
B. Diverging B. moves further from the mirror
C. Convex
C. flips upside down
D. Refracting
D. none of above
57. occurs when light hits a smooth sur-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
face. 63. Which of the mirrors is used as rear view
A. diffuse reflection mirror in vehicles?
B. regular reflection A. Concave
C. no reflection B. Convex
D. none of above C. Plane
58. What kind of mirror is used by dentists in D. none of above
examining tooth cavities?
A. Plane mirror 64. An object is placed at a distance of 27.0
cm away from a thin convex mirror with a
B. Concave mirror
focal length of 9.00 cm. How far from the
C. Convex mirror mirror is the image located and what type
D. None of the above of image is formed?
59. Laser surgery: A. 13.5 cm and real

A. changes the shape of your cornea B. 6.7 cm and real
B. changes the distance between your C. 13.5 cm and virtual
cornea and retina
D. 6.7 cm and virtual
C. changes the size of your lens
D. places an invisible lens in front of your 65. A white sheet of paper cannot act as mir-
eye ror because it the rays of light.
60. Which of the following letters will look the A. diffracts

same in the mirror? B. diffuses
A. A C. interferes
B. B
D. refract
C. C
D. D 66. Refraction occurs when
61. convex mirrors are A. the wave’s speed changes by entering

a new medium
A. plane mirrors
B. converging mirrors B. a wave bounces off of a boundary
C. diverging mirrors C. waves parts meet each other

D. smaller than concave mirrors D. waves bend around a barrier

67. a flat sheet of glass that has a smooth, C. parallel

silver-colored coating on one side D. perpendicular

A. plane mirror
73. The focal length is one-half the distance
B. concave mirror from the vertex to the
C. convex mirror A. center of curvature
D. solid mirror
B. principal axis
68. If an object is placed at f in front of a con- C. radius of curvature
cave mirror
A. the image forms at f
74. What is the name of the perpendicular line
B. the image forms at 2f
that we use to measure angles?
C. the image forms at 3f
A. Incident ray
D. no image forms
B. Reflected ray
69. A material or substance that a matter C. Normal line
wave travels through is
D. Source ray
A. a block
75. The point at which rays parallel to the op-
B. a wall
tical axis meet is called the
C. a medium
A. focal point
D. an electromagnetic spectrum
B. virtual point
70. A light ray that goes into the mirror is C. real point
known as
D. optic point
A. Incident ray
B. Reflected ray 76. Which of the following is true of a concave
mirror?
C. Normal line
A. It will never form a real image.
D. Source ray
B. An inverted image will be formed if the
71. A light ray, travelling parallel to a concave object distance is greater than the focal
lens’ axis and strikes the lens, will refract length.
and C. An object can be magnified if placed at
A. pass through the lens’ focal point F.
B. travel parallel to the principal axis D. none of above
C. continue to travel in the same direction 77. A reflecting globe is 35.0 cm in diameter.
D. travel at right angles to the principal What is the focal length of the globe?
axis A. 70.0cm
72. What does the word “converging” mean? B. 35.0cm
A. to separate C. 17.5cm
B. to come together D. 8.75cm

78. The point in the middle way between a 83. Which of the following is a diverging
curved mirror and the center of curvature lens?
is the
A. concave lens
A. principle point
B. convex lens
B. focal point
C. parabolic lens
C. center of curvature
D. principle axis D. plane lens
NARAYAN CHANGDER
79. Which of the following statements is true 84. The 2 reflected rays that meet.
of near sighted people?
A. ray of incident
A. their retinas are slightly misshapen
B. reflected image is produced
B. they have trouble seeing nearby ob-
jects C. focal point
C. their vision problems can be corrected D. image is not produced
with convex lenses
D. the lenses of their eyes focus light in 85. Where should the object be placed in front
front of their retinas of a concave mirror to form a virtual and
magnified image?
80. The center of curvature is denoted by let-
ter A. at the focus
A. c B. at the center of curvature

B. C C. between the focus and the vertex
C. o D. between the center of curvature and
D. O focus
81. What could the manager of a store hang 86. Which of the following applications is not
on the wall in order to see a wider image an application of total internal reflection of
of his store and his customers? light?
A. a convex mirror A. Brilliance of diamond
B. a concave mirror
B. Formation of rainbow
C. a plane mirror
C. Working of optical fiber
D. a spherical mirror
D. Working of stethoscope
82. a real image
A. is produced by virtual rays and can be 87. An object is placed BETWEEN the focal
projected on a screen point and a convex lens. What image is
B. is produced by real rays and cannot be produced?
projected on a screen A. real, reduced, and inverted
C. is produced by virtual images and can- B. real, enlarged, and upright
not be projected on a screen
C. virtual, enlarged, and upright
D. is produced by real rays and can be
projected on a screen D. No image

88. The reflection by the rough surfaces that D. The cars look farther away then they
tend to reflect light in all directions is appear.
called

93. What do we call light rays that are drawn
A. diffuse reflection
behind a mirror
B. glossy reflection
A. Real
C. regular reflection
B. Virtual
D. specular reflection
C. Made up
89. An incident ray that is parallel to the prin-
cipal axis D. Does not exist
A. will reflect parallel to the principal axis 94. If you wish to get enlarged image of any
B. will refract through the focal point object, which mirror will u select?
C. will reflect through the center of cur- A. Convex mirror
vature B. Plane mirror
D. will continue along the same path
C. None of these
through the lens
D. Concave mirror
90. What type of mirror do dentists usu-
ally use to see clearly the images of our 95. If the angle of incidence between the inci-
teeth? dent ray and the normal line is 25 degrees,
A. plane mirror what is the angle of reflection?
B. convex mirror A. 65 degrees
C. concave mirror B. 45 degrees
D. none of the above C. 35 degrees
91. Which type of mirror converges light D. 25 degrees
rays?
96. In a concave mirror, if an incident ray
A. concave passes through F and hits the mirror then
B. convex it will reflect
C. plane A. Towards C
D. none of above B. Towards F
92. Passenger side view mirrors say “objects C. Parallel
in the mirror are closer than they appear.”
D. Away from the mirror
How can this be a safety concern when
driving a car? 97. If the object is between f and the mirror,
A. The cars behind you look like they are the image is
in the wrong lane. A. image is real, smaller, and inverted
B. The cars look bigger than they really
B. image is virtual, larger, and upright
are
C. image is virtual, smaller, and inverted
C. The cars look closer than they really
are. D. image is real, bigger, and inverted

98. Spherical mirrors are part of a A. again travels parallel to the mirror’s
A. Rectangle axis.
B. Cube B. travels at right angles to the mirror’s

axis.
C. Sphere
C. passes through the mirror’s center of
D. Biryani
curvature.
99. The image of an object is placed one meter D. passes through the mirror’s focal
NARAYAN CHANGDER
in front of a plane mirror. Where will the point.
image be and what will it look like?
A. behind the mirror and reversed 104. What kind of image is formed by concave
lenses?
B. behind the mirror and upright
A. always real
C. in front of the mirror and reversed
B. always virtual
D. in front of the mirror and upright
C. could be real or virtual; depend on the
100. When does the angle of refraction in- distance of the object from the focal point
crease?
D. could be real or virtual, but always real
A. when a wave’s speed increases when the object is placed at the focal point
B. when a wave’s speed decreases
105. An object is located 15 m from a converg-
C. when a wave’s speed is constant
ing lens with focal length 10 m.If the ob-
D. when a light wave stops ject is 2 cm tall, find the image height if
the image is located at 30 m.
101. Your vehicle has a side view mirror in
which we get smaller, virtual and erect im- A. 4 m
ages for all positions, what may be the B. -4m
type of mirror?
C. 1m
A. Concave
D. -1m
B. Convex
C. None of these 106. focal length =
D. Plane mirror A. radius of curvature
102. Diffuse Reflection is produced by sur- B. diameter of curvature

faces that tend to reflect light in all direc- C. half the radius of curvature
tions.
D. half the diameter of curvature
A. rough
B. semi rough 107. Which type of mirror is on the side of a
car?
C. semi smooth
A. concave mirror
D. smooth
B. convex mirror
103. A light ray, traveling parallel to a con-
C. flat mirror
cave mirror’s principal axis, strikes the
mirror’s surface. After reflection, this ray D. lens

108. If your vision problems can be corrected 113. An object is placed at a certain distance
by a convex lens, you: from a convex mirror. What is the possi-
ble magnification of the image of this ob-

A. have trouble seeing nearby objects
ject?
B. have trouble seeing far away objects
A. +0.7
C. have trouble telling whether objects
are close up or far away B. + 1.2
D. have blind spots at the edges of your C. -1.6
vision
D. -0.4
109. this type of mirror is used in supermar-
kets to see around bends 114. A real image has a size of 10 cm, formed
by a concave mirror. The actual size of the
A. concave object is 5 cm.What is the magnification of
B. convex the object?
C. plane A. -5
D. window B. 5
110. Which of the following correctly de- C. 2
scribes the image characteristics formed in
D. -2
plane mirrors?
A. virtual, upright, diminished 115. What type of image is formed when light
B. virtual, upright, same size rays meet?
C. real, inverted, diminished A. virtual image
D. real, upright, same size B. real image
111. An incident light ray strikes a flat mirror C. no image

at an angle of 30◦ from the normal. The D. none of above
reflected light ray reflects off the mirror
A. at an angle of 30◦ from the mirror edge 116. A real image is always
B. at an angle of 60◦ from the normal A. erect

C. at an angle of 30◦ from the normal B. upright
D. at an angle of 90◦ from the mirror edge C. inverted
112. What does The law of reflection state? D. none of above

A. the angle the incident ray makes with 117. You see the reflection of the clock without
a line drawn perpendicular to the surface numbers in your plane mirror. The image
of the mirror. formed by the hands of the clock shows
B. shows how rays change direction the time of 3:30. What is the real time?
when they strike mirrors and pass through A. 3:30
lenses.
B. 8:30
C. The angle of reflection is equal to the
angle of incidence. C. 9:30
D. none of above D. 10:30

118. ) Which of the following optical instru- B. behind the mirror.

ments diverges light when it hits the outer C. in front of the mirror and reversed, left
side of the curve mirror? to right.
A. Telescope D. in front of the mirror.
B. Camera
124. Identify the mirror which forms always a
C. Microscope virtual and diminished image.
D. Headlights A. Concave mirror
NARAYAN CHANGDER
119. Which of the following devices applies B. Convex mirror
the properties of reflection? C. Converging mirror
A. magnifying glass D. Plane mirror
B. periscope
125. Virtual images are
C. telescope
A. always upright
D. binoculars
B. can be obtained on screen
120. What is it called when light travels C. always smaller
through a material and bends?
D. none of above
A. Diffraction
126. A converging lens has a focal length of
B. Reflecting
30 cm. A 5 cm tall candle is placed at a
C. Refraction distance of 10 cm in front of the lens. De-
D. none of above termine the image distance.
A. -45 cm
121. ) Which type of mirror reflects the inner
side of the curved mirror? B. -30 cm
A. Plane Mirror C. -15 cm
B. Concave Mirror D. 6 cm
C. Convex Mirror 127. When an object is placed between the fo-
D. none of above cal point and the convex lens, the image
produced is
122. The focal length is denoted by the letter A. real, reduced, and inverted
B. real, enlarged, and inverted
A. f
C. virtual, enlarged, and upright
B. F
D. virtual, reduced, and upright
C. P
D. p 128. The distance between the focal point and
the mirror is
123. The image of an object, which is placed A. raduis
one foot in front of a plane mirror, will be
B. diameter
A. behind the mirror and reversed, left to C. focal point

right. D. focal length

129. Which mirror forms always a virtual im- 135. Image behind the mirror is
age and same size as an object?
A. virtual

A. Concave mirror
B. real
B. Convex mirror
C. Converging mirror C. upside down
D. Plane mirror D. upright
130. Concave mirror 136. Why is light refracted?

A. bulges out toward the light source
A. Light speeds up
B. curves towards the center
B. Light slows down
C. diverge light ray
D. creates smaller image of an object C. Light speed stays the same
D. Light can either slow down or speed up
131. Concave mirrors will produce
A. Real, erect images 137. The line that passes through the center of
B. Virtual, inverted images a curved mirror is called
C. Real, inverted images A. focal point
D. no images form B. center of curvature
132. Farsightedness is corrected by a: C. principle axis
A. convex mirror
D. light ray
B. convex lens
C. concave mirror 138. You see the reflection of analog type of
clock without numbers in your plane mir-
D. Concave lens
rors. The image formed by the hands of
133. The image formed by a concave mirror the clock shows the time of 10:00. What
will is the real time?
A. always be real A. 2:00
B. always be virtual B. 1:00
C. be either real or virtual
C. 7:00
D. will always be magnified
D. Still 10:00
134. How to you decide that a mirror is con-
cave or convex without touching it? 139. The distance from the focal point to the
A. By observing the surface vertex is called
B. By keeping them in sunlight so that sur- A. center of curvature
faces can be clearly seen
B. focal length
C. By keeping them in front of your face
and observing the kind of image we obtain C. focal point
D. By moving mirrors here and there D. vertex

140. What is the difference between a lens 145. A photocopy “Xerox” machine produces
and a mirror? an image that is of equal size as the ob-
A. A mirror reflects light and light passes ject. Considering the location of an object
through lenses in a convex lens, where is the object lo-
cated or placed to produce an image that
B. A mirror refracts light and light passes is of equal size to the object?
through lenses
A. at F’
C. A lens has no focal point
B. at 2F’
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. A lens reflects light and light passes
through mirrors C. between F’ and V
141. A light ray, travelling parallel to a con- D. between 2F’ and F’

cave mirror’s axis, strikes the mirror’s sur-
face. The reflected ray 146. optical instrument that use concept of re-
flection
A. passes through the mirror’s focal point
A. kaleidoscope
B. again travels parallel to the mirror’s
axis B. periscope
C. travels at right angles to the mirror’s C. candle
axis
D. torch light
D. passes through the mirror’s center of
curvature 147. A virtual image is formed when rays of
light intersect
142. convex mirror image size
A. True
A. same
B. False
B. bigger
C. smaller C. Sometimes
D. none of above D. none of above
143. an image that forms where light seems 148. Which describes a convex lens?
to come from A. triangular in shape
A. virtual image
B. more transparent in the middle
B. real image
C. thicker on the edges than in the middle
C. diffuse reflection
D. thicker in the middle than on the edges
D. regular reflection
149. ) Street lights used reflector because it di-
144. An object is placed between a concave
verges rays of light over large area. What
mirror and its focal point. What is the type
type of mirror is street light?
and orientation of the image formed?
A. virtual and inverted A. Concave Mirror
B. real and inverted B. Plane Mirror

C. virtual and erect C. Convex Mirror
D. real and erect D. none of above

150. A candle is placed on the principal axis of 155. An image behind the mirror is
a convex lens at a distance of 30 cm from A. virtual
the lens. The focal length of the lens is 10

cm. The image formed will be B. real
A. Real, inverted, and reduced C. inverted
B. Real, inverted, and enlarged D. upright
C. Real, upright, and enlarged 156. When a small object is placed on the prin-
cipal axis of a concave mirror between the
D. Virtual, upright, and enlarged
focus and the mirror, the image formed is
151. ) What characteristic or property of light
that determines mirror in their use in opti- A. erect, magnified, and virtual
cal instruments such as cameras and binoc- B. inverted, magnified, and real
ular
C. inverted, reduced, and real
A. Reflection
D. erect, reduced, and real
B. Refraction
157. What type of images is formed by the
C. Size
concave side of the spoon when the object
D. Location is arm-length away from it?
A. Upright and bigger
152. To correct nearsightedness, a person is
prescribed with what of lenses? B. Upside down and bigger
A. Converging lens C. Upright and smaller
B. Diverging lens D. Upside down and smaller
C. Focusing lens 158. A flat mirror is also known as a

D. None of the above A. plane mirror
B. concave mirror
153. An image that forms when light rays ac-
tually meet C. convex mirror
A. virtual image D. spherical mirror
B. real image 159. Images in a kaleidoscope are example of

a
C. diffuse reflection
A. multiple image
D. regular reflection
B. convex mirror
154. Seeing your face in a mirror is an exam- C. concave mirror
ple of
D. lateral inversion
A. Refraction
160. If you stand in front of a concave mirror,
B. Fiber Optics
exactly at its focal point,
C. Reflection
A. you won’t see your image because it is
D. Absorption formed at infinity

B. you won’t see your image because it’s B. used by a dentist to seethe patient’s
focused at a different distance. teeth so that the image formedlooks big-
C. you will see your image, and you will ger and closer.
appear smaller. C. helps tomagnify the image to makeit
D. you will see your image and you will ap- easier for someone toapply make up.
pear larger. D. canhelp a shopkeeper to see every cor-
nerof the supermarket to prevent theft.
161. What is the distance between the focal
NARAYAN CHANGDER
point and the mirror called? 166. A convex lens has a focal length of f. If
the object is placed at 2f, what distance
A. Herbert
will the image appear?
B. diameter of radius
A. 2f
C. curvature point
B. f
D. focal length C. between f and 2f
162. Which of the following statement is TRUE D. it will not appear
about virtual image?
167. is when light travels through a mate-
A. virtual image seems to appear behind rial and bends.
the mirror and is upside down
A. Diffraction
B. virtual image seems to appear behind
B. Dispersion
the mirror and is seen in an upright posi-
tion. C. Mirage
C. virtual image formed after the light D. Refraction
rarys are reflected from the mirror
168. The side view mirrors on your car help
D. All of the above shrink the image on both sides of the car,
allowing you to see a larger field of view.
163. What word means to bend light rays
What type of mirror is this?
away from each other?
A. a convex mirror
A. Converging light
B. a concave mirror
B. Diverging light
C. a convex lens
C. Virtual Light
D. a concave lens
D. Real Light
169. If the object is between f and the concave
164. the imaginary line perpendicular to mirror, the image is
the surface.
A. image is real, smaller, and inverted
A. Normal
B. image is virtual, larger, and upright
B. Angle of incidence
C. image is virtual, smaller, and inverted
C. Angle of reflection
D. image is real, bigger, and inverted
D. none of above
170. What type of mirror can be used to mag-
165. the usage of plane mirror nify a small object?
A. makes a livingroom look spacious. A. a convex mirror

B. a concave mirror 176. What happens to the lens of your eye as

C. a flat mirror you age?

D. a spherical mirror A. It gets smaller
171. Convex lenses can produce B. It bulges outward
A. Real, erect images C. It becomes elastic
B. Virtual, inverted images
D. It becomes harder and thicker
C. Real, inverted images
D. no images form 177. A student is 2.50m away from a convex
mirror while her image is 1.80m from the
172. Which of the following tells the differ- mirror, what is the focal length?
ence between lenses and mirrors?
A. Lenses refract light, mirrors reflect A. 1.05m
light. B. 2.50m
B. Lenses make object appear larger, C. 6.42 m
while mirrors give exact copy of object.
C. Lenses reflect light, mirrors refract D. 0.72m
light.
178. Looking through a concave lens, arm-
D. Lenses produce virtual image; mirrors
length away can make object appear
make real image.
A. smaller and upright
173. This optical instrument uses two convex
lenses to make a smaller object larger. B. smaller and upright down
A. camera C. larger and upright
B. microscope
D. larger and upside down
C. oscilloscope
D. telescope 179. If the object is between C and f, the im-
age is
174. An object is placed 10 cm from a concave
mirror. Its image is formed 5 cm in front of A. image is real, smaller, and inverted
the mirror. The magnification of the given
B. image is real, smaller, and upright
concave mirror is
A. -0.5 C. image is virtual, smaller, and inverted
B. 0.5 D. image is real, bigger, and inverted
C. 2
180. Which of the following bends light in-
D. -2
ward?
175. image above the principal axis (PA) is
A. convex lens
A. virtual
B. concave lens
B. real
C. upright C. plane mirror
D. upside down D. spherical mirror

181. Eyeglasses bend light to help the image 186. Virtual Images are
form properly on the retina. The bending
A. Always erect
of light as it passes from one medium to
another is called B. can be obtained on screen
A. diffraction C. magnified or diminished
B. interference D. all the above
C. reflection
187. When an object is placed on the focal
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. refraction point in front of a convex lens, the image
182. Which of the following parts of the produced is
eyes function like the aperture and iris di- A. real, reduced, and inverted
aphragm of a camera?
B. real, enlarged, and inverted
A. eyelid and cornea
C. real, true, and inverted
B. pupil and eyelid
D. There is no image
C. retina and cornea
D. pupil and iris 188. The sun’s rays are observed to focus at
a point behind a lens. What kind of lens
183. Where is the angle of reflection located? was used?
A. Between the mirror and the incident A. converging lens
ray
B. diverging lens
B. Between the mirror and the reflected
ray C. focusing lens
C. Between the normal line and incident D. none of the above
ray
D. Between the normal line and reflected 189. Telescopes mainly use which type of
ray lens?
A. Converging
184. What Does a Convex Lens Do?
B. Diverging
A. Make things bigger
B. Make things smaller C. Concave
C. Make things closer D. Reflecting

D. Make things sader 190. You are standing 5.0m in front of a mir-
ror and your dog is standing 3.0m in front
185. An object is placed 10 cm from a convex
of you. What distance should you focus
mirror. Its image is formed 5 cm behind
your camera to take a photo of your sister
the mirror. The focal length of the given
in the mirror?
convex mirror is
A. -5 A. 7.5 m
B. 5 B. 8.0 m
C. -10 C. 7.0 m
D. 10 D. 5.0 m

1.3 Spherical mirrors 57
191. Sara is using a magnifying glass to 194. How fast does the distance between
closely examine her stamp collection. yourself and your mirror image decrease
Which type of lens is found in a magnifying if you walk directly toward the mirror at

glass. 3.5 m/s?
A. bifocal A. -3.5 m/s
B. concave B. 3.5 m/s
C. convex C. 7.0 m/s
D. prismatic D. -7.0 m/s
192. Outwardly curved mirror is 195. An image that points below the principal
A. Plane mirror axis is (choose 2)
B. None of these A. virtual
C. Concave mirror B. real
D. Convex mirror C. upright

D. inverted
193. A spherical mirror with reflecting surface
curved inwards is called 196. The image seen in a plane mirror is
A. concave mirror A. real and inverted
B. convex mirror B. real and upright
C. curved mirror C. virtual and inverted
D. none of the above D. virtual and upright
1.3 Spherical mirrors

1. In a concave mirror, which side is pol- between the object and the image formed
ished? by the mirror will be
A. Outer side A. 2m
B. Inner side B. 1 m
C. No side
C. 0.5 m
D. All sides
D. 0.25 m
2. If the image is virtual, erect and dimin-
ished, then it is formed by which of the 4. No image is formed when the object is
following mirrors? placed at a distance from the concave
A. Concave Mirror mirror.
B. Convex Mirror A. equal to radius of curvature
C. Plane Mirror B. more than radius of curvature
D. Curved Mirror C. less than radius of curvature but more
than focal length
3. if an object is placed at a distance of 0.5
m in front of a plane mirror, the distance D. equal to focal length

5. A candle is kept between F and P of a con- 10. For a spherical/curve mirror, what is the
cave mirror. Can this image be projected value of the focal length equal to?
on a screen? A. the radius of curvature
A. Yes it can be B. four times the radius of curvature
B. No it cannot be C. half the radius of curvature
C. Cannot be predicted D. twice the radius of curvature
D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
11. The radius of curvature of a spherical mir-
ror is 20 cm. At what position do we get
6. The focal length of a concave mirror is 5
an image at infinity?
cm. A student got an image of the same
size as the object at one position. What is A. 20 cm
the position of the object in this case? B. 10 cm
A. 5 cm C. between 10 cm and 0
B. 10 cm D. between 20cm and 10cm
C. between 5 and 10 cm 12. A person kept an object at beyond ‘C’ of
D. beyond 10 cm a concave mirror. Where should a screen
be kept if he needs to project the image on
7. Which among the following characterize it?
the image of an object in a convex mirror?
A. At F
A. virtual, upright, smaller than the object B. At C
B. virtual, upright, bigger than the object C. Between F and P
C. real, upright, smaller than the object D. Between C and F
D. vitrual, inverted, smaller than the ob-
13. A mirror which always gives a virtual im-
ject
age is trrespective of the position of the
8. A 1-cm high object is placed 10 cm from a object
concave mirror with the focal length, f = A. concave mirror
15 cm. Determine image distance B. convex mirror
A. -30cm C. plane mirror
B. -10cm D. parabolic mirror
C. -5cm
14. The centere of a lens is called
D. 30cm
A. optical centre
9. For a spherical mirror, the focal length is B. principal axis
equal to C. principal focus
A. the radius of curvature D. focal length
B. the diameter of curvature
15. What is an Astigmatism?
C. half radius of curvature
A. a very contagious condition caused by
D. half diameter of curvature a bacterial infection

B. a substance that hardens your teeth B. 10 cm

C. a hard substance that gives nails their C. 15 cm

strength
D. 40 cm
D. persons vision is distorted due to a ir-
regular shaped eye
21. An object 8.5 cm high is placed 28 cm from
16. Name a mirror that can give an erect and a converging lens. The focal length of the
diminished image of an object. lens is 12 cm. Determine the height of the
image.
A. Convex mirror
B. Concave mirror A. 6.38 cm
C. Plane mirror B. 8.5 cm
D. none of above C. 12cm
17. The reflecting surface of plane mirror is D. 21 cm
A. curved inward
22. The ray parallel to the principal axis, after
B. curved outward
reflection from a concave mirror will
C. flat
A. pass through C
D. three dimensional
B. pass through P
18. An object is positioned between a concave
mirror’s center of curvature and its focal C. pass through F
point. The image produced by the mirror D. retrace its path
is located
A. beyond the center of curvature. 23. The image position of an object placed be-
B. at the center of curvature. yond C in front of a concave mirror is
C. between the center of curvature and A. Beyond C
the focal point.
B. At C
D. at the focal point.
C. Between F and C
19. A normal human eye has a focal length of
D. At F
about 0.023 m. If you look at the tip of a
pencil, 0.553 m from your eye, how far is E. Between P and F
the image from the lens of your eye?
A. 0.024 m 24. A virtual image(a) can be formed on
the screen(b) cannot be formed on the
B. 0.033 m
screen(c) is formed only by a plane mir-
C. 0.045 ror(d) is formed only by the convex mirror
D. 0.055 A. a
20. A student is 20 cm away from a concave B. b
mirror having focal length 10 cm. What is
the position of image formed? C. c
A. 20 cm D. d

25. What is the center of curvature of a spher- B. always real.

ical mirror? C. real only if the object distance is less
A. the center of the sphere of which given than f.
mirror is a part D. real only if the object distance is
B. the radius of the sphere of which given greater than or equal to f
mirror is a part
30. The characteristics of image formed by
C. the diameter of the sphere of which plane mirror
NARAYAN CHANGDER
given mirror is a part
A. upright, virtual and larger than the ob-
D. a chord of the sphere of which given ject
mirror is a part
B. upright, virtual and smaller than the
26. Which mirror is used as rear view mirror object
in cars? C. upright, virtual and with the same size
A. Concave Mirror as the object
B. Convex Mirror D. none of above
C. Plane Mirror
31. If the outside of the spherical mirror is sil-
D. Curved Mirror vered, it is a
27. A converging (concave) mirror with a focal A. concave mirror
length of 27 cm is held 14 cm from your B. convex mirror
face. Determine the location and magnifi-
C. plane mirror
cation of the image.
D. none of above
A. 29.07 cm behind the mirror, magnifica-
tion of 2.08 32. The radius of curvature of a spherical mir-
B. 29.07 cm in front of the mirror, magni- ror is 20 cm, What is its focal length?
fication of-2.08 A. 20 cm
C. 19.7 cm behind the mirror, magnifica- B. 10 cm
tion of 3.08
C. 40 cm
D. 19.7 cm in front of the mirror, magnifi-
D. 1/20 cm
cation of-3.08
33. When the object is placed at infront of
28. Which part of a spherical mirror is situated
a concave an equal image is fomred.
midway between the center of curvature
and the vertex? A. centre of curvature
A. CENTER OF CURVATURE B. focus
B. PRINCIPAL FOCUS C. less than focal length
C. PRINCIPAL AXIS D. more than radius of curvature
D. VERTEX 34. A ray of light is incident at 400, what is
29. A single concave spherical mirror produces its angle of reflection?
an image which is A. 200
A. always virtual. B. 400

C. 600 40. The size of the image for an object at infin-

D. 800 ity in front of a concave mirror is
A. Enlarged

35. The position of an object which when
B. Same size
placed in front of a concave mirror of fo-
cal length 20cm produces a virtual image C. Point size
which is twice the object D. None
A. -19cm 41. The distance used a mirror to get a big-
B. -10cm ger image.
C. -20cm A. flat
D. -25cm B. concave
C. convex
36. The distance from the pole to the focus of
the spherical mirror is called D. transparent
A. Radius of curvature 42. Which one shows lateral inversion? (a)
B. centre of curvature Plane mirror(b) Convex mirror(c) Concave
mirror(d) All of these
C. Focus
A. a
D. Focal length
B. b
37. The point mid way between a curved mir- C. c
ror and center of curvature is the D. d
A. principal point
43. The reflecting surface of the convex mirror
B. focus is
C. center of focus A. part of inner sphere
D. principal focus B. part of outer sphere
38. The path of the light is(a) always a C. part of straight line
straight line(b) a curved line(c) a zig-zag D. part of square
line(d) depends on the medium
44. Name the mirror that can give an erect and
A. a enlarged image of an object.
B. b A. Convex mirror
C. c B. Concave mirror
D. d C. Plane mirror
39. At which position of the object, will a con- D. none of above
cave mirror produces magnified and erect 45. The radius of curvature of spherical mir-
image? rors is times its focal length.
A. At C A. Thrice
B. Between F and P B. Four
C. Between C and F C. Twice
D. At F D. Five

46. An image formed when the light rays pass 51. The size of an object and its image are the
through the image location, and could ap- same in this type of mirror
pear on paper or film placed at the that A. CONCAVE
location is referred to as a
B. CONVEX
A. real image.
C. OPTICAL
B. virtual image.
D. PLANE
C. source image.
52. Which of the following can produce an up-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. original image.
right image that is smaller than the ob-
47. A 5-cm-high object is placed in front of a ject?
concave mirror with a radius of curvature A. CONCAVE MIRROR
of 20 cm. Determine the image height if
the object distance is 5 cm B. CONVEX MIRROR
A. -20 cm C. OPTICAL MIRROR

B. 10 cm D. PLANE MIRROR
C. -10 cm 53. The of the reflecting surface of a spher-
D. 2cm ical mirror is called the pole.
A. length
48. Characteristics of the image formed when
the object is placed at C in front of a con- B. area
cave mirror C. centre
A. Erect D. aperture
B. Real 54. What is the ray of light that strikes the
C. Inverted surface?
D. Virtual A. Incident ray
49. n object is placed at a distance of 15cm B. reflected ray
from a diverging (convex) mirror and the C. normal ray
image is formed at a distance of 5cm from D. normal
the mirror, the radius of curvature of the
mirror 55. The image which is obtained on a screen
A. 10 cm A. upright
B. 15cm B. impression
C. 29cm C. virtual image
D. none D. real image
50. A is a piece of glass or transparent ma- 56. What can be said when an image is in front
terial with curved surface of any mirror?
A. lens A. The image is real.
B. concave mirror B. The image is virtual.
C. convex mirror C. The image is smaller than the object.
D. none of above D. The image is bigger than the object.

57. What is the mid point of a spherical mirror 63. The bowl of a shiny spoon forms an en-
called? larged, upright image similar to that of a
mirror.

A. Focus
B. Pole A. wide-angle
C. Centre of curvature B. convex
D. Radius of curvature C. concave
58. Absolute refractive index is least for D. refracting

A. air 64. The inner surface of a steel spoon acts as
B. mica a mirror.
C. vacuum A. plane mirror
D. water B. convex mirror
59. If the image is virtual, erect and enlarged, C. concave mirror
then it is formed by which of the following D. convex lens
mirrors?
A. Concave Mirror 65. An object is located 35.0 cm from a con-
B. Convex Mirror vex lens. The lens forms a real image at
a distance of 15.0 cm. What is the focal
C. Plane Mirror length?
D. Curved Mirror A. 0.0953 cm
60. Which of the following best relates R and B. 10.5 cm
f?
C. 26.2 cm
A. R=f/2
D. 0.0678 cm
B. R=2f
C. R=4f 66. A ray directed towards the principal focus
D. R=f/4 of a convex mirror, after reflection, will
emerge
61. The is the distance the pole of the mir- A. parallel to the principal axis
ror and the principal focus.
B. perpendicular to the principal axis
A. focal length
C. through the focus
B. principal axis
C. The pole D. through the pole.
D. none of above 67. The focal length of a concave mirror is

62. which of the following lies on the mirror? A. negative
A. Centre of curvature. B. positive
B. Principal axis C. some times positive sometimes nega-
C. Pole tive
D. None D. none

68. Which of the following always diverge 73. A tree 20 m high is located 40 m from
light rays? the converging lens of focal length 0.08
m.Calculate the distance from the lens to
A. Convex mirror and plane mirror
the image.
B. Concave lens and convex mirror
A. 0.08 m
C. Concave mirror and convex lens B. 0.01 m
D. Concave lens and convex mirror C. 0.10 m
NARAYAN CHANGDER
69. Velocity of light when it passes from D. 0.20 m
optically denser to optically rarer medium 74. The ocean is blue because it is reflecting
A. decreases A. all colors of light except blue
B. increases B. blue light
C. does not change C. yellow light
D. none of above D. no colors of light.
70. Absolute refractive index is maximum for 75. Which of the following is TRUE about
spherical mirrors?
A. water A. They don’t obey the Law of Reflection.

B. They have a flat, planar surface.
B. diamond
C. Their surface either bulges outward or
C. glass inward.
D. mercury D. They always give images that are of
the same size as the object.
71. Concave spherical mirrors produce images
which 76. An image an by a concave mirror is 4 times
A. are always smaller than the actual ob- greater than the object. If the radius of
ject. curvature 20 cm, determine the object dis-
tance in front of the mirror
B. are always larger than the actual ob-
A. 12cm
ject.
B. 20cm
C. are always the same size as the actual
object. C. 15cm
D. could be smaller than, larger than, or D. 12.5cm

the same size as the actual object, de- 77. An image formed when the light rays do
pending on the placement of the object. not actually pass through the image loca-
tion, and would not appear on paper or
72. Mirrors, whose reflecting surfaces are
film placed at that location is referred to
curved, are called
as a
A. Concave mirrors A. real image.
B. Convex mirrors B. virtual image.
C. Plane mirrors C. source image.
D. Spherical mirrors D. original image.

78. An object is placed at a distance of 27.0 83. In torches, search light and headlights
cm away from a thin convex lens with a ofvehicles the bulb is placed
focal length of 9.00 cm. How far from the

A. Between the pole and focus of there-
lens is the image located and what type of flector
image is formed?
B. Very near to or at the focus of the re-
A. 13.5 cm and real flector
B. 3.00 cm and real C. Between the focus and centre ofcurva-
C. 0.33 cm and virtual ture of the reflector
D. At the centre of curvature of thereflec-
D. 0.15 cm and virtual
tor
79. An erect and enlarged image can be formed 84. A converging lens produces an image twice
by the size of the original. If the object is
A. only a convex mirror placed 0.40 m from the lens, and the image
produced is 0.80 m from the lens. What is
B. only a concave mirror the focal length of the lens?
C. only a plane mirror A. 0.351 m
D. Both convex and concave mirrors B. 0.267 m
C. 0.416 m
80. An object is placed at a concave mirror’s
center of curvature. The distance between D. 0.112 m
its image and the pole is
85. Spherical mirrors are part of
A. equal to f
A. cones
B. equal to 2f B. spheres
C. between f and 2f C. circles
D. greater than 2f D. cylinders
81. what are the uses of convex mirror? 86. An index of refraction less than one for a
medium would imply
A. magnifying glass
A. that the speed of light in the medium is
B. traffic mirrors the same as the speed of light in vacuum.
C. rearview mirror B. that the speed of light in the medium is
D. plane mirror greater than the speed of light in vacuum.
C. refraction is not possible.
82. THE DISTANCE FROM THE VERTEX OF A
D. reflection is not possible.
CURVE MIRROR TO THE CENTER OF CUR-
VATURE 87. If an object 5cm high is placed at a distance
A. focal length of 10cm from a convex mirror of radius of
curvature 30cm find the nature, position
B. principal axis and size of the image formed.
C. radius of curvature A. virtual, v = 6cm, hi = 3cm
D. vertex B. virtual, v = 3cm, hi = 7cm

1.4 Spherical mirrors image formation 66
C. real, v = 6cm, hi = 3cm C. the image is inverted, and the mirror

D. real, v= 5cm, hi = 10cm may be concave or convex.
D. the image is upright, and the mirror is
88. what are the uses of concave mirror
convex.
A. makeup mirrors
B. car headlight mirrors 91. A convex lens focusses the light from a
bacterium that is 0.030 cm from the lens.
C. spy hole in the door If the focal length of the lens is 0.040 cm,
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. microscope how far from the lens is the image?
89. mirror is used as rear view mirrors in A. 0.21 cm
vehicles. B. 0.12 cm
A. Convex C. -0.21 cm
B. Concave
D. -0.12 cm
C. Plane
D. none of above 92. The of a spherical mirror is the line join-
ing the pole and the centre of curvature of
90. A negative magnification for a mirror the mirror
means A. focal length
A. the image is inverted, and the mirror
B. principal focus
is concave.
B. the image is inverted, and the mirror C. principal axis
is convex. D. The pole
1.4 Spherical mirrors image formation

1. An object with height of 20cm is placed 2. An object is placed at 15cm away from a
at 5cm away from a convex mirror with concave mirror with a focal length of 10cm.
a focal length of 10cm. Find size image Find the distance of the image formed from
formed. the centre of the concave mirror.
A. 6.33cm A. 15cm
B. 13.33cm B. 20cm
C. 10cm C. 25cm
D. 20cm D. 30cm
1.5 Sign convention

1. What is the magnification when an object C. 0.5
which is 5 cm tall produces an image which D. 10
is 10 cm tall?
2. An image which is 30 cm tall is produced
A. 50
by a lens with magnification 3. What is
B. 2 the height of the object?

1.6 Mirror formula derivation 67
A. 0.1 cm A. 1/q+ 1/f= 1/p

B. 90 cm B. 1/f+ 1/p= 1/q

C. 30 cm C. 1/q-1/f= 1/p
D. 10 cm D. 1/p+ 1/q= 1/f
3. Lens formula E. 1/p-1/q= 1/f
1.6 Mirror formula derivation

1. Mr. Serafin sells textbooks. He receives 5. Kim and Kanye have been approved for
4% on his first $5, 000 in sales and 15% a $400, 000 15-year mortgage with an
on the balance of his sales. If his sales in APR of 6.5%. How much of their first
one month were $15, 500, what would he monthly payment will go to interest?
earn in commission? A. $2, 166.67
A. $1, 775 B. $2, 546.67
B. $1, 557 C. $1, 966.67
C. $1, 275 D. $2, 366.67
D. $1, 575 6. Rays from Sun converge at a point 15 cm
in front of a concave mirror. Where should
2. If the focal length is negative a mirror an object be placed so that size of its im-
is being used age is equal to the size of the object?
A. concave (diverging) A. 15 cm in front of the mirror
B. convex (converging) B. 30 cm in front of the mirror
C. concave (converging) C. more than 30 cm in front of the mirror
D. convex (diverging) D. between 15 cm and 30 cm in front of

the mirror
3. If the object is beyond C 7. An object at a distance of + 15 cm is slowly
A. image is real, smaller and inverted moved towards the pole of a convex mir-
ror. The image will get
B. image is real, smaller and upright
A. shortened and real
C. image is virtual, smaller and inverted
B. enlarged and real
D. image is real, bigger and upright
C. enlarged and virtual
4. An object is placed 20 cm from a concave D. diminished and virtual
mirror with a focal point of 15 cm. Where
8. If di is a negative number, this means that
will the image be located.
the image is:
A. 15 cm A. upright
B. 20 cm‘ B. inverted
C. 60 cm C. real
D. -8.6 cm D. virtual

( )nt
9. An object is located 5 cm from a concave 14. A = P 1 + nr Tyler deposited $1, 200
mirror with a focal point of 15 cm. What into an account that pays 1.25% inter-
is the location of the image? est, compounded daily. Determine the
amount of interest earned at the end of
A. -7.5 cm
six months.
B. -3.75 cm
A. $7.52
C. 7.5 cm
B. $1, 207.52
D. there is no image
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. $15.09
10. Dashed lines on a ray diagram symbolize D. $1, 215.09
rays.
15. A real image having a height of-10 cm is
A. parallel formed by a concave mirror. The height of
B. virtual the object is 5 cm.The magnification of the
object is
C. distant
A. -5
D. inverted
B. 5
11. Rob is choosing a cell phone plan. One
C. 2
plan costs $55 a month and includes 500
minutes. The charge for each minute over D. -2
500 is $0.15. The company also offers an
16. The Mirror Equation relates object of a
unlimited calling plan with a $75 monthly
spherical mirror.
charge. At how many minutes would the
cost of the two plans be the same? A. distance (p)
A. 633 B. mirror radius (r)
B. 577 C. focal length (f)
C. 755 D. image distance (q)
D. 677 17. What type of image is produced by an ob-
ject that is far from a concave spherical
12. If hi is a negative number, this means it is: mirror?
A. upright A. smaller and upside down
B. inverted B. larger and upright
C. real C. smaller and upright
D. virtual D. larger and upside down
13. A is a mirror whose reflecting surface 18. An image drawn above the principal axis
is outward-curved segment of a sphere. (PA) is
A. uniform spherical mirror A. virtual
B. parabolic spherical mirror B. real
C. concave spherical mirror C. upright
D. convex spherical mirror D. upside down

19. All of the following descriptions about im- A. +19.2 cm

ages formed by convex spherical mirrors
B. -19.2 cm
are true except which one?

A. They are formed from converging rays. C. -48 cm
B. They are smaller than the objects from D. +48 cm

which they are formed.
24. Karina works part-time at a bakery earn-
C. They are always virtual.
ing $11.50 an hour. In the last five days,
D. Their image distance is always nega- her time card shows that she worked 3.3,
tive. 2.9, 4.0, 3.5, and 2.1 hours. What is her
gross pay for the five days?
20. A is an image formed when rays of
light actually pass through a point on the A. $181.70
image.
B. $151.80
A. real image
C. $145.30
B. imaginary image
D. $163.20
C. virtual image
D. inverted image 25. Material that allows all light through
21. A virtual erect enlarged image is formed A. Translucent
by a concave mirror of radius of curvature
B. Transparent
30 cm. The object is placed at
C. Opaque
A. 13 cm
B. 17 cm D. none of above
C. 21 cm 26. For an object placed 30 cm from the pole
D. 27 cm of a mirror a virtual image is formed 60
E. All the options are correct cm from the pole of the mirror. Find the
( )nt focal length of the mirror
22. B = P 1 + nr You have $2500 to
A. + 60 cm
put in to a savings account for 10 years
at 4.2% interest compounding quarterly. B. -60 cm
B = Pert How much more would you
C. -30 cm
have if the interest was compounded con-
tinuously? D. +30 cm
A. $796.58
27. eliminate spherical aberration such
B. $804.90 that all parallel rays converge at the focal
C. $832 point of
D. $8.32 A. Convergentmirrors
23. An object of 2cm height is placed 32cm in B. Parabolic mirrors
front of a concave mirror. If the image
C. Hyperbolic mirrors
formed on a screen is 3 cm find the focal
length of the mirror D. Divergent mirrors

28. An object is placed at a concave mirror’s 33. A concave mirror of focal length 20 cm
center of curvature. The image produced forms an image having twice the size of
by the mirror is located object. For the virtual position of object,
A. out beyond the center of curvature. the position of object will be at:
B. at the center of curvature. A. 25 cm
C. between the center of curvature and B. 40 cm

the focal point. C. 10 cm
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. at the focal point. D. At infinity
29. If the magnification (m) is a positive num- 34. Images created by spherical mirrors suffer
ber, this means that the image is: from that occurs when parallel rays
A. larger far from the principal axis converge away
from the mirrors focal point.
B. smaller
A. Uniform aberration
C. upright
D. inverted B. Conjunctal aberration
C. Spherical aberration
30. An image is formed upside down in front of
mirror and seems bigger by 2 times from D. Symmetrical aberration
the actual size. What might be the type of
35. Outside rear-view mirrors on automobiles
mirror uses?
are generally
A. concave mirror
A. concave
B. convex mirror
B. convex
C. plane mirror
C. plane
D. concave lens
D. real images
31. If the angle of incidence for an object and
a plane mirror is 30 degrees, what is the 36. If the power of a lens is-2 D, what is its
angle between the object and the image? focal length?
(be careful on this one)! A. +50 cm
A. 60 degrees B. -100 cm
B. 90 degrees C. -50 cm
C. 120 degrees D. +100 cm
D. 180 degrees
37. You are given three media A, B and C
32. If a person is standing 10 m in front of a of refractive index 1.33, 1.65 and 1.46.
plane mirror, how far away from the mir- The medium in which the light will travel
ror is his image? fastest is
A. 10m A. A
B. 5m B. B
C. 20m C. C
D. 30m D. Equal in all media

38. Nichole just rented an apartment for $850 C. Virtual

a month. She was told that the rent will D. Inverted
increase 6.5% each year. Using the expo-

nential growth formula, about how much 43. A concave mirror has a radius of curva-
will her rent be in 7 years? ture of 24 cm. A 6.4 cm tall object is held
A. $1320 26cm from the mirror. Calculate the dis-
tance between the image and the mirror.
B. $1240
HINT. use : f = 2r xi = xof −
xo
f
C. $1150
A. 22.3 cm
D. $980
B. 23.2 cm
39. Jackson and Alexandria McFakename do C. 32.2 cm
not pay their credit card in full each month,
D. 23.3 cm
so they incur finance charges. On their last
( )nt
credit card statement, the average daily 44. A = P 1 + nr Larissa deposits $450
balance is $1, 375 and the monthly peri- into a savings account that earns 3.5% in-
odic rate is 1.85%. What should be the terest compounded quarterly. Using the
finance charge on the statement? compound interest formula, what is the
A. $25.44 balance after 7 years?
B. $35.44 A. $574.32
C. $30.44 B. $475.32
D. $40.44 C. $521.35
D. $695.36
40. How much does a plane mirror magnify an
image? 45. If an image in a curved mirror is virtual,
A. 1x you can say that the mirror is:
B. 2x A. definitely convex
C. 3x B. definitely concave
D. 4x C. could be concave or convex
41. Tyler deposited $1, 200 into an account D. none of above

that pays 1.25% interest, compounded 46. The McLemores pay a monthly mortgage
daily. Determine the ending balance at the payment of $1238. They also pay a semi-
end of six months. annual property tax bill of $4, 865 and
A. $7.52 semi-annual homeowner’s insurance of $1,
B. $1, 207.52 650. The property tax and insurance are
paid monthly into an escrow account to
C. $15.09 their lender. What is their monthly pay-
D. $1, 215.09 ment to their lender?
42. If the heigh of the image is a negative num- A. $1, 238

ber, this means it is: B. $2, 323.85
A. Upright C. $1, 085.85
B. Real D. $3, 232.58

47. In diffuse reflection, why are the reflected 52. An image behind the mirror is (choose 2)
rays not parallel to each other?
A. because the light is of various wave- A. virtual
lengths B. real
B. because this only happens in plane mir- C. inverted
rors
D. upright
C. because the incident rays are not par-
53. Light rays that hit a convex mirror as
NARAYAN CHANGDER
allel
they are reflected.
D. because the surface is not smooth
A. magnify
48. mirrors can produce both real and vir- B. diverge
tual images.
C. disappear
A. Concave
D. unite
B. Parabolic
54. The distance from the center of a concave
C. Convex mirror to the focal point is called the
D. Flat A. optical axis
49. If you are walking at a speed of 2.0m/s B. focal length

towards a plane mirror, how fast is your C. plane
image walking towards the mirror? D. reflection
A. 2.0 m/s
55. A concave mirror has a focal length of 12
B. 4.0 m/s cm. A 6.4 cm tall object is held 26cm from
C. 1.0 m/s the mirror. The distance from the image to
the object is 22.3 cm. What is the height
D. none of above of the image. HINT. use : hhoi = − xxoi
50. The distance of the radius of curvature is A. -5.5 cm
equal to: B. 3.3 cm
A. C C. 5.5 cm
B. F D. -3.3 cm
C. 2F 56. Darian is verifying the accuracy of her
D. V paycheck. She earns $13.50 an hour
and works 40 hours each week. Her
51. If you are walking towards a plane mirror biweekly deductions are Social Security
at a speed of 1.0 m/s, how fast are you 6.2%, Medicare 1.45%, federal with-
and your image approaching each other? holding tax $84.75, state withholding
tax $29.60, and health insurance $52.85.
A. 1.0 m/s
What is her net pay if she is paid bi-
B. 0.50 m/s weekly?
C. 2.0 m/s A. $830.18
D. 4.0 m/s B. $941.52

C. $785.16 61. Rick shops around for a new muffler for

his car and gets these estimates:$135,
D. $879.56
$178, $152, $149, $169, $211, and

57. A student is 2.50m away from a convex $160. What are Q1, Q2, and Q3?
lens while her image is 1.80m from the A. 135, 160, 211
lens, what is the focal length? B. 149, 160, 178
A. 1.05m C. 149, 160, 211
B. 2.50m D. 135, 160, 178
C. 1.39m
62. When constructing ray diagrams on a
D. 0.72m curved mirror, incident rays going towards
the F will reflect back:
58. A 4.0 cm tall light bulb is placed at a dis-
A. along themselves
tance of 35.5 cm from a convex mirror.
The image distance is determined to be-9.1 B. through F
cm. What is the size of the image? (i.e. C. parallel to the PA
the height)?
D. none of above
A. 1.02 cm
63. Moe’s car is worth $14, 160. When he
B. 7.23 cm
bought it new 7 years ago, it cost $25,
C. 5.78 cm 000. What was the depreciation rate?
D. 2.98 cm A. 6.8%
B. 5.8%
59. Malena purchased $9, 568 worth of stock
and paid her broker a 0.5% fee. She sold C. 4.8%
the stock when the stock price increased D. 7.8%
to $13, 928, using an online broker that
charged $7 per trade. What are her net 64. When constructing ray diagrams on a
proceeds? curved mirror, incident rays going parallel
to the PA reflect back:
A. $3, 874.60
A. on themselves
B. $4, 785.23
B. through F
C. $2, 859.36
C. parallel to the PA
D. $3, 523.36
D. none of above
60. A ray of light is travelling from a rarer 65. An object of 2cm height is placed 16cm in
medium to a denser medium. While en- front of a concave mirror. If the height of
tering the denser medium at the point of the image formed on a screen is 3 cm find
incidence, it: the focal length of the mirror
A. goes straight into the second medium A. +9.6 cm
B. bends towards the normal B. -9.6 cm
C. bends away from the normal C. -24 cm
D. does not enter at all D. +24 cm

66. When constructing ray diagrams on a 71. Katie borrowed $8, 000 for a car for 7
curved mirror, incident rays directed to- years at an APR of 4.3%. Determine her
wards the center of curvature reflect: monthly payment.
A. back on themselves A. $110.46
B. through F B. $98.53
C. parallel to the PA C. $125.33
D. none of above D. $137.54
NARAYAN CHANGDER
67. Larissa deposits $450 into a savings 72. An insurance company sells a twenty-year
account that earns 3.5% interest com- term life insurance policy with a face value
pounded quarterly. Using the compound of $300, 000 to a 45-year old woman.
interest formula, what is the balance after Her annual premium is $1850. If the
7 years? woman dies after paying premiums for 8
A. $574.32 years, what is the insurance company’s
B. $475.32 gain or loss?
C. $521.35 A. loss of $285, 200
D. $695.36 B. loss of $14, 800

C. gain of $14, 800
68. Ray diagrams can be used for checking val-
ues calculated from the mirror and magni- D. gain of $314, 800
fication equations for
73. An object of size 4cm is place 15 cm in
A. flat mirrors. front of a concave mirror of focal length
B. parabolic mirrors. 10 cm. Find the position and magnification
of the image
C. concave spherical mirrors.
D. convex spherical mirrors. A. image is formed 30 cm in front of the
mirror, m =-2
69. For an object placed 30 cm from a mirror, B. image is formed 30 cm in front of the
a real image is formed 60cm from the pole mirror, m =-8cm
of the mirror. Find the position of the ob-
ject to get an image at 40 cm from the pole C. image is formed 30 cm behind the mir-
of the mirror ror, m =-2
A. 20 cm D. image is formed 30 cm behind the mir-
ror, m =-8cm
B. 40 cm
C. 10 cm 74. An object of size 2 cm is placed at 25 cm
in front of a concave mirror. If the magni-
D. 30 cm
fication produced by the mirror is 4, what
70. An image behind the mirror is considered: is the size of the image.
A. virtual A. 8 cm
B. real B. 4 cm
C. upside down C. 16 cm
D. upright D. 2 cm

1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 75
75. An object placed in front of a mirror of 77. A = P (1 − r)n Moe’s car is worth $14,
radius of curvature 30cm forms a real in- 160. When he bought it new 7 years ago,
verted image magnified three times. Find it cost $25, 000. What was the deprecia-

the position of the object and the image tion rate?
A. u =-20 cm, v =-60 cm A. 6.8%
B. u =-60 cm, u =-20 cm B. 5.8%
C. u =-20 cm, v = + 60 cm C. 4.8%
D. u =-60 cm, u = +20 cm D. 7.8%
76. An object of 5.0 cm in size is placed at a
distance of 20.0 cm from a concave mirror 78. An object is placed at 100 mm in front of a
of focal length 15.0 cm. At what distance concave mirror which produces an upright
from the mirror, should a screen be placed image (erect image). The radius of curva-
to get the sharp image? ture of the mirror is:
A. -60 cm A. Less than 100 mm

B. 60 cm B. Between 100 mm and 200 mm
C. 30 cm C. Exactly 200 mm
D. -30 cm D. More than 200 mm
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification

1. What two things do all telescopes need to A. The light from a concave mirror
do. doesn’t pass through the focal point.
A. Gather light and magnify objects B. The light from a convex mirror doesn’t
pass through the focal point.
B. Gather light and reduce objects.
C. The light from a concave mirror passes
C. Magnify objects and separate colors. through the focal point.
D. Magnify objects and filter atmospheric D. The light from a convex mirror passes
interference. through the focal point.
2. What happens when the distance between 4. What is the size and position of an image
and object and a convex mirror increases? formed by a plane mirror?
A. The image will get bigger and become A. same size, closer to the mirror
closer to the focal point. B. larger size, closer to the mirror
B. The image will get smaller and become C. same size, same distance away from
closer to the focal point. the mirror
C. The image will get smaller and become D. reduced, farther from the mirror
farther from the focal point.
5. What kind of mirror is used in a reflector
D. The image will get bigger and become telescope?
farther from the focal point
A. Plane
3. What is spherical aberration? B. Convex

C. Concave C. Real, inverted, smaller

D. Parabolic D. Virtual, upright, larger
6. What is the period of a 1.4m pendulum? 11. A normal human eye has a focal length of
about 0.023 m. The tip of a pencil is 0.553
A. 1.4 s
m from your eye. What does the 0.553 m
B. 16.6 s represent?
C. 3.2 s A. do
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. 2.4 s B. di
C. f
7. A convex mirror is used to produce an im-
age that is three-fourths the size of an ob- D. 1/f
ject and located 8.4cm behind the mirror. 12. A convex mirror produces an image that is
What is the focal length of the mirror? 27.5 cm behind the mirror when the object
A. -24 cm is 54.8 cm in front of the mirror. What is
B. -11 cm the focal length of the mirror? (Round to
the right amount of SigFigs)
C. -6.3 cm
A. -55.2
D. -4.8 cm
B. -45.5
E. all/none/same C. 55.2
8. A negative magnification incidicates that D. 49.6
the image is:
13. If an object is outside of the focal length,
A. inverted then the image formed is
B. smaller that the object A. virtual, inverted
C. real B. virtual, upright
D. upright C. real, inverted
D. real, upright
9. Determine the focal length and magnifica-
tion of a curved mirror that produces an 14. If the image reflected off of a plane mirror
image that is 16.0 cm behind the mirror is 2cm what is the object’s height?
when the object is 28.5 cm from the mirror. A. 2m
What type of curved mirror was used?
B. 2km
A. f= 36.5 ; M=0.56 ; Convex
C. 2cm
B. f= 36.5 ; M=0.56 ; Concave
D. 2mm
C. f=-36.5 ; M=0.56 ; Concave
15. An upright image is 3 cm from a lens. If the
D. f=-36.5 ; M=0.56 ; Convex focal length is 5 cm, what kind of image is
10. Concave lenses, like the ones found in the produced?
peepholes of a door, always produce im- A. Virtual Upright
ages that are B. Real Upright
A. Virtual, upright, smaller C. Virtual Inverted
B. Real, inverted, larger D. Real Inverted

16. If an object is placed 0.25 m from the lens, A. It reflects back on itself.
and the image produced is 0.15 m from the B. The reflected ray bounces vertically
lens. What is the focal length of the lens?

upward.
A. 0.094 m C. The reflected ray will be parallel to the
B. 0.230 m principal axis.
C. 0.012 m D. The reflected ray gets projected verti-
D. 0.032 m cally downward.
17. Plane waves have 21. What is NOT an example of a lens being
used in an object.
A. Spherical wavefronts and parallel rays
pointing in the same direction A. Glasses
B. Flat wavefronts parallel rays pointing B. Projector
in different directions C. Spoon
C. Spherical wavefronts parallel rays D. Camera
pointing in different directions
22. Lenses use the principle of
D. Flat wavefronts parallel rays pointing
in the same direction A. Refraction
B. Motion
18. A converging lens produces an image twice
the size of the original. The object is placed C. Reflection
0.40 m from the lens, and the image is pro- D. Inertia
duced 0.80 m from the lens. What does
the 0.40 m represent? 23. If an image formed by a convex lens is in-
verted, it is most likely what type of im-
A. do
age?
B. di
A. Real
C. f
B. Virtual
D. 1/f
C. None of the above
19. A dentist uses a spherical mirror to pro- D. none of above
duce an upright image of a patient’s tooth
that is magnified by a factor of 4.5 when 24. A concave mirror has a focal length 12 cm.
placed 1.8 cm from the tooth. What is the What is its radius of curvature?
focal length of the mirror? A. 6.0 cm
A. 8.1 cm B. 3.4 cm
B. 6.3 cm C. -6.0 cm
C. 4.5 cm D. -3.4 cm
D. 2.3 cm
25. For light passing across the boundary
E. 0.43 cm from higher to lower index of refraction
20. In ray diagram for concave mirrors, if an medium, the angle of refraction is always
incident ray passes through the focal point,
how does the reflected ray look like? A. greater than the angle of incidence

B. less than the angle of incidence new material with an index of refraction
C. equal to the angle of incidence of 1.5?
A. Its speed increases by a factor of 1.5
D. none of above
B. Its speed decreases by a factor of 1.5
26. As the light travels the points in the
C. It direction must change
same direction
D. Its color changes
A. Rays
31. If you stand three feet in front of a plane
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. Wave fronts
mirror, how far away would you see your-
C. Beams self in the mirror?
D. Arrows A. 1.5 ft
27. What type of mirror is used to give a wide B. 3.0 ft
field of vision in a hallway? C. 6.0 ft
A. Parabolic D. 12.0 ft
B. Concave
32. Speed of light in a vacuum is
C. Convex A. represented by the symbol “c”
D. Specular B. 3.00 X108 m/s
28. Convex mirrors, like those found on the C. is constant
side of a car, produce images that are al- D. all answers are correct
ways
33. COLOUR WHICH IS HAVING MAXIMUM
A. Real, larger and inverted
ANGLE OF DEVIATION IS
B. Virtual, larger, and inverted
A. RED
C. Virtual, smaller and upright
B. VIOLET
D. Of equal size and position as the origi- C. GREEN
nal object
D. YELLOW
29. What is the focal point?
34. Which waves are the type that can give us
A. The center of the spherical shell with suntans and sunburns?
radius R of which the curved mirror is a
A. Infrared radiation
section
B. Ultraviolet radiation
B. Where the rays reflect from the sur-
face of the mirror and converge C. Radio waves
C. The distance from the surface of the D. X-rays
mirror to the focal point
35. The focal length of the lens in your eye is
D. A straight line drawn through the cen- about 0.015 m. The object is 1 m from
ter of curvature and the midpoint of the your eye. What does the 0.015m repre-
mirror sent?
30. Which statement describes what happens A. do

when green light passes from air into a B. di

C. f C. 1.9 m/s
D. 1/f D. 0.85 m/s

36. A convex mirror has a radius of curvature
of 28 cm. What is its focal length? 41. You stand 4.3 m in front of a plane mir-
ror. Your little brother is 2.5 m in front
A. -14 cm of you, directly between you and the mir-
B. 14 cm ror. What is the distance from you to your
C. 18 cm brother’s image?
D. 13 cm A. 1.8 m
37. Jennie looks at herself through the caved B. 2.3 m

in side of her silver spoon. The spoon acts C. 13.6 m
as a concave mirror with a 2.59-cm focal
length. Determine the image size of Jen- D. 6.8 m
nie’s 24.8-cm tall face when placed 12.8
cm from the spoon’s surface. 42. An image located at 2F in front of a con-
A. -6.3 cm verging lens is 15 cm tall. If the temper-
ature outside is 32 degrees CELCIUS how
B. 6.3 cm tall is the inverted image?
C. 4.2 cm
A. 7.5 cm
D. -4.2 cm
B. 15 cm
38. The point half way between the mirror and
C. 22.5 cm
the radius of curvature is called the
A. center point D. No image
B. focal point
C. radius of curvature image formed by a concave mirror when
D. object distance the object distance from the mirror is less
than the focal point (F) distance?
39. Mirrors in your home create
A. virtual, upright and enlarged
A. Diffuse reflections which reflect light
in a variety of directions B. real, inverted and reduced
B. Specular reflections which reflects C. real, inverted and reduced
light back in a single direction.
D. none of above
C. Diffuse reflections which reflects light
back in a single direction.
44. If you’re standing 12 meters in front of a
D. Specular reflections which reflect light plane mirror, how far away is your image
in a variety of directions
A. 6
40. Water waves in a lake travel 3.4m in 1.8s.
B. 12
What is the speed of the water waves?
A. 2.4 m/s C. 18
B. 3.4 m/s D. 24

45. How rapidly does the distance between 50. What happens to the period of a wave as
you and your mirror image decrease if the frequency increases?
you walk directly towards a mirror with A. decreases
a speed of 2.3 m/s
B. increases
A. You mirror image going fast
C. remains same
B. At the same rate
D. no change
C. You going faster than your mirror im-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
age 51. Individuals that are farsighted need to
D. none of above have prescription lenses that are
A. convex
46. What is the height of an object with a mag-
nification of 2 that appears 9m tall? B. concave
A. 18m C. plane
B. 9m D. flat
C. 4m 52. A smooth surface will create what type of
D. 4.5m reflection?
47. If an incident ray passes through C and hits A. Diffuse

a concave mirror then it will reflects B. Specular
A. Parallel C. Imaginary
B. Towards F D. none of above
C. Towards C
53. A concave mirror with a focal length of
D. Away from the mirror 16.0cm produces an image located 38.6 cm
from the mirror. What is the distance of
48. A light ray hits a plane surface at 20 de- the object from the front of the mirror?
grees. What is the angle between the in-
cident and reflected rays. A. 2.4 cm
A. 20o B. 11.3 cm
B. 40o C. 22.6 cm
C. 70o D. 27.3 cm
D. 30o E. all/none/same
49. An image is created whose di =-5 cm. 54. Plane mirrors (select all that apply)
What does this indicate? A. increase the size of an object
A. The image is virtual. B. keep the image upright, but reverse
B. The image is smaller than the original left and right
object. C. creates a diffuse reflection all the time
C. The image is inverted. D. keeps the mirror image the same dis-
D. The image is larger than the original tance behind the mirror as the object in
object. front of the mirror

55. A cup sits 17 cm from a concave mirror. 60. The normal to a reflecting surface is a line
The image of the cup appears 34 m in front drawn to the surface. SELECT ALL
of the mirror. What are the magnification THAT APPLY!

and orientation of the cup’s image?
A. Parallel
A. 0.5, inverted
B. 270◦
B. 0.5, upright
C. 90◦
C. 2.0, inverted
D. Perpendicular
D. 2.0, upright
E. all/none/same 61. STARS TWINKLE BCOZ OF
56. The concave side of a shiny metal spoon A. DISPERSION

has a focal length of f = 9.34 cm. Find the B. ATMOSPHERE REFRACTION
image distance for this “mirror” when the
object distance is 53.0 cm. Round to the C. REFLECTION
nearest hundredth. D. SCATTERING
A. d = 11.34 cm
62. A dentist uses a spherical mirror to pro-
B. d = 10.54 cm duce an upright image of a patient’s tooth
C. d = 12.20 cm that is magnified by a factor of 4.5 when
D. d = 9.34 cm placed 1.8 cm from the tooth. What type
of mirror is being used?
57. A convex mirror produces an image with A. plane
the radius of curvature of 4cm. What is
the focal length of the convex mirror? B. concave
A. -2mm C. convex
B. 2cm D. obtuse
C. 8m E. all/none/same
D. -2cm
63. Which light color combination is incorrect?
58. A farsighted eye focuses an image
A. Red plus green produces yellow.
A. behind the retina
B. Red plus yellow produces magenta.
B. in front of the lens
C. Blue plus green produces cyan.
C. in front of the retina
D. Blue plus yellow produces white.
D. on the retina
59. What problem can be corrected with a 64. How far is the image with a magnification
of 6 and an object distance of 4m?
parabolic mirror?
A. Spherical aberration A. 2.4m
B. Chromatic aberration B. -24m

C. Diffuse reflections C. 2.5m
D. Atmospheric scattering D. -10m

65. Which mirror type can produce real and vir- A. 23◦
tual images? B. 46◦
A. plane C. 67◦
B. concave D. 134◦
C. convex
71. Mirrors use the principle of
D. none of above
A. Polarization
NARAYAN CHANGDER
66. This is the example of dispersion of light B. Reflection
A. sky looks bright orange in the evening C. Refrection
B. shadow D. none of above
C. Pool seems shallower
72. Where might you find a convex mirror?
D. rainbow
A. car headlights
67. A concave mirror has a radius of curvature B. the corner of a convenience store
of 40 cm. An object is placed 20cm from
the mirror. Where will the image be lo- C. inside a microscope
cated? D. in your eyeball
A. 20 cm 73. You hold a small spoon arm’s length and
B. -20 cm look at yourself on the concave side, is
C. 40 cm your image
D. there is no image A. Invert/inverted/Virtual

B. Upright/Inverted/real
68. There are certain angles of incidence for
which the angle of refraction is close to C. Invert/Reduced/Real
90◦ . What is this angle called? D. Upright/Reduced/real
A. Total internal angle 74. If M= 2.5 and the image distance is-10 cm,
B. Critical angle what is the object’s distance?
C. Reflection angle A. 4 cm
D. Refracted angle B. 6 cm
69. PHENOMENON RESPONSIBLE FOR FOR- C. 10 cm

MATION OF RAINBOW D. 40 cm
A. REFRACTION 75. An object is placed 9.6 cm in front of a con-
B. DISPERSION vex lens with a focal point of 4.4 cm. Find
C. T.I.R the location and magnification of the im-
age. Round to the nearest hundredth
D. ALL THE ABOVE
A. di = 9.13, m =-0.74
70. A light ray strikes a plane mirror at an an- B. di = 8.13, m =-0.84
gle of 23◦ to the normal. What is the an-
gle between the reflected ray and the mir- C. di = 8.12, m =-0.85
ror? D. di = 9.12, m =-0.75

76. What is the focal length of a concave mir- 81. What is a Index of Refraction?
ror that magnifies, by a factor of +3.2, an A. An index which tells you how light re-
object that is placed 30 cm from the mir-

fracts off material, which shows how light
ror? would have a diffuse reflection or specular
A. -42 cm reflection.
B. -26 cm B. A material’s factor that reduces the
C. -8.4 cm speed of light.
D. 8.4 cm C. A material’s factor that increases the
speed of light.
E. all/none/same
D. none of above
77. A real image forms 10cm in front of a mir-
ror that has a focal length of 5cm. What 82. What is the speed of light in a substance
type of image is produced. whose index of refraction is 1.62?
A. A real upright image. A. 2.14 ∗ 10−8
B. A real inverted image. B. 2.14 ∗ 104
C. A virtual inverted image C. 2.14 ∗ 105
D. A virtual upright image D. 2.14 ∗ 108
78. The danger signals installed at the top of 83. When magnification is negative, it creates
tall buildings are red in colour. These can
be easily seen from a distance because
among all other colours, the red light A. Inverted images
A. is scattered the most by smoke or fog B. Bigger images

B. is absorbed the most by smoke or fog C. Upright images
C. is scattered the least by smoke or fog D. Smaller images
D. moves fastest in air 84. Put the visible light colors in order from
longest wavelength to shortest wave-
79. an image that is made of focused light
length
A. virtual image
A. Violet, Indigo, Blue, Green, Orange,
B. real image Yellow, Red
C. diffuse reflection B. Red, Yellow, Green, Orange, Violet,
D. regular reflection Blue, Indigo
80. Light passes from air into benzene with an C. Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, In-
angle of incidence of 76◦ . The refracted digo, Violet
beam make an angle of 34◦ with the nor- D. none of above
mal. Calculate the index of refraction of
benzene. Round to the nearest hundredth. 85. The first laser was built in
A. 1.54 A. 1920
B. 1.98 B. 1940
C. 1.74 C. 1960
D. 1.24 D. 1980

86. What type of image is formed when rays the focal point (F) and the center of curva-
of light actually intersect? ture (C) of the mirror?
A. real A. virtual, upright and enlarged
B. virtual B. real, inverted and reduced
C. projected C. virtual, upright and reduced
D. curved D. real, inverted and enlarged
92. An image is created whose magnification
NARAYAN CHANGDER
87. What is the purpose of a corner reflector?
is m = +0.5. What does this value signify
A. To see around corners.
about the image?
B. To place at a corner to give a large field
A. A. It is virtual.
of vision.
B. B. It is upright.
C. To reflect a beam of light directly back
at something. C. C. It is smaller than the original object
D. To give infinite images. D. All of the above
88. When an object is far away from a Convex 93. When light bends through a new medium,
Mirror, the image appears what is happening?
A. Smaller and Upright A. reflection
B. Smaller and Upside Down B. refraction
C. Bigger and Upright C. absorption
D. Bigger and Upside Down D. translucent
89. What kind of mirror always gives an im- 94. Where is the object located if the image
age that is the same size as the object. that is produced by a concave mirror is
smaller than the object?
A. Plane
A. at the mirror’s focal point
B. Convex
B. between the mirror and the focal point
C. Concave
C. between the focal point and center of
D. Virtual curvature
90. The critical angle for light passing from a D. past the center of curvature
certain material into air is 57.32◦ . What E. all/none/same
is the index of refraction of this material?
Round to the nearest hundredth. 95. A concave lens has a focal length of-65 cm.
Find the image distance and the magnifica-
A. 1.12
tion that result when an object is placed
B. 1.43 43 cm in front of the lens. Round to the
C. 1.20 thousandth.
D. 2.2 A. -0.602
B. -0.394
image formed by a concave mirror when C. -0.527
the object is located somewhere between D. -0.413

96. From which point does a ray of light pass B. Where the rays reflect from the sur-
after reflection when incident parallel to face of the mirror and converge
Principal axis

C. The distance from the surface of the
A. Focal point mirror to the focal point
B. center of curvature D. A straight line drawn through the cen-
C. pole of mirror ter of curvature and the midpoint of the
mirror
D. all of the above
102. Light waves reflect
97. If a light ray is shown on a plane mirror
with an angle of incidence of 45 degrees, A. Perpendicular to the light source
what is the angle of reflection? B. Perpendicular to the angle of incident
A. 15
C. Perpendicular to the reflecting surface
B. 30
C. 45 D. none of above
D. 90
103. An object located at the radius of curva-
98. When the image of an object is seen in a ture (C) of a concave mirror will always
plane mirror, the image is appear
A. real and upright. A. upright
B. real and inverted. B. smaller
C. virtual and upright. C. same size
D. virtual and inverted. D. larger
99. Diamond has a index of refraction than 104. The lowest point in the wave is known
air. as
A. Equal
A. crest
B. Greater
B. trough
C. Less
C. amplitude
D. none of above
D. wavelength
100. At noon the sun appears white as
105. What is the difference(s) between a mir-
A. light is least scattered
ror and lense? Select All That Apply.
B. all the colours of the white light are
A. Lenses let light pass through them and
scattered away
mirrors reflect light.
C. blue colour is scattered the most
B. Mirrors let light pass through them
D. red colour is scattered the most and lenses reflect light.
101. What is the principle axis? C. Lenses have two focal points and mir-
A. The center of the spherical shell with rors only have one
radius R of which the curved mirror is a D. Lenses have one focal point and mir-
section rors have two

106. What is the focal length? 111. A microwave oven emits radiation at a
A. The center of the spherical shell with wavelength of 0.00500 m. What is the
radius R of which the curved mirror is a frequency of this radiation?
section A. 6.67 x 10-7 Hz
B. Where the rays reflect from the sur- B. 2.00 Hz
face of the mirror and converge C. 1.50 x 106 Hz
C. The distance from the surface of the D. 6.00 x 1010 Hz
mirror to the focal point
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. A straight line drawn through the cen- 112. Sam places a 4.25-cm tall eraser a dis-
ter of curvature and the midpoint of the tance of 36.2 cm from a concave mirror. If
mirror the mirror has a focal length of 19.2 cm,
then what is the image height and image
107. A line drawn perpendicular to the surface distance?
is
A. di=-40.9 cm ; hi= 4.80 cm
A. Reflecting
B. di= 40.9 cm ; hi=-4.80 cm
B. Unusual
C. di=-12.5 cm ; hi=-1.46 cm
C. Normal
D. di= 12.5 cm ; hi= 1.46 cm
D. none of above
113. which of the following does NOT belong
108. A real image that has a size of 15 cm is in the electromagnetic spectrum:
formed by a concave mirror. The size of
the object is 5 cm.The magnification of the A. X-ray
object is B. sound wave
A. -5 C. ultra violet rays
B. 5 D. microwaves
C. -3 114. An object is placed 10 m from a convex
D. 3 mirror. Its image is formed 5 m behind the
mirror. What is the focal length of the con-
109. All electromagnetic waves have the same
vex mirror?
A. -5 m
A. frequency
B. 15 m
B. speed
C. 50 m
C. wavelength
D. -10 m
D. energy
115. You hold a small plane mirror 0.50 m in
110. In a ray diagram, which term refers to
front of your eyes. In mirror is 0.32 m
the distance from the vertex to the center
high, and in it you see the image of a tall
of curvature?
building behind you. If the building is 95
A. focal point m behind you, what vertical height of the
B. focal length building.
C. radius of curvature A. 75.5m
D. diameter B. 33.1m

C. -75.1m D. is formed by a concave mirror beyond

D. 61.1m 3f and it is real

116. An object located on 2F of a concave mir- 121. How far is the object if the image re-
ror will always appear flected off of a plane mirror is 4.0m
away?
A. upright
A. 4.0mm
B. smaller
B. 4km
C. same size
C. -4.0m
D. larger
D. 4.0m
117. If you stand 3.1 meters in front of a plane
122. In visible light, which color has the
mirror what is the distance between you
longest wavelength?
and your mirror image?
A. Red
A. -3.1
B. Violet
B. 5.0
C. Yellow
C. 6.2
D. Green
D. -3
123. The process of light bouncing off a surface
118. What type of lens do you have in your
eye? A. refraction
A. Concave B. reflection
B. Prismatic C. diffraction
C. Objective D. diffusion
D. Convex 124. Acronym for LASER is
119. A tree is located 40 m from the converg- A. Light Absorption by Stimulated Emis-
ing lens of focal length 0.08 m. What does sion of Radiation
the 0.08 m represent? B. Light Amplification by Stimulated Emis-
A. do sion of Radiation
B. di C. Light Alteration by Stimulated Emis-
sion of Radiation
C. f
D. Light Attenuation by Stimulated Emis-
D. 1/f sion of Radiation
120. An image with magnification of M =-3 125. Hamilton wants to change lanes and is
looking through his mirror at the other
A. is formed by a convex mirror, beyond lane. His convex side mirror has a fo-
3f and it is virtual cal length of-88.4 cm. What is the image
B. is formed by a concave lens, between height of a 4.59-meter tall truck when lo-
f and 2f and it is real cated 12.6 meters away from the mirror?
C. is formed by a convex lens between f A. 34.6 cm

and 2f and it is virtual B. -34.6 cm

C. 30.1 cm C. Light rays are transmitted and re-

D. -30.1 cm fracted in all directions by the clouds or
particles in the air
126. What is the center of curvature? D. none of above
A. The center of the spherical shell with
130. The point where the rays meet is known
radius R of which the curved mirror is a
as
section
A. the focal length
B. Where the rays reflect from the sur-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
face of the mirror and converge B. the focal point
C. The distance from the surface of the C. refraction
mirror to the focal point D. magnification
D. A straight line drawn through the cen- 131. A concave mirror produces an inverted im-
ter of curvature and the midpoint of the age 8.5cm tall, located 34.5 cm in front of
mirror the mirror. If the focal point of the mirror
127. A flash light beam is directed at a swim- is 24.0 cm, then what is the height of the
ming pool in the dark at an angle of 46◦ object that is reflected?
with respect to the normal to the surface A. 2.3cm
of the water. What is the angle of refrac- B. 3.5cm
tion of the beam in the water. (The refrac-
tive index for water is 1.33) C. 14cm
D. 19cm
A. 18◦
E. all/none/same
B. 30◦
C. 33◦ 132. Sunlight reflects from a concave mirror
and converges to a point 30 cm from the
D. 44◦
mirror’s surface. What is the radius of cur-
128. A refraction is vature of the mirror?
A. A change is speed due to a change in A. 15 cm

light B. 0.3 m
B. A change in direction due to a change C. 30 cm
in speed D. 60 cm
C. A change in light due to a change in
133. electromagnetic waves with the longest
speed
wavelengths are
D. none of above
A. gamma rays
129. Why does scattering of light occur? B. x-rays
A. Light rays are reflected by atmo- C. infrared waves
spheric molecules and scatter in all direc- D. radio waves
tions
B. Light rays are blocked and refracted to 134. Red-light laser contain a long crystal
all directions by the clouds or particles in made of
the air A. agate

B. tourmaline 140. An object is located 35.0 cm from a con-

C. coral vex lens. The lens forms a real image at a
distance of 15.0 cm. What does the 15.0

D. ruby cm represent?
135. An object has a height of 8 cm when it is A. do
12 cm from the lens. If the image distance B. di
is 24 cm what is the height of the image?
C. f
A. -16 cm
D. 1/f
B. 16 cm
141. When any type of wave off a surface
C. 32 cm
it bounces off in a different direction
D. -32 cm
A. Bounce
136. The index of refraction is based off of B. Reflects
A. how well a material speeds up light C. Reverberate
B. how well a material changes the direc- D. Mirror
tion of light
142. An object is 1 meter in front of plane mir-
C. how well a material slows down light ror. The image is
D. how well a material magnifies light A. virtual, inverted, and 1 m behind the
137. Diffraction is mirror
A. The distortion of a wave by passing B. virtual, inverted, and 1 m in front of the

through an object mirror
B. The reflection of a wave from a mirror C. virtual, uprignt, and 1 m behind the
mirror
C. The bending of a wave around a bar-
rier D. none of the above
D. The slowing down of a wave when en- 143. Why are the mirrors on the Webb tele-
tering a new medium scope coated with gold?
A. Because gold is heavy.
138. Where do virtual images form?
B. Because it looks cooler.
A. In the mirror
C. Because gold does a good job reflect-
B. In front of the mirror
ing infrared light.
C. Behind the mirror
D. Because gold reflects visible light well.
D. none of above
144. An argon ion laser emits light at 488 nm.
139. Which color of light in the visible light What is the frequency of this radiation?
spectrum has the most energy? (1m = 1.0 x 109 nm)
A. Red A. 6.15 x 105 Hz
B. Yellow B. 6.15 x 1014 Hz
C. Violet C. 3.00 x 1020 Hz
D. Green D. 2.05 x 106 Hz

1.8 Refraction of light 90
145. What is the condition in which the focal B. Nearsightedness

length of the eye is too short to focus light
on the retina? C. long sight
A. Farsightedness D. Hyperopia
1.8 Refraction of light

1. Light is incident on a plastic block of re- 5. The ratio of sin (x ◦ ) of the angle of inci-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
fractive index 1.5. The angle of incidence dence to sin (x ◦ ) of the angle of refraction
is 50◦ . What is the angle of refraction? is
A. 31o A. Gravitational law
B. 33o B. Reflection law
C. 40o C. Snell’s law
D. 75o D. refraction law
2. The basic cause of refraction is 6. The refractive index of medium 1 relative

to medium 2 is 4/3. Then the refractive
A. When light is incident on a boundary
index of medium 2 relative to medium 1 is
B. When refractive indices of two media
are equal
A. 4/3
C. Change in the speed of light is going
B. 3/4
from one medium to another
C. 16/9
D. When refractive indices of two media
are not equal D. 9/16
3. A ray of light travels from glass to airs 7. vertical shift of a slab is 0.5cm; and thick-
with an angle of incidence of 45o. If the ness of the slab is 2 cm; then the refractive
critical angle is 42o what will happen at index of the slab is
the boundary? A. 3/4
A. refraction takes place B. 1/2
B. total internal reflection takes place C. 4/3
C. travel along the boundary D. 2/3
D. can’t say
8. Critical angle of diamond is
4. The nature of the image formed by concave A. 240
mirror when the object is placed between B. 24.40
the focus (F) and centre of curvature (C) of
the mirror observed by us is C. 23.40
A. real, inverted and diminished D. 26.40
B. virtual, erect and smaller in size 9. How many components of white light?
C. real, inverted and enlarged A. 5
D. virtual, upright and enlarged B. 6

C. 7 15. WHEN A RAY OF LIGHT, PROPAGATING

IN 1 TRANSPARENT MEDIUM, ENTERS AN-
D. 8
OTHER TRANSPARENT MEDIUM, IT IS OB-

10. A ray of light passes from glass into air. SERVED TO
The angle of refraction will be A. REFRACTION OF LIGHT
A. equal to the angle of incidence B. CONCAVE LENS
C. CONVEX LENS
B. greater than the angle of incidence
D. REFLECTION
C. smaller than the angle of incidence
16. Cause of refraction is
D. 450
A. Change in speed of light
11. Swimming pools and the ocean look B. Change in distance travelled by light
than they really are due to refraction
C. Change in velocity of light
A. deeper D. All the above
B. shallower 17. Light from the Sun falling on a convex lens
C. wider will converge at a point called
D. darker A. centre of curvature
B. focus
12. Convex lens is also called C. radius of curvature
A. Converging lens D. optical centre
B. Diverging lens 18. Refractive index of water is
C. Bifocal lens A. 1.44
D. Cylindrical lens B. 1.00
C. 1.5
13. The distance between centre of curvature
and curved surface is called D. 1.33
A. Focal length 19. Light travels at 1.76 EE 8 m/s through

an optical medium. What is the medium?
B. Radius of curvature diamond n=2.45flint glass n=1.70barium
C. Diameter glass n=1.60crown glass n=1.523
D. None of these A. Crown Glass
B. Barium Glass
14. Critical angle with increase in temper- C. Flint Glass
ature of the medium
D. Diamond
A. Stays the same
20. Relative refractive index n21 =
B. Increases
A. n1 / n2
C. Decreases B. n2 / n1
D. Increases then decreases C. n12 / n21
E. None of the above D. c/v

21. While passing from one medium to the B. The speed decreases and the fre-
other if light speeds up the second medium quency remains the same
is said to be C. The speed increases and the fre-
A. Optically rarer quency increases
B. Optically denser D. The speed increases and the fre-
quency remains the same
D. none of above 27. Which of the following is value of 1 mi-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
crometer?
22. The refractive index of a medium is gener-
A. 10-8 m
ally defined with respect to vacuum and is
called B. 10-4 m
A. Refraction of light C. 10-9 m
B. Absolute refractive index D. 10-6 m
C. Total internal reflection 28. Lateral displacement is NOT dependent of
D. Angle of deviation which of the following factors
A. Thickness of the medium
23. Paraxial rays are those which pass
B. Wavelength of light
A. through centre of curvature
C. Colour of light
B. through focus
D. Intensity of light
C. close to principal axis
E. Refractive index
D. All of the above
29. In order for a rainbow to form, which two
24. The brilliance of diamond is due to are the most important factors? (mark 2)
A. Reflection A. Refraction of light
B. Refraction B. Reflection of light
C. Interference C. Transparency
D. Total internal reflection D. Partial reflection
25. When light travels from air into water, the 30. Refraction is when light
light bends A. Is bounced by an object or material.
A. towards the normal line B. Changes speed as it travels in differ-
B. away the normal line ent materials which causes bending.
C. perpendicular to the normal line C. When light speeds up to over 300, 000
km/s
D. in an odd shape
D. none of above
26. What happens to the speed and frequency
of a light ray when it passes from air into 31. Which of the following has the highest re-
water? fractive index?
A. The speed decreases and the fre- A. Glass

quency increases B. Water

C. Kerosen 37. A single reflection of sound is called a(n)

D. Diamond , multiple echos are referred to as
A. reverberation / echos

32. The refractive index of a denser medium B. echo / reverberations
with respect to a rarer medium is
C. refraction / reflection
A. 1
D. reflection / refraction
B. greater than 1
38. The unit of refractive index is
C. smaller than 1
A. m/s
D. negative
B. m/s2
33. THE INITIAL RAY, FALLING ON A GLASS C. kg/m3
SLAB, IS KNOWN AS THE D. no unit
A. INCIDENT RAY 39. Critical angle is the angle of incidence that
B. REFRACTED RAY produces an angle of refraction at
C. EMERGENT RAY A. 180 degrees
D. QUESTION IS WRONG B. 90 degrees
C. 20 degrees
34. Refractive Index of Ruby
D. 120 degrees
A. 1.72
40. When a light ray travels from denser
B. 1.71 medium to rarer medium, the refracted ray
C. 1.81 from normal.
D. 1.55 A. moves towards
B. bends away
35. When angle of incidence is equal to critical C. passes along the normal
angle, angle of refraction is equal to
D. None of these
A. 00
41. when light travels from rarer medium to
B. 900
denser medium it bends
C. 450 A. away from the normal
D. 300 B. towards the normal
36. An absolute value of magnification M is C. doesnt change direction
less than 1, indicates that D. travels at 1800
A. The image size is diminished(smaller) 42. The formula to calculate the refractive in-
than the object dex is(c = speed in vacuum, v = speed in
B. The image size is magnified than the medium)
object size A. n=cv
C. The image is not formed B. n=v/c
D. The image is same size as the object C. n=c/v
size D. v=nc

43. micrometer = 49. A convex lens is-

A. 10-8 m A. Thicker at the middle thinner at the
B. 10-4 m edges
C. 10-9 m B. Thicker at the edges thinner at the mid-
D. 10-6 m dle
C. Uniform thickness everywhere
44. Which of the following is the value of ‘Sin
C’, if ‘C’ is the critical angle, then ‘r’ be- D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
comes 900?
50. Brilliance of diamond is due to
A. n1/n2
B. n2/n1 A. Refraction
C. n1 B. Reflection
D. n2 C. Interference
45. which color has least refractive index? D. Total internal reflection
A. blue 51. The ratio of sin i (angle of incidence) to sin
B. red r (angle of refraction) is
C. yellow A. Gravitational law
D. none of above B. Reflection law
46. The quantity which does not changes dur- C. Snell’s law
ing refraction is
D. refraction law
A. direction
B. speed 52. A small air bubble in a glass block when
seen from above appears to be raised be-
C. frequency
cause of
D. wavelength
A. refraction of light
47. When object moves closer to convex lens,
B. reflection of light
the image formed by it shift
A. away from the lens C. reflection and refraction of light
B. towards the lens D. none of the above

C. first towards and then away from the 53. A:the diamond shines due to Total internal
lens reflection.R:the critical angle for diamond
D. first away and then towards the lens is 24.40
48. When white light enters a glass prism A. Both A and R are true; and R is correct
from air, the angle of deviation is least for explanation of A
A. blue light B. Both A and R are true;but R is not cor-
B. yellow light rect explanation of A
C. red light C. A is true but R is false
D. violet light D. A is false and R is true

54. Atmospheric refraction of light rays is re- C. Focal length

sponsible for which of the following ef- D. None of these
fects?

A. spherical abberation 60. What does it mean to refract?
B. mirages A. bounce off
C. chromatic abberation B. to bend
D. total internal reflection in a gemstone C. curve outward
D. reflect
55. Which of the following is a result of change
in speed of light at the interface? 61. A spherical mirror and a thin spherical lens
A. Reflection have focal length of-20 cm. The mirror and
lens will be:
B. Refraction
A. both concave
C. Critical angle
B. mirror is concave and lens is convex
D. None of these
C. both convex
56. What do we call this tool that separates D. mirror is convex and lens is concave
white light into the colors of the Visible
Spectrum? 62. Which device uses total internal reflec-
A. prism tion?
B. cylinder A. magnifying glass
C. microscope B. optical fibre
D. Stethoscope C. photographic enlarger
D. projector
57. The S.I. unit of refractive index is
A. m-1 63. If the angle of incidence of light traveling
through air, and then striking water is 30
B. ms-1 degrees what is the angle of refraction?
C. s-1 (n=1 air, n=1.33 water)
D. no unit A. 15 degrees
58. What is the power of a concave lens of fo- B. 22 degrees

cal length 2m? C. 43 degrees
A. +0.5 D D. 17 degrees
B. -0.5 D 64. Which prism deviates a light ray through
C. +1.0 D less than 60o
D. -1.0 D A. Equilateral prism
59. The distance between the focal point and B. Total reflecting prism
pole is C. Right angled prism
A. Radius of curvature D. Right angled isosceles prism
B. Chord E. All of the above

65. A ray of light is travelling from a denser 71. If light travels through a piece of glass at
to rarer medium along a normal boundary: 2.1 x 108 m/s, what is the index of re-
A. Is refracted towards the normal fraction of the glass?
B. Is refracted away from the normal A. 1.14
C. Goes along the boundary B. 1.43
D. Does not get refracted
C. 2.10
66. The net deviation produced by a rectangu-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. 6.3
lar glass slab is
A. equal to angle of incidence 72. Unit of refractive index
B. greater than angle of incidence A. m
C. less than angle of incidence
B. mgh
D. zero always
C. J
67. What form does light travel in?
D. None
A. Curved line
B. Zig-Zag 73. Refraction is the phenomenon when light
C. Straight Line
D. none of above A. is bounced by an object or material.
68. Twinkling of stars is due to B. changes speed as it travels in different
A. Total Internal Reflection medium which causes bending.
B. Dispersion C. When light travels in a straight line in
C. Scattering the dark.
D. Atmospheric Refraction D. is blocked by an object or material.
69. A ray passing through of a convex lens
74. the relation between critical angle and re-
will take a path parallel to the principal
fractive index of the medium is
axis after refraction.
A. centre of curvature A. n = Sin C
B. focus B. n = 1/Sin C
C. pole C. n/Sin C = 1
D. parallel to principal axis
D. none
70. Light emerging from water to air will bend
due to the change of speed as it 75. One cannot see through the fog, because
crosses the boundary.
A. refractive index of the fog is very high
A. toward the normal
B. light suffers total reflection at droplets
B. away from the normal
C. not at all C. fog absorbs light
D. none of above D. light is scattered by the droplets

76. Which of the following are true of images B. rarer, denser

formed by a plane (flat) mirror? (mark all
C. rarer, rarer
which are correct!)

A. They are virtual images. D. denser, denser
B. They are upright images 81. The absolute refractive index of water and
C. The images appear the same distance glass respectively are 4/3 and 3/2. Then
behind the mirror as the object is in front. the relative refractive index of glass with
D. They are inverted images respect to water is
A. 2
77. Which of the following describes what will
happen to a light ray incident on a glass- B. 9/8
to-air boundary at greater than the critical
C. 8/9
angle?
A. total internal reflection D. 17/6
B. total external transmission 82. Which colour of light travels fastest in any
C. partial reflection, partial transmission medium except air?
D. partial reflection, total transmission A. yellow
78. When light travels from a rarer to denser B. red
medium, the speed of light , refracted
C. violet
ray the normal, the angle of incidence
is the angle of refraction D. white
A. decreases, bends toward, greater
than 83. Under minimum deviation, which of the fol-
lowing does NOT occur?
B. increases, bends toward, greater than
A. r1 = r2
C. decreases, bends away, less than
B. i1= i2
D. none of above
C. The refracted ray(inside the prism) is
79. The refractive index of glass with respect parallel to the base
to air is 3/2 and the refractive index of
water with respect to air is 4/3. The re- D. The incident ray and emergent ray are
fractive index of glass with respect to wa- parallel
ter will be: E. none of the above
A. 1.525
B. 1.225 84. An object is placed at a distance of 0.25
min front of a plane mirror. The distance
C. 1.425 between the object and image will be
D. 1.125
A. 0.25m
80. The refracted ray moves towards the nor- B. 1m
mal. So the light ray is propogating from
to C. 0.5m
A. denser, rarer D. 0.125m

85. When light ray travels from denser C. Both

medium to rarer medium, the relation be-
tween ∠i and ∠r
A. ∠i = ∠r 91. Mirages are an example for
B. ∠i < ∠r A. critical angle
C. ∠i > ∠r B. total internal reflection
D. no relation between them C. refraction
NARAYAN CHANGDER
86. A ray of light passes from air into carbon D. multiple reflection
disulfide (n = 1.63) at an angle of 28.0◦
to the normal. What is the angle of refrac- 92. The line joining centre of curvature and
tion? pole is called
A. 20.250 A. Optical axis
B. 180 B. Principal axis
C. 140 C. X-axis
D. 16.730 D. Y-axis
87. When light passes at an angle to the nor-
mal from one medium into another in which 93. A doctor has prescribed a corrective lens
its speed is higher of power +1.5D. The prescribed lens is
A. it is bent toward the normal. A. Diverging lens

B. it always lies along the normal. B. Converging lens
C. it is unaffected. C. Concave lens
D. it is bent away from the normal. D. A type of medicine
88. Refractive index of water is 94. The nature of image formed by a convex
A. 1.0003 mirror when the object distance from the
B. 1.31 mirror is less than the distance between
pole and focal point (F) of the mirror would
C. 1.33 be
D. 1.44 A. real, inverted and diminished in size
89. Speed of Light B. real, inverted and enlarged in size
A. 2 x 109 m/s C. virtual, upright and diminished in size
B. 3 x 108 m/s D. virtual, upright and enlarged in size
C. 3 x 109 m/s
95. The speed of light in air is:
D. none of above
A. 3x108 cm/s
90. Refractive index depends on following fac-
tors B. 3x108 mm/s
A. Nature of material C. 3x108 km/s
B. Wave length of light used D. 3x108 m/s

96. When an object is kept between optical A. refraction

centre (O) & focus F1 of a convex lens then
B. diffuse reflection
the position & nature of image is:

C. secular reflection
A. At infinity & Real lnverted
D. optical echo
B. At 2F2 & Virtual errect
C. On the same of object & Virtual errect 102. The factor on which refractive index does
D. Between 2F2 & Infinity & Real Inverted not depend
A. nature of the material
97. Which of the following is the reason for
twinkling of stars? B. wavelength
A. Reflection C. density of the material
B. Total internal reflection D. none of these
C. Refractive index 103. In optics an object which has higher re-
D. Random refraction fractive index is called
98. A beam of parallel rays after falling A. Optically rarer

obliquely on a plane refracting surface B. Optically denser
A. diverges C. Optical density
B. converges D. Refractive index
C. remains parallel but gets deviated
104. If angle of incidence increases, then angle
D. remains parallel without any deviation of emergent
99. In any medium in which the velocity is com- A. increases
paratively is more then the medium is
B. decreases
A. Denser
C. no change
B. Rarer
D. can’t say
C. Both
D. None 105. THE RADII OF THE 2 SPHERES, OF WHICH
THE LENS SURFACES ARE A PART OF
100. Rays incident on diverges from a fo- A. RADII
cal plane of concave lens.
B. RADII OF LENS
A. focus
C. RADII OF PRINCIPLE
B. parallel to principal axis
D. RADII OF CURVATURE
C. parallel rays making some angle with
principal axis 106. Formula of snells law
D. through centre of curvature
A. Sin i /sin r = constant
101. Thanks to this physics phenomenon, we B. n2/n1
can read print on the paper from any direc-
C. Both
tion and we can see lines on the highway
from any direction. D. None

107. Light travelling from a denser medium to C. Goes undeviated

rarer medium along a normal to the bound- D. Depends upon medium
ary
A. is reflected towards the normal 113. A light ray does not bend at a bound-
ary between two media of different opti-
B. is reflected away from the normal cal densities, if its angle of incidence is
C. goes along the boundary A. 180o
D. is not refracted B. 45o
NARAYAN CHANGDER
108. The light follows which law during refrac- C. 0o
tion? D. 90o
A. Fermat’s law
114. The image formed by concave mirror is
B. Refractive index real, inverted and of the same size as that
C. Total internal reflection of the object. The position of object should
be
D. Snell’s law
A. at the focus
109. When light enters from rarer to denser
B. at the centre of curvature
then refracted ray bends towards the nor-
mal then angle i angle r C. between focus and centre of curvature
A. Lessthan D. beyond centre of curvature
B. Greaterthan 115. Image formed in a photographic camera
C. Equal is
D. None A. virtual and diminished

B. real and magnified
110. The broad wavelength range of visible
spectrum is-The broad wavelength range C. real and diminished
of visible spectrum is D. sometimes real and sometimes virtual
A. (10000-20000) A 116. Refractive index of a medium depends on
B. (4000-7000) A A. Nature of the medium
C. (2000-4000) A B. Physical condition
D. None of these C. Colour or wavelength of light
111. The laws of reflection hold good for D. All the above
A. PLANE MIRROR 117. A ray of light of wavelength 5400 A◦
B. CONVEX MIRROR suffers refraction from air to glass. The
refractive index of glass with respect to
C. CONCAVE MIRROR
air is 3/2 find the wavelength of light in
D. ALL OF THE ABOVE glass.
112. When light passes from a denser medium A. 3500 A◦
to rarer medium it bends B. 3800 A◦
A. Towards normal C. 3600 A◦
B. Away from normal D. 5200 A◦

118. When the angle of refraction is 900 the 124. THE ANGLE, BETWEEN THE INCIDENT
angle of incidence is called as RAY AND THE NORMAL AT THE POINT OF
INCIDENCE IS KNOWN AS

A. Angle of incidence
B. Critical angle A. ANGLE OF INCIDENCE
C. Angle of total internal reflection B. ANGLE OF REFRACTION
D. Angle of refraction C. PRISM

D. LENS
119. Absolute refractive index, n =
A. c/v 125. One half of a convex lens is covered with
black paper. Will this lens produce a com-
B. v/c plete image of the object?
C. 1/c A. Yes
D. 1/v B. No
120. Effect of refraction of light on frequency C. Only half image will be formed
A. Increases D. Depends upon the size of the object
B. Decreases 126. While passing from one medium to the
C. Does not change other if light slows down the second
D. None medium is said to be
A. Optically rarer
121. When an object is placed at principal fo-
cus, the image formed due to convex lens B. Optically denser
is C. None of the above
A. enlarged D. none of above
B. diminished 127. Light travels through a liquid at
C. highly enlarged 2.25x108ms-1. What is the index of the
D. point sized liquid?
A. 1.33
122. Angle of incidence is angle of refrac-
tion. B. 1.0
A. equal to C. 1.523
B. not equal to D. 2.45
C. always greater than 128. The speed of light in substance X is

D. always lesser than 1.25x108 m/s and that in air is 3x108
m/s. The refractive index of this sub-
123. Laws of Refraction were given by stance will be:
A. Willebrod Snell A. 2.4
B. Albert Einstein B. 0.4
C. Newton C. 4.2
D. Aristotle D. 3.75

129. In an experiment to trace the path of a 134. If convex lens is placed in water, its focal
ray of light through a glass prism for dif- length
ferent values of angle of incidence a stu-
A. increases
dent would find that the emergent ray:
B. decreases
A. is parallel to the refracted ray
C. remains constant
B. is parallel to the incident ray
D. none of these
C. bends at an angle to the direction of
NARAYAN CHANGDER
incident ray 135. In any medium in which the velocity is
D. none of above comparatively is less then it is medium
A. Denser
130. Refractive index of glass is 3/2. Then
the speed of light in glass is B. Rarer
C. Both
A. 3 x 108 m/s
D. None
B. 2 x 107 m/s
C. 3 x 106 m/s 136. A boy uses blue colour of light to find
the refractive index of glass. He then re-
D. 2 x 108 m/s
peats the experiment using red colour of
light.How will the refractive index of glass
131. When white light enters a glass prism
be?
from air, the angle of deviation is maxi-
mum for A. the same
A. blue light B. µ decreases
B. yellow light C. µ increases
C. red light D. same as speed of light
D. violet light 137. If a material has an index of refraction
of 2.3, how fast will light travel through
132. The type of mirror used in reflector in au- that material?
tomobile lights is
A. 2.3 x 108 m/s
A. Plane mirror
B. 6.9 x 108 m/s
B. Concave mirror
C. 3.0 x 108 m/s
C. Convex mirror
D. 1.3 x 108 m/s
138. The speed of light in vacuum is
133. angle of incidence is critical angle when 3x108m/s. its speed in ruby of index
angle of refraction is of refraction 1.54 is
A. 45 A. 1.95 x 108m/s
B. 60 B. 5.1 x 10-9m/s
C. 90 C. 4.62 x 108m/s
D. 0 D. none of above

139. Light travels through a liquid at 1.4x108 144. Light passing from air to glass will cause
m/s. What is the liquid’s index of refrac- the light to
tion?

A. maintain its original speed
A. 2.14
B. accelerate while it is in glass
B. 2.50
C. 1.78 C. increase its speed
D. 3.31 D. reduce its speed
140. The refractive index of transparent 145. What action of prism is used in a binocu-
medium is greater than one because lar?
A. Speed of light in vacuum < speed of A. Deviation through 90o
light in tansparent medium
B. Inversion of prism without deviation
B. Speed of light in vacuum > speed of
light in tansparent medium C. Deviation through 60o
C. Speed flight in vacuum = speed of D. Deviation through 180o
light in tansparent medium
E. None of the above
D. Frequency of light wave changes when
it moves from rarer to denser medium
146. What is the sign of power of a lens
141. Light passing from air to glass will bend A. Convex-positiveConcave-negative
due to the change of speed as it
crosses the boundary. B. Concave-positiveConvex-negative
A. toward the normal C. Both-positive
B. away from the normal D. Both-negative
C. not at all
D. none of above 147. Refractive indices of water, sulphuric
acid, glass and carbon disulphide are 1.33,
142. What causes refraction? 1.43, 1.53, 1.63. The light travels slow-
A. A rigid boundary which causes the est in
wave to bounce back. A. Sulphuric acid
B. The change of speed of the light as it
B. Glass
travels from one medium to another.
C. Multiple reflections of sound. C. Water
D. more than one reflection D. Carbon disulphide
143. Why is a total reflecting prism preferred 148. Speed of light of a medium depends upon
over a plane mirror of the medium.
A. There is no loss in intensity of the light A. Optical density
after reflection
B. Only reflection takes place B. Material
C. No light is absorbed/ reflected C. Length

D. All of the above D. Density

149. Refractive index of a medium doesn’t de- 155. Light travels through a liquid at 2.25 EE
pend on 8 m/s. What is the index of the liquid?
A. Nature of the material A. 1.33
B. Wavelength of incident light B. 1.0
C. Frequency of incident light
C. 1.523
D. All of the above
D. 2.45
NARAYAN CHANGDER
150. The refractive index of water is:
A. 1.33 156. Refractive Index of sapphire
B. 1.50 A. 1.77
C. 2.42 B. 1.72
D. 1.36 C. 1.73
151. When a ray of light travels from a rarer D. 1.88
medium to a denser medium it
A. Bends away from the normal 157. A concave lens always produces:
B. Passes undeviated A. Real Inverted & Enlarged Image
C. Bends towards the normal B. Virtual Erect & diminished image
D. None C. Real Inverted & diminished image
√
152. Refractive index of a medium is 2, then D. Virtual Erect & Enlarged image
its critical angle is
A. 220 158. Which of the following lenses would you
prefer to use while reading small found in
B. 450
a dictionary?
C. 600
A. A convex length of focal length 50cm
D. 150
B. A concave lens of focal length 50cm
153. When a ray of light travels from a denser
medium to a rarer medium it C. A convex lens of focal length 5cm
A. Bends towards the normal D. A concave lens of focal length 5cm
B. Bends away from the normal
159. Why are mirages more likely to occur in
C. Passes undeviated summer than in winter?
D. None
A. The Sun is higher in the sky in summer.
154. When light falls on a smooth polished sur- B. The air in the summer is more likely to
face, most of it be hot near the ground
A. is reflected in the same direction
C. Air currents travel in different direc-
B. is reflected in different directions tions in winter and in summer.
C. is scattered D. The Sun is brighter in summer than in
D. is refracted into the second medium winter

160. For light to pass from medium (1) of in- A. away from the lens on the same side
dex n1 to medium (2) of index n2 where of object
n2 < n1, the angle of incidence must be

B. toward the lens
than the refracted angle.
C. away from the lens on the other side
A. greater of lens
B. smaller D. first towards and then away from the
C. equal lens
D. none of above 166. What happens to the speed of a light ray
when it passes from air into water?
161. Refractive Index (n)=
A. The speed increases
A. n=v/c
B. The speed decreases
B. n=c/v
C. The speed remains the same
C. n=c.v
D. none of above
D. n=c+v
167. Which quantity is equivalent to the prod-
162. The process of changing speed when light uct of the absolute index of refraction of
travels from one medium to another is water and the speed of light in water?
called
A. wavelength of light in a vacuum
A. Reflection
B. frequency of light in water
B. Refraction C. sine of the angle of incidence
C. Diffraction D. speed of light in a vacuum
D. Interface
168. The refractive index of a glass prism is
163. When angle of incident (i) equals to crit- 1.9. Determine its critical angle.
ical angle (c), if light is traveled from a A. 23o
denser medium to a rarer medium, then
B. 30o
A. total internal reflection occurs.
C. 32◦
B. angle of refraction is equal to 900
D. 35o
C. light is refracted out
169. What makes objects visible?
D. light travel in straight line
A. the absorption of light by objects
164. what is absolute refractive index B. the reflected light from the object
A. when one medium is vacuum C. the total internal reflection taking
B. when one medium is water and other place in an object
is glass D. none of above
C. when one medium is glass and air
170. The bending of light as it moves from one
D. none transparent material to another
165. When object moves closer to a concave A. reflection

lens the image by it shift B. refraction

C. spectrum 176. If refractive index of a medium increases,

the speed of light in that medium
D. pitch
A. increases
171. The midpoint of lens is called B. decreases
A. Centre of curvature C. does not change
B. Optical centre D. none of these
C. Centroid 177. Can you take the photo of a mirage?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. Orthocentre A. no
B. yes
172. A ray of light travelling in air goes into
water. The angle of refraction will be: C. some times
D. can’t say
A. 90o
178. A concave mirror of radius 30 cm is placed
B. Smaller than the angle of incidence
in water. It’s focal length in air and water
C. Equal to the angle of incidence differ by
D. Greater than the angle of incidence A. 15
B. 20
173. THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE OPTICAL
CENTRE AND PRINCIPAL FOCUS OF THE C. 30
LENS IS KNOWN AS D. 0
A. CONCAVE LENS 179. Which of the following is a natural phe-
B. CONVEX LENS nomenon which is caused by the dispersion
of sunlight in the sky?
C. GLASS PRISM
A. Twinkling of stars
D. LENS B. Stars seem higher than they actually
are
174. The number of telephone signals trans-
mitted through optical fibre is C. Rainbow
D. Advanced sunrise and delayed sunset
A. 4000
B. 3000 180. Mirages are
A. virtual image
C. 2000
B. real image
D. 1000
C. virtual image of the sky
175. Name the factors that affect the lateral D. secret of nature
displacement of light as it passes through
a rectangular glass slab. 181. Which is more optical denser medium
A. Cold air
A. thickness of block
B. Hot air
B. angle of incidence
C. Both cold and hot air have same opti-
C. refractive index of glass cal density
D. wavelenght of light D. Can’t say

182. Which statement describes monochro- A. Shorter

matic light? B. Taller

A. light that does not diffract C. Same size
B. light that has a single frequency D. Stout
C. light that spreads out when shone
through a glass prism 188. The separation of white light into its com-
ponent colors is known as:
D. light that travels at the same speed in
all materials A. polarization
B. refraction
183. Which one of the following characteris-
tics of light is not altered by refraction? C. reflection
A. Speed D. dispersion
B. Wavelength 189. Light travels through a liquid at a speed

C. Frequency 2.25 x 108 m/s. What is the refractive
index of the liquid?
D. Intensity
A. 1.33
184. In a glass slab, refraction takes place B. 1.0
times.
C. 1.523
A. 1
D. 2.45
B. 2
C. 3 190. Why is the component of colour in a
rainbow can be seen when light passes
D. 4 through a glass prism?
185. The critical angle of diamond is A. phenomena of scattering of light
A. 24.40 B. phenomena of dispersion of light
B. 25.40 C. phenomena of reflection of light
C. 26.40 D. phenomena of diffraction of light
D. 27.40 191. A ray of light traveling from air into
186. A total reflecting prism is preferred over crown glass strikes the surface at an angle
a plane mirror in which of the following? of 30 degrees. What is the angle of refrac-
tion? (air n=1, crown glass n=1.532)
A. A periscope
A. 39.7 degrees
B. A binocular
B. 19.2 degrees
C. A camera
C. 59.1 degrees
D. All of the above
D. 12.3 degrees
E. None of the above
192. Which of the two-glass and water is op-
187. Suppose you are inside the water in a tically denser?
swimming pool, your friend is standing
on the edge of the swimming pool. Your A. glass
friend appears to be B. Water

C. Both A. CENTRES OF PRINCIPLE

D. None B. CENTRES OF RADII
C. CENTRES OF CURVATURE
193. The basic of refraction is
D. CENTRES OF LENS
A. when light is incident on a boundary
B. when refractive indices of two media 198. A convex mirror
are equal A. Curves inwards
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. change in speed of light is going form B. Curves outwards
one medium to another
C. Curves sideways
D. when refractive indices of two media D. Curves in multiple directions
are not equal
199. The line joining the centre of curvature
194. A ray of light traveling from air into glass and the pole is called
strikes the surface at an angle of 30◦ with
the surface. What is the angle of refrac- A. Optical axis
tion? (air n=1, glass n=1.5) B. Principal axis
A. 19.2◦ C. X-axis
B. 35.2◦ D. Y-axis
C. 19.26◦ 200. When will total internal reflection occur?
D. 20◦ A. When light travels from a less dense
to a more dense medium
195. The distance between incident and emer-
gent ray is called B. When the angle of incidence is smaller
than the critical angle
A. Horizontal Shift
C. When the angle of incidence is greater
B. Vertical Shift than the critical angle
C. Lateral Shift D. When the light cannot pass through a
D. None of these medium
196. Angle of deviation is 201. The angle of refraction for critical angle
is
A. angle by which incident ray deviates
through prism A. 450
B. Angle between the incident ray and the B. 600
emergent ray is called the angle of devia- C. 900
tion.
D. 1200
C. angle between incident ray and the
normal 202. The air bubbles in water behaves like
lens.
D. angle between incident ray and re-
fracted ray A. concave
B. convex
197. THE CENTRES, OF THE 2 SPHERES OF
WHICH THE 2 SURFACES OF THE GIVEN C. concavo convex
LENS, ARE A PART IS KNOWN AS D. bi-convex

203. Which of the following best describes B. 1.88 x 108 m/s

what happens to an incident ray of light
C. 1.6 x 108 m/s
on a glass-to-air boundary at an angle

greater than the critical angle? D. 5.64 x 108 m/s
A. Partial reflection, total transmission 209. A TRANSPARENT MEDIUM, BOUNDED
B. Total internal reflection BY 2 SURFACES, OH WHICH AT LEAST 1
C. Partial reflection, partial transmission IS SPHERICAL IS KNOWN AS
D. Total external transmission A. FOCAL LENGTH

B. LENS
204. Refractive index of glass
C. GLASS PRISM
A. 1.33
B. 1.5 D. CONVEX LENS
C. 1.7 210. What is the significance of +ve sign of

D. 31 magnification?
A. Image-Real & Inverted
205. The angle of incidence i and refraction r
are equal in a transparent slab when the B. Image-Virtual & errect
value of i is
C. Image-Real & errect
A. 00
D. Image-Virtual & Inverted
B. 450
C. 900 211. refraction index is depend on
D. depend on the material of the slab A. Sin i / sin r

B. Sin r / sin i
206. A magnified real image is formed by a
convex lens when the object is at C. 1 / sin r
A. F D. 1 / Sin i
B. between F and 2F
212. Reason for twinkling of stars in the sky
C. 2F is
D. (a) and (b) both A. Distance
207. When there is a refraction through a rect- B. Different densities in air
angular glass slab then, the extended inci-
C. Refraction of light from stars
dent ray & emergent ray are:
D. All of the above
A. Perpendicular to each other
B. Intersect each other 213. Refractive index of a transparent
C. Make angle 45◦ with each other medium is always
D. Parallel to each other A. Lesser than 1

B. Greater than 1
208. What is the speed of light in a material
that has an index of refraction of 1.88? C. Equal to 1
A. 3.0 x 108 m/s D. None

214. Which of the following is not a condition 219. How is light affected by an increase in
for total internal reflection the refractive index?
A. The light ray must pass from a denser A. Its frequency increases
to rarer medium
B. Its frequency decreases
B. The angle of incidence must be greater
than critical angle C. Its speed increases
C. The striking of light must happen at the D. Its speed decreases
NARAYAN CHANGDER
hypotenuse of the prism
220. A beam of light travels fastest in
A. a vacuum
215. When light passes from one medium into B. air
another, refraction occurs. This is because
of C. water
A. reflection of light. D. a diamond
B. a change in color of the light.
221. The ratio of the speed of light in vacuum
C. a change in velocity of the light. to the speed of light in that medium is
D. the absorption of light. called
A. Refractive index
216. The ray which passes through is un-
deviated. B. Refraction
A. Focus C. Absolute refractive index
B. Pole D. Reflection
C. Centre of curvature
222. What direction does the ray bend when
D. None of these entering a more optically dense material,
where the wave travels more slowly?
217. Refraction is the change in of light
when light travels through two medium of A. Towards the normal.
different densities B. Away from the normal.
A. direction C. No change.
B. illustions D. Answer is not listed above.
C. situation
223. A ray of light is incident on one of the par-
D. densities
allel faces of a rectangular glass slab. It
218. Twinkling of stars is due to atmospheric emerges out of the opposite parallel face
making angle of emergence
A. refraction of light by different layers of
refractive indices. A. equal to angle of incidence
B. dispersion of light. B. greater than angle of incidence
C. internal refraction by clouds C. smaller than angle of incidence
D. none of above D. equal to zero

224. When white light enters a prism, it gets 229. In dispersion the splitting of white light
split into its constituent colours. This is into colours
due to

A. 8
A. different refractive index for different B. 6
wavelength of each colour
C. 9
B. each colours has same velocity in the
D. 7
prism.
C. prism material have high density. 230. Virtual images of distant high objects
cause optical illusion called
D. Scattering of light
A. Density
225. The refractive index of a medium is B. Refraction
greater than 1. Then the velocity of light
in that medium is C. Total internal reflection
D. Mirage
A. greater than the velocity of light in vac-
uum 231. A ray of light is traveling in a direction
B. less than the velocity of light in vacuum perpendicular to the boundary of a paral-
lel glass slab. The ray of light:
C. equal to the velocity of light in vacuum
A. Is refracted towards the normal
D. None of these
B. Does not get refracted
226. Applications of total internal reflection C. Is reflected along the same path
A. Mirage D. Is refracted away from the normal
B. Refraction 232. The parallel rays to principal axis after
C. OFC refraction converge at
D. 1 and 3 A. Pole
B. Centre of curvature
227. Twinkling of stars is due to
C. Beyond C
A. Total internal reflection
D. Focus
B. Dispersion
233. Net deviation produced by the glass slab
C. Scattering
A. 00
D. Atmospheric refraction
B. 900
228. A ray of light travels from glass to air C. 450
with an angle of incidence of 35o. If the
critical angle is 42o, what will happen at D. depends on the angle of incidence
the glass airinterface? 234. Light travels in a path.
A. refraction take place A. straight
B. total internal reflection B. cury
C. light travels along the boundary C. bent
D. reflectiontakes place D. winding

235. Value of The Index of Refraction of Air 241. Which of the following is the reason for
A. 1 the formation of mirage?
B. 1.33 A. Reflection
C. 1.56 B. Total internal reflection
D. none of above C. Refraction

D. Scattering of light
236. The relation between refractive index
NARAYAN CHANGDER
and optical density is 242. n1 sin i = n2 sin r is called law.
A. inversely proportional A. Huygen’s
B. directly propotional B. Newton’s
C. equal C. Fermat’s
D. no relation D. Snell’s
237. Shortest distance between incident and 243. is used to examine the inner parts of
emergent rays is of the glass slab. nose, stomach by doctors.
A. Virtual shift A. Stethoscope
B. Lateral shift B. Endoscope
C. Parallel shift C. Kaledioscope
D. Perpendicular shift D. Microscope
238. A convex lens can form 244. Lateral displacement depends on

A. Real image only A. Angle of incidence
B. Virtual image only B. Physical condition
C. Both Real & Virtual image C. Thickness of medium
D. Depends upon focal length of the lens D. Refractive index
239. THE LINE JOINING THE CENTRES OF CUR- 245. Which of the following factors change
VATURE OF THE 2 SURFACES OF A LENS IS as light waves pass from one transparent
KNOWN AS ITS medium into another?
A. OPTICAL CENTRE A. wavelength and speed
B. OPTICAL DENSER B. wavelength and frequency
C. PRINCIPAL AXIS C. frequency and speed
D. RADII D. frequency, speed and wavelength
240. Which medium has maximum optical den- 246. If the convex lens is placed in water, its
sity focal length is
A. Glass A. increases
B. Diamond B. decreases
C. Water C. remains constant
D. Air D. either increase or decrease

247. Light is travelling through air. The light 252. is the main reason for brilliance of di-
strikes a glass block at an angle of inci- amonds
dence of 45◦ . The glass has a refractive

index of 1.4.What is the angle of refrac-
tion of the light as it enters the glass? B. OFC
C. Mirage
A. 29o
D. Critical angle
B. 30o
C. 32o 253. Which of the following is an example for
Total internal reflection?
D. 82o
A. Mirage
248. Relative refractive index = B. Brilliance of diamond
A. v1/v2 C. Optical fibre
B. v1.v2 D. All of the above
C. v1+v2 254. The deflection of light by minute particles
D. None and molecules of the atmosphere in all di-
rection is called of light.
249. Refractive index of diamond A. dispersion
A. 2.45 B. scattering
B. 2.41 C. interference
C. 1.76 D. tyndell effect
D. 1.43 255. Object should be placed at a distance

of from the convex lens whose focal
250. When a ray of light enters from one length is 5 cm to get a real image.
medium to another having different opti- A. Approximately 10 cm
cal densities it bends. beacuse
B. Above 5 cm
A. of different optical densities
C. Below 10 cm
B. speed of light changes
D. Not sure
C. obstruction of light changes
256. The angle of deviation produced by glass
D. frequency of light changes slab i s
251. Where should an object be placed in front A. 00
of a convex lens to get a real image of the B. 200
size of the object
C. 300
A. At the principal focus of the lens D. 900
B. At twice the focal length
257. As the ray of light passes from air to
C. At infinity glass, state how the wavelength of light
D. Between optical centre of the lens & changes.
it’s principal focus A. wavelength increases

B. wavelength decreases 263. The separation of light into its individual

C. wavelength remains constant frequencies is
D. wavelength decreases and then in- A. refraction

creases B. reflection
258. What is the index of refraction of a re- C. transparency

fractive liquid if the angle of incidence in D. dispersion
the air is 35 degrees and the angle of re-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
fraction is 14 degrees? 264. Which color of light is most refracted dur-
ing dispersion by a prism and why?
A. 1.33
A. red and µ violet > µ red
B. 2.21
B. yellow and µ yellow > µ red
C. 2.37
C. green and µ violet > µ green
D. 1.72
D. violet and µ violet > µ red
259. What is S.I unit of refractive index
265. Which of the following factors change
A. Newton
when light refracts?
B. Joule
A. Frequency only
C. m/s
B. Wavelength only
D. No unit
C. Speed and frequency
260. The angle made by the incident ray and D. Wavelength and speed
normal drown at the point of incidence is
called 266. of air increases with density
A. Refracted angle A. Refractive Index
B. Reflected angle B. OFC
C. Incident angle C. Total internal reflection
D. None of the above D. None
261. Concave lens is also called 267. Optical fibres work on

A. Converging lens A. Reflection
B. Diverging lens B. Refraction
C. Bifocal lens C. Total internal reflection
D. Cylindrical lens D. Multiple reflections
262. The point at which the incident ray 268. As light travels from a rarer to a denser
touches the plane is called medium it will have
A. Refracted point A. increased velocity
B. Reflected point B. decreased velocity
C. Incident point C. decreased wavelength
D. None of the above D. both (b) and (c)

269. A concave mirror C. 42o

A. Curves inwards D. None of the above

B. Curves outwards 275. If a pulse of red light and a pulse of blue
C. Curves sideways light travel in vacuum
D. Curves in multiple directions A. The red pulse travels faster because
its index of refraction is smaller
270. A lens is bounded by two spherical sur-
faces inward is called B. The blue pulse travels faster
A. plane convex lens C. The two pulses travel at the same
speed
B. plane concave lens
D. The relative speed depends on the
C. double convex lens exact wavelengths of the red and blue
D. double concave lens pulses
271. The air layer of atmosphere whose tem- 276. Which are NOT correct for total internal
perature is less then the hot layer behave reflection to take place
as optically
A. The incident angle should be less than
A. denser medium the critical angle
B. rarer medium B. The incident angle should be greater
C. inactive medium than the critical angle
D. either denser or rarer medium C. Light should travel from a rarer to a
denser medium
272. Angle of deviation does not depend on
D. both 1 and 3
A. frequency of light 277. Mirage is an

B. angle of incidence A. optical disturbance
C. angle of prism B. real image
D. none of above C. optical illusion
D. none of these
273. choose the conditions where light does
not bend when entering a medium of dif- 278. A beam of light travels slowest in
ferent optical density,
A. a vacuum
A. incident ray is normal to the refracting
B. air
surface
B. any obliquely incident ray C. water
C. angle of incidence is 90◦ D. a diamond
D. angle of incidence is 0◦ 279. The lens formula is
274. The critical angle for the glass-air inter- A. 1/v + 1/u = 1/f
face is- B. 1/v-1/u = 1/f
A. 45o C. 1/u-1/v = 1/f
B. 32o D. 1/v + 1/u = 1/R

280. If angle of incidence is greater than criti- B. 5.1 x 10-9 m/s

cal angle, then takes place.
C. 4.62 x 108 m/s
A. Refraction
D. 3 x 108 m/s
B. Diffraction
C. Total internal reflection 286. The object distance (x) from sphere in or-
der to form a real image of the object on
D. Interference
the other side is
NARAYAN CHANGDER
281. As light leaves air and enters water or A. x = R / (n-1)
glass it
B. x = (n-1) / R
A. gets faster and bends towards the nor-
mal C. x = R / (n+1)
B. gets faster and bends away from the D. x = (n+1) / R
normal
C. gets slower and bends towards the 287. A ray of light passes from a medium X to
normal another medium Y. No refraction of light
occurs if the ray of light hits the boundary
D. gets slower and bends away from the
of medium Y at an angle of:
normal
A. 1200
282. For which colour, refractive index of
glass is maximum? B. 900
A. red C. 450
B. violet D. 00
C. green
288. The distance between the parallel rays
D. yellow through the glass slab is called
283. The bending of light is called A. lateral shift
A. a rainbow B. incident ray
B. refraction C. emergent ray
C. reflection
D. refracted ray
D. absorption
289. When a red light ray travels from air into
284. Mirages is an example of
a glass block, its
A. Refraction
A. velocity increases and its wavelength
B. Reflection decreases
C. Total Internal reflection B. velocity decreases and its frequency
D. none of the above stays the same
285. The speed of light in vacuum is C. velocity decreases and its frequency
3x108m/s. its speed in ruby of refrac- increases
tive index 1.54 is D. velocity remains the same and its
A. 1.95 x 108 m/s wavelength decreases

290. The classic mirage of water on the high- 295. Which of the following materials can not
way on a hot day occurs when be used to make a lens
A. Water

A. the light refracts due to a layer of hot
air over cooler air on the roadway. B. Glass
B. the light refracts due to a layer of hot C. Plastic
air right over on the roadway.
D. Clay
C. The sky reflects from the hot pave-
ment. 296. Fiber optic cables work because of the
principle of
D. none of above
A. total internal refraction
291. When light ray travels from rarer B. incomplete internal refraction
medium to denser medium, refracted ray
C. total internal reflection
the normal.
D. partial internal reflection
A. moves towards
B. passes away from 297. Snell’s law
C. bends away from A. n1 sini = n2 sinr

B. n2 sini = n1 sinr
D. None of these
C. n1 / n2 = sini / sinr
292. When light passes from a rarer medium D. none of the above
to a denser medium it bends
A. Towards normal 298. Among the following, Twinkling of stars
is due to
B. Away from normal
C. Goes undeviated
B. Dispersion
D. Depends upon the medium
C. Scattering
293. The refractive indices of four materials A, D. Atmospheric refraction
B, C, D are 1.33, 1.43, 1.71 and 1.52 re-
spectively. When the speed of light rays 299. Which of the following is true regarding
pass from air into these materials, they re- the index of refraction of a substance?
fract they maximum in: A. n=c/v
A. Material A B. n=v/c
B. Material B C. n=cv
C. Material C D. n=c+v
D. Material D 300. Large number of thin stripes of black
paint are made on the surface of a convex
294. Sin i/ sin r= constant this law is also lens of focal length 20 cm to catch the im-
called as? age of a white horse. The image will be
A. newtons law A. a zebra of black stripes
B. refraction law 3 B. a horse of black stripes
C. snells law C. a horse of less brightness
D. gravitational law D. a zebra of less brightness

301. The S.I unit of power of Lens is 306. The change in the direction of the path of
A. Joule(J) light when it passes from one transparent
medium to another transparent medium is
B. centimetre (cm) called
C. Watt(W) A. Reflection
D. dioptre (D) B. Refraction
302. Object should be placed at a distance of C. Total internal reflection
NARAYAN CHANGDER
from lens whose focal length is 5 cm D. Critical angle
to get a real and same size image.
307. Which of the following is the basic princi-
A. at 10 cm ple behind working of optical fibre?
B. above 5 cm A. Reflection
C. below 10 cm B. Total internal reflection
D. not sure C. Refraction
303. Refraction is D. Scattering of light
A. the bending of light as it passes into 308. Which are two laws of refraction
new medium and changes speed A. The incidenct ray
B. the bending of light around or through B. Refracted ray
a barrier and changes speed
C. The incidenct ray and Refracted ray
C. when light bounces off a boundary and
changes speed D. refractive index and Refracted ray
D. the bending of light as it crosses a 309. n= c/v is the equation of

boundary into a new medium with the A. Law of Diffraction
same speed
B. The Index of Refraction
304. are used for some temperature mea- C. Law of Reflection
surement operators and also in detection
D. Law of Refraction(Snell’s Law)
sensors
A. OFC 310. Mr. A is going on a road at 12 noon. He
saw a mirage on the road. Imagine why it
B. Mirage happens.
C. Brilliance of diamonds A. Due to reflection
D. Refractive Index B. Due to refraction
305. nA = 1.08 ; nB = 1.008 ; nC = 2.4; nD = C. Due to total internal reflection
2.15. So which of the following is true? D. None of these
A. Speed of light is minimum in medium C
311. The clear sky appears blue because
B. Light speed is minimum in B
A. blue light gets absorbed in the atmo-
C. Speed of light is maximum in medium sphere.
A B. ultraviolet radiations are absorbed in
D. None of the above the atmosphere.

C. violet and blue lights get scattered 317. A Band of color in a rainbow, or from a
more than lights of all other colours by the light passing through a prism is know as:
atmosphere.

A. rainbow
D. light of all other colours is scattered
B. spectrum
more than the violet and blue colour lights
by the atmosphere. C. refraction
D. none of above
312. The medium which has the speed of light
is more is
318. Name the subjective property of light re-
A. optically denser lated to its wavelength.
B. optically rarer A. refractive index
C. Normal B. frequency
D. None of the above C. colour
313. f = 1/v-1/u is the formula of D. velocity
A. Mirrors 319. The speed of light in vacuum is
B. Magnification 3x108m/s and the speed of light in di-
C. Lens amond is 1.24x108m/s. the refractive
index of diamond is
D. Lens maker
A. 2.42
314. The return of light into the same medium B. 0.42
after striking a polished surface is called
C. 1
A. Refraction
D. 3.72
B. Reflection
C. Total internal reflection 320. The ray of light incident normally on the
surface separating the two media
D. Deviation
A. Passes undeviated
315. which one of the following is not an ap-
plication of total internal reflection B. Bends towards the normal
A. mirages C. Bends away from the normal
B. rainbow D. None
C. optical fibre 321. The critical angle for a medium with re-
D. shining of diamond spect to air is 450 , then the refractive in-
dex of that medium with respect to air is
316. The distance between focal point and pole
is called √
A. 2
A. Radius of curvature
B. √1
2
B. Chord
C. √2
C. Focal length 3
√
3
D. None of these D. 2

322. The best definition of refraction is A. (i)-right ; (ii)-wrong

A. passing through a boundary B. (i), (ii)-correct ; But (ii) is not correct
B. changing direction when crossing a reason for (i)
boundary C. (i), (ii)-correct ; But (ii) is correct rea-
C. changing speed at a boundary son
D. bouncing off a boundary D. Both are wrong
328. What is the refractive index of a fibre op-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
323. Patient’s stomach can be viewed by in-
serting pipe. tic pipe, if the critical angle is 300?
A. vacuum A. 2.0
B. water B. 1.7
C. light C. 2.4
D. none of these D. 0.5
324. THE PHYSICAL QUANTITY WHICH IS 329. The refractive index of glass for light go-
AN INDICATOR OF THE SPEED OF LIGHT ing from air to glass is 3/2. The refractive
THROUGH A GIVEN MEDIUM IS KNOWN index for light going from glass to air will
AS be:
A. OPTICAL CENTRE A. 1/3
B. OPTICAL DENSITY B. 4/5
C. PRINCIPAL AXIS C. 4/6
D. LENS D. 5/2
325. A bunch of thin fibres form a 330. Refraction of light by the earth’s atmo-
sphere due to variation in air density is
A. cable pipe
called
B. light pipe
A. atmospheric reflection
C. mirage
B. atmospheric dispersion
C. atmospheric scattering
326. The speed of light in vacuum is D. atmospheric refraction
3x108m/s and the speed of light in di-
amond is 1.24x108m/s. the index of 331. What color has the shortest wavelength
refraction in diamond is and highest frequency?
A. 2.42 A. Violet
B. 0.42 B. Orange
C. 1 C. Red
D. none of above D. Blue
327. (i) Light changes its direction when it is 332. According to Willebord Snell, light pass-
refracted.(ii) Light changes its speed when ing from air to glass will cause the light
it travels in different mediums. to

1.9 Absolute & relative refractive index 121
A. maintain its original speed D. Camera

B. accelerate while it is in glass
334. The bluish colour of water in deep sea is

C. increase its speed due to
D. reduce its speed A. the presence of algae and other plants
333. An erecting prism is used in a found in water
A. Slide projector B. reflection of sky in water
B. Periscope C. scattering of light
C. Binocular D. absorption of light by the sea
1.9 Absolute & relative refractive index

1. A ray of light travels from air into glass at B. 1, 7
an incident angle of 30o. Find the angle of C. 1, 6
refraction. (The refractive index of glass
is 1.5) D. 1, 5
A. 19.7o 5. A ray of light leaves a diamond and enters

B. 19o air. The angle of refraction is 15o. If di-
amond has n=2.42, what is the angle of
C. 19.5o incidence
D. 19.3o A. 51.2 degrees
2. What is the speed of light in ice (n=1.309) B. 42.6 degrees
A. 2.29 ∗ 108 m/s C. 38.8 degrees
B. 2.43 ∗ 108 m/s D. 36.8 degrees
C. 4.36 ∗ 10−9 6. An object is placed in front of two mirrors
D. 4.36 ∗ 108 m/s which form an angle of 600. How many
images are formed?
3. The refractive index of diamond is 2.42.
A. 2
A ray of light passing from inside of a dia-
mond into air makes an angle of incidence B. 3
of 20o. Find the angle of refraction. C. 4
A. 54.9 degrees D. 5
B. 55.9 degrees
7. A ray of light enters air from glass. The
C. 56.9 degrees angle of incidence is 35.0◦ and the angle
D. 57.8 degrees of refraction is 68.9◦ . Find the refractive
index of the glass.
4. A person saw the bottom of the pool with A. 37.9
the real depth is 2 meters. If the refrac-
tive index of water is 4/3, then find the B. 1.63
depth of the pool that the person saw. C. 37.6
A. 1, 8 D. 1.68

8. The refractive index of honey is 1.47. Cal- C. 1, 6 m

culate the speed of light when it enters D. 1, 8 m
honey from air.
A. 2.04 x 108 m/s 13. What is the angle of refraction in a medium
if the angle of incidence in water (n=1.33)
B. 1.04 x 108 m/s
is 48◦ and the index of refraction of the
C. 2.4 x 108 m/s medium is 1.58?
D. 4.4 x 108 m/s A. 0.63
NARAYAN CHANGDER
9. A block of amber is placed in water and a B. 29 degrees
laser beam travels from the water through
C. 39 degrees
the amber. The angle of incidence is 35◦
while the angle of refraction is 26◦ . What D. 45 degrees
is the index of refraction of amber? If the
refractive index of water is 1.33 14. A light ray comes from medium
A to medium B with incident ray
A. 1.74 of 30◦ and is refracted with an-
B. 1.88 gle of 45◦ , find the relative( index
)
C. 1.47 of medium A to medium B. nnab .
( √ )
D. 1.50 Sin 300 = 12 ; sin 450 = 12 2
10. refractive index is least for A. 1
2
A. air 1
√
B. 2 2
B. mica 1
√
C. 2 3
C. vacuum √
D. 2
D. water
11. The refractive index of the lens of the hu- 15. A pool of water appears to be 0.8 m deep
man eye is 1.41. If a ray of light goes when it is viewed perpendicularly from
from the air into the lens at an angle of above. What is its actual depth? Refrac-
incidence of 55◦ , what is the angle of re- tive index of water = 1.33
fraction? A. 1.07 m
A. 3.5◦ B. 2 m
B. 35.0◦ C. 1.08 m
C. 35.5◦ D. 1.09 m
D. 30.5◦
16. When light passes from air into water at
12. A diver saw an object standing 1.2 m an angle of 60◦ from the normal, what is
above the water surface. If the refrac- the angle of refraction?
tive index of the water is 4/3, then what
A. 60◦
was the imaginary distance that the diver
saw? B. 40.6◦
A. 1, 2 m C. 40 ◦
B. 1, 4 m D. 4.6◦

17. A light ray with an angle of incidence of A. 1.5

30◦ passes from water to air. Find the
B. 1.4
angle of refraction using Snell’s Law. Re-

fractive index of water is 1.33. C. 1.6
A. 41.70 D. 1.7
B. 45.70
22. The refractive index of water is 1.33. A
C. 430 ray of light enters water from air and
D. 39.70 makes and angle of incidence of 20 de-
grees. What is the angle of refraction
18. Light travelling from a transparent
medium to air undergoes total internal A. 20.4 degrees
reflection at an angle of incidence of 450. B. 21.2 degrees
The refractive index of the medium may
be (sin 45 = 0.7, sin 90 = 1) C. 22.1 degrees
A. 1.42 D. 23.1 degrees
B. 1.4
23. A ray of light enters air from glass. The
C. 1.5 angle of incidence is 35o and the angle of
D. 1.6 refraction is 69o. Find the refractive index
of the glass.
19. The angle of incidence on a material with a
refractive index of 1.8 is 340. If the angle A. 1.62
of refraction is 450 what is the refractive B. 1.63
index of the medium the light was initially
in? (sin 340 = 0.56, sin 450 = 0.71) C. 1.64
A. 1.4 D. 1.65
B. 1.9 24. When light passes from water into dia-
C. 1.3 mond at an angle of 45◦ from the normal,
D. 0.8 what is the angle of refraction?
A. 20.9◦
20. The refractive index of water is 1.33. A
ray of light entering water from air makes B. 20◦
an angle of incidence of 30.0◦ . Find the an-
C. 22◦
gle of refraction.
A. 20.4◦ D. 22.9◦
B. 41.7◦ 25. The relative index of benzena is 1, 5. Find

C. 22.1◦ the speed of light in benzena.
D. 40.8◦ A. 1, 0 x 108 m
s
m
21. A ray of light enters glass from air. The B. 1, 5 x 108 s
angle of incidence is 25o, and the angle of m
C. 2, 0 x 108 s
refraction is 16o. What is the refractive
m
index of glass D. 4, 5 x 108 s

26. The angle of incidence on a material with a B. 1.50

refractive index of 1.8 is 340. If the angle
C. 1.05
of refraction is 450 what is the refractive
index of the medium the light was initially D. 1.51
in?
A. 2.3 31. Which one of the following statements is
incorrect?
B. 1.9
A. The light only can travels in straight
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 1.3 line
D. 0.8
B. Light is an electromagnetic wave.
27. The wavelength of a light is C. Light cannot travel in vacuum
6, 0 x 10−5 cm that comes from air to
the glass prism with the refractive index D. Light can be dispersed, absorbed, re-
of 1.5. Find the wavelength of light in the flected, and refracted.
prism.
32. A pool of water is 10m deep. If the bottom
A. 9, 0 x 10−5 cm
of the pool is viewed perpendicularly from
B. 7, 5 x 10−5 cm air, how deep does it appear? (refractive
C. 6, 0 x 10−5 cm index of water = 1.33)
D. 4, 0 x 10−5 cm A. 7 m
28. What is the index of refraction for a mate- B. 7.52 m

rial that allows light to travel at 2.8 *108 C. 6.6 m
m/s?
D. 5.52 m
A. 1.07
B. .67 33. Which colour bends the maximum in the
C. 1.5 prism? Info-The index of refraction is
greater for shorter wavelengths
D. not possible
A. Violet
29. The refractive index of diamond is 2.42. A
B. Indigo
ray of light passing from the inside of a di-
amond into air makes an angle of incidence C. Red
of 20.0◦ . Find the angle of refraction.
D. Green
A. 57.8◦
B. 55.9◦ 34. A ray of light enters glass from air. The
angle of incidence is 25◦ and the angle of
C. 8.12◦
refraction is 16.4◦ . Calculate the refrac-
D. 7.93◦ tive index of glass.
30. A ray of light approaches a jar of honey at A. 1.5
an angle of 30◦ . If the angle of refraction B. 1.7
is 19.5◦ , what is the refractive index of
honey? C. 1.3
A. 1.49 D. 1.2

35. Light travels from glass (n=1.66) to wa- D. 7.0◦

ter, what is the critical angle for these two
mediums? 40. Refer to the following statements:1) A

straw looks bend when it’s put inside the
A. 53.2
glass full of water.2) The image formed
B. 48.8 by a plane mirror.3) The depth of the
C. 37 pool looks shallow than the real depth.
4) The image formed by the car’s rear
D. not possible
view.Which ones are consider as refrac-
36. A ray of light enters air from glass. The tion?
angle of incidence is 35o and the angle of A. 1 and 4
refraction is 69o. Find the refractive index
B. 2 and 4
of the glass. (sin 350 = 0.57, sin 690=
0.93) C. 2 and 3
A. 1.62 D. 1 and 3
B. 1.63 41. Calculate the refractive index for a sub-
C. 1.64 stance, if the speed of light in that sub-
D. 1.65 stance is 2.1 x 108 m/s.
A. 0.70
37. refractive index is maximum for
B. 1.43
A. water
C. 5.10
B. diamond
D. 6.30
C. glass
D. mercury 42. A pencil that is placed in front of 2 iden-
tical plane mirrors and form an angle of
38. A ray of light leaves a rectangular diamond 400 creates some images. If the angle is
and enters air. It makes an angle of refrac- enlarged by x0, the total images will be 2
tion of 15o. If the refractive index of a di- less than previous. Find X.
amond is 2.42, find the angle of incidence.
A. 600
A. 6.3 degrees
B. 200
B. 6.2 degrees
C. 51, 40
C. 6.1 degrees
D. 300
D. 6 degrees
43. When light passes from air to glass with
39. A ray of light leaves a rectangular diamond
an angle of incidence of 30◦ , the angle of
and enters air. It makes an angle of re-
refraction is 20◦ .What is the refractive in-
fraction of 15◦ in the air. If the refractive
dex of this glass block?
index of diamond is 2.42, find the angle of
incidence. A. 0.68
A. 39◦ B. 1.46
B. 37◦ C. 1.50
C. 6.1◦ D. 2

1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 126
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab

1. a plane mirror forms 6. What is the relation between angle of inci-
dence (i) and angle of emergence (e) when
A. virtual
a ray of light passes through a glass slab
B. erect
A. i = e
C. same size
B. δ + A= i +e
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. real
C. i > e
2. In which of the following does light travel D. none of above
fastest?
7. When you see a “wet spot” mirage on the
A. kerosene road in front of you, you are most likely
B. turpentine seeing
C. water A. water
D. ice B. hot air
C. figment of your imagination
3. A concave lens forms the image of an ob-
ject which is D. sky
A. virtual, inverted and diminished 8. Velocity of light is maximum in

B. virtual, erect and diminished A. In air
C. virtual, inverted and enlarged B. In glass
D. virtual, erect and enlarged C. In water
D. In seawater
4. For a wave to undergo total internal reflec-
tion, which of the following is true:- 9. What is the relation between angle of
A. light moves from rarer to denser prism(A), angle of incidence(i), angle
medium and i> c of emergence(e) and angle of deviation,
when light ray passes through a prism.
B. light moves from denser to rarer
medium and i> c A. i = e
C. light moves from rarer to denser B. δ + A = i + e
medium and i< c C. i > e
D. light moves from denser to rarer D. none of above
medium and i< c
10. A ray of light falling normally on a glass
5. Prisms usually have faces. slab will
A. Square A. bend towards the normal
B. Triangular B. bend away from the normal
C. Rectangular C. travel undeviated
D. Circular D. none of above

11. When light bends it is 17. Two objects A and B when placed in turn
A. Reflection in front of a concave mirror of focal length
7.5 cm, give images of equal size. If A is

B. Absorption three times the size of B and is placed 30
C. refraction cm from mirror, what is the distance of B
D. optical density from the mirror-
A. 10 cm
12. The magnification of an object placed 10
cm from a convex mirror of radius of cur- B. 12.5 cm
vature 20 cm will be- C. 15cm
A. (A) 0.2 D. 17.5 cm
B. (B) 0.5
18. Magnifying power of a concave lens is
C. ( C) 1
A. can have any value
D. (D) infinity
B. always = 1
13. What is the reason of splitting of white C. always < 1
light?
D. always > 1
A. Change of speed of all colours
B. Breaking down of colours 19. Which is the worst (most energetic and
ionizing) type of radiation?
C. Falling obliquely on the surface
A. gamma rays
D. Falling on the normal of the surface
B. x-rays
14. The speed of light in vacuum is
C. ultraviolet waves
A. 3 × 108 m/s
D. visible light
B. 2.8 × 108 m/s
C. 3 × 107 m/s 20. The angle between incident ray and re-
fracted ray on plane mirror is 700, the an-
D. 3 × 109 m/s gle of incident is
15. Any ray which is passing along principal A. 700
axis of a lens is B. 350
A. passing through focus after refraction C. 300
B. un deviated
D. 200
C. passing parallel to the principal axis af-
ter refracion 21. A spherical mirror and a thin spherical lens
have each a focal length of-15 cm. The
D. can’t pass
mirror and the lens are likely to be:
16. lens is thin at the middle and thicker A. both concave
at the edges.
B. both convex
A. Biconvex
C. the mirror is concave, but the lens is
B. plano convex convex
C. Biconcave D. the mirror is convex, but the lens is
D. glass slab concave

22. angle of deviation will be maximum for B. refract through at an angle of 74.5 de-
colour grees
A. red C. refract through at an angle of 51.1 de-
grees
B. violet
D. reflect back at angle of 30 degrees
C. green
D. none of above 27. Which colour has the maximum speed in
the prism?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
23. When a light travels from denser medium A. Violet
to less dense medium, the light will be re-
B. Yellow
fracted
C. Orange
A. towards normal and its speed in-
creases. D. Red
B. away from normal and its speed in- 28. What we call the final ray coming out of
creases. the glass slab?
C. towards normal and its speed de- A. Incident ray
creases. B. Refracted Ray
D. away from normal and its speed C. Reflected ray
decreases. D. Emergent Ray
24. What is the relation between refractive in- 29. Which is faster light waves or sound
dex and the optical density? waves?
A. More refractive index more is the den- A. light
sity. B. sound
B. More refractive index less is the den- C. same
sity
D. none of above
C. Less refractive index more is the den-
sity 30. Which colour bends the maximum in the
prism?
D. No relation between refractive index
and optical density A. Violet
B. Indigo
25. What is the angle of the normal line com-
pared to the flat surface? C. Red
D. Green
A. 40◦
B. 50◦ 31. You are given three media A, B and C
of refractive index 1.43, 1.25 and 1.6.
C. 90◦ The medium in which the light will travel
D. 180◦ fastest is
A. A
26. Light travels from oil (n=1.48) to water
at an angle of 60 degrees relative to the B. B
normal. What will happen to the light? C. C
A. reflect back at an angle of 60 degrees D. Equal in all three medium

32. The minimum distance between an object C. 2 times

and its real image formed by a convex lens D. half
of focal length f is-

A. f 38. A clock hung on a wall has marks instead
of numbers on its dial. On the opposite
B. 2f wall there is a mirror, and the image of
C. 3f the clock in the mirror if read, indicates
D. 4f the time as 8.20. What is the time in the
clock-
33. An object 5.0 cm in length is placed at a dis- A. 3.40
tance of 20 cm in front of a convex mirror
or radius of curvature 30 cm. The position B. 4.40
of the image is C. 5.20
A. 8.57 cm D. 4.20
B. 9.10 cm
39. In refraction of light through a glass slab,
C. 8.15 cm the directions of the incident ray and re-
D. 7.15 cm fracted ray are:
A. perpendicular to each other
34. A light ray falls on a mirror and deviates
by 60◦ then the angle of reflection will be B. parallel to each other
A. 30◦ C. intersecting each other
B. 90◦ D. non parallel to each other
C. 60◦ 40. A concave mirror produces a magnification
D. 180 of +4. The object is placed:
A. At F
35. Particles of light energy are called
B. Between F and C
A. beams
C. Beyond C
B. photons
D. Between F and P
C. thermograms
D. dots 41. Which color of light is most refracted dur-
ing dispersion by a prism?
36. if magnification by a lens is-5, then
A. red
A. lens is concave
B. yellow
B. image is virtual
C. green
C. lens is magnified
D. violet
D. image is real and diminished by a con-
vex lens 42. won his Nobel Prize in 1905 for
37. Power of a lens is the of its focal A. Newton, Speed of Light

length. B. Oppenheimer, Quantum Mechanics
A. value C. Einstein, Photoelectric Effect
B. reciprocal D. Einstein, Theory of Relativity

43. Focal length of a lens depends on which of B. real and erect

the following factor? C. virtual and erect
A. Radii of curvature D. virtual and inverted
B. material of the lens
49. When a ray of light passes through a
C. medium inwhich the lens is placed prism, in each ( face of prism) refraction,
D. all the above the light ray
A. bends towards the base of the prism
NARAYAN CHANGDER
44. A spherical mirror and a spherical lens each
have a focal length of-10 cm. The mirror B. bends away the base of the prism
and the lens are likely to be C. bends towards the angle of the prism
A. the mirror is convex and the lens is D. none of above
concave
50. If magnification is +1.5, the image is
B. the mirror is concave and the lens is
A. erect
convex
B. diminished
C. both convex
C. real
D. both concave
D. inverted
45. What is the correct order of the EM spec-
trum from low energy to high energy? 51. Which of the following electromagnetic
waves do humans sense as heat?
A. UV, visible, infrared, microwaves
A. ultraviolet light
B. Infrared, microwave, UV, x-rays
B. x-rays
C. UV, visible violet, visible red, infrared
C. gamma rays
D. radio, microwave, UV, gamma
D. infrared rays
46. The ratios of the speeds of light in a given
52. An object is placed 20 cm in front of a plane
pair of media gives us
mirror. The mirror is moved 5 cm towards
A. Absolute refractive index the object. The distance between the po-
B. Relative refractive index sitions of the object and final images seen
in the mirror is:
C. Optical density
A. 10 cm
D. None of these
B. 5 cm
47. A ray of light incident on a glass slab suf- C. 30 cm
fers refraction
D. 15 cm
A. at two inclined faces of the glass slab
53. The refractive index of glass is 1.5. The
B. at two parallel faces of the glass slab
speed of light in glass will be ( speed of
C. at none of the faces of the glass slab light in free space is 3x108m/s.)
D. none of above A. 2x108m/s
48. If the magnification produced by a lens has B. 3.5x108m/s
a negative value, the image will be C. 4.5x108m/s
A. real and inverted D. 2.25x108m/s

54. When a ray of light enters a glass slab 59. what is the speed of light in vacuum
from air-
A. 3 ∗ 109 m/s

A. Its wavelength decreases.
B. 3 ∗ 107 m/s
B. Its wavelength Increases.
C. 3 ∗ 108 m/s
C. Its frequency increases
D. 3 ∗ 106 m/s
D. Neither wavelength nor frequency
changes. 60. How is light affected by an increase in the
index of refraction?
55. A ray of light incident on one of the paral-
lel faces of rectangular glass slab, emerges A. Its frequency increases
out of the opposite parallel face, B. Its frequency decreases
A. Inclined to the incident ray C. Its speed increases
B. Along the same straight line as the in-
D. Its speed decreases
cident ray
C. Parallel to the incident ray but laterally 61. The rear view mirror of a car is a plane mir-
displaced ror. A driver is reversing his car at a speed
D. Gets absorbed into the body of the of 2 m/s. The driver sees in his rear view
glass slab and does not emerge out of it. mirror the image of truck parked behind
his car. The speed at which the image of
56. In projectors which lenses are used? the truck appears to approach the driver
will be-
A. Convex lens
A. 1 m/s
B. Concave lens
C. Bipolar lens B. 2 m/s
D. Both (a) and (b) C. 4 m/s

D. 8 m/s
57. What is the correct order of the EM spec-
trum from low frequency to high fre- 62. The source of all electromagnetic waves is
quency?
A. magnetic fields
A. UV, visible, infrared, microwaves
B. electric fields
C. vibrating charges
C. UV, visible violet, visible red, infrared
D. heat
D. radio, microwave, UV, gamma
58. A ray of light is incident normally on a rect- 63. No matter how far you stand from a mir-
angular piece of glass. The value of angle ror, your Image appears erect. The mirror
of refraction will be- is likely to be
A. 180◦ A. plane
B. 90◦ B. concave
C. 45◦ C. convex
D. 0◦ D. Either plane or convex

64. What is a convex lens? C. 90o

A. triangular in shape D. incomplete information
B. more transparent at the middle 69. Which statement is true for the reflection
C. thicker at the edges than at the middle of light?
D. thicker at the middle than at the edges A. The angle of incidence and reflection
are equal.
65. What is refraction
B. The reflected light is less bright than
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. phenomenon of change in the path of the incident light.
light in going from one medium to another.
C. The sum of angle of incidence and re-
B. phenomenon of bouncing back of light flection is always greater than 90 degree.
in the same medium on striking the sur-
D. The beams of incident light after reflec-
face of any object
tion diverge at unequal angles.
C. reflecting surface
70. The power of a lens having focal length 50
D. electromagnetic wave that can be cm is-
seen by the typical human.
A. 0.5D
66. David is observing his image in a plane B. 2D
mirror. The distance between the mirror
and his image is 5m. If he moves 1m C. 3D
towards the mirror, then the distance be- D. 0.2 D
tween David and his image will be-
71. Absolute refractive index is always
A. 3 m
A. less than 1
B. 5 m
B. greater than 1
C. 6 m
C. equal to 1
D. 8 m
D. none of above
67. It is difficult to see the roadway from a car
72. A ray of light travelling in a rarer
on a rainy night because the road surface
medium meets the surface of another
A. is obscured by the rain itself. denser medium. While entering the second
B. what is normally a diffuse reflector medium at the point of incidence, it
when dry becomes a mirror surface when A. Goes straight into the second medium
wet.
B. Bends towards the normal
C. absorbs the light more when wet.
C. Bends away from the normal
D. scatters light in all directions.
D. Does not enter at all
68. When a ray of light enters from one 73. Focal length of a concave mirror is
medium to another, its velocity is doubled.
The critical angle for the ray for total inter- A. negative
nal reflection will be B. positive
A. 30o C. depends on the position of object
B. 60o D. depends on the position of image

74. If an incident ray passes through the focus, 80. If the sun were to disappear right now, we
the reflected ray will wouldn’t know about it for 8 minutes be-
cause it takes 8 minutes

A. pass through the pole
B. be parallel to the principal axis A. to operate receiving equipment in the
dark.
C. retrace its path
B. for light to travel from the sun to Earth.
D. pass through the center of curvature
C. for the sun to disappear.
75. A full length of image of a distant tall build- D. none of above
ing can definitely be seen using:
A. a concave mirror 81. Assume a light ray travel from a glass
block to the air. Which statement is cor-
B. a convex mirror rect?
C. a plane mirror A. The light refracts towards normal as it
D. both concave as well as plane mirror enters the air.
B. the incident angle is bigger than the re-
76. Light waves bounce off at many of angles
fracted angle
because the surface is uneven.
C. The light travels faster as it enters the
A. reflection
air.
B. refraction
D. The brightness of light increases as it
C. dispersion travels in the air.
D. echo
82. The magnification produced by a concave
77. Focal plane is the plane which is to the mirror-
principla axis A. is always more than one
A. parallel; at focus B. is always less than one
B. parallel; at optic centre C. is always equal to one
C. perpendicular; at focus D. may be less than or greater than one
D. perpendicular; at optic center
83. What do a prism, a magnifying glass, a mi-
78. Light waves travel as croscope, and eyeglasses ALL have in com-
mon
A. waves
A. They are opaque
B. particles
B. They refract light
C. waves or particles
C. That are translucent
D. sound
D. They reflect light
79. Refractive index is property of
84. Refraction of light takes place because
A. a pair of media
A. change in frequency of light in differ-
B. a medium ent medium
C. a vacuum B. change in speed of light in different
D. none of above medium

C. change in speed and frequency of light A. 0.005 dioptre

B. 0.05 dioptre
D. none of above C. 5 dioptre
85. The light ray passing through the focus will D. 50 dioptre
be after refraction form a lens
90. When seen from an airplane, a rainbow
A. pass through centre of curvature sometimes forms a complete circle. When
B. parallel to the principal axis this happens, the plane’s shadow is
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. pass through optic centre A. in the center of the rainbow.
D. undeviated B. Nowhere. There is no shadow.
C. totally outside the rainbow.
86. Refractive index of glass with respect to
air is 1.5 and refractive index of water D. in the lower part of the rainbow.
with respect to air is 4/3 . What will be 91. Angle of deviation does not depend on
the refractive index of glass with respect
to water? A. angle of incidence
A. 1 B. angle of prism
C. frequency of light
B. 1.5
D. none of above
C. 1.125
D. -10 92. lens is also called as converging lens
A. convex
87. Number of images formed by a lens made
up of three different materials B. concave
A. 1 C. both concave and convex
B. 2 D. can’t say
C. 3 93. The of light can change when light is
D. o refracted because the medium changes.
A. frequency
88. Total internal reflection can only occur if
B. medium
A. Angle of incident, i = Angle of critical
C. wavelength
angle, c
D. transparency
B. Angle of incident, i < Angle of critical
angle, c 94. The image formed by a concave mirror is
C. Angle of incident, i > Angle of critical observed to be virtual, erect and larger
angle, c than the object. then the position of the
object should be-
D. none of above
A. between the focus and the centre of
89. A student conducts an experiment using a curvature
convex lens. He places the object at a dis- B. at the centre of curvature
tance of 60 cm in front of the lens and ob-
serves that the image is formed at a dis- C. beyond the centre of curvature
tance of 30 cm behind the lens. What is D. between the pole of the mirror and the
the power of the lens? focus

95. When the object is placed between f and 100. Which mirror can produce a virtual, erect
2f of a convex lens, the image formed is and magnified image of an object?
A. Both concave and convex mirrors

A. at f
B. at 2f B. Plane mirror
C. beyond 2f C. Convex mirror

D. Concave mirror
D. between O and f
101. What we call the portion of a transpar-
96. Magnification for image is always ent refracting medium bounded by two sur-
A. real, positive faces?
B. real, negative A. Glass
B. Mirror
C. virtual, negative
C. Lens
D. any, negative
D. Beads
97. what happens to the angle of refraction 102. what is position size and nature of image
when light hits a boundary at critical inci- when object is at c (concave mirror )
dent angle
A. at infinity large real inverted
A. it becomes smaller
B. behind screen enlarged virtual erect
B. it becomes 90 degrees
C. at c, same size, real and inverted
C. it becomes greater than 90 degrees D. none of above
D. none of above
103. Speed of light in a given medium is the
98. An image of an object produced on a screen indicator of its
which is about 36 cm using a convex A. Refractive index
lens.The image produced is about 3 times B. Optical density
the size of the object. What is the size of
C. Dispersion
the object?
D. None of these
A. 12 cm
104. A rainbow is an example of
B. 33 cm
A. Dispersion
C. 39 cm
B. White being separated into a spectrum
D. 108 cm
C. Refraction
99. light travelling from a transparent medium D. All of these options are true
to air undergoes total internal reflection at
105. Light has the lowest velocity in which
an angle of incidence of 45degree. THe re-
medium? barium glass n=1.60crown glass
fractive index of the medium may be
n=1.523water n=1.33diamond n=2.45
A. 1.4 A. diamond
B. 1.3 B. water
C. 1.1 C. crown glass
D. 1.0 D. barium glass

106. All the distances are measured from B. Equal to unity

A. principal focus C. Greater than unity
B. centre of curvature D. Less as well as grater than unity de-
C. optic centre pending upon the experimental arrange-
ment
D. any where
112. The measure of how much light refracts
107. An object is placed at a distance of 40cm
is called
NARAYAN CHANGDER
in front of a concave mirror of focal length
20cm.The image produced is: A. Refraction
A. virtual and inverted B. Law of reflection
B. real and erect C. reflected ray
C. real, inverted and of the opposite size D. Index of refraction
as that of the object
113. Light changes speed as it travels through
D. real, inverted and of the same size as
various mediums. What are examples of
that of the object
mediums that light can travel through.
108. Light travels slowest through which of A. snow and ice
the following materials?
B. air and water
A. diamond
C. cloth and wood
B. water
D. glass and wood
C. glass
D. kerosene 114. what is mirror magnification formula
A. (m) = h/h’
109. The image formed by a convex lens can
be B. m=h’/h
A. virtual image is not formed C. m=distance + object
B. virtual and of same size D. m=-v/u
C. virtual and diminished
115. Which characteristic is the same for all
D. virtual and magnified photons?
110. What is the correct order of the EM spec- A. Speed of the photons
trum from short wavelength to long wave- B. energy stored in the photons
length?
C. wavelength of the photons
A. UV, visible, radio, microwaves
D. all of the above
C. UV, visible violet, visible red, infrared 116. The magnification power of plane mirror
D. radio, microwave, UV, gamma A. one
B. infinite
111. The ratio of the refractive index of red
light to blue light in air is C. less then one
A. Less than unity D. more then one

117. How does the refractive index of a medium to another transparent medium is
medium depend on the wavelength of light called
used?

A. reflection
A. Refractive index of a medium de- B. refraction
creases with increase in wavelength of
light. C. dispersion
D. scattering
B. Refractive index of a medium in-
creases with increase in wavelength of 122. A concave mirror has radius of curvature
light. 40 cm. An object of 5 cm tall is placed 10
C. Refractive index of a medium does not cm in front of a concave mirror. The nature
depend on the wavelength of light . of image formed is:
D. none of above A. Virtual and inverted
B. Real and erect
118. A metal coin is at bottom of a beaker
filled with a liquid of refractive index C. Real and inverted
=4/3 to height of 6cm.To an observer D. Virtual and erect
looking from above surface of liquid, the
coin will appear at a depth 123. Light travels through a liquid at 2.25 ×
108 ms−1 . What is the index of the liq-
A. 1.5cm uid?
B. 6.75cm A. 1.33
C. 4.5cm B. 1.0
D. 7.5cm C. 1.523
119. A lens of power +2.0D is placed in con- D. 2.45

tact with another lens of power-1.0D, the 124. The refractive index of a rarer medium
combination will behave like:- with respect to a denser medium is
A. A converging lens of focal length 100 A. 1
cm
B. greater than 1
B. A diverging lens of focal length 100 cm
C. smaller than 1
C. A converging lens of focal length 50 cm
D. negative
D. A diverging lens of focal length 50 cm
125. Image formed by a convex spherical mir-
120. The path along which light travels in a ror is:
homogeneous medium is called a- A. virtual
A. beam of light B. real
B. ray of light C. enlarged
C. pencil of light D. inverted
D. none of these
126. Image formed by reflection from a plane
121. The deviation of light ray from its path mirror is
when it travels from one transparent A. real and inverted

B. virtual and erect 132. A glass cube having edge 4cm is kept
on a printed page. If the refractive in-
C. real and erect
dex of glass material is 1.5, then by what
D. virtual and inverted amount will the printed letters appear to
be shifted, while viewed from the top?
127. when the light travels from glass slab to
air its speed and bends from the A. 1.33cm
normal . B. 2.33cm
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. stays the same, away C. 0.6cm
B. decreases, closer D. 1.66cm
C. stays the same, closer 133. The rainbow is a natural phenomenon
D. increases, away that appears in the rainy sky. It is caused
by the
128. The focal length of plane mirror is A. reflection of sunlight by rain droplets
A. zero B. refraction of sunlight by rain droplets
B. infinite C. magic
C. one D. leprechauns
D. non of these
134. A thick lens will have
129. Equation for refraction oflight at curved A. shorter focal length
surface is
B. larger focal length
A. n1/u-n2/v = (n2-n1)/R
C. shorter focal length, deviates more
B. n2/u-n1/v = (n2 + n1)/R D. larger focal length, deviates less
C. n2/v-n1/u = (n2-n1)/R
135. When a plane mirror is rotated through
D. 1/f = 1/v-1/u a certain angle, the reflected ray turns
through twice as much and the size of the
130. Myopia can be removed by using a lenses
image.
of
A. is doubled
A. concave lens
B. is halved
B. convex lens
C. becomes infinite
C. cylindrical lens
D. remains the same
D. by surgical removal
136. The time taken by the light to cross a
131. The principle behind working of optical fi- glass slab of thickness 4 mm and refrac-
bres is:- tive index =3, will be
A. total internal reflection A. 4x 10-11sec
B. total external reflection B. 16 x 10-11sec
C. total internal refraction C. 8 x 10-11sec
D. diffraction D. 24 x 10-11sec

137. A light incident on one of the parallel face 142. Suppose you stand 2 m in front of a plane
of a rectangular glass slab, emerges out of mirror. How far away from you is your im-
the opposite parallel face age?

A. inclined to the incident ray A. 1/2 m
B. along the same line as the incident ray B. 1 m
C. parallel to the incident ray but laterally C. 2 m
displaced D. 4 m
D. none of above
143. Distance between the lens and focal point
138. A child walks towards a fixed plane mir- is called?
ror at a speed of 5 km h-1. The velocity A. Focal Point
of the image with respect to mirror is-
B. Lens
A. 5 km h-1
C. Focal Length
B. -5 km h-1 D. none of above
C. 10 km h-1
144. Which spherical lens is also known as con-
D. -10 km h-1 verging lens?
139. Which of the following can be ionizing ra- A. Double convex lens
diation? Mark all that apply. B. Double concave lens
A. visible light C. Plano concave
B. microwaves D. None of these
C. ultraviolet
145. is when a rough surface directs light
D. x-rays beams in different directions.
E. gamma rays A. Refraction
B. Diffuse reflection
140. The optical phenomena, twinkling of
stars, is due to C. Absorption
A. Atmospheric reflection D. none of above
B. Total reflection 146. When a light ray passes from water
C. Atmospheric refraction (n=1.333) into diamond (n=2.419) at an
angle of 45◦ , its path is
D. Total refraction
A. bent towards the normal
141. Concave lenses always cause light rays B. bent away from the normal
to spread out and can only form
C. parallel to the normal
A. virtual images
D. not bent
B. real images
147. A ray of white light, incident upon a glass
C. concave lens
prism, is dispersed into its various color
D. concave mirror components. Which one of the following

colors experiences the greatest amount of B. diminished

refraction?
C. same size as the object
A. orange
D. enlarged
B. violet
C. red 153. which wavelength gives you sunburn?
D. green A. radio
B. microwaves
NARAYAN CHANGDER
148. A convex lens forms a real image of a
point object placed on its principal axis. If C. infra red
the upper half of the lens is painted black. D. Ultra violet
A. the image will be shifted backward
154. When the object is placed at infinity of a
B. the image will not be shifted
concave lens, the size of the image formed
C. the intensity of the image will de- is
crease
A. Diminished
D. both (B) and (C)
B. same size
149. Distances measured opposite to the direc- C. Highly diminished, point sized
tion of the incident ray are taken as
D. Enlarged
A. positive
E. highly enlarged
B. negative
C. either positive or negative 155. When white light passes through a prism,
D. depends on lens which color of light bends the most?
A. Red
150. The angle of the incoming rays of light
are also called the B. Green
A. Angle of reflection C. Blue
B. Angle of refraction D. Violet
C. Angle of incidence
156. According to laws of reflection of light-
D. Wave angle
A. (A) Angle of incidence is equal to the
151. Which of the following instruments uses angle of reflection
concave lens? B. B) Angle of incidence is less than the
A. flashlight angle of reflection
B. human eye lens C. (C) Angle of incidence is greater than
C. magnifying glass the angle of reflection
D. microscope D. (D) None of these
152. How will you describe the size of the im- 157. Why is refractive index in a transparent
age formed by a convex lens if the object mediun greater than one?
is located beyond 2F point? A. speed of light in vaccum is always less
A. point size than speed in a transparent medium

1.11 Image formation by spherical lenses 141
B. speed of light in vaccum is always 158. The emergent ray and incident ray are
greater than speed in a transparent A. Parallel
medium

B. Collinear
C. frequency of wave changes when it
crosses medium C. Laterally displaced
D. none of the above D. Both a and b
1.11 Image formation by spherical lenses

1. If you stand in front of the 2 large plane see that someone is behind your back?
mirrors at 750 angle, how many images A. Plane mirror
will you see?
B. Convex mirror
A. 1
C. Concave mirror
B. 2
D. Converging mirror
C. 3
D. 4 4. A light ray, passing through the focal point
of a concave mirror, strikes the mirror’s
2. Describe the image produced by the lens of surface. The reflected ray
the human eye.
A. passes through the mirror’s focal
A. real, inverted, smaller
point.
B. virtual, upright, smaller
B. travels parallel to the mirror’s axis.
C. real, inverted, bigger
C. travels at right angles to the mirrors’
D. virtual, upright, bigger axis.
3. What kind of mirror is used in the security D. passes through the mirror’s center of
mirrors of ATM machines to enables you to curvature.
1.12 Lens formula derivation

1. A 15.0 m object is placed 60.0 m from a B. concave
convex lens, which has a focal length of
C. mirror
15.0 m. Use the thin lens equation to find
the distance of the image. D. Cylinder
A. 10
3. Focal length of a convex lens is 10cm. De-
B. 20 termine the image distance if the object
C. 30 distance is 14cm
D. 40 A. 30cm
B. 35cm
2. A magnifying glass is an example of what
type of lens? C. 45cm
A. convex D. 53cm

1.13 Dioptres & power of a lens 142
4. You are asked to design an astronomical 15.0 m. Find distance of image.

telescope at normal adjustment using two A. No Image
convex lenses P and Q.The power of lens
P is 5 D and lens Q is 25 D.Calculate the B. 10
distance between lenses P and Q. C. 20
A. 2.04 cm D. 30
B. 20.0 cm
7. convex lens form
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 24.0 cm
A. real images
D. 30.0 cm
B. virtual images
5. Focal length of a concave lens is 12cm. De-
termine the linear magnification when the C. both
object distance is 4cm. D. none of above
A. 0.57
8. Which is the correct formula for thin lens?
B. 0.72 1
A. f + 1u = 1
v
C. 0.75
D. 0.78 B. 1
u − 1v = 1
f
6. A 15.0 m object is placed 15.0 m from a C. 1

f − 1u = 1
v
convex lens, which has a focal length of D. none of above
1.13 Dioptres & power of a lens

1. An object placed between F and 2F of a B. Converge, or come together
convex lens will produce an image C. Reflect, or bounce off
A. beyond 2F D. Create a rainbow
B. enlarged
4. An object placed at F of a convex mirror
C. real and inverted will produce an image
D. All of these A. Behind the mirror
2. While looking at nearby objects, the eiliary B. Diminished
muscles the eyelens so as to its fo- C. Virtual and erect
cal length.
D. All of these
A. contract, increase
5. When a lens of focal length f is cut in
B. contract, decrease
two pieces transversely, the focal length
C. expand, increase of each part will become
D. expand, decrease A. twice
3. When light passes through a convex lens, B. thrice

it does this C. half
A. Diverge, or spread apart D. infinite

6. The middle vascular coat that darkens the C. 90 and convex

eye chamber and prevents reflection by ab- D. 90 and concave
sorbing the light rays is

A. choroid 11. If a person can see on object clearly when
it is placed at 25 cm away from him, he is
B. selera
suffering from:
C. retina
A. myopia
D. cornea
B. hyper metropia
7. Which of the following statement is cor- C. asitfmatism
rect?
D. none of these
A. A person with myopia can see distant
objects clearly 12. A concaved lens lens has focal length of
B. A person with hypermetropia can see 15cm. At What distance should the object
nearby objects clearly from the lens be placed so that it forms an
erect and virtual image at 10cm from the
C. A person with myopia can see nearby lens?
objects clearly
A. 30 cm
D. A person with hypermetropia cannot
see distant objects clearly B. 15cm
C. 60cm
8. An object is placed at a distance 2f from
the pole of a convex mirror or focal length D. 10cm
f. The linear magnification is
13. The combined power of two lenses in con-
1
A. 3 tact is + 10 D. When they are separated by
B. 2 20 cm, their power becomes 6.25 D. Find
3
the power of individual lenses.
3
C. 4
A. 7.5, 2.5
D. 1
B. 8, 7
9. . An optician prescribes spectacles to a pa- C. 9, 5
tient with a combination of a convex lens
of focal length 40 cm and a concave lens D. 7.5, 2.4
of 25 cm focal length. What will be the
14. The surface of retina has about 125 million
power of spectacles
light sensitive
A. -1.5
A. rods only
B. 2.5
B. cones only
C. -1.4
C. rods and cones
D. 1.54
D. neither rods nor cones
10. The power of a lens is +2.0D find its focal
length and state the kind of a lens 15. A man uses lens of power +2.0 D in his
spectacles. His son takes out the lens
A. 50 and convex from the spectacles and keeps it between
B. 50 and concave a small pencil and a wall. He observes an

inverted image on the wall, which has the 20. A convex lens has focal length of 20 cm.
same size as the pencil. find its power in Dioptres.
A. 50 cm A. 4
B. 75 cm B. 2
C. 100 cm C. 5
D. 150 cm D. 9
NARAYAN CHANGDER
16. The eyelens light rays to form real, in- 21. A convex lens has a focal length of 0.5m.
verted and highly diminished image on the It has to combined with a second lens, so
that the combination has a power of 1.5
A. converges, retina diopter. Which of the following could be
the second lens?
B. diverges, retina
A. A concave lens of focal length 2 m.
C. converges, pupil
B. A convex lens of focal length 0.5 m
D. diverges, pupil
C. A concave lens of focal length 0.5 m.
17. A person cannot see distinctly objects kept
beyond 2m. This defect can be corrected D. A convex lens of focal length 2 m.
by using a lens of power
22. An object placed at 2F of a convex lens will
A. +0.5D produce an image
B. -0.5D A. at 2F
C. +0.5D B. same size
D. -0.2D C. real and inverted
18. The distance between a spherical lens and D. All of these
the image is-15cm. The lens is
23. The distance between a convex lens and
A. concave lens its focal point is called what?
B. convex lens A. The focus
C. either of the two irrespective of the ob- B. The focal length
ject distance
C. The wave length
D. either concave lens or convex lens
with object between O and F. D. The amplitude
19. A convex lens of power +4 D and a con- 24. An optician prescribes spectacles to a pa-
cave lens of power 3 D are placed in con- tient with a combination of a convex lens
tact. What is equivalent power of the com- of focal length 40 cm and concave lens of
bination? 25 cm. The power of spectacles is
A. 1 A. 6
B. 2 B. -6
C. 3 C. 1.5
D. 4 D. -1.5

25. A concave lens always gives a virtual cident light is called

image. In optical lenses worn by hu- A. Semi-permeable
mans which of the following statements

is true? B. Transducer
A. The lens can never be concave. C. Transparent
B. In some cases the lens can be concave D. Translucent
if the focal length is much larger than 2.5
cm. 27. The thicker the convex lens, the its fo-
cal length.
C. All focal length concave lenses are
possible. A. Shorter
D. All focal length convex lenses are pos- B. Longer
sible. C. Thicker
26. A material that partial transmission of in- D. Thinner

2. The human eye and the colourful
NARAYAN CHANGDER
world
2.1 The human eye

1. Colored part in the human eye is called 5. The image formed by retina of human eye
A. Iris is
B. Pupil A. Real and inverted
C. both a and b B. Virtual and inverted
D. none of these C. Virtual and erect
D. Real and erect
2. The light sensitive cell present on retina
and is sensitive to the intensity of light is: 6. Regulates the amount of light entering the
A. Cones eye and gives the eye its color.
B. Both rods and cones A. Iris
C. Rods B. Lens
D. none of above C. Pupil
3. Which of the following lens is used to cor- D. Retina
rect the defect of hypermetropia? 7. The change in focal length of an eye lens is
A. Bi-concave caused by the action of the
B. Bi-convex A. Pupil
C. Bi-focal B. Retina
D. Plano-convex C. Ciliary muscles
4. What part of your eye is a muscle? D. Iris
A. iris 8. What is the purpose of the vitreous hu-
B. sclera mor?
C. pupil A. Bend the light
D. retina B. inverse the image

2.1 The human eye 147
C. maintain pressure 14. The type of spectacles worn by a person

suffering from the eye defect of myopia is
D. protect the eye

A. concave lens
9. The innermost sensory layer of the eye
B. plane lens
that contains photoreceptors
C. convex lens
A. Choroid
D. none of these
B. Retina
C. Sclera 15. Name the scientist who was the first to
use a glass prism to obtain the spectrum
D. Cornea of sunlight.
10. What happens when you focus on a distant A. Isaac Newton

object? B. Einstein
A. The lens becomes more round. C. Kepler
B. The radial muscle contracts. D. Hans Christian Oersted
C. The suspensory ligaments become 16. Which of the following correctly lists the
loose. order of the parts through which light
D. The ciliary muscle relaxes. passes as it enters the eye?
A. cornea, aqueous humor, lens, vitreous
11. Following is far-sightedness humor
A. Myopia B. aqueous humor, cornea, lens, vitreous
B. Hypermetropia humor
C. Presbyopia C. vitreous humor, lens, aqueous humor,
cornea
D. All of the above
D. lens, aqueous humor, cornea, vitreous
12. This part of the eye focuses light/images humor
onto the retina.
17. For young age children the least distance
A. lens of distinct vision is
B. cornea A. 1-2 metres
C. cones B. 25 centimetres
D. vitreous humor C. 7-8 metres
D. 7-8 centimetres
13. Which of the following is the reason for
when the ice breaks into pieces, the pieces 18. What part of your eye sends the messages
shine brightly? to and from your brain?
A. Refraction A. retina
B. Scattering of light B. optic nerve
C. Dispersion C. iris
D. Total internal reflection D. vitreous humor

19. Referring to the roundness of the eye: C. On the retina

A. Iris D. In front of the lens
B. Choroid 25. This part of the eye allows light into the
C. Vitreous body eye.
D. Cornea A. pupil
B. optic nerve
20. The term “accommodation” as applied to
NARAYAN CHANGDER
the eye, refers to its ability to: C. sclera
A. Control the light intensity falling on the D. lens
retina
26. What is the lens?
B. Erect the inverted image formed on
A. Focuses image of object (on retina)
the retina
B. Transmits information to the brain
C. Adjust the focal length of the lens
C. Controls size of pupil.
D. Vary the distance between the lens
and retina D. Contains cells that detect light
21. What part of the eye controls lens shape? 27. a hypermetropic person uses spectacles
with lens to see distinct object
A. choroid
A. concave
B. lens
B. convex
C. iris
C. bifocal
D. ciliary body
D. none of above
22. Rod cells of retina corresponds to
28. are 4 requirements needed to see
A. Light sensitivity
A. Light, Shadow, Dimension, Object
B. Colour sensitivity
B. Eyes, Object, Light, Dimension
C. Size sensitivity
C. Light, Eyes, Clear Path, Dimension
D. All of these
D. Light, Eyes, Clear Path, Object
23. The sensory organ that involved in the
29. Which of the following is the correct order
mechanism of sight
in which light travels through the eye?
A. ear
A. Pupil, Optic Nerve, Cornea, Lens
B. eye
B. Pupil, Lens, Retina, Optic Nerve
C. skin
C. Optic Nerve, Cornea, Retina, Lens
D. nose
D. Cornea, Iris, Pupil, Lens, Retina, Optic
E. tongue Nerve
24. A short-sighted person focuses their 30. Which eye disease has blurred images and
image-where? clouding of the lens?
A. In front of the retina A. Myopia
B. Behind the retina B. Pink Eye

C. Cataracts C. Nerves
D. Hypermyopia D. none of above

31. The human eye forms the image of an ob- 37. When the light rays enters the eye, most
ject at its of the refraction occurs at the
A. Cornea A. crystalline lens
B. Iris B. outer surface of cornea
C. Pupil C. iris
D. Retina D. pupil
32. What part of the eye focuses light on the 38. During refraction, will not change.
retina? A. wavelength
A. lens B. frequency
B. retina C. speed of light
C. pupil D. all of these
D. ciliary body
39. It is a thin, transparent tissue that lines
33. Far objects appear blurry but close objects along the surface of the eyelids.
appear clear A. Conjunctiva
A. Myopia B. Retina
B. Hyperopia C. Optic Nerve
C. Both D. Cornea
D. none of above 40. Which of the following receptors in the
34. Which of the following is age related? retina of an eye identify the intensity of
light?
A. Myopia
A. Rods
B. Hypermetropia
B. Cones
C. Night blindness
C. Optic nerve
D. Presbyopia
D. All of the above
35. We have 2 forward facing eyes-
41. Select the odd one out?
because..?
A. Excessive curvature of the eye lens
A. We can see clearer
B. Elongation of the eyeball
B. We can magnify more
C. Concave lens
C. We can see further
D. Farsightedness
D. We can judge distance
42. The change of focal length of an eye lens to
36. Our eyes recognize colours because of focus the image of the objects at varying
A. Cones distance is done by the action of-
B. Rods A. Pupil

B. Retina 48. Bi-focal lens are required to correct

C. Ciliary Muscles A. presbyopia
D. Blind Spot
B. astigmatism
43. Farsightedness can be caused by C. coma
A. A cornea that is flat
D. myopia
B. A cornea that is too curved
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. A cornea or lens that is smooth and un- 49. A student has difficulty reading the black-
evenly curved board while sitting in the last row .What
D. A lens that is less flexible, so the light could be the defect the child is suffering
entering the eye converges at a point be- from?
hind the retina A. Myopia
44. a mirror that curves inwards is B. Hypermetropia
A. concave C. Presbyopia
B. conver
D. Astigmatism
C. convex
D. plain mirror 50. The least distance of distinct vision for a
normal eye is
45. A:Astigmatism usually is caused by an ir-
regularly shaped cornea. B:Rainbow is the A. infinity
natural phenomenon in which dispersion
B. 25 cm
takes place.
A. Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ are true statements C. 2.5 cm
B. Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ are false statements. D. 25 m
C. ‘A’ is true while ‘B’ is false.
51. A person is unable to see distant object
D. ‘A’ is false while ‘B’ is true clearly. S/he also finds it difficult to read
46. when we see the nearby objects the eye newspaper sometimes. What can be the
lens will defect with his/her eyes?
A. become thin A. Myopia
B. become thick B. Hypermetropia
C. remains same
C. Presbyopia
D. none of above
D. Cataract
47. Refraction of light by the earth’s atmo-
sphere due to variation in air density is 52. The type of lens present in our eye is
called
A. Concave
A. atmospheric reflection
B. Convex
B. atmospheric dispersion
C. atmospheric scattering C. Both Convex and Concave
D. atmospheric refraction D. none of above

53. The amount of light entering human eye is 59. Which nerve transmits information from
controlled by the eye to the brain?

A. Cornea A. Optic
B. Iris B. Olfactory
C. Pupil C. Occulomotor
D. Ciliary muscles D. Trigeminal
54. The property of persistence of vision is 60. Cones are light sensitive cells in the retina
used in- that
A. Colour Vision A. give you color vision in bright light
B. Myopia B. respond in dim light
C. Presbyopia C. give you color vision in dim light
D. Cinematography D. respond in bright light
55. The convex lens is not used 61. regulates how much light enters the eye
A. in camera A. cornea
B. as glasses to correct for short sight B. iris
C. as glasses to correct for light sight
C. eye lens
D. all the above
D. retina
56. When an object is placed closer to eye
62. What is another name for Myopia
A. the ciliary muscles contract
A. Asthma
B. curvature of the eye lens increases
B. Far-sightedness
C. Eye lens become thicker
C. Near sightedness
D. All of the above
D. Presbyopia
57. What do the lens and cornea have in com-
mon? 63. What part of the eye are the cones located
A. They both can change shape. A. Iris
B. They both send messages to the brain. B. lens
C. They both bend light into a focused C. retina
beam. D. pupil
D. none of above
64. What is the innermost layer and most del-
58. What type of image is formed by the eye icate layer of the eyeball where photore-
lens on the retina? ceptors are located?
A. Real and erect A. Sclera
B. Virtual and inverted B. Choroid
C. Real and inverted C. Retina
D. Virtual and erect D. Cornea

65. The defect of vision in which the person C. Retina and Rods
is able to see distant object distinctly but
D. Retina and Cones
cannot see nearby objects clearly is called
A. far-sightedness 71. Hypermetropia can be corrected by
B. near-sightedness A. concave mirror
C. presbyopia B. convex mirror
D. All of above C. concave lens
NARAYAN CHANGDER
66. Least distance of distinct vision for age D. convex lens
group 50-60 is
72. When excess aqueous humor puts too
A. 50 cm
much pressure on the optic nerve
B. 100-200 cm
A. Cataracts
C. 70-90 cm
B. Glaucoma
D. 7-8 cm
C. Myopia
67. When proteins build up in the lens, causing D. Astigmatism
cloudy vision
A. Cataracts 73. The maximum power of accomodation for
a person having normal vision(D=25 cm)
B. Glaucoma
in D is
C. Astigmatism
A. 5
D. Myopia
B. 2
68. is made up of millions of little rods and C. 3
cones
D. none of these
A. Iris
B. Sclera 74. is age related.
C. Retina A. Myopia
D. Optic Nerve B. Hypermetropia
69. If light is not focused perfectly on the C. Night blindness
retina, what would be the result D. Presbyopia
A. Image will be blurry
75. A person cannot see distinctly any ob-
B. No Image will be seen
jet placed beyond 40 cm from his
C. Image being too bright or two dark eye.Calculate the power of the lens which
D. Image being in black or white will enable him to see distant stars clearly.
A. -2.5m
70. allows you to see colors (This is a
tricky one) B. -2.5cm
A. Rods and Cones C. -2.5D
B. The Retina D. none of these

76. The power of accommodation for normal C. 10, 000

eye is D. 100 billion

A. 400 D
82. Following is true for Hypermetropia
B. 40 D
A. It can be corrected by using a convex
C. 4 D lens
D. 44 D
B. It may arise when focal length of eye
77. The black opening between the aqueous lens is too long
humour and the lens is called C. it may arise when eyeball has become
A. retina too small
B. iris D. all of above

C. cornea 83. Which of the following turns to gray
D. pupil colour, when silver bromide exposed in
sunlight?
78. What are rods and cones? A. Silver
A. Rods see in black and white cones see B. Bromine
in color.
C. Silver bromide
B. Cones see in black and white, rods see
in color D. Silver bromine
C. Cones see motion, Rods see images 84. Which wave can be transmitted through
D. Rods see movement, Cones see im- empty space?
ages A. electromagnetic
79. Farsighted B. mechanical
A. Hyperopia C. sound
B. Myopia D. tidal
C. Emmetropia 85. There are approximately cones in the
D. none of above human eye.
A. 6 million
80. Which of the following is natural optical
lens? B. 100 billion
A. Camera C. 120 million
B. Microscope D. 10, 000
C. Telescope 86. If the position of an object is it distinct vi-
D. eye lens sion, the focal length of eye lens is
81. There are rods in the human eye. Far A. 2.5 centimetres
more than there are cones. B. 2.27 centimetres
A. 120 million C. 25 centimetres
B. 6 million D. 22.7 centimetres

87. A + d = i1 + i2 here i1 and i2 refers to , 93. what is the cornea?

angles.
A. anterior transparent coat
A. incident, refract
B. white fibrous tissue that covers most
B. refract, incident of the eye
C. refract, emergence C. regulates amount of light that goes
D. incidence, emergence into the light
D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
88. What is the ciliary muscle?
A. Transmits information to the brain 94. Having two eyes facilitates in A:Increasing
the field of viewB:Bringing three-
B. Controls shape of the eye.
dimensional viewC:Developing the concept
C. Opening to the inner eye. of distance/sizeThen the correct option
D. Controls size of pupil. is/are
A. A only
89. The lens used for correction of hyperme-
tropia is B. A and B only
A. Concave C. B only
B. Convex D. A, B and C
C. Diverging 95. These photoreceptors have three different
D. none of above pigments. Each receptor is associated with
its own neuron resulting in crisp, clear
90. Which of these is true? color vision
A. Cone cells detect light and dark A. hair cells
B. Rods focus light B. rods
C. Cones detect color C. cones
D. Rods detect color D. lens
91. The outer layer of the eye is the
96. What is the iris?
A. Sclera
A. Controls size of pupil.
B. Retina
B. Focuses image of object (on retina).
C. Choroid
C. Transmits information to the brain.
D. Cornea
D. Contains cells that detect light.
92. The retina contains special sensitive cells.
The cells help us see colors and details. 97. Power of a lens is expressed in
A. rod A. Millimetre
B. eyelashes B. Metre
C. cone C. Centimetre
D. iris D. Dioptre

98. What is the function of the lens? 103. The white part of the eye is the
A. clear structure that bends light to fo- A. Sclera

cus on the retina B. Retina
B. thin structure that controls the pupil C. Choroid
C. clear, watery fluid D. Cornea
D. where the optic nerve attaches
104. The pupil of an eye changes in size to ad-
99. What is the cornea? just for
A. clear structure that bends light to fo- A. objects at different distances
cus on the retina B. objects of different sizes
B. white outer layer of the eyeball C. different colours
C. clear layer that forms front of the eye D. different amounts of light
D. gel that fills space 105. A colored muscle that controls the size of
the pupil
100. Cataract:
A. retina
A. infammation of the transparent mem-
brane that lines your lids B. cornea
B. eye condition that damage optic nerve C. iris
C. a condition in which the eye lens be- D. choroid
come opaque
106. The angle of vision for a healthy human
D. none of above being is
101. Two lenses of power-1.75D and +2.75D A. About 30 degrees

are placed in contact. What is the focal B. About 60 degrees
length of the combination? C. About six degrees
A. 50cm D. About 90 degrees
B. 100cm
107. Sound is initially collected by the outer
C. 75cm ear, also called the-
D. 125cm A. Melleus
102. What is the correct route that light rays B. Pincus
take as they enter the eye? C. Eardrum
A. Cornea => conjunctiva => pupil D. Auricle or pinna
=> retina
108. Collects the image on the back of the eye
B. Cornea => lens => pupil => and sends the image to the optic nerve.
retina
A. optic nerve
C. Conjunctiva => cornea => lens =>
retina B. Retina
D. Conjunctiva => lens => pupil => C. Neuron

retina D. cornea

109. What is the function of the pupil? B. Real and erect

A. Sends messages picked up by the C. Virtual and inverted
retina to the brain
D. Virtual and erect
B. The hole that controls the different
amounts of light 115. Search 1 Questions Change Question Or-
C. the colored part of the eye that con- der Question 1 Q.
trols the size of the pupil A. a
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. transparent jelly like fluid that fills the B. b
eye and refracts light
C. c
110. What is the other name of old hyperme- D. d
tropia?
A. myopia 116. Rainbow is formed due to of light
B. contradict A. refraction
C. hypermetropia B. reflection
D. none of these C. dispersion
111. The image properties on retina of eye D. none of above
(i) real, (ii) inverted, (iii) virtual, (iv) erect
117. At the angle of minimum deviation (D),
A. (i) and (ii) the angle of incidence is equal to the angle
B. (i), (ii) and (iv) of
C. (ii) and (iv) A. reflection
D. (i), (ii) and (iii) B. refraction
112. When the eyeball is too long causing C. emergence
Nearsightedness D. critical angle
A. Myopia
118. Which of the following lenses are used to
B. Hyperopia
correct presbyopia of a person?
C. Asigmatism
A. Bi-concave
D. Presbyopia
B. Bi-convex
113. An eye chart used to analyze the condi-
C. Bi-focal
tion of the eye
D. Plano-convex
A. Snell chart
B. Snellen chart 119. The power of lens is-2D, its focal length
C. Nell chart is
D. Smelling chart A. -2m

B. 0.5 m
114. The eye lens forms image of an object
on the retina. C. -0.05 cm
A. Real and inverted D. -0.50 m

120. A person with can see distant objects 125. Type of photoreceptor that is active in
clearly but cannot see objects at near dis- bright light and perceives color?
tance. A. fovea centralis

A. Myopia B. cones
B. Hypermetropia C. rods
C. Presbyopia D. optic disk
D. None 126. The value of least distance of clear vision

is about cm.
121. What works as the screen in the eye, A. 55
where the image lands?
B. 40
A. cornea C. 20
B. lens D. 25
C. retina 127. Which of the following is wrong state-
D. optic nerve ment
A. Iris is a very thin layer
122. is the unit of power of lens? B. Image forms on retina
A. metre C. Cones identify the colour
B. centimetre D. Rods doesn’t identify the intensity of
light
C. dioptre
128. The whites of your eyes is called the
D. hertz
A. pupil
123. The gel-like substance that reinforces the B. cornea
eyeball and prevents it from collapsing in-
C. sclera
ward is the
D. lens
A. vitreous humor
129. transports light to the brain to make
B. scleral venous sinus (canal of an image
Schlemm)
A. Pupil
C. ciliary body
B. Optic Nerve
D. choroid C. Rods and Cones
E. aqueous humor D. Retina
124. Which of the following is the back part of 130. When white light enters a glass prism
the human eye from air, the angle of deviation is least for
A. Retina
A. Blue light
B. Lens B. yellow light
C. Cornea C. violet light
D. Pupil D. red light

131. When a beam of white light falls on a C. Cornea

glass prism, the colour of light which will D. Conjunctiva
deviate least is:
A. Violet 137. The bundle of fibers that carry informa-
tion from the retina to the brain is called
B. Red the
C. Green A. optic nerve
D. blue B. blind spot
NARAYAN CHANGDER
132. The Pupil is: C. vitreous humor
A. Sensitive membrane D. aqueous humor
B. The opening in the center of the iris 138. The vitreous humor is a liquid inside of
C. tear glands your eye. When light passes from the
lens into the vitreous, the light changes
D. lines the eyelid medium. What happens to light because
133. The retina contains these cells which are of this medium change?
sensitive to light and convert light to nerve A. Light is transmitted.
impulses. These cells are called B. Light is reflected.
A. optic nerves C. Light is refracted.
B. ciliary muscles D. Light is absorbed.
C. photoreceptors
139. Which lens is thicker at the middle and
D. lens thinner at its edges?
134. The distance between eyelens and retina A. convex lens
is B. concave lens
A. 2.5 centimetres C. Plano concave
B. 25cm D. plano convex
C. 25 metres 140. What part of the eye is a clear protec-
D. 25 millimetres tive structure that allows light to enter the
eye?
135. The Vitamin essential for healthy eyes is
A. iris
B. retina
A. Vit.A
C. cornea
B. Vit.B
D. choroid
C. Vit.C
D. Vit.D 141. What is the relationship between eye-
sight and light?
136. What is the name of the tough, white A. light shines on all object allowing peo-
outer layer of the eye? ple to see them
A. Sclera B. Light shines through all objects allow-
B. Choroid ing people to see them

C. Light enters the eye before striking an C. Refraction of light

object, allowing people to see the object D. Reflection of light

D. light reflects off an object and then en-
147. Which part of the eye is the outer white
ters the eye allowing people to see the ob-
part of the eye?
ject
A. cornea
142. The ability of the eye lens to adjust its B. iris
focal length is called
C. ciliary body
A. Accommodation
D. sclera
B. Accomplish
148. The least distance of distinct vision for a
C. Composition young adult with normal vision is about
D. None of the above A. 25m
143. Which of the following phenomena of B. 2.5cm
light are involved in the formation of a C. 25cm
rainbow?
D. 2.5m
A. Reflection, refraction and dispersion
149. Which part of the eye is just behind the
B. Refraction, dispersion and total inter- pupil?
nal reflection
A. Lens
C. Refraction, dispersion and internal re-
B. Macula
flection
C. Nerves
D. Dispersion, scattering and total inter-
nal reflection D. Iris
150. Name the corrective lens used for hyper-
144. The stars in sky appears closer than actu-
metropia
ally are due to
A. Concave lens
A. diffraction of light
B. convex lens
B. scattering of light
C. Bifocal lens
C. reflection of light
D. Diverging lens
D. refraction of light
151. Nearsightedness is also known as
145. Retina: A. Myopia
A. delicate membrane lining the eyeball B. Hyperpopia
B. respond to bright color C. Presbyopia
C. carries visual info to brain D. none of the above
D. lines the eyelids 152. When ALL of the light is blocked
146. The star appear shifted from their actual A. translucent
position due to the phenomenon of: B. opaque
A. Diffraction of light C. transparent
B. Scattering of light D. none of above

153. The atmospheric refractions of light B. all the colours of the white light are
causes the twinkling of scattered away
A. planets only C. blue colour is scattered the most
B. stars only D. red colour is scattered the most
C. planets and stars
159. Astigmatism:
D. stars and satellites
A. Eye with poor vision
NARAYAN CHANGDER
154. Choose the odd one out. B. a defect in the eye or in a lens
A. Twinkling of stars is due to the atmo- C. where eye lens becomes opaque
spheric refraction of starlight.
D. damages optic nerve
B. The path of the rays of light varies, the
apparent position of star fluctuates. 160. When the eyeball is too short, causing
C. The atmospheric refraction occurs in Farsightedness
the medium of constant refractive index. A. Hyperopia
D. The starlight, on entering the earth’s B. Myopia
atmosphere, undergoes refraction before
it reaches the earth. C. Glaucoma
D. Astigmatism
155. Accomodation of the eye is the ability of
to adjust itself 161. Lazy Eye:
A. eye lens A. An eye with poor vision that is mainly
B. cornea caused by under use
C. pupil B. A defect in the eye or in a lens
D. iris C. inflammation of the membrane that
lines your eyelid
156. This jelly like fluid helps the eye maintain
it’s shape. D. damages optic nerve
A. Cytoplasm 162. When light rays enter the eye, most of
B. Bile the refraction occurs at the
C. Pancreatic Juices A. iris
D. Vitreous Humor B. pupil
157. the ability of the lens to change shape C. crystalline lens
A. chiasma D. outer surface of the cornea

B. macula lutea 163. Which structure changes shape to focus
C. refraction light on the retina?
D. accomodation A. iris
B. lens
158. At noon the sun appears white as [NCERT
Exemplar Problems] C. pupil
A. light is least scattered D. sclera

164. What is the aqueous humor? 169. This part protects the eye, especially the
iris, pupil and lens.
A. fibers that hold the lens in place

A. rods
B. thin structure that controls pupil
B. cornea
C. clear, watery fluid
C. optic nerve
D. helps refract light to the retina
D. retina
165. When white light enters a prism, it gets 170. In the visible spectrum (VIBGYOR), the
split into its constituent colours. This is colour having the shortest wavelength is
due to
A. different refractive index for different A. Green
wavelength of each colour
B. Red
B. each colours has same velocity in the
C. Violet
prism.
D. Blue
C. prism material have high density.
D. Scattering of light 171. What is the fluid portion on the inside of
the eye called?
166. On what factor does the heat genetrated A. Aqueous humor
in a conductor depend upon? B. Vitreous humor
A. Directly proportional to time C. Fovea Centralis
B. Inversely proportional to time D. Anterior humor
C. Directly proportional to density 172. The maximum and minimum focal length
D. Inversely proportional to mass of eye lens are
A. 25 cm / 22.7 cm
167. With both eyes open, a person’s field of
view is about B. 2.5 cm / 2.27 cm
A. 3600 C. 2.5 m / 22.7 m

D. 25 cm / 50 cm
B. 1500
C. 1800 173. This part of the eye carries the message
from your eye to the part of your brain
D. 900 that controls vision.
168. The layer of light-sensitive cells at the A. cornea
back of the eye that detects images fo- B. lens
cused by the cornea and the lens is called
C. optic nerve
the
D. retina
A. blind spot
174. What part of the eye is the colored, mus-
B. sclera
cular portion of the eye which controls
C. retina pupil size?
D. optic nerve A. iris

B. lens 180. Far point of a normal eye is situated at

C. choroid A. 25 cm
D. ciliary body B. Infinity
C. 50 cm
175. Rods respond to:
D. 400 cm
A. dim light
181. The connects the eyes to the brain
B. smell
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. retina
C. food
B. cornea
D. Bright color C. optic nerve
176. To see an object comfortably and dis- D. pupil
tinctly, we must hold it about cm from
182. What is the outer tough layer of the
our eyes.
eye?
A. 10 A. Lens
B. 25 B. iris
C. 15 C. pupil
D. infinity D. Sclera
177. Splitting of white light into seven colours 183. Most of the refraction of light rays enter-
on passing through the glass prism is ing the eye occurs at the outer surface of
called-
A. Reflection A. Cornea
B. Refraction B. Iris
C. Retina
C. Dispersion
D. Ciliary muscles
D. Scattering
184. Following controls and regulates the
178. Blue colour of the sky is due to the phe- amount of light entering the eye
nomenon of:
A. Iris
A. Reflection of light B. Pupil
B. Refraction of light C. Retina
C. Dispersion of light D. Corena
D. Scattering of light 185. What is pink eye?
179. What is/are the defect(s) of eye? A. and eye condition that damages the op-
tic nerve
A. Myopia
B. an eye with poor vision
B. Hypermetropia
C. An inflammation of the transparent
C. Presbyopia membrane that lines your eyelid
D. All of the above D. your face:)

186. The largest sensory organ B. Optic nerve

A. eye C. Optometrist

B. tongue D. Ophthalmologist
C. ear
192. What is the far point and near point of
D. skin the human eye with normal vision?
E. nose A. 1km & 2.5m
187. What is the far point of human eye with B. 25m & 25cm
normal vision C. 250m & 25cm
A. Infinity D. Infinity & 25cm
B. 25cm
193. What is the first clear part of the eye
C. 2.5 m
A. sclera
D. 25 m
B. pupil
188. Human eye forms image of an object at C. cornea
its
D. lens
A. cornea
B. iris 194. What part of the eye has the highest con-
centration of rods and cones?
C. retina
A. optic nerve
D. pupil
B. fovea centralis
189. What part of the eye bends light to focus
it on the retina? C. optic disk
A. Retina D. iris
B. Iris 195. When the eye is focussed on an object

C. Optic Nerve very far away, the focal length of the eye
lens is
D. Lens
A. maximum
190. A person having a myopic eye used the B. minimum
concave lens of focal length of 50 cm. Cal-
culate the power of a lens. C. equal to that of the crystalline lens
A. +2 D D. half of its maximum focal length
B. +0.2 D 196. Due to atmospheric refraction of sunlight,
C. -0.2 D the time form sunrise to sunset is length-
ened by
D. -2 D
A. 6 minutes
191. These are hair-thin threads of glass that
B. 2 minutes
transmit laser light that has been encoded
with messages C. 4 minutes
A. Optic fibers D. 5 minutes

197. The muscular diaphragm that controls the C. retina

size of pupil is
D. pupil
A. Retina
B. Cornea 203. The following controls the light entering
the human eye
C. Iris
A. Iris
D. Ciliary muscle
B. Retina
NARAYAN CHANGDER
198. What does the optic nerve do?
C. Pupil
A. transmit impulses from retina to brain
D. Cornea
B. helps the eye focus
C. receives light and sends it to brain 204. The image formed on retina is
D. transmits light rays to retina A. Erect and Magnified
199. Which layer inside the eye contains rods B. Erect and Diminished
and cones? C. Inverted and Diminished
A. Choroid D. none of above
B. Sclera
C. Retina 205. A person can see far objects clearly but
can not see near objects clearly. What de-
D. Optic nerve fect that person have?
200. This part of the eye changes shape to con- A. Myopia
trol the amount of light that enters the eye.
B. Hypermetropia
It is also known as the colored part of the
eye. What is it called? C. Cataract
A. pupil D. Presbyopia
B. lens
206. Eardrum AKA-
C. iris
A. tympanic membrane
D. retina
B. middle ear
201. Near and far points of a young person
normal eye respectively are C. auricle
A. 0 and infinity D. pinna

B. 0 and 25 cm 207. The muscular diaphragm that controls the
C. 25 cm and infinity size of the pupil is
D. 25 cm and 150 cm A. cornea
202. What part of the eye are most of the B. ciliary muscles
cones located C. Iris
A. Iris D. retina The muscular diaphragm that
B. lens controls the size of the pupil is

208. Which colour deviates the least when it C. 25 cm and infinity

passes through a prism?
D. 25 cm and 150 cm.

A. Violet
B. Blue 214. This structure controls the size of the lens
C. Red A. Cilliary Muscles
D. Green B. Choroid Layer
209. What does the retina do? C. Biceps
A. transmit impulses from retina to brain D. Cones
215. For a young adult with normal vision, the
C. receives light and sends it to brain near point is
D. transmits light rays to retina A. 10 cm
210. Which of the following receptors in the B. 20 cm
retina identify the colour?
C. 25 cm
A. Cones
D. 35 cm
B. Rods
C. Optic nerve 216. How many layers does the human eye
D. Iris consist of?
A. 2
211. Which flow is correct to see the nearby
objects clearly? B. 3
A. Ciliary muscles relaxed-lens becomes C. 4
thinner-focal length increases
D. 5
B. Ciliary muscles contracts-lens be-
comes thicker-focal length decreases 217. This part of the eye has photoreceptors
C. Ciliary muscles relaxed-lens becomes called rods and cones. They help us to see
thicker-focal length increases color and see at night. It is called:
D. Ciliary muscles contracts-lens be- A. optic nerve
comes thinner-focal length decreases
B. brain
212. The muscles of iris control C. retina
A. focal length of eye lens
D. cornea
B. opening of pupil
C. shape of crystalline lens 218. What does the iris do?
D. optic nerve A. transmits light rays to retina
213. Near and far points of a young person B. helps the eye focus
normal eye respectively are C. allows light to enter eye
A. 0 and infinity D. regulates how much light enters the
B. 0 and 25 cm eye

219. It is composed of layers of blood ves- D. none of above

sels and connective tissues . Nourishes the
back of the eye 225. The function of the human eye is to
A. Retina A. focus light rays to produce images of
B. Choroid objects
C. Optic nerve B. capture sound waves and convert
them to images
D. Sclera
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. capture electrical energy and trans-
220. What is the retina? form it to brain waves
A. Contains cells that detect light
D. capture light waves and convert them
B. Controls shape of the eye to mechanical energy
C. Outermost transparent layer of eye.
Begins focusing process. 226. The deviation of which colour light is
taken as mean deviation?
D. Transmits information to the brain
A. Red
221. The is the dark circle in the center of
your iris that lets light into the inner eye. B. Orange
A. retina C. Yellow
B. cornea D. Blue
C. iris
227. bifocal lens is used to correct this defect.
D. pupil
A. Myopia
222. What does the middle ear consist of?
B. hypermetropia
A. incus, eardrum, middle ear
C. cataract
B. melleus, Incus, and stapes
D. presbyopia
C. mellus, incus, and auricle
D. mellus, incus, and tympanic membrane 228. The maximum angle, at which we able to
see the whole object is degrees.
223. Farsightedness
A. 40
A. Myopia
B. Hyperopia B. 50
C. Both C. 60
D. none of above D. 100
224. What might happen if the lens of your 229. This is the structure that transmits im-
eye became damaged? ages to the brain.
A. Your eyes wouldn’t be able to focus A. Blind Spot
properly.
B. Retina
B. You wouldn’t be able to see in color.
C. Aqueous Humor
C. All the images you would see would be
upside down. D. Optic Nerve

230. short sightedness can be corrected by 235. The white light dispersed into a spectrum
lens of seven colors. What will happen if a sec-
ond identical prism is placed in an inverted

A. convex
position?
B. bi focal
A. Seven colors will further break down
C. concave
into 49 colors
D. none
B. Spectrum will recombine into the
231. Different types of waves on the electro- white light
magnetic spectrum have different applica- C. No change
tions. Which statement is correct?
D. Spectrum will recombine and become
A. The human body radiates infrared
blue light
waves.
B. Sunburn on human skin is a result of 236. What do tears do?
microwaves.
A. The allow the eye to feel sadness
C. Information is commonly transmitted
B. They relieve pressure in the eye
with gamma waves.
D. Images of bones for medical treat- C. They wash away any dirt and provide
ment are taken with ultraviolet waves. moisture to the eye
D. They don’t do anything
232. The human eye len’s focal length range
between 237. The coloured light having the maximum
A. 0 to 2.5 centimetres speed in glass prism is
B. 2.5 to 25 centimetres A. blue
C. 2.5 to 2.27 centimetres B. green
D. None of the above C. violet
233. What part of the eye sits on the outer D. yellow
surface of the cornea and lines the eyelids.
This structure produces mucous 238. changes shape to allow us to focus near
A. iris and far and near again
B. lens A. lens
C. retina B. cornea
D. conjunctiva C. iris
234. An increase in ocular pressure may de- D. none of above

velop into for a patient. The patient
239. Accommodation of eye lens is maximum
may have mild visual disturbances and lit-
at the age group of
tle to no pain.
A. cataract A. 7-8
B. glaucoma B. 10-15
C. conjunctivitis C. 16-40
D. astigmatism D. 40-100

240. A convex lens forms a virtual magnified 246. A camera employs lens to form
image when the object is kept images.
A. At 2F A. diverging, real
B. Between F and 2F B. diverging, virtual
C. At F C. converging, real
D. Between F and optical center D. converging, virtual
241. Which of the following colour of white
NARAYAN CHANGDER
247. If the optic nerve is severed, what would
light is least deviated by the prism? be the result
A. Green A. Image will be blurry
B. Violet B. No Image will be seen
C. Indigo C. Image being too bright or two dark
D. Yellow D. Image being in black or white
242. Opens and closes to adjust the total 248. What is the sclera?
amount of light entering the eye.
A. clear structure that bends light to fo-
A. Pupil cus on the retina
B. Sclera B. white outer layer of the eyeball
C. Cornea
C. clear layer that forms front of the eye
D. Human lens
D. gel that fills space
243. send signals to the brain
249. The iris in a human can be
A. Optical nerve
A. brown
B. Aqueous Humour
B. green
C. Viterous humour
C. blue
D. Eye lens
D. all of the above
244. The place where the optic nerve leaves
the retina, where there are no light- 250. Myopia and Hypermetropia can be cor-
sensitive cells is the rected by
A. lens A. Concave and plano-convex lens
B. cornea B. Concave and convex lens
C. blind spot C. Convex and concave lens
D. sclera D. Plano-concave lens for both defects.
245. Light enters the eye through a transpar- 251. The farthest point upto which the eye can
ent membrane known as see objects clearly is for a normal eye.
A. Cornea A. 25 cm
B. Pupil B. 15 cm
C. Retina C. infinity
D. Iris D. 1 km

252. The far point of a myopic person is 60 cm C. telescope

in front of the eye. What is the nature of
D. camera
the lens and power of the lens required to

correct the problem?
258. the black opening between the aqueous
A. P = +1.67 DConvex lens humour and the lens is called
B. P =-1.67 DConcave lens A. retina
C. P = + 0.0167 DConvex lens B. iris
D. P =-0.0167 DConcave lens
C. cornea
253. The thick, tough, white outer covering of D. pupil
the eyeball is called the
A. sclera 259. the black opening at the back of cornea is
B. lens called
C. pupil A. retina
D. cornea B. iris
254. in order to correct the defect because of C. sclera

the weakening of ciliary muscles we need D. pupil
lens
A. concave 260. This part of the eye sends messages to
the brain
B. convex
A. rods
C. bifocal
D. none of above B. retina
C. optic nerve
255. Name the spot where no image is formed
on the retina D. cones
A. Greenspot
261. Choroid:
B. Black spot
A. transparent coat
C. Black hole
B. Blood supply
D. Optic spot
C. eye color
256. What happens when the radial muscle
contracts? D. roundness of eye
A. The pupil constricts.
262. When white light passes through a prism,
B. The pupil dilates. it splits into its component colours. This
C. The lens is stretched thin. phenomenon is called
D. The lens becomes more round. A. Spectrum
257. Human eye acts like a B. Reflection

A. endoscope C. Refraction
B. microscope D. Dispersion

263. on the tongue are the receptors for C. Power of adjustment of the eye
taste (use the exact word) D. Power of enabling of the eye
A. Taste receptors
269. The human eye can focus on objects at
B. Olfactory Receptors different distances by adjusting the focal
C. Taste Buds legnth of the eye lens. This is due to
D. Olfactory Buds A. presbyopia
B. accommodation
NARAYAN CHANGDER
264. this problem arises due to foggy or cloudy
lens . C. near-sightedness
A. presbyopia D. far-sightedness
B. myopia
270. Where does the image form in a human
C. cataract eye?
D. hypermetropia A. Cornea
265. The shape of eye-ball is nearly B. Retina
A. Elliptical C. Pupil
B. Oval D. Iris
C. Circular 271. What will be the colour of the emergent
D. Spherical light when white light is incident on a thin
walled hollow glass prism.
266. We can see Sun before actual sunrise by
A. white
about
B. green
A. 2 seconds
C. red
B. 2 minutes
D. could not be predicted
C. 2 hours
D. 20 minutes 272. As light from a far off star comes down
towards the earth
267. The blind spot on the retina has
A. it bends away from the normal
A. numerous nerve endings
B. it bends towards the normal
B. no nerve endings
C. it does not bend at all
C. few nerve endings
D. it is reflected back
D. nerve ending which increase in num-
ber as age advances 273. a student has difficulty in reading the
black board while sitting in the last row.
268. The ability of eye lens to adjust its focal what could be his defect of vision
length to form a sharp image of the object
at varying distances on the retina is called A. short sightedness
B. long sightedness
A. Power of observation of the eye C. astigmatism
B. Power of accommodation of the eye D. none of above

274. This is when some light passes through, 280. Attached to the crystalline lens and re-
but some light does NOT pass through. sponsible for changing its shape

A. opaque A. Ciliary muscle
B. translucent B. Crystalline Lens
C. transparent C. Retina
D. none of above D. Iris
275. The shape of rainbow as seen from an 281. The splitting up of white light into 7
airplane during midday is colours on passing through a glass prism
is called
A. semicircle
A. refraction
B. circle
B. deflection
C. spherical C. dispersion
D. conical D. scattering
276. If the Iris can’t dilate properly, what 282. Out of the following, the colour of light
would be the result? having maximum wavelength is
A. Image will be blurry A. violet
B. No Image will be seen B. indigo
C. Image being too bright or two dark C. green
D. Image being in black or white D. orange
277. In human eye, the image is formed 283. The focal length of the eye lens increases
when eye muscles
A. Behind Retina
A. are relaxed and lens becomes thinner
B. In Front of Retina
B. contract and lens becomes thicker
C. On Retina
C. are relaxed and lens becomes thicker
D. In Between Lens and Retina
D. contract and lens becomes thinner
278. Near point for the eye is situated at 284. Which of the following is the coloured
A. 400 cm part that we see in an eye?
B. Infinity A. Pupil
C. 25 cm B. Cornea
D. 100 cm C. Iris
D. Retina
279. The colour of sky is due to
285. Which of the following phenomena con-
A. reflection
tributes significantly to the reddish ap-
B. refraction pearance of the sun at sunrise or sunset?
C. dispersion A. Dispersion of light
D. scattering B. Scattering of light

C. Total internal reflection of light 291. Which part of the eye opens in dark
D. Reflection of light from the earth View places and closes in bright places?
Answer A. Cornea
B. Retina
286. Type of photoreceptor that functions in
low light and creates shades of gray C. Pupil
A. retina D. Lens
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. rod 292. An object is placed at the centre of the
C. cone curvature of a concave mirror. What is the
distance between its image and the pole?
D. choroid
A. Equal to f
287. The clear tissue that covers the front of B. Between f and 2f
the eye. C. Equal to 2f
A. Lens D. Greater than 2f
B. Pupil
293. What does the sclera do?
C. Iris
A. protects the eye
D. Cornea
288. Function of eyelids includes C. allows light to enter eye
A. tears are spread over eye D. transmits light rays to retina
B. dust particles are wiped off 294. Cones respond to:
C. dust particles are cleared off A. Dim light
D. all of these B. Food
289. which colour bends the most on refraction C. Smell

through a triangular prism? D. Bright colors
A. red 295. The colored light that refracts most while
B. blue passing through a prism is
C. green A. Red
D. violet B. Yellow
C. Blue
290. A person with a myopic eye cannot
D. Violet
see objects beyond 1.2 metres distinctly .
What should be the type of corrective lens 296. Which of the following is true about the
used to restore proper vision lens of the human eye?
A. Concave lens A. Clear tissue that covers the eye.
B. Convex lens B. Opening of the eye.
C. Bifocal lens C. Focuses light on the retina.
D. Concave mirror D. Regulates amount of light.

297. What is the black hole at the center of C. Astigmatism

your eye called? D. Far Sighted

A. Macula
303. The image formed on retina of human eye
B. Iris is
C. Pupil A. real and inverted
D. Cornea B. virtual and erect
298. One cannot see through the fog, because C. real and erect
D. virtual and inverted
A. refractive index of the fog is very high
304. The focal length of concave lens is
B. light suffers total reflection at droplets 1000mm then it’s power will be
C. fog absorbs light A. 0.5D
D. light is scattered by the droplets B. -0.5D
299. The phenomenon of light responsible for C. 1D
the working of human eye is D. -1D
A. Refraction
305. The is a muscle that controls how
B. Reflection much light enters the eye.
C. Persistence of vision A. iris
D. Power of accommodation B. pupil
300. A concave lens of suitable focal length is C. cornea
used for correcting a- D. blind spot
A. Myopic eye
306. What is the space inside the iris called?
B. Hypermetropic eye
A. pupil
C. Both a and b
B. ciliary body
C. lens
301. How are rods different than cones? D. choroid
A. rods are only located at the side of the
eye 307. This structure is the black, center part of
the eye. Light enters the eye here.
B. cones are see color whereas rods can-
not A. Iris
C. there are many more cones than rods B. Optic Nerve
D. rods are more sensitive in bright light C. Pupil

D. Lens
302. Light entering the eye is focused behind
the retina instead of directly on it, objects 308. when ciliary muscles contract it the
close to the eye look blurry curvature of eye lens
A. Iris A. increases
B. Near Sighted B. decreases

C. none of the above C. Neuron

D. none of above D. cornea
309. For an eye lens, itf focal length is 315. Cornea is abnormally curved, causes
A. increasable blurry vision because it is unable to focus.
B. both reducible and increasable A. Temporarily Blind

B. Blindness
C. fixed
C. Eye
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. reducible
D. Astigmatism
310. This type of light sensitive (photosensi-
tive) cell detects movement and black & 316. This is a spot that you can’t see
white A. Peripheral Vision
A. Sclera B. Pupil
B. Cornea C. Cornea
C. Cones D. Blind Spot
D. Rods 317. Hypermetropia is cured by using
311. This part focuses light onto the retina A. concave lens spectacle
A. lens B. Bifocal lens spectacle
B. cornea C. convex lens spectacle
C. pupil D. Binoculars
D. iris 318. This structure focuses the images in the
312. This phenomenon is responsible for rain- environment
bow formation. A. Sclera
A. refraction B. Lens
B. dispersion C. Retina
C. internal reflection D. Cones
D. all of these 319. A white colour object
313. Why does sky appear to be blue? A. absorbs all colours
A. Due to dispersion of light B. reflects all the colours
B. Due to scattering of light C. transmits all colours
C. Due to refraction of light D. scatters all colours
D. Due to diffraction of light 320. The persistence of vision for human eye
is
314. Gathers information about color, shape,
and size of eye and sends to the optic A. 1/10th of a second
nerve. B. 1/6th of the second
A. optic nerve C. 1/16th of a second
B. Retina D. 1/18th of a second

321. What are the functions of eyelids and A. lens

eyelashes B. cornea

A. to protect and rehydrate the eyes C. pupil
B. keep dirt out of the eyes D. retina
C. keep debris out of the eys
327. How many tiny bones are there in the
D. all of the above middle ear?
322. When the light is very bright, the diame- A. 2
ter of pupil B. 3
A. Expends C. 4
B. Contract D. 5
C. Remain same 328. Rods are responsible for our ability to
D. All of these see
323. The image formed on the retina of the hu- A. Movement

man eye is B. Red
A. virtual and inverted C. Blue
B. real and inverted D. Green
C. real and erect 329. We see reddish color sky during sunset
D. virtual and erect and sunrise. Select the incorrect state-
ment.
324. The colored portion of the eye that con-
A. Light travels more in the atmosphere
trols the amount of light reaching the
retina is known as B. Sun is near the horizon
A. Cornea C. Red color is scattered most
B. Pupil D. Blue color is scattered by the particles
C. Retina 330. What is the colour part that we see in an

D. Iris eye
A. Iris
325. The sound waves travel from a medium
B. Rods
of to a medium of
C. Cones
A. the ocean; air
B. air; bones
C. water; liquid 331. What role does the brain play in seeing?
D. air; liquid A. It puts blurry images into focus.
B. It puts black and white images into
326. A clear, flexible structure that makes an color.
image on the eye’s retina. The is flexi-
ble so that it can change shape, focusing on C. It flips upside down images right side
objects that are close up and objects that up.
are far away. D. none of above

332. What is the optic nerve? 338. Which animal has better eyesight than
A. Opening to the inner eye humans?
A. Bat
B. Transmits information to the brain
B. Horse
C. Outermost transparent layer of eye.
Begins focusing process C. Eagle
D. Controls shape of the eye. D. Elephant
339. What part of the eye sends nerve im-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
333. Phenomenon of happens in eyes.
pulses to the brain
A. Reflection
A. optic nerve
B. Refraction
B. iris
C. None of above
C. cornea
D. Data Missing D. sclera
334. what is the sclera? 340. Which of the following parts of the eye
A. gelatinous substance that fills eyeball provides refraction of light?
B. regulator of the eye A. Cornea
C. tough white fibrous tissue that covers B. Eye lens
most of the entire eye C. Iris
D. anterior transparent coat D. Both Cornea and Eye lens
335. What does the pupil do? 341. angle of deviation in a triangular prism is
angle between
A. protects the eye
A. incident ray and refracted ray.
B. refracted ray and emergent ray.
C. allows light to enter eye
C. extended incident and emergent ray
D. regulates how much light enters the
eye D. none of these
336. Nearsightedness 342. This type of light sensitive cell detects

color.
A. Myopia
A. Sclera
B. Hyperopia
B. Cornea
C. Both C. Rods
D. none of above D. Cones
337. Variable focal length of eye is responsible 343. The cornea is
for-
A. The white of your eye
A. Accomadation of eye
B. A thin protective layer of tissue that
B. Persistence of vision protects the eye
C. Colour blindness C. The color of your eye
D. Least distance of distinct vision D. The sensor

344. How many receptors called rods and C. Cataract

cones are there in the retina of an eye?
D. none of above

A. 125 million
B. 225 million 350. Lens
C. 325 million A. Clear tissue that covers the eye

D. 425 million B. Opening of the eye
345. Which muscle controls the shape of the C. Focuses the light
lens? D. Regulates amount of light
A. Radial muscle
351. The defect of vision in which the person
B. Circular muscle is able to see distant object distinctly but
C. Ciliary muscle cannot see nearby objects clearly is called
D. none of above
A. Long-sightedness
346. A condition where an increase in intraoc-
ular pressure can damage the optic nerve, B. Far-sightedness
ultimately resulting in loss of vision. C. Hypermetropia
A. Glaucoma D. All above
B. Herpes Simplex
C. Keratitis 352. Astigmatism can be caused by
D. Conjunctivitis A. A cornea that is flat

B. A cornea that is too curved
347. Which part of the eye is most like the film
in a camera? C. A cornea that is unevenly curved
A. Iris D. A lens that is less flexible, so the light
B. Pupil entering the eye converges at a point be-
hind the retina
C. Retina
D. Lens 353. The colour of eye is due to
348. In an eye, the position of the image on A. Cornea

the retina is adjusted by changing the B. Retina
A. position of the lens C. Iris
B. diameter of the pupil D. none of above
C. focal length of the lens
354. Light travels in waves
D. length of the eye ball
A. transverse
349. Another Name for near-sightedness is
B. compressional
A. Myopia C. longitudinal
B. Hypermetropia D. sound

355. What part filters the amount of light en- 361. Scattering of light by colloidal solution is
tering your eye known as
A. Iris A. Scattering
B. Pupil B. Dispersion
C. Iris and Pupil C. Tyndall effect
D. Cornea D. Stability
356. For people with myopia, the maximum fo-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
362. When the cornea is not shaped correctly
cal length is less than
A. Astigmatism
A. 2.5 m
B. Claucoma
B. 2.27 cm
C. Cataracts
C. 2.5 cm
D. none of above
D. 2.72 cm
363. We are able to see because of the of
357. very fine particles mainly scatter light
A. red colour A. refraction
B. blue colour B. reflection
C. white colour
C. transmission
D. none of above
D. absorption
358. The person who is suffering from re-
364. What is the job of the lens?
quires bi-focal lens.
A. To protect the eye
A. (a) Hypermetropia
B. (b) Myopia B. to open or shrink the pupil
C. both option(a) and (b) C. let light into the eye
D. none of these D. focuses the light onto the retina at the

back of the eye
359. The part of your eye that gives it its color.
It is a muscle that controls the size of your 365. Power of lens is 4D then its focal length
pupil. is?
A. cornea A. -25cm
B. lens B. Infinity
C. pupil C. -0.25cm
D. iris D. 0.25m
360. Where does the optic nerve attach to the 366. Myopic eye can be corrected by suit-
eye? able lens
A. Fovea A. Convex
B. Ciliary muscle B. Concave
C. Choroid C. Bifocal
D. Blind spot D. Plane

367. The tough, clear covering over the iris and C. Visual Cortex
pupil that helps protect the eye is the
D. Insular Cortex

A. retina
B. lens 373. Which part of the eye absorbs light from
the sides of the eye?
C. sclera
A. lens
D. cornea
B. ciliary body
368. The image formed on the retina of the hu-
man eye is C. choroid
A. virtual and inverted D. pupil
B. real and inverted
374. Which layer of tissue prevents light being
C. virtual and erect reflected back out of the eye?
D. real and erect A. Cornea
369. Due to which molecule the sky appears B. Choroid
white on summer days?
C. Sclera
A. N2
D. Blind spot
B. O2
C. N2 and O2 375. What two parts of the eye work as
D. H2O lenses?
A. iris and lens
370. Glaucoma-
A. eye with poor vision B. retina and lens
B. condition in which eye lens becomes C. cornea and lens
opaque D. aqueous humor and lens
C. Eye condition that damages the optic
nerve 376. Which two parts of the eye help to focus
D. defect in eye light rays?
A. Lens & retina
371. The variation of focal length to form a
sharp image on retina is called B. Cornea & iris
A. Accommodation C. Iris & retina
B. Aperture D. Lens & cornea
C. Retina Control
377. which one of the following colours has
D. Shutter
scattered the least
372. What part of the brain puts together the A. blue
3 colors the cones detect to make all over
colors we see? B. red
A. Auditory Cortex C. orange
B. Olfactory Cortex D. none of above

378. Gel-like fluid behind the lens 384. he defect of vision in which the image of
A. Aqueous Humor nearby objects is formed behind the retina,
is
B. Retina
A. Myopia
C. Vitreous Humor
B. Presbyopia
D. Optic humor
C. Hypermetropia
379. Movies in cinema halls use which princi- D. Short sightedness
ple?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. dispersion of light 385. Which of the following statements is cor-
rect regarding the propagation of light of
B. persistence of vision different colours of white light in air?
C. multiple reflection A. Red light moves fastest
D. none of above B. Blue light moves faster than green
380. Area of the retina that doesn’t contain light
any photoreceptors C. All the colours of the white light move
A. Optic Nerve with the same speed
B. Blind spot D. Yellow light moves with the mean

speed as that of the red and the violet light
C. Ciliary body
D. Yellow spot 386. Which lens have negative power
A. Concave
381. Twinkling of stars is due to atmospheric
B. Convex
A. dispersion of light by water droplets C. Plane
B. refraction of light by different layers of D. Both 1 and 2

varying refractive indices 387. The blue colour of sky is due to
C. scattering of light by dust particles A. reflection
D. internal reflection of light by clouds. B. refraction
382. The first part of the eye that light hits. C. dispersion
A. lens D. scattering
B. cornea 388. What is the pupil?
C. pupil A. Controls size of pupil.
D. retina B. Opening to the inner eye
383. choose three outside parts of eye? C. Contains cells that detect light.
A. eyelid D. Controls shape of the eye
B. lens 389. When ALL of the light goes though an ob-
C. eyelashes ject
D. tear duct A. opaque
E. optic nerve B. transparent

C. translucent 395. The thin transparent layer that protects

the eye
D. none of above

A. lens
390. name the layers of the eye: B. cornea
A. posterior cavity;anterior cavity- C. retina
cornea;pupilcilary body;optic nerve
D. pupil
B. sclera;corneairis;vitreous bodyretina;optic
nerve 396. What is the function of the retina?
C. retinasclerachoroid A. helps with night vision
D. cornea;pupilsclera;irisretina-vitreous B. back of eye, has rods and cones

body C. blood supply
D. gel that fills space
391. The Least distance of distinct vision is
A. 25 metres 397. What part of the human eye opens and
closes to adjust the total amount of light
B. 2.5 centimetres entering the eye.
C. 25 centimetres A. Human lens
D. 2.5 metres B. Cornea
C. Scelera
392. This is the gooey material that is clear
and helps to give the eye its shape: D. Iris
A. aqueous humor 398. What does the lens do?
B. vitreous humor A. transmits light rays to retina
C. pupil B. helps the eye focus
D. ciliary muscles C. allows light to enter eye
D. regulates how much light enters the
393. Which part of the eye is where images eye
are converted to nerve impulses?
399. The color of the eyes are the
A. Retina
A. Pupil
B. Cornea
B. Sclera
C. Optic Nerve
C. Iris
D. Lens
D. Cornea
394. The white of your eye is called the 400. you smell food because of the-
A. Iris A. taste buds
B. Pupil B. taste receptors
C. Sclera C. olfactory receptors
D. Cornea D. olfactory buds

401. Function of the optic nerve is is 407. Complete lack of 20/200 or less, with
A. Transfer the signals to brain the best correction possible .
B. Image formation A. Half Blindness
C. sensation of vision B. Legal Blindness
D. Controls the light entering the human C. Retina
eye D. Far Sighted
402. which one of the following colours has 408. The back of the eye; an upside-down im-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
longer wavelength age of whatever you are looking at is pro-
A. blue jected here.
B. red A. lens
C. violet B. cornea
D. none of above C. pupil
D. retina
403. At which angle of scattering, the inten-
sity is maximum? 409. elongation of eye balls leads to
A. 00 whereas shrinking if eye balls leads to
B. 300 A. myopia and hypermetropia
C. 450 B. hypermetropia and myopia
D. 900 C. myopia and presbyopia
D. none of above
404. We can see the sun before the actual sun-
rise by about 410. These are the structures in the eye that
A. 5 minutes perceives color
B. 2 minutes A. Rods
C. 2 hours B. Cones
D. 20 minutes C. Blind Spot
D. Pupil
405. the scattering of light by colloidal parti-
cles present in the medium is known as 411. Which part of the eye contains the high-
A. dispersion est concentration of light receptor cells?
B. tyndall effect A. Fovea
C. refraction of light B. Blind spot
D. none of above C. Optic nerve
D. Choroid
406. The defect of the eye in which the eyeball
becomes too long is 412. What part is like a thin protective layer?
A. hypermetropia A. Cornea
B. myopia B. Iris
C. cataract C. Lens
D. presbyopia D. Optic Nerve

413. In which order does light travel through 419. What part of the eye is the inner layer of
the eye the eyeball and contains the photorecep-
tors?

A. cornea, retina, lens, pupil
B. lens, retina, pupil, cornea A. sclera
C. cornea, pupil, lens, retina B. retina

C. choroid
D. iris, pupil, retina, lens
D. conjunctiva
414. Near point of an healthy human eye
420. What part of the eye has NO photorecep-
A. 25 m
tors
B. 2.5 cm
A. fovea centralis
C. 2.5 m
B. optic disk
D. 25 cm C. retina
415. What does the cornea do? D. none of above
A. transmit impulses from retina to brain 421. The part of the eye that is sensitive to
B. helps the eye focus light is called the
C. receives light and sends it to brain A. Cornea
D. transmits light rays to retina B. Lens
C. Sclera
416. The focal length of the eye lens increases
when eye muscles D. Retina
A. are relaxed and lens becomes thinner 422. The structure helps you to see in dim light
B. contract and lens becomes thicker A. Cones
C. are relaxed and lens becomes thicker B. Tapetum Lucidum
D. contract and lens becomes thinner C. Rods
417. If you were to accidentally scratch the D. Cornea
outermost part of the eye, which part 423. The fluid between the retina and the lens
would you damage? is called
A. Cornea A. Aqueous Humour
B. Lens B. Vitreous Humour
C. Pupil C. Aqua
D. Retina D. Humus
418. Which part of the eye contracts and di- 424. Which of the following lenses are needed
lates based on the environment? to correct one’s myopia?
A. Pupil A. Bi-concave
B. Cornea B. Bi-convex
C. Sclera C. Bi-focal
D. Iris D. Plano-convex

425. The amount of light entering the human C. Sends messages picked up by the
eye is controlled by retina to the brain
A. Ciliary muscles D. Hole passes different amounts of light
B. Pupil
431. Which of the following is not a condition
C. Cornea
that effects the human eye
D. Iris
A. colorblindness
426. Pupil
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. cataracts
A. Focuses light
C. glaucoma
B. Clear tissue that covers the front of the
eye D. deafness
C. Opening through which light enters the 432. Concave lens is used to correct
eye
A. Astigmatism
D. Layer of receptor cells
B. Myopia
427. Which part of the eye refracts light onto
the lens? C. Hypermetropia
A. Cornea D. Presbyopia
B. Pupil
433. These are the photoreceptors that are
C. Retina sensitive to different colours.
D. none of above A. Rods
428. If a person eye lens forming image infront B. Cones
of retina then he is suffering from
C. Blind Spot
A. Myopia
D. Pupil
B. Hypermetropia
C. Presbyopia 434. How many sensitive cells does retina con-
D. Catraract tains?
A. 1000
429. Among the following lenses are used
to correct presbyopia of a person. B. 2000
A. Bi-concave C. millions
B. Bi-convex D. lakhs
C. Bi-focal
435. Light enters the eye through a thin mem-
D. Plano-convex
brane called the
430. what is the iris A. Iris
A. the colored part of the eye that con- B. Pupil
trols the size of the pupil
C. Retina
B. Tranparent jellylike fluid that fills the
eye and refracts light. D. Cornea

2.2 Power of accommodation 185
436. The white part of our eye that contains C. 2.27 cm

small blood vessels D. 25 cm

A. cornea
442. The defect of vision in which a person can-
B. sclera not see the distant objects clearly but can
C. iris see nearby objects clearly is called
D. pupil A. Myopia
B. Hypermetropia
437. What is the second clear part of eye?
C. Bifocal eye
A. cornea
D. Presbyopia
B. lens
C. retina 443. In human eye, image is formed on
D. iris A. Iris
B. Cornea
438. What is a cataract?
C. Retina
A. Shortening of the eyeball
D. Lens
B. Cornea has too little curvature
C. Double vision 444. The lens is:
D. Clouding of the lens A. an eye with poor vision

B. tear glands
439. The person who is suffering from the fol-
lowing disease cannot donate eyes. C. Transparent convex body that focuses
light rays entering the pupil
A. diabetes
D. mucous membrane lining the eyelid
B. asthma
445. Mechanism of sight
C. hypertension
A. light→lens→brain→ retina
D. tetanus
B. light→retina→brain→lens
440. Light sensitive screen of eye is known as
C. light→brain→retina→lens
A. Iris
D. light→lens→retina→ brain
B. Pupil
446. This colored part of the eye changes
C. retina
shape to control the amount of light that
D. none of above enters the eye. What is it called?
441. What is the distance between the lens A. pupil
and retina of an eye? B. lens
A. 2.5 m C. iris
B. 2.5 cm D. retina
2.2 Power of accommodation

2.3 Defects of vision and correction 186
1. The ability of eye lens to adjust its focal B. Power of adjustment of the eye
length to form a sharp image of the object
at varying distances on the retina is called C. Power of accommodation of the eye
A. Power of observation of the eye D. Power of enabling of the eye
2.3 Defects of vision and correction

1. Which one is the common vision defect. 6. What is the type of lens that suitable to
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. hypermetropia make a correction for person who experi-
ence a short nearsightedness vision?
B. astigmatisme
A. curved lens
C. color blindness
B. convex lens
D. blind spot
C. bifocal lens
2. The disability of the eye to form distinct D. concave len
images of nearby objects on its retina at a
young age is known as 7. A condition that makes it difficult to distin-
guish colors:
A. nearsightedness
A. color blindness
B. farsightedness
B. night blindness
C. presbyopia
C. macular degeneration
D. stress
D. none of above
3. What is nearsightedness called?
8. What is the method that tests for eye color
A. hyperopia called?
B. myalgia A. ishiara
C. myopia B. igloo
D. Asigmatism C. ipad
4. People with this type of vision can see D. none of above
things clearly when they are up close, but 9. State the characteristic of image form for
things are blurry far away. person with normal vision.
A. Emmetropia A. upright
B. Hyperopia B. same size with object
C. Myopia C. inverted
D. Far sighted D. virtual
5. What does farsighted mean? 10. What are the causes of short sightedness
A. You can see far away well. A. eye ball too short
B. You can see close up well. B. eye lens too thick
C. You have perfect sight. C. eye lens too thin
D. You are blind. D. cornea not even

2.4 Defects of vision and correction numerical 187
11. Where is the position of image form for 12. With both eyes open, a person’s field of
farsightedness vision? view is about:

A. on the retina A. 90o
B. behind the retina B. 150o
C. in front of retina C. 180o
D. no image form D. 360o
2.4 Defects of vision and correction numerical

1. When looking at far objects, the eyes C. Relaxed
A. Relax D. none of above
B. Stretch
4. Which of the following causes NEAR-
C. Contract SIGHTEDNESS?
D. shrink A. A rough lens
2. When we look at far objects, our eyes be- B. A less-flexible lens
come
C. The cornea is too curved.
A. LESS CONVEX
D. none of above
B. MORE CONVEX
C. NO CHANGE 5. The shape and convexity of the eye is con-
D. none of above trolled by
A. CELLS
3. When you are reading a book, your eyes’
lenses become more B. MUSCLES
A. Concave C. TISSUES
B. Convex D. LIGHT
2.5 Dispersion of light

1. When dispersion of white light occurs in a A. red, blue, yellow
prism, which colour deviates the most? B. red, blue, green
A. Red C. red, yellow, green
B. Violet D. yellow, blue, green
C. Green
3. Rainbow is formed due to
D. Yellow
A. Natural dispersion
2. The primary colours of light are:red, blue, B. Sunlight passing through raindrops
yellow (B) red, blue, green (C) red, yellow,
green (D) yellow, blue, greenThe primary C. Refraction of light
colours of light are: D. All of the above

2.5 Dispersion of light 188
4. Polarization is the restriction of a trans- 9. Objects that reflect ALL colors will appear
verse wave so that ?
A. the wave can only vibrate in one plane A. Black
B. the wave can only vibrate in two B. White
planes C. Gray
C. the wave can vibrate in all planes D. Multi-colored
D. the wave cannot vibrate at all 10. Why is the sky blue?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. Blue light is scattered by the air
5. White light forms a colored spectrum. The
molecules in the sky.
7 colors cover all but White light forms
a colored spectrum. The 7 colors include all B. Blue light is absorbed by Earth.
but C. Blue light is reflected by the clouds.
A. red / red D. Blue light is better than red.
B. blue / blue 11. Which of the following colors has the low-
C. kuning / yellow est energy?
D. orange / orange A. Green

B. Blue
E. pink / pink
C. Indigo
6. Which color refracts the least from the 7 D. Violet
colors of the rainbow?
12. The primary colours of light are:
A. Red
A. red, blue, yellow
B. Yellow
B. red, yellow, green
C. Green C. red, blue, green
D. Black D. yellow, blue, green
7. these are examples of phenomenon of 13. Which color is refracted the most in a rain-
scattering of light except bow?
A. Sky appears blue at midday A. Red
B. Sky appears reddish in the evening B. Violet
C. Rainbow after rain C. Indigo

D. Blue
D. none of above
E. Yellow
8. How does a red object appear in white
14. enable you to see a rainbow, sun should
light?
be positoned
A. white A. infront of you
B. black B. behind you
C. green C. on your left side
D. red D. on your right side

15. Which of the following is an example of a 21. What happens when white light is passed
luminous object? from air to glass prism?

A. a candle A. bends towards the normal
B. a mirror B. bends away from the normal
C. the Moon
C. reflects back
D. a prism
D. moves straight
16. When does light get refracted?
A. When light travels in a straight line 22. Which two things below can cause disper-
sion?
B. When light is bounced
C. When light travels in two different A. A dark room
mediums B. Prism
D. When light cannot pass through an C. A plane mirror
opaque object
D. Diffraction grating
17. What is a Spectrum?
A. A band of 7 colors 23. At noon, the sky appears blue because blue
light has a wavelength that is absorbed by
B. A group of 10 colors
gas molecules. / At noon, the sky looks
C. A band of 10 colors blue because the blue light has a wave-
D. A mixture of 7 colors length that is absorbed by the gas
molecule.
18. In white light, a blue car can reflects the
following colour(s): A. The longest / The longest
A. red B. Short / short
B. blue C. The fastest / the fastest
C. green D. none of above
D. all colours
24. When light enters a medium and changes
19. In physics what are the three secondary direction it is called
colours?
A. Reflection
A. Purple
B. Cyan B. Refraction
C. Yellow C. Dispersion
D. Magenta D. Diffraction
20. A rainbow is formed when sunlight is , 25. Light is able to pass through materials
and
A. transparent
A. refracted
B. reflected B. shiny
C. dispersed C. dull
D. scattered D. opaque

26. Warna cahaya yang banyak diserakkan C. Lateral Inversion

ialah /The light colors that are scat- D. Literally Invasion
tered a lot are
A. biru blue 32. Light is unable to pass through objects
B. hijau / green A. opaque
C. merah /red B. coloured
D. kuning / yellow C. blunt
NARAYAN CHANGDER
27. Which of the following are a pair of com- D. dark
plementary colours?
33. We see lightning before we hear the thun-
A. Blue and green der because:
B. Red and green
A. light waves are stronger than sound
C. Cyan and red waves
D. Blue and magenta B. sound travels faster than light
28. The splitting of white light in to its compo- C. light travels faster than sound
nent colours is called D. sound waves are stronger than light
A. reflection waves
B. refraction
34. Which of the statements about light are
C. tyndall effect true?
D. dispersion A. Light is a form of energy
29. How many components are there in white B. Light cannot travel through a vaccum
light? C. Nothing can travel faster than light
A. 5
D. Light is a form of radiation
B. 6
35. Which of the following colors is NOT found
C. 7
in the spectrum of white light?
D. 8
A. BlackHitam
30. How many colours in the spectrum of B. YellowKuning
white light?
C. IndigoIndigo
A. 5
D. VioletUngu
B. 6
C. 7 36. Approximately how much light is blocked
D. 8 by two polarizing filters that are perpen-
dicular to each other?
31. When the left side of an object appears as
A. 0%
the right side of the image and vice versa,
this phenomenon is called B. 50%
A. Literally inversion C. 75%
B. Lateral Invasion D. 100%

37. waves on top of spectrum are 43. A rainbow is produced by the

A. infrared waves A. scattering of light

B. gamma rays B. dispersion of light
C. ultraviolet rays C. reflection of light
D. none of above D. deviation of light
38. Predict the colour of the sky when it is 44. Why are the components of colour in a
seen from the Moon.Jangkakan warna lan- rainbow seen when light passes through
git apabila dilihat daripada bulan. a glass prism?
A. RedMerah A. Scattering of light
B. BlueBiru B. Dispersion of light
C. White Putih C. Reflection of light
D. BlackHitam D. Diffraction of light
39. The natural phenomena associated with 45. Which processes are included when a rain-
light scattering are bow forms?
A. Rainbow / Rainbow A. Reflection
B. Blue sky / Blue sky B. Refraction

C. Reflection, dispersion and refraction
C. Redness of the setting sun
D. Refraction and Reflection
D. none of above
46. Properties of waves areI. polarizationII.
40. A black object appears black because it
diffractionIII. refractionWhich of these
all wavelengths of light.
properties apply to sound waves?
A. absorbs
A. I and II
B. reflects B. II and III
C. scatters C. I and III
D. transmits D. All of them
41. A plane mirror always produce images. 47. These are all colours of spectrum except
A. virtual A. indigo
B. real B. blue
C. ideal C. purple
D. refracted D. green
42. white light is a mixture of 48. What colour passes through a red filter
A. six colours A. none
B. seven colours B. all
C. eigth colours C. blue
D. none of above D. red

49. What is dispersion? B. Cyan

A. The combination of two rays of light C. Yellow
B. The separating of light into perpendic- D. none of above
ular beams
C. The reflection of light off a smooth sur- 55. What is the spectrum?
face A. A disturbance that transfers energy
D. The separating of light into its compo- from place to place
NARAYAN CHANGDER
nent colours B. The ability to do work
50. Berapakah warna pada pelangi / how C. What we see when specific light re-
many colour of rainbow? flects off of an object
A. 6 D. The range of visible color
B. 7
56. What happen when sunlight enters rain
C. 8 drops in the sky?
D. 9 A. The light will reflected
51. Two processes occur during scattering of B. The light will refracted
light.
C. The light will absorbed
A. Reflection and Refraction of light
D. The light will dispeared
B. Reflection and Scattering of light
C. Refraction and Scattering of light 57. When two primary colours combine in
equal intensity they produce
D. Scattering and Dispersion of light
A. tertiary colours
52. When dispersion of white light occurs with
B. a secondary colour
a diffraction grating, which colour devi-
ates the most? C. a new primary colour
A. Red D. nothing
B. Violet
58. Which color absorbs ALL colors?
C. Green
A. yellow
D. Yellow
B. white
53. These are all colours of the spectrum ex-
C. black
cept for
D. red
A. indigo
B. blue 59. A transparent object that bends light into
C. purple rainbow colors.
D. green A. prism
B. mirror
54. Which colour is a mix of blue and green
light? C. convex lens
A. Magenta D. concave lens

60. what causes ligth to refrect off of certain C. Violet, Indigo, Black, green, yellow, or-
objects? ange, red

A. when the beam of light goes through D. Violet, Indigo, Blue, Green, Yellow, Or-
the object, the light bounces off because ange, Red
the light is pointed at an angle
66. When a ray of light enters a glass block at
B. the object is not transparent
90 it:
C. the object is transparent
A. speeds up
D. none of above
B. is not refracted
61. Light bends the normal line when it C. bends away from the normal
travels from glass to air.
D. bends towards the normal
A. towards
B. away from 67. Why can we see a spectrum of colours
when white light passes through a glass
C. along prism?
D. none of above
A. phenomenon of scattering of light
62. Which is the factor that influences the scat- B. phenomenon of dispersion of light
tering of light?
C. phenomenon of reflection of light
A. The speed of the light
D. phenomenon of diffraction of light
B. The wavelength of the light
C. The wave frequency of the light 68. Which color has the longest wavelength?
D. The velocity of the light A. Red

B. Blue
63. How many colours make up white light?
C. Green
A. 5
D. Violet
B. 6
C. 7 69. What is the phenomenon of Dispersion?
D. 8 A. Scattering of a spectrum
64. light waves can be polarized as they are: B. Scattering of white light
A. transverse C. Distribution of a spectrum
B. of high frequency D. Light maintaining its properties

C. longitudinal 70. Warna cahaya yang kurang diserakkan
D. reflected ialah /The color of light that is less
scattered is
65. What is the full form of VIBGYOR
A. indigo / indigo
A. Violet, Irish grey, blue, green, yellow,
B. biru / blue
black
B. Violet, Irish grey, blue, black, green, C. merah / red
yellow D. putih / white

71. When the three primary colours are com- C. Eyes

bined in equal intensity they produce
D. Skin
A. A spectrum
B. White light 77. What is being blocked when a shadow is
formed?
C. Nothing
D. none of above A. Light Source
B. Light Path
72. What can be observed when a light passed
NARAYAN CHANGDER
though a prism? C. Object
A. the mass of the prism D. Eye
B. the white light is actually a mixture of
different colors 78. How are the colours of the rainbow
formed?
C. the original source of light
D. the prism absorbs the light A. from the sun hitting water
B. From light hitting objects
73. The colors that make up white light is
called C. Trought different wavelenghts of re-
A. Wavelength fracted light
B. Prism D. none of above
C. Visible spectrum
79. The specturm of white light consists of:
D. Energy waves
A. three colours
74. Why does red light get deviated the most
when white light is dispersed using a B. seven colours
diffraction grating? C. five colors
A. Because it has the longest wavelength D. nine colours
B. Because it has the shortest wave-
length 80. which colours of the rainbow have the
C. Because it’s unlucky longest wavelength?
D. none of above A. violet
75. Which tool is used to separate white light B. indigo

to different colors? C. red
A. Mirror D. none of above
B. Hammer
C. Camera 81. Optically denser medium:-
D. Prism A. Lower speed of light
76. Which body organ detects visible light? B. Higher speed of light
A. Ears C. Medium speed of light

B. Nose D. none of above

82. Apakah cahaya berwarna yang paling C. Stress polarisation

banyak dibiaskan? / What is the most re- D. Street polarisation
fracted colored light?

A. Cahaya bir u / blue light 88. Objects that generate their own light are
called:
B. Cahaya merah / red light
A. luminous objects.
C. Cahaya ungu / purple light
B. non-luminous objects.
D. Cahaya kuning / yellow light
C. shiny objects.
83. Which of the following is NOT a source of D. reflective objects.
light?
89. angle which is formed between normal ray
A. eyes
and ray entering a medium is known as
B. lit candle
A. critical angle
C. sun
B. angle of refraction
D. firefly C. angle of reflection
84. inside rain droplet, light D. none of above
A. is refracted twice 90. Berikut merupakan contoh zarah-zarah
B. is refracted thrice halus di atmosfera yang menyerakkan ca-
C. is reflected once haya.(Lebih dari satu jawapan)/ Here is
an example of fine particles in the atmo-
D. none of above sphere that scatter light.(More than one
85. The substance in the sky which is involved answer)
in the formation of rainbow A. Debu / Dust
A. Air particle B. Titisan air / Water droplet
B. Dust C. Daun / Leaf
C. Raindrop D. Molekul gas / Gas molecule
D. soot 91. How does a green object appear in green
light?
86. Which waves can be polarised?
A. white
A. Transverse waves
B. black
B. Longitudinal waves
C. green
C. Both transverse and longitudinal
waves D. blue
D. Neither transverse and longitudinal 92. In physics, what are the three primary
waves colours? (Select the three correct answers
below)
87. When glass or plastic is bent or stressed,
you can see interference patterns using a A. Red
polarising filter. This is an example of B. Blue
A. Bend polarisation C. Yellow
B. Rage polarisation D. Green

93. Apakah cahaya berwarna yang paling ku- 98. The splitting of light into colours of the
rang dibiaskan? /What is the least re- rainbow is called
fracted colored light?
A. refraction
A. Cahaya hijau / green light
B. dispersion
B. Cahaya biru / blue light
C. internal reflection
C. Cahaya ungu / purple light
D. seperation
D. Cahaya merah / red light
NARAYAN CHANGDER
94. Afshan is wearing a blue dress with red 99. Why does an apple appear red?
flowers on it. She stands under a red lamp. A. All colors are absorbed & none are re-
The dress will appear: flected
A. completely red B. All colors are absorbed except for blue,
B. black with red flowers which is reflected
C. completely blue C. All colors are reflected and none are
D. blue with red flowers absorbed
D. All colors are absorbed except for red,
95. Visible light is a combination of different which is reflected
colors with different wavelengths travel-
ing together. These wavelengths are rep- 100. How does a blue object appear in red
resented by which colors? light?
A. red, orange, yellow, green, blue, in- A. white
digo, violet
B. black
B. red, orange, yellow, grey, blue, indigo,
violet C. blue
C. red, orange, yellow, green, black, in- D. red
digo, violet
D. red, orchid, yellow, green, blue, indigo, 101. When is a rainbow mostly formed? (Se-
violet lect all that apply)
A. mostly after rainfall
96. Objects that ABSORB all colors of light will
appear B. mostly after a bright rainy day
A. white C. mostly when its a foggy day
B. black D. mostly when it is a bright sunny day
C. multi-colored
102. The splitting of white light into its com-
D. gray ponent is calledPemisahan cahaya putih
kepada komponennya dipanggil
97. We are able to see the moon because it
A. gives out light A. reflectionpantulan
B. glows B. refractionpembiasan
C. reflects light from the sun C. dispersionpenyebaran
D. reflects light from the earth D. scatteringpenyerakan

103. Which color has the highest frequency? C. The curtain folds easily.
A. Violet D. The curtain is rectangular shape.

B. Blue 109. What happens to light rays when they
C. Indigo pass through one transparent material to
another?
D. Green
A. bend
104. An example of dispersion of light B. disappear
A. sky looks bright orange in the evening C. bounce
B. shadow D. split
C. Pool seems shallower
110. It is the process of separating of visible
D. rainbow light into its different colors.
105. Which phenomenon shows the effect of A. Reflection
the dispersion of light? B. Refraction
A. Blue sky Blue sky C. Dispersion
B. Formation of rainbow D. Absorption
C. Red sunset. Red sunset 111. If the atmosphere is polluted with more
D. Stage lightning Stage lighting dust and smoke, the sunset looks more
/If the atmosphere is polluted with more
106. When a ray of light enters a glass block dust and smoke, the sunset looks more
it:
A. yellowish, orange or reddish / yellow-
A. speeds up ing, redness or redness
B. slows down B. blue and indigo / blue and indigo
C. goes at the same speed C. purple and red / purple and red
D. spreads out D. Hitam / Block
107. Which color has the shortest wave- 112. What is process that occur when white
length? light travels through a prism?
A. Red A. Reflection and dispersion of light
B. Green B. Refraction and dispersion of light
C. Violet C. Reflection and scattering of light
D. Blue D. Refraction and scattering of light

113. There are all colours of spectrum except
108. Jethro is sitting near the window on a
“Its my favourite color you have to know
sunny day. When he closes the curtain,
it!!”
the room becomes darker. What property
of the curtain allows it to make the room A. indigo
darker? B. blue
A. The curtain absorbs light. C. purple
B. The curtain is brightly colored. D. green

2.6 Atmospheric refraction 198
114. A pair of complimentary colours consist D. yellow

of such that when combined they pro-
duce white light. 117. What do you call the phenomena which
results to the formation of rainbows?
A. two primary colours
A. scattering
B. two secondary colours
B. diffraction
C. a primary and a secondary colour
C. reflection
D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. dispersion
115. How is a rainbow formed?
118. If a 2.5 m object is placed in front of a
A. The air during rain reflects all the col- plane mirror, the height of its image is
ors of the rainbow?
A. less than 2.5 m
B. The raindrops absorb the light.
B. 2.5 m
C. Light rays bend as they pass from air
through drops of water. C. more than 2.5 m
D. The light is absorbed by the clouds. D. 0
116. The coloured light having the maximum 119. How many components of white light?
speed in glass prism among the following [Think]
is A. 8
A. blue B. 6
B. green C. 4
C. violet D. 7
2.6 Atmospheric refraction

1. The splitting of white light into different A. 5 mins
colours on passing through a prism is called B. 2 mins
A. reflection C. 4 mins
B. refraction D. 1 min
C. dispersion
4. Atmospherics refraction explains the natu-
D. deviation ral phenomena
2. If Earth had no atmosphere at all, what A. twinkling of stars
would the sky mostly look like? B. Sky appears blue
A. red, with a very bright star C. Refraction of light through a prism
B. violet, with a very bright star D. rainbow formation
C. blue, with a very bright star 5. The angle between angle of incidence and
D. dark, with a very bright star the angle of emergence is called
3. We can see the sun before the actual sun- A. angle of emergence
rise about B. angle of prism

2.6 Atmospheric refraction 199
C. angle of deviation C. Light from star travel faster than plan-

D. critical angle ets

D. None of these
6. Complete the sentence When a light ray is
incident normally 11. What is it called when light passes through
A. It changes its direction a colloid and scatters/spreads out
B. It does not change its direction and not A. tyndall effect
get refracted B. spreading out effect
C. Its a reaction of light C. fog effect
D. none of above D. substance effect
7. What is the reason behind twinkling of 12. choose the answer that best completes the
stars? sentence:The gas molecules in the atmo-
A. Refraction of starlight while passing sphere scatter shorter wavelength light,
through layers of earth’s atmosphere the longer wavelength light is largely
unaffected by the atmosphere.
B. Earth’s atmosphere is not steady and
so there is change in refractive index A. but
C. Both A and B B. similarly
D. None of these C. then
D. therefore
8. Refractive index is symbolize by
A. n 13. Which of the following is not the phe-
nomenon of refraction of light
B. N
A. Twinkling of stars
C. R
B. Rainbow
D. none of above
C. image in the mirror
9. Which is true for stars?
D. none of above
A. Stars can be seen in presence of the
sun. 14. As light from a far off star comes down
towards the earth
B. Stars are self luminous and can be
seen in the absence of the sun A. it bends away from the normal
C. Stars can’t be seen in absence of the B. it bends towards the normal
sun. C. it does not bend
D. none of above D. it is reflected back
10. Stars twinkle but planets can’t. Why? 15. The Tyndall effect is used to distinguished
A. Closer planets are not point source, between.
but due to long distance stars appear as A. solvents and solutes
point source
B. liquid and gasses
B. Stars have ability to transmit light in
fragments while planet transmit light con- C. electrolytes and non electrolytes
tinuously D. solution and colloids

2.7 Scattering of light 200
16. Following is the phenomenon of the refrac- A. Assertion and reason are true. Reason
tion of the light is the correct explanation of Assertion
A. Having reflection in the pobd water B. Assertion and reason are false
B. Having reflection in the mirror C. Assertion is false, but reason is true
C. Mirage D. Assertion is true, but reason is false
D. none of above
19. Formation of rainbow is due to
17. The stars twinkle but the planets do not
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. refraction of light
twinkle at night because
B. scattering of light
A. The stars are small but the planets are
large C. dispersion of light
B. The stars are large but the planets are D. atmospherics refraction
small
20. What color might short wavelength light
C. The stars are much nearer but the appear to us?
planets are far away
A. green
D. The stars are far away but the planets
are much nearer B. blue
18. Assertion:Planets do not twinkleRea- C. red

son:Light rays do not come from planet D. orange
2.7 Scattering of light

1. Which of the following is a natural phe- C. speed of light
nomenon caused by the scattering of
D. size of particle
light?
A. Star twinkles 4. Here is an example of fine particles in the
B. The sky is blue atmosphere that scatter light.(More than
one answer)
C. Rainbow after Rain
D. none of above A. Dust
B. Water droplet
2. Redding of Sun at sunrise and sunset ap-
pears due to C. Leaf
A. Red light travels slower D. Gas molecule
B. Blue light is scattered away
C. Red light travels faster 5. these are examples of phenomenon of
scattering of light EXCEPT
D. Particles help the colour red to reach
first red reach first A. Sky appears blue at midday
3. Scattering of light depends upon B. Sky appears reddish in the evening
A. wavelength of light C. Rainbow after rain

B. frequceny of light D. none of above

2.7 Scattering of light 201
6. Which of the following is a natural phe- 11. . One cannot see through fog because:
nomenon caused by the scattering of light? A. light suffers total internal reflection at
/Which of the following is a natural

the droplets of fog.
phenomenon caused by the scattering of
light? B. light is scattered by the droplets of fog.
C. the refractive index of fog is infinity.
A. Star twinkle / Star twinkles
D. fog absorbs light.
B. The sky is blue / The sky is blue
C. Rainbow after Rain / Rainbow after 12. Which of the below the important role in
Rain giving colour to the sky.
D. none of above A. atmosphere of the earth and sunlight

B. rainbow
7. What will be the colour of sky if there is C. sea
no atmosphere on the earth?
D. none of above
A. Dark Blue
13. If the atmosphere is polluted with more
B. Black
dust and smoke, the sunset looks more
C. Red A. yellowing, redness or redness
D. White B. blue and indigo
8. At sunset, sunlight shines C. purple and red
A. straight D. black
B. bright 14. tiny paticles only scatter

C. horizontally A. shorter wavelength particles.
D. none of above B. longer wavelength particles

C. both of them
9. light is scattered the least by the D. none of above
suspended particles because it has a
wavelength. 15. Which of the following phenomena is the
A. blue / long effect of light scattering?
A. The blue sky
B. red / long
B. The dark sky at night
C. blue / short
C. The formation of a rainbow
D. red / short
D. The formation of white light
10. The color of light that is less scattered is
16. At dusk, the sun shines brightly /At
dusk, sunlight shines
A. indigo A. lurus / straight
B. blue B. bright / bright
C. red C. horizontally
D. white D. none of above

2.8 Tyndall effect 202
17. Why does the Sun appear red at sunset? D. there is no way to predict
A. Red light is the least scattered and
19. The phenomenon of scattering of light by
travel the longer distance.
the colloidal particles is called
B. Red light is the most scattered and
A. Dispersion of light
travel the shorter distance.
C. Red light is the least scattered and B. Tyndall effect
more blue light are scattered. C. Atmospheric scattering
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. All the components of white light are D. Atmospheric refraction
absorbed by the atmosphere except red
light. 20. The light colors that are scattered a lot are
18. If a surface is rough, what will most of the

light do when it reaches the object? A. blue
A. reflect in the same direction B. green
B. scatter in many directions C. red
C. Tiktok D. yellow
2.8 Tyndall effect

1. Which colloid has both protective and dec- C. brings fresh solvent into contact with
orative function? the solute.
A. ink D. decreases the surface area of the so-
lute.
B. paint
4. What type of mixture separates upon
C. creams
standing?
D. insecticide spray A. Solution
2. A colloidal system having a solid sub- B. Alloy
stance as the dispersed phase and a liquid C. Colloid
as the dispersion medium.Identify the col- D. Suspension
loidal type that best describes the system
above. 5. Which of these is a colloid?
A. Gel A. paint
B. salt water
B. Emulsion
C. air
C. Solid Sol
D. gasoline
D. Sol
6. Micelles are
3. Stirring increases the rate of dissolution A. ideal solutions
because it B. associated colloids
A. raises the temperature C. adsorbed surfaces
B. lowers the temperature D. macromolecular colloids

7. Which of these is a mixture? 12. Which will dissolve the slowest

A. Uncooked chocolate chips and cookie A. powdered sugar in hot water

dough blended together with a spoon. B. Powdered sugar in cold water
B. Distilled water C. sugar cubes in hot water
C. A nugget of gold D. sugar cubes in cold water
D. A molecule of Oxygen
13. An example of a solution is
8. Which of the following is the definition for A. Sugar and water
an unsaturated solution? B. Sand and water
A. A detailed sequence of reaction steps. C. Milk
B. A solution that contains less than the D. Whipped cream
optimal amount of solute.
14. Fruit Loops, pizza, and Skittles are exam-
C. When all reactants and products are in
ples of mixtures.
the same phase.
A. heterogeneous
D. The major component (retains phase).
B. homogeneous
9. Which of the following mixtures is not an
C. pure
example of a suspension?
D. none of above
A. salt and water
B. oil and water 15. Which of the following mixture does NOT
belong to the group?
C. sand and water
A. vinegar
D. mud and water
B. soy sauce
10. After a while, a suspension does not scat- C. perfume spray
ter light (tyndall effect doesn’t happen).
D. tomato sauce
Why is that?
A. Because the particles have settled 16. Each mixture below has particles dis-
down persed in water. Which list has the par-
ticles increasing in size?
B. Because a suspension is unstable
A. solution, colloid, suspension
C. All the above
B. solution, suspension, colloid
D. none of above
C. suspension, colloid, solution
11. What causes Brownian motion in col- D. colloid, solution, suspension
loids?
17. Which of the following factors DO NOT af-
A. collisions between particles of the dis-
fect reaction rates?
persed phase and the dispersion medium.
A. Nature of reacting species
B. coagulation and settling of particles of
the dispersed phase B. State of reactants
C. absorption of energy from light. C. Density
D. variation in particle size within the col- D. Temperature
loid E. Concentration

18. Which is the example of hydrophilic col- C. two polar ends

loid? D. one polar and one nonpolar end
A. milk
24. How are suspensions and colloids differ-
B. gel ent?
C. gold sol A. Suspensions settle out and colloids do
D. mayonnaise not settle.
B. Colloids settle out and suspensions do
NARAYAN CHANGDER
19. The following colloids are used for food or
not settle.
food preparation EXCEPT
C. Suspensions dissolve and colloids do
A. milk
not.
B. gelatin
D. Colloids dissolve and suspensions do
C. silica gel not.
D. whipped cream
25. When a solid changes straight to a gas.
20. Which one is a homogeneous mixture? A. condensation
A. Milk dissolved in water B. sublimation
B. Whipped Cream C. deposition
C. Blood dissolved in water D. freezing
D. Sodium Hypochlorite dissolved in wa- 26. This method is commonly used for destruc-
ter tion of colloid..
21. Define colloidal dispersion. A. Addition of electrolytes
A. A true solution with particles sus- B. Condensation
pended in the solvent. C. Dialysis
B. Small particles suspended in solvent; D. Filtration by animal membrane
not a true solution.
27. Which of the following is the definition of
C. A heterogenous mixture of an immisci-
solute?
ble solute and solvent.
A. A species formed and used up; will not
D. none of above
appear in rate law.
22. Gold number is a measure of B. The minor component (is dissolved).
A. Stability of colloidal system C. Small particles suspended in solvent,
B. Coagulation power of a colloid not true solution.
C. Size of colloidal particles D. A solid catalyst in an aqueous reaction.
D. Efficiency of the protective colloid 28. What is an Alloy?
23. Emulsifying agents and surfactants both A. Mixture of Metals and Non-metals
have B. Mixture of two Metals
A. one polar end C. Mixture of Two Non-metals
B. one nonpolar end D. Mixture of plastic and wood

29. system are formed when one system C. Electrophoresis

is dispersed in the other system but do not
D. Coagulation
combine to form solution.

A. colloidal 35. If the amount of solute present in a solu-
B. suspension tion is more than the maximum than can
be dissolved, the solution is
C. true solution
A. saturated
D. homogeneous
B. unsaturated
30. If a spoonful of sugar is mixed in a glass
of water, what is the water called? C. supersaturated
A. solute D. colloidal
B. solution 36. At high concentration of soap in water,
C. solvent soap behaves as
D. element A. multimolecular colloid
31. Physical adsorption of a gaseous species B. macromolecular colloid
may change to chemical adsorption with C. associated colloid
D. Solution
A. decrease in temperature
B. increase in temperature 37. Temperature above which micelles forma-
C. increase in surface area of adsorbent tion takes place is called as
D. decrease in surface area of adsorbent A. Critical temperature

B. Kraft temperature
32. Which of the following is NOT a colloid?
A. milk C. Freezing point
B. mud D. None of these

C. butter 38. A method of preparing colloids consists of
D. boric acid clustering or coming together.
33. Which of the following interface cannot be A. Homogeneous

obtained? B. Heterogeneous
A. liquid-liquid C. Dispersion
B. solid-liquid D. Condensation
C. liquid-gas
39. Zig Zag movement of colloidal particles is
D. gas-gas
known as
34. The movement of colloidal particles to- A. Brownian motion
wards the oppositely charged electrodes
on passing electric current is known as B. U Brownian motion
A. Tyndall Effect C. Both
B. Brownian Motion D. None of the above

40. Method by which lyophobic sol can be pro- 46. Extent of physisorption of a gas increases
tected. with
A. By addition of oppositely charged sol. A. increase in temperature.
B. By addition of an electrolyte. B. decrease in temperature.
C. By addition of lyophilic sol. C. decrease in surface area of adsorbent.
D. By boiling. D. decrease in strength of van der Waals
forces.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
41. A is a substance that has definite phys-
ical and chemical properties such as ap- 47. At high concentration of soap in water,
pearance, melting point, and reactivity. soap behaves as
A. mixture A. molecular colloid
B. pure substance B. associated colloid
C. compound C. macromolecular colloid
D. element D. lyophilic colloid
42. which one is correct? 48. Which of the following is an electrolyte?

A. Solutions are clear A. pure water
B. suspensions are clear B. glass
C. colloids settle C. sodium chloride
D. Solutions settle D. sugar
43. The most commonly used solvent in food 49. Which one from these phenomenons that
is is not related to the colloidal system?
A. sodium chloride A. Dialysis
B. vinegar B. Tyndall Effect
C. water C. Absorption
D. citric acid D. Electrophoresis
44. The colloidal solution has a particle size of 50. An apparatus for testing conductivity is
placed in a solution. The power supply is
A. 1nm
turned on and the light bulb glows brightly.
B. 1000 nm This indicates that the solution
C. 1nm to 1000nm A. is heterogeneous
D. more than 1000 nm B. contains an electrolyte
45. Coffee beans, Powdered milk, Powdered C. is saturated
coffee D. is supersaturated
A. Sol, Sus, Col 51. A mixture that never settles into layers,
B. Sus, Sus, Col but does show the Tyndall effect
C. Sus, Col, Sol A. Alloys
D. Col, Sus, Sol B. Colloids

C. Compounds 57. Which of the following is a set of mix-

tures?
D. Elements
A. air, water, wood

52. What is the Tyndall effect? B. wood, salt sand
A. The inability of oil to mix with water. C. salt, sand, water
B. How the tides effect a solution’s ability D. wood, air sand
to mix.
58. An example of a universal indicator is
C. The scattering of light due to colloids. A. juice
D. none of above B. water
53. Which of the following is an aerosol? C. milk

D. none of above
A. smoke
59. It shows a Tyndall effect when light is
B. milk
passed through
C. cheese A. Solution
D. butter B. Suspension
54. Water and Kool-Aid are mixed together. C. Colloid
Hot water, coffee and sugar are mixed to- D. Both b and c
gether. Which substance is the solvent in
60. What kind of mixture is formed when
both?
larger particles settle out when left undis-
A. Water turbed?
B. Coffee A. colloid
C. Kool-aid B. suspension
D. Sugar C. solution
D. solvent
55. Most of waters unique properties are due
61. An is made up of one or more of the
to
same kind of atom chemically combined.
A. the shape of the water molecule A. atom
B. its make up B. element
C. its density C. molecule
D. hydrogen bonding D. compound
56. What is a substance that is dissolved in 62. When do you say that a mixture is hetero-
another substance? geneous?
A. The particles are evenly distributed.
A. solution
B. The components are easily identified.
B. solute
C. The components cannot be identified.
C. solvent
D. The particles are completely dissolved
D. compound in the other substance.

63. Freshly prepared precipitate sometimes 69. Amount of solute in a given amount of sol-
gets converted to colloidal solution by vent or solution
A. coagulation A. Concentration
B. electrolysis B. Miscible
C. diffusion C. Solute
D. peptisation D. solubility
70. Which is True?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
64. ‘Greater the valency, the higher is the ciag-
ulating power of ion’. This rule was intro- A. Suspensions do not settle
duced by
B. suspension settle
A. Hardy Schulz
C. colloids settle
B. Maxwell
D. Solutions settle
C. Kisses lewis
71. Which of the following is the definition for
D. Faraday
the solvent?
65. Which of the following is a heterogeneous A. A detailed sequence of reaction steps.
mixture
B. A solution that contains less than the
A. water optimal amount of solute.
B. Salt dissolved in water C. When all reactants and products are in
C. chex mix the same phase.
D. air D. The major component (retains phase).
66. A mixture characterized by the settling of 72. Which one is the example of colloidal sys-
particles tem when solid is dispersed in gas?
A. solution A. fog
B. colloid B. foam
C. suspension C. smoke
D. none of above D. pumice stone
67. Which one is a solution 73. Particles in this state of matter are moving
the slowest.
A. Salt and water
A. solid
B. paint
B. gas
C. pizza
C. liquid
D. Mustard
D. none of above
68. The ability to dissolve in a solvent
74. Why do colloid particles seem to float in
A. solute solution?
B. solubility A. They are too small to settle out by grav-
C. pure substance ity.
D. colloid B. They are anti-gravitational particles.

C. They disperse so that they are equidis- C. It’s particles are very small
tant from each other. D. none of above

D. none of above
81. In a , one substance is dissolved in an-
75. The random motion of colloidal particle in other substance.
colloidal solution is called as
A. solution
A. Tyndall effect
B. suspension
B. Brownian Motion
C. colloid
C. Electrophoresis
D. none of above
D. Electro-osmosis
82. Identify the property of colloid related to
76. Which mixture is made up of the smallest Tyndall effect.
particles?
A. Mechanical property
A. milk
B. Colligative property
B. muddy water
C. Optical property
C. salt water
D. Electrical property
D. shaving cream
83. The smallest piece of an element is a(n)
77. SOFTDRINKS AND ICE
A. Molecule
A. SOL
B. Atom
B. SUS
C. COL C. Liquid
D. none of above D. Compound
78. A solid solution of one metal melted into 84. Which of the following is the definition for
another metal solution?
A. Alloys A. Energy which reacting species must
have to form the transition state.
B. Colloids
B. The slowest step in a reaction.
C. Compounds
C. A homogenous mixture.
D. Elements
D. A substance that speeds up rate with-
79. No definite shape or volume out permanent change.
A. solid E. When solids and liquids are not in-
B. liquid cluded in the equilibrium constant.
C. gas 85. It is the dissolved substance in the solution
D. solid, liquid and gas A. solvent
80. Why is milk a hetrogeneous mixture? B. solute
A. It’s particles settle down after a while C. powder
B. It scatters light D. solids

86. Movement of dispersion medium under the 91. What is happening when my ice cream
influence of electronic field is called as- changes from a solid to a liquid?
A. Electro-osmosis A. freezing
B. Electrophoresis B. melting
C. burning
C. Electrodialysis
D. evaporation
D. Cataphoresis
92. A type of mixture where the particles are
NARAYAN CHANGDER
87. Which of the following is TRUE about col- larger than those in a solution but not
loids? heavy enough to settle out.
A. All colloids are liquid. A. Homogeneous mixture
B. All colloids are artificial. B. Colloid
C. The particles in colloid settle down af- C. Suspension
ter some time. D. Compound
D. Colloids may come in any of the three 93. How do we seperate particles from col-
states:solid, liquid or gas. loidal solutions?
88. What does a catalyst do? A. Distilation

B. Sedimantation
A. Increases the rate of reaction without
undergoing a permanent change. C. Evaporation
B. Decreases the rate of reaction and un- D. Centrifugation
dergoes a permanent physical change. 94. The part of a solution that does the dis-
C. It does nothing. They are pointless. solving
D. none of above A. solute
B. solvent
89. Which of the following solutions will be
C. mixer upper thing
transparent to bright source of light?
D. surfactant
A. Soil and Water
95. Which are different types of mixtures
B. Sugar solution
A. suspension
C. Milk
B. solution
D. Corn Starch
C. colloid
90. are mixtures in which its particles D. all the above
are too big to stay mixed without being
96. a solute whose water solution conducts
stirred or shaken.
electricity is called a(n)
A. Solutions
A. electrolyte
B. Colloids B. non electrolyte
C. Suspensions C. molecular compound
D. none of above D. non conductor

97. If homogenous solution when viewed from 102. These are colloidal system that the dis-
a specific angle appears perfectly dark, an- persed phase is liquid, except
gle is A. milk

A. 30 Degrees B. soap foam
B. 45 Degrees C. margarine
C. 60 Degrees D. fog
D. 90 Degrees 103. Define adsorbate.
98. Which of the following electrolytes will A. The removal of adsorbed particles.
have maximum coagulating value for B. A solid material on which adsorption
AgI/Ag+ sol? occurs.
A. Na2S C. A substance in the adsorbed phase.
B. Na3PO4 D. The study on the interaction phenom-
C. Na2SO4 ena on the surface.
D. NaCl 104. Fog is an example of
A. Liquid in gas
99. Which is not true for chemisorption?
B. Gas in liquid
A. It involves high activation energy
C. Solid in liquid
B. It is highly specific
D. Liquid in liquid
C. It involves chemical bond formation
D. It is reversible 105. The dispersal of a precipitated material
into colloidal solution by the action of an
100. A mixture whose particles are larger than electrolyte in solutionis called
the size of a molecule but smaller than par- A. Coagulation
ticles that can be seen with the naked eye
B. dialysis
is known as a
C. peptization
A. solution
D. ultra-filtration
B. suspension
106. A mixture that appears to be evenly
C. colloid
mixed throughout:
D. solvent
A. an atom
101. is a type of heterogeneous mixture B. a compound
inwhich the dispersed particles do not set- C. a homogeneous mixture
tle down. Theinsoluble particles in the mix-
ture are microscopic, with particle sizes be- D. a heterogeneous mixture
tween 1 and 1000 nanometer. 107. Which of the following is not a method
A. SOLUTION for coagulation of lyophobic sols?
B. COLLOID A. By electrophoresis
C. SUSPENSION a collection of solid par- B. By mixing oppositely charged sols
ticles or liquid droplets dispersed in air. C. By adding electrolyte
D. none of above D. By adding a protective colloid

108. Which statement below does NOT de- A. hot water

scribe a colloid? B. salt solution
A. A colloid is a type of heterogeneous C. soap solution
mixture
D. kerosene
B. A colloid is a type of solution.
C. The particles in a colloid do not settle 114. A saturated solution is
like they do in a suspension. A. No more solute can be dissolved
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. The particles in a colloid do not B. More solute can be dissolved
dissolve-they are just too small to be
C. The solvent and solution
seen.
D. none of above
109. Peptisation is a process of
A. Precipitation of colloid 115. amount of solute that can dissolve in a
given amount of solvent at a given tem-
B. Dispersion of precipitate perature
C. purification of colloids A. saturated solution
D. Movement of colloid under electric po- B. solubility
tential
C. pure substance
110. What is the composition of collodian?
D. colloid
A. Ethanol and water
116. Colloid preparation from molecules or
B. Ethanol
ions to form colloidal particles is called
C. Water and ether
A. coagulation
D. Ethanol and ether
B. condensation
111. An emulsion is which type of mixture? C. Mechanical dispersion
A. suspension D. Peptization
B. colloid
117. In which of the following do particles sit
C. solution at the bottom
D. gaseous A. Solution
112. Which of the following appear to be clear B. Suspension
(are not cloudy)?
A. solution
D. Colloid
B. suspension
118. heterogeneous mixture in which some of
C. colloid
the particles settle out of the mixture upon
D. alloy standing
113. Coconut oil is non polar, while water is A. solution
polar. They can not be mixed and will B. colloid
not dissolve each other.Emulsion is pro-
duce when oil-water mixture is shaken C. solvent
and is added by D. suspension

119. Which of the following is an example of 124. In what type of phase might you find col-
colloid? loidal dispersion?

A. milk A. Solid
B. sugar solution B. Liquid
C. muddy water C. Gas
D. water in oil D. Mixture
120. According to Hardy-Schulze rule, the co- 125. Which mixture shows high homogene-
agulating power of cation follows the or- ity?
der: A. Fruit Salad
A. Na+ > Ba2+ > Al 3+ B. Lemmonade
B. Al 3+ > Ba2+ > Na+ C. Horlicks mixed on milk
C. Ba2+ > Al 3+ > Na+ D. Paint mixed in water
D. Al 3+ > Na+ > Ba2+ 126. Which of the following has components
in a uniform arrangement?
121. A pure substances that can’t be broken
down by chemical or physical means is a(n) A. Heterogeneous mixture
B. Colloids
A. Atom C. Suspensions
B. Molecule D. Solutions
C. Compound 127. Milk is a
D. Element A. solution
122. Two classifications of a pure substance B. suspension

are C. colloid
A. homogeneous and heterogeneous D. none of above
B. atoms and elements 128. A colloidal solution consists of
C. elements and compounds A. a dispersed phase
D. solutions and colloids B. a dispersion medium
123. These are the properties of col- C. a dispersed phase in a dispersion

loid.ElectrophoresisTyndall EffectCoagu- medium
lationBrownian movementDialysisWhich D. a dispersion medium in a dispersed
number that is applied in purification of phase
water using alum?
129. Which of the following is a slow pro-
A. 1 cess?
B. 2 A. Dialysis
C. 3 B. Electrolysis
D. 4 C. Ultrafiltration
E. 5 D. Electro-Dialysis

130. A beam of light is visible through a colloid. 136. A suspension is formed from uniform par-
This is called ? ticles of solid, of diameter 10 Mm sus-
A. Tyndall Effect pended in a solvent. What is the best de-
scription of this system?
B. Homogenization
A. Polydisperse and coarse
C. Suspended light
D. Colloidal Dispersion B. Monodisperse and coarse
C. Polydisperse and colloidal
131. The process of settling of colloidal parti-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
cle is called D. Monodisperse and colloidal
A. Peptization E. None of the above
B. Caogulation
137. Fog in an example of colloidal system of
C. Dialysis
A. liquid in gas
D. Emulsification
B. gas in liquid
132. Henry’s law relates
C. solid in gas
A. pressure to temperature
D. gas in solid
B. pressure to gas-liquid solubility
C. temperature to gas-liquid solubility 138. The colloidal solution of liquid in liquid is
D. pressure to solid-liquid solubility called as
A. Sol
133. In this state of matter, the molecules can
move around each other, but cannot break B. Emulsion
the force of attraction between them. C. Aerosol
A. liquid
D. Solid sol
B. gas
C. solid 139. The term ‘sorption’ stands for
D. none of above A. absorption
134. Which of the following is an example of B. adsorption

absorption? C. both absorption and adsorption
A. Water on silica gel D. desorption
B. Water on calcium chloride
140. Select the CORRECT statement regarding
C. Hydrogen on finely divided nickel
adsorption process.
D. Oxygen on metal surface
A. A substance is encapsulated in the
135. Which of the following is NOT an exam- solid or liquid form.
ple of colloids? B. A substance is distributed throughout
A. milk the solid or liquid form.
B. jelly C. A substance becomes attached to the
C. tincture of iodine surface of a solid or a liquid.
D. fog D. It may involve chemisorption only.

141. Milk and gelatin are examples of C. mixture

A. suspensions D. compound

B. colloids
147. When a solution reaches the point where
C. solutions it cannot dissolve any more solute it is con-
D. none of above sidered
A. Soluble
142. Which is NOT a colloid
B. Diluted
A. Blood
C. Concentrated
B. Paint
D. Saturated
C. Detergent
D. Milk of magnesia 148. This solution has no Tyndall Effect and is
not filterable
143. Which of the following decreases
the average kinetic energy of solvent A. solution
molecules? B. suspension
A. decreasing the temperature C. colloid
B. decreasing the pressure D. heterogeneous
C. not stirring the solution
149. Recognize the method in preparing
D. decreasing the contact area between lyophilic sol.
solvent and solute
A. Chemical reduction
144. If you shine a light into a liquid and the B. Peptization
light is scattered, this is called
C. Mechanical dispersion
A. the tyndall effect
D. Direct mixing of the solid with the liq-
B. suspension
uid
C. colloid
150. which one is a suspension?
D. a suspension or colloid
A. Vinegar
145. Milk and Cornstarch are examples of
B. Foam
A. colloidal solution and suspension re-
spectively. C. Fog
B. both colloidal solutions. D. oil spill in the ocean

C. suspension and colloidal solutions re- 151. Dispersion method is used to produce col-
spectively. loid from suspension. Which process is not
D. both are suspension dispersion method?
A. mechanical dispersion
146. It is made of either elements or com-
pounds that are physically combined B. hydrolysis
A. atom C. Bredig’s Arch method
B. element D. Peptization

152. Which one is not a colloid 158. When dispersed phase is liquid and dis-
A. Foam persion medium is gas, the colloidal sys-
tem is called:
B. Gel
A. Aerosol
C. Emulsion
B. Emulsion
D. Coffee
C. Smoke
153. In the expression “like dissolves like, “ D. Gel
NARAYAN CHANGDER
the word like refers to similarity in molec-
ular 159. Tyndall effect occurs when the colloidal
A. mass particle
B. weight A. adsorbs the light

B. passes the light
C. polarity
C. scatters the light
D. energy
D. is able to do brownian motion
154. Which substance that includes in aerosol
system? 160. Electro-Dialysis can be made faster, pro-
vided it is an electrolyte. How?
A. soap foam
A. Applying an electric field
B. paint
B. Increasing the temperature
C. colored glass
C. Adding a catalyst
D. smoke
D. Adding more electrolyte
155. Which has the largest particles?
161. type of mixture that doesn’t separate on
A. Solution
its own but still contains undissolved par-
B. Colloids ticles ( looks cloudy)
C. Suspension A. solution
D. None of the above B. colloid
156. Which of the following would leave par- C. suspension
ticles on filter paper? D. none of above
A. Solution
162. type of mixture that doesn’t separate on
B. Suspension its own but still contains undissolved par-
C. Colloid ticles
D. none of above A. solution
B. colloid
157. Extent of physisorption increases with
C. suspension
A. decrease in surface area
D. none of above
B. increase in temperature
C. decrease in temperature 163. When boiling water creates steam.
D. decrease in strength of van der waal A. condensation

forces B. melting

C. freezing 169. Particles of a homogeneous mixture is

D. vaporization smaller than

A. 1nm
164. Which of the following best describes a
mixture? B. 0.5nm
A. It is a physical combination of two or C. 2nm
more substances. D. 1.5nm
B. It is a homogeneous system.
170. A solute crystal is dropped into a solu-
C. It has different combinations of solid
tion containing dissolved solute. It falls to
and liquid.
the bottom of the beaker and does not dis-
D. It exhibited by the use of Tyndall Ef- solve after vigorous stirring. What does
fect. this indicate about the solution?
165. A type of mixture that falls in between A. probably unsaturated
suspensions and solutions are called B. probably saturated
A. solutions C. probably supersaturated
B. colloids D. not at equilibrium
C. suspensions
171. What is the one property of a suspension
D. pure substances
that is different from a solution or a col-
166. Cloud or fog is an example of colloidal loid?
system of: A. If left to rest, the particles of a suspen-
A. solid disperesed in gas sion will settle down.
B. gas dispersed in gas B. The particles of a suspension reflect
C. liquid dispersed in gas light.
D. solid dispersed in liquid C. A suspension is always clear.

D. Suspensions are colourless.
167. The following is the colloid synthe-
sis.metal solFe(OH)3 solAs2S3 solSulphur 172. An surfactant
solAgCl solWhich are occupying condensa-
tion method? A. increases surface tension
A. 1, 2, 4 B. creates hydrogen bonds
B. 1, 4, 5 C. decreases surface tension
C. 1, 3, 4 D. is a solvent
D. 2, 3, 4 173. A mixture is one where the sub-
168. substance that dissolves the solute stances are evenly spread throughout.
A. solution A. heterogeneous
B. solvent B. homogeneous
C. saturation C. pure substance

174. Which of the following material can pro- C. suspension

duce a solution? D. homogeneous
A. Common salt
180. What type of mixture separates upon
B. Garden soil
standing (like the oil and water in the lava
C. Boiled starch lamp)?
D. Corn flour A. Solution
175. ‘’ A substance is first ground to coarse
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. Alloy
particles and then mixed with the dis-
C. Colloid
persion medium to produce a suspension.
“Name the method to produce sol as men- D. Suspension
tioned above.
181. A snow globe would be an example of a
A. Double decomposition
B. Mechanical dispersion
A. colloid
C. Bredig’s arc
B. solution
D. Peptization
C. suspension
176. The tyndall effect can be seen in D. none of above
A. Suspension
182. A suspension is a kind of mixture.
B. Solution
A. Homogeneous
C. Colloids
D. All of the above B. Hetrogeneous
C. I don’t know
177. How can we prove a substance is homo-
geneous or heterogeneous? D. none of above
A. Tyndall effect 183. A physical blend of two or more pure sub-
B. Common Sense stances that can be separated by physical
means is known as a
C. We cant prove it.
D. None of the above. A. Element
B. compound
178. Which is an example of an emulsifying
agent C. Mixture
A. soap/detergents D. Solid
B. salt 184. are the smallest unit of an element
C. water that maintains the properties of that ele-
D. oil ment.
A. Atoms
179. Muddy water is an example of what type
of mixture? B. Elements
A. colloid C. Compounds
B. solution D. Mixtures

185. Carbon dioxide dissolved in water is an 190. The particles of a matter which can’t be
example of which solute-solvent combina- separated by filter paper but undergoes
tion? Tyndall Effect

A. liquid in liquid A. None of these
B. liquid in gas B. Solution
C. gas in liquid C. Suspension

D. Colloidal
D. cannot be determined
191. the substance that dissolves
186. Why do we need soap to wash oil off of
things? A. solvent
B. solution
A. We need soap because soap has both
hydrophilic and hydrophobic parts. C. solute
B. We need soap because water is not D. unsaturated
strong enough to wash off oil.
192. Bredig’s arc method is used for the prepa-
C. We need soap because oil is hydropho- ration of colloidal soln of:
bic (water-fearing). A. Metal like silver, gold, etc
D. We need soap because soap particles B. Organic compounds
are larger than water.
C. Two liquids
187. What is foam? D. Inorganic compounds
A. solid is dispersed in gas 193. type of mixture that doesn’t separate on
B. gas is dispersed in solid its own; exhibits tyndall effect.
C. gas is dispersed in liquid A. solution
D. liquid is dispersed in liquid B. colloid

C. suspension
188. Sol Fe(OH)3 synthesis is carried out by D. none of above
A. Mechanical dispersion 194. Which of these is a compound?

A. Aluminium (Al)
B. Peptization
B. Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
C. Double decomposition
C. Nitrogen (N)
D. Hydrolysis
D. Sand
189. A cloudy liquid that contains insoluble
195. The movement of sol particles under an
particles
applied electric potential is called
A. suspension A. Electrophoresis
B. solvent B. electro-osmosis
C. solute C. electrofiltration
D. salt D. none of these

196. Which of the following is soluble in wa- 202. The colloidal solution formed when dis-
ter, which is a very polar solvent persed phase is liquid; dispersed medium
A. potassium nitrate is gas
B. nail polish remover (acetone) A. Foam

B. Aerosol
C. gasoline (octane)
C. Gel
D. carbon tetrachloride (CCl 4)
D. Sols
NARAYAN CHANGDER
197. Which of the following would be a hy-
drophilic aqueous colloidal dispersion? 203. Which of the following is commonly
known as a universal solvent?
A. Oil
A. Petrol
B. Protein
B. Water
C. Salt Water
C. Alcohol
D. Dichloromethane
D. Detergent
198. Sugar water is a
204. Which of the following mixture can make
A. solution bread?
B. suspension A. water, milk, coffee
C. colloid B. water, sugar, milk, yeast
D. none of above C. water, sugar, milk, yeast, flour
199. The colloidal particles in the a colloid form D. water, sugar, milk, creamer, yeast
the
205. Substance that dissolves the solute
A. dispersed phase
A. solution
B. dispersion medium
B. solvent
C. solute C. saturation
D. solvent D. so
200. The state of matter in which the atoms 206. A type of mixture that always looks
are locked and vibrate in place. cloudy because clumps of insoluble parti-
A. solid cles remain suspended throughout it-they
do not settle as sediments after a period
B. liquid
of time
C. gas
A. colloid
D. none of above
B. sedimentation
201. Which of these is a pure substance? C. suspended
A. bread D. crystallisation
B. table salt 207. Which of the following will show ‘’Tyn-
C. garden soil dall Effect”?
D. sea water A. Salt solution

B. Milk C. Chemical adsorption decreases at

C. Copper Sulphate Solution high temperature and low pressure.

D. Starch Solution D. Physical adsorption is reversible.
208. Take a look at the following proper- 213. Which form of matter does not take the
ties.Able to adsorb ionscatters the light- shape of its container?
the particles move randomlyAbe to have A. liquid
chargeWhich are the colloidal properties?
B. gas
A. 1, 2, and 3
C. solid
B. 1 and 3
C. 2 and 4 D. air
D. all corrects 214. Which of the following will show Tyndall

effect?
209. Which of the following is the best descrip-
tion of a solution? (Choose all the correct A. Aqueous solution of soap below criti-
answers) cal micelle concentration.
A. can not be separated using a filter B. Aqueous solution of soap above criti-
B. doesn’t scatter light cal micelle concentration.
C. a solute dissolved in a solvent C. Aqueous solution of sodium chloride.

D. homogeneous D. Aqueous solution of sugar.
210. If there is a lot of solute in a solution, 215. Type of mixture which doesn’t separate
then it is on its own
A. Soluble A. Suspension
B. Diluted B. Colloid
C. Concentrated C. None of the above
D. Pure Solution D. All of the above
211. As temperature increases, solubility of
216. What is the universal solvent?
solids in liquids
A. Oil
A. usually decreases
B. usually increases B. Vinegar
C. always decreases C. Water

D. always increases D. Soup
212. Select the FALSE statement about adsorp- 217. The scattering of light by the dispersed
tion. phase is called
A. The value of adsorption enthalpy of A. Brownian Movement
physical adsorption is less than chemical
B. Tyndall Effect
adsorption.
B. Physical adsorption occurs due to Van C. adsorption
der Waals’forces. D. none of these

218. Pressure has the greatest effect on the C. Emulsion

solubility of D. Aerosols
A. gasses in gasses
224. Which of the following has the largest
B. gasses in liquids particles?
C. liquids in liquids A. Solution
D. solids in liquids B. Suspension
219. Formation of micelles takes place only
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. Colloid
above a particular concentration, known D. none of above
as
A. Critical micelles concentration 225. The movement of the dispersion medium
under the influence of applied potential is
B. Normal concentration
known as
C. Both
A. Osmosis
B. electro-osmosis
220. How much percentage of of collodian so- C. electrophoresis
lution is needed?
D. none of these
A. 2%
226. What is essential for the stability of the
B. 3%
colloidal solution?
C. 4%
A. Excessive amounts of electrolytes
D. 4.5%
B. Some other soluble impurities
221. Peptization denotes: C. Traces of electrolytes
A. Digestion of food D. None of the above
B. Hydrolysis of protein
227. Which of the following process is respon-
C. Breaking and dispersion into colloidal sible for the formation of delta at a place
state where rivers meet the sea?
D. Precipitation of solid from colloidal di- A. Emulsification
mension
B. Colloid formation
222. Particles are large enough to scatter light C. Coagulation
beam.
D. Peptisation
A. colloid
B. solution 228. When a small amount of FeCl3 is added to
a freshly precipitated Fe(OH)3, b reddish
C. suspension brown colloidal solution is obtained. This
D. heterogeneous mixture phenomenon is known as
223. A colloid that contains tiny droplets of a A. dialysis

liquid dispersed in another liquid. B. peptization
A. Sol C. protection
B. Gel D. dissolution

229. Which of the following is dispersing 234. Substances which behave as normal elec-
medium foe emulsion? trolytes solution at low concentration and
exhibit colloids properties at higher con-

A. gas
centration are called
B. liquid
A. lyophilic colloids
C. solid B. lyophobic colloids
D. solid and liquid C. macromolecular colloids
230. *These are colloids which consist of liquid D. associated colloids

dispersed in solid. 235. Which of the following properties of col-
A. aerosol loids does not depend on the charge on par-
ticles?
B. emulsion
A. Coagulation
C. foam
B. Electro-osmosis
D. gels
C. Electrophoresis
231. Which of the following process is not D. Tyndall effect
responsible for the presence of electric
charge on the sol particles? 236. The part of the solution that is being dis-
solved
A. Electron capture by sol particles.
A. solute
B. Adsorption of ionic species from solu-
B. solvent
tion.
C. solubility
C. Formation of Helmholtz electrical dou-
ble layer. D. miscible
D. Absorption of ionic species from solu- 237. A is one that does not have a uniform
tion composition.
A. heterogeneous mixture
232. Electrolyte excess in a colloidal system
can be removed by process B. homogenous mixture
A. Electrophoresis C. pure substance

D. none of above
B. Ultrafiltration
C. Dialysis 238. These are colloids which consists of gas
dispersed in liquid or solid .
D. Peptization
A. aerosol
233. What happens to the solubility of most B. emulsion
solutes as the temperature increases?
C. foam
A. increases D. gel
B. decreases
239. Butter is the example of colloidal sys-
C. stays the same tem
D. can’t predict A. solid in liquid

B. liquid in solid 245. Foam is a colloidal system which con-

sists of a dispersed phase and a dispersion
C. liquid in liquid
medium. Indicate the dispersed phase and
D. gas in liquid dispersion medium of foam, respectively.
240. Which the following is not a colloidal sys- A. Liquid and liquid
tem B. Solid and gas
A. Latex C. Liquid and solid
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. Hard water D. Gas and liquid
C. Ink
246. Which of the following will dissolve most
D. Pumice stone rapidly?
241. mixture that does NOT appear to be A. sugar cube in cold water
evenly mixed throughout: B. sugar cube in hot water
A. an atom C. powdered sugar in hot water
B. a compound D. powdered sugar in cold water
C. a homogeneous mixture
247. It is a process of removing a dissolved
D. a heterogeneous mixture
substance from a colloidal solution by
242. Which of the following is always homo- means of diffusion through a suitable mem-
geneous? brane
A. Solution A. Electrophoresis
B. Suspension B. Dialysis
C. Colloid C. Precipitation
D. none of above D. Peptization
243. A mixture is one that does not have 248. The following are emulsions EXCEPT
a uniform composition. A. butter
A. heterogeneous B. facial cream
B. homogenous C. mayonnaise
C. pure substance D. whipped cream
D. none of above
249. Sand floating in water, but most of the
244. What kind of mixture is formed when oil sand is settled at the bottom this an ex-
is mixed with water? ample of which type of mixture?
A. suspension A. solution
B. solvent B. suspension
C. solution C. colloid
D. colloids D. none of above

250. A is made up of different kinds of 256. Coagulation process is shown in

atoms chemically combined. A. fog in a mountain

A. element B. delta precipitation
B. compound C. textile coloring
C. mixture D. sugar whitening
D. molecule
257. A liquid made up of a solvent with a so-
251. The diameter of particles in colloidal sys- lute dissolved in it
tem is A. solution
A. 10-9 m to 10-6 m B. soluble
B. 10-10 m to 10-4 m C. solidified
C. 10-12 m to 10-9 m D. solar
D. 10-7 m to 10-5 m 258. Exhibits the Tyndall effect (more than one
252. Which one is a colloid? answer is possible)
A. sea water A. homogeneous mixture
B. air B. colloid
C. suspension
C. river water
D. solution
D. milk
259. Which of these is an element?
253. Which is a colloid?
A. Salt (NaCl)
A. Air
B. Water (H20)
B. Rice in water
C. Oxygen (O)
C. Fog
D. Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
D. Rain water
260. A substance in which the atoms of two or
254. mixture of two or more substances; more different elements are combined in a
dissolved particles are spread evenly fixed proportion.
throughout the mixture
A. molecule
A. solvent
B. compound
B. solute
C. element
C. mixture
D. mixture
D. solution
261. A contains a variety of elements and
255. Which of the following does not increase compounds that are not chemically com-
the rate of dissolving a solid in a liquid? bined with each other.
A. stirring the solution A. compound
B. crushing up the solute B. element
C. raising the temperature of the water C. molecule
D. lowering the temperature of the water D. mixture

262. What substance is called the universal D. none of above

solvent
266. These are the example of col-
A. oil
loids.GelPaintMilkStarchGelWhich number
B. air is emulsion?
C. water A. 1
D. all of the above B. 2
263. The substance that does the dissolving is
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 3
known as the
D. 4
A. solute
E. 5
B. solvent
C. soluble 267. If a mixture goes through the filter paper,
it is said to be
D. insoluble
A. filterable
264. The Tyndall Effect is not visible in which
of the following? B. not filterable
A. Solution C. none of the above

B. Suspension D. none of above
C. Colloid 268. What is the process in which colloid will
D. Heterogeneous Mixture coagulate due to the opposite charge pres-
ence?
265. Coffee, mouthwash, and vinegar are ex-
amples of mixtures. A. Tyndall effect
A. heterogeneous B. Brownian motion
B. homogeneous C. Electrophoresis
C. pure D. Dialysis

3. Electricity
3.1 Electric current & circuit

1. is a measure of how difficult it is for an A. series
electric current to flow in a material. B. parallel
A. electric current
C. combination
B. electric circuit
D. split
C. electric resistance
5. an object or type of material that allows
D. none of above
the flow of an electrical current in one or
2. In the equation I = V/R, V is expressed in more directions.
A. conductor
A. volts B. insulator
B. ohms C. spark
C. amperes D. grounding
D. none of above
6. What happens when electricity flows
3. Three resistors, RA = 10 Ω, RB = 20 Ω, through anobject?
and RC = 25 Ω, are connected in SERIES. A. A magnetic field is destroyed.
The total resistance of this setup is equal
to B. Protons are pulled away from their
atoms.
A. 0.19 Ω
C. A magnetic field is created.
B. 5.26 Ω
D. Electrical charge is equalized.
C. 18.33 Ω
D. 55 Ω 7. In a simple circuit consisting of a single
lamp and a single battery, when current
4. This type of circuit only has one path for in the lamp is 2 amperes, the current in
current to flow. the battery is

3.1 Electric current & circuit 228
A. half, 1 A. C. insulators
B. 2 A. D. resistors
C. dependent on internal battery resis-
tance. 13. is the potential difference across it’s
terminals when cell is in closed circuit.
D. Not enough information to say.
A. Emf
8. When a dry cell is connected in a series,
the flow of electrons moves from the B. Terminal potential difference
NARAYAN CHANGDER
terminal to the terminal. C. Work
A. positive, negative D. Lost volt
B. negative, positive
14. current is measured in
C. positive, positive
D. negative, negative A. volts
B. amps
9. What would happen if you add more bat-
teries to an electrical circuit containing C. watts
light bulbs? D. mph
A. No charge
B. The bulbs will dim. 15. An electric current is made up of
charged electrons
C. The bulbs will be brighter.
A. neutral
D. The bulbs will last longer.
B. negative
10. In a parallel circuit which of the following
varies based on the amount of resistance C. positive
A. Voltage D. balanced
B. Current 16. How does resistance affect current?
C. Ohms Law
A. less resistance-less current
D. Charge
B. more resistance-less current
11. the charging of an object by the contact of
C. more resistance-more current
a charged object to a neutral object (like
touching a door knob) D. resistance does not affect current
A. induction
17. In a circuit, the current flow is 1.0 A. If the
B. conduction potential difference across the resistor is
C. friction 1.0 V and the e.m.f. of the cell is 1.5 V,
what is the internal resistance of the cell?
D. none of above
A. 0.2 Ω
12. Metals such as copper, iron, gold, and sil-
ver are B. 0.5 Ω
A. conductors C. 1.2 Ω
B. brittle D. 1.5 Ω

18. How many Volts would we need to pro- 24. An example of an insulator is:
duce a current of 8 Amps through a 6 Ohm A. iron
resistor?

B. silver
A. 1.33 volts
C. copper wire
B. 24 volts
D. rubber
C. 0.75
D. 48 volts 25. Which type of material DOES NOT allow
electric current to flow through it?
19. A light bulb is an example of a A. An insulator
A. current B. A magnet
B. resistor C. A conductor
C. battery D. A metal
D. none of above
26. A glowing filament will be at a
20. The amount of energy used to move one A. Low temperature
coulomb of electrons through the circuit is
B. High temperature
its
C. Atmospheric temperature
A. current
D. Temperature of a ice
B. voltage
C. resistance 27. amount of resistance to the flow of current
within the voltage source
D. none of above
A. electromotive force (emf)
21. AC stands for
B. equivalent resistance
A. Alternating current
C. internal resistance
B. Air conditioning
D. three-wire system
C. Alphabetical c
28. Name the instrument used to measure the
D. none of above
emf of a cell
22. We use to measure electric current. A. Multimeter
A. voltmeter B. Ammeter
B. ammeter C. Potentiometer
C. ohmmeter D. Galvanometer
D. rheostat 29. An electric current is passed through a con-
23. An electric current can produce ducting solution. Following are the some
observations:(i) Deposits of metal may be
A. heating effect only. seen on electrodes(ii) Solution may get
B. chemical effect only. heated(iii) Bubbles of gas may be formed
C. magnetic effect only. on the electrodes
D. chemical, heating, and magnetic ef- A. Only (ii) is true

fects. B. Only (i) and (ii) are true

C. Only (i) and (iii) are true B. An open circuit

D. All (i), (ii) and (iii) are true. C. A fused circuit
30. change sunlight into electric energy. D. none of above
A. batteries
36. One ampere equals about 1 of elec-
B. generators trons
C. solar cells A. voltage
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. none of above
B. watt
31. A circuit with 3 resistors, 20 Ohms, 10 C. ohm
Ohms, and 20 Ohms are in series. What
is the total resistance? D. coulomb
A. 43 Ohms 37. What is the formula for current?
B. 50 Ohms
A. I = t/Q
C. 60 Ohms
B. I = W/Q
D. 33 Ohms
C. I = Q/t
32. causes the electrons to flow.
D. I = W/t
A. Electricity
B. EMF or electromotive force. 38. In the equation I = nAvq, what does v rep-
resent?
C. Magnetism
A. The speed of the electrons
D. Resistance
B. The average speed of the electrons
33. What is the effective resistance for two
resistors that each has 15ohm resistance C. The velocity of the electrons
and they are connected in parallel? D. The average velocity of the electrons
A. 7ohm
E. the fastest speed of all electrons
B. 7.5ohm
C. 7.2ohm 39. What is a Parallel circuit?
D. 7.25ohm A. Has only one path
34. Full form of MCB is B. Has more than one path
A. miniature circuit breaker C. Allows energy to travel through easily

B. most circuit breaker D. Has only one light bulb
C. maximum circuit breaker
40. Energy transferred per unit charge is
D. minimum circuit breaker
A. e.m.f
35. When the switch is off the circuit is bro- B. current
ken and current doesn’t flow through it, it
is called C. potential difference
A. A closed circuit D. conventional current

41. An electrical junction has three wires A, B C. Electricity

and C connected to it. Wire A carries 4.2 D. Chemical Charge
A going in, wire B carries 2.6 A going out.

What does wire C carry? 47. This circuit has multiple branches for the
A. 1.6 A going in electric charges to flow.
B. 1.6 A going out A. Parallel Circuit
C. 6.8 A going in B. Open Circuit
D. 6.8 A going out C. Short Circuit
D. Series Circuit
42. As resistors are added in series to a circuit,
the total resistance will 48. Q= which of the following situation has 1)
A. increase the greatest electric current 2) the small-
est electric current? Where a:is the flow
B. decrease
of 3C in 1 s, b:a person walking 8m in 4 s
C. stay the same and c:the flow of 6C in 3 s.
D. none of above A. a, 2) b
43. The voltage-current graph for a non-ohmic B. c, 2) a
resistor is curve. C. a, 2) c
A. A graph cant be curve D. b, 2) c
B. True statment
49. A potential difference of 24 V is applied to
C. The resistor should be ohmic a 150 resistor. How much current flows
D. none of above through the resistor?
A. 0.15 A
44. What is resistance measured in?
B. 3600 A
A. Amps
C. 6.25 A
B. Ohms
D. 0.16 A
C. Volts
D. none of above 50. how many electrons pass through a lamp
in 1 minute if the current is 300 mA
45. Ms Jo Jo rubbed two balloons with a piece
A. 1.125 X 1020
of wool. What will happen when the bal-
loons are brought near each other? B. 1025
A. The balloons will repel each other. C. 1.6 X 10−19
B. The balloons will attract each other. D. none of above
C. The balloons will become positively 51. What would have to happen for an atom
(+) charged. to become positively charged?
D. The balloons will pop. A. Gain protons
46. A battery is measured by its B. Gain electrons
A. Voltage C. Lose protons
B. Current D. Lose electrons

52. Amps are used as a unit of measure for C. It flow in many directions at the same
which concept? time
A. Power D. It always flows from the point where
B. Volts the electrical potential is highest to the
point where it is lowest
C. Resistance
D. Current 58. What is a fuse?
A. a small piece of metal that melts if cur-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
53. How do you measure potential difference
rent becomes too high
in a circuit?
B. contains two or more branches for cur-
A. Voltmeter
rents to move through
B. Ammeter
C. contains a small piece of metal that
C. Thermistor bends when it gets hot and causes a
D. Battery pack switch to flip and opens the circuit
54. Which one of the following solutions will D. none of above

not conduct electricity?
59. The difference in electrical potential en-
A. lemon juice ergy between two places is called
B. vinegar A. resistance
C. tap water B. friction
D. vegetable oil C. induction
55. Thicker wires have resistance than D. voltage
thinner wires.
60. What is a superconductor?
A. more
A. a material with a lot of resistance
B. less
C. the same B. a material with no or zero resistance
D. none of above C. a material with an unlimited amount of

resistance
56. A device for making or breaking an electric D. none of above
circuit.
A. Cell 61. A high resistance light bulb and a low re-
sistance light bulb are connected in series
B. Filament
to a 6-Volt pack of batteries. Which of the
C. Electric switch two light bulbs will shine the brightest?
D. none of above A. They will have the same brightness.
57. Which statement about electric curent is B. The low-R bulb will shine more
correct? brightly.
A. It always flows clockwise C. The high-R bulb will shine more
brightly.
B. It gets used as it goes around the cir-
cuit D. None of the above

62. What happens when you add a second bulb 67. What is Electric Current
to a series circuit?
A. flow of electric current through a con-

A. The first bulb gets brighter ductor
B. The second bulb will be as bright as the B. flow of electric charges through a con-
first because they both get full power ductor
C. The circuit will no longer work
C. flow of electric charges through an in-
D. Both bulbs will be half as bright be- sulator
cause the voltage is divided by two now
D. flow of electric current through an in-
63. What is Resistance? sulator
A. the degree to which a circuit compo-
68. How does the thickness of a wire affect
nent opposes the passage of an electric
resistance?
current, causing energy dissipation
B. How hard the energy is pushed A. A thicker wire has more resistance
C. The amount of charges that pass by a B. A thinner wire has more resistance
given point per second C. Thickness of a wire does not affect re-
D. None of the above sistance
64. What is the equivalent resistance of a se- D. none of above

ries circuit with three identical resistors of
value 2 ohms? 69. Electric bulb converts electrical energy into
A. 6 ohms A. sound energy
B. 1.5 ohms B. mechanical energy
C. 2/3 ohms C. light energy
D. 8 ohms D. magnetic energy
65. As current flows through a wire, the num-
70. Distilled water is
ber of stays the same
A. circuits A. Good conductor
B. particles B. Bad conductor
C. current C. Who cares?
D. electrons D. I am done. I cannot answer any more
questions!
66. Conventional current is
A. the direction that positive charges 71. If the Voltage is increased and the resis-
move through a circuit. tance stays the same, Current will
B. a fictional idea. A. Increase
C. the direction that negative charges B. Decrease
move through a circuit.
C. Stay the same
D. is not the standard way of describing
the direction of current. D. Not enough info

72. There are 6.23 ×1024 free electrons per D. The sum of the voltages at a junction
cm3 in a wire. The average drift velocity is zero.
of the electrons is 1.1 ×10−3 m s−1 . Cal-
culate the current density in the wire. 77. A charge of 60 Coulomb flows in a wire for
45 minutes. If the diameter of the wire is
A. 1.0 ×103 A m−2
1.0 mm, what is the current density in the
B. 6.9 ×106 A m−2 wire?
C. 2.1 ×109 A m−2 A. 2.2 ×104 A m−2
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. 1.1 ×109 A m−2 B. 2.8 ×104 A m−2
73. Which of these materials is a conductor? C. 7.6 ×107 A m−2
A. Rubber D. 5.6 ×108 A m−2
B. Plastic 78. Crane has a strong attached to it.
C. Glass A. Artificial magnets
D. Copper B. Electromagnets
74. Six identical cells, each of emf of 6V, are C. Magnets
connected in parallel, The net emf across D. none of above
the battery is
A. 6V 79. The length of four wires A, B, C and D
are 30 cm, 20 cm, 10 cm, and 5 cm, re-
B. 36V
spectively. Which of the following has the
C. 0 V maximum resistance, provided all other
D. Between 6v and 36 v conditions are the same?
A. A
75. Which of these is an example of current
electricity? B. B
A. Placing a lightning rod on the roof of a C. C
house to attract lightning D. D
B. Rubbing a plastic pipe with a piece of
wool to attract small pieces of paper 80. Which part of a circuit starts and stops the
flow of electrical current?
C. Building a circuit using copper wire
and a D cell battery A. battery
D. Using a sheet of fabric softner in the B. light bulb

dryer to help reduce static cling C. wire
76. Select the correct statement: D. switch
A. The current in parallel resistors is al- 81. In the equation I = V/R, I stands for
ways equal.
A. potential difference
B. The current is the same across resis-
B. current
tors connected in series.
C. The sum of the currents in a closed C. resistance
loop is zero. D. none of above

82. The two types of current are 88. The amount of charge flowing through a
A. AC/DC cross-sectional area of a wire per unit of
time is called:

B. Alternating Current
A. Voltage
C. Direct Current
B. Power
D. All of the above
C. Resistance
83. The fuse in a circuit melts when: D. Work
A. An appliance isn’t earthed E. Current
B. Too much current flows
89. Unscramble the word”HOTCR”
C. Too much voltage flows
A. ORTHC
D. none of above
B. OHRCT
84. If current flow in a bulb is 1.5A. What is
C. CRHTO
the charge flow in 5 minutes?
D. TORCH
A. 4.5x10exp-2 C
B. 4.5x10exp-2 A 90. What would have to happen for an atom
C. 2.4x10exp-2 C to become negatively charged?
D. 2.4x10exp-2 A A. Gain protons

B. Gain electrons
85. In electroplating, the object to be electro-
plated is made C. Lose protons
A. anode D. Lose electrons
B. cathode 91. What is The Law of Conservation of
C. none Charge?
D. both A. The strength of the force is determined
by the size of the charge.
86. What is the unit of power?
B. Electric charge can neither be created
A. Ohms nor destroyed
B. Volts C. There is an opposite and equal force
C. Amps to all charges
D. Watts D. Electric charge is transferred and
transformed
87. As the diameter of a wire increases, the
resistance of the wire will 92. Current density formula is
A. increase A. Electric Current per unit length
B. decrease B. Electric Current per unit area
C. stay the same C. Electric Current per unit volume
D. none of above D. None of above

93. What instrument is used to measure C. the capacitance of a unit cross-

the electric current that flows through a sectional area per unit length of the mate-
wire? rial
A. voltmeter D. the resistance of a unit cross-sectional
B. galvanometer area per unit length of the material
C. ammeter 99. The flow of electrons is counted and is
D. electric meter referred to as the
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. in quantities, ampere
94. If the current through a circuit is 2 A and
the resistance of a light bulb in the circuit B. in quantities, SI unit
is 10 Ohms, what is the voltage difference C. one by one, ampere
across the light bulb?
D. one by one, SI unit
A. 5 V
B. 12 V 100. Which of the following is NOT a conduc-
tor?
C. 0.2 V
A. Wood
D. 20 V
B. Wire
95. As the resistance of a circuit increases, the
C. Metal
current will
D. Water
A. increase
B. decrease 101. When electric current is passed through
C. stay the same a conducting solution, there is a change of
colour of the solution. This indicates
D. none of above
A. the chemical effect of current.
96. A car battery is an example of a cell. B. the heating effect of current
A. dry
C. the magnetic effect of current.
B. wet
D. the lightning effect of current.
C. no
102. The tendency for a material to oppose the
D. none of above
flow of electrons is called
97. What is the SI unit of electric current? A. voltage
A. Watts B. resistance
B. Voltage C. current
C. Joules D. none of above
D. Ampere
103. How do you calculate resistance?
98. Resistivity is defined as
A. Divide voltage by current
A. the capacitance of a unit length per
B. Divide charge by current
unit cross-sectional area of the material
B. the resistance of a unit length per unit C. Multiply current by voltage
cross-sectional area of the material D. Multiply voltage and current

104. Materials that are not metals, such as 109. The free electrons are responsible for
glass, plastic, wood, and Styrofoam are
A. Resistance

B. Free electron
A. conductors
C. Element
B. brittle
D. Electrical current
C. insulators
D. resistors 110. The resistance for the heater of an elec-
tric oven is 40 Ω . What is the current
105. If the power source was set on 4.0 V and flowing through the oven when it is con-
there was 1 light bulb, what would the nected to a 240 V electricity supply?
voltage be across the light bulb?
A. 0.167A
A. 4.0 V
B. 6.00A
B. 2.0 V
C. 9600A
C. 1.0 V
D. not sure
D. 0.0 V
111. When the wire length increased, the elec-
106. A simple device used for making and tric current
breaking the electric circuit is called
A. Increases
A. electric cell
B. Decreases
B. electric generator
C. Stays the Same
C. electric wire
D. Stops
D. electric switch
112. During a lab a balloon was rubbed with a
107. What would the circuit resistance be if a wooly fabric. This is an example of which
7.5 Amp draw was present with the en- type of charging?
gine running and the charging system pro-
A. conduction
ducing 15 Volts
B. friction
A. 15 Ohms
C. induction
B. 4 Ohms
D. none of above
C. 0.3333 Ohms
D. 2 Ohms 113. What is the function of a power source in
a circuit?
108. Shorter wire offers resistance com-
A. It provides a steady source of static
pared to longer wire of the same diame-
electricity.
ter.
B. It provides a means through which the
A. more
circuit can be broken.
B. less
C. It provides a path along which the elec-
C. equal tricity can flow.
D. none of above D. It provides a steady flow of electrons.

114. Two resistors, R1 and R2 are connected 119. In the U.S most electrical outlets supply
in SERIES. If R2 > R1 , which among the a voltage of
statements is TRUE about the electric cur-
A. 240 Volts
rents that passes thru each resistor?
B. 120 Volts
A. I1 > I2
C. 100 watts
B. I1 = I2
D. 60 amps
C. I1 < I2
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. none of above 120. What is an electrical circuit?
A. a whole bunch of wires
115. Which of these below would prevent the
flow of electricity? B. a broken path that electric charges can
flow
A. Copper wire
C. a circuit board
B. Screwdriver with plastic handle
D. a complete, unbroken path through
C. Metal rod
which electric charges flow
D. Puddle of water
121. Which quantity describes the measure of
116. A lit lightbulb is an example of the of the rate of delivery of electrical energy, or
electrical energy to another forms of en- the rate of work done by an electrical com-
ergy ponent?
A. movement A. Voltage
B. conversion B. Electric Current
C. transfer C. Electric Resistance
D. fluctuation D. Electrical Power
117. The tendency of a material to oppose the 122. A car battery causes a current of 4.0A
flow of electrons is called through a lamp and produces 12V across
it. What is the power used by the lamp?
A. current
A. 48 W
B. potential difference
B. 1/3 W
C. resistance
C. 3 W
D. power
D. 3/4 W
118. What is the definition of electrical cur-
rent? 123. two objects with opposite charges will
move towards each other
A. The opposition to the flow of electrons
A. attract
B. The rate of flow of charge
B. repel (repulsion)
C. The work done on each coulomb of
charge C. conduct
D. Electrons moving around D. insulate

124. Electrical current DOES NOT flow in 129. Combination of 2 or more cells
A. an open circuit A. Button cell

B. a closed circuit B. Battery
C. an electromagnet C. Electric cell
D. a complete circuit D. Truck battery
130. What type of circuit is the most effi-

125. How does rubber differ from most met-
cient?
als?
A. Combination circuit
A. Rubber is a good conductor, most met-
als are good insulators. B. Series circuit
B. Rubber conducts electrons; most met- C. Parallel circuit
als conduct protons. D. Isometric circuit
C. Rubber is a good insulator; most met- 131. The current flowing through the resistor
als are good conductors. is 3A. How much charge flows through the
D. Rubber is a good power source; most resistor in 4s?
metals are good conductors. A. 1.33 C
126. Which material(s) offer least resis- B. 7.00 C
tance? C. 12.0 C
A. Copper D. not sure
B. Nichrome 132. A kilowatt-hour is a unit of
C. Tungsten A. Power
D. none of above B. Resistance
127. A material that does not allow heat or C. Current

electrons to move through it easily. D. Energy
A. Insulator 133. Current flow requires a(n) and a(n)
B. Induction
C. Conductor A. potential difference / circuit breaker
D. Calculator B. static charge / switch
C. solar cell / generator
128. A conductor is?
D. potential difference / closed path
A. material that current can pass through
easily 134. What ‘flows’ in a wire?
B. material that current cannot pass A. Protons
through easily B. Neutrons
C. magnet C. Atoms
D. electric current D. Electrons

135. Why is static electricity not useful as a 140. The diameter of four wires A, B, C and
power source? D are 5 mm, 4 mm, 3 mm, and 2 mm, re-
A. Because electrons aren’t transferred spectively. Which of the following has the
in bursts of static electricity maximum resistance, provided all other
conditions are the same?
B. Because all energy is released at once
A. A
in static electricity.
B. B
C. Because static electricity is not a real
NARAYAN CHANGDER
form of electricity. C. C
D. Because static electricity only occurs D. D
in lightning.
141. The amount of charge that flows through
136. If an element has 6 protons, 7 neutrons, a component in 5 minutes is 600 C. What
and 6 electrons, what type of charge does is the current through the component?
the element have? A. 0.5 A
A. positive B. 2 A
B. negative C. 120 A
C. neutral D. 3000 A
D. imaginary 142. Resistance is
137. In a series circuit, which of the following A. What “slows down” electrons
is the same throughout the circuit? B. What “speeds up” electrons
A. Resistance C. Moving electrons
B. Voltage D. What “pushes” electrons
C. Current 143. Electrons flow in a circuit from
D. Power A. A high to a low electrical potential
138. If two 10-ohm resistors are connected B. A low to a high electrical potential
in parallel, what is the total resistance of C. From a positive to a negative potential
these resistors?
A. 100 ohms D. none of above
B. 20 ohms 144. The direction of current flow is taken
C. 5 ohms from
D. 1 ohm A. negative to positive terminal
B. Positive to negative terminal
139. All of the following can be picked up by a
magnet EXCEPT: C. Both
A. aluminum D. none of above
B. cobalt 145. Thin metal wire inside the electric bulb
C. nickel A. Fiber
D. iron B. Terminal

C. Filament 151. Defining tungsten

D. none of above A. a very hard grey metallic element with

a very high melting point
146. Quantity of charge can be measured in B. the wire inside the glass case is made
A. time (s) of tungsten
B. Ampere (A) C. functional bulb
C. coulombs (C) D. happy bulb
D. Joule (J) 152. Closed path in which current flows is
called a
147. As the resistance of a circuit increases,
A. path
the current will
B. current
A. increase
C. circuit
B. decrease
D. none of above
C. stay the same
153. The strength of an electromagnet can be
D. none of above
increased by
148. How much CURRENT does a 1200 W A. increasing the number of turns of con-
bread maker draw from a 110 V outlet? ducting wires
A. 132000 amps B. decreasing the number of turns
B. 0.09 amps C. decreasing the strength of current
C. 1200 amps D. all of the options
D. 10.9 amps 154. Which of the following affects resis-

tance?
149. One way to prevent overloading in your A. length
home circuit is to
B. cross sectional area
A. operate fewer devices at the same
time. C. material
D. all of the above
B. change the wiring from parallel to se-
ries for troublesome devices. 155. What is one volt equal to?
C. find a way to bypass the fuse or circuit A. 1 j/c
breaker. B. 2 j/c
D. All of these C. 3 j/c
150. he drift speed of electrons that make up D. 4 j/c
current in a circuit is 156. The force between charged objects
A. near the speed of light. A. Electric Force
B. near the speed of sound. B. Electric Field
C. about a snail’s pace. C. Electron
D. imaginary. D. Electricity

157. The terminal of a dry cell identifies 163. What is the amount of energy a source
the location of the carbon rod. uses to move one coulomb of electrons
A. + through a circuit?
B. - A. Voltage
C. 0 B. Attraction
D. none of above
C. Magnetic
158. A(n) is a closed, or complete, path in
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. Electric Resistance
which an electric current flows.
A. electric current 164. Which is NOT an insulator?
B. electric circuit A. Rubber
B. Wood
D. potential difference
C. Glass
159. The movement of electrically charged par-
ticles is D. Copper
A. electric current
165. Which device is used to convert ac to a
B. electric circuit fairly steady dc?
A. Diode
D. none of above
B. Capacitor
160. a method of giving electricity the most
effect way to return to ground, usually C. Both of these.
through a wire or grid D. None of these.
A. conduction
B. friction 166. Which of the following is NOT a good con-
ductor?
C. induction
D. grounding A. aluminum
161. If the voltage remains the same and re- B. mica

sistance is increased, current will C. silver
A. Increase
D. copper
B. Decrease
C. remains the same 167. is defined as the property of a con-
D. Not enough info ductor by virtue of which it opposes the
flow of electric current through it.
162. What is electricity?
A. Resistance
A. Flow of atoms
B. Capacity
B. Resistor
C. Insulator C. Inductance
D. Flow of electric charge D. Voltage

168. Electrons passing through a lamp C. particles, current

some potential energy as they light the
D. ions, transport
lamp.

A. gain 174. What is the SI unit for Electric Current?
B. lose A. a
C. share B. A
D. none of above
C. v
169. Who invented MAGNETIC EFFECT OF D. V
ELECTRIC CURRENT?
A. Hans Zimmer 175. Which of these are the applications of
electrolysis?
B. Hans Christian Oersted
C. Hans Christian Andersen A. Metal Extraction
D. none of above B. Electroplating

C. Electrorefining
170. A negatively charged object has electrons
with potential energy to move and do D. All these
work than an object that is neutral.
A. more 176. The amount of heat in a wire depends on
B. less A. Length
C. the same B. Material
D. none of above C. Capacity
171. How is electricity able to pass through D. Both length and material
the wire in an electromagnetic? E. All of these
A. the wire is a conductor
177. Connection of more than one device/ ap-
B. the wire is a source
pliance to a single socket is called-
C. the wire is a device
A. Overloading
D. none of above
B. Short circuit
172. The opposition to electron movement
C. Both
A. Voltage
D. none of above
B. Static electricity
C. current 178. A form of energy caused by the move-
ment of electrons
D. Resistance
A. electricity
173. The movement of electrically charged
is called electric B. voltage
A. particles, transport C. electric current
B. ions, current D. parallel circuit

179. What is the advantage of having a safety 184. Electroplating is not done for which of the
switch or fuse in the electric circuits of following reasons?
your house?
A. To increase the beauty of jewellery
A. Safety switches break the circuit when
B. To save metals from rusting
there is no fault
C. To make metals easily react to gases
B. Safety switches switch the electrical
current D. None of the above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. It prevents the circuit from overheat-
185. What are the three components of a cir-
ing and starting the fire
cuit?
D. Fuses are fused together with electri-
A. Pathway, source, and battery.
cal wires
B. Energy source, conductor, and re-
180. What variable is a Coulomb the unit for? ceiver.
A. Charge C. Battery, bulb, and plastic.
B. Force D. Wire, electron, and charge.
C. Distance
186. What is the symbol for the SI unit for Elec-
D. Mass tric Current?
181. is the potential difference across the A. a
terminals of a dry cell when the switch is B. A
open.
C. v
A. Emf
D. V
B. Terminal potential difference
C. Lost volt 187. Which of the following represents the
rate of the flow of electricity, expressed
D. Work
in unit of amps?
182. The continuous flow of electric charges A. current
through a material
B. circuit
A. Electron
C. voltage
B. Electric Force
D. resistance
C. Electric Field
D. Electric Current 188. When 110 volts are impressed across a
22-ohm resistor, the current in the resis-
183. What characteristics impact resistance of tor is a) 5 A. b) 10 A. c) 132 A. d) 2420
a material? A.
A. Thickness A. 5 A.
B. Temperature B. 10 A.
C. Length C. 132 A.
D. All of these D. 2420 A.

189. AC A. conductor
A. Voltage and current that change. B. insulator

B. Steady voltage and current. C. ground
C. A system or a machine that treats air D. spark
in a defined, usually enclosed area via a
refrigeration cycle. 195. Which statement best describes static
D. Voltage and current that does not Electricity?
change A. It is caused by positively charged par-
190. If I were to try to connect the North pole ticles that flow.
of one magnet to the North pole of another B. It is caused by separating positively or
magnet, the two poles would: negatively charged particles
A. attract C. It is caused by only negatively charged
B. repel particles on a surface.
C. neither D. It is caused by positively and neg-
D. none of above atively charged particles gathered to-
gether.
191. Battery cells are connected in series to
196. A series circuit has path(s) that the
electric current can take.
A. Increase voltage output
B. Decrease voltage output A. One
C. Increase current capacity B. Two
D. Decrease current capacity C. Three
192. What are the two poles of a magnet D. Four

called?
197. What is a current?
A. Up and down
A. A steady flow of electricity.
B. East and west
B. A short burst of electricity
C. Left and right
C. A wire along which electricity flows.
D. North and South
D. A power source that supplies electric-
193. Voltage is a measure of the between ity.
two places.
A. resistance potential 198. What happens if you disconnect a circuit
from its positive terminal?
B. potential differnce
C. current flow A. The electrons shoot out from the neg-
ative terminal
D. none of above
B. The electrons stop flowing, and the
194. a material whose internal electric charges current stops
do not flow freely; very little electric cur-
C. The current reverses direction
rent will flow through it under the influ-
ence of an electric field. D. Nothing happens

199. Voltage is simply defined as 205. How much current flows through a wire
A. what ‘pushes’ electrons moving 100 C of charge in 2 minutes?
B. what ‘stops’ electrons A. 50 A
C. moving electrons B. 0.83 A
D. none of above C. 200 A

D. 0.02 A
200. Electric current is calculated by
206. A circuit with 3 resistors in series, R1
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. dividing charge by time
= 10 Ohms, R2 = 30 Ohms and R3 =20
B. multiplying potential difference by Ohms. What is the total resistance?
charge
A. 30 Ohms
C. dividing work by charge
B. 50 Ohms
D. multiplying power by potential differ-
C. 60 Ohms
ence
D. 100 Ohms
201. In solid conductors, electric current is the
flow of 207. The complete path through which an elec-
tric current is flowing is called
A. positive and negative charges
A. Open circuit
B. electrons
B. Closed circuit
C. negative ions
C. Both
D. protons
D. none of above
202. Copper has resistance to electron
flow than aluminum. 208. When current is switched on in an elec-
tric bell, it converts energy into
A. higher
energy.
B. lower
A. Electrical, light
C. the same
B. Electrical, sound
D. none of above
C. Electrical, heat
203. The unit for resistance is D. Mechanical, sound
A. volts
209. Apply heat to a copper wire and the re-
B. ampere sistance of the wire
C. ohms A. decreases.
D. watts B. remains unchanged.
204. The flow of electrons through a wire or C. increases.
any conductor is called D. vanishes with enough heat.
A. current 210. This is related to the force that causes
B. a circuit electric charges to flow
C. flood A. Voltage
D. none of above B. Current

C. Resistance D. none of above

D. Circuit
216. What is the symbol used for amperes

211. A closed path through which electrons can (amps)?
flow is A. A
A. voltage
B. B
B. a circuit
C. W
C. circus
D. V
D. none of above
212. If you double both the current and the 217. The opposition to the flow of electrons
voltage in a circuit, the power a) remains A. current
unchanged if resistance remains constant.
b) halves. c) doubles. d) quadruples. B. resistance
A. remains unchanged if resistance re- C. voltage

mains constant. D. power
B. halves.
218. Kirchhoff’s loop rule is a statement of
C. doubles.
D. quadruples. A. the law of conservation of momentum.
B. the law of conservation of charge.
213. Kirchoff’s Current law is also known as
the law of conservation of energy. C. the law of conservation of energy.
A. YES IT IS D. the law of conservation of ohms.
B. Is it?
219. Firemen shut off the electricity supply
C. NO MAN for the area before using water hoses to
D. Only the God knows douse a fire. Why?
214. What is the current in a circuit with 6 A. To prevent the fireman from being elec-
ohms of resistance and a battery contain- trocuted because ordinary water is a con-
ing 24 Volts? ductor electricity
A. 1/4 A B. To prevent electrical devices from be-
B. 144 A ing spoilt.
C. 4 A C. To reduce electricity usage

D. 0.4 A D. To prevent the fire from spreading
215. What is voltage difference? 220. To have a complete electric circuit, the
A. push/pull that causes charges to move path must be
and is measured in volts A. small
B. electrical pressure that pushes and B. closed
pulls charges
C. big
C. continuous flow of charges through a
conductor D. open

221. Name the instrument used to measure ac- B. electric circuit

curately emf of a cell. C. electric current
A. Voltmeter D. negative terminal
B. Ammeter
227. Resistance is measured in units called
C. Potentiometer
A. volts
D. Galvanometer
B. ohms
E. Multimeter
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. amperes
222. Unscramble the word “SNTEUNTG” D. none of above
A. GETUNSTN
228. Surrounding every magnet is a
B. NGNESTUT
A. magnetic field
C. TUNGSTEN
B. electrical current
D. SHTBFDK
C. another magnet
223. Which of the following aluminum wires D. none of above
would have the greatest resistance?
A. 3 cm in length and 2 cm in diameter 229. A material in which electrons are not able
to move easily
B. 6 cm in length and 2 cm in diameter
A. Circuit
C. 9 cm in length and 2 cm in diameter
B. Insulator
D. 12 cm in length and 2 cm in diameter
C. Resistance
224. Potentiometer consist of D. Conductor
A. a piece of resistance wire
230. instrument which transfers energy to
B. a fixed resistor with high resistance electric charges in a circuit is
value
A. battery
C. 2 variable resistors
B. voltmeter
D. 3 batteries
C. ammeter
225. The safety device used for electrical ap- D. galvanometer
pliances is
A. fuse 231. The resistance of a wire decreases with
an increase in its
B. resistance
A. length
C. connecting wire
B. temperature
D. none of these
C. length and temperature
226. When the source of electricity, such as D. diameter
cell, bulb and wires join together in a way
that the current can flow along a closed 232. A material that does NOT let electricity
loop is known as pass through it is called
A. positive terminal A. An electrical conductor

B. An electrical insulator 238. What happens to the current in a parallel

C. An electrical source circuit?

D. An electric appliance A. The current stays the same
B. The current is added
233. Which resistor will prevent the most cur-
rent flow? C. The current is reduced
A. 1 ohm D. The current is split between the light
bulbs
B. 100 ohms
C. 1000 ohms 239. Ohm’s Law is a mathematical equation
that describes the relationship between
D. 0.5k ohms
what three values?
234. A lamp with a current of 10 A connected A. voltage
to 120 volts consumes a power of
B. mass
A. 10 W.
C. current
B. 12 W.
D. resistance
C. 120 W
D. 1200 W. 240. When you double the voltage in a simple
electric circuit, you double the
235. Why is it better to use a light-emitting
A. current.
diode (LED) rather than a light bulb when
testing the electrical conductivity liquids? B. resistance.
A. An LED glows even when a weak elec- C. Both of these.
tric current flows in a circuit
D. None of these.
B. LEDs do not melt even when a high
electric current flows in a circuit 241. Electric power is related to
C. LEDs are environment friendly A. current in component
D. LEDs are cheap B. potential difference
236. A flow of electrons through a conductor C. electrical resistance

is called: D. both current in component and poten-
A. A river tial difference
B. A spark 242. Select the true statments
C. An electron flow A. Thomas Edison is the first one who sug-
D. A current gested usnig DC in household electricity.
237. When the switch is closed, the light B. Nikola Tesla is the first one who sug-
gested usnig AC in household electricity
A. comes on
C. Nikola Tesla is the first one who sug-
B. stays off gested usnig DC in household electricity.
C. burns out D. Thomas Edison is the first one who sug-
D. none of above gested usnig AC in house hold electricity

243. A path that is made for an electric current B. parallel circuit

is? C. series circuit
A. Static electricity D. open circuit
B. conductor
249. What is an electric circuit with only one
C. A circuit closed path of an electric current to fol-
D. resistor low?
A. Series Circuit
NARAYAN CHANGDER
244. When you turn off the TV, you stop the
flow of charged B. Parallel Circuit
A. particles C. Electromagnet
B. amperes D. Voltage
C. voltages 250. To complete a circuit the switch must be

D. ohms A. unattached
B. open
245. In a Whetstone’s bridge, all the four arms
have equal resistance R. If resistance of C. closed
thegalvanometer arm is also R, then equiv- D. none of above
alent resistance of the combination is
251. An electric current that has constant mag-
A. R nitude and direction over time is known as
B. 2R a(n)
C. R/2 A. direct current
D. R/4 B. alternating current
C. simple current
246. DC current is found in , which means
the current flows in direction D. none of above
A. Batteries, one 252. Define:Static Electricity
B. Wall outlet, one A. a stationary electric charge built up on
C. Batteries, both an insulating material
D. Wall outlet, both B. the force field created by electrons
C. when two objects are attracted to
247. A combination of 2 or more cells is called each other
a?
D. the charging of an object by the con-
A. Electric cell tact of a charged object to a neutral ob-
B. Battery ject.
C. None of these 253. A coulomb is the charge carried by 6.24
D. All of these electrons.
A. million
248. When there is only one path for electrons
to move through it is called a When one B. billion
light goes out, they all go out. C. billion billion
A. closed circuit D. none of above

254. “The sum of all voltage drops in a series 260. the tendency for a material to oppose the
circuit equals the total applied voltage.” flow of electrons
This can be correctly related to A. current

A. Ohm’s Law B. circuit
B. Kirchhoff’s Second Law C. resistance
C. Kirchhoff’s First Law D. difference
D. Coulomb’s Law
261. The potential difference between the two
255. Dimensional form holes in a wall socket is
A. M −1 L−3 T 3 A2 A. 12 volts
B. M 1 L−3 T 3 A2 B. 60 volts
C. M −1 L3 T 3 A2 C. 120 volts
D. M −1 L−3 T −3 A2 D. none of above
256. The continuous flow of electrons is 262. When a current flows into a wire, such as
a wire that connects a battery to a light,
A. Current the wire stays electrically
B. Static electricity A. unbalanced
C. Voltage B. charged
D. Resistance C. neutral
257. Kirchhoff’s 1st Law (Junction Rule) is a D. uncharged
consequence of the law of conservation of
263. Choose the parts of the bulb
A. Energy
A. inert gas
B. Charge
B. filament
C. Momentum C. metal casing
D. Power D. electric wire
258. How many children madam? E. glass case
A. 1 264. The amount of “push” available to move
B. 2 electrons is
C. 3 A. Current
D. 4 B. Resistance
E. 5 C. Voltage
D. Static Electricity
259. In a circuit with two lamps in parallel, if
the current in one lamp is 2 amperes, the 265. What travels at about the speed of light
current in the battery is in an electric circuit?
A. half, 1 A. A. Electric charges
B. 2 A. B. Electric current
C. more than 2 A. C. Electric field
D. Not enough information to say. D. All of these.

266. Positively charged electrode is called 272. Voltage is measured in

A. Cathode A. volts.
B. Anode B. watts.
C. Cation C. coulombs.
D. Anion D. none of above
267. Devices in a parallel circuit receive 273. In a metre bridge experiment, resistance
box (withR = 2ohm) is connected in the
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. equal current but different voltage
left gap andthe unknown resistance S in
B. equal voltage but different current the right gap. If balancing length be 40
C. equal voltage and equal current cm, calculate value of S.
D. different voltage and different current A. 2 ohm
B. 3 ohm
268. A flash of lightning is an example of an
electric C. 4 ohm
A. watt D. 2.5 ohm
B. voltage 274. If the potential difference across a resis-
C. current tor is 5.0 Vand the current through it is 1.5
A. What’s the resistance in the circuit?
D. resistance
A. 0.33 ohms
269. a flow of electric charge
B. 3.3 ohms
A. static electricity
C. 7.5 ohms
B. electrical field
D. 5.7 ohms
C. electric current
275. When a switch is open
D. electrical charge
A. the circuit is working and gives energy
270. APA FULL NAME MADAM?
B. the circuit is broken and charges can-
A. NOR AZAH BINTI MAT ZALI not flow
B. NOR AZAH BINTI MOHD ZALI C. the circuit is turning lights on
C. NOOR AZAH BINTI MAT ZALI D. I don’t know ask Ms. Cednick
D. NOOR AZAH BINTI MOHD ZALI 276. The amount of current in a circuit depends
271. What is the function of a dry cell? on the
A. A conductor that connect the compo- A. voltage across the circuit.
nents together. B. electrical resistance of the circuit. c
B. A method of opening or closing the cir- C. Both of these.
cuit. D. None of these.
C. A source of electromotive force that
drives electric charges around the circuit. 277. Voltmeter should always have a
D. A load in which moving charges can do A. high resistance

a useful job. B. low resistance

C. low reading C. Hard Drive

D. high reading D. Junkyard Magnet

278. Ammeter should always have a E. Refrigerator Magnet
A. high resistance 284. What quantity describes the opposition
B. low resistance to the flow of electrons in an electrical cir-
C. low voltage cuit?
D. high voltage A. Voltage
B. Electric Current
279. Resistance of a conductor depends upon-
A. Length of conductor C. Electric Resistance
B. Cross sectional area of conductor D. Electrical Power

C. Resistivity of material 285. When too much electric current flows
D. All of the above through an object, the object can heat up.
What might this cause?
280. What is the current if 7 Coulombs of
charge flow in 60 seconds? A. your computer will turn on
A. 0.117 A B. a fire
B. 420 A C. the circuit to open
C. 67 A D. carry information from the brain
D. 8.6 A
286. Which is a conductor?
281. Voltage is A. Rubber
A. the number of occurrences of a repeat- B. Wood
ing event per unit of time.
C. Glass
B. The electric potential difference.
D. Copper
C. Time needed for one complete cycle of
vibration to pass in a given point. 287. What is the SI unit for power?
D. The flow of electrons through a com-
A. watts
plete path.
B. amps
282. DC stands for
C. joules
A. The capital of the US
D. ohms
B. Unknown
C. Direct current 288. If the Voltage stays the same and Resis-
D. directly currency tance is increased, Current will
A. Increase
283. Select all the examples of an electromag-
net. B. Decrease
A. Speaker C. Stay the same
B. Motor D. Not enough info

289. If a circuit has 12 amps of current and the C. ions.

resistance is 20 ohms, the applied voltage D. All or any of these.
is
A. 120V 295. The difference between dc and ac in elec-
trical circuits is that in dc the electrons a)
B. 240V flow steadily in one direction only. b) flow
C. 270V in one direction only. c) steadily flow to
D. 380V and fro. d) flow to and fro.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. flow steadily in one direction only.
290. What is a formula to calculate Current
B. flow in one direction only.
A. I=q/t
C. steadily flow to and fro.
B. I=q*t
D. flow to and fro.
C. I =V*R
296. In a series circuit, which of the following
D. I = R/V
will vary based on the resistor?
291. Which of the following appliances does A. Power
not use the heating effect of current?
B. Voltage
A. electric heater C. Current
B. electric bell D. None of the above
C. electric geyser
297. During discharging, potential difference
D. electric bulb across a cell is
292. Every working circuit has at least three A. E
parts:1) a power source, 2) a conductor, B. E+ir
usually wire and 3)
C. E-ir
A. insulator
D. Either option 2 or option 3.
B. an object that uses electric current like
a light bulb 298. filament of a bulb is usually made up of
C. series circuit A. nickel
D. rock B. chromium
C. cobalt
293. If the current increases it could be be-
cause of D. tungsten
A. increasing voltage 299. All of the follow are true EXCEPT
B. decreasing resistance A. Electric current can pass through your
C. both body.
D. none of above B. Electricity can cause burns and in-
juries.
294. The electric current in a copper wire is nor- C. power cords are made of plastic cov-
mally composed of ered in metal.
A. electrons. D. The heat from electrical current can
B. protons. damage the insulation on wires.

300. Which equation defines Ohm’s Law? C. 50 J

A. V=IV D. 1250 J

B. R=VI
306. The heating effect of an electric current is
C. I=VR used in
D. V=IR A. Hair dryer
301. two objects with the same charge will B. A fan
move away from each other
C. A computer
A. attraction
D. none of above
B. repel (repulsion)
C. conduct 307. What is the resistance of a light bulb that
has 3 A flow through when it is placed
D. insulate across 9 V?
302. Substances through which electric A. 1/3 ohms
charges flow easily are called
B. 3 ohms
A. Wire
C. 27 ohms
B. Metal
D. 9 ohms
C. Conductors
D. Insulators 308. Volts are used as a unit of measure for
which concept?
303. current consisting of charges that move
A. Power
back and forth in a circuit
B. Voltage
A. alternating current
B. direct current C. Resistance
C. parallel current D. Current

D. electric current 309. When the wire temperature increased,
the electric current
304. Positively charged ions are called
A. Increased
A. Cation
B. Anion B. Decreased
C. Cathode C. Stayed the same

D. Anode D. Stopped
305. The potential difference across a compo- 310. A closed loop through which electrical
nent is 50 V, and the charge that flows charges can move
through the component is 25 C. What A. circuit
is the work done to drive these charges
through? B. resistor
A. 0.5 J C. fuse
B. 2 J D. circuit breaker

311. The materials that do not allow electric 316. A battery is also known as a
current to pass through them are called A. resistor
A. dynamo B. dry cell
B. sorry i don’t know C. switch
C. insultors D. none of above
D. conductors
317. A resistor of 5ohm is connected in series
NARAYAN CHANGDER
312. A student is building a circuit that will with two other resistors that is connected
convert electrical energy into light energy. in parrallel, each has 3ohm resistance. Cal-
What materials does the student need to culate the effective resistance for this com-
complete his circuit? bination of resistors.
A. Wire, battery, and bulb A. 60ohm
B. Battery, switch, and wire B. 12ohm

C. 6.5ohm
C. Switch, bulb, and battery
D. 13.45ohm
D. Bulb, wire, and switch
318. A voltmeter is described as a device that
313. Drift velocity vd varies with the intensity
can be used to measure
of electric field in the relation
A. Voltage
A. inversely proportional to E
B. Current
B. directly proportional to E
C. Resistance
C. remains constant with E
D. Power
D. directly proportional to E 2
319. A combination of two or more cells is
314. What runs on fuel such as diesel? called ( )
A. generator A. Battery
B. please wait let me go check the text B. A Button cell
book
C. An Electric cell
C. inert gas D. Truck Battery
D. tungsten
E. dynamo or electric generator ergy per charge between two places is
called
315. To receive an electric shock there must be
A. resistance
A. current in one direction.
B. friction
B. moisture in the electrical device being
used. C. induction
C. a difference in potential across part or D. voltage

all of the body.
321. Wires made from some special materials
D. high voltage and low body resistance. melt quickly and break when large electric

currents are passed through them. These B. the resistance of a unit length per unit
wires are used for making ? cross-sectional area of the material

A. Electric switch C. the capacitance of a unit cross-
B. Electric bulb sectional area per unit length of the mate-
rial
C. Electric shock
D. the resistance of a unit cross-sectional
D. Electric fuses area per unit length of the material
322. An atom gains an electron. What type of 327. We use to measure potential differ-
charge does it have now? ence.
A. positive A. voltmeter
B. negative B. ammeter
C. No charge C. ohmmeter
D. none of above D. rheostat
323. Defining electric cell 328. What is a common energy source for a
A. has a metal cap, which is the positive circuit?
terminal and a metal base, which is the A. A battery
negative terminal
B. A bulb
B. doesn’t have a metal cap, which is the
C. A wire
positive terminal and a metal base, which
is the negative terminal D. A appliance
C. a simple device used for making and 329. Select the right statments related to re-
breaking the electric circuit sistance
D. one sec my mom is there beside me so A. Ohm is the SI unit
let me ask her
B. It is the measure of how difficult it is
324. The energy within a battery is called for electric current to pass through a con-
ducter.
A. voltage
C. R is the SI unit
B. circuit
D. It is the measure of how difficult it is
C. filament
for electric voltage to pass through a con-
D. conductor ducter.
325. Unit for resistance 330. Suppose that a 1.5 V power supply is
A. Ampere used in a circuit with a lone 25 Ω resistor.
What would be the magnitude of the elec-
B. Ohm trical power dissipated by the resistor in
C. Volt this circuit?
D. Watt A. 0.09 W
326. Resistivity is B. 16.67 W
A. the capacitance of a unit length per C. 37.50 W

unit cross-sectional area of the material D. 56.25 W

331. Bonus Question:who made this quiz? 337. Which of the following processes pro-
A. Bashayer Faisal duces energy in cells?
B. Mariam Khalid A. Electric reaction

C. Shahad Alnaqbi B. Chemical reaction
D. Sara Alnaqbi C. Thermal reaction
D. Nuclear reaction
332. An electric bell works on the effect of
NARAYAN CHANGDER
electric current.
338. Electrical potential in all parts of a cir-
A. electric cuit.
B. heating A. varies
C. magnetic B. is the same
D. chemical C. is not
333. Electric current can flow through D. none of above
A. mercury
339. A bulb that lights up when it is switched
B. wood on
C. graphite A. electric cell
D. PVC(polivinyl chloride) B. bulb
E. human body C. torch
334. A common household device, that do not D. battery
use an electromagnet in its working, is-
E. switch
A. The electric bell
B. Geyser 340. ampere of current is defined as
C. Telephone A. one coulomb of current passing

through the surface area in one second.
D. Loud speaker
B. one coulomb of charge passing
335. If the voltage stays the same, but the re- through the conductor in one second
sistance goes up, the current will
C. one coulomb of charge passing
A. increase (speed up) through the surface area in one second
B. decrease (slow down) D. one coulomb of currrent passing
C. stay the same through the conductor in one second.
D. none of above
341. What is the name of the force that at-
336. allows electricity to flow. tracts or repels materials?
A. A conductor A. current
B. An insulator B. magnetism
C. A magnet C. electricity

342. An ampere is measured in 348. An electric current flows unless it is

A. milliseconds disrupted in some way
A. continuously

B. seconds
B. in spurts
C. minutes
C. unevenly
D. hours
D. drop by drop
343. Electric power is defined as,
A. the rate of conversion of temperature ergy between two places in a circuit is
B. the rate of conversion of current called
C. the rate of conversion of electric en- A. resistance
ergy B. friction
D. none of the above C. induction
D. voltage
344. Which are the components required for
the circuit? 350. Unit for current is
A. Switch A. ohm
B. Dollar bill B. ampere
C. Conducting wires C. volt
D. Cell/ battery D. watt
E. Bulb 351. A tiny, negatively charged particle that
moves around the nucleus of an atom.
345. An electric current that continually re-
A. Electron
verses direction over time is known as a(n)
B. Protron
A. direct current
C. Neutron
B. alternating current
D. Electricity
C. simple current
352. Rate of flow of electric charge is
D. none of above
A. electric current
346. Resistance is measured in B. conventional current only
A. watts. C. electronic current only
B. amps. D. potential difference
C. ohms. 353. A toaster oven is plugged into an outlet
D. none of above that provides a voltage difference of 120
V. What power does the oven use if the
347. What is electric current? current is 10 A?
A. A flow of electric charges A. 0.083 W
B. static electricity B. 1200 W
C. two objects repelling from each other C. 12 W
D. batteries D. 130 W

354. Which of the following is NOT a formula 360. Current flows through the circuit when
for calculating the electrical power dissi- the circuit is in the condition. ( )
pated by a resistor in a circuit?
A. Broken
A. P = V I
B. P = V2 B. Closed
R
I2 C. Open
C. P = R
D. P = I2R D. Incomplete
NARAYAN CHANGDER
355. What is the unit for current?
361. Calculate the quantity of charge, Q, ob-
A. Amps tained when a current of 25 amps runs for
B. Voltage 1 minute
C. Ohms A. Q = 1, 800 C
B. Q = 1, 500 C
356. Current is measured in
C. Q = 1000 C
A. amperes
B. ohms D. Q = 3000 C
C. volts
362. The conductivity of copper is 6.0
D. seconds ×107 Ω−1 m−1 . The free electron den-
357. What is the equation used to calculate sity copper is 8.45 ×1028 m−3 . Estimate
Ohm’s Law? the mean time between collisions of free
electrons and positive ions in copper.
A. I=v/r
B. v=i*r A. 2.52 ×10−14 s
C. V=1 j/c B. 4.04 ×10−33 s
D. both A & B C. 4.04 ×10−14 s
358. A light circuit is operating at 75 Volts. D. 7.10 ×10−22 s
What is the circuit’s current if the resis-
tance is 5 Ohms?
363. A student is planning to make changes to
A. 375 Amps a circuit. Which change will increase the
B. 50 Amps voltage?
C. 15 Amps A. Add another lightbulb between the bat-
D. 0.07 Amps tery and the switch.
359. Which component of a circuit converts B. Add another switch between the light-
chemical energy into electrical energy? bulb and the battery
A. electric cell C. Remove the existing lightbulb from the
B. electric bell circuit.
C. connecting wire D. Replace the existing battery with a
D. electric switch larger battery

364. Rate at which electrical energy is con- 370. The flow of charge in an electric circuit is
verted to heat, light, mechanical work etc much
is called

A. like the flow of water in a system of
A. Potential Difference pipes.
B. Electric Current B. different than water flow in pipes.
C. Electric Power C. like an electric valve.
D. Resistance D. like an electric pump
365. What are the 2 poles of a magnet? 371. Joe set up an electrical circuit to deter-
A. south and west mine whether certain materials would con-
duct electricity. Which of these items
B. north and east would complete Joe’s circuit?
C. north and south A. A metal pin
D. none of above B. A plastic bag
366. What does an ammeter measure? C. A rubber ball
A. Current D. A wooden block
B. Voltage 372. When current is switched ‘on’ of a bulb
C. Resistance it converts energy into energy.
D. none of above A. Electrical, heat
B. Electrical, light
367. Which mark is necessary on electric appli-
ances? C. Electrical, mechanical
A. AGMARK D. Electrical, sound
B. ISI 373. If Georgia Power charges $0.0712/kWhr,
C. FICCI how much would it cost to run a 9 kW
garage heater for 3 days (72 hours)?
D. CFL
A. $1.92
368. What is the shape of the magnet used in
B. $46.14
an electric bell?
C. $0.21
A. cylindrical
D. $0.01
B. bar
C. horseshoe 374. What does power mean?
D. square A. Joules transferred per second
B. Electron flow per second
369. Which of the following states the correct
flow of electron flow in a circuit? C. Speed of electrons
A. positive to positive terminal D. Electron energy
B. positive to negative terminal 375. What is the symbol used with volts
C. negative to positive terminal A. V
D. negative to negative terminal B. A

C. T 381. A wire of 10 ohm resistance is stretched

D. W to thrice its original length . Calculate the
new resistivity
376. Choose the correct answer A. 3 times
A. bakelite, ebonite, impure water, pencil B. 9 times
lead
C. no change
B. plastic scale, plastic box, rubber pipe
D. 10
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. mica, wood, cotton, distilled water
D. I don’t care whether I get marks 382. Turning off an electric light creates a(n)
never mind path
E. PVC(polivinyl chloride), battery, A. open
eraser, silk B. divided
377. As the length of a wire increases, the re- C. continuous
sistance of the wire will D. broken
A. increase
383. Following “conventional current” in an
B. decrease electric circuit means
C. stay the same A. imagining positive charge carriers
D. none of above flowing from low potential to high poten-
tial
378. What device opens and closes an electric
B. imagining positive charge carriers
circuit?
flowing from high potential to low poten-
A. A switch tial
B. A power source C. the current is always defined as ex-
C. A load actly one ampere
D. A current D. the current always flows clockwise
379. Current consisting of charges that move 384. If the voltage stays the same and resis-
back and forth in a circuit is known as tance is increased, current will
A. alternating current A. Increase
B. direct current B. Decrease
C. parallel current C. Stay the same
D. electric current D. Not enough info
380. In most electrical circuits, the pathway is 385. If too much electric current passes
made of: through a circuit, the wires can
A. Metal A. make batteries
B. Plastic B. cool down
C. Static C. conductor
D. Wood D. overheat

386. Which of the following have zero resis- 391. Kirchhoff’s II law for the electric network
tance below critical temperatures? is based on:

A. Conductors A. Law of conservation of charge
B. Superconductors B. Law of conservation of energy
C. Semiconductors C. Law of conservation of angular mo-
mentum
D. Insulators
D. Law of conservation of mass
387. How much charge must pass by a point in
392. Devices in a series circuit receive
10 s for the current to be 0.50 A?
A. Equal current but different voltage
A. 0.05C
B. Equal voltage but different current
B. 5.0C
C. Equal voltage and equal current
C. 20C
D. different voltage and different current
D. 2.0C
393. What are the factors that affect resis-
388. In a dry cell, the carbon rod releases elec- tance?
trons and becomes the terminal. A. Surface area, Concentration and Tem-
A. positive perature
B. negative B. Length, Thickness (cross-sectional
area), Temperature, Material
C. neutral
C. Pressure and temperature
D. none of above
D. Material and pressure
389. We use alloy for making of resistors, be-
394. An electric current flowing in one direc-
cause they have
tion only
A. Temp. coefficient Resistivity(a) Low
A. voltage
low
B. parallel current
B. High High
C. direct current
C. High LOW
D. electric current
D. Low High
395. Which of these lamps is the longer lasting
390. Why voltage is important? in a common circuit?
A. Because it is the pressure that causes A. Incandescent lamp
the electrons to move around in a circuit B. Compact fluorescent lamp
and make the current flow and make ap-
C. Light-emitting diode
pliances work
D. All about the same.
B. To supply energy to be able to make
the current flow in electric circuit and 396. What is the formula for to calculate volt-
make appliances work age difference?
C. To control the resistance in the circuit A. I=v/r
D. To reduce the current in the circuit B. V=I*r

C. V=1 j/c 402. The resistance of a wire increases with

D. none of above an increase in its
A. length
397. Suppose that a 1.5 V power supply is
B. temperature
used in a circuit with a lone 25 Ω resis-
tor. What would be the magnitude of the C. length and temperature
electric current flowing in this circuit? D. diameter
A. 37.5 A 403. Find the odd one
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. 26.5 A A. Silver
C. 16.67 A B. Copper
D. 0.06 A C. Bakelite
398. Our body is a of electricity? D. none of above
A. Conductor 404. Electric wires are made up of plastic be-

cause
B. Insulator
A. they do not burn
C. None of these
B. they look so cute
D. none of above
C. they are kind
399. Kirchhoff’s 2nd Law (Loop Rule) is a con- D. they burn
sequence of the law of conservation of
405. a region around a charged object where
A. Energy
the object’s electric force is exerted on
B. Charge other charged objects
C. Momentum A. Electron
D. Power B. Electric Force
C. Electric Field
400. The amount of energy used to move a
of electrons through the circuit is the D. Electric Current
of an electric energy source. (choose two)
406. In an electrolytic cell, the electrode which
A. Hertz is connected to the positive terminal of the
B. coulomb battery is called:
A. cation
C. voltage
B. anion
D. watt
C. cathode
401. Kirchhoff’s junction rule is a statement of D. anode
407. What is the total resistance of a 5 ohm,

A. the law of conservation of momentum.
10 ohm, and 15 ohm resistor hooked up in
B. the law of conservation of energy. PARALLEL?
C. the law of conservation of charge. A. 10 ohms
D. the law of ohms. B. 0.5 ohms

C. 30 ohms 413. This circuit has only one pathway for the
D. 2.7 ohms electric charges to flow.

A. Parallel Circuit
408. A coil refers to
B. Open Circuit
A. fuse
C. Short Circuit
B. an electric wire
D. Series Circuit
C. wire twisted in the form of a circle
D. none of these 414. What can be reason for one sided deflec-
tion in a potentiometer experiment?
409. Electrons flow from areas of poten-
tial energy to areas of potential en- A. Emf of a cell in the primary circuit may
ergy. be less than that in secondary circuit
A. higher, lower B. Cells in the primary and secondary cir-

cuit are connected with opposite termi-
B. lower, higher nals
C. higher, higher
C. connections may be loose
D. lower, lower
D. length of the wire may be too long
410. What size resistor would produce a cur-
rent flow of 5 Amps with a battery volt- 415. Two resistors, R1 and R2 are connected
age of 12.6 volts in SERIES. If R2 > R1 , which among the
statements is TRUE about the voltage that
A. 60 Ohms is used up by each resistor?
B. 2.52 Ohms A. V1 > V2
C. 1.71 ohms
B. V1 = V2
D. 5.04 Ohms
C. V1 < V2
411. The movement of electrons from atom to D. none of above
atom in a line results in a flow of
A. amperage. 416. An example of a conductor is:
B. electric current. A. a glass paperweight
C. electromagnetic connectors. B. a plastic cap
D. none of above C. a metal screw
412. The following are the use of potentiome- D. a wooden handle

ter EXCEPT
417. the charging of an object through rubbing.
A. measure the length of a wire
A. friction
B. compare the emfs of two cells
B. induction
C. measure an unknown emf of a cell
C. conduction
D. measure the internal resistance of a
cell D. neutralization

418. When you buy a water pipe in a hard- A. 1154 K

ware store, the water isn’t included. B. 1100 K
When you buy copper wire, electrons
C. 1400 K
A. must be supplied by you, just as water
D. 1127 K
must be supplied for a water pipe.
B. are already in the wire. 423. What is the use of a potentiometer?
C. may fall out, which is why wires are in- A. 1. comparison of emf’s of two primary
cells
NARAYAN CHANGDER
sulated.
B. 2. finding internal resistance of a cell
D. None of these.
C. 3. can be used as a variable resistor
419. Based on Ohm’s law, which of the follow- D. 1 & 2
ing statements explains what must hap-
pen when the voltage across a resistor is E. 1, 2 & 3
decreased? 424. Which of these can supply current to an
A. The current through the resistor in- electrical circuit?
creases. A. A battery
B. The resistance of the resistor de- B. A light bulb
creases. C. A switch
C. The resistance of the resistor in- D. Wire
creases.
425. Conventional current in a DC circuit flows
D. The current through the resistor de-
from the
creases.
A. Positive side of the battery to the neg-
420. Thin wires have resistance compared ative side of the battery
to thick wires of the same length. B. negative side of the battery to the pos-
A. more itive side of the battery
B. less C. No way to determine
C. equal D. none of above
D. none of above 426. What are the two ends of a battery
called?
421. Current in a circuit when a charge of 180
C passes a point in a circuit in2 minutes is A. south and north
B. positive and negative
A. 1:00 AM
C. Santa and Reindeer
B. 2:00 AM
D. none of above
C. 3:00 AM
427. The device used to make or break an elec-
D. 1.5 A
tric circuit is
422. The temperature coefficient of resistance A. Resistors
of a wire is 0.00125 per degree celsius .
B. Battery
At 300 K temperature its resistance is 1
ohm. The resistance of the wire will be 2 C. Switch
ohm at: D. Ammeter

428. Current does not flow through the circuit 434. Materials that cut down or resist the
when the circuit is in the condition. flow of charges are called?

A. Closed A. conductor
B. No change
B. insulator
C. Open
C. resistor
D. All of the above
D. circut
429. Current is measured with
A. an ammeter 435. Which of the following is not a safety de-
B. a voltmeter vice in a circuit?
C. an electroscope A. Fuse
D. none of above B. Circuit Breaker
430. What effect do electrons flowing through C. Resistor
a resistor have on the resistor.
D. Ground Wire
A. make it glow
B. reduce it’s resistance 436. The potential difference between the two
ends of the wires is equal to the
C. increase it’s resistance
D. heat it up A. resistance
431. What quantity describes the rate of flow B. energy source current
of charges or the total amount of charges C. Potential difference between the two
moving past a point in a conductor? terminals of the battery
A. Voltage
D. the parallel end of the component
B. Electric Current
C. Electric Resistance 437. Which of the following has the greatest
resistance?
D. Electrical Power
A. long, thin wires
432. If a current of 1 A passes through a point
in 1 s then charge passes thatpoint is B. Short, thick wires
A. 2 C C. long, thick wires
B. 3 C D. short, thin wires
C. 1 C
D. 6 C 438. When a negatively charged object is used
to charge a neutral object, the neutral ob-
433. The resistivity of superconductor at the ject will
critical temperature is
A. remain neutral
A. infinity
B. become positive
B. very small
C. zero C. become negative
D. unknown D. none of above

439. A material that conducts heat well. 2. 444. The internal resistance of a cell is the re-
A material that allows electric charges to sistance of
flow. A. Material used in the cell
A. Conductor B. Electrolyte used in the cell
B. Insulator C. Electrodes of the cell
C. Instructor D. vessel of the cell
D. Calculator
NARAYAN CHANGDER
445. The movement of electrically charged par-
440. Unit for electric power is ticles is known as
A. electric current
A. amperes
B. electric circuit
B. ohms
C. volts
D. none of above
D. watts
446. Which type of electricity moves along a
441. Within a circuit, the number of electrons pathway to make a light turn on?
flowing from a power source is the
number of returning to the source A. Static electricity
B. Lightning electricity
A. much less than, paths
C. Turbine electricity
B. the same as, electrons
D. Current electricity
C. much less than, electrons
D. the same as, paths 447. All things have a natural tendency to
move
442. Electrons flow only in A. from high potential energy to low po-
A. series ciruits tential energy.
B. parallel circuits B. from low potential energy to high po-

tential energy.
C. closed circuits
C. from medium potential energy to low
D. open circuits potential energy.
443. Wheat Stone Bridge experiment is most D. not at all unless someone pushes on it.
sensitive, when:
448. Electric charge will flow in an electric cir-
A. :All four resistances are approxi- cuit when
mately equal A. electrical resistance is low enough.
B. One of the resistances is very high as B. a potential difference exists.
compare to others
C. the circuit is grounded.
C. One of the resistances is very low as
compare to others D. electrical devices in the circuit are not
D. Any two resistances are equal to infin- 449. In the analogy of ‘flow of river’ for ‘flow
ity. of current’, which of following quantities

is represented by ‘height of the moun- 455. In the equation, I = V/R, I ex expressed

tains’? in

A. Current A. ohms
B. Potential
B. amperes
C. Resistance
D. Charge C. volts
450. The current in a circuit is measured in D. none of above
A. volts
456. The symbol for 1 is A
B. amperes
C. ohms A. acceleration
D. none of above B. current
451. Also known as ‘electric potential differ- C. ampere

ence’, what quantity describes electrical
D. coulomb
potential energy per coulomb of charge in
a circuit?
457. Unsramble the word “GEVIETNA MTLIN-
A. Voltage
TREA”
B. Electric Current
A. TERMALIN GANETIVE
C. Electric Resistance
D. Electrical Power B. NEGATIVE TERMINAL
452. The resistance of a conductor does not de- C. LANIMRET EVITAGEN

pends up on
D. TERNEGAI MINALTVE
A. its dimensions
B. the nature of the material it is made up 458. Which word means how hard it is for elec-
of trons to flow?
C. its temperature A. Current
D. its colour
B. Voltage
453. Potential difference is measured in
C. Resistance
A. volts
B. amperes D. Power
C. ohms
459. how many types of resistors are needed
D. none of above in the wheatstone bridge?
454. Fuse works based on the A. 1
A. heating effect of electric current
B. 2
B. magnetic effect of electric current
C. Lighting effect of electric current C. 3
D. none of above D. 4

460. A student is planning to make changes to 465. What causes the shock youreceive when
a circuit. Which change will increase the you touch adoorknob?
resistance? A. Electrons being pulled from one sur-
A. Replace the wire with one that is face to another
longer. B. Protons being pulled from one surface
B. Replace the wire with one that is to another
shorter. C. Neutrons being pulled from one sur-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. Swap the positions of the battery and face to another
the switch. D. Positrons being pulled from one sur-
D. Swap the positions of the lightbulb and face to another
the switch. 466. LED stands for
461. Which of the following materials is an A. Light Emission Diode
electrical conductor? B. Light Emitting Diode
A. Silver spoon C. Light Electric Diode
B. Silver-colored plastic spoon D. none of above
C. cooper spoon 467. The rate at which charges flow is called
D. wooden spoon A. current
462. Thin wires have resistance to electron B. flow
flow than do thicker wires. C. circuit
A. greater D. none of above
B. lesser 468. According to Ohm’s Law,
C. the same A. I = V/R
D. none of above B. V = I/R
463. Injuries from electric shock may include C. R = V*I
which of the following? Select 2 answers D. none of above
A. Thermal burns 469. A buildup of charges on an object.
B. Cardiac arrest A. Static Electricity
C. Hypothermia B. Conductor
D. Indigestion C. Inductor
464. What size resistor would produce a 3 D. Electric Current

Amp current flow with a 12 Volt battery 470. Resistance is measured in what unit?
A. 1 Ohm A. ohms
B. 3 Ohms B. amps
C. 4 Ohms C. watts
D. 12 Ohms D. volts

471. What measures current? C. Current electricity would become

A. Electroscope static electricity.

B. Meter D. The circuit would be broken.
C. Ammeter 477. Which of the following liquids conduct
D. All of the above electricity?
A. Distilled water
472. What is static electricity?
B. Milk
A. build up of charges that pass QUICKLY
to another object C. Salt solution
B. build up of charges that pass SLOWLY D. Both a and b
to another object
478. What is voltage?
A. The amount of electric potential en-
D. none of above
ergy per one coulomb of charge
473. In order for a circuit to work you need to B. The amount of 1 coulomb of charge per
have unit of potential energy
A. A voltage source C. The number of volts per coulomb
B. A complete pathway with no breaks in D. The amount of electric potential en-
the circuit ergy per volt
C. A resistor
479. Ken wanted to make a light bulb glow.
D. A voltage source and a complete path- Which set of materials would he need?
way with no breaks in the circuit
A. Paper cup, paper clip, and a popsicle
474. Current is stick
A. moving protons B. battery, wire, and light bulb
B. moving electrons C. Button, cell battery, and rubber glove
C. measured in volts D. cell battery, paper, and bulb
D. measured in ohms
480. What is a switch’s function in a circuit?
475. One watt is equal to, A. to make the current hotter or colder
A. one meter per second B. turn on and off the flow of current
B. one Joule per second C. the pathway that current flows
C. One ampere per second D. to add more power to the circuit
D. one farad per second
481. When the switch is on and the bulb
476. What might happen if wires weren’t in- doesn’t glow, what do you call?
sulated?
A. smart bulb
A. The power source would no longer pro-
B. bulb that doesn’t glow
vide a flow of electrons.
B. We’d be in danger of harm from elec- C. filament problem bulb
tric shocks. D. fused bulb

482. The equation I = V/R mathematically ex- 487. Which type of elements make up semicon-
presses ductors?
A. Ohm’s law A. Metals
B. current law B. Non-metals
C. Newton’s law C. Metalloids
D. none of above D. Noble Gases
NARAYAN CHANGDER
483. Lets start with an easy one . A combina-
488. A circuit has more than one loop. When
tion of 2 or more cells is known as
one light goes out, the others stay on.
A. an electric cell What type of circuit matches the descrip-
B. a battery tion?
C. a switch A. closed circuit
D. a bulb B. series circuit

C. parallel circuit
484. The algebraic sum of voltages around any
closed path in a network is equal to D. open circuit
A. Infinity
489. If the power source was set on 4.0V and
B. 1 there were 1 lights, what would the volt-
C. 0 age be across the light?
D. Negative Polarity A. 4.0 V

B. 2.0 V
485. find the incorrect statement.
C. 1.0 V
A. Closed circuit means a complete elec-
trical connection around which current D. 0.0 V
flows or circulates.
490. What is the power consumed by a 25
B. A key or a switch can be placed only at
ohm resistor when it carries a current of
a specific place in a circuit
3.0 A?
C. Never touch a lighted electric bulb con-
A. 225 W
nected to the mains .
D. one reason for excessive currents in B. 1875 W
electrical circuits is the direct touching of C. 75 W
wires
D. 0.36 W
486. heating effect of electric current is used
in 491. Electric can travel long distances
A. checking temperature A. circuits

B. pan B. currents
C. room heaters C. amperes
D. none of the above D. voltages

492. Electric potential difference is 497. What does lightning have in common
with theshock you receive when you touch
A. the product of kinetic energy and
a doorknob?

charge
A. They both involve protons being pulled
B. the product of potential energy and
away fromatoms
charge
B. They’re both forms of static electricity
C. the change in kinetic energy per unit of
charge C. They’re both forms of current electric-
ity
D. the change in potential energy per unit
of charge D. Neither of them has anything to do
with electricity
493. When an electric current flows through a
498. Which of these materials is an insulator?
conducting solution, it can produce which
of the following effects? A. glass
A. Bubbles of gas on the electrodes B. aluminum
B. Deposits of metal on the electrodes C. copper
C. A change in the colour of the solution D. steel
D. All the above. 499. Which of the following is most

ecofriendly?
494. WHo discovered the magnetic effect of
A. Incandescent bulb
current?
B. LED
A. Galileo Galilei
C. CFL
B. Newton
D. none of above
C. Marconi
D. H C Oersted 500. Why is a bulb brighter when it is pow-
ered by two batteries rather than one?
495. Which one of the following is based on A. Because the flow of electricity in the
the heating effect of current? circuit is less
A. Geyser B. Because the flow of electricity in the
circuit is the same
B. Hair dryer
C. Because the flow of electricity in the
C. Immersion rod
circuit is greater
D. All of these
D. Because the flow of electricity will go
backward
496. Which of the following is property of ma-
terial 501. A car battery is an example of a
A. Resistivity A. wet cell
B. Resistance B. dry cell
C. Both C. jail cell
D. None D. none of above

3.2 Electric potential 274
502. Energy transformations occur when cur- B. electric current

rent flows through a circuit that has
A. voltage D. coulomb
3.2 Electric potential

1. What is 1 volt equivalent to? B. 3.2 x 10-19 J
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. 1J/C C. 3.2 x 10-16 J
B. 1C/J D. 1.6 x 10-14 J
C. 1A/s
6. Suppose an electric potential is given as
D. 1J/V V(x, y, z) = 3x2 + xy + z in volts. Which of
the following is magnitude of electric field
2. How much kinetic energy will be gained by
at (3, 1, 0)?
an α particle in going from a point at 70
V to another point at 50 V A. 21
A. 40eV B. 22
B. 40KeV C. 0
C. 40MeV D. 18
D. 0eV
7. The electric potential at a distance r from a
3. Calculate the current when 100 micro am- positive point charge is 45 V. The potential
pere flows in a circuit i 1 milli second? increases to 50 V when the distance from
the charge decreases by 1.5 m. What is
A. 10 A
the value of r?
B. 1A
A. 1.3 m
C. .1 A
B. 1.5 m
D. .01 A
C. 7.9 m
4. A 2-C charge experiences a force of 40 D. 15 m
N when put at a certain location in space.
The electric field at that location is . 8. A repulsive force exists between which
A. 2 N/C. two particles?
B. 20 N/C A. Two neutrons
C. 30 N/C. B. An electron and a neutron
D. 40 N/C. C. An electron and a proton
D. Two electrons
5. Two protons, each with a charge of 1.6 x
10-19 C, are 2.0 x 10-5 m apart. What 9. Two capacitors C1= 3 µ F and C2 = 6 µ F
is the change in electrical potential energy arranged in series are connected in paral-
between the charges? lel with a third capacitor C3 = 4 µ F. The
A. 1.1 x 10-23 J arrangement is connected to a 6V battery.

Calculate the total energy stored in the ca- 14. The expression for Electric potential due to
pacitors. a point charge at a distance ‘r’ from it is

A. 108 x 10-6 J
1 q2
A. 4πε r
B. 10.8 x 10-6 J 0
1 q
C. 1.08 x 10-6 J B. 4πε 0 r
1 q2
D. 108 x 10-7 J C. 4πε 0 r2
1 q
10. Two parallel plates are oppositely charged. D. 4πε 0 r2
The right plate is negative and the left
15. If an electron moves from point P to Q in
plate is positive. In which direction does
an electric field, point P will have po-
the electric field point?
tential.
A. to the left
A. higher
B. to the right B. lower
C. up C. zero
D. down D. none of above
11. Suppose the magnitude of a charge placed 16. It is a property of a charged object, by
in a field were doubled. How much would virtue of its location in an electric field.
the electric potential energy change?
A. Electric Potential
A. It would double B. Electric Potential Energy
B. It would decrease by half C. Potential Energy
C. It would have no effect D. none of above
D. It would quadruple
17. The earth can receive as well as give out
12. What is the energy given off by a 20V bulb quite a number of
which has 10C passing through it? A. protons
A. 200J B. electrons
B. 2J C. neutrons
C. 0.5J D. none of above
D. 250J 18. The physical quantity whose S.I. unit is
coulomb/volt is
13. In the direction of an electric field line,
which of the following must be true? A. Electric field intensity
B. Electric potential
A. the electric field strength must in-
crease C. Capacitance
B. the electric field strength must de- D. Dipole moment
crease
19. The magnitude of polarisation vector is
C. the potential must increase given by
D. the potential must decrease A. P = χo E

B. P = χo E 2 24. What is the voltage across the plates of

the capacitor if the capacitance is 10 uF
C. P = χo2 E
and the Charge stored is 30 uC?
χo
D. P = E A. 0.333 V
20. In their Physics lesson, Yagami find it dif- B. 3 V
ficult to understand the problem. Help him C. 300 V
answer the following problem:How much
work is required to move a-700uC charge D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
across a potential difference of 100V?
25. Which is a characteristic of most electrical
A. W = 0.70J conductors?
B. W = 0.07J A. They can be cut easily.
C. W = 0.7J B. Positive charges move easily through
them.
D. W = 0.007J
C. Negative charges move easily through
21. Three charges 2q, -q, -q are located at the them.
vertices of an equilateral triangle. At the D. They are soft and flexible.
centre of the triangle
A. The field is zero but potential is non- 26. assume a rubber rod is rubbed against a
zero rabbit fur and gains 5 electrons. which of
the following is true?
B. Both field and potential are zero
A. The fur lost 5 electrons
C. Both field and potential are non-zero
B. the fur gained 5 electrons
D. The field is non-zero but potential is
C. the fur gained 5 protons
zero
D. The fur lost 5 protons
22. Which of the following is not the correct
expression for the energy stored in a ca- 27. The diagram shows the field lines in a re-
pacitor. gion of an electric field created by a pos-
itive charge.Which one of the following
A. U = 12 CV 2 statements is correct? When moving from
B. U = Q2 X to Y
2C
1 A. the electric potential is constant.
C. U = 2 QV
1 2
B. the electric potential increases.
D. U = 2C V
C. the electric potential decreases.
23. An electron has charge-e and mass me . A D. the electric potential changes from
proton has charge e and mass 1840 me . positive to negative.
A “proton volt” is equal to:
28. what is the meaning of “Electric Dipole”?
A. 1eV
A. Two equal point charges Q, of same
B. 1840eV
signs, separated by a distance “d”
C. (1/1840)eV
B. Two equal point charges Q, of opposite,
D. sqrt(1840)eV separated by a distance “d”

C. Two unequal point charges Q, of oppo- 34. What is the symbol for Electric Potential
site, separated by a distance “d” Energy?

D. Two unequal point charges Q, of oppo- A. V
site, stick together.
B. Va
29. In batteries, energy is stored in the form C. U
of
D. none of above
A. kinetic energy
B. chemical potential energy 35. How much work does it take to transfer
0.15 C of charge through a potential dif-
C. electrical potential energy
ference of 9.0 v?
D. heat
A. W = 60 J
30. Electric field lines between two oppositely B. W=1.4 J
charged parallel metal plates will be
C. W = 0 N
A. straight lines, randomly spaced
D. W =-1.4 N
B. curved lines grouped together in small
bunches. randomly spaced. 36. Calculate the Electric Potential of a +7.8 x
C. straight lines, evenly spaced 109 C charge with Electric Potential Energy
of 750 J
D. curved lines, evenly spaced
A. 9.6 x 10-3 V
31. The term “joule per coulomb “ is the same
as B. 6.5 x 10-7 V
A. watt C. 8.7 x 109 V
B. ohm D. 9.6 x 10-8 V
C. volt 37. The electric field around an isolated elec-
D. none of above tron has a certain strength 1 cm from the
electron. The electric field strength 2 cm
32. Which subatomic particles have a positive from the electron is
charge?
A. half as much.
A. neutrons
B. the same.
B. electrons
C. protons C. twice as much.
D. none of above D. d. four times as much.
33. How is the capacitance (C) of a parallel- 38. Electric potential energy of an electric
plate capacitor affected by the charge on dipole in a uniform electric field is given
the plates? by
→
−
A. C depend on the charge on the plates A. U = → −p ×E
→
− −
B. C is vanished when there are plates B. U = E × →p
→
−
C. C does not depend on the charge on C. U = −→
−p .E
the plates ( −→)
→
−
p.E
D. C is accumulated on one side only D. U = − εo

39. An electron moves 4.5 m in the direction 44. work done in an equipotential surface is
of an electric field of strength 325 N/C. A. positive
Determine the change in electrical poten-
tial energy associated with the electron. B. negative
qe = 1.9x10−19 C. zero
A. 2.3x10−16 J D. none of above
B. 3.2x10−16 J
45. A region of influence surrounding an object
C. 4.3x10−16 J
NARAYAN CHANGDER
is best defined as:
D. 6.3x10−16 J A. An electric field
40. Electric field lines always point from B. A field

potential to potential C. A force
A. Higher, Lower D. A gravitational field
B. Lower, Higher 46. Electric potential difference is measured in:
C. Not enough information to determine A. V
D. none of above B. C
41. If you use 20 J of work to push a 2-C C. F
charge into an electric field, its voltage D. N/C
with respect to its starting position is
E. V or J/C
A. 10 V.
B. less than 10 V. 47. The ratio of the magnitude of charge on
one capacitor plate to the electric potential
C. more then 10 V. difference between the plates; the slope
D. none of above of the line of a net charge versus potential
difference graph.
42. One Coulomb charge is equivalent to the
A. Capacitance
charge contained in
B. Capacitor
A. 2.6 x 1019 elecrons
C. Electroscope
B. 6.2 x 1019 elecrons
D. Electrostatics
C. 2.65 x 1018 elecrons
D. 6.25 x 1018 elecrons 48. Electric potential as distance increases.
A. Increases
43. A charge of +1 Coulomb is moved through
a voltage difference equal to +600 Volts. B. Decreases
How much does its electric potential en- C. Remains Constant
ergy change?
D. Is 0
A. 0.00167 Joules
49. The electric potential due to a source point
B. 6 Volts charge can be solved using which for-
C. 600 Joules mula?
D. 100 Joules A. V = kq1q2/r2

B. V = kqs/r2 55. The correct expression for the capacitance

C. V = kqs/r of a parallel plate capacitor is
εo d

D. V = qsE A. C = A
εoV
B. C = Ad
50. The magnitude of electric potential is
εo A
at an infinite distance. C. C = d
εo
A. 0 D. C = Ad
B. negative infinity 56. If the charge on an metal sphere is doubled,
C. positive infinity the electric potential inside the sphere is
D. 200
A. doubled
51. An uncharged body has electric poten-
tial. B. quadrupled
A. no C. remains the same
B. volt D. none of above
C. infinite 57. A positive test charge of 5.0 x 10-6 C is in
D. none of above an electric field that exerts a force of 2.0
x 10-4 N on it. What is the magnitude of
52. Work done is independent of the taken the electric field at the location of the test
by the charge. charge?
A. path A. 0.4 N/C
B. method B. 4x101 N/C
C. force C. 1x10−9 N/C
D. none of above D. 1x109 N/C
53. Two spheres A and B of radius ‘a’ and ‘b’ 58. At point X which distance is r1 from a
respectively are at same electric potential. point charge, the electric potential is VX.
The ratio of the surface charge densities of At point Y which distance is r2 from the
A and B is same point charge, the electric potential is
a2 VY.How much work is done to bring a pro-
A. b2
b2
ton (with a charge of e) from point X to
B. a2 point Y in joules?
a
C. b A. e(VX-VY)
b
D. a B. e(VY-VX)
54. If each of the charges doubles, what hap- C. e(VX-VY)/r
pens to the electric force? D. e(VY-VX)/r
A. It quadruples
59. The ratio of the magnitude of charge on
B. It doubles one capacitor plate to the electric potential
C. It stays the same difference between the plates.
D. It is reduced by half A. Capacitor

B. Capacitance 64. As the resistance in a circuit increases, the

electric current
C. Voltage potential difference
A. increases
D. Volt
B. decreases
60. The work needed to move a positive test C. stays the same
charge from one point to another, divided
D. none of above
by the magnitude of the test charge.
65. Which one of the following statements
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. Equipotential
about electric field strength and electric po-
B. Electric potential difference tential is incorrect?
C. Electric field A. Electric potential is a scalar quantity.
D. Voltage B. Electric field strength is a vector quan-
tity.
61. A charge of 5 C experiences a force of C. Electric potential is zero whenever the
5000 N when it is kept in a uniform electric electric field strength is zero.
field. What is the potential difference be-
tween two points separated by a distance D. The potential gradient is proportional
of 1cm to the electric field strength.
A. 10 V 66. A material, such as glass, through which a

charge will not move easily.
B. 250 V
A. Insulator
C. 1000 V
B. Capacitor
D. 2500 V C. Grounding
62. The charge Q is midway between two D. Conductor
other charges (Each a distance of 10 cm 67. The electric lines of force are to the
away from the center.) If Q=-7.5 nC what equipotential surfaces.
must be the charge q1 so that charge q2
remains stationary as Q and q1 are held in A. parallel
place? B. perpendicular
A. 30 nC C. none of these
B. 7.5 nC D. none of above
C. 15 nC 68. When an electron (e =-1.6 x 10-19 C)

moves 0.10 m along the direction of an
D. 60 nC
electric field with a strength of 3.0 N/C,
what is the magnitude of the potential dif-
63. What is the electrical potential energy like
ference between the electron’s initial and
when same charges are far apart?
ending points?
A. high
A. 4.8 x 10-19 V
B. low B. 0.30 V
C. the same as when they are close C. 0.03 V
D. none of above D. 30 V

69. An object whose positive charges are ex- 74. A line that indicates the direction of the
actly balanced by its negative charges. force due to the electric field on a positive
test charge

A. Conductor
B. Neutral A. Electric fields
C. Coulomb’s Law B. Electric field lines
D. Insulator C. Equipotential
D. Electric potential difference
70. The potentials at points R and S due to the
+5.0 nC charge are 375 V and 450 V re- 75. The unit of electric potential difference;
spectively. How much work is done when equal to one joule per coulomb.
a +2.0 nC charge is moved from R to S?
A. Volt
A. 0.12 µ J
B. Coulomb
B. 0.15 µ J
C. Electrostatics
C. 0.19 µ J
D. Grounding
D. 0.38 µ J
76. The electrical force on a 2-C charge is 20
71. (1) Electric potential difference is mea-
N. What is the value of the electric field at
sured in
the location of the charge?
A. ampere
A. 2 N/C
B. watt
B. 10 N/C
C. volt
C. 20 N/C
D. none of above
D. 40 N/C
72. When work is done on a positive test
charge by an external force to move it 77. A positive charge of 1.5x10−8 C experi-
from one location to another, potential en- ences a force of 0.025 N to the left in an
ergy (increases, decreases) and elec- electric field. What is the magnitude of the
tric potential (increases, decreases). field? E = F/q’
A. increases, increases A. 1.7x106 N/C
B. increases, decreases B. 2.0x106 N/C
C. decreases, increases C. 3.4x106 N/C
D. decreases, decreases D. 1x106 N/C
73. A material, such as copper, through which 78. After you rub a balloon on your hair, the
a charge will move easily. balloon will likely be charged
A. Insulator A. to less than 10 volts.
B. Capacitor B. to several hundred volts.
C. Grounding C. to several thousand volts.
D. Conductor D. not at all.

79. What variable do Coulombs represent? 84. A proton has a velocity of 3, 000 m/s.
What is the difference in electric potential
A. Electrostatic Charge
needed to bring the proton to a complete
B. Force stop?
C. Distance A. +0.047 Volts
D. Mass B. +5, 124 Volts
C. -0.047 Volts
80. Inside a hollow charged spherical conduc-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. -5, 124 Volts
tor, the potential
85. An electron, initially at rest is accelerated
A. Varies directly as the distance from
through a potential difference of 450 V.
the centre
What is the speed of the electron due to
B. Varies inversely as the distance from this potential difference?
the centre A. 1.44x106 m/s
C. Varies inversely as the square of the B. 1.59x106 m/s
distance from the centre C. 18.7x106 m/s
D. Is constant D. 12.6x106 m/ s
81. The capacitance of a parallel-plate capaci- 86. Electric potential energy and Gravitational
tor can be increased by: potential energy are similar in the fact that
BOTH depend on
A. increasing the charge
A. mass
B. decreasing the charge
B. charge
C. increasing the plate separation C. position
D. decreasing the plate separation D. none of above
82. The process of removing excess charge by 87. Each of the following pairs of charges are
touching an object to Earth separated by a distance d. Which pair has
the highest potential energy?
A. Electrostatics
A. +5 C and +3 C
B. Charging by Conduction B. +5 C and-3 C
C. Grounding C. -5 C and-3 C
D. Equipotential D. -5 C and +3 C
E. All pairs have the same potential en-
83. The correct expression for the capacitance ergy.
of a parallel plate capacitor is filled with a
dielectric of dielectric constant κ 88. The electric potential difference between
two point can be also called
A. C = κ εAo d
A. resistance
B. C = κ εAd
oV
B. friction
εo
C. C = κ Ad C. induction
D. C = κ εodA D. voltage

89. Moving an electron within an electric field B. Increasing the strength of the charges
would change the the electron. C. Lowering the distance between

A. mass of charges
B. amount of charge on D. Adding more charges to the field
C. potential energy of
94. An electric field gets the closer it is to
D. none of above the charge
90. Two protons are released from rest, with A. Stronger
only the electrostatic force acting. Which B. Weaker
of the following statements is NOT true
about them as they move apart? C. Maximal
A. Their electric potential energy keeps D. Minimal

decreasing.
95. Electric current is measured in
B. Their electric potential energy keeps
A. Watts
increasing.
C. Their acceleration keeps decreasing. B. Volts
D. Their kinetic energy keeps increasing. C. Amperes

D. none of above
91. What is the unit for Electric Potential En-
ergy? 96. The unit (units) of electric field:
A. V A. V/m
B. J B. N/C
C. PE C. J/C
D. none of above D. N/V
92. Two oppositely charged particles are held
97. The electrical force between charges is
in place near each other. When the par-
strongest when the charges are
ticles are released, what will most likely
happen? A. close together
A. They will accelerate towards each B. far apart
other C. the electric force is constant every-
B. They will move towards each other at where.
a constant speed D. there is no pattern
C. They will accelerate away from each
other 98. A property of the space around a charged
object that exerts forces on other charged
D. They will move away from each other
objects
at a constant speed
A. Electric fields
93. Which of these options would make an
B. Electric field lines
electric field weaker?
A. Increasing the distance between C. Electric potential difference
charges D. Equipotential

99. A point charge Q is far from all other B. 600 V/m

charges. At a distance of 2 m from Q, the C. 200 V/m
electric field is 20 N/C. What is the force
a charge of 5 Coulombs feels? D. 400 V/m
A. 4 N 104. If the distance doubles, what happens to

B. 100 N the force?
A. Reduced by half
C. 40 N
B. Reduced by 1/4
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. 10 N
C. Stays the same
100. Two plates are 0.2 m apart, a poten-
D. Quadruples
tial difference of 10 V is applied between
them, the electric field between the plates 105. Two charged spheres of radii 10 cm and
is 15 cm are connected by a thin wire. No
A. 20 N/C current will flow, if they have
B. 50 N/C A. The same charge on each
C. 5 N/C B. The same energy
D. 250 N/C C. The same potential
D. The same field on their surfaces
101. A negatively charged particle revolves in
a clockwise direction around a positively 106. An electric dipole is placed at an angle
charged sphere. The work done on the neg- of 300 with an electric field of intensity
atively charged particle by the electric field 2x105 N/C. It experiences a torque equal
of the sphere is to 4 Nm. If the dipole length is 2cm, charge
A. zero. on the dipole is:-
B. negative A. 8mC
C. positive B. 4mC
C. 2µ C
D. none of above
D. 2mC
102. If a unit positive charge is taken from one
point to another over an equipotential sur- 107. a device used to store an electric charge,
face, then consisting of one or more pairs of conduc-
tors separated by an insulator.
A. Work is done on the charge
A. Conductor
B. Work is done by the charge
B. Capacitor
C. Work done is constant
C. Electroscope
D. No work is done
D. Insulator
103. In a region where the electric field is uni-
form and points in the +x direction, the 108. Direction of electric field is
electric potential is-2000 V at x = 8 m and A. From positive charge to negative
is +400 V at x = 2 m. What is the magni- charge
tude of the electric field? B. From charge negative to positive
A. 500 V/m charge

C. From higher potential to lower poten- E. drawn from low potential to high poten-
tial tial

D. From lower potential to higher poten- 114. Which of the following materials con-
tial ducts electricity the best?
109. In which cases (points) the electric poten- A. plastic
tial (V) = 0 B. rubber
A. When there are no charges in the re-
C. metal
gion.
D. glass
B. At Infinity. (r= Infinity)
C. At a point near + and-charges and 115. The Earth’s electric field creates a poten-
their potential cancel each other tial that increases 100 V for every meter
of altitude. If an object of charge +4.5 mC
D. At the midpoint of 2 positive charges.
and mass 68 g falls a distance of 1.0 m
110. Which is the correct formula for electric from rest under the influence of the Earth’s
potential difference? electric and gravitational fields, what is its
∆EPE final kinetic energy?
A. ∆V = qo
A. 0.22 J
B. ∆V = qo ∆EPE
qo B. 0.45 J
C. ∆V = ∆EPE
C. 0.67 J
D. ∆V = ∆EPE qo
D. 1.1 J
111. the potential difference of zero between
two or more positions in an electric field 116. Every proton in the universe is sur-
rounded by its own
A. Electrostatics
A. gravitational field
B. Grounding
B. electric field
C. Equipotential
C. both gravitational and electric field
D. Elementary Charge
112. The correct relationship between Capaci-
tance (C), charge (Q) and potential (V) is 117. What quantity remains the same every-
A. C=QV where between two parallel plates?
B. Q=CV A. Electric Field
C. V=QC B. Electric Potential
D. C=V/Q C. Electric Potential Energy

D. Speed
113. The electric field lines between two oppo-
sitely charge plates are mostly 118. Two capacitors having equal capacitance(
A. parallel say C), when connected in series have a
net capacitance C1 and when connected in
B. curved parallel have a net capacitance C2. What
C. 0 is the value of C1/C2?
D. repelling A. 4

B. 1/4 C. E = 8.7 x 10 2 C
C. 2 D. E = 8.7 x 10-2 N / C
D. 1/2 124. If two balloons have the same charge,
what will happen if you place them close
119. On an equipotential surface, the charges
to each other?
are
A. Nothing
A. moving
B. They will be attracted
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. stationary
C. They will pop
C. none of these
D. They will push each other away.
D. none of above
125. Calculate the work done in bring 10 C
120. If you use 17 J of work to push a charge charge across potential difference of 4 V?
into an electric field and then release the A. 80 J
charge, as the charge flies past its starting
B. 0.4 J
position, its kinetic energy is
C. 75 J
A. more than 17 J.
D. 40 J
B. less than 17 J.
126. Two charges, each of + 0.8 nC, are 40
C. 17 J.
mm apart. Point P is 40 mm from each of
D. none of above the charges.What is the electric potential
at P?
121. When a negative charge is moved from a
low potential to a point of high potential, A. zero
its potential energy B. 180 V
A. increases C. 360 V
B. decreases D. 4500 V
C. stays the same 127. A charge of 5 C experiences a force of
D. increases and then decreases 5000 N when it is kept in a uniform electric
field. What is the electric field between
122. The energy stored in the capacitor is two points separated by a distance of 0.2
equal to m
A. Q2/C A. 1000 N/C
B. CV/2 B. 3000 N/C
C. QV/2 C. 4000 N/C
D. Q2/2V D. 5000 N/C
123. Two parallel oppositely charged plates 128. An electrical device used to store electri-
are 5.1 cm apart.The potential difference, cal energy.
in volts, between the plates is 44.6 v.Find A. Capacitance
the electric field strength between them. B. Capacitor
A. E = 8.7 x 10 2 N.C C. Voltmeter
B. E = 8.7 x 10 2 N / C D. Equipotential

129. electric potential is expressed as 134. If an electron is brought towards another

electron, the electric potential energy of
A. V= q.Ue
the system

B. V= Eq
A. increases
C. V= Ed
B. decreases
D. V=Ue/E C. becomes zero
130. A device that is used to detect electric D. remain the same
charges and consists of a metal knob con-
135. Two charge +Q and-Q are situated at a
nected by a metal stem to two thin metal
certain distance. At the point exactly mid-
leaves.
way between them
A. Capacitor
A. Electric field and potential both are
B. Electroscope zero
C. Electric Field B. Electric field is zero but potential is not
D. Electric Field Line zero
C. Electric field is not zero but potential is
131. Which of the following is a polar zero
molecule?
D. Neither electric field nor potential is
A. H2 zero
B. Cl2 136. The electric potential at a distance of 4 m
C. O2 from a certain point charge is 200 V rela-
tive to infinity. What is the potential (rel-
D. HCl
ative to infinity) at a distance of 2 m from
132. How many volts are in a circuit with a the same charge?
battery that has a resistance of 10 Ohms A. 600 V
and a current of 2 Amps? B. 50 V
A. .5 Volts C. 200 V
B. 5 Volts D. 400 V
C. 20 Volts
137. How far from a charge of 1.0 micro-
D. none of above coulomb is a point with an electric poten-
tial value of 10KV?
133. The potential difference between two
A. 0.90m
points is 100 V. If a particle with a charge
of 2 C is transported from one of these B. 90m
points to the other, the magnitude of the C. 9000cm
work done is:
D. 0.9km
A. 200 J
138. The direction of electric field lines shows
B. 100 J
the
C. 50 J
A. direction of the force on a test positive
D. 2 J charge.

B. size of the field. 143. The energy that is stored in a capacitor

C. strength of the field. (parallel conducting plates) is in the form
of
D. all of the above
A. the current between its plates.
139. The electric field in a given region of B. the space between its plates.
space is defined by E(x) = 100 + 10x.
Which answer below best defines the elec- C. the electric field between its plates.
tric potential in this region of space? D. the battery between its plates.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. 10 Volts (Constant throughout the 144. If it takes 88.3 J of work to move 0.721
space) C of charge from a positive plate to a neg-
B. 100x Volts ative plate, what is the potential differ-
C. 100 Volts (Constant throughout the ence(voltage) between the plates?
space) A. V = 0 v
D. −100x − 5x2 Volts B. V = 1.22 v
140. A metal sphere having an excess of +5 el- C. V = 122 v

ementary charges has a net electric charge D. V = 150V
of
145. an electric potential at a point in space
A. 8.0 x 10-19 C exists if:
B. 8.0 x 1019 C A. there is a test charge at that point in
C. 1.6 x 10-19 C space
D. 5.0 x 10-19 C B. there is a source charge at that point
in space
141. The electric field lines between two
charges curve in space. The direction at C. there is a source charge/s nearby
a particular point on a curved line is the D. electric potentials never exist in space.
direction of the
146. Two identical positive point charges, P
A. strongest field. and Q, separated by a distance r, repel
B. average straight line joining the each other with a force F. If r is decreased
charges. so that the electrical potential energy of Q
C. resultant vector of the fields of the two is doubled, what is the force of repulsion?
charges at that point. A. 0.5 F
D. none of the above B. F
142. Calculate the force exerted between two C. 2F

charged objects separated by a distance of D. 4F
0.6 m. One object has a charge of-5 C and
the other has a charge of +2.0 C. 147. During a lightning discharge, 30 C of
charge move through a potential differ-
A. -1.5 x 10-11 N ence of 1.0 ‘ 108 V in 2.0 ‘ 10-2 s. The
B. 2.5 x 10-11 N energy released by this lightning bolt is:
C. -2.5 x 1011 N A. 1.5 ‘ 1011 J
D. -7.5 x 10-10 N B. 3.0 ‘ 109 J

C. 6.0 ‘ 107 J D. Changes

D. 3.3 ‘ 106 J 153. What is a closed path for electrons to

148. The correct expression for the energy flow through?
density is A. static electricity
A. u = 12 εo2 E B. circuit
1 E2 C. amperes
B. u = 2 εo
D. none of above
2 εo E
1 2
C. u =
1 εo
2
D. u = 154. Points in space that are closer to a more
2 E
positive region have a (higher/lower)
149. What did Millikan use a uniform electric electric potential than points in space
field between two parallel plates to mea- closer to a more negative region.
sure? A. higher
A. charge of an electron B. lower
B. electric fields near conductors
C. it doesn’t matter
C. the electric potential difference
D. none of above
caused by X-rays
D. the terminal velocity of a charged oil 155. The energy transferred per unit charge is
drop called
A. potential difference
150. Equal charges are given to two spheres
of different radii. The potential will B. current
A. Depend on the nature of the materials C. kinetic energy
of the spheres D. electrical energy
B. Be more on the bigger sphere
156. Which statements must be true about the
C. Be equal on both the spheres surface of a charged conductor in which no
D. Be more on the smaller sphere charge is moving?
A. The electric field is zero at the surface.
151. How do electric field lines represent the
magnitude of an electric field? B. The electric potential of the surface is
zero.
A. Length of the line
B. With arrows C. The electric potential is constant over
the surface.
C. Density of lines
D. The electric field is constant at the sur-
D. Width of lines face.
152. Along a line of equipotential the voltage 157. The distance between two charges dou-
bles at the same time that the charge on
A. Decreases along the line each also doubles. What happens to the
B. Is the same along the entire line electric force?
C. Is proportional to the area inside the A. Doubles

shape created by the line B. Quadruples

C. Cut in half C. the electric field between its plates.

D. No charge D. the battery between its plates.
158. When lighting happen, 25 C charge is 163. The magnitude of the charge of an elec-
transferred from could to the ground and tron; approximately 1.602 x 10-19 C.
1.25x1010 J energy is produced. Calcu- A. Charging by Conduction
late the potential difference within cloud
B. Elementary Charge
and the ground in unit Volt
C. Equipotential
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. 4.00 x 108
D. Electrostatics
B. 2.00 x 108
C. 3.00 x 108 164. is stored energy.
A. Potential Energy
D. 5.00 x 108
B. Kinetic Energy
159. An electric field strength of 10 N C-1 is
measured around a point charge at a dis-
tance of 10 cm. What is the electric field D. All of the above
strength around the same point charge at 165. Consider a parallel plate system with the
a distance of 20 cm away? top plate being positive and the bottom
A. 2.5 N C-1 negative. If I move a positive charge par-
B. 5.0 N C-1 allel to the top plate what happens to the
energy of the charge?
C. 20 N C-1
A. No effect
D. 40 N C-1
B. Kinetic Energy increases while Poten-
160. The relation between electric field and tial Energy decreases
electric potential is C. Kinetic Energy decreases while Poten-
A. E = dV.dr tial Energy increases
B. V = dE.dr D. Impossible to tell
C. V = − dE
dr 166. The SI unit of electric potential is
D. E = − dV
dr
A. Coulomb
B. Volts
161. If a current of 2 A passes through a point
in 3 s then charge passes thatpoint is C. Ampere
A. 2 C D. Ohms
B. 1 C 167. What is the magnitude of the electric

field at a position that is 1.2 m from
C. 3 C
a 4.2x10−6 C point charge? Note:k =
D. 6 C 9.0x109 N.m2 /C2
162. The energy that is stored in a capacitor is A. 2.6x104 N/C
in the form of B. 2.6x10−4 N/C
A. the current between its plates. C. 3.5x104 N/C
B. the space between its plates. D. 3.5x10−4 N/C

168. What is the electric field, E, and elec- other has a voltage of 300 V, what must
tric potential, V, inside a charge hollow be the electric field strength between the
sphere? two points?

A. E is zero and V is constant A. 300 V/m
B. E is zero and V is zero B. 200, 000 V/m
C. E is constant and V is constant C. 400, 000 V/m
D. E is constant and V is zero D. 0.000000 V/m
169. If a battery provides a high voltage, it 173. The rate of flow of electric charge is
can called
A. do a lot of work over the course of its A. Electricity
lifetime B. Electric Current
B. do a lot of work on each charge it en- C. Voltage
counters
D. Potential difference
C. push a lot of charge through a circuit
174. One volt is defined as
D. last a long time
A. one coulomb per second
170. At the centre of an electric dipole
B. one joule per coulomb
A. Electric field and potential both are
C. an ampere-second
zero
D. none of above
B. Electric field is zero but potential is not
zero 175. When a dielectric of dielectric constant K
C. Electric field is not zero but potential is is introduced between the plates of a par-
zero allel plate capacitor, the field at a point
between the plates:
D. Neither electric field nor potential is
zero A. increases
B. remains the same
171. The plates of a parallel-plate capacitor
are 2.50mm apart, and each carries a C. becomes K times E
charge of magnitude 80.0nC. The plates D. becomes E/K
are in vacuum. The electric field be-
tween the plates has a magnitude of 176. The process of charging a neutral object
4.00x106V/m.what is the capacitance? by touching it with a charged object.
A. zero A. Elementary Charge
B. same as potential difference 4.00pF B. Charging by Conduction
C. 8.99pF C. Grounding
D. 8pF D. Charging by Induction
E. 8.00x10-9F 177. It is the charge in electric potential, also
known as ‘voltage’.
172. Two points in space are separated by a
distance of 1 millimeter (0.001 meters). If A. Electric Difference
one point has a voltage of 100 V and the B. Difference Potential

C. Electric Potential Difference 183. Two point charges are separated by a dis-
D. none of above tance of 10 cm. Charge on point A =+9 µ C
and charge on point B =-4 µ C.[k = 9 x 109
178. If 500 J of work are required to carry a Nm2C-2, 1 µ C = 10-6 C]What is the elec-
40-C charge from one point to another, the tric potential energy between these two
potential difference between these two charges?
points is:
A. 3.24 J
A. 12.5 V
B. 5.54 J
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. 20, 000 V
C. 7.23 J
C. 0.08 V
D. 6.45 J
D. depends on the path
179. The electric potential is 184. What is the electric field strength and
electric potential inside a hollow charged
A. a property of a test charge
conductor sphere of radius r and charge
B. a property of a source charge q at a distance of x from the centre of
C. a property of space sphere?
D. the energy of a charged object A. 0, kq/r
180. If a proton is moved from a positive plate B. 0, kq/x
to a negative plate then it moves to the C. kq/r2, kq/r
plate with
D. kq/x2, kq/x
A. lower electric potential (V)
B. higher electric potential (V) 185. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is
C. 0 V charged so that the potential on its surface
is 10 V. The Electric field at the centre of
D. none of above the sphere is
181. In a parallel plate capacitor, the capaci- A. 0 V
tance increases from 4µ F to 80µ F, on in-
troducing a dielectric medium between the B. 10 V
plates. What is the dielectric constant of C. Same as at point 5 cm away from the
the medium? surface
A. 0.05 D. Same as at point 25 cm away from the
B. 20 surface
C. 40
186. An electrostatic force of 2 X 102. new-
D. 80 tons is exerted on a charge of 4 coulombs
at point P in an electric field. The magni-
182. The quantity electric potential is defined
tude of the electric field intensity at P is
as the amount of
A. electric potential energy A. 8 X 102 N/C
B. force acting upon a charge B. 5 N/C

C. potential energy per charge C. 2 X 10-2 N/C
D. force per charge D. 50 N/C

187. The electric potential at infinite distance 192. A proton ( q = 1.60 x 10-19 C) moves
from a point charge is 10.0 cm on a path parallel to the direction
of a uniform electrical field of strength 3.0

A. zero
N/C. What is the electrical potential en-
B. infinity ergy?
C. none of these A. 4.8 x 10-20 J
D. none of above B. 1.6 x 10-20 J
188. What happens to the magnitude of the C. -4.8 x 10-20 J

electric field when you halve the distance D. -1.6 x 10-20 J
to the source charge?
193. The SI standard unit of charge; equal to
A. The electric field decreases by a factor the magnitude of the charge of 6.24 x
of two 1018 electrons or protons.
B. The electric field decreases by a factor A. Grounding
of four
B. Capacitor
C. The electric field increases by a factor
of two C. Coulomb
D. Equipotential
D. The electric field increases by a factor
of four 194. The unit newton per coulomb is the same
as
189. The electric potential difference of zero
between two or more positions in an elec- A. Wm-2
tric field. B. Vm-1
A. Electric field line C. Vm-2
B. Equipotential D. none of above
C. Voltage
195. Positive and negative point charges of
D. Equilibrium position equal magnitude are kept at (0, 0, a/2)
and (0, 0, -a/2) respectively. The work
190. The electron volt (eV) is a unit of done by the electric field when another
A. potential positive point charge is moved from (-a,
0, 0) to (0, a, 0) is
B. charge
A. Positive
C. energy
B. Negative
D. none of above
C. Zero
191. The difference in electrical potential en- D. Depends on the path connecting the ini-
ergy between two places is called tial and final positions.
A. resistance
196. When two objects have opposite charge
B. friction (+ and-), they are:
C. induction A. Attracted to each other
D. voltage B. Repelled by each other

C. Have no effect on each other A. 8V

D. none of above B. 2V
C. 4V
197. Consider two parallel plates with poten-
tial difference of 12V between them.How D. 16V
much work is done on the proton to move
202. The electric potential at the points
it from negative plate to positive plate?
equidistant from +Q have
A. 1.9x10−18 J
A. same magnitude
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. 1.9x10−19 J
B. zero
C. 12 J
C. none of these
D. 120 J D. none of above
198. The electric field inside an uncharged 203. The earth is a good of electricity.
metal ball is zero. If the ball gains a nega-
tive charge, the electric field inside the ball A. conductor
will be B. insulator
A. greater than zero. C. semiconductor
B. less than zero. D. none of above
C. zero. 204. Electricity is the flow of
D. none of above A. protons
199. A proton ( q = 1.60 x 10-19 C) moves B. neutrons
0.1 m on a path same direction of a uni- C. electrons
form electrical field of strength 3.0 N/C.
D. none of above
What is the electrical potential energy?
A. 4.8 x 10-20 J 205. What is an electric field?
B. 1.6 x 10-20 J A. A space around a charge where a force
is exerted on other charged objects.
C. -4.8 x 10-20 J
B. A space around a charge where no
D. -1.6 x 10-20 J force is experienced by other charged ob-
jects.
200. What is the potential difference of a uni-
form electric field of 5204 N/C separated C. A space around a charge where
by a distance of 0.834m? Hint : V = charged particles are ionized.
Ed D. A space around a charge where
A. 434V charged particles turn into plasma.
B. 0.434V 206. Which conditions is the highest potential
C. 43.4V energy?
D. 4340V A. Different charge, far apart
B. Same charge, far apart
201. The radius of a soap bubble whose poten-
tial is 16V is doubled. The new potential C. Different charge, stay close
of the bubble will be D. Same charge, stay close

207. The electric field between the plates of a A. electric field strength
parallel plate capacitor is
B. electric potential
σ

A. E = εo C. electric potential energy
σ
B. E = 2εo
D. electric force
C. E = σ εo
D. E = 0 212. Planet N has a gravitational potential-V
at its surface. Planet M has double the
208. An electron volt is density and double the radius of planet N.
A. the force acting on an electron in a Both planets are spherical and have uni-
field of 1 N/C form density. What is the gravitational
potential at the surface of planet M?
B. the force required to move an electron
1 meter A. -16V
C. the energy gained by an electron in B. -8V
moving through a potential difference of
C. -4V
1 volt
D. -0.2V
D. the energy needed to move an electron
through 1 meter in any electric field
213. potential energy per unit charge
209. Which one of the following statements A. electric potential energy
is correct? An electron follows a circular
path when it is moving at right angles to B. electron-volt
A. a uniform magnetic field. C. electric potential
B. a uniform electric field. D. electric potential difference
C. uniform electric and magnetic fields
214. The SI derived unit of potential difference
which are perpendicular.
is the
D. uniform electric and magnetic fields
which are in opposite directions. A. ohm
B. volt
210. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is
charged so that the potential on its surface C. joule
is 10 V. The potential at the centre of the D. coulomb
sphere is
A. 0 V 215. What is the importance of the potential
difference in practical settings?
B. 10 V
C. Same as at point 5 cm away from the A. It is the charge driving effect that even-
surface tually causes current.
D. Same as at point 25 cm away from the B. The amount of 1 coulomb of charge per
surface unit of potential energy
C. The number of volts per coulomb
211. The work required to move a charge from
infinity to a point in an electric field is D. The amount of electric potential en-
called ergy per volt

216. How much does a charge’s electric poten- 221. If two negative charges are held close to-
tial energy change as it is moved along a gether and then released, the charges will
line of equipotential? A. accelerate toward each other
A. It depends on the line B. accelerate away from each other
B. It increases C. not move
C. It decreases D. move at a constant speed away from
D. The energy does not change along the each other
NARAYAN CHANGDER
line of equipotential
222. A 5-C charge is located near a positively
217. Which two particles are attracted to each charged sphere so that it has 50 J of elec-
other? tric potential energy. Its electric potential
A. Two neutrons is
B. A proton and an electron A. 2 V.
C. Two protons B. 5 V.
D. An electron and a neutron C. 10 V.

D. 20 V
218. When you draw the direction of the elec-
tric field you always use a test charge 223. Two charges separated by a distance of
A. positive 1 meter exert a 20-N force on each other.
If the charges are pulled to a 2 meter sep-
B. negative aration distance, the force on each charge
C. neutral will be
D. radioactive A. 10 N
219. Electric field lines between two oppo- B. 5 N

sitely charged parallel metal plates will be C. 2.5 N
.. D. 40 N
A. straight lines, randomly spaced
224. Equipotential surfaces in an electric field
B. straight lines, evenly spaced are always
C. curved lines grouped together in small A. spherical
bunches. randomly spaced.
B. perpendicular to the electric lines of
D. d. curved lines, evenly spaced. e. force
curved lines,
C. closed surface
220. When a charge of 3 C is moved from in- D. none of above
finity to a point X in an electric field, the
work done is 15 J. What is the electric po- 225. As an electric field becomes stronger, the
tential at X? field lines should be drawn
A. 45 V A. closer together
B. 22.5 V B. farther apart
C. 15 V C. thicker
D. 5 V D. thinner

1
226. If the capacitor is DISCONNECTED from B. C = C11 + C12 + C13
the battery, what remains constant if the
distance of separation of the metal plates C. C = C11 + C12 + C13

of the capacitor is increased? D. 1
= C11 × C12 × C13
C
A. Charge stored in the capacitor
B. Voltage across the plates of the capac- 231. The potential difference between the ter-
itor minals of a connection wire is
C. Capacitance A. Zero
D. Energy of the capacitor B. greater than zero
227. A 4.0-g bead carries a charge of 20 µ C. C. Less than zero

The bead is accelerated from rest through a D. infinity
potential difference V, and afterward the
bead is moving at 2.0 m/s. What is the 232. a property of the space around a charged
magnitude of the potential difference V? object, where the effect of its charge can
A. 400 V be felt by other objects
B. 200 V A. Electric Field Line

C. 400 kV B. Electrostatics
D. 800 kV C. Electric Field
228. What variable do meters represent? D. Electroscope
A. Electrostatic Charge 233. The electric field intensity between two

B. Force oppositely charged parallel plates
C. Distance A. varies inversely as the distance
D. Mass B. varies as the square of the distance
229. The dielectric constant is the C. is uniform
A. ratio of permittivity of the medium to D. none of above
permittivity of free space.
234. from question 20:The plates of a parallel-
B. ratio of force between two charges
plate capacitor are 2.50mm apart, and
placed in vacuum to force between them
each carries a charge of magnitude 80.0nC.
when placed in a medium.
The plates are in vacuum. The electric field
C. ratio of capacitance of a capacitor with between the plates has a magnitude of
a dielectric between the plates to capaci- 4.00x106V/m.What is the area of each
tance when vacuum is there between the plates?
plates.
A. 2.26x10-3cm2
D. All of the above
B. 2.26x10-3m2
230. The equivalent capacitance of three capac-
C. 22.6m2
itors with capacitance C1 , C2 and C3 con-
nected in series is D. 2.26cm2
A. C = C1 +C2 +C3 E. none of the above

235. Which one of the following statements is 240. One way to think about electric potential
correct? The force between two charged is
particles A. Electric potential is the electric power
A. is always attractive per unit charge
B. can be measured in C2 F-1 m-1 B. Electric potential is the electric poten-
tial energy per unit charge.
C. is directly proportional to the distance
between them C. Electric potential energy is the electric
NARAYAN CHANGDER
field strength per unit charge
D. is independent of the magnitude of the
D. Electric potential is the electric force
charges
per unit charge
236. A 900 pF capacitor is charged by a 100 241. Approximately how much force would be
V battery. How much electrostatic energy generated by two charged objects held 2
is stored by the capacitor? m apart, if q1 has a charge of 3.0 C and
A. 4.5x10-6 J q2 has a charge of 4.0 C?
B. 4.5x10-6 eV A. 0.5 N
C. 4.5x10-5 J B. 150 N
C. 270 N
D. 4.5x10-7J
D. 300 N
237. Which is not the equation of finding the
242. Which quantity and unit are correctly
electrical potential.
paired?
A. V = U/q
A. electric field strength and N/C
B. V = PE/q B. electricity and Coulombs
C. V= Qr/PE C. electrostatic force and electrons
D. none of above D. electric field strength and E
238. The device which transfers energy to elec- 243. How much work is done in moving a
tric charges in a circuit is charge of 2 Coulomb across two points
having a potential difference of 12 Volt
A. battery
A. 14 J
B. voltmeter
B. 24 J
C. Ammeter
C. 6 J
D. Electric switch D. 10 J
239. What is the potential difference between 244. Which of the following is not the correct
the two ends of a connecting wire? relation for the dielectric constant (κ )
A. Zero A. κ = Fo
F
B. 1 V B. κ = C
Co
C. Infinity C. κ = Co
C
εm
D. none of above D. κ = εo

245. The work needed to move a positive test D. potential difference = time taken /
charge from one point to another, divided charge
by the magnitude of the test charge; also

called potential difference. 250. The Study of electric charges that can be
collected and held in one place
A. Electric Potential Difference
A. Electrostatics
B. Electroscope
B. Insulators
C. Electric Field Line
C. Electroscope
D. Electric Field
D. Coulomb’s Law
246. The process of charging an object without
touching it, which can be accomplished by 251. Where an electric field line crosses an
bringing a charged object close to a neutral equipotential surface, the angle between
object, causing a separation of charges, the field line and the equipotential is
then separating the object to be charged, A. zero
trapping opposite but equal charges. B. between zero and 90 deg
A. Charging by Conduction C. 90 deg
B. Grounding D. either zero or 90 deg
C. Charging by Induction
252. The earth has a plenty of
D. Capacitance
A. free neutrons
247. What is the Electric Potential Energy of a B. free protons
6.7 x 109 C charge with an Electric Poten-
tial of 240 V? C. free electrons
A. 1.61 x 1012 J D. none of above
B. 2.42 x 1012 J 253. How would you draw a strong electric
C. 1.34 x 1011 J field?
D. 2.7 x 1011 J A. Draw two charges
B. Draw lots of field lines, spaced close
248. What is the SI unit for charge? together
A. Joules C. Draw a few field lines, spaced far
B. Coulombs apart
C. Newtons D. Draw straight lines coming out of a
D. Meters charge
249. What is the correct equation? 254. The electric potential energy of a system
of two positive point charges of 1 micro C
A. potential difference = charge / time each placed in air 1m apart is:
taken
A. 9 x 103 J
B. potential difference = work done /
charge B. 9 x 109 J
C. potential difference = work done / C. 9 x 10-3 J

time taken D. 9 x 10-3eV

255. Calculate the potential difference if the their charge and inversely with the square
work done by 10 coulombs of charge is 50 of the distance between them.
joules A. Capacitance
A. 500 V B. Electroscope
B. 5 V C. Coulomb
C. 0.5 V D. Coulomb’s Law
D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
261. What is the unit for resistance?
256. Two charges separated by a distance of 1 A. Volts
meter exert a 2-N force on each other. If
the magnitude of each charge is doubled, B. Amperes
the force on each charge is C. Ohms
A. 4 N D. none of above
B. 2 N
262. What is the electric potential from a
C. 8 N 0.00001 Coulomb charge a distance of 5
D. .5 N meters away?
A. 5 V
257. When a proton is accelerated through 1V,
then its kinetic energy will be B. 1.6x10−19 V
A. 1.6eV C. 180, 000 V
B. 13.6eV D. 500, 000 V
C. 1eV 263. Two point charges are separated by a dis-
D. 0.54eV tance of 0.008 m. Charge on point A =-8 C
and charge on point B =-7 C.[k = 9 x 109
258. Electric Field strength depends on what Nm2C-2]What is the electric
A. charge 264. V = 3x2 the electric field is:
B. distance A. -6x
C. charge and distance B. 6x
D. electric force C. −x3
259. The SI unit for electric potential is the D. x3
A. Volen 265. Angle between equipotential surface and
B. Vespa lines of force is
C. Volt A. 0
D. Valspar B. 180
260. States that the force between two point C. 90

charges varies directly with the product of D. 45

3.3 Electric potential difference 301
3.3 Electric potential difference

1. What is the rule for voltage in a parallel 6. The unit for resistance is
circuit? A. Watts
A. stays the same B. Ohms
B. adds up C. Amperes
C. inverse of the sum of the reciprocals D. Volts
D. none of above
7. A tiny sphere carrying a charge of
2. Resistance is a ratio of 6.5x10−6 C sits in an electric field, at a
point where the electric potential is 240 V
A. V:l relative to ground. What is the sphere’s
B. V:C potential energy?
C. V:Q A. 2.7x10−8 J
D. I:t B. 6.5x10−6 J
C. 1.6x10−3 J
3. If I = 2 A and R = 8 Ohms, V =?
D. 240 J
A. 4 V
B. 16 V 8. Current of 0.5 A flows through a bulb for 5
minutes. Calculate the number of electrical
C. 0.25 V charge flows.
D. 10 V A. 1.5 C
4. An electron is sitting 10 cm away from a B. 2.5 C
small object of charge-5 micro-coulombs. C. 15 C
What is the strength of the electric field
D. 150 C
at this point?
A. 720 N/C 9. The thinner wire has low resistance be-
cause electric charges can flow throuh
B. 3100 N/C it.
C. 1800 N/C A. Same number
D. 4500 N/C B. Less
5. What is the electric potential energy C. More
of an electron located 5.3x10−11 m D. none of above
from the proton in a hydrogen atom?
IF YOU KNOW q = 1.6x10−19C, K = 10. A proton is moved 5 cm closer to the
9X109 N.m2 /c2 negative plate in an oppositely charged
parallel plate arrangement. Ignoring any
A. −8.2x10−8 J
changes to gravitational energy, find the
B. −4.3x10−18 J work done in moving the proton.
C. −2.2x10−18 J A. 1.92x10−18 J
D. −1.6x10−19 J B. −4.8x10−18 J

C. −1.92x10−18 J 16. Potential difference is acquired from the

D. 4.8x10−18 J movement of a charge from
A. high to low energy
11. What is the shape of the electric field be-
tween two flat charged plates. B. low to high energy
A. A uniform field between the plates C. positive to negative
with a curved field at the ends.
B. A uniform field between the plates.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. A spherical field increasing towards in- 17. The electric potential at a distance of 4 m
finity. from a certain point charge is 200 V . What
D. A spherical field decreasing towards is the potential at a distance of 2 m from
infinity. the same charge?
12. Factors affecting resistance of the constan- A. 50 V

tan wire except B. 600 V
A. Temperature C. 200 V
B. Length
D. 400 V
C. Cross-sectional area
D. Type of material 18. If 30 C of electrical charge flows through
E. Current a wire in 2 minutes. Calculate the current
flows.
13. The distance between parallel conducting
A. 0.15 A
plates is d. A charge q is placed near the
positive plates. What is the gain in kinetic B. 0.25 A
energy on reaching the negative plate?
C. 1.5 A
A. Vdq
D. 2.5 A
B. Vq/d
C. Vq 19. How must a voltmeter be connected?
D. dq/V A. In series
14. What is a capacitor? B. In parallel
A. A device for storing energy. C. To a power supply
B. A device for storing p.d.
D. none of above
C. A device for storing charge.
D. A device for storing capacitance. 20. A 30.0 V battery is connected to a resistor
of 120 ohms. Calculate the current flow.
15. What is the SI, base unit for capacitance
A. 3600 A
A. [F]
B. [s4A2kg-1m-2] B. 0.25 A
C. [CV-1] C. 4.0 A
D. [CV] D. 2.5 A

21. A Charging system producing 14.5 Volts 26. This is a rate of electrical charge flow.
with a current flow of 43.5 Amps, what is A. Current
the circuit resistance

B. Potential diffrence
A. 58 Amps
C. Resistance
B. 0.33 Amps
D. Power
C. 13 Amps
27. If temperature getting higher, resistance
D. 1 Amp
of conductor become
22. Equipotential lines surrounding an isolated A. Unchange
point charge will be B. Increase
A. spherical C. Decrease
B. straight lines coming from the parti- D. none of above
cles center.
28. It is work done to move a unit of electrical
C. oblong
charge from one point to another point in
D. parallel to the electric field electric field. This refer to
23. Which of the formulae is correct about A. Current
Ohm’s Law? B. Potential difference
A. V = IR C. Resistance
B. V =QR D. Power
C. VI = R 29. It is the work done to move a unit of
D. I = QR electrical charge from one point to another
point in electric field. This is referred to as
24. Which of these is unnecessary in order to
A. Current
find the voltage created by an isolated
point charge? B. Potential difference
A. distance from the point charge (r) C. Resistance
B. couloumb’s constant (k) D. Power
C. the charge getting effected by the 30. The radius of a soap bubble whose poten-
force created by the potential difference tial is 16 V is doubled. The new potential
(q) of the bubble will be
D. the charge creating the electric field A. 8 V
supplying the force(Q) B. 4 V
25. It is a rate of electrical charge flows. This C. 2 V
refers to D. 16 V
A. Current
31. The following are factors affecting capaci-
B. Potential diffrence tance, except.
C. Resistance A. Dielectric in between the metal plates
D. Power B. Area of the metal plates

C. Distance of separation of the metal 37. It refers to the amount of charge flowing
plates in a conductor per unit time
D. Voltage across the metal plates A. Potential Difference
32. The symbol for electric current is B. Electric Current
A. I C. Resistance
B. V D. Electric Power
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. R 38. Equipotential lines always run to elec-
D. A tric field lines.
A. parallel
33. The ratio of potential difference to current
gives a direct linear relation in B. perpendicular
A. Coulomb’s Law C. asymmetrically
B. Newton’s 1st Law D. in the opposite direction
C. Kepler’s Law 39. The formula for resistance is

D. Ohm’s Law A. R = I/V
34. Which of the following could be used to in- B. R = 1/VI

crease the capacitance of a capacitor? C. R = V/I
A. Increase the separation between each D. R = VI
metal plate.
40. Which of the following statements is false
B. decrease the area of the plate
about electric field lines
C. decrease the voltage
A. electric field lines cannot cross
D. Increase the permitivitty of the dielec-
B. electric field lines point away from pos-
tric thus, directly decreasing voltage
itive charge
35. If a unit positive charge is taken from one C. electric field lines are always straight
point to another over an equipotential sur- lines
face, then
D. electric field lines show how a proton
A. Work is done on the charge would move in an electric field
B. Work done is constant
41. state that the current flowing through
C. No work is done an ohmic conductor is directly proportional
D. Work is done by the charge to the potential difference across its end,
provided that its temperature and the
36. If V = 10 V and R = 2 Ohms, I =? other physical conditions remain constant.
A. 0.2 A A. Pressure Law
B. 12 A B. Ohm’ s Law
C. 5 A C. Charles Law
D. 20 A D. Ohmic Law

42. The capacitance of a parallel-plate capaci- 47. An electron is sitting 10 cm away from a
tor is: small object of charge-5 micro-coulombs.
What is the force the electron experi-

A. directly proportional to the plate area
ences?
B. inversely proportional to the charge
A. 7.2x10−16 N, repulsive
stored
B. 4.5x10−20 , attractive
C. independent of any material inserted
between the plates C. 7.2x10−16 N, attractive
D. directly proportional to the potential D. 4.5x10−20 , repulsive
difference of the plates
48. What is the function of rheostat?
43. During a lightning discharge, 30 C of A. To control the resistance in the circuit
charge move through a potential differ-
B. To control the potential difference in
ence of 1.0 x 108 V. The energy released
the circuit
by this lightning bolt is:
C. To control the current in the circuit
A. 1.5 ‘ 1011 J
D. To control the power in the circuit
B. 3.0 ‘ 109 J
C. 6.0 ‘ 107 J 49. The unit of current is
D. 3.3 ‘ 106 J A. Ampere

B. Ohm
44. What happens to capacitance if you in-
C. Volts
crease the distance of separation of the
metal plates? D. Watts
A. Increases 50. The unit for potential difference is
B. Decreases A. Ohms
C. Remains the same B. Volts
D. none of above C. Watts
45. Where can an electric field be found? D. Amperes
A. below a force field 51. If the dielectric increases, what happens to

B. in a gravitational field the capacitance?
A. increases
C. in the space surrounding a charged ob-
ject B. decreases
D. outside of a magnetic field C. stays the same
D. none of above
46. If 4µ F and 2µ F capacitors are connected
in series, the total capacitance is 52. If V = 12 V and I = 6 A, R =?
A. 1.33µ F A. 18 Ohms
B. 0.75µ F B. 72 Ohms
C. 6µ F C. 0.5 Ohms
D. 2µ F D. 2 Ohms

3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 306
53. If the parallel conducting plates are con- A. Current

nected to a potential difference of V and B. Potential difference
the separation of the plate is d what is
the electric field strength across the plate? C. Resistance
Thickness of each plate is x. D. Ohm’s Law
A. Vd 55. An electron is sitting 10 cm away from a
B. Vx small object of charge-5 micro-coulombs.
What is the electric potential at that dis-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. V/d
tance?
D. V/x
A. 200 V
54. Potential difference is directly propor- B. 7.2 x 10−17 J
tional to current flows in conductor under
standard tempertaure and pressure.This C. 450 J/C
refer to D. 1.8 x 10−17 J
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance

1. Power is measured in? A. 6.43333333
A. Volts B. 1.8461538
B. Amps C. 0.3246777777
C. Ohms D. 1.5321111111
D. Watts 5. Increasing the distance between two
charges by a factor of 9 has what effect
2. Which symbol and unit of measurement on the force?
are used for electric current?
A. Increases force by a factor of 9
A. symbol:A; unit:I
B. Decreases force by a factor of 9
B. symbol:I; unit:C
C. Increases force by a factor of 81
C. symbol:C; unit:A
D. Decreases force by a factor of 81
D. symbol:I; unit:A
6. What is the voltage of a circuit with 4
3. The current in an appliance is 3 A and the ohms of resistance and 3 amps of current?
voltage difference is 120 V. How much V=IxR
power is being supplied to the appliance? A. 12 V
A. 10000 w B. 21 V
B. 220 w C. 4/3 V
C. 420 w D. 3/4 V
D. 360 w
7. How much time is required for 4 C of
4. If there is a 4 ohm resistor, 6 ohm resistor, charge to flow through a wire carrying a
and a 8 ohm resistor in a parallel circuit, current of 2 A?
what is the total resistance? A. 0.5 s

B. 2 s 13. If voltage remains the same and the resis-

tance in a circuit decreases, the electric cur-
C. 8 s
rent

D. 10 s
A. increases
8. This measures the speed of the current in B. decreases
a circuit
C. stays the same
A. voltage D. none of above
B. ammeter
14. If voltage in a circuit is constant, the cur-
C. switch rent can be cut to half of its original value
D. resistance by changing the resistance to its origi-
nal value. Which best completes the state-
9. What word means how fast the electrons ment?
flow. A. one-fourth
A. Current B. one-half
B. Voltage C. two times
C. Resistance D. four times
D. Power
15. According to Ohm’s Law, if you were to
10. The rate at which energy is converted from double the voltage and double the resis-
one form to another tance, what would happen to the flow of
current?
A. power
A. It would stay the same
B. voltage
B. It would increase 2x
C. current
C. It would increase 4x
D. none
D. It would decrease 2x
11. A lamp has a current of 2 amps at 6 volts.
16. If voltage decrease (but resistance stays
The resistance of the lamp must be
the same), current will
A. 1.5 ohms A. increase
B. 6 ohms B. decrease
C. 3 ohms C. stay the same
D. 12 ohms D. none of above
12. The unit for electric charge is ? 17. What is a example of a insulator?
A. Coulomb A. metal
B. Newtons B. rubber
C. Kilogram C. water
D. Seconds D. none of above

18. The charge of protons and electrons have A. 867.0

a amount of charge and signs.
B. 205.0
A. same, different
C. 354.0
B. same, same
D. 976.0
C. different, same
D. different, different 24. Volt battery with two resistors in series
19. A 12 volt battery pushes 0.2 amps of cur- 3 Ohms & 4 Ohms what would the current
NARAYAN CHANGDER
rent through a resistor, what is the resis- draw be
tance? A. 2.1
A. 2.4 ohm B. 1.71 Amps
B. 60 ohm
C. 2.4 Amps
C. 11.8 ohm
D. 15 Amps
D. 12.2 ohm
20. What unit is used to measure resistance? 25. What is the current through a 4V bulb with
a power of 36W?
A. Ohms
A. 9W
B. Omega
C. Volts B. 9A
D. Amps C. 60V
21. Which best describes a parallel circuit? D. 60A

A. Electricity flows along one pathway.
26. With the engine running the charging sys-
B. The flow of electricity comes from one tem produces 14.5 Volts what would the
source. current flow be if a resistance of 6 Ohms
C. Electricity flows along more than one was present
pathway. A. 2.41 Ohms
D. The flow of electricity comes from
B. 2.52 Ohms
more than one source.
C. 2.1 Ohms
22. How many volts would we need to pro-
duce a current flow of 8.2 amps through a D. 0.3333 Ohms
6.5 ohm resistor?
A. 14.7 volts 27. Three identical resistors of 46 ohms each
are connected in parallel. If the circuit has
B. 1.7 volts a battery of 12 V, what is the total current
C. 1.3 volts in the circuit?
D. 53.3 volts A. 0.08696 A
23. If the total current in a parallel circuit is B. 0.261 A
2601A and all three resistors are identi-
C. 0.7826 A
cal, what is the current through R3 if you
have a voltage of 12? D. 3.833 A

28. Voltage divided by Current equals ? (V C. Amps

/ I =? )
D. Ohms

A. Current
B. Power 34. What is the unit of measurement for
Power?
C. Resistance
A. Joules
D. Watts
B. Newtons
29. if the resistivity of copper is 1.7 ∗ 10−8 ,
C. Watts
how much is its conductivity?
D. Meters
A. 0.6 ∗ 108
B. 0.6 ∗ 10−8 35. In a two branch parallel circuit, with a con-
C. 1.7 ∗ 10(−8) sent 10 Volts and one 2K Ohm Resistor
on each branch, what would be the current
D. none of above through each resistor?
30. How much voltage would be necessary to A. .01mA
generate 10 amps of current in a circuit
B. 10mA
that has 5 ohms of resistance?
C. 1mA
A. 0.5 V
B. 2 V D. .10mA
C. 5 V 36. Batteries convert what type of energy into

D. 50 V electricity?
A. Chemical energy
31. Aretha measures a circuit at 110 V and has
a resistance of 240 . Using Ohm’s law, B. Mechanical energy
what can she calculate for the circuit? C. Both
A. voltage
D. Kinetic energy
B. ohms
C. resistance 37. If I = .25 & V = 110, then P =
D. current A. 440 Watts

B. 2.2727 m Watts
32. Electrically neutral particles
C. 27.5 Watts
A. repel
D. 250 Watts
B. attract
C. have no force 38. What is the unit of electric potential differ-
D. none of above ence?
A. Coulomb
33. The unit that measures a battery’s
strength is called B. joule
A. Voltage C. volt
B. Current D. watt

39. Choose all that are true:If you added more C. increases
light bulbs to an electric circuit, it would D. changes to current
A. increase the voltage.
45. Which variable in Ohm’s law represents
B. decrease the voltage.
the flow of electrons?
C. increase the current.
A. resistance
D. decrease the current.
B. current
E. increase the resistance.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. voltage
40. What does Volts/Current (V/I) equal?
D. none of above
A. Resitance
B. Voltage 46. Which is the right form of Ohm’s Law?
C. Electricity A. V=I/R
D. Power B. V=R/I
C. I=V/R
41. Which equation would you use to solve for
voltage? D. I=R/V
A. V = I/R 47. What is the unit for measuring the electric
B. V = PR current?
C. V = CI A. Volt
D. V = IR B. Coulomb
E. V = R/I C. Amps
42. what is the current in a toaster of 1200 D. Ohms
ohms when hooked up to a 100 v outlet?
48. How many Volts would we need to pro-
A. 0.8333 duce a current flow of 8 Amps through a
B. 0.0833 6 Ohm resistor? What are the givens and
C. 0.3333 unknown?
D. 0.0333 A. I=8, P=6, V=?
B. R=8, I=6, V=?
43. The mathematical relationship among volt-
age, current, and resistance is called C. I=8, R=6, V=?
A. Faraday’s Law D. P=8, R=6, V=?
B. Tesla’s Law
49. If the potential difference is 12 volts and
C. Edison’s Law the resistance is 5 ohms, what is the cur-
D. Ohm’s Law rent?
A. 2.4 A
44. If voltage increases, what happens to
wattage (power)? B. 60 A
A. decreases C. 0.417 A
B. stays the same D. 17 A

50. Electrostatic force F is directly proportional 56. What is a example of a conductor?

to: A. wood

A. r2 (distance squared) B. metal
B. q1 C. rubber
C. q2 D. rock
D. both q1 and q2 57. Voltage divided by Current(V / I)
51. What is the number value for green in the A. Current
color code chart? B. Power
A. 6 C. Resistance
B. 4 D. Watts
C. 2 58. According to Ohm’s Law, voltage and cur-
D. 5 rent are directly proportional. Therefore,
resistance and current are
52. What is Power?
A. directly proportional
A. Shadow Warrior 2 OST
B. inversely proportional
B. Work divided by Time
C. not related
C. Work multiplied by Time D. none of above
D. of Castle Grayskull
59. A kilowatt is
53. If a resistor is added in a SERIES circuit, A. 1000 Amps
what happens to the voltage in each resis-
B. 1000 watts
tor?
C. 1000 volts
A. Increases
D. none
B. Decreases
C. Remains the same 60. Which variable in Ohm’s law represents
the flow of electrons (much like the flow
D. none of above of a river)?
54. What is the unit for potential difference? A. resistance
A. Ohm B. current
B. Volt C. voltage
C. Watt D. none of above
D. Ampere 61. An overhead wire has a potential differ-
ence of 30, 000 volts. If the current flow-
55. In the illustration of the dam, what doe the ing through the wire is 1, 000 amperes,
water behind the dam represent? what is the resistance of the wire?
A. Voltage A. 0.033 ohms
B. Potential Difference B. 30 ohms
C. EMF C. 3.0x107 ohms
D. Potential Energy D. 3.0x108 ohms

62. The ability of a metal to allow heat or elec- C. Capacitance

tricity to pass through it. D. Voltage
A. conductivity E. Current
B. insulator
68. What is the current through a 11V bulb
C. mass with a power of 99W?
D. density A. 9W
NARAYAN CHANGDER
63. Voltage divided by resistance(V/R) is B. 9A
A. Current C. 60V
B. Power D. 60A
C. Ohms 69. DC stands for and is used in batteries.
D. Watts A. Distant Current
64. A 9V battery powering a remote control B. Don’t Current
car has a resistance of 3 ohms. How much C. Direct Current
current is flowing through the car?
D. Distributed current
A. 6A
B. 27A 70. Circuit A is connected with 10 cm wires.
Circuit B is connected with 5 cm wires. re-
C. 3A sistance is greater in:
D. 12A A. Circuit A
65. In an experiment you hold your voltage B. Circuit B
constant and change your resistance to fill C. length of wires does not impact resis-
out a chart on current. The dependent vari- tance
able would be
D. none of above
A. number of trials
B. resistance 71. What is the voltage of a circuit with 4
ohms of resistance and 3 amps of cur-
C. current rent?
D. voltage A. 12 V
66. What is the charge of an electron? B. 21 V
A. Positive C. 4/3 V
B. Negative D. 3/4 V
C. Neutral 72. Which variable in Ohm’s law is like friction
D. none of above that slows down the flow of electrons?
67. What does the letter ‘I’ stand for in Ohm’s A. resistance
Law? B. current
A. Resistance C. voltage
B. Inductance D. none of above

73. which of the following is commonly used to C. neutral

measure electrical energy consumption?
D. positively charged

A. Amps
B. Volts 79. What is the power of a 3V bulb with 20A
through it?
C. Kilowatt-Hours
D. Ohms A. 100W
B. 100V
74. Which variable in Ohm’s law is responsi-
ble for pushing/forcing the electrons to C. 60W
move?
D. 60A
A. resistance
B. current 80. Materials that conduct electricity with
zero resistance
C. voltage
D. none of above A. Conductors
B. Semiconductors
75. What is the Unit of Charge
A. Ohm C. Superconductors
B. Coulomb D. Insulators
C. Ampere
81. If the battery produced 12.6 Volts what
D. Volt would be the current flow for a 6 Ohm re-
sistor? (V=IR, I=V/R, R=V/I)
76. A phone charger that provides a current of
1.5A and has 6 ohms of resistance would A. 2.1 Amps
be equivalent to using a battery of how
many volts? B. 2.4 Amps
A. 9V C. 1.71 Amps
B. 7.5V D. 15 Amps
C. 3V
82. in Engineering notation.
D. 4V
A. 12H
77. A device that uses electric current for a
specific reason. B. 12K
A. wire C. 1.2M
B. battery D. 1.2K
C. resistor
83. Which one is an insulator?
D. switch
A. Silver
78. An object with the same amount of posi-
tive and negative charge is called: B. Copper
A. statically charged C. Mechanical pencil

B. negatively charged D. plastic

84. A device that allows current to flow C. 5.83 A

through it in only one direction is known D. none
as a:
A. Motor 90. If doubling the voltage across a resistor
doubles the current through the resistor,
B. Switch then
C. Diode A. The resistor value decreased
D. none of above B. The resistor value did not change
NARAYAN CHANGDER
85. Simple circuits must contain , , and C. The resistor value increased
D. It is impossible to determine the
A. source, load, switch change in the resistor value
B. device, source, conductor 91. What would happen if in a circuit, the resis-
C. source, conductor, load tance increases but the voltage stays the
same?
D. device, conductor, load
A. The current would decrease
86. What is the power of a 130 V bulb with
B. The current would increase
0.87 A through it?
C. The voltage would decrease
A. 113 W
D. The voltage would increase
B. 149 W
C. 0.0067 W 92. If resistivity of iron is 1.6 ∗ 10−8 , how
much is the resistance of a wound wire re-
D. 0.67 W sistor made by a wire 1m long and area
87. What types of charges attract? 1mm2 ?
A. Positive and Positive A. 1.6 ∗ 10−2

B. 1.6 ∗ 10−14
B. Positive and Neutral
C. 1.6 ∗ 10−8
C. Negative and Neutral
D. none of above
D. Positive and Negative
93. In a circuit, the total resistance is
88. Something electricity can’t move through
greater than the largest resistance in the
is called a(n)
circuit.
A. conductor
A. Series
B. wire
B. Parallel
C. shoe
C. Either series or parallel
D. insulator
D. Neither series nor parallel
89. What is the current flowing into a mi- 94. The length of the legs of an LED matter be-
crowave oven that requires 700 W of cause
power if the voltage difference is 120 V?
A. the longer leg must be connected to
A. 4.3A the positive terminal in order for the light
B. 6.3 A to work.

B. the longer leg must be connected to C. not related

the negative terminal in order for the light D. none of above
to work.

C. actually they don’t really matter, it’s to- 100. If a resistor is connected in PARALLEL on
tally random. a circuit, the current in that branch of the
circuit should
D. none of above
A. remain the same
95. Voltage is the measure of B. decrease
A. electric current C. increase
B. potential difference D. none of above
C. difference in elevation
101. What is the job of a battery? (BEST an-
D. none of above swer)
96. A home’s central air conditioner has a A. provide power
power rating of 4kW. The air conditioner B. provide energy
runs 8 hours a day (201, 600 seconds per
C. turns the circuit on
week). How much energy in JOULES does
it use per week? D. provide energy for the electrons to
flow
A. 806, 400J
B. 806, 400, 000J 102. A light bulb has a resistance of 5 ohms
and a maximum current of 10 A. How
C. 32J
much voltage can be applied before the
D. 6, 451, 200J bulb will break?
97. If resistance decreases, what happens to A. 50 Volts
current? B. 5 Volts
A. stays the same C. 0.5 Volts
B. increases D. 2 Volts
C. decreases
103. What slows down the flow of electricity
D. disappears in a circuit?
98. What is the current through a 25-ohm re- A. resistance
sistor connected to a 5.0-volt power sup- B. voltage
ply?
C. current
A. 5.0 amps
D. source of electric current
B. 0.20 amps
104. In a circuit, the total resistance is greater
C. 25 amps than the largest resistance in the circuit.
D. 30 amps A. Series
99. Resistance and current are B. Parallel
A. directly proportional C. Either series or parallel
B. inversely proportional D. A. Neither series nor parallel

105. If the battery produced 90 Volts and 110. Which of these is a fundamental property
what would be the current flow be for a of matter that comes in two forms?
6 Ohm resistor? A. mass
A. 2.1 Amps B. electric charge
B. 2.4 Amps C. volume
C. 1.71 Amps D. density
D. 15 Amps
NARAYAN CHANGDER
111. A laptop operates on 12V current and 2.5
106. Which statement describes the relation- Amps. What is the resistance in the lap-
ship of voltage and current? top?
A. Voltage is directly proportional to cur- A. 13.5 ohms
rent because I = V/R. B. 30 ohms
B. Voltage is inversely proportional to C. 0.21 ohms
current because I = V/R.
D. 4.8 ohms
C. Voltage is directly proportional to cur-
rent because I = VR. 112. Two types of circuits are
D. Voltage is inversely proportional to A. parallel and magnetic
current because I = VR. B. electromagnetic and series
107. Which equation is correct according to C. series and parallel
Ohm’s law? D. big and small
A. V=IR
113. is the opposition to the flow of charges
B. I=R/V in a material.
C. R=I/V A. Resistance
D. R=IV B. Voltage
108. If there are 7 Amps running through a C. Time
3 Ohm resistor, what will the voltage be D. Current
across the resistor?
A. 0.42 Volts 114. Which bulb would have a larger current
flowing through it if the voltage was the
B. 14 Volts same:An 8-watt LED bulb or a 60-watt in-
C. 21 Volts candescent bulb?
D. 73 Volts A. 8W
109. A walkman uses a standard 1.5 V bat- B. 60W

tery. How much resistance is in the circuit C. same
if it uses a current of 0.01A? D. can’t determine
A. 150 ohms
115. A HID lighting circuit operates at 75 Volts
B. 15 ohms what is the circuit current flow if the resis-
C. 0.00667 ohms tance is 5 Ohms
D. 0.01 ohms A. 375 Amps

B. 30 Amps 121. Amount of current is measured in

C. 15 Amps A. amps

D. 1.33 Amps
B. volts
116. The best conductors for electricity are C. ohm’s
made of
D. none of above
A. wood
B. plastic 122. A 200-W light bulb is connected across a
C. rubber 100-V dc power supply. What current will
D. metal flow through this bulb?
A. 0.90 A
117. The property of a material that allows
charge to flow is B. 0.36 A
A. Potential difference (voltage) C. 0.60 A
B. Conductivity
D. 2.0 A
C. Resistance
D. none of above 123. What are the color codes for a 210 ohm
resistor?
118. Transferring a charge without touching is
A. brown, grey, red
A. conduction B. brown, black, yellow
B. induction C. red, brown, brown
C. grounding
D. brown, black, brown
D. current electricity
119. What is one benefits of using a parallel 124. An analogy for electric resistance is
circuit? A. the amount of water flowing in a river
A. It gets confusing.
B. the steepness of a rivers path
B. There are no problems.
C. a waterwheel that is turned by the
C. If one part of the circuit goes down, it
rivers flow
does not affect the others.
D. I makes the lights go on D. none of above
120. In order to electrical current to flow 125. If you increase the size of the resistor and
through a wire the wire must be connected keep the voltage the same, what will hap-
in a that includes a source of electrical pen to the current?
current.
A. The current will decrease
A. averager matter
B. The current will stay the same
B. Complete loop
C. In an incomplete loop C. The current will increase
D. Interrupted Circuit D. none of above

126. What happens to total current in a series 131. An example of a parallel circuit is
circuit when the total voltage stays the A. the wiring in a house
same, circuit resistance decreases, current
B. a flashlight
will
C. a single circular path
A. increase
D. I really don’t know
B. Stay the same
132. Security alarms are made of circuits
C. Decrease
because they turn on when the circuit is
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. none of above broken.
A. Parallel
127. If a desktop computer uses 600 kilowatt-
hour per year and electricity costs $0.15 B. Series
per kilowatt-hour, how much does it cost C. Fancy
to run the computer for the year? D. none of above
A. $15
133. What is the formula for Ohm’s law?
B. $30 A. 1+2=3
C. $4000 B. RI=E
D. $90 C. V= IR
D. E= MC2
128. In a parallel circuit the current
A. makes one circle 134. When more bulbs are added in parallel,
the resistance of the parallel circuit
B. stays in one path
A. Increases
C. splits and goes through two compo-
B. Decreases
nents
C. Remains the same
D. does not move
D. none of above
129. Find the Energy used to power a 80 ohm 135. A circuit has 1200 ohms of resistance
light with a voltage of 120 volts for 8.5 with a 12 V power supply. What is the
hours current of this circuit?
A. 91800.0 J A. 10 amps
B. 5508000 J B. 0.01 amps
C. 180.0 J C. 0.1 amps
D. 1530.0 J D. 100 amps
136. What is the current flowing through a
130. How can you decrease the amount of re-
240 V bulb with a power output of 1000
sistance in a wire?
W?
A. Increase the cross sectional area A. 0.240 A
B. Decrease the length B. 4.2 A
C. Increase the temperature C. 240, 000 A
D. Decrease the amount of wires D. 1000 A

137. In Ohm’s Law, what does the symbol I C. gold ring

represent D. none of above

A. Current
143. What is the power output of a light bulb
B. Load when a current of 0.75 A and 120V electri-
C. Power cal potential difference runs through it?
D. Voltage A. 0.00625 W
B. 120 W
138. An electric lamp has a current of 0.50
amps passing through it when connected C. 90 W
to a 120-volt electrical outlet. This lamp D. 160 W
will develop a power of
144. When there is only one path for electrons
A. 5.0 watts
to move through it is called a
B. 110 watts
A. closed circuit
C. 120 watts
B. parallel circuit
D. 60 watts
C. series circuit
139. Changing a circuits resistance changes the D. open circuit
amount of flowing through the circuit
145. Voltage divided by Resistance equals
A. True
? (V / R =? )
B. False A. Current
C. Divided by B. Power
D. Current C. Ohms
140. Volt battery in series with a 7 Ohms re- D. Watts
sistor, what would the current draw be
146. Which of the following is NOT true about
A. 2.1 Voltage? (select all that apply)
B. 1.71 Amps A. A higher voltage means a faster cur-
C. 2.4 Amps rent.
D. 15 Amps B. All electricity sources have the same
voltage.
141. What is the name for the pressure that
C. Voltage is the difference in electrical
forces electrons to flow through a circuit?
potential energy.
A. Voltage
D. The unit for voltage is volt (v).
B. Capacitance
147. Which of the following is NOT a correct
C. Resistance
form of Ohm’s Law?
D. Current
A. V = IR
142. Identify the conductor below. B. I = R/V
A. cloth rag C. R = V/I
B. plastic bottle D. I = V/R

148. What is the voltage source for a circuit 153. Three resistors, 4 ohms, 6 ohms, and 8
carrying 2 ampere of current through a re- ohms, are connected in parallel in an elec-
sistor of 12 ohm? tric circuit. The equivalent resistance of
the circuit is
A. 24 volt
A. between 4 ohms and 8 ohms
B. 2.4 volt
B. less than 4 ohms
C. 12 volt
C. 18 ohms
D. 2 volt
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. between 10. ohms and 18 ohms
149. Electricity costs $0.15 per kilowatt-hour.
154. What is the current in a series circuit that
If a TV uses 400 watts and you watch it
has a total resistance of 3.7 ohms and uses
for 2 hours a day, how much does it cost
a 8.9 V battery
to run the TV for a week?
A. .817 A
A. $60
B. 5.33 A
B. $8.40
C. 2.405 A
C. $0.84
D. 13.29 A
D. $2.22
155. I = What?
150. What is the unit for the electric resis-
A. Potential energy
tance?
B. Resistance
A. Current
C. Power
B. Ampere
D. Current
C. Volts
156. Which the following is a correct equation
D. Ohms
variation of Ohm’s law?
151. You are given a parallel circuit with three A. I = VR
identical resistors of 23 ohms, and two B. R = I / V
11V batteries. What is the power of the
whole circuit? C. I = V / R
A. 63.13 D. R = IV
B. 15.78261 157. What is the current through an 11 V bulb

with a resistance of 99 ohms?
C. 11.0
A. 9 amps
D. 7.66667
B. 0.1 amps
152. What is an equation to find V? C. 0.1 Ohms
A. V=IR D. 9 Volts
B. R=VI
158. What is resistance?
C. V=I/R
A. the amount of push the electrical
D. R=IV source supplies to the circuit

B. how much a given device resists the 164. What is the type of circuit that stops
flow of electric current working when one bulb goes out?
A. A broken circuit

C. flow of electric charge
D. none of the above B. Parallel Circuit
C. Series Circuit
159. Factor which does not affect the resis-
D. A metal circuit
tance
165. For a complete circuit the circuit must be
A. Type of material
A. open
B. Length of material
B. parallel
C. Mass of the material
C. series
D. Area of the material
D. closed
160. How much power does the lamp in ques- 166. The two types of circuits are?
tion 1 consume?
A. parallel and magnetic
A. 0.3 Watts B. electromagnetic and series
B. 0.75 Watts C. series and parallel
C. 11.25 Watts D. big and small
D. none of above 167. A subwoofer needs a household voltage
of 110 V to push a current of 5.5 A
161. Electricity that flows in a closed path is through its coil. What is the resistance of
called a the subwoofer?
A. path A. 20 ohms
B. current B. 0.05 ohms
C. circuit C. 605 ohms
D. light D. 2 ohms
168. What is the Electric Potential Difference
162. When bulbs are added to a parallel circuit,
of a circuit with 23 ohms and a 14V bat-
the brightness of the bulbs
tery
A. Increases A. 14.0
B. Decreases B. 322.0
C. Remains the same C. 0.6087
D. none of above D. 1.6429
169. What voltage is needed to cause a 2A cur-
163. Current times Resistance equals (I X R)
rent flow through a 10 ohm resistor?
A. Power
A. 5V
B. Voltage B. 0.2V
C. Amperage C. 20V
D. Ohm D. 200V

2
170. P = VR Based on this variant of the 175. The formula to find I when the values of
power equation, what happens to the E and R are known is
power supplied by a circuit when you dou- A. I = E/R
ble the voltage on the circuit?
B. I = RV
A. x2
C. V = IR
B. x4 D. none of above
C. Divide by 2
176. If a substance has a higher number of
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. Divide by 4 electrons than protons on its surface, what
type of charge does it have?
171. Four identical resistors are set up in a par-
A. A positive charge.
allel circuit with 27.5 ohms each. If the
voltage is 18 volts what is the current? B. A negative charge.
A. 4.983 C. A neutral charge

D. No charge at all
B. 2.618
C. 2.918 177. What is the total resistance in a paral-
lel circuit if R1:12 ohms R2:7 ohms R3:8
D. 3.427 ohms
172. Which of these objects is an insulator? A. 2.847

B. 27.0
A. Copper Wire
C. 0.02847
B. Paper Clip
D. 0.0027
C. Steel Pole
178. How to find power
D. Rubber Gloves
A. V=IR
173. When using electricity, what are V, I, and B. R+V/I
R?
C. P=VI
A. Venezuela, India, Republic of Korea D. P= RT
B. Variable, Integer, Real Number
179. What size resistor would produce a 3.7
C. Violet, Indigo, Red amp current flow with a 12.8 volt bat-
D. Voltage, Current Intensity, Resistance tery?
A. 0.3 Ohms
E. Three letters
B. 47.4 Ohms
174. What does an electrical insulator do? C. 3.5 Ohms
A. Lets electricity flow in one direction. D. 12.8 Ohms
B. Does not let electricity flow through it. 180. What word means how hard it is for elec-
C. Lets electricity flow through it when trons to flow through.
light shines on it. A. Current
D. Lets electricity flow through it. B. Voltage

C. Resistance C. 16 S
D. Power D. 6 S

181. In a parallel circuit, when one light goes 186. Power is measured in what unit?
out, the others stay on. Would they get
A. amps
brighter or dimmer?
B. volts
A. brighter
B. dimmer C. watts
C. stay the same D. ohms
D. none of above 187. What is the charge of a proton?

182. If I add more light bulbs to a series circuit A. Postive
what happens? B. Negative
A. The current speeds up and the lights C. Neutral
get brighter
D. none of above
B. The current slows down and the lights
dim lower 188. An electric heater works by passing a cur-
C. The current speeds up and the lights rent of 100 A though a coiled metal wire,
dim lower making it red hot. If the resistance of the
wire is 1.1 ohms, what voltage must be
D. The current slows down and the lights applied to it?
get brighter
A. 110 Volts
183. What would you need to do to the volt-
B. 11 Volts
age if you wanted to increase the current
in a series circuit? C. 0.011 Volts
A. Increase D. 91 Volts
B. Greater 189. Find the current through a 12-ohm circuit
C. Decrease when 24 volts is applied.
D. Smaller A. 24 amps
184. To calculate voltage, multiply and B. 48 amps
A. current, resistance C. 2 amps

B. volts, current D. 8 amps
C. volts, ohms 190. If the current in an electrical circuit is con-
D. ohms, resistance stant, what will happen to the voltage if
the resistance is increased?
185. If the battery produced 12.6 Volts with
A. The voltage will decrease
a current of 2.1 Amps, what would be the
conductance? B. The voltage will be the same
A. 2.1 S C. The voltage will increase
B. 0.16 S D. none of above

191. What is one problem with using a series 196. The force that pushes the electricity
circuit? through a circuit is called
A. It has a lot of series. A. resistance
B. If one light goes down, they all go B. voltage
down! C. current
C. It doesn’t work properly. D. switch
D. There are no problems.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
197. Choose all that are true:If you added
192. If a resistor is added in a SERIES circuit, more batteries to an electric circuit, it
the current on each resistor should would
A. Stay the same A. increase the voltage
B. increase B. decrease the voltage.
C. decrease C. increase the current.
D. none of above D. decrease the current.

E. increase the resistance.
193. If a circuit had 4 D-Cell batteries (each
1.5 V) and a lightbulb with resistance of 198. The voltage supplied to a circuit is 17 V
2 ohms, what is the current that flows and the current running through is 10 A.
through the circuit? What is the power generated?
A. 2 A A. 170 W
B. 3 A B. 170 A
C. 6 A C. 1.7 V
D. 8 A D. 1.7 W
194. What is the voltage of a telephone circuit 199. What type of energy is the electrical en-
that draws 0.017 amps through a resis- ergy from the battery being converted into
tance of 15, 000 ohms? in this radio?
A. 882352.9 volts A. Heat and light
B. 1.1 volts B. Sound and light
C. 2555 volts C. Sound and heat
D. 255 volts D. Potential energy
200. An analogy for electric current is

195. Which equation is correct according to
Ohm’s law? Check all that apply. A. the amount of snow stored high on a
mountain
A. V = IR
B. the rate of snow sliding down the
B. I = R/V
mountain
C. R = I/V
C. rocks, trees, and houses in the path of
D. R = IV the avalanche.
E. I = V/R D. none of above

201. Watts is the unit of 207. The flow of electricity through a conduc-
A. Power tor is called

B. Current A. resistance
C. Voltage B. voltage
D. Resistance C. current
D. source of electric current
202. What does V stand for?
A. Vendetta 208. How much CURRENT does a 1200 W
bread maker draw from a 110 V outlet?
B. Voltage P = IVP = I2RP = V2/R
C. Velocity A. 132000 amps
D. Vector B. 0.09 amps
203. A circuit consists of a 12 V battery con- C. 1200 amps
nected across a single resistor. If the cur- D. 10.9 amps
rent in the circuit is 3 A, calculate the size
of the resistor. 209. I = 24 amps & V = 240 Volts Then, R =
A. 36 ohms Ohms
B. 0.25 ohms A. 24
C. 4 ohms B. 240
D. 12 ohms C. 2.4
D. 10
204. What particle has a negative charge?
A. Protons 210. What uses symbols to represent each
part of a circuit?
B. Neutrons
A. wiring plan
C. Atoms
B. circuit plan
D. Electrons
C. circuit diagram
205. The ability of a substance to resist the D. house plan
flow of current is:
A. electrical resistance 211. Factor which does not affect the resis-
tance of the electric wire:
B. electrically acceptance
A. Type of material Resistivity.
C. electrical current
B. Length of the wire
D. none of above
C. Mass of the material
206. A 10 ohms resistor is powered by a 5-V D. Area of the cross section of the wire
battery. The current flowing through the
source is: 212. Ohm’s Law states that:
A. 10 A A. Current = Voltage x Resistance
B. 50 A B. Resistance = Voltage x Current
C. 2 A C. Power = Voltage x Current
D. 0.5 A D. Voltage = Current x Resistance

213. If a circuit is pulling 40 ohms at 200 volts, 219. How many Volts would we need to pro-
what is the power of the circuit? duce a current flow of 8 Amps through a 6
A. 5.0 Ohm resistor (V=IR, I=V/R, R=V/I)
B. 1000.0 A. 12 volts
C. 200.0 B. 24 volts
D. 40.0 C. 1.3333
NARAYAN CHANGDER
214. What is the total voltage of the battery D. 48 volts
if its 5 resistors produce the follwoing
drops:8V, 2V, 5V, 1.5V and 1.5V? 220. Which of these colors is NOT used in the
A. 4.5 V. resistor value color code?
B. 9 V. A. white
C. 18 V. B. black
D. 36 V.
C. violet
215. When to use the P=I2R formula
D. pink
A. Never
B. If the question only gives you current 221. The mathematical relationship among
and resistance Voltage, Current, and Resistance
C. If the question only gives you voltage A. Faraday’s Law
D. Always B. Tesla’s Law
216. A complete circuit has C. Edison’s Law
A. a motor in it
D. Ohm’s Law
B. a switch in it
C. two bulbs in it 222. The statement which correctly represents
Ohm’s law:
D. no breaks in it
A. V = IR
217. Current times resistance equals(I*R)
A. Power B. V = R/I
B. Voltage C. R = VI
C. Amperage D. I = R/V
D. Ohm
223. What happens to the current in a circuit
218. What is the voltage needed to run a 9.2 as the resistance decreases?
ohm toaster on a 5.5 amps?
A. Current increases
A. 9.2 V
B. Current Decreases
B. 5.06 V
C. 34.14 V C. Current remains the same
D. 50.6 V D. none of above

224. What is the total circuit resistance of the 229. What is a series circuit?
following five resistors connected in se- A. The transfer of electrons from one ob-
ries? R1 = 27 ohmsR2 = 33 ohmsR3 = 51

ject to another
ohmsR4 = 1.2 kohmsR5 = 240 ohmsRt =
Ohms B. A circuit with a single path the current
follows
A. 353.2
C. A circuit that goes in multiple direc-
B. 1551 tions
C. 1.9 K D. A circuit that takes place in a series of
D. none of above events
230. The current through a 10.0-ohm resistor

225. What is the power of a 10V bulb with 5A
is 1.2 amperes. What is the potential dif-
through it?
ference across the resistor, to the nearest
A. 2W volt?
B. 2V A. 12V
C. 50W B. 13V
D. 50A C. 8.3V
D. 0.12V
226. If a resistor in a parallel circuit is in-
creased in value, the voltage in that branch 231. You are given a basic series circuit with a
of the circuit should battery, a switch, and three identical resis-
A. decrease tors. If the circuit is rearranged so that it
is now a parallel circuit, what would hap-
B. increase pen to the current?
C. remain the same A. it would decrease
D. none of above B. it would stay the same
227. An object becomes negatively charged by C. it would increase
A. losing protons D. it would react inversely
B. gaining electrons 232. What unit is used to measure current?

C. losing electrons A. Ohms
D. gaining protons B. Omega
C. Volts
228. According to Ohm’s Law, if you were
to triple the voltage of a circuit without D. Amps
changing the resistance, what would hap- 233. When bulbs are added to a series circuit,
pen to the flow of current? the resistance
A. It would stay the same A. Increases
B. It would increase by 2x B. Decreases
C. It would increase by 3x C. Remains the same
D. It would decrease by 3x D. none of above

234. A student uses a length of wire as a re- A. 112.0

sistor. He makes a second resistor from
B. 3105.0
the same material.To be certain of making
a second resistor of higher resistance, he C. 0.17
should use a piece of wire that is: D. 5.87
A. longer and thicker.
B. longer and thinner. 240. If the battery produced 12.6 Volts and
there was a 6 Ohm resistor, what would
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. shorter and thicker. be the current?
D. shorter and thinner. A. 2.1 Amps
235. The resistance of a 60 watt bulb op- B. 2.4 Amps
erated at 120 volts is approximately
(Hint:use an equation for Electrical Power C. 1.71 Amps
and Ohm’s Law) P = VI and R = V/I D. 15 Amps
A. 720 ohms
241. What is the current if 3600 C of charge
B. 240 ohms passes a point in 17 min?
C. 120 ohms
A. 3.5 A
D. 60 ohms
B. 13.5 A
236. If there are 10 Volts across a 5 Ohm re- C. 23.5 A
sistor, what is the current?
D. 33.5 A
A. 0.5 Amps
B. 2 Amps 242. Electricity costs $0.15 per kilowatt-hour.
C. 50 Amps If a laptop uses 600 watts and you use it
for 6 hours a day, how much does it cost
D. 25 Amps to run the laptop for a week?
237. V = What? A. $0.60
A. Potential energy B. $540
B. Resistance C. $3.78
C. Power D. $25.2
D. Current
243. A home’s central air conditioner has a
238. What does power really mean? power rating of 4kW. The air conditioner
A. Joules transferred / second runs 8 hours a day (201, 600 seconds per
week). How many kW*hrs did it use in a
B. Electrons passed / second
week?
C. Speed of electrons
A. 806, 400 kW*h
D. Energy electrons have
B. 32 kW*h
239. A lamp has a resistance of 23 ohms and is
C. 224 kW*h
plugged in to a 135 V power supply. What
is the current in the lamp? D. 700 kW*h

244. What do we call the different bits and 249. Voltage and resistance in a circuit deter-
pieces that go together to make a circuit? mine how much is in the circuit.

A. companies A. resistance
B. computers B. current
C. components C. voltage
D. compartments D. none of above
245. Volt car battery pushes charge through 250. What is the difference in finding total re-
the headlight circuit resistance of 10 ohms. sistance in a series circuit vs. in a Parallel
How much current is passing through the circuit?
circuit? A. No Difference
A. 0.8 A B. For series use inverse equation, for
B. 1.2 A parallel add resistances up.
C. For series add up resistances, for par-
C. 22 A
allel add up resistances
D. 120 A
D. For series add up resistances, for par-
246. The ratio of the voltage across a conduc- allel use inverse equation
tor to the current in the conductor is called
251. Energy Review:Watts is the same as
(V/I) is called
A. Joules per second
A. conductivity
B. Voltage per second
B. resistance
C. Current per second
C. charge
D. Meters per second
D. power
252. The process of transferring charge be-
247. If the battery produced 12.6 Volts what tween objects by touching
would be the current flow for a 6 Ohm re-
A. charging by induction
sistor?
B. static discharge
A. 2.1 Amps
C. charging by contact
B. 2.4 Amps
D. proton
C. 1.71 Amps
D. 15 Amps 253. Voltage divided by Resistance(V / R)
A. Current
248. In an experiment you hold your resis-
B. Power
tance constant and change your voltage to
fill out a chart on current. The independent C. Ohms
variable would be D. Watts
A. number of trials
254. What is the unit for measuring the poten-
B. resistance tial difference across a resistor?
C. current A. Volts
D. voltage B. Coulombs

C. Amp 260. Voltage divided by Resistance EQUA-

D. Volts TION (V / R) equals
A. Current
255. In a series circuit, with a consent 10 volt
B. Power
power supply, what would happen to the
Current if the Resistance is increased? C. Ohms
A. Go up D. Watts
B. Go down
NARAYAN CHANGDER
261. A parallel circuit is
C. Go sideways A. A closed circuit that exists in a parallel
D. Nothing universe
B. A closed circuit that follows one path
256. A thicker wire means in resistance. and completes the circuit
A. a decrease C. A closed circuit that divides and con-
B. an increase quers the electrical power of the circuit
C. no change D. A closed circuit that divides into two or
paths before recombining to complete the
D. none of above
circuit
257. Which symbol and unit of measurement
262. What word means how much energy is
are used for voltage?
given to / removed from the electrons.
A. symbol:V; unit:A
A. Current
B. symbol:R; unit:
B. Voltage
C. symbol:V; unit:V C. Resistance
D. symbol:R; unit:V D. Power
258. unit of resistance 263. A panini press with a resistance of 20.6
A. ohm ohms is plugged into a 134 V power
source. After 17 minutes, what is the
B. ampere
power used by the circuit?
C. volt
A. 14818.05825
D. joule
B. 889083.4951
259. Which statement describes the relation- C. 871.6504854
ship of resistance and current?
D. 110.5825243
A. Resistance is directly proportional to
current because R = V/I 264. According to Ohm’s Law (V = IR), increas-
ing the resistance
B. Resistance is inversely proportional to
current because R = V/I. A. decreases the current
C. Resistance is directly proportional to B. increases the current

current because R = VI. C. alternately increasing and decreasing
D. Resistance is inversely proportional to the current
current because R = VI. D. does not affect the current

265. What is the name for the potential differ- A. 6 ohms

ence that forces electrons to flow through B. 2 ohms
a circuit?

C. 150 ohms
A. Voltage
D. 50 ohms
B. Capacitance
C. Resistance 271. Voltage multiplied by electric Current(V x
I) equals
D. Current
A. Current
266. Which instrument is used to measure Cur- B. Power
rent in a circuit?
C. Resistance
A. Ammeter
D. Watts
B. Multimeter
272. How does flipping a switch turn a light
C. Voltmeter
on?
A. It steps up the voltage
267. A great conductor of energy is: B. It generates an electromagnetic field
A. wood C. It opens a circuit
B. plastic D. It closes a circuit
C. metal
273. A toaster oven is plugged into a 120 V
D. cloth outlet and has a resistance of 12 ohms.
How much power does the toaster oven
268. How can you increase the resistance of a
use? (hint:2 steps)
wire?
A. 10W
A. Increasing the temperature of the
wire B. 1200W
B. Lower the resistivity of the material C. 132W
C. Decrease the length of the wire D. 600W
D. Increase the cross sectional area 274. Ohm’s law describes the relationship be-
tween which quantities?
269. When three 20-ohm resistors are wired
in parallel and connected to a 10-volt A. voltage, resistance, and ohms
source, the total resistance of the circuit B. resistance, current, and amperes
will be C. current, voltage, and resistance
A. less than 20 ohms D. amperes, ohms, and current
B. 60 ohms
275. Point to be kept in mind for verification
C. between 20 and 60 ohms of Ohm’s Law is:
D. more than 60 ohms A. Ammeter and voltmeter should be con-
270. The battery is 30 volts. There are 5 amps nected in series
of electricity running through the circuit. B. Ammeter should be connected in se-
How many ohms is the resistor? ries and voltmeter in parallel

C. Ammeter should be connected in par- D. the force will decrease to 1/4 the orig-
allel and voltmeter in series inal strength
D. Ammeter and voltmeter should be con-
281. A battery’s voltage is the amount of
nected in parallel
A. energy
276. move freely throughout a conductor.
B. charge
A. protons
C. energy per unit of charge
B. neutrons
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. power
C. electrons
D. atoms 282. The unit of voltage is
A. Watt
277. Compared to the total resistance of two
5-ohm resistors connected in series, the to- B. Coulomb
tal resistance of two 5-ohm resistors con- C. Volt
nected in parallel is
D. Ampere
A. less
283. What size resistor would produce a 3
B. greater
Amp current flow with a 12 Volt battery
C. the same (V=IR, I=V/R, R=V/I)
D. none of above A. 1 Ohm
278. A circuit contains a 1.5 volt battery and B. 3 Ohms
a bulb with a resistance of 3 ohms. Calcu- C. 4 Ohms
late the current.
D. 12 Ohms
A. 0.5 Amps
B. 2 Amps 284. Two charges separated a distance of 1.0
meter exert a 4-N force on each other. If
C. 20 Amps the charges are pushed to a separation of
D. 4.5 Amps 1/3 meter, the force on each charge will
be
279. Unit for current
A. 2 N
A. Ohm
B. 6 N
B. Ampere
C. 3 N
C. Volt
D. 36 N
D. Watt
285. An alarm clock draws 0.5 A of current
280. What will happen to the Electrostatic
when connected to a 120 volt circuit. Cal-
Force between 2 objects if the distance be-
culate its resistance.
tween them is is quadrupled?
A. 0.004 ohms
A. the force will decrease to 1/16 the
original strength B. 60 ohms
B. the force will increase by 1/16 C. 120.5 ohms
C. the force will increase by 4 D. 240 ohms

286. The equivalent resistance for a group of 291. What unit is used to measure voltage?
parallel resistors is A. Ohms

A. Less than any resistor in the group.
B. Omega
B. Equal to the smallest resistance in the
C. Volts
group.
D. Amps
C. Larger than any resistor in the group.
D. Equal to the largest resistance in the 292. If the battery produced 12 Volts what
group. would be the current flow for a 6 Ohm re-
sistor? Using the equation V = I * R, how
287. What is the first step to solving for a Par- would you set it up?
allel circuite
A. V = 12 * 6
A. Add the currents to find the total cur-
B. V = 12 / 6
rents
C. 12 = I * 6
B. Find the current through each branch
I= v/r for each branch D. 6 = I * 12
C. Use the one current to find the voltage 293. According to Ohm’s Law, current equals
drop across each resistor the voltage divided by the
D. Check by adding resistors using in-
A. Resistance
verse law
B. Inductance
288. Equivalent resistance for two 20K Ohm
C. Capacitance
resistors in parallel?
D. Power
A. 10 Ohms
E. Conductance
B. 20K Ohms
C. 10K Ohms 294. How much current passes through a
12-ohm circuit operating at 3.0 volts?
D. 40K Ohms
(Hint:think of Ohm’s Law) I = V/R
289. Total resistance in a series circuit A. 0.25 A
A. Rt = R1 + R2 + R3 B. 0.75 A
B. 1/Rt = 1/R1 + 1/R2 C. 3.0 A
C. Rt = R1 X R2 / R1 + R2 D. 4.0 A
D. Rt = RN / RV
295. Ohm’s Law describes how Voltage, Cur-
290. As the resistance of a circuit decrease rent, and Resistance are related by the
(voltage remains constant), the current equation I = V/R. Which equation would
will help us find resistance?
A. increase A. R = V x I
B. decrease B. R = I / V
C. stay the same C. R = V / I

296. What current flows through a hair dryer 301. As the voltage increases, the current
plugged into a 120 Volt circuit if it has a A. increases
resistance of 25 ohms?
B. decreases
A. 0.2 A
C. stays the same
B. 4.8 A
D. none of above
C. 95 A
302. Which subatomic particle ‘flows’ in a con-
D. 3000 A
NARAYAN CHANGDER
ductive wire?
297. In the illustration of the dam, what does A. Protons
the water moving across the wheel (tur- B. Neutrons
bine) NOT represent? C. Morons
A. Momentum D. Electrons
B. Work
303. An electric iron draws a current of 5 amps
C. Power and has a resistance of 20 ohms. The
D. Watts amount of energy used by the iron in 40
seconds is
298. Two electrons placed near each other will A. 100 J
A. Push away B. 500 J
B. Attract C. 4, 000J
C. Stay in place D. 20, 000J
D. none of above 304. If there is a parallel circuit with three re-

sistors that are 34ohm each. And with a
299. An insulator is a material that: 12v battery what is the current of this cir-
A. Transfers thermal and electrical en- cuit
ergy A. 1.0588
B. Transfers electrical energy and slows B. 11.333
thermal energy C. 0.0882
C. Slows electrical energy and allows D. 1.0
thermal energy to pass
305. This circuit has more than one loop. When
D. Slows thermal and electrical energy one light goes out, the others stay on.
from transfering
A. closed circuit
300. If you increase the voltage across a resis- B. series circuit
tor, what will happen to the current?
C. parallel circuit
A. The current will decrease. D. open circuit
B. The current will increase.
306. Ohms Law
C. The current will stay the same.
A. I = VR where V=Current and R is re-
D. none of above sistance

B. V=IR, where I =Voltage and R is Cur- B. 3 ohms

rent C. 27 ohms

C. R = V/I where V =Voltage and I is D. 9 ohms
resistance
312. A laptop operates on 12V and 1.5 Amps.
D. V=IR, where I =Current and R is re-
What is the resistance in the laptop?
sistance
A. 13.5 ohms
307. An analogy for voltage would be
B. 18 ohms
A. The speed of a rivers flow
C. 6 ohms
B. The amount of water stored behind a D. 8 ohms
dam
C. The rocks and waterwheels in the river 313. What happens to the voltage in a circuit
as the resistance decreases?
D. none of above A. remains the same

B. decreases
308. A 1.5 volt battery is connected to a
C. increases
10 ohm resistor. What current passes
through the resistor? (Hint:think of Ohm’s D. none of above
Law) I = V/R
314. If there are 40 Volts and 5 Amps running
A. 6.7 A through an electrical circuit, what is the re-
B. 150 A sistance of the circuit?
C. 0.15 A A. 6 Ω
D. 15 A B. 8 Ω
C. 12 Ω
309. To increase the current in a circuit, which
D. 0.06 Ω
can be increased?
A. voltage 315. What is the resistance of a lightbulb that
experiences 9 Volts and 3 amps of cur-
B. resistance
rent? R = V / I
C. interference
A. 1/3 ohms
D. ohms B. 3 ohms
310. The flow of electricity requires a C. 27 ohms
A. complete path D. 9 ohms
B. incomplete path 316. In Ohms Law, What does the “I” Stand
C. insulated current For?
D. complex circuit A. Iridescence
B. Current
311. What is the resistance of a lightbulb that
experiences 9 Volts and 3 amps of cur- C. Voltage
rent? D. Capacitance
A. 1/3 ohms E. Resistance

317. Resistance is measured in? A. more (more backed up electrons, since

A. Volts there are less options for them to go)
B. Amps B. less
C. Ohms C. the same
D. Watts D. none of above
318. Ohms law states that 323. Circuit A has four 3.0-ohm resistors con-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. It’s time to end class. nected in series with a 24-volt battery,
and circuit B has two 3.0-ohm resistors
B. a standard color code associates each
connected in series with a 24-volt bat-
color with a specific decimal digit (0-10)
tery. Compared to the total potential drop
C. that current in a circuit is equal to volt- across circuit A, the total potential drop
age divided by the resistance. across circuit B is
D. a resistor conducts electric current. A. four times as great
319. What letter represents Current? B. twice as great
A. A C. the same
B. I D. one-half as great
C. R
324. If the resistance in a circuit with constant
D. E
voltage increases, the current will
320. The current through a heater is 12 A A. Increase
when it is plugged into a 120 V source.
What is the resistance of the heater? B. Decrease
A. 0.1 ohms C. Its stays the same

B. 10 ohms D. Not eneough information
C. 132 ohms
325. What would happen if in a circuit the volt-
D. 1440 ohms age is increase?
321. resistors are connected to a 9 V battery A. The time would increase
n a series circuit, the first resistor uses 6 B. The current would increase
V, the second uses 2 V. How much voltage
does the third resistor use? C. The current would decrease
A. 1 V D. The current would stay the same
B. 2 V
326. Calculate the voltage applied when a 60
C. 3 V watt light-bulb uses a current of 5 amps
D. 9 V A. 300 volts
322. In a parallel circuit, when one light goes B. 30 volts
out, the others stay on. Now that there
C. 12 volts
are less paths for the electrons, is there
more or less total resistance? D. 0.08 volts

327. What is the voltage drop across one 40 332. What size resistor would produce a 3
ohm resistor in parallel with 2 other 40 Amp current flow with a 12 Volt battery
ohm resistors if the battery on the circuit (remember:V = I x R, or I = V/R, or R =

is 69 volts. V/I)
A. 69.0 A. 1 Ohm
B. 40.0 B. 3 Ohms
C. 1.725 C. 4 Ohms
D. 5.175 D. 12 Ohms
328. As the number of resistors increase, the 333. All of the following would make a GOOD
total resistance and the total current conductor of electricity except which of the
following
A. Increase, decrease A. A silver key
B. Decrease, increase B. A copper wire
C. Increase, increase C. A glass window
D. Decrease, decrease D. none of above
334. Identify the insulator below.

329. What is another name for “potential dif-
ference”? A. aluminum foil
A. current B. paperclip
B. voltage C. rubber eraser
C. resistance D. none of above
D. battery 335. What is the potential difference?
330. When a wire carries electricity it can get A. Current

hot. This is because: B. Power
A. Protons transfer energy to the metal C. Voltage
B. Electrons transfer energy to the metal D. Resistance
C. Electrons stop moving randomly. 336. Three different resistors are connected
D. Electricity is created by moving heat. in series in a circuit containing a battery.
Which statement is true for each resistor?
331. When only one lightbulb blows out, an
A. The current through each is the same.
entire string of decorative lights goes out.
The lights in this string must be connected B. The power used in each is the same.
in C. The voltage across each is the same.
A. series with multiple current pathways D. The capacitance across each is the
B. series with one current pathway same
C. parallel with multiple current path- 337. What is the unit of measurement for re-
ways sistance?
D. parallel with one current pathway A. Voltage

B. Ampere 343. What is current?

C. Watts A. the amount of push the electrical
D. Ohms source supplies to the circuit
B. how much a given device resists the
338. What is the power of a 25V bulb with 4A flow of electric current
through it?
C. flow of electric charge
A. 100W
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. 100V
C. 6.3W 344. According to Ohm’s Law (V = IR), increas-
ing the voltage
D. 6.3A
A. decreases the current
339. If a toaster produces 12 ohms of resis- B. increases the current
tance in a 120-volt circuit, what is the
amount of current in the circuit? C. alternately increasing and decreasing
the current
A. 10 Amps
D. does not affect the current
B. 0.1 Amps
C. 1440 Amps 345. Which two changes to a metal wire both
increase resistance?
D. 1 Amp
A. decreasing its length and increasing
340. What is the voltage difference in a circuit its temperature
that uses 2420 W of power if 11 A of cur- B. increasing its length and decreasing
rent flows into the circuit? its temperature
A. 220 v C. decreasing its thickness and increas-
B. 0.004 v ing its temperature
C. 2431 v D. increasing its thickness and decreas-
D. 532400 v ing its temperature
341. The unit of measure for electrical pres- 346. Which best describes a simple series cir-
sure is cuit?
A. volts A. Electricity flows along one pathway.
B. amps B. The flow of electricity comes from the

switch.
C. watts
C. Electricity flows along many pathways.
D. ohms
D. The flow of electricity comes from the
342. A resistor’s first three colour bands are light bulb.
brown, black, and red. What is its value?
347. If the voltage across a fixed value of re-
A. 10 ohms sistance is increased five times, what does
B. 10 Kohms the current do?
C. 200 ohms A. It increases by a factor of five.
D. 1000 ohms B. It decreases by a factor of five.

C. It stays the same. B. 288A

D. Not enough information C. 0.5A

348. While operating at 120 volts, an electric D. none of above
toaster has a resistance of 15 ohms. The 353. What is the resistance of an object that
power used by the toaster is draws 0.24 A when connected to a 120
A. 8.0 W volt circuit?
B. 120 W A. 0.024 ohms
C. 960 W B. 28.8 ohms
D. 1800 W C. 124 ohms
349. A resistor is connected across a 50 V D. 500 ohms
source. What is the current in the resis-
354. For which circuit do you have to inverse
tor if the color code is red, orange, orange,
the resistors to find the equivalent resis-
silver?
tance?
A. 2.2 mA
A. series circuit
B. 2 mA
B. parallel circuit
C. 217mA
C. both series and parallel circuits
D. none of above
D. neither series and parallel circuits
350. If you increase the voltage of a circuit,
355. Charging by friction requires rubbing.
what happens?
Charging by contact requires
A. Current decreases
A. rubbing
B. Current increases
B. touching
C. Electrons disappear
C. no contact
D. Bulbs get dimmer
D. none of above
351. A 3.0-ohm resistor and a 6.0-ohm resis-
356. In the illustration of the dam, what does
tor are connected in series in an operat-
the water moving through the pipe repre-
ing electric circuit. If the current through
sent?
the 3.0-ohm resistor is 4.0 amperes, what
is the potential difference across the 6.0- A. Power
ohm resistor? B. Kinetic energy
A. 12 V C. Watts
B. 24 V D. Current
C. 2.0 V
357. In a flashlight, a battery provides a total
D. 8.0 V of 3 volts to a bulb. If the flashlight bulb
352. If the battery in a circuit is 24 V and the has an operating resistance of 5 ohms, the
resistance is 12 ohms, what is the current, current through the bulb is
I? A. 0.3 A
A. 2A B. 0.6 A

C. 1.5 A 363. When a resistor in a series circuit is

D. 1.7 A replaced by another resistor with an in-
creased resistance value, the total circuit
358. The rate at which an electrical device con- current will
verts energy from one form to another is A. stay the same
called
B. decrease
A. electrical energy C. increase
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. electrical power D. double in value
C. electrical resistance
364. Electric current is the flow of:
D. voltage regulation
A. electrons
359. .010 in Engineering notation. B. protons
A. 1m C. neutrons
B. 10m D. none of these
C. 100m 365. Opposite charges
D. .001m A. Attract
B. Repel
360. If voltage in a circuit is constant, the cur-
rent can be cut to half of its original value C. Don’t exist
by changing the resistance to its origi- D. none of above
nal value.
366. Aretha measures a circuit at 110 V and
A. one-fourth
240 . Using Ohm’s law, what can she cal-
B. one-half culate for the circuit?
C. two times A. voltage
D. four times B. ohms
C. resistance
361. How many Volts would it take to push 1
Amp through a resistance of 1 Ohm D. current
A. 10 volts 367. If you decreases the resistance of a cir-

B. 1 volt cuit, what happens?
A. Current decreases
C. 48 volts
B. Current increases
D. 5 volts
C. Electrons disappear
362. An object that is positively charged con- D. Bulbs get brighter
tains more protons than electrons.
368. Why are LEDs being used so frequently?
A. True
(Check all that apply)
B. False
A. They are more efficient than tradi-
C. I need more information tional bulbs.
D. none of above B. They give off less heat.

3.5 Factors on which resistance of a conductor depends on 341
C. They last longer than traditional bulbs. 372. What is the power if the electrical poten-
D. They use less energy. tial difference is 100 V and the resistance
is 25 ohms?

369. Electric power is measured in
A. 6.25
A. Watts
B. 400.0
B. Volts
C. 25.0
C. Amperes
D. Ohms D. 100.0
370. What is not needed in order to create a 373. What is the main difference between con-
working circuit? ductors and insulators
A. battery (power source) A. Surface
B. lightbulb B. Free electrons
C. current C. Block electrons
D. closed circuit D. Allow flow of electrons.
371. Which bulb would have a SMALLER cur-
374. what is the power of a lamp whose cur-
rent flowing through it if the voltage was
rent is 6 A and the voltage across it is 120
the same:a 20-watt light bulb or a 60-
V?
watt light bulb?
A. 20W A. 120 W
B. 60W B. 720 W
C. same C. 16 W
D. can’t determine D. 10 W
3.5 Factors on which resistance of a conductor depends

on
1. Materials that have a high electrical resis- D. It is reduced by a factor of 4.
tivity
3. measure of a material’s ability to conduct
A. must be at a low temperature
or transmit electricity
B. must be at a high temperature
A. electrical power
C. Examples are copper & silver
B. electrical drift
D. Examples are tungsten & nichrome
C. electrical conductivity
2. The length of a certain wire is kept same D. electrical current
while its radius is doubled. What is the
new resistance of this wire? 4. Consider a wire length L, cross-sectional
A. It is increased by a factor of 2. area A and a resistance R. A second wire
at the same temperature has a length 2L
B. It is increased by a factor of 4. and a cross-sectional are of 1/2A. What
C. It is reduced by a factor of 2. is the resistance of the second wire

A. R 10. The electrical resistance pf a metallic con-

B. 2R ductor is inversely proportional to its
C. 1/2 R A. Temperature
D. 4R B. Length
C. Cross-sectional area
5. graphical representation of a circuit using
D. Resistivity
standardized symbols for components and
solid lines for the wire connecting the com- 11. complete path that an electrical current
NARAYAN CHANGDER
ponents travels along
A. resistance A. resistance
B. circuit B. circuit
C. resistivity C. resistivity
D. schematic D. schematic
6. Resistivity of a wire depends on: 12. In alternating current the motion of the
charges
A. length
A. continuously changes in the forward
B. material
and reverse directions
C. cross sectional area
B. is equal to the speed of light
D. none of the above C. is greater than the speed of light
7. What happens to resistance when the D. in the direction of the electric field
length of the wire increases?
13. What is the opposition to the flow of cur-
A. Stays the same rent in a conductor?
B. Increases A. power
C. Decreases B. resistance
D. none of above C. power
8. The resistance of a piece of wire does NOT D. potential difference
depend on: 14. The equation for a material with circular
A. material cross sectional area is A=
B. mass A. π r2
C. length B. π r
π d2
D. cross sectional area C. 2
9. If the resistance remains the same in a cir- D. π r3

cuit but the current increases, what hap- 15. nonohmic circuit device that allows current
pened to the voltage? flow in only one direction
A. increases A. diode
B. decreases B. non-ohmic
C. remains the same C. circuit
D. unknown D. ohmic

16. flow of charge through a cross-sectional B. How shiny it is

area divided by the area C. Colour

A. drift acceleration D. none of above
B. drift velocity
22. Which of the following is NOT included in
C. conventional current the factors affecting resistance?
D. current density A. Temperature
17. Which one is a poor conductor of electric- B. Length
ity? C. Cross-sectional area
A. Human body D. Color
B. Dry Wood
23. current that flows through a circuit from
C. Sea water the positive terminal of a battery through
D. Earth the circuit to the negative terminal of the
battery
18. What is the correct formular in getting the
A. drift acceleration
resistance?
B. drift velocity
A. V=IxR
C. conventional current
B. ρ = R AL
P D. current density
C. I = V
D. None 24. The resistance of a piece of wire does not
depend on
19. rate of change of energy in an electric cir- A. wire material
cuit per unit of time
B. wire mass
A. electrical power
C. wire length
B. electrical drift
D. wire cross sectional area
D. electrical current 25. The type of current where charges shake
back and forth in a circuit
20. The length of a certain conductor of re- A. Alternating Current
sistance 100 is doubled and its cross-
sectional area is halved. Its new resis- B. Direct Current
tance is C. Voltage
A. 100 D. Switchback Current
B. 50 26. The type of current where charges flow in
C. 200 one direction
D. 400 A. Direct Current
21. What other factor of a wire could affect B. Alternating Current

its resistance? C. Electron Flow
A. Material its made of D. Voltage

27. Ampere second could be the unit of 33. rate at which charge flows, I=dQdt
A. power A. electrical power
B. conductance
B. electrical drift
C. charge
D. energy
D. electrical current
28. Kirchhoff’s current law is due to the con-
servation of
NARAYAN CHANGDER
34. Pieces of aluminum, copper, gold, and sil-
A. charge ver wire each have the same length and
B. energy the same cross-sectional area. Which wire
has the lowest resistance at 20◦ C?
C. mass
A. silver
D. momentum
B. gold
29. a measure of how much an object or circuit
opposes the flow of charge C. copper
A. current D. aluminum
B. circuit
35. What symbol represented the unit Ohm?
C. resistance
D. difference A. β
30. Which copper wire has the lowest resis- B. α

tance? C. Ω
A. 1 metre of 1 mm diameter wire
D. ρ
B. 0.5 metre of 1 mm diameter wire
C. 0.5 metre of 0.5 mm diameter wire 36. Materials that have a high electrical resis-
tance
D. 1 metere of 0.5 mm diameter wire
A. less length
31. The unit to measure the resistivity of a
wire is B. less tempareture
A. ohms C. more thickness
B. Volt D. less cross sectional area
C. ohms.m
D. ohms.s 37. A 0.686-meter-long wire has a cross-
sectional area of meter2 and a resistance
32. electric property that impedes current; for of 0.125 ohm at 20◦ Celsius. This wire
ohmic materials, it is the ratio of voltage could be made of
to current, R=V/I
A. aluminum
A. circuit
B. copper
B. resistance
C. resistivity C. tungsten
D. schematic D. nichrome

3.6 Series and parallel resistors 345
38. What is the resistance of a wire when its 43. What is the unit of used to specify the
length is reduced by half? amount of resistance?

A. Halved A. Resistance
B. Quartered B. Ampere
C. Doubled C. Volts
D. Quadrupled D. Ohm
39. What happens to a resistor when the tem- 44. Three 2 Ohm resistors are placed in se-
perature is increased? ries.What is the total resistance of the cir-
A. Increases cuit?
B. decreases A. 2 Ohms
C. stay the same B. 6 Ohms
D. vary randomly C. 24 Ohms

D. Depends on the battery
40. What property of a wire could affect its
resistivity? 45. The length of a certain wire is doubled
A. Material its made of while its radius is kept constant. What is
the new resistance of this wire?
B. its length
A. It is 2 times as large.
C. its cross-sectional area
B. It is 3 times as large.
D. all of these
C. It is 4 times as large.
41. empirical relation stating that the current I D. It is 1/2 as large.
is proportional to the potential difference
V; it is often written as V=IR, where R is 46. Two bulbs marked 200 watt-250 volts
the resistance and 100 watt-250 volts are joined in se-
A. ohmic ries to 250 volts supply. Power consumed
in circuit is
B. nonohmic
A. 33 W
C. ohm
B. 67 W
D. Ohm’s law
C. 100 W
42. A circuit contains two un-equal resistances D. 300 W
in parallel
A. current is same in both 47. This device is used to measure the resis-
tance of a circuit?
B. larger current flows in larger resistor
A. Ammeter
C. potential difference across each is
same B. Voltmeter
D. smaller resistance has smaller conduc- C. Ohmmeter

tance. D. Power meter
3.6 Series and parallel resistors

1. If a series circuit has a resistance of 20 6. What is the variable with variable symbol
ohms and a voltage of 30v is applied the R?
current would be?
A. Current
A. 1.5A B. Voltage
B. 0.67A C. Resistance
C. 60A D. None of the Above
D. 6A
NARAYAN CHANGDER
7. If a circuit has 3 resistors in series and
2. The formula used to calculate Ohms Law is R1 is 10 Ohms R2 is 3 Ohms and R3 is
7 Ohms, if a current of 2A flows, what
A. V = I × R would be the voltage across each resis-
B. Uo = VI tor?
C. P = I ×V A. V1 = 15v, V2 = 9v, V3 = 14v
D. I = V × R B. V1 = 20v, V2 = 6v, V3 = 14v
C. V1 = 40v, V2 = 6v, V3 = 14v
3. As resistor are added in series to a circuit,
the total resistance will D. V1 = 20v, V2 = 6v, V3 = 16v
A. decrease 8. As more resistors are added in series to

B. increase a constant voltage source, the power sup-
plied by the source
C. stay the same
A. increases.
D. none of above
B. decreases.
4. Several light bulbs are connected in series C. does not change.
across a 115 V source of emf. What is the
D. increases for a time and then starts to
equivalent resistance if the current in the
decrease.
circuit is 1.70 A?
A. 79.5 9. Suppose you have a 100. ohm resistor
parallel to two 100. ohm resistors in se-
B. 67.6
ries. what is their total resistance?
C. 59.3
A. 66.7 ohms
D. 30.8 B. 300. ohms
5. If a circuit has 3 resistors in parallel and C. 69.69 ohms
R1 is 10 Ohms R2 is 3 Ohms and R3 is 7 D. 600. ohms
Ohms, if the P.D is 24v, what would be
the total current? 10. The third color band is a or
A. 22A A. Gold or Silver
B. 13.8A B. Green or Blue
C. 16.3A C. 2k or 5k ohms
D. 22.6A D. multiplier or number of zeros

11. In a parallel circuit which of the following 16. A piece of wire of resistance R is cut into
is the same value throughout the circuit? five equal parts. These parts are then con-
nected in parallel. If the equivalent resis-

A. Voltage
tance of this combination is R’, then the
B. Current ratio R/R’ is
C. Resistance A. 1/25
D. Charge B. 1/5
12. A 2.0-ohm resistor and a 4.0-ohm resis- C. 5

tor are connected in series with a 12-volt D. 25
battery. If the current through the 2.0-
ohm resistor is 2.0 amperes, the current 17. The voltage across a resistor of resistance
through the 4.0-ohm resistor is 2 Ohms is 4 V, the current through this
resistor is:
A. 1.0 A
A. 0.5A
B. 4.0 A
B. 1A
C. 2.0 A
C. 2A
D. 3.0 A
D. none of above
13. How to you calculate the total resistance
in a series circuit? 18. If the voltage is increased and the resis-
tance stays the same, current will
A. R1 + R2+ R3
A. Increase
B. R1-R2-R3
B. Decrease
C. 1/R1 + 1/R2 + 1/R3
C. Stay the same
D. R1 = R2 = R3
D. Not enough info
14. What three things are required in an elec-
trical circuit 19. What are the color codes for a 470k ohm
resistor?
A. A source
A. Yellow, Violet, Yellow
B. A load
B. Orange, Grey, Orange
C. an earth electrode
C. Yellow, Violet, Orange
D. A means of transmission
D. Orange, Grey, Yellow
E. An alternator
20. With three 10 resistors connected in series
15. Ohms law states that the current and volt- with a 30 volt cell, the total circuit current
age in a circuit are? will equal
A. Inversely proportional A. 300 amps
B. Directly proportional B. 1 amp
C. Not related C. 3 amps
D. Of no importance D. none of above

21. A battery of 6V is connected in series with 26. If we were to measure the voltage lost
resisters of 0.1 ohm, 0.15 ohm, 0.2 ohm, across the load we would call this the
0.25 ohm and 6 ohm. How much current or the ?
would flow through the 0.3 ohm resistor?
A. lost voltage
A. 20 A
B. voltage drop
B. 2.22A
C. potential difference
C. 1A
D. positive difference
NARAYAN CHANGDER
22. What is the color code for a Orange, Black, 27. Thick copper wire used as connecting wires
Red resistor? for studying the dependence of current on
voltage across a resistor because it has
A. 3k Ohms
A. low resistance
B. 200 Ohms
B. high resistance
C. 300 Ohms
D. 2K Ohms C. zero resistance
D. infinite resistance
23. What is the total resistance of two 5000.
ohms in series and in parallel to one 5000. 28. lamps, each of resistance 8 are connected
ohm resistor? in series with a 240 V supply, in order to
A. 3300. ohms decorate a tree. The current in each lamp
B. 6666. ohms is
C. 3333. ohms A. 2.0 A
D. 6000. ohms B. 0.75 A
24. When unequal resistors are connected in C. 1.0 A

parallel in a circuit, D. 1.33 A
A. the same current always runs through
each resistor. 29. With three 10 resistors connected in series
with a 30 volt power supply, the total cir-
B. the potential drop is always the same cuit current will equal
across each resistor.
A. 300 amps
C. the largest resistance has the largest
current through it. B. 1 amp
D. the power generated in each resistor C. 150 amps
is the same. D. 1 millamp
25. Two electric bulbs have resistances in the
30. What is the total resistance of three 10,
ratio 1:2. If they are joined in series, the
000. ohms in parallel
energy consumed in them is in the ratio
A. 2:1 A. 33, 333. ohms
B. 1:2 B. 3.1 ∗ 107 ohms
C. 1:1 C. 3.33333 ∗ 1014 ohms
D. 4:1 D. 3, 333.3 ohms

3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 349
31. This circuit has only one path for current to 35. Parallel circuits are
flow A. a circuit that has only one path for cur-

A. series rent to travel
B. parallel B. a circuit that does not allow electricity
to travel through it
C. combination
C. has more than one path for current to
D. split travel
D. magnets that cause electric current
32. If a series circuit has 3 resistors and R1 is
10 Ohms R2 is 3 Ohms and R3 is 7 Ohms. 36. It is preferable to connect bulbs in in
What would be the total voltage of the cir- domestic circuits
cuit if a current of 2A flows.
A. Series
A. 25v B. Parallel
B. 40v C. Both series and parallel
C. 30v D. neither series and parallel
D. 120v 37. Two devices are connected between two
points say A and B in parallel. The physi-
33. What is the tolerance for a Green, Red, cal quantity that will remain the same be-
Black, Gold resistor? tween the two points is
A. 1% A. current
B. 20% B. voltage
C. 5% C. resistance
D. 10% D. None of these
38. What is the resistance for a Red, Brown,

34. What does emf stand for
Black resistor?
A. Electronic magnetic fiel A. 21 Ohms
B. Elecrical magnetic field B. 210 Ohms
C. Electro motive force C. 12 Ohms
D. Electro motive field D. 120 Ohms
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors

1. What is your general rule of thumb for a 2. What is the correct formula to calculate
starter voltage drop test? current?
A. Above 20v A. I = V × R
B. Below 9.6v B. I = VR
C. 9.6amps C. I = VR 1 1 1 1
Req = 5 + 20 Req
4
= 20 1
+ 20 =
5 20
D. above 9.6v 20 Req = 5 = 4Ω

D. none of above 8. Four cylindrical wires of different sizes

are made of the same material. Which of
3. Batteries convert blank to blank energy the following combinations of length and
A. potential energy cross-sectional area of one of the wires
will result in the smallest resistance?
B. Electrical potential
A. Length:3LArea:3a
C. chemical electrical
B. Length:3LArea:6a
D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. Length:6LArea:3a
4. Insulators have very resistance and D. Length:6LArea:6a
conductors have very resistance.
9. A load is an item that consumes (uses) the
A. high and high power created by a what?
B. high and low A. the sun
C. low and low B. a voltage source
D. low and high C. a voltage regulator
D. a factory
5. The small particles that travel through a
circuit are called 10. A negatively charged plastic comb is
A. electrons brought close to, but does not touch, a
small piece of paper. If the comb and
B. dust the paper are attracted to each other, the
C. wires charge on the paper
D. none of above A. must be positive

B. must be negative
6. Which of the following is an example of a
C. may be neutral or negative
resistor?
D. may be neutral or positive
A. battery
B. light bulb 11. The resistance of a conductor can be deter-
mined if blank are known
C. wire
A. current and amps
D. switch
B. voltage and current
7. Two electrically charged identical-sized C. energy and current
metal spheres, A (charge of-4) and B D. voltage and potential difference
(charge of +8). If the spheres are brought
into contact, which sphere will have a net 12. A positively charged rod is held near the
gain of electrons? knob of a neutral electroscope. What best
A. both A and B describes what will happen to the leaves?
A. the leaves will spread apart and be
B. neither
positive
C. only A
B. the leaves will spread apart and be
D. only B negative

C. the leaves will stay closed and be pos- 18. As the resistance of a resistor in series in-
itive creases, the measured voltage across that
resistor will

D. the leaves will stay closed and be neg-
ative A. increase
13. Based on KCL, currents will be regarded as B. decrease
negative or vice versa while C. stay the same
A. Currents entering the node
D. none of above
B. Currents leaving the node
C. Currents broke the node 19. What is the same in a parallel circuit?
D. Currents have negative value A. Amps

E. all answer is wrong B. Voltage
14. according to Ohm’s law current and resis- C. Resistance

tance have an D. Current
A. equal
20. A fridge has a power rating of 2.0 kW.If 1
B. direct kWh of electrical energy costs $0.30, how
C. indirect much does it cost to use the fridge for 24
hours each day for 30 days?
D. no relationship
A. $60
15. Which is the correct equation to use when
solving for the total resistance in a SERIES B. $432
circuit? C. $4320
A. Rt = R1 + R2 + R3 D. none of above
B. Rt = R1 + R2-R3
21. What type of circuit is used in your
C. Rt = (R1 + R2 + R3) / 3
house?
D. Rt = V / I
A. Light Circuits
16. Watt is the same as B. The best circuits
A. 1 Coulomb / second
C. Series Circuits
B. 1 Joule / Coulomb
D. Parallel Circuits
C. 1 Joule / second
D. 1 Volt / Ampere 22. Below are the type for reference nodes,
except
17. If you move a +2.0 *10-3 C charge through
A. Common Ground
a 5 V battery, how much work was done?
A. 10*10-3 J B. Chassis Ground
B. 5*10-3 J C. Ground
C. 20*10-3 J D. On the Ground
D. none of above E. Ohm Ground

23. The simultaneus equations may also be each. What is the voltage drop across the
solved using software packages such as fourth resistor?
A. MATLAB A. 15V
B. Mathcad B. 45V
C. Maple C. 75V
D. Quattro Pro D. 120V
E. All true 28. A circuit has more than one path to
NARAYAN CHANGDER
ground.
24. What does a battery electrical drain test
A. series
determine?
B. short
A. If a component is causing the power to
drain from the battery C. series-parallel
B. Checks to see if the battery is push- D. parallel
ing enough voltage to the vehicle compo- 29. In an electric circuit, a single wire is con-
nents. nected to three branches that contain resis-
C. Checks to be sure electrolyte is not tors. The three branches then connect back
leaking from the battery. to a single wire. The current in each of the
D. Makes sure that the alternator is con- single wires is the same. Conservation of
stantly charging the battery. which of the following best explains this
phenomenon?
25. Metal sphere A has a charge of +12 el- A. Mass
ementary charges and identical sphere B
B. Electric charge
has a charge of +16 elementary charges.
After the two spheres are brought into con- C. Momentum
tact and separated, the charge on sphere D. Energy
A is
30. Based on KCL, currents will be regarded as
A. +14 elementary charges positive while
B. +28 elementary charges A. Currents leaving the node
C. +2 elementary charges B. Currents entering and leaving the
D. -2 elementary charges node
C. Currents between the node
26. The voltage source of an electric circuit is
called a D. Currents entering the node
A. ammeter E. Currents beside the node
B. charge inducer 31. When do we apply both KCL and KVL to

determine the node voltages?
C. battery
A. When the voltage source is connected
D. voltmeter
between two non-reference nodes
27. There are four resistors in a series circuit B. When the voltage source is connected
with an applied voltage of 120V. The volt- between the reference and non-reference
age drops across three resistors is 15V nodes

C. When there is supernodes 37. The unit for power is

D. When there are 5 nodes A. newton

E. When the circuits have 2 nodes B. joule
32. Analysis that provide general procedure C. watt
for analyzing circuits using node voltages D. none of above
as the circuit variable is
38. Electrical current is measure by using
A. Noda analysis
A. ohmmeter
B. Mesh Analysis
B. galvanometer
C. Circuit Analysis
D. KCL C. voltmeter
E. KVL D. ammeter
33. Which object does NOT conduct electric- 39. If a series circuit has 4 resistors that are
ity? 2 ohms each, the total resistance of the
circuit would be:
A. copper wire
A. 10
B. iron nail
B. 2
C. salt water
C. 6
D. wood
D. 8
34. To simply matters, we shall assume in
nodal analysis that circuit don’t contain 40. Energy is
A. current circuits A. The ability to do work
B. voltages circuit B. Excited electrons
C. transistor circuit C. A battery producing electricity
D. Resistor Circuit D. The ability to move things faster
E. Capacitor circuit 41. A closed conducting loop through which cur-
35. What is a sum (total) in a series circuit? rent can flow when connected to an energy
source is called a
A. Amperage
A. wire
B. Current
B. circuit
C. Voltage
C. terminal
D. None of these
D. battery
36. How do you find voltage drop across R3
using ohm’s law? 42. In the equation P=IV the I represents
A. Vt = R3 (It) A. voltage
B. V3 = R3 (It) B. power
C. V3 = Rt/It C. current
D. V3= Vt (R3) D. resistance

43. The type of circuit in which voltage is dif- 48. If both the plate area and the plate sepa-
ferent across each resistor is a ration of a parallel-plate capacitor are dou-
bled, the capacitance is:
A. parallel circuit
A. doubled
B. series circuit
B. halved
C. both a series and parallel circuits
C. unchanged
D. none of above
D. one-fourth the original
NARAYAN CHANGDER
44. Voltage can be induced in a wire by 49. tools that can be used to determine node
A. moving the wire near a magnet. analysis is
A. KCL
B. moving a magnet near the wire.
B. KVL
C. changing the current in a nearby wire.
C. ohm’s law
D. all of these
D. Cramer’s Rule
45. When is the right time to use Nodal analy- E. Newton Law
sis?
50. The current of circuit with a voltage of 12
A. When there is circuits with parallel V and a resistance of 4 ohms is
connected elements A. 48 A
B. Currents sources B. 3 A
C. Supernodes C. 0.3 A
D. When there is circuits with series con- D. none of these
nected elements
51. The unit for potential difference is
E. All True A. volts
46. What is the sum (total) in a parallel cir- B. ohms
cuit? C. watts
A. Current D. amps
B. Voltage 52. A good insulator has 6 to 8 in the
C. Resistance valance of an atom.
A. protons
D. None of these
B. neutrons
47. If there are 6 nodes in network, we can C. electrons
get number of equations in the nodal
D. neutrinos
analysis
53. Which of the following would be a good
A. 9
conductor of electricity?
B. 8
A. plastic
C. 7 B. rubber
D. 6 C. cotton
E. 5 D. iron

54. An example of a voltage source is a C. is unaffected

A. voltmeter D. none of above

B. battery
60. What are the basic laws underlying the
C. resistance principles of Nodal Analysis?
D. switch A. HVL
55. A computer has a power rating of 150 B. KVL
W.If it is switched on for 5 hours a day, C. KCL
how much energy does the computer con-
vert in one day? D. b and c correct
A. 0.75 kWh E. a and b correct
B. 30 kWh 61. How can you determine how strong the

C. 750 kWh electric force a point charge will experi-
ence at a certain point in an electric field?
D. none of above
A. The total number of electric field lines
56. To solve matrix equation, we can use
B. How close together the electric field
A. Elimination lines are
B. Cramer’s rule C. What direction the electric field lines
C. Newton Law are pointing
D. 1 & 2 D. How large the charge at the center is
drawn
E. 2 & 3
62. Amps are represented by the letter
57. What should you disconnect one at time to
find a parasitic drain? A. E
A. The battery cables B. R
B. The relays in the circuit. C. I
C. The fuses D. W
D. the lights in the glove box, trunk and
63. A voltaic cell produces voltage by convert-
under the hood.
ing energy into electrical energy.
58. The formula V2/R A. Chemical
A. Voltage B. Pressure
B. Current C. Hydrogen
C. Power D. Heat
D. Resistance
64. In a parallel circuit, the total line current
59. when resistors are added to a parallel cir- must equal
cuit the total circuit A. the branch current divided by the total
A. goes up resistance
B. goes down B. the sum of the branch currents

C. the branch current divided by the num- C. The point of connection between two
ber of resistors or more branches
D. zero D. The point of connection between two
or more cables
65. Voltage is a
E. All false
A. Weight
B. Force 70. Third Steps to Determine Node Voltages
is?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. Speed
A. Select a node as the reference node
D. Light
B. Apply KVL to each of the n-1 nonrefer-
66. What is the power when a voltage of 120 ence nodes
V drives a 2-A current through a device?
C. Solve the resulting simultaneous equa-
A. 120 Watts tions to<br />obtain the unknown node
B. 360 Watts voltages
C. 240 Watts D. Select Mesh
D. none of above E. Apply KCL
67. There are two case in nodal analysis: 71. How do you calculate total resistance in a
A. The voltage source is connected be- parallel circuit?
tween a nonreference node and the refer- A. R1 + R2 + R3
ence node
B. R1-R2-R3
B. The voltage source is connected be-
C. 1/R1 +1/R2 + 1/R3 = 1/RT
tween three nonreferenced nodes
D. R1 = R2 = R3
C. All true
D. The voltage source is not connected 72. Electrical Field inside a Hollow Metallic
between a nonreference node and the ref- Charges Sphere is:
erence node A. Zero
E. no answer B. Same field as the surface of sphere
68. One amp is defined as the rate of charge C. Decreasing towards centre of the
flow equal to coulomb per second. sphere
A. 3 D. Increasing towards the centre of the
B. 2 sphere
C. 4 73. What will happen to the total current of
D. 1 a parallel circuit, if a resistor is removed
from the connection?
69. What’s the meaning of node?
A. total current remains the same
A. The point of connection between two
B. total current decreases
or more voltages
B. The point of connection between two C. total current increases
or more currents D. none of the above

74. In nodal analysis, we are intersted to find- 79. How do you disconnect a battery?
ing
A. Positive first

A. current circuits B. Negative First
B. voltages circuit C. Power side first
C. transistor circuit D. Ground side Last
D. Resistor Circuit
80. Electric potential energy is the energy a
E. Capacitor circuit charged object has because of its
75. In the equation for ohm’s law which vari- A. momentum

able represents the ‘’ohms” B. location
A. R C. mass
B. P D. motion
C. V
81. Which of these is an insulator?
D. I
A. Rubber
76. Which net charge could be found on an ob- B. Copper penny
ject? C. Iron nail
A. 4.8 x 10-19 C D. Plastic
B. 1.8 x 10-19 C E. Cloth
C. 3.0 x 10-19 C
82. If the circuit is continuous from the battery,
D. 2.8 x 10-19 C through all the wires and components, and
back to the battery ground it is said to
77. who put forward Kirchoff’s law have
A. G.R Kirchoff A. Continuity
B. Charles Darwin B. a short to voltage
C. Newton C. A short to ground
D. George Ohm D. High resistance
E. All answer is wrong
83. Which procedure below will increase the
78. to obtain node voltages from matrix, we capacitance of a parallel-plate capacitor?
can use standar method such as A. Increase the distance of separation
between the two plates
A. subtitution
B. Reduce the surface area of the plate
B. elimination
C. Insert an insulator between the two
C. cramer
plates
D. matrix inversion
D. Insert a conductor between the two
E. All true plates

84. Why must every electric circuit have a volt- 89. When a rod is brought near a neutral elec-
age source, such as a battery? troscope, the leaves diverge. Which state-
A. Without a voltage source, the resis- ment best describes the charge on the
tance would be too high rod?
B. Without a voltage source, the resis- A. It must be positive.

tance would be too low B. It must be negative.
C. Without a voltage source, there would C. It may be positive or negative.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
be no electrons in the circuit
D. It may be neutral.
D. Without a voltage source, there would
be no source of current
90. The second step to nodal analysis is?
85. Resistance is a measure of A. Apply KCL to each non-reference node
A. the energy per unit charge in a circuit in the circuit
B. how hard it is for electrons to move B. Select node as reference node
through the circuit
C. Apply Kirchoff Voltage Law
C. how hard it is for electrons to move
through the battery D. Select mesh reference
D. the number of charge carriers in a cir- E. Apply KCL to ground

cuit
91. When the distance between two charges
86. A circuit that is not connected is called is halved, the electrical force between the
what kind of circuit? charges
A. closed A. quadruples
B. parallel B. reduces to one fourth
C. series C. halves
D. open
D. doubles
87. The flow of electric charge is called
92. What is a general rule of thumb for a
A. meter Charging System Voltage?
B. amp
A. 12.6v
C. current
B. Above 9.6v
D. voltage
C. 18.6v
88. Jump starting a vehicle with battery ca-
D. Above 13v
bles, what is the last step
A. Connecting the power cable to the 93. What stays the same in series?
good car
A. Resistance
B. Connecting the ground cable to the
negative side of the bad car B. Power
C. Starting the bad car C. Current
D. Starting the good car D. Voltage

94. A series circuit has how many pathways 99. Which of these materials is a good insula-
for the electrons to flow? tor?

A. Two A. Plastic and metal
B. One B. Metal and rubber
C. Many C. Plastic and rubber
D. Zero D. none of above
95. The total resistance in a series circuit is the 100. Which of the following is considered a
of all the individual resistances. voltage rise?
A. Quotient A. A motor
B. Sum B. A resister
C. Remainder C. The source
D. Voltage D. A diode
96. If a circuit has no continuity is is said to be 101. electric potential is the amount of
A. energy charge
A. closed B. charge force
B. shorted to ground C. charge energy
C. open D. force charge
D. shorted to voltage
102. which of the following choices is capa-
97. Which is NOT true of a series circuit sitors equations
A. One light bulb can be broken and other A. V = I.R

lights will still work. B. R = V/I
B. All loads are a single loop C. q = C.V
C. Adding more loads will lessen the cur- D. W = F.s
rent in the loop E. P=W/t
D. none of above
103. A circuit with 4 ohms of resistance and 3
98. Total series circuit wattage is equal to amps would have volts.
source voltage A. 7
A. multiplied by the voltage value going B. 1
through any resistor
C. 12
B. multiplied by the current value going
through any resistor D. 1.33
C. divided by the current value going 104. For determine node voltages, we have to
through any resistor apply to each of the n-1 nonreference
D. divided by the voltage applied to the nodes. Then use Ohm’s law to express the
circuit and the total resistance of the cir- currents in terms of node voltages
cuit A. KVL

B. KCL 110. A voltmeter should be placed in a cir-

C. Node cuit
D. Element A. in parallel
E. Branch B. in series
105. The brightness of a lightbulb is most C. in order
closely related to D. upside down
A. its resistance.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
111. Metal sphere A has a charge of-2 units
B. the voltage drop across it. and an identical metal sphere, B, has a
C. the current through it. charge of-4 units. If the spheres are
D. the power dissipated by it. brought into contact with each other and
then separated, B will
106. In a series circuit, the receivers do what
with the electricity? A. gain 1 electron
A. Get rid of it. B. lose 1 electron

B. Share it. C. gain 3 electrons
C. Lose it D. lose 3 electrons
D. none of above
112. In analyzing node how many nodes are
107. How is the capacitance of a parallel-plate taken as the reference node?
capacitor affected by the area of each A. 2
plate?
B. 1
A. C is directly proportional to the area A
of each plate C. 5
B. C is inversely proportional to the area D. 3
A of each plate E. 6
C. C is partially proportional to the area
A of each plate 113. The reference node is commonly called?
D. C is fully proportional to the area A of A. The ground
each plate
B. The mesh
108. An incomplete or broken circuit. C. The current
A. Closed Circuit D. The resistors
B. Open Circuit
E. Ohm’s law
C. Cracked bulb Circuit
D. none of above 114. How many laws are Kirchoff
A. 1
109. What stays the same in parallel?
A. Resistance B. 3
B. Power C. 4
C. Current D. 2
D. Voltage E. 10

115. The wattage value for any resistor is 120. What are the basic laws we can use in
equal to Nodal Analysis?

A. I X R A. HVL
B. E/R B. KVL
C. I X E C. KCL
D. I/R D. HCL
116. In an electrical circuit, electrons move E. KBL

from the
121. Allow flow in only one direction
A. Negative pole to negative pole
A. CFL
B. Negative pole to positive pole
B. LEDS
C. Positive pole to positive pole
C. Diodes
D. none of above
D. Sensors
117. A parallel-plate capacitor is charged and
122. Metal is used to make electrical wires be-
then disconnected from the supply. Which
cause
of the following will increase the capaci-
tance of the capacitor? A. It allows an electric current to freely
flow.
A. Reduce the area of the plates
B. It slows electric currents from flowing.
B. Move the plates closer to each other
C. It is very cheap.
C. Insert a conductor between the plates
of the capacitor D. It is very expensive.
D. Increase the potential difference 123. If the voltage is 12 volts and the resis-
across the capacitor tance is 2, how many amps do you have?
118. When your digital multimeter reads an A. 4
open circuit it will usually have on the B. 3
screen of the multimeter.
C. 8
A. 0000.
D. 6
B. OL
C. ? 124. What must we do next after we have se-
lected a reference nodes?
D. 1.
A. we assign voltage designations to non-
119. Photo cells create voltage by converting reference nodes
energy into electrical energy. B. Apply KCL to each of the non-reference
A. Solar nodes
B. Heat C. Solve equations
C. Pressure D. All false
D. Mechanical E. All true

125. A negatively charged rod touches the 129. The formula E2/R
knob of a neutral electroscope. Which best
A. Voltage
represents the distribution of charge on
the electroscope. B. Current
A. both the knob and leaves become pos- C. Power
itive
D. Resistance
B. both the knob and leaves become neg-
ative 130. Current that flows with in a circuit con-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
nect to a battery.
C. the knob becomes negative and the
leaves become positive A. Alternating Current
D. the knob becomes positive and the B. Direct Current
leaves become negative
C. Constant Current
126. The total voltage in a circuit with voltage D. Back and Forth Current
drops of 15V, 25V, and 20V is?
A. 20V 131. In node analysis assume the voltage
source is considered as one node is called
B. 60V
A. Supermesh
C. 120V
B. Supernode
D. 180V
C. Node
127. A glass rod becomes positively charged D. Mesh
when it is rubbed with silk. This net posi-
tive charge accumulates because the glass E. All answer is Correct
rod
132. What basic laws are the underlying prin-
A. gains electrons ciples of Nodal Analysis?
B. loses electrons A. KCL
C. gains protons B. KVL
D. loses protons C. HCL
128. Balloon A simultaneously touches Bal- D. HVL
loons B and C. Balloon A started with a
E. A and B true
charge of-4e, Balloon B started with a
charge of +2e, and Balloon C started with 133. the meeting point of two or more circuit
a charge of +14e. What will be the new elements
charge on Balloon A after they were all al-
lowed to touch? A. Mesh
A. +12e B. Node
B. +6e C. Ground
C. +8e D. All answer is correct
D. +4e E. All answer is wrong

134. An ammeter is a device that can be used 139. What is the function of a fuse?
to measure A. To burn a wire.

A. Current B. To replace a copper wire.
B. Voltage C. To protect an electrical appliance.
C. Resistance D. To make a complete circuit.
D. Power
140. How is the capacitance of a parallel-plate
135. Insulators are different than conductors capacitor affected by the distance between
in that insulators the plates?
A. do not contain electrons or protons A. C is directly proportional to the area A
B. do not contain any charge of each plate
C. have a weaker affinity for electrons B. C is inversely proportional to the dis-
tance d between the plates
D. do not allow charge to freely move In-
sulators are different than conductors in C. C is partially proportional to the area
that insulators A of each plate
D. C is not affected by the area A of each
136. A fan has a power rating of 0.08 kW. It
plate
is switched on for 8 hours a day.Assuming
that one month is 30 days, how much en- 141. If two 10-ohm resistors are connected
ergy does the fan convert in one month? in series, what is the total resistance of
Give your answer in kWh. these resistors?
A. 0.64 kWh A. 100 ohms
B. 2.4 kWh B. 20 ohms
C. 19.2 kWh C. 5 ohms
D. 24 kWh D. 1 ohm
137. remains the same in a series circuit. 142. Nodal analysis produces a compact set of
A. Resistance equations for the network, which can be
B. Voltage solved by
C. Current A. Manual
D. Power B. All true

C. Together with friends
138. Dissolving salt in water increases the con-
ductivity of the solution because the- D. All false
A. salt gives the solution a net negative E. Computer
charge 143. Nodal analysis have steps
B. salt ions bond with the available water A. 1
molecules
B. 2
C. solution has an increase in kinetic en-
ergy C. 3
D. concentration of ions in the solution in- D. 4
creases E. 5

144. Select the electrical component used to 149. What is the advantages of using Nodal
measure current. analysis?
A. Voltmeter A. It can reduces the number of equa-
tions that must be solved
B. Vaultmeter
B. It’s only needs three steps to complete
C. Ammeter
C. it can’t be solved manually
D. Ampmeter
D. it must be solved with a computer pro-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
145. A circuit consists of a 10.0-ohm resistor, grams
a 15.0-ohm resistor, and a 20.0-ohm re- E. it can be solved manually
sistor connected in parallel across a 9.00-
volt battery. What is the equivalent resis- 150. Select the electrical component used to
tance of the circuit? measure voltage.
A. 45.0 ohms A. Voltmeter

B. Vaultmeter
B. 4.62 ohms
C. Ammeter
C. 1.95 ohms
D. Ampmeter
D. 0.200 ohms
151. What is a benefit of using a parallel cir-
146. A negatively charged rod is brought near cuit?
a neutral electroscope, causing the leaves
A. It gets confusing.
to diverge. This is an example of
B. There are no problems.
A. Conduction
C. If one light goes out, it does not affect
B. Induction the others.
C. Insulation D. If one light goes out, they all go out.
D. Friction
152. the reference point in an electrical circuit
147. An electric generator is used to convert from which voltages are measured is
energy into electrical energy. A. Ground
A. Chemical B. electric ground
B. Mechanical C. basis ground
C. Light D. Plastic ground

E. capacitor ground
D. Hydrogen
153. The amount of current that flows through
148. Which direction does charge flow in a cir- a circuit is blank to the voltage of the cir-
cuit? cuit
A. Negative to positive A. indirectly proportional
B. Positive to negative B. direct proportional
C. in a zigzag C. equal
D. what D. none of above

154. What is the electric field between two C. watt

metal plates that have a change in poten- D. volt
tial of 120 V and a distance of 0.04 me-

ters. 160. When measuring with a digital multime-
A. 48 N/C ter on an automotive vehicle for voltage
you should select the symbol on the
B. 4.8 N/C
selector dial.
C. 3000 N/C
A. DC
D. none of above
B. AC
155. Resistance in an electrical circuit means C. mA
what?
D. A
A. to fight off bad guys
B. to increase electricity and current flow 161. How is the electric force between two
charges affected when the distance be-
C. to oppose or slow down current flow tween the charges is doubled?
D. none of above A. Four times as much.
156. When using a digital multimeter the black B. Two times as much.
lead connects to the hole marked
C. Half as much.
A. V
D. One-fourth as much.
B. A
162. Which is NOT a similarity between grav-
C. COM
itational force and electrical force?
A. They both depend on the distance
157. Which method of charging does not B. The both involve two objects (either
change the overall charge on any object in- charged or with mass)
volved?
C. They are both repulsive and attractive
A. Induction
D. They both significantly decrease with
B. Conduction distance
C. Reduction
163. Which of the following is not a circuit pro-
D. Triboelectric tection device?
158. A complete circuit that has only one path A. Fuse
to ground is called a circuit
B. Circuit Breaker
A. parallel
C. Relay
B. series-parallel
D. Fusible Link
C. short
D. series 164. If both sides of a light bulb are at the
same voltage, what happens to the light
159. The unit for current is the bulb?
A. ohm A. It glows very brightly
B. amp B. There is no light

C. The brightness of the light will vary 169. The formula I2 * R is used to find what?
over time A. Current
D. The bulb will explode B. Voltage
165. The electric force between two or more C. Resistance
charged objects depends on which of the D. Power
following quantities?
170. Current flows from higher potential to?
A. charge and distance between the
NARAYAN CHANGDER
charged objects A. lower potential in resistor
B. mass and distance between the B. medium potential in resistor
charged objects C. maximum potential in resistor
C. charge and mass of charged objects D. big potential in resistor
D. quantity of charges and their masses E. huge potential in resistor
166. Ground that used when chassis acts as 171. Three resistors of 20. ohms, 30. ohms,
reference point for all circuits is and 60. ohms are connected in series with
a battery. A current of 2 amperes will
A. chasis ground
flow through this circuit when the poten-
B. electric ground tial difference of the battery is
C. basis ground A. 10. V
D. ground B. 220 V
E. capacitor ground C. 110 V
D. 20. V
167. As more resistors are added in paral-
lel across a constant voltage source, the 172. charges are 20 cm apart and feel a force
power supplied by the source of 500 N. if the distance between them
A. increases. becomes 60 cm, what is the new force
B. decreases. A. 4500
C. does not change. B. 540
D. increases for a time and then starts to C. 1500

decrease. D. 55.6
168. What does the resistance of a wire tell 173. The equation of continuity for an incom-
you? pressible fluid, A1v1 = A2v2, is essen-
tially an expression of the conservation of
A. The speed of electron flow through it.
which of the following quantities?
B. How tough it is for electrons to flow A. Energy
through it.
B. Time
C. The amount of energy given to the elec-
trons. C. Linear momentum
D. The amount of energy taken away from D. Angular momentum

the electrons. E. Mass

174. Copper wire is a good 179. Pick all the materials that would be a con-
ductor.
A. insulator

A. Metal frying pan
B. resistor
B. Rubber
C. conductor
C. Plastic
D. power source
D. Copper wire
175. The total current entering the closed sur-
E. Stainless Steel
face is to the total current leaving the
surface 180. What is the total circuit resistance of two
A. Equal 25 ohm resistors and three 75 ohm resis-
tors connected in series?
B. Similar
A. 100 ohms
C. Alike
B. 200 ohms
D. Suited
C. 275 ohm
E. Greater
D. 175 ohms
176. In what direction will a negatively
charged particle accelerate in an electric 181. A supernode is formed by enclosing a
field? source connected between two nonrefer-
ence nodes and any elements connected in
A. In the same direction as field with it
B. In opposite direction as field A. voltage
C. Perpendicular to field B. current
D. Impossible to tell C. charge
177. in order for charge to flow between two D. series

parts of a circuit there must be a E. parallel
A. ampere
182. Voltage drop stands for what?
B. potential difference
A. the voltage applied to a circuit
C. ionized solution
B. the voltage flowing through a resistor
D. charge
C. the voltage used by a load
178. What happens if there is a break at any D. none of above
point in a series circuit?
A. no current flows 183. What is CCA?
A. Cold Cranking Amps
B. current flows through an alternative
path B. Cool Cranking Amps
C. resistance goes to infinity C. Cold Conductor Amps
D. current reverses direction D. Cool Collected Apes

3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current 368
184. A complete, connected circuit: D. Bulb

A. Closed Circuit
189. First Steps to Determine Node Voltages
B. Conductor Circuit is?
C. Open Circuit A. Select a node as the reference node
D. none of above B. Apply KCL to each of the n-1 nonrefer-
ence nodes
185. Two identical resistors connected in se-
ries have an equivalent resistance of 4 C. Solve the resulting simultaneous equa-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
ohms. The same two resistors, when con- tions to<br />obtain the unknown node
nected in parallel, have an equivalent re- voltages
sistance of D. Select Mesh
A. 8 Ohms E. Apply KVL
B. 2 Ohms
190. The rate at which electric energy is trans-
C. 4 Ohms
ferred is called
D. 1 Ohms
A. conventional current
186. What should be the lowest in a parallel B. power
circuit (Theory)?
C. resistance
A. Total Voltage
D. electric current
B. Total Resistance
C. Total Current 191. What does it take to make a computer
operate?
D. Ground
A. Power
187. The current flowing in an electric circuit is
B. Input/Output
increased by
A. decreasing voltage or increasing resis- C. Ground
tance D. All of the above
B. increasing voltage or decreasing resis- 192. The following are the properties of a su-
tance pernode, except
C. decreasing voltage and resistance
A. Supernode has no voltage of its own
D. increasing voltage and resistance
B. Supernode requires the application of
188. Which of the following is an example of KCL and KVL
a load in a circuit? C. the voltage source provides a con-
A. Battery straint equation
B. Wire D. Requires only KCL to analyze
C. Fuse E. Requires only KVL to analyze
3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current

1. Which one of the following is the most en- D. Duration of current passing through
ergy efficient the conductor

A. LED
7. element of an electric iron is made up of
B. Incandescent bulb
A. nickel
C. CFL
B. chromium
D. none of above
C. nichrome
2. An electric fuse consists of a thin wire
made up of: D. tungsten
A. Glass 8. traditional bulbs mainly transfer

B. Lead A. electrical energy to light
C. Graphite
B. electrical energy to heat
D. Aluminium
C. light energy to resistance
E. Zinc
D. heat energy to light
3. An electric fuse is made up of:
9. When electric current flows through the
A. Glass catridge
metal filament of the bulb it gets heated
B. Ceramic catridge to very high temperature and becomes
C. Thin wire hot and start emitting
D. Electromagnet A. White, light
4. Nichrome contains B. Red, light

A. 20% nickel 80% chromium C. White, heat
B. 80% nickel 20% chromium D. Red, heat
C. 40 % chromium 60% zinc
10. Which of the following property of
D. none of above nichrome is not make to used as heating
coil?
5. If resistance increases in the circuit then
the heat energy A. high resistivity
A. increases B. high melting point
B. decreases C. ability to remain in red hot condition
C. no change D. high ductility
D. all the above
11. Which of the following does not indicate
6. Heat generated in a current carrying con- the power of a circuit?
ductor is inversely proportional to the
A. I 2 R
A. Length of the conductor
B. IV
B. Thickness of the conductor
C. IR2
C. Amount of current passing through the
V2
conductor D. R

12. An electric bulb is connected to a 220 V 18. The material used to make the coils of an
generator. The current is 2 A. What is the electric heater and an electric bulb are
power of the bulb? A. Nichrome and tungsten respectively
A. 110 watt B. Tungsten and copper respectively
B. 220 watt C. Platinum and copper respectively
C. 440 watt D. Copper and platinum respectively
D. 330 watt
NARAYAN CHANGDER
19. Unit for expressing power
13. When an electric current pass through by A. watthour
the conductors, the conductor
B. watts
A. to begin crash
C. kilowatthour
B. going to freeze
D. joule
C. heats up
D. going to melt 20. Two gases filled in filament type electric
bulb
14. Incandescent bulbs contain A. hydrogen, argon
A. a filament B. helium, argon
B. an LED C. nitrogen, argon
C. a halogen D. oxygen, argon
D. a fluorescent tube
21. The energy present in electric current is
15. According to joules law of heating effect A. mechanical energy
A. H ∝ I2RT B. light energy
B. H ∝ I2 RT C. electrical energy
C. H ∝ 2RTI D. heat energy
D. H ∝ 2IRT
22. What do fuse ratings mean?
16. In a bulb there is a thin wire called(a) fila- A. The number of fuses
ment(b) coil(c) element(d) fuse wire
B. Amount of current that can flow
A. filament through the circuit without the fuse melt-
B. coil ing
C. element C. Amount of resistivity passing through
D. fuse wire the circuit
D. Watts consumed
17. Who discovered heating effect of elecric
current? 23. The electric heating is used in
A. James Watt A. Fuse
B. Joule-Lenz B. Light
C. Michael Faraday C. heater
D. Thomas Edison D. All of the above

24. Which of the following is a good heating C. Tungsten

element? D. Steel

A. Copper
30. Magnetic effect of current was discovered
B. Nichrome by
C. Plastic A. Oersted
D. Wood B. Faraday
25. How much current is produced in an elec- C. Bohr
tric iron consumes energy at a rate of 880 D. Ampere
W with the voltage is 220 V?
31. An Electric fuse is a device.
A. 2 ampere
A. Cooling
B. 4 ampere
B. Dangerous
C. 6 ampere
C. Hot
D. 8 ampere
D. Safety
26. Why are alloys used in heating appli- 32. Applications of heating effect of current
ances?
A. Heating devices
A. More power
B. Electric fuse
B. Less resistivity
C. Phone
C. Greater melting point
D. Electric bulb
D. Cheaper
33. In a bulb, electric current passes through a
27. Electricity produces effect material named:
A. Magnetic A. Coil
B. Electric B. Filament
C. Both C. Electromagnet
D. No D. None of these
28. When the length of a current carrying con- 34. The amount of heat H produced in time t is
ductor increase twice, the amount of heat A. VIt
generated will B. 1/VIt
A. decrease by half C. VI
B. increases twice D. QV
C. remains same
35. Name the gases filled in bulbs to prolong
D. increases 4 times the life of the filament
29. Name the element used for the filament of A. Nitrogen
an electric bulb B. Oxygen
A. Copper C. Argon
B. An alloy D. Hydrogen

36. electricity causes a filament to 42. The work done in moving the charge Q
A. change the direction of current through a potential difference V
A. Q/V
B. release a halogen
B. V/Q
C. incandess
C. QV
D. glow white
D. 1/QV
37. The filament of A bulb, is a wire of
43. current in a heating element changes..
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. High resistivity, low melting point A. electrical to thermal energy
B. Low resistivity, low melting point B. the resistance and thus the total en-
C. High resistivity, high melting point ergy
D. Low resistivity, high melting point C. the conductivity of the element
D. the electrical energy into sound
38. What is the power of a bulb that rated
250V & 4A current? 44. An electric bulb works on the property of:
A. 100W A. Magnetic effect
B. 1KW B. Cooling effect
C. 200W C. Heating effect
D. 10W D. Solar effect

45. Electric bulbs generate more heat be-
39. The amount of heat produced in a wire de- cause?
pends on its
A. Tungsten is a heating element
A. material
B. Glass is good conductor of heat
B. length
C. Gas inside bulb heats up
C. thickness
D. none of above
D. all of these
46. The heating effect of electric current de-
40. Full form of-CFL pends on the length and of the conduct-
ing wire.
A. Compact Flood Light
A. colour
B. Common Full Light
B. thickness
C. Compact Fluorescent Lamp
C. energy
D. Compact Flood Lamp
41. The heating effect of electric current is due 47. The conducting wire offers some to the
to electrons.
A. collision of electrons with atoms A. resistance
B. Heat of surroundings B. help
C. Fault of device C. flow
D. Collision of conductors D. energy

48. Wires that are designed to heat up are C. they are mains powered
called D. they have a low current rating

A. thermistors
54. Name the quantity whose unit is kwh
B. incandescent wires
A. power
C. thermal components
B. electric energy
D. heating elements
C. potential
49. there are types of effects of electric D. current
current
55. A combination of 2 or more cells is known
A. 5
as
B. 4
A. an electric cell
C. 3
B. a battery
D. 2
C. a switch
50. The heating coils/elements of different D. a bulb
electrical appliances are usually made from
or wires. 1. Copper 2. Aluminum 56. The commercial unit of electric energy is
3. Nichrome 4. Tungsten A. Kilowatt hour
A. 1 & 2 B. Watt
B. 1 & 4 C. Joule
C. 2 & 4 D. Kilowatt
D. 3 & 4 57. which bulb would be the brightest?
51. Which fuse requires replacement of wire A. 100W
after it is broken? B. 240V
A. MCB C. 230V
B. Cartridge fuse D. 12W
C. Ceramic fuse
58. The coil of wire contained in an electric
D. none of above heater is known as
52. The rate at which electric energy is dissi- A. component
pated or consumed in an electric circuit is B. element
caleed
C. circuit
A. Electric Potential
D. spring
B. Electric Resistance
59. In case of thunderstorms, we use to
C. Electric Power protect appliances.
D. Electric Energy A. Electric fuse
53. kettles and toasters heat up because B. Switch
A. their element has a low resistance C. Heating element
B. their element has a high resistance D. none of above

60. A glowing bulb becomes warm due to the 66. Which of the following produces most
heat?
A. heating effect of current
A. Long and thick wire
B. magnetic effect of current
B. Long and thin wire
C. chemical effect of current
C. Short and thick wire
D. physical effect of current D. Short and thin wire
61. Use and throw fuse is? 67. Which of the following appliance does not
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. MCB show heating effect of electric current?
A. electric heater
B. Cartridge fuse
B. electric bulb
C. Electric fuse
C. electric stove
D. Ceramic fuse
D. electric bell
62. A fuse wire is a wire of- 68. Electric ovens work when the is
A. High resistivity and low melting point heated.
B. High resistivity and high melting point A. Oven
B. Wire
C. Low resistivity and low melting point
C. Tungsten
D. Low resistivity and high melting point
D. None of these
63. Electric fuse breaks when 69. What is an electric fuse?
A. Low current passes A. A safety device
B. More current passes B. A light bulb
C. Current is passing constant C. A resistor
D. none of above D. A conductor
70. Which of these are based on the heating
64. Substances through which electric charges
effect of current?
cannot move freely-
A. Geyser
A. Insulators
B. Hair dryer
B. Conductors
C. Immersion rod
C. Wood D. None of the above
D. Plastic
71. what is Electric coils?
65. As the amount of current flowing through A. a type of electrical conductor, wound
a conductor increases, the heating effect in the shape of a coil
A. increases B. The iron is the small appliance used to
remove wrinkles from fabric
B. decreases
C. devices used to protect much more ex-
C. will be the same pensive electrical components
D. will become zero D. This is the most common type of fuse

3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 375
72. In all the electrical appliances, the B. Chemical to Radiant

switches are put in the C. Radiant to Chemical

A. live wire D. Kinetic to Radiant
B. earth wire
74. CFL means?
C. neutral wire
A. Complete fluorescent lamp
D. all of above
B. Compact fluorescent lamp
73. Battery to Light Bulb? C. Complete flickering lamp
A. Chemical to Sound D. none of above
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs

1. When more light bulbs are added in paral- B. 3
lel arrangement, the light bulbs will
C. 2
A. be brighter
D. 4
B. be dimmer
5. What allows electricity to PASS EASILY
C. be as bright
THROUGH?
D. none of above
A. Conductors
2. Electrical energy is changed to in B. Insulators
stoves, toasters, and ovens.
C. Resistors
A. light energy
D. none of above
B. heat energy
C. sound energy 6. What allows electricity to flow through,
but SLOWS IT DOWN?
D. energy of motion
A. Conductors
3. Which of the following BEST compares in- B. Insulators
sulators and conductors?
C. Resistors
A. Conductors and insulators both have
high resistance. D. none of above
B. Insulators have high resistance and 7. In order for electricity to flow through a
conductors have low resistance. circuit, the circuit must be a closed, com-
C. Conductors and insulators both have plete:
low resistance. A. Path, so that the electricity can make
D. Conductors have high resistance and a complete circle.
insulators have low resistance. B. Donut, because circuits get hungry.
4. How many different types of circuits are C. Wire, made out of rubber.
there? D. Solar panel, because circuits only work
A. 1 with the sun.

8. The unit of power was named after 14. A ladder made of which material would
A. James Watt be the most dangerous to use if someone
were working around power lines?
B. Isaac Newton
A. fiberglass
C. James Joule
B. metal
D. Renee Descartes
C. plastic
9. ELECTRIC CELLS CAN BE ARRANGED IN D. wood
NARAYAN CHANGDER
AND MANNER
15. Which of the following items would best
A. ZIGZAG, SERIES conduct electricity?
B. PARALLEL. SERIES A. Copper
C. PARALLEL, ZIGZAG B. Plastic
D. SERIES, COMPLEX C. String
10. What are the units for electric potential? D. Wood
A. amps 16. Which two objects use electrical energy to

move an object?
B. ohms
A. F. A fan and a pencil sharpener
C. volts
B. G. A radio and a stove
D. kilograms
C. H. A lamp and a television
11. Voltage is measured in: D. J. A camera and an MP3 player
A. Amps (A)
17. In a parallel circuit is split up among
B. Voltrons (V) the resistors, while is equal.
C. Volts (V) A. voltage; current
D. Ohms (O) B. current; voltage
C. resistance; voltage
12. The flow of electricity in a circuit-
D. resistance; current
A. current
B. flow 18. A motor has a current of 2.00 A flowing
through it when it is powered with a 12-
C. circuit volt battery. What is the power used by
D. none of above the motor?
A. 16
13. if resistance of a circuit is tripled, and the
voltage stays the same, the current will B. 6
C. 14
A. double D. 24
B. decrease by one third
19. What happens to the voltage in a series
C. triple as will circuit?
D. not change A. The voltage stays the same

B. The voltage is added 25. Electrical energy is changed to in radios

C. The voltage is reduced and televisions.

D. The voltage is split between the light A. light energy
bulbs
B. heat energy
20. As you continue to add lightbulbs in series, C. sound energy
what happens?
A. The bulbs get brighter D. energy of motion
B. The bulbs get dimmer 26. In order to measure the voltage across a
C. The bulbs remain the same brightness bulb in a circuit, the voltmeter is connected
D. The bulbs explode and shards of glass in
get everywhere A. Not connected in the circuit
21. What type of circuit connection should a B. parallel with the battery
light bulb be connected to maintain the
amount of current in the conducting wire? C. parallel with the bulb
A. series circuit D. series with the bulb
B. parallel circuit
27. What are the three parts of every electric
C. either series circuit or parallel circuit
circuit?
D. neither series circuit or parallel circuit
A. a conductor, an energy source, and a
22. This the study of charges in motion. load
A. electrostatics B. a track, a loop, and a battery
B. electrodynamics
C. a conductor, an insulator, and wires
C. gravity
D. a power plant, chemical energy, and
D. electromotive force
mechanical energy
23. These materials are electrical insulators.
A. aluminium 28. What is an example of a INSULATOR?
B. fabric A. Steel
C. diamond B. Rubber
D. gold C. Human Body
E. glass
D. none of above
24. In order to have a functioning electric cir-
cuit, you must have (SELECT ALL THAT 29. To make a circuit complete you must have
APPLY) a-
A. an electric potential (power source) A. complete path
B. a switch
B. switch
C. a conductive pathway
C. bulb
D. electrical resistance (light, motor,
heating element, speaker) D. none of above

30. Total resistance in a parallel circuit 36. What is a conductor?

A. Rt = R1 + R2 + R3 A. A material that allows electricity to
B. 1/Rt = 1/R1 + 1/R2 flow through it. The circuit is complete.
C. Rt = R1 X R2 / R1 + R2 B. A material that does not allow electric-
D. Rt = RN / RV ity to flow through. It stops the flow of
electricity.
31. Potential difference is another term for
C. A light switch.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. current
B. voltage D. none of above
C. energy
37. A light bulb will shine brighter when
D. watts
A. An extra light bulb is added to the cir-
32. What is an example of a CONDUCTOR? cuit
A. Glass
B. An additional battery is added
B. Plastic
C. Metal C. A smaller battery is used
D. none of above D. The switch is open in the circuit
33. As work output increases, what happens

38. What is Ohm’s Law?
to efficiency? Efficiency=(work output) /
(work input) *100 A. V=W/Q
A. increase B. Voltage cannot be destroyed
B. decrease
C. V=IR
C. stay the same
D. none of above D. V = m dot * Ve + (pe-p0) * Ae
34. If one bulb goes out in a series circuit, the 39. What BLOCKS THE FLOW of electricity
remaining bulbs through it?
A. also go out
A. Conductors
B. get brighter
B. Insulators
C. get dimmer
D. explode, leaving shards of glass every- C. Resistors
where D. none of above
35. What is the efficiency of a machine if 55.3
J of work are done on the machine, but 40. Which one is a conductor?
only 14.3 J is produced by the 1machine?
A. wood
A. 0.25 J
B. iron
B. 26%
C. 386% C. plastic spoon
D. 3.86 J D. paper

41. Which idea is NOT a trouble-shooting step C. Both the circuits

to find out why the electric circuit is not D. None of the circuits.
working?

A. Test the wires, are they tightly con- 46. Which device provides electrical energy to
nected to the fahnestock clips? run an electric circuit?
B. Are the batteries lined up negative to A. the wire
positive? B. the switch
C. Is the lightbulb big enough? C. the battery
42. What will happen if you put too much bat-
47. Which statement describes one feature of
tery in a circuit?
a closed circuit?
A. The bulb will burn out because too
A. charges do not flow
much energy
B. bulbs will not shine
B. The electricity will be less
C. the circuit is complete
C. The bulb will remain light up because
the bulb can hold the energy. D. none of above
D. Nothing happen 48. In a simple circuit with long coiled wire,
43. What happens to the current in a series 1.5 volts and a bulb. Why does the bulb
circuit if the resistance is doubled? getdimmer?
A. doubles A. because the load is too many
B. halves B. because the wire is too long

C. quarters C. because the wire is too short
D. quadruples D. because the power supply is not
enough to light the bulb brighter
44. A complete path through which electricity
can flow 49. A material which electrons are able to
move through easily:
A. insulator
A. Circuit
B. circuit
C. conductor B. Insulator
D. generator C. Resistance
D. Conductor
45. Rashed builds two circuits each with three
bulbs and a battery. One circuit he con- 50. What is used to measure the flow of cur-
nects all three bulbs in series and the other rent in a circuit?
circuit he connects the bulbs in parallel. If
A. Ammeter
he removes one bulb from each circuit, in
which connection will all the bulbs go out? B. Battery
A. Series circuit C. Rheostat
B. Parallel circuit D. Voltmeter

51. This is the study of charges, or charged ob- 56. How can you tell that a circuit is a series
jects that do not involve moving charges or circuit?
current. A. The light bulbs are lit.
A. gravity B. The is more than one path for charge
B. electrodynamics to flow through.
C. There is only one path for charge to
C. electrostatics
flow through.
D. insulators
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. One bulb is lit and the other is not lit.
52. If one burned-out bulb causes all of the 57. Roshan describes the basic parts of an
lights to fail in a circuit, what might you electric circuit using a shower as a model.
conclude? Which part of a circuit does the water pipe
A. It is a parallel circuit. represent?
A. the wire
B. More batteries are needed.
B. the switch
C. It is a series circuit.
C. the battery
D. A heavier wire is needed.
D. none of above
53. Which components do all circuits have in 58. Arlo made a circuit. His light bulb did not
common? Select three options. light up. Which of these could NOT be the
A. energy source cause?
A. open switch
B. voltmeter
B. dead battery
C. wires
C. closed circuit
D. ammeter
D. loose connection
E. device that needs electrical energy
59. Khaled connects a bulb, a cell, an amme-
54. What charge does an electron have? ter and a switch in a series circuit. He
switches it ON and the ammeter shows a
A. negative (-) current of 0.8 A. What will be the current
B. positive (+) if he connects 2 more cells in series.
C. neutral or no charge (0) A. 0.8 A
B. 2.8 A
D. none of above
C. 1.6 A
55. Jack builds a series circuit with two cells D. 2.4 A
and a buzzer. What will happen if he re-
moves one cell from the circuit? 60. The following are disadvantages of con-
necting too many bulbs in parallel EXCEPT:
A. The buzzer will make a softer sound.
A. Bulb will easily overheat.
B. The current in the circuit will increase.
B. It is difficult to maintain and install.
C. The buzzer will make a louder sound.
C. There will be current overloading in
D. The current in the circuit will decrease. the conducting wire.

D. There will be equal amount of voltage C. short

for every load in a circuit.
D. long

61. What is a circuit?
67. What type of circuit is appropriate in
A. Provides electricity to the load connecting appliances and light bulbs at
B. poor electrical conductor home?
C. path where electricity can flow A. series circuit
D. switch and a conductor B. parallel circuit
62. Insulator is? C. either series circuit or parallel circuit
A. material that current can pass through D. neither series circuit or parallel circuit
easily
B. material that current cannot pass 68. Which device manages the flow of current
through easily in an electric circuit?
C. magnet A. the wire
D. static electricity B. the switch
63. The wire is- C. the battery
A. an insulator D. the light bulb
B. a conductor
69. The plastic around the wire is
C. a magnet
A. conductor
D. none of above
B. insulator
64. Three bulbs connected in series
C. decoration
A. are brighter than one bulb
D. none of above
B. are dimmer than one bulb on its own
C. do not light up 70. In a parallel circuit what is always the
D. are the same brightness as one bulb same across each resistor in parallel?
A. The current.
65. This device is used to open and close a cir-
cuit. B. The resistance.
A. switch C. The voltage.
B. bulb D. The charge flow.
C. battery
71. A material that does NOT allow electricity
D. none of above
to flow is called
66. In this kind of circuit the positive termi- A. a conductor
nals and the negative terminals of better-
ies and appliances are wired together. B. a fuse
A. parallel C. an insulator
B. series D. a transformer

72. The rubber coating on a wire cord is be- 77. Watts is the same as
cause it does not allow electricity to pass A. Joules per second
through to you.
B. Voltage per second
A. magnetic
C. Current per second
B. a conductor
D. none of above
C. an insulator
78. As work increases, what happens to pow-
D. a circuit
NARAYAN CHANGDER
erP=W/t
73. Electrical potential energy is defined as A. increase
B. decrease
A. the potential energy of a moving elec-
tron. C. stay the same
B. the potential energy of a moving pro- D. none of above
ton.
79. A connection that allows current to take
C. the number of charges passing a point an unintended path is called a(n)
in a given amount of time. A. series circuit.
D. the stored energy in a moving neutron. B. parallel circuit.
74. Energy our eyes can see- C. short circuit.
A. electromagnetism D. combination circuit.
B. electrical energy 80. Why is silver NOT used to make electrical

wires?
C. light energy
A. Because it is a poor conductor of elec-
D. none of above tricity.
75. What is the best type of circuit to use B. Because it is cheap and can tarnish.
when putting lights on a Christmas tree? C. Because it is a very good conductor of
A. Parallel Circuit electricity.
D. Because it is expensive and can tar-
B. Static Electricity
nish.
C. Series Circuit
81. What is the name of the material for a
D. Battery Circuit material that electric current cannot pass
through?
76. When one has connected a conductor, a
source of electricity such as a battery and A. insulator
an appliance such as a bulb, one has cre- B. conductor
ated an electric
C. closed circuit
A. switch D. short circuit
B. insulator
82. The following are advantages of bulbs con-
C. circuit nected in series EXCEPT:
D. none of above A. It does not overheat.

B. It is easy to install and maintain. 87. There are two acceptable ways electri-
cians and electrical engineers show a
C. Low current is needed to light all the
switch is closed in a circuit diagram. What

bulbs.
are they? Select 2 answers.
D. Large amount of current is needed to
A. Draw a line connecting two dots
light all the bulbs.
B. Write “closed” next to the switch
83. If you decrease the voltage in a circuit, C. Draw a circle with an “X” in it
which of the following will happen?
D. Draw an arc connecting the switch to
A. current decreases a wire with your pencil
B. current increases
88. Where does an electric current flow?
C. the electrons disappear A. in an open circuit
D. the bulbs will get brighter B. broken circuit
84. If one bulb of Christmas lights, connected C. in a closed circuit
in series is burned out, what will happen D. in a busted bulb
to the other light bulbs?
89. A complete circuit can (but doesn’t neces-
A. All other bulbs will no longer work.
sarily have to) include a-
B. All other bulbs will continue to light A. wood block
C. The brightness of the bulbs will in- B. bulb, switch, and buzzer
crease.
C. rubber band
D. The brightness of the bulbs will de-
D. none of above
crease.
90. What is the name of the material that elec-
85. Which would cause an electric circuit to tric current can pass through?
lack a current?
A. insulator
A. open switch
B. conductor
B. closed switch
C. closed circuit
C. lighted bulbs
D. short circuit
D. none of above
91. What is the efficiency of the machine if the
86. Imagine a simple circuit with one 1.5 volts input is 263 J and the output is 142 J?
battery and a bulb. When the 1.5 volts A. 6.26%
battery is replaced with a 3 volts battery.
What will happen? B. 54%
C. 100%
A. The bulb gets brighter.
D. 260%
B. The bulb gets dimmer.
C. Nothing has changed. 92. Electric current is defined as
D. The bulb stays at the same level of A. the opposition to the flow of electrons
brightness. B. the amount of voltage in a battery

C. the rate at which protons move C. Transformer

through a wire.
D. Insulator
D. the rate at which electrons move
through a wire. 98. Levi is wanting to light a bulb. What does
he need to get the bulb to light?
93. A series circuit has 1200-ohms of total re-
sistance with 12 V as the power supply. A. A battery and a paper clip
What is the total current of this circuit? B. A battery and a wire
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. 100 amps C. A paper clip and a wire
B. .01 amps D. A switch and a wire
C. 10 amps
99. What charge does a proton have?
D. 14, 400 amps
A. negative (-)
94. What is an example of a RESISTOR?
B. positive (+)
A. Light bulb
C. neutral or no charge (0)
B. Plastic
D. none of above
C. Water
D. none of above 100. Which statements describe an open cir-
cuit? Check all that apply.
95. What does it mean when a switch is open?
Choose all that apply. A. Bulbs will shine.
A. Current moves through the entire cir- B. Bulbs will not shine.
cuit C. The circuit is incomplete.
B. Current cannot move through the en-
D. The circuit is complete.
tire circuit
E. Charges flow.
C. The circuit is complete
D. The circuit is incomplete 101. The circuit that has only one path for elec-
tricity to travel around.
96. What type of circuit connection should a
light bulb be connected to maintain maxi- A. parallel circuit
mum brightness? B. series circuit
A. series circuit C. no circuit
B. parallel circuit
D. none of above
C. either series circuit or parallel circuit
D. neither series circuit or parallel circuit 102. Materials that don’t allow electricity to
flow throught them easily are called
97. A material that does not allow electricity A. insulators
to flow through the circuit is known as a
B. conductors
A. Conductor C. semiconductors
B. Source D. gravity

103. To complete a circuit path- C. 9V

A. paper will work D. 27V

B. a nail will work 109. The current through a 10 ohm resistor is
C. wood will work 1.2 amperes. What is the potential differ-
ence (voltage) across the resistor?
D. none of above
A. .12 V
104. When adding light bulbs in series, the to- B. 12 V
tal resistance and the current (flow
rate) C. 120 V
A. increases; increases D. 8.3 V
B. increases; decreases 110. allows electricity to flow through it.

C. decreases; decreases A. a conductor
D. decreases; increases B. an insulator
C. a magnet
105. Compared to a 3-Ohm resistor, a 6-Ohm
resistor has D. none of above
A. 1/4 the power 111. Calculate current if a charge of 10

Coulombs flows past a point in 5 seconds
B. 1/2 the power
A. 2 Amps
C. 2 times the power
B. 50 Amps
D. 4 times the power
C. 0.5 Amps
106. The form of energy that can produce light, D. none of above
heat, motion, and magnetic force.
112. Which of the following statements is true
A. electricity
about a basic electrical circuit?
B. water
A. No electricity will flow through a circuit
C. grass without a light.
D. none of above B. Electricity will flow through a circuit
without a source of energy.
107. An electrical current is
C. No electricity will flow through a circuit
A. the movement of electric charges that has an open switch.
through a conductor.
D. Electricity will flow through a circuit
B. convert electrical energy into move- that forms an incomplete loop.
ment energy
113. Parallel Circuit
C. for controlling whether current flows
in an electric circuit. A. Electricity has more than one way to
travel through the circuit. The light bulb
D. none of above
burns the longest.
108. How many volts is produced by three B. Lightbulb burns the brightest in this cir-
cells of 3 V each in series? cuit.
A. 3V C. railroad tracks
B. 1.5V D. none of above

114. stops the flow of electricity. 119. In a circuit diagram, which item is repre-
sented by a straight line?
A. A conductor
B. An insulator A. bulb
C. A magnet B. motor
D. none of above C. wire

D. battery
115. Which item uses electricity to make
NARAYAN CHANGDER
heat? E. resistor
A. radio 120. The accumulation of excess electric
B. toaster charge on an object is called
C. fan A. Static electricity
D. speaker B. Electric discharge
C. Resistance
116. This measures electromotive force.
A. ampere D. Circuit
B. coulomb 121. In order to measure the current flowing

C. volt through a bulb in a circuit, the ammeter is
connected in
D. ohm
A. Not connected in the circuit
117. Chang wants to build a circuit that will B. parallel with the battery
light up the bulb from a flashlight. Which
component could Chang leave out and still C. parallel with the bulb
light up the bulb? D. series with the bulb
A. the switch
122. Which of these objects is an electrical in-
B. the battery sulator?
C. the wire A. Copper Wire
D. none of above B. Paper Clip
118. Imagine a circuit with a 1.5 volts battery C. Steel Pole
and a bulb and a similar circuit with a 3
D. Rubber Gloves
volts battery and two bulbs. Which has
the brighter glow? 123. In a circuit diagram, which item is repre-
A. The bulbs in both circuits will not lit. sented by a circle with an “M” inside?
B. The circuit with 1.5 volts battery and A. bulb
one bulb.
B. motor
C. The circuit with 3 volts battery and two
C. wire
bulbs.
D. battery
D. The bulbs in both circuits are of similar
brightness levels. E. resistor

124. A device for opening or closing the flow 129. A student tested different items to de-
in a circuit is termine which items conduct electricity.
Which list below includes only items that

A. an insulator
do NOT conduct electricity?
B. a battery charger
A. rubber eraser, glass rod, plastic but-
C. a switch ton
D. none of above B. copper wire, glass rod, steel paper clip
C. steel paper clip, plastic button, glass
125. How does the flow rate of charge (i.e.
rod
current) in a parallel circuit divide if the
branches have different resistances? D. rubber eraser, plastic button, copper
wire
A. Equal, more charge flows through big-
ger resistor 130. What holds the filament in a lightbulb?
B. Equal, more charge flows throught the A. glass bulb suport
smaller resistor
B. support wires
C. Unequal, more charge flows through C. wire attachment point
bigger resistor
D. none of above
D. Unequal, more charge flows through
smaller resistor 131. Why are most household circuits parallel,
rather than series?
126. What type of circuit connection is used in
A. Parallel circuits allow some lights and
Christmas lights?
appliances to be used when others are off.
A. series circuit
B. Parallel circuits carry less current than
B. parallel circuit series circuits.
C. either series circuit or parallel circuit C. Parallel circuits allow no lights and ap-
pliances to be used when others are off.
D. neither series circuit or parallel circuit
D. Parallel circuits don’t require fuses or
127. Which device carries the flow of current circuit breakers.
in an electric circuit?
132. What is a path that electric currents flow
A. the wire
A. circuit
B. the switch
B. current
C. the battery
C. voltage
D. the light bulb
D. none of above
128. Voltage divided by Current (V / I) equals 133. The unit for Power is
A. Current A. Joules
B. Power B. Amperes
C. Resistance C. Watts
D. Watts D. None

134. insulators D. The bulb will shine half as bright as it

A. power source did with one battery
B. turns energy on and off 139. If V= I*R is rearranged to solve for I.

C. let electricity flow through easily What is the new equation?
D. stop electricity from flowing through A. I = V/R

easily B. I = R/V
C. I = R*V
NARAYAN CHANGDER
135. A material that allows electricity to flow
through the circuit without disruption is D. R = V*I
known as a
140. It is a closed-loop through which current
A. Switch flows.
B. Transformer A. circuit
C. Conductor B. current
D. Source C. resistance
136. What happens to the voltage in a parallel D. voltage
circuit?
141. The flow of electricity in a circuit can
A. The voltage stays the same produce-
B. The voltage is added A. solar energy (energy from the sun)
C. The voltage is reduced B. geothermal energy (energy from in-
D. The voltage is split between the light side the Earth)
bulbs C. sound energy
137. What is the main disadvantage of paral- D. none of above
lel circuits?
142. Circuits in your home, school, or other
A. Any break in the circuit stops the flow buildings are circuits.
of charges.
A. series
B. They are complicated to design and
build. B. parallel
C. There are multiple paths for charges C. short

to flow. D. none of above
D. none of above 143. Which statement is correct about electric
138. An electric circuit contains a battery, a current powered by a battery? I. It al-
switch, and a bulb. Which of the follow- ways flows clockwise.II. It gets used up
ing will MOST LIKELY happen if you add as it goes around the circuit.III. It does not
another battery to the circuit? get used up as it goes around the circuit.
A. The bulb will not shine A. I
B. The bulb will shine brighter than it did B. III

with one battery C. I and II
C. The bulb will shine the same D. I, II and III

144. How does the resistance change as you 149. Find the resistance of a circuit that draws
add bulbs to a series circuit? 0.06 amperes with 12 volts applied.

A. The resistance does not change. A. 2 ohms
B. The resistance decreases. B. 20 ohms
C. The resistance increases. C. 200 ohms
D. none of above D. 24 ohms
145. Which statements describe a closed cir-
150. How do the lights in a series circuit be-
cuit? Check all that apply.
have when one bulb burns out?
A. Bulbs will shine.
A. The rest of the bulbs continue to shine
B. Bulbs will not shine. at maximum brightness.
C. The circuit is incomplete. B. The rest of the bulbs continue to shine
D. The circuit is complete. at a lower brightness.
E. Charges flow. C. The rest of the bulbs stop shining and
shut off.
146. Calculate the current for a 120-volt re-
frigerator that uses 650 watts of power. D. none of above
A. 0.18 151. Circuits in home are usually connected in
B. 5.4
C. 120 A. series circuit
D. 78, 000 B. parallel circuit
147. The flow of electricity can produce- C. either series circuit or parallel circuit
A. biofuel energy (comes from living mat- D. neither series circuit or parallel circuit
ter)
152. What is the power from a 20 V battery
B. light, heat, and sound
connected to a light bulb that draws 1.5
C. geothermal energy (comes from inside Amps of Current?
the Earth)
A. 13.33 Watts
D. none of above
B. 13.33 Ohms
148. Which statement describes an open cir- C. 30 Watts
cuit?
D. 30 Ohms
A. The circuit is incomplete and broken,
and the lights in the circuit shine. 153. What supplies energy in an electric cir-
B. The circuit is complete and unbroken, cuit?
and the lights in the circuit shine. A. a conductor
C. The circuit is incomplete and broken,
B. light bulb
and the lights in the circuit do not shine.
C. a wire
D. none of above D. a battery

154. What is the symbol and units for resis- 159. How much does it cost to run you 70 W
tance? TV for 120 hrs at $0.10 per kWh
A. R:ohms A. $0.84
B. R:volts B. $840
C. R:amps C. $8.4
D. I:ohms D. $0.17
E. I:amps
NARAYAN CHANGDER
160. How does flipping a light switch off stop
155. The unit of work was named after the light from illuminating the room?
A. James Watt A. The switch stops the flow of the elec-
B. Isaac Newton tric current
C. James Joule B. The switch increase the flow of the
electric current.
D. Renee Descartes
C. The switch sends the electric current
156. Which of the following best describes a somewhere else.
parallel circuit?
D. The switch absorbs the electric cur-
A. Current flows along one pathway. rent instead of sending it to the light.
B. Current flows along more than one
pathways. 161. Philip needs to choose an item to use
to complete a circuit he is making.Which
C. The flow of current comes from sev- of the following items would be his BEST
eral sources. choice?
D. The flow of current comes from more A. metal coin
than one load.
B. glass bead
157. A circuit consist of four light bulbs. If the
C. plastic straw
first light bulb burns out, what will most
likely happen to the other light bulbs? D. wooden toothpick
A. The other light bulbs will be 1/3 162. Voltage divided by Resistance (V / R)
brighter. equals
B. The other light bulbs will be 1/4 dim- A. Current
mer.
B. Power
C. The other light bulbs will blink on and
off. C. Ohms
D. The other light bulbs will go out. D. Watts
158. The path that the electricity flows from 163. A circuit with the switch open allows
the battery to the light bulb and back to A. electricity to flow so the device is off
the battery is called the
B. eectricity to not flow so the device is
A. circuit on
B. components C. electricity to flow so the device is on
C. wires D. electricity to not flow so the device is
D. switch off

164. To move or travel in one direction- 170. Which one of these is a good conductor of
A. path electricity?

B. flow A. Paper Tube
C. circuit B. Wax String
D. none of above C. Metal Wire

D. Hot Tacos
165. What is the symbol and unit for current?
A. I:amps 171. Which materials do you need to build an
B. I:ohms electric circuit?
C. I:volts A. battery holder, light bulb holder
D. R:ohms B. battery, bulb, copper wire, switch
E. V:volts C. switch, battery and bulb

D. bulb, copper wire and switch
166. Bulbs convert into
A. solar, light 172. What is the effect of changing the wire
in a circuit from a straight short wire to a
B. electrical, light
longer coiled thick wire?
C. electrical, movement
A. Nothing has changed.
D. none of above
B. The bulbs become dimmer.
167. What supplies the energy in a simple cir- C. The bulbs become brighter.
cuit?
D. The bulbs stay at the same level of
A. wires
brightness.
B. battery
173. Materials that allow electricity to flow
C. bulb
through them easily such as copper are
D. none of above called
168. In a series circuit was is the same every- A. insulators
where in the circuit? B. semiconductors
A. resistance C. conductors
B. electric pressure D. none of above
C. voltage
174. A circuit contains two resistors in se-
D. current
ries. One is 5ohms and the other 10 ohms.
169. The Total Resistance of the circuit What is the total resistance of the circuit?
A. 2 Ohms A. 5 ohms
B. 10 Ohms B. 10 ohms
C. 5 Ohms C. 15 ohms
D. 8 Ohms D. none of above

175. Mrs. Byars is building a simple circuit 180. Voltage is the measure of:
with a battery, light bulb, and copper
A. the flow of the current in a circuit
wires. When she connects the wires to the
battery terminals, the light bulb does not B. the change in electrical energy be-
light up. Why doesn’t the bulb light up? tween two points in a circuit.
A. Copper isn’t a conductor. C. the strength of the current in a circuit
B. A battery can’t make a light bulb shine.
D. the electrical energy in a circuit.
C. It isn’t dark outside.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. The circuit is open. 181. What are two factors that affect the
brightness of the bulbs?
176. Energy from air vibrations-
A. thermal energy A. Number of dry cells
B. sound energy B. Number of wires
C. heat energy C. Number of light bulbs
D. none of above
D. Number of switches
series circuit? 182. In a circuit, 3A of current pass through
A. Current flows along one pathway. the light bulb. The resistance of the light
bulb is 1.5 ohms. What is the voltage of
B. Current flows along many pathways. the battery?
C. The flow of current comes from the
switch. A. 1.3
D. The flow of current comes from the B. 3.0

light bulb.
C. 4.5
178. Tammy makes a complete simple circuit D. 6.0
with one bulb and three batteries. The
bulb lights for an instant and then goes out.
183. What will happen if one light bulb is re-
Why?
moved from a series circuit?
A. Too much electricity flows through the
bulb’s filament A. The other bulbs will not work.
B. Not enough electricity flows around B. The other bulbs will get dimmer.
the circuit
C. The other bulbs will get brighter.
C. The batteries are flat
D. The battery will become stronger.
D. The batteries are not good
179. Power is a measure of how much can 184. Any device that uses current is a
be done in a set amount of
A. switch.
A. Work, Time
B. voltmeter.
B. Work, Energy
C. Energy, Force C. battery.
D. Force, Work D. resistor.

185. A student added another light to an elec- 190. What will happen if one light bulb is re-
tric circuit and all the lights became dim- moved from a parallel circuit?
mer. What is most likely the cause of the

A. The other bulbs will not work.
dimmer lights?
B. The other bulbs will get dimmer.
A. The batteries are weak.
B. The light bulbs are hot. C. The other bulbs will continue to light.
C. The circuit is a series circuit. D. Some bulbs will get dimmer and some
will get brighter.
D. The circuit is a parallel circuit.
186. Why might a bulb have busted when a 3 191. Which of the following can you directly
pieces 3 volts battery are both connected relate to bulb brightness?
across in a simple series circuit? A. voltage
A. The batteries are not connected prop- B. current
erly.
C. resistance
B. The batteries are used up or un-
charged D. power
C. There is insufficient electricity flowing 192. How much power comes from a 10 V bat-
in the circuit. tery connected to a 2 Ohm resistor?
D. Too much electricity flows through the A. 50 Watts
bulb’s filament and the bulb blows.
B. 5 Watts
187. Which of the following is usually con-
C. 20 Watts
nected in series circuit?
D. .5 Watts
A. Christmas lights
B. appliances at home 193. How does a parallel circuit change when
C. light bulbs at home a branch is added?
D. headlight of motorcycle A. The total resistance increases, so the
current in the circuit decreases.
188. An example of a voltage source is a(n)
B. The total resistance decreases, so the
A. electrical wire.
current in the circuit increases.
B. electric motor.
C. The total resistance increases, so
C. battery. bulbs shine at a lower brightness.
D. magnet. D. none of above
189. Which best describes a series circuit?
194. Electrical energy is changed to in light
A. It has two light bulbs. bulbs.
B. The same current flows through both A. light energy
light bulbs.
B. heat energy
C. It uses a single battery.
D. The current is divided between the C. sound energy
light bulbs. D. energy of motion

3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy 394
3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy

1. Which of the following lamps has the high- B. 144 000 J
est energy efficiency?
C. 2400 J
A. Compact fluorescent lamp
D. 18 J
B. halogen lamp
C. Incandescent lamp 7. W = 500 Joules t = 25 secondsP =? ? ?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. LED lamp A. 0.05 W
2. How many kilowatts are in 80 W B. 20 W
A. 0.008 kW C. 12500 W
B. 0.08 kW D. 2000 W
C. 0.8 kW
8. Which statement best describes the rela-
D. 8 kW
tionship between current, voltage, and re-
3. What is the equation for power? sistance?
A. V = IR A. A circuit’s current decreases when
higher voltage and lower resistance is ap-
B. P = IV
plied.
C. P = IR
B. A current increases when lower volt-
D. P = I/V age and higher resistance is applied.
4. A toaster, rated 1500 W 240 V, is C. A current increases when higher volt-
switched on for 15 minutes. Calculate the age and lower resistance is applied.
energy used.
D. none of above
A. 3600 J
B. 22 500 J 9. When measuring how much electrons are
slowed down in a circuit by payloads, we
C. 216 000 J
use the unit
D. 1 350 000 J
A. amps
5. What quantities do you need to calculate
B. volts
energy?
A. Current and Voltage C. ohms
B. Power and time D. none of above

C. Resistance and current
10. Most atoms have a charge
D. Power and Voltage
A. positive
6. An air-con, rated 1.8 kW 240 V, is B. neutral
switched on for 10 minutes. Calculate the
energy used. C. negative
A. 1 080 000 J D. all atoms are different in charge

11. A 5kW electric cooker is used for 55 min- C. Amps

utes to cook. Calculate the cost of electri- D. Ohms
cal energy used if the rate per unit is 50

sen. 17. Dean uses rice cooker which has power rat-
A. RM 0.23 ing of 2.2kW twice a day. The period for
each time he uses the rice cooker is 15 min-
B. RM 230 utes. How much electrical energy is used
C. RM 2.30 in kWh?
D. RM275 A. 1.10kWh
12. What unit of measurement do we use to B. 0.67kWh

measure current flow? C. 0.55kWh
A. Watts D. 0.27kWh
B. Volts
18. How many watts are in 2 kW
C. Amps
A. 0.2 W
D. Ohms
B. 2 W
13. What is the total current of ten 90 W light C. 200 W
bulbs connected on the same circuit?
D. 2000 W
A. 0.75 A
19. What is the power rating of an oven that
B. 7.5 A
uses 4 kWh of energy in 2 hours?
C. 1.33 A
A. 0.5 kW
D. 13.3 A
B. 8 kW
14. How many seconds are in 9 days C. 6 kW
A. 540 s D. 2 kW
B. 32400 s
20. How many hours are in 12 min
C. 12960 s
A. 720 hr
D. 777, 600 s
B. 0.2 hr
15. Which sub-particle has a negative C. .12 hr
charge?
D. 1.2 hr
A. proton
B. neutron 21. A flashlight bulb with a potential differ-
ence of 4.5 V across its filament has a
C. electron power output of 8.0 W. How much current
D. both a neutron and an electron is in the bulb filament?
16. What unit of measurement do we use to A. 3.7 A

measure electrical potential difference? B. 0.23 A
A. Watts C. 1.8 A
B. Volts D. 0.56 A

22. How many kilowatts are in 6500 W 28. The kilowatt-hour is a unit of
A. 0.65 kW A. Energy
B. 6.5 kW B. power
C. 65 kW C. Charge
D. 6, 500, 000 kW D. Voltage
29. Amount of electrons flowing past a point
23. What unit is the electrical energy consump-
in a circuit. Also called current.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
tion of appliances usually measured in?
A. ampere
A. watts
B. voltage
B. joules
C. wattage
C. kilo-watt hours
D. recistance
D. amperes
30. What quantities do you need to calculate
24. How many seconds are in 4 hours power?
A. 240 s A. Current and Voltage
B. 14400 s B. Power and time
C. 0.067 s C. Resistance and current
D. 400 D. Power and Voltage

31. identical lightbulbs are connected to a cir-
25. Which way do electron flow? cuit. What is the power of each lightbulb
A. Positive to negative if the total current is 15 A?
B. Negative to positive A. 1800 W
C. Negative to Negative B. 300 W
D. Positive to Positive C. 90 W
D. 8 W
26. What is the result of the resistance of com-
ponents in a circuit? 32. If the cost 1kWh of electricity is RM0.30,
what is the cost of using a 1.5kW oven for
A. An increase in the current
4 hours?
B. A drop (decrease) in the current
A. RM1.80
C. An increase in the voltage B. RM2.50
D. A drop (decrease) in the voltage C. RM2.20
27. The measurement of the force that is D. RM3.20
needed to move electrons across a conduc- 33. Copper, silver, and the human body are ex-
tive material refers to amples of
A. current A. conductors
B. resistance B. insulators
C. voltage C. resistors

34. A 2000W vacuum is used for 0.5hours. 39. An electric appliance is labelled 2 V, 4 W.
How long will it takes a 100 W immersion How much electrical charges flow through
heater to use the same amount of electri- the electric appliance in 9 minutes?

cal energy? A. 2 C
A. 5 hours B. 8 C
B. 10 hours C. 540 C
C. 15 hours D. 1 080 C
D. 20 hours
40. A positive ion has electrons than nor-
35. When measuring a circuit you get a volt- mal.
meter reading of 3 volts and an ammeter A. more
reading of 600 mA. What is the power be- B. fewer
ing supplied to the device?
C. the same number
A. 1.8 W
D. none of above
B. 1800 W
41. What is the unit for power?
C. 0.005 W
A. Ampere
D. 5 W
B. Watt
36. A current of 4 A flows through a 20 V C. Kilowatt hour
car headlight bulb. Calculate the electric
power. Remember:P = VI D. Voltage
A. 80 W 42. What is the electrical energy of a 750 W

waffle iron that is used for 15 min
B. 200 W
A. 11, 250 kWh
C. 2.5 A
B. 11.25 kWh
D. 4.55 A
C. 0.1875 kWh
37. A bulb is labelled 6 V, 0.6 A. What is the D. 50 kWh
power of the bulb?
43. How many amps are in 800mA?
A. 0.6 W
A. 800, 000 A
B. 5W
B. 8 A
C. 3.6W
C. 0.8 A
D. 6W
D. 80 A
38. How much time did you cook dinner if the
44. In what direction do the electrons flow
oven uses 1.5 kW of power and you used
in a circuit with a battery as the energy
a total of 13.5 kWh of energy?
source?
A. 9 hrs
A. clockwise
B. 0.1 hrs
B. counterclockwise
C. 20.25 hrs C. from positive end of the battery
D. 5 hrs around the circuit to the negative end

D. from negative end of the battery 50. What is the resistance if the current is 3 A
around the circuit to the positive end and the Voltage 12 V
A. 1 Ohm
45. What is the power rating of a space heater
that uses 1.2 kWh of energy in 45 min? B. 3 Ohms
A. 0.026 kW C. 4 Ohms
B. 54 kW D. 12 Ohms
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 0.9 kW 51. An electric heater is rated 230V, 10 A. Cal-
D. 1.6 kW culate the power of the electric heater in
kW.
46. A fluorescent lamp with a power rating of A. 2300
40 W produce 36 W of light energy. What
is the efficiency of the lamp? B. 23
A. 90% C. 2.3
B. 10% D. 0.23
C. 36% 52. If the ammeter shows a reading of 997

mA, how many amps of current is flowing
D. 40%
through the circuit?
47. Device used to measure the electromotive A. 997 A
force in a circuit
B. 99.7 A
A. Ammeter
C. 9.97 A
B. Multimeter D. .997 A
C. Ohmmeter
53. Why do electrons move from one atom to
D. Voltmeter another instead of protons?
48. What is the potential difference across a A. they have less mass
resistor that dissipates 5.00 W of power B. they are slower
and has a current of 5.0 A?
C. they are held with more force by the
A. 1.0 V nucleus
B. 4.00 V D. they are the only subparticle with a
C. 0.20 V charge
D. 125 V 54. What is the energy used of a light bulb if

it is plugged into a 120 V outlet for 90 hrs
49. What are the units for energy? and has 240 Ohms of resistance?
A. kWh A. 5.4 kWh
B. Joules B. 60 kWh
C. Both C. 54 kWh
D. Neither D. 0.5 kWh

55. How much time did you play video games C. could be either AC or DC
if the PS4 uses 110 W of power and you
D. none of above
used a total of 16.5 kWh of energy?

A. 6.63 hrs 61. An electric appliance labelled 80 W. What
B. 0.15 hrs does the label means?
C. 150 hrs A. The rate of change of power is 80 W

D. 50 hrs B. The rate of change of energy is 80 J/s
56. a pair of 15-watt computer speakers C. The rate of change of current is 80 A

are connected to a 12-volt power supply. D. The rate of change of voltage is 80 V
what is the electric current running through
the speakers? 62. What does “Power” describe?
A. 1.25 A A. The strength of electric current
B. 0.8 A B. The size of a potential difference
C. 12.5 A C. The rate at which energy is converted
D. 180 A from one form to another
57. How many hours are in 90 min D. none of above

A. 5400 hr 63. What is the electrical energy of a 70 W TV
B. 1.3 hr that is used for 110 hr
C. .5 hr A. 0.63 kWh
D. 1.5 hr B. 7700 kWh
58. How much does it cost to run you 70 W TV C. 1.57 kWh
for 120 hrs at 3.50 Baht per kWh?
D. 7.7 kWh
A. 8.40 Baht
B. 29.40 Baht 64. The characteristic of any material to resist
the flow of electrons
C. 8, 400 Baht
A. Ohms
D. 2.94 Baht
B. Resistivity
59. What unit of measurement do we use to
measure resistance? C. Watts
A. Watts D. Amperage
B. Volts 65. A tool that can be used to measure voltage,
C. Amps amperage and resistance is called a
D. Ohms A. ammeter
60. The type of current in a cell phone is B. ohmmeter

A. AC C. multimeter
B. DC D. voltmeter

66. A current of 5A flows in a heating ele- How many hours did Jefri watch the tele-
ments for 10 minutes. If the potential dif- vision?
ference across the elements is 240 V, cal- A. 1 hour
culate the electrical energy is used by the
elements B. 1.5 hours
A. 12kJ C. 2 hours
B. 7.2 kJ D. 3 hours
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 720 kJ 72. A television is labelled 250 W, 240 V is
D. 2.4kJ used 5 hours per day in one month. If the
cost of electricity is 24 sen per unit, what
67. How many 50 W light bulbs can you put on is the cost of operating the appliance in the
a circuit that can hold a maximum of 10 A month of June?
A. 5 Light bulbs A. RM 5.00
B. 2 Light bulbs B. RM 6.00
C. 12 Light bulbs C. RM 8.00
D. 24 Light bulbs D. RM 9.00
68. The unit used to measure power is the 73. Samson washes his long dark locks every
A. Watt day. He spends half an hour each day dry-
ing his hair with an electric hair dryer with
B. Newton a power rating of 1.5 kW. How much to-
C. Joule tal energy will be used by the hair dryer
D. Newton*meter in one week?
A. 52.5 kWh
69. A 200W electric keetle is used to heat up
water for 15 minutes. How much electrical B. 0.75 kWh
energy is used? C. 5.25 kWh
A. 0/03kWj D. 36 kWh
B. 0.04kWj 74. According to Ohm’s law, Resistance is
C. 0.05kWj equal to the voltage divided by:
D. 0.06kWj A. potential difference
70. Ions are atoms that have lost or gained B. conduction

C. time
A. protons D. current
B. neutrons
75. Samson washes his long dark locks every
C. electrons day. He spends half an hour each day dry-
D. any one of these particles ing his hair with an electric hair dryer with
a power rating of 1.5 kW. If the unit cost
71. Jefri just finished watching television with of electricity is 2.75 Baht per kWh, how
the power rating 180W. The electrical en- much does Samson spend on drying his hair
ergy used by the television is 0.27kWh. each week?

A. 2.10 Baht D. 3000 W

B. 14.42 Baht
77. A filament bulb is labelled 240 V, 60 W.

C. 28.90 Baht What is the current flows through the fila-
D. 144.20 Baht ment and the resistance of the filament?
76. How many watts are in 0.003 kW A. 0.25A, 60Ohm

A. 0.3 W B. 0.25A, 960 Ohm
B. 3 W C. 4.00 A, 60Ohm
C. 300 W D. 4.00A, 240 Ohm

4. Magnetic effects of electric
NARAYAN CHANGDER
current
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields

1. What does a compass needle point to? C. transformer
A. Geographic North D. direct current
B. Awesomeness
5. The place on a magnet where the force it
C. Magnetic North exerts is the strongest is called
D. North by Northwest
A. a magnetic pole
2. Characteristic of magnets due to aligning B. a magnetic field line
atoms.
C. a domain
A. Magnetite
D. none of above
B. Magnetic Poles
C. Permanent Magnet 6. A magnetic force is a(n)
D. Steel A. push
3. Magnets are surrounded by an invisible B. pull
area called
C. invisible field
A. A Magnetic Field
D. all of the above
B. Invisible Field
C. Newton Area 7. region surrounding a magnet that exerts a
force on other magnets and objects made
D. Electricity
of magnetic materials
4. a cylindrical coil of wire, used to produce A. magnetic field
a magnetic field when an electrical current
passes through the wire B. magnetic domain
A. solenoid C. magnetic pole
B. turbine D. magnetism

4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 403
8. Magnetic field lines surrounding a magnet B. weaker

are conventionally drawn
C. faster

A. from south to north
D. slower
B. from north to south
C. either way 14. You have two magnets. One is in your
D. Who knows? ! hand and the other is sitting on a table.
You move the SOUTH pole of your magnet
9. All permanent magnets have two near the SOUTH pole of the magnet on the
A. magnetic charges table. What happens?
B. magnetic fields A. Nothing

C. magnetic needles B. They repel
D. magnetic poles C. They attract
10. Which one has the shortest wavelength? D. A chemical reaction
A. X-ray
15. A compass is
B. microwave
A. a magnet that is free to move and al-
C. radio ways points east.
D. gamma
B. not a magnet.
11. What does electrons mean? C. a magnet that is free to move and al-
A. negative charge and located on the ways points north.
outside of the atom.
D. a magnet that does not move.
B. electrons flow from one place to an-
other 16. Which of the following is true about a bar
C. a series of electrons that flow from the magnet?
north to the south pole A. Its magnetic field is strongest near its
D. none of above center.
12. Which of the materials below can be at- B. It is surrounded by a magnetic field.
tracted by a magnet? Check ALL that ap- C. The north pole is stronger than the
ply. south pole.
A. Iron D. The south pole is stronger than the
B. Gold north pole.
C. Copper
17. As in the case of unlike magnetic poles, un-
D. Nickel like electric charges ?
E. Cobalt
A. repel each other
13. Current flowing through a wire is generat- B. attract each other
ing a magnetic field. The greater the cur-
rent, the the magnetic field. C. easily loses its magnetism
A. stronger D. strengthens the magnetic field

18. A material that is made of iron that is at- 23. Magnets have a north and a south
tracted to other materials also made of
A. shape
iron
B. color
A. magnet
C. pole
B. attract
D. region
C. force
D. temporary 24. The area around a magnet in which mag-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
netic forces can act is the ?
19. A temporary magnet does what?
A. magnetic field
A. loses its magneitsm
B. magnetic poles
B. attracts each other
C. magnetism
C. repels each other
D. lines of force
D. strengthens the magnetic field
25. The space around a magnet where mag-
20. An electron travels due north through a netic forces are present is called
vacuum in a region of uniform magnetic
A. magnetism
field that is also directed due north. It will:
B. a bar magnet
A. be unaffected by the field
C. the area of whatchagictobruicticsythe-
B. speed up
leneijromeloucksiconium
C. slow down
D. a magnetic field
D. follow a right-handed corkscrew path
26. Alternating current is made by
21. Kelly wants to start a science club that in-
A. alternating current and voltage.
vestigates the interactions between elec-
trical energy and magnetism. What is the B. alternating the direction of voltage of
main process that this club will investi- the power source.
gate? C. huge chemical batteries.
A. electromagnetism D. none of the above
B. electric charge
27. Which best describes a nonmagnetic mate-
C. electronic devices rial?
D. electrical safety A. The magnetic poles of the atoms point
in different directions.
22. What type of device can increase and de-
crease voltage? B. The magnetic poles of the atoms point
in the same direction.
A. Generators
C. The magnetic poles of its atoms are
B. Transformers
grouped in domains that point in different
C. Galvanometers directions.
D. Electric motors D. none of above

28. How can you increase the strength of an A. A current carrying wire will cause any
electromagnet? (Select more than one) object to move

A. Add more coils to the wire B. A compass will point to any kind of
B. Add a stronger battery metal
C. Remove the battery C. Both the compass needle and the cur-
rent carrying wire have magnetic fields
D. Remove the coils from the wire
D. none of above
29. Magnets are made of tiny sections of mag-
netic fields that are aligned to produce a 34. What does atoms mean?
larger magnetic field. These are called
A. positive charge located in the center.
A. magnetic domains
B. the smallest unit of matter, everything
B. magnetic fields is made of atoms, 3 particles make an
C. magnetic sections atom..
D. electromagnets C. negative charge and located on the
30. Which of the following will not influence
D. none of above
the magnetic force acting on a current-
carrying conductor?
35. What is a hard magnetic material?
A. The current flowing in the conductor
A. Stays magnetic once magnetised e.g.
B. Length of the conductor steel
C. Magnetic field strength B. Stays magnetic once magnetised e.g.
D. The speed of the conductor iron
C. Hard to break
31. A magnetic is a grouping of billions of
atoms that all have magnetic fields lined D. Looses magnetism easily e.g. iron
up in the same way
A. domain 36. Magnets are made of tiny sections of mag-
netic fields that are aligned to produce a
B. field larger magnetic field. These are called
C. pole A. frontiers
D. area B. domains
32. Earth acts like a giant magnet because its C. electromagnets
center is made up MOSTLY of
D. electron shells
A. granite
B. limestone 37. The SI unit of magnetic field is
C. iron A. weber
D. nickel B. guass
C. tesla
33. Why would a compass needle move if held
near a current-carrying wire? D. farad

38. The magnetic field of a magnet is due to 44. When current running through a wire is
the magnetic fields produced by its placed in the field of a permanent magnet,
A. protons A. solar energy is transformed into light
B. neutrons B. electrical energy is transformed into
C. quarks sound
D. electrons C. solar energy is transformed into me-
chanical energy
39. Just as it is easy to separate electric
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. electrical energy is transformed into
charges, it is relatively easy to isolate a
mechanical energy
magnet’s poles.
A. true 45. An ampere is a
B. false A. unit of resistance.
C. maybe ? B. unit of current.
D. none of above C. type of charge.
40. The side of the magnet that points South D. current.

is called 46. Material that PREVENTS electric current or
A. Down Under heat from flowing.
B. Southwest A. electromagnetic field
C. The South side B. electric current
D. South Pole C. insulator
41. The energy that is stored in an object or D. none of above
system
47. Which of these bests describes an electro-
A. kinetic energy magnet?
B. potential energy A. A permanent magnet made from elec-
C. magnetic energy tric currents.
D. force B. A temporary magnet made from elec-
tric currents.
42. This magnet loses magnetization easily
C. A temporary magnet made from mag-
A. temporary netic currents.
B. electromagnet
D. none of above
C. ferromagnet
48. The primary reason a bird can perch harm-
D. permanent
lessly on bare high voltage wires is that
43. material that permanent magnets can be A. a bird’s feet are close together.
made from
B. a bird has a very large electrical resis-
A. soft iron tance.
B. iron and cobalt C. there is no potential difference across
C. alnico the bird’s feet.
D. none of above D. all of the above

49. Changing the current changes the of an is 1.2 N. What is the strength of the mag-
electromagnet. netic field (B)? HINT:F=I.L.B

A. charge A. = 0.18 N
B. strength and direction B. = 0.18 T
C. strength C. = 0.18 Cm
D. direction D. = 0.18
50. What does the first Right Hand Rule tell
54. A is a current-carrying coil of wire with
you?
many loops
A. Fingers point to current and the thumb
points toward thumb A. electromagnet
B. Fingers are the magnetic field & thumb B. solenoid

direction of current C. magnet
C. Fingers are current and thumb is direc- D. compass
tion of magnetic field
D. Thumbs up is the OK sign for magnetic 55. Surrounding a magnet is a magnetic field.
field to work Surrounding an electron is an electric field.
Surrounding Earth is
51. How is Earth’s magnetic field similar to
A. an alteration in space in which mass
that of a magnet?
experiences a force.
A. It is hundreds of miles long
B. a gravitational field
B. It has north and south poles
C. both of these
C. It is made in Earth’s core
D. neither of these
D. It is shaped like a horseshoe
52. What is a difference between a magnet 56. What does the author describe?
and a magnetic material? A. the characteristics of magnets and
A. Magnets are metals and magnetic ma- magnetic fields
terials are not. B. the reasons why some materials are
B. Magnetic materials attract to either attracted to magnets
pole of a magnet; magnets only attract to C. the different shapes, strengths, and
opposite poles. sizes of magnets
C. Magnets are attracted to magnets and D. the ways different compasses work to
magnetic materials are repelled by mag- tell direction
nets.
D. Magnets and magnetic materials are 57. Magnets produce fields.
the same thing. A. electric
53. A straight wire carrying a 9.0 A current B. magnetic
is in a uniform magnetic field oriented at
C. baseball
right angles to the wire. When 75 cm of
wire is in the field, the force on the wire D. corn

58. Earth’s magnetic field is generated in the 63. Which of the following is a property of
core, which is made of that is con- magnets?
stantly A. They can give you a “shock” when you
A. fire, steaming touch them
B. aluminum, moving B. They can push or pull objects without
C. iron, moving touching them
D. none of above C. They are always peach color and cold
NARAYAN CHANGDER
to touch
59. A magnet can hold a piece of paper to the
door of a refrigerator. How does the mag- D. They fall faster than other objects
net stick without touching the door? when you drop them
A. Gravity attracts the magnet to the 64. You can cause a permanent magnet to lose
door. its magnetic field if
B. The magnet induces a magnetic field in A. You forcefully vibrate the object, caus-
the paper. ing its domains to fall out of alignment.
C. The magnetic force of the magnet can B. By rubbing an iron object with a perma-
act at a distance. nent magnet in the same direction repeat-
D. Atoms from the magnet pass through edly.
the paper and touch the door. C. You freeze the object.
60. What is frequency measured in? D. You connect the north and south poles
A. N of two magnets.
B. Hz 65. An electromagnet’s poles may be reversed
C. F by:
D. cm A. decreasing the voltage of the coil
61. Which of the following statements is NOT B. increasing the number of coils
correct? C. changing the direction of current flow
A. The position of the Earth’s magnetic D. altering the material used to make the
poles has changed over the course of his- coils
tory.
66. Like poles on a permanent magnet will
B. Earth does not have magnetic poles
A. attract each other
C. The force of Earth’s magnetic field is
greatest at its North and South poles B. repel each other
D. none of above C. always interact
62. What is the movement of electrically D. point in the same direction
charged particles?
67. What makes an electromagnet different
A. Voltage than a permanent magnet select all
B. Electric Current that apply
C. Electric Resistance A. it can be turned on and off
D. Magnet B. it does not need any electricity

C. its strength can be increased and de- 73. A permanent magnet is a material that pro-
creased duces a field without any magnetic
field being present.

D. its polarity can be reversed
A. electronic, internal
68. What are the north and south ends of a
B. magnetic, internal
magnet called?
C. magnetic, external
A. borders
D. electronic, external
B. tips
C. caps 74. pulls an object closer
A. magnet
D. poles
B. force
69. A coil spins in a magnetic field. Of the fol- C. attract
lowingwhich causes an increase in the in-
duced EMF inthe coil? D. repel
A. Spinning the coil faster 75. An electron is moving north in a region

where the magnetic field is south. The
B. Removing the coil from the magnetic
magnetic force exerted on the electron is:
field
A. zero
C. Keeping the flux at a constant rate
B. up
D. Decreasing the number of turns of
wire inthe coil C. north
D. south
70. What items will a magnet attract?
76. Three properties of magnets are:
A. Beach ball, glass
A. attracts wood, attract or repel insects,
B. nails, paper clip
when swings freely one end points to the
C. book, paper south
D. golf ball, glue B. Crocodiles eat magnets
71. An example of the best insulator is C. attract iron and materials that con-
tain iron, attract or repel other magnets,
A. copper and when freely swinging one end always
B. salt points north
C. plastic D. magnets interact with stuff
D. sand 77. The reason a magnet can attract an unmag-
netized nail is that
72. The needle of a compass lines up in a di-
A. nails really are magnetized (fooled you
rection the field lines of the magnetic
suckerz!)
field.
B. nails become permanently magnetized
A. perpendicular to
in a magnetic field
B. parallel with
C. nails become temporarily magnetized
C. opposite to in a magnetic field
D. without regard to D. a magnet can attract any metal object

78. If you drop a stone into a hole drilled all 83. A magnetic field is a field of force that is
the way to the other side of Earth (neglect produced by moving charges.
the molten core), the stone will
A. northern
A. come to an abrupt stop at Earth’s cen- B. positive
ter.
C. gravitational
B. speed up until it gets to Earth’s center
D. electric
C. speed up until it reaches Earth’s other
NARAYAN CHANGDER
side. 84. A temporary magnet
D. slow down until it reaches Earth’s cen- A. has no magnetic domains until a mag-
ter. net is near it
79. Where is the force of attraction the B. has magnetic domains aligned only
strongest on a magnet? when another magnet is near it
C. has magnetic domains aligned all the
A. at the poles
time
B. in the middle
D. has no magnetic domains
C. above the magnet
85. What type of current is produced in a bat-
D. below the magnet
tery
80. If two magnets are close together, the A. induced
magnetic force will be B. magnetic
A. smelly C. alternating
B. weak D. direct
C. strong
86. what is the unit of magnetic flux density?
D. positive
A. Wb
81. What are the parts of the magnet that is B. W
attracted to the paper clips?
C. T2
A. the center
D. Wb/m2
B. the poles
87. What is an electric motor?
C. the equator
A. a device that uses an electromagnet to
D. the horseshoe
convert electrical energy into mechanical
energy
82. A magnet is defined as
B. a machine that converts mechanical
A. the force between two opposite poles
energy into electrical energy
B. any material that has a magnetic field
C. an electronic device that increases the
C. the electron cloud surrounding an ob- strength of an electric signal
ject
D. a device that increases or decreases
D. none of above the voltage of alternating current

88. Which item would the magnetic domains C. magnetic field

be the most unaligned? D. magnetic field lines

A. glass jar
94. a magnet that never loses its magnetism
B. steel nail
A. Generator
C. bar magnet
B. Magnet
D. none of above
C. Permanent Magnet
89. Magnetic fields pointing into a page are D. Temporary Magnet
represented by a(n) , while out of the
page are represented by a(n) 95. One part of a freely swinging magnet al-
ways points ?
A. b / c
A. to Earth’s magnetic pole in the North-
B. heart / flower
ern Hemisphere
C. dot / x
B. to Earth’s magnetic pole in the South-
D. x / dot ern Hemisphere
E. shaded region / white region C. to Earth’s magnetic field in the North-
ern Hemisphere
90. magnetic field lines go from
D. to Earth’s magnetic field in the South-
A. north to south ern Hemisphere
B. south to north
96. is like a giant magnet and it has a north
C. both ways and south magnetic poles?
D. east to west A. Earth
91. What type of charge do electrons have? B. Sun
A. negative C. Mars
B. positive D. moon
C. neutral 97. John is using an electric current to produce
D. nothing a magnetic field. What will happen when
he turns off the current?
92. If the distance between two charged ob-
A. The strength of the magnetic field will
jects increases, the electric force between
decrease.
them
B. The strength of the magnetic field will
A. increases
increase.
B. decreases
C. The poles of the magnetic field will re-
C. stays the same verse.
D. stops D. The magnetic field will disappear.
93. Magnetic forces work in the around a 98. Which of the following will increase the
magnet. strength of an electromagnet?
A. magnetic force A. Increase the voltage of the battery
B. magnetic poles B. Decrease the voltage of the battery

C. Wrap the coils around the core less 104. ‘Like” magnetic poles and “Opposite
times magnetic poles
D. none of above A. run; stay
99. The space around a magnet where the B. attract; repel
force of a magnet can attract best is called C. stay; repel
D. repel; attract
A. magnetism
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. bar magnet 105. Circuit breakers and fuses protect
C. horseshoe magnet A. devices from breaking
D. magnetic field B. devices from electricuting you
C. devices from getting wet
100. Another unit used to measure the
strength of a magnetic field is the D. devices from overheating
A. gauss 106. What type of electricity occurs when you
B. ampere rub a balloon on your sweater?
C. volt A. thermal electricity
D. watt B. current electricity
101. A substance becomes magnetic when C. static electricity
A. positive ions gather at one end and D. work electricity
negative ions at the other end
107. To pull together, as opposites ?
B. positive charges line up on one side
and negative charges on the other side A. repel
C. magnetic domains are created by the B. attract
alignment of spinning electrons C. magnetism
D. none of above D. core
102. Electric currents passing through wires
108. A volt is a unit of
will produce a(n)
A. charge.
A. solenoid
B. electric potential.
B. magnet
C. magnetic field C. energy.
D. insulator D. work.
103. The invisible field that surrounds a mag- 109. Electric motors are devices that convert
net. energy into energy.
A. magnets A. electrical; mechanical
B. magnetic poles B. mechanical; electrical
C. magnetic force C. chemical; potential
D. magnetic fields D. mechanical; kinetic

110. Whether magnetic forces pull apart or B. Metal

push together depends on C. Magnetic Objects

A. magnetic force D. Electric Objects
B. magnetic poles
116. Which of the following does NOT incorpo-
C. magnetic field rate a magnet?
D. magnetic field lines A. Telephone
111. A hydrogen atom that has lost its elec- B. Bankcard
tron is moving east in a region where the C. Video tapes
magnetic field is directed from south to D. Sewing machine
north. It will be deflected:
A. up 117. The particles that collide with atoms of
gases, causing the atmosphere to glow,
B. down forming shimmering sheets of color are
C. north called
D. south A. auroras
B. magnetic poles
112. The magnetic behavior of any everyday
object is influenced by effects at four dif- C. magnetic field lines
ferent levels. Which of these is at the high- D. magnetic forces
est level?
118. A force of attraction or repulsion be-
A. domains tween the poles of two magnets.
B. particles A. magnets
C. atoms B. magnetic poles
D. crystals C. magnetic force
113. In a diagram of a magnetic field, field D. magnetic fields
lines cross.
119. What THREE ways are electromagnets
A. always different from permanent magnets?
B. rarely A. they can be turned off and on
C. frequently B. they can increase in strength by in-
D. never creasing the current in the wire
C. they are smaller in size
114. Surrounding every magnet is a
D. they can change which is the north and
A. magnetic field south pole
B. electrical current
120. Which of the following is not an applica-
C. another magnet tion of the magnetic force?
D. none of above A. fuse
115. Objects that are attracted to each other B. Armature
are called C. Galvanometer
A. Nonmagnetic objects D. Earbud

121. What do electric generators do C. the geographic poles

A. transform mechanical energy to elec- D. the telephone poles
trical energy
127. A ferromagnetic material is
B. transform mechanical energy to sound
A. A material that can never be a magnet
C. transform electrical energy to mechan-
ical energy B. A material that can become a magnet
D. transform electrical energy to poten- C. A material that is always a magnet
NARAYAN CHANGDER
tial energy D. none of above
122. The energy something has because it is 128. The needle of a compass lines up
moving A. parallel to the lines of the magnetic
A. kinetic energy field.
B. potential energy B. randomly.
C. magnetic energy C. always pointing towards magnetic
D. force north.
D. perpendicular to the lines of the mag-
123. What is responsible for the Magnetic netic field.
Field around Earth?
A. The Earth’s aluminium crust 129. A straight wire of length 70 cm carries a
current of50 A and makes an angle of 60◦
B. The Earth’s iron core with a uniformmagnetic field. If the force
C. The Earth’s copper mantel on the wire is 1.0 N what isthe magnitude
D. The Sun of B?
A. 20mT
124. What would you do if a fuse is blown?
B. 22mT
A. replace it with a new fuse that has the
same current C. 30mT
B. replace it with a new fuse with a differ- D. 33mT

ent current 130. What is an electromagnet?
C. flip the circuit breaker A. a bar of iron wrapped with a coil of
D. unplug all appliances wire carrying an electric current
125. Which of these will not move a domain B. the relationship between electricity
out of line? and magnetism
A. dropping a magnet C. the process by which electric current

is produced by a changing magnetic field
B. hitting a magnet hard
D. the ends of a magnet
C. heating a magnet
D. blowing on a magnet 131. The more loops in a coil of wire around
the core of an electromagnet, the the
126. Which poles on the earth change? magnetic force.
A. the North and South A. weaker
B. the magnetic poles B. stronger

C. taller 137. How does a system of magnets store po-

D. shorter tential energy in the magnetic field?

A. The energy used to move a magnet
132. This material is hard to magnetize, but with (same direction as) a magnetic force.
STAYS magnetized
B. The energy used to move a magnet
A. temporary against (opposite direction as) a magnetic
B. permanent force.
C. ferromagnet C. Magnets get their potential energy
D. electromagnet from kinetic energy.
D. none of above
133. materials are those that attract to
magnets. 138. Magnetism is a force of that occurs
A. Physical between two objects.
B. Chemical A. attraction or repulsion, magnetic
C. Ferromagnetic B. external or internal, magnetic
D. Subliminal C. external or repulsion, electronic
D. attraction or internal, electronic
134. An electromagnet can be strengthened if
A. less coils are added to the iron core 139. Earth’s magnetism is related to the cir-
B. the iron core is removed culation of molten material within Earth’s
?
C. more current runs through the wire
A. core
D. a nickel or cobalt iron core is used.
B. gravity
135. A is a device that has a magnet on a C. air
needle that spins freely. It is used for nav-
igation because its needle usually points D. oceans
north.
140. a magnetic iron ore, or mineral, that is
A. calculator capable of attracting small bits of iron
B. ruler A. electromagnet
C. compass B. compass
D. map C. metal
136. A 2.0 m long wire carrying 10 A of cur- D. lodestone
rent moves through an 6.0 T magnetic
field. What is the magnetic force acting 141. what forms when Earth’s liquid core
on the wire? moves
A. 10 N A. south pole
B. 120 N B. aurora
C. 0.5 N C. North Pole
D. 2 N D. magnetic field

142. a region in a magnetic material in which 147. Which type of magnet does not lose it’s
the magnetic fields all point the same di- magnetic properties easily.
rection A. a permanent magnet
A. magnetic domain B. an electromagnet
B. temporary magnet C. a temporary magnet
C. compass D. a nail rubbed across the north pole of
D. none of above a magnet
NARAYAN CHANGDER
148. Some objects that normally aren’t mag-
143. the direction of magnetic force fields is
netic can become magnetized when con-
A. out of the north pole and into the south nected to a circuit. Items that are magne-
pole tized in this way are called
B. out of the middle of the magnet and A. electromagnets
into each pole
B. electrons
C. out of the south pole and into the north C. electrochromic devices
pole
D. permanent magnets
D. none of above
149. What is a magnetosphere?
144. What is the process by which electric
A. the part of the atmosphere affected by
current is produced by changing magnetic
Earth’s magnetic field
fields?
B. the relationship between electricity
A. electromagnet induction
and magnetism
B. electronics C. a region in which the magnetic fields
C. generator of individual atoms are lined up
D. electromagnet D. the region around a magnet in which
magnetic forces can act
145. A temporary magnet made by passing an
electric current through a wire wrapped 150. An is a strong magnet that can be
around an iron core is? turned on and off.
A. magnetic field A. electromagnet

B. temporary magnet
B. electromagnetism
C. superconductor
C. electromagnet
D. electromagnet induction
D. attract
151. The region around a magnet where the
146. The process of creating a current in a cir- magnetic force is exerted is known as its
cuit by changing a magnetic field is called ?
A. an electric generator. A. magnetic field
B. an electric motor. B. magnetic domain
C. electromagnetic induction. C. magnetic pole
D. magnetic flux. D. electromagnet

152. What type of device converts electrical B. bar magnet

energy into mechanical energy C. circle magnet

A. electric motors
D. electromagnet
B. generator
158. Any object that attracts the metal iron.
C. transformers
D. galvanometer A. magnet
B. magnetic pole
153. Can you produce current in a wire with a
magnet that is sitting still? C. magnetic force
A. Yes; having a magnet near a wire is D. magnetic field
enough to excite the electrons
159. Which is not a property of a magnet?
B. No; the magnetic field has to be chang-
ing to excite the electrons A. all magnets have two poles
C. No; magnets cannot create electricity B. all magnets have a force of attraction
or repulsion
D. none of above
C. all magnets are surrounded by a mag-
154. An electromagnet can be made stronger netic field
by D. all magnets can be turned off
A. more power and an insulator
160. The further two magnets are apart, the
B. more coils and more power
the force of magnetism.
C. a longer wire and more water
A. stronger
D. a green wire and a switch
B. weaker
155. The arrows of magnetic field lines are di- C. same
rected the N pole.
D. none of above
A. perpendicular to
B. toward 161. What is the area of magnetic influence
around a magnet?
C. regardless of
A. gravitational pull
D. away from
B. magnetic field
156. A place on a magnet where the force it
applies is the strongest. C. electric force
A. magnet D. compass
B. magnetic pole 162. Electronic devices create magnetic fields
C. magnetic force because they
D. magnetic field A. are magnets
B. are compasses
157. A magnet is able to pick up paper clips
and can be turned on and off. What kind C. have moving particles with electric
of magnet is it? charge
A. fridge magnet D. none of above

163. the lines of force surrounding a magnet C. north pole and a south pole.
A. magnet D. south pole only.
B. magnetic force 169. Electromagnets and bar magnets are both
C. magnetic pole alike because they
D. magnetic field A. have magnetic fields
164. What is potential energy? B. use electricity
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. The energy that an object has because C. repel other magnets
it is moving D. have poles
B. The energy that is stored in an object
170. A magnet must always have two poles,
or system
even if cut in half, because
C. To provide evidence against a claim
A. A magnet is made up of tiny magnetic
D. One of the two opposite ends of a mag- domains that are aligned.
net
B. Each pole divides in half and the mag-
165. Moving electric charges will interact with netic field becomes weaker.
A. an electric field C. Magnetic domains are out of align-
ment.
B. a magnetic field
D. none of above
C. both A and B
D. none of the above 171. the geographic pole that Earth’s magnetic
south pole is close to
166. If you break a bar magnet in half, each
A. south pole
half
B. aurora
A. becomes a bar magnet with two poles
C. North Pole
B. becomes u nmagnetized
D. magnetic field
C. contains one magnetic pole
D. says ‘hey man, what did I ever do to 172. As more lamps are put into a series cir-
you? !’ cuit, the overall current in the circuit
A. stays the same.
167. What will happen if an object with a pos-
itive charge is pushed toward another ob- B. increases.
ject with a negative charge? C. decreases.
A. They will repel each other. D. none of above
B. Thunder will occur.
173. On a bar magnet, the magnetic field lines
C. They will produce smoke. are closest together at the
D. They will attract to each other. A. poles
168. Every magnet has a: B. point 2cm away from either end
A. point. C. half way point along the bar
B. north pole only. D. none of above

174. The location of the strongest magnetic 179. What is the name of the man in the
field is the video?
A. Tim

A. magnetic fields
B. magnetic poles B. Mark
C. magnetic domains C. Dave

D. Dan
D. center of the magnet
180. As the amount of charge on either of
175. a device that uses a magnet to produce two charged objects increases, the electric
electricity force between the objects
A. Force A. increases
B. Magnet B. decreases
C. Generator C. reverses
D. Electromagnet D. stays the same
181. If the north pole of one magnet is brought
176. How are magnetic fields produced in an near the south pole of another magnet, the
electromagnet? poles will
A. A battery is placed next to the iron A. repel
core.
B. attract
B. Iron filings are sprinkled around the
C. not interact
iron core.
D. How am I supposed to know that!
C. An electric current is being sent
through a wire 182. The strength of an electromagnet can be
affected by
D. The iron core was placed next to an ex-
isting magnet. A. changing the current in the wire
B. changing the space between the wires
177. When an electric current is passed
C. all of the above
through a current carrying coil, the coil
A. behave like a magnet
183. Magnetic Field lines around a bar magnet:
B. does not behave like a magnet
A. are perpandicular the the magnet
C. sometime behaves like a magnet but
sometimes does not B. spread out from north pole and curve
to south
D. none of these
C. Cross back and forth over eachother
178. An atom is a positively charged nucleus D. are perfectly straight
that is orbited by negatively charged
184. materials such as iron, steel, and copper
A. electrons A. compass
B. protons B. lodestone
C. neutrons C. metal
D. photons D. magnet

185. An electromagnet is a magnet that 191. What is a device that uses an electromag-
A. its strength can be varied and turned net to convert electrical energy into me-
on and off chanical energy
B. always has a magnetic field around it A. electric motor
C. has very little strength B. transformer

D. none of above C. generator
D. amplifier
NARAYAN CHANGDER
186. a piece of iron or steel that attracts cer-
tain metals 192. an instrument with a needle that points
A. Electricity North and used to determine direction
B. Lodestone A. Electromagnet
C. Magnet B. Generator
D. Poles C. Lodestone
D. Compass
187. When two magnets have the same poles
facing each other they will? 193. poles repel
A. attract A. like
B. repel B. north
C. attack one another C. south
D. spin D. unlike
188. What is our best evidence that Earth has
194. What does force mean?
a magnetic field?
A. energy that can push or pull on other
A. All things fall toward Earth’s center
objects.
B. A compass needle lines up with it
B. a series of electrons that flow from
C. Winds blow from east to west the north to the south polepole-the point
D. Earth’s oceans all have currents where the magnetic field begins and ends
on a magnet.
189. What subject is attracted to a magnet?
C. a ferromagnetic object that produces
A. Silver a magnetic field.
B. Water D. none of above
C. Metal
195. Which poles are attracted? (mark 2 cor-
D. Iron rect answers)
190. The natural found rock that contains mag- A. North and North
netite is known as? B. South and South
A. magnets C. North and South
B. iron filings D. South and North
C. lodestone E. None of these, only magnetic
D. cobalt monopoles will attract.

196. If you cut a magnet in half, what happens A. collide

to the poles? B. levitate

A. One half gets the North Pole, the other C. attract
half gets the South Pole
D. repair
B. Both halves get only a North Pole
202. In order to form an electric circuit, you
C. Both halves get only a South Pole need to have
D. Both halves get a North pole and a A. wires or conductors to connect every-
South Pole thing.
197. When a magnet breaks into smaller B. a power source.
pieces, the pieces are C. a complete path for the current.
A. not magnets D. all of the above
B. still magnets 203. In a magnet
C. exploded A. all magnetic domains are aligned
D. turned into batteries B. magnetic domains are in a random or-
der
198. Unlike poles (NS or SN) each other
C. half of the magnetic domains point one
A. attract
way and half point the other
B. repel
D. none of above
C. magnify
204. The south pole of a magnet
D. melt
A. attracts a north pole
199. If you cut a bar magnet in half, each half B. repels a north pole
would
C. repels a paper clip
A. lose it’s magnetic field D. attracts another south pole
B. have it’s own north and south poles
205. Magnetic domains are found in
C. repel plastic objects
A. All ferromagnetic materials
D. none of above
B. Ferromagnetic and non-ferromagnetic
200. The Earth’s magnetic axis is aligned materials
with Earth’s geographic axis. C. Only in permanent magnets
A. perfectly D. none of above
B. not perfectly 206. Why does the Earth have a magnetic
C. exactly field?
D. none of above A. Because of all the magnets on the
Earth’s surface
201. There are several modern uses of mag- B. Because the Earth is a magnet
nets. Magnets allow high speed trains to
above the track. They go faster be- C. Because the Earth is made of copper
cause without touching the tracks there is D. Because Earth is orbiting around the
no friction to slow them down. sun

207. Which item would have the most aligned 213. Why does a compass needle point north?
domains?
A. because north is up
A. a pencil eraser
B. it lines up with Earth’s magnetic field
B. an iron railing
C. because of magic
C. an aluminum can
D. the compass is programmed to do so
D. none of above
214. let you turn the magnetism on or off
NARAYAN CHANGDER
208. Which is not a magnetic metal?
by turning the electricity on or off.
A. iron
A. Repel
B. nickle
B. Electromagnetic
C. cobalt
C. Forces
D. copper
D. Poles
209. The space in which the magnetic effects
exists is called 215. Which of these materials could you make
a magnet from?
A. the magnetic field
B. the magnetic equator A. iron
C. the magnetic material B. plastic
D. none of above C. wood

D. glass
210. Iron, Nickel and cobalt are all materi-
als 216. An iron rod becomes magnetic when
A. Shiny A. positive charges line up on one side
B. poles and negative charges on the other side
C. magnetic B. positive ions gather at one end and
D. cold negative ions at the other end
C. its electrons stop moving and point in
211. what can be attracted to magnets?
the same direction
A. wood
D. the net spins of its electrons point in
B. skin the same direction
C. Metals such as iron, nickel and cobalt
217. How can you increase the strength of an
D. none of above electromagnet?
212. In an illustration, lines of force are drawn A. By moving the iron core to create fric-
around a magnet to illustrate the magnet- tion.
icfield.induction.poles.force.
B. By adding more coils around the iron
A. field. core.
B. induction. C. By decreasing the amount of current in
C. poles. the wire.
D. force. D. By heating up the electromagnet.

218. Law says that the Induced current C. Winter Wonderland

is proportional to the change of magnetic D. Northwest
flux

A. Lenz’ 224. Where would you find the circuit
breaker?
B. Faraday’s
A. fuse box
C. Ampere’s
B. kitchen
D. none of above
C. tool box
219. Permanent magnets can be made by D. outlet
A. placing a piece of iron near a strong
electromagnet 225. energy that can cause something to be
pushed or pulled
B. placing a piece of iron in a strong mag-
netic field A. Electricity
C. stroking material containing iron with B. Attract
a magnet C. Repel
D. all of the above D. Force
220. A electric charge produces a(n) 226. A current of 5.0 A flows through a wire
field. 10.0 cm long. The wire is in a magnetic
A. moving, magnetic field of strength 2.00 T, perpendicular to
the wire. What is the magnitude of the
B. stationary, magnetic
magnetic force acting on the wire?
C. moving, empty
A. 0 N
D. stationary, empty
B. 0.5 N
221. In un-magnetized materials the domains C. 1.0 N
are aligned.
D. 2.0 N
A. super
227. Which statement below is TRUE about
B. slightly
electromagnets?
C. randomly
A. They are weaker than permanent mag-
D. always nets.
222. When two magnets repel, they B. They can’t be turned off.
A. change color C. They do not have magnetic fields.
B. pull together D. They can switch their magnetic poles.
C. push apart 228. The only things that stick to a magnet
D. get colder are:
223. The object that points North on the mag- A. iron, cobalt, and nickel.
net is called B. iron and cobalt.
A. North Pole C. cobalt and nickel.
B. North side D. iron and nickel.

229. Why is permanent magnet able to exert 234. The electric and magnetic fields in an elec-
a force on an electric charge? tromagnetic wave move the direction
of wave motion.
A. Electric charges have an electric field
A. parallel to
B. Electric charges have a magnetic field
B. perpendicular to
C. A permanent magnet has an electric
field C. opposite to
D. A permanent magnet cannot exert a D. without regard to
NARAYAN CHANGDER
force on an electric charge
235. What happens when you cut a magnet in
half?
230. In a diagram of a magnetic field, the
stronger the force of the magnetic field, A. you have one north-pole and one south-
the the field lines. pole piece
A. further apart B. you have one north-pole piece
B. closer C. you have 2 magnets
C. thicker D. you have one south-pole piece
D. thinner 236. As an electron moves, what does it make

or cause?
231. Most of the magnets we encounter in our
A. an aurora
daily lives contain:
B. ferromagnetism
A. iron atoms.
C. an electromagnet
B. carbon atoms.
D. a magnetic field
C. the element copper.
237. A is when ferromagnetic material has
D. electric current.
a magnetic field for a very short time.
232. which of the following expressions A. permanent magnet
shows the correct relationship between 1T B. temporary magnet
( 1 tesla) and other common units?
C. flexible magnet
A. 1 N/(A.m)
D. bar magnet
B. 1 (N.m)/ A
238. Magnetic domains point
C. 1 N.A.m
A. in all directions
D. 1A / (N.m)
B. in varied directions
233. What materials do you need to create an C. in one direction
electromagnet?
D. in two directions
A. wire, switch, lightbulb
239. How do electric motors and electric gen-
B. wire, nail, lightbulb
erators differ?
C. wire, nail, battery
A. One uses a permanent magnet and the
D. None of the above other ONLY uses temporary magnets.

B. One produces electric energy. The 244. A magnet can pick up a nail but not a
other produces heat energy. penny because

C. One uses an electric current to pro- A. all metals are magnetic
duce motion. The other uses motion to B. all metals are not magnetic
produce an electric current.
C. the penny is made of iron and copper
D. none of above
D. magnets are not strong enough to pick
240. One electromagnet has a wood core. The up pennies
other has an iron core. Which is true?
245. Which statement about magnets is true?
A. The wood core is stronger because it
A. Magnets can only exist as dipoles
is a ferromagnetic material.
B. Single magnetic poles are possible but
B. The iron core is stronger because it is are very rare.
a ferromagnetic material.
C. Like poles attract and unlike poles re-
C. The wood core is stronger because it pel.
is not a ferromagnetic material.
D. Iron is the only ferromagnetic material
D. The iron core is stronger because it is (hence the name).
not a ferromagnetic material.
246. A group of atoms that has all like poles
241. What does protons mean? pointing in the same direction are called
A. negative charge and located on the A. magnetic forces.
outside of the atom. B. magnetic fields.
B. the process of how magnetic fields are C. magnetic domains.
produced.
D. magnetic poles.
C. positive charge located in the center.
247. There are several modern uses of mag-
D. none of above
nets. A can have million of magnets.
242. Electrical insulators have resistance Each magnet points in its own direction,
to the movement of electrons. making a code. This allows an individual
to make purchases.
A. high
A. Driver’s License
B. low
B. Check Book
C. no
C. Credit Card
D. none of above D. TV
243. What is a solenoid? 248. The space around a magnet where the
A. A coil of wire with current flowing force of the magnet can act is called the:
through it A. north pole
B. A type of bar magnet B. south pole
C. A single straight wire C. magnetic field
D. One loop of a wire D. attraction poles

249. The magnetic pole that points to the north 255. The pole of a compass which points to-
is the magnet’s wards the Earth’s south geographic pole is
A. magnetic force a
B. north pole A. magnetic north pole
C. magnetic poles B. magnetic south pole
D. south pole C. positive charge pole
E. magnetic field D. magnetic barber pole
NARAYAN CHANGDER
250. device that uses an electromagnet to 256. What would happen if a magnet moved
measure electric current through a copper wire?
A. galvanometer
A. The magnet would demagnetize.
B. solenoid
B. The magnet would explode.
C. transformer
C. Electric current would flow through
D. turbine the wire.
251. The Earths magnetic field D. The copper wire would become magne-
A. Protects the Earth from solar radiation tized.
B. Is part of the atmosphere
257. On Earth, where is Magnetic North ap-
C. Is created by satilites proximately located?
D. Has never changed A. The Equator
252. A device that converts mechanical energy B. The North Pole
into electrical energy
C. The South Pole
A. electric generator
D. New Brighton
B. electric motor
C. electromagnetic induction 258. What do magnets stick to?
D. mechanical generator A. copper
253. Permanent magnets are made out of the B. wood

following materials C. iron
A. Copper, Chromium, and Cobalt D. plastic
B. Iron, Cobalt, and Silver
259. What is a maglev train?
C. Nickel, Cobalt, and Iron
A. a train that lifts off the tracks and uses
D. Copper, Nickel, and Iron
superconductors as a power source
254. a magnet that can be turned on and off B. a train that stays on the tracks and
by using electricity uses superconductors as a power source
A. Electromagnet
C. a train that lifts off the tracks and uses
B. Magnet semiconductors as a power source
C. Lodestone D. a train that lifts off the tracks and uses
D. Poles semiconductors as a power source

260. The force of attraction or repulsion of C. Michael Faraday

magnetic materials is called: D. none of above

A. Electromagnetism
266. A current that travels in only one direc-
B. Electricity
tion is a
C. Attraction
A. Direct Current
D. Magnetism
261. A compass is the part of a compass C. Fancy Current
that is magnetic.
D. none of above
A. bar
B. dial 267. Magnetism is caused by
C. needle A. moving electric charges
D. rose B. any material
C. a compass needle
262. Bob made an electromagnet but it was
very weak. How can he make it D. a tiny piece of iron
stronger?
268. What is a soft magnetic material?
A. take away a d-cell
A. Stays magnetic once magnetised e.g.
B. wrap the wire loosely steel
C. use thicker wire B. Stays magnetic once magnetised e.g.
D. use less winds iron
263. iron material you can magnetize to at- C. Hard to break
tract items for a short period of time D. Looses magnetism easily e.g. iron
A. Electromagnet
269. Where do the electrons come from that
B. Magnet produce heat and light in a light bulb?
C. Temporary Magnet A. the power company
D. Permanent Magnet B. the air
264. If two magnets are placed so that two C. the wall plug
poles or two poles are facing each D. the bulb’s wire filament
other, they will repel each other.
A. North, South 270. Engineers are designing new trains that
use magnetic force to allow the train to
B. external, internal
levitate (or float) above the track. What
C. positive, negative force exists between the bottom of the
D. North, West train and track?
A. attraction
265. In 1831 who discovered electromagnetic
induction? B. repulsion
A. Thomas Edison C. both attraction and repulsion
B. Nikola Tesla D. No force, the train moves forward

271. A(n) is a cylindrical coil of wire act- C. faster

ing as a magnet when carrying electric cur- D. slower
rent.
A. insulator 277. Which of the following describes both an
electromagnet and a permanent magnet?
B. actuator
A. The magnetic force can be turned off
C. monopole and on.
D. solenoid B. The strength of the magnetic force can
NARAYAN CHANGDER
be controlled.
272. ‘Like” magnetic poles
C. The poles can be reversed.
A. run
D. It has a north pole and a south pole.
B. attract
C. stay 278. Which of the following do we use as ev-
idence of Earth’s changing magnetic field
D. repel
over time? (only 1 correct answer.)
273. Half-way to the center of a planet of A. Earth’s tilt on its axis.
uniform density, your weight compared to
B. The vernal equinox.
that at the surface would be
C. Iron deposits become magnetized in
A. one-quarter. the direction of Earth’s magnetic field.
B. one-half. D. Formation of new crust at the mid-
C. three-quarters. ocean ridge.
D. the same as at the surface. 279. how are electromagnets created?
274. A device that converts electrical energy A. forces
to mechanical energy is a? B. light
A. engine C. an electric current running through a
B. motor surrounding coil. They have many uses in-
cluding the generation of electricity in hy-
C. electromagnet
droelectric dams.
D. superconducting magnet
D. none of above
275. Which poles repel?
280. In a magnet the line up in the same
A. north and south direction.
B. south and north A. leaders
C. south and south B. domains
D. none of above C. nails
276. Current flowing through a wire is gener- D. wires
ating a magnetic field. The further away 281. How can a wire and a magnet create an
from the wire, the the magnetic field. electric current?
A. stronger A. The magnet moves inside the coil of
B. weaker wire.

B. The coil of wire moves through a mag- A. millions of small magnets buried in
netic field. Earth

C. Both of the above B. a magnetized solid inner core of Earth
D. None of the above C. convection currents in the molten part
of Earth’s interior
282. Ancient people discovered magnetic rocks
D. rotation of Earth acting on all of Earth’s
called lodestone. For what purpose did
electrons
they use them?
A. starting fires 287. An example of a temporary magnet is
B. sculptures A. a horseshoe magnet
C. compasses B. a scissors which has been magnetized
D. magnetic weapons C. a piece of magnetite
D. a plastic spoon
283. Permanent magnets are made out of
which materials? 288. Where on a magnet is the force the
A. Cobalt, Nickel, and Iron strongest?
B. Copper, Chromium, and Cobalt A. Magnetic Pole
C. Gold, Silver, and Platinum B. Attract
D. Copper, Nickel, and Iron C. Repel

D. Conductor
284. A magnetic field exerts a force on a
charged particle: 289. Paper clips and staples are attracted to
magnets because paper clips and staples
A. always
are
B. never
A. permanent magnets
C. if the particle is moving across the field
B. temporary magnets
lines
C. magnetic materials
D. if the particle is moving along the field
lines D. magnetic domains
285. Which of the following is true of a bar 290. magnetic field

magnet? A. the space around a magnet in which
A. Its magnetic field is strongest near its magnetic forces can act on objects
center. B. to separate or set apart
B. It is surrounded by a magnetic field. C. one of the two opposite ends of a mag-
C. The north pole is stronger than the net
south pole. D. to provide evidence that goes against
D. The south pole is stronger than the a claim
north pole. 291. The magnetic south pole of Earth is situ-
286. Earth’s magnetic field is most likely due ated near
to A. geographic south pole

B. geographic east 297. Any material that attracts iron and mate-
C. geographic north pole rials that contain iron is a:
D. geographic west A. Spring
292. which one is NOT magnetic? B. Magnet

A. Iron C. Solenoid
B. Nickel D. Coil
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. Cobalt
D. Sodium 298. If you suspend a bar magnet from a
string, the N pole will point to Earth’s
293. In which of the following situations (mark 2 answers)
would an electromagnet be more useful
than a magnet? A. south magnetic pole
A. A jewelry store employee is repairing B. north magnetic pole

a broken bracelet clasp. C. north geographic pole
B. A little boy is linking metal train cars
together D. south geographic pole
C. A junk yard workers is sorting out car 299. A(n) is the region of magnetic force
parts. around a magnet.
D. A teacher is hanging up artwork on a
A. magnetic field
metal board.
B. magnetic domain
294. What is a closed path in which an electric
current travels? C. magnetic pole
A. Electric Circuit D. electromagnet
B. Electric Resistance
C. Magnet 300. material that temporary magnets are
usually made from
D. Voltage
A. soft iron
295. Magnetic field lines inside of a magnet
are conventionally drawn B. iron and cobalt
A. from north to south C. alnico
B. from south to north D. none of above
C. either way
D. MAGNETO WINS ALL!! 301. A compass points toward the south pole
of Earth’s magnetic field, located near the
296. Which of the following would a magnet Earth’s geographical
ATTRACT?
A. north
A. A copper penny
B. south
B. An iron nail
C. A piece of glass C. east
D. A wood block D. west

302. Paper clips are attracted to magnets be- 308. Two long, parallel wires each carry the
cause they contain same current I in the same direction. Is
the total magnetic field at the point mid-

A. iron
way between the wires:
B. aluminum
A. Zero
C. copper
B. Directed into the page
D. silver
C. Directed out of the page
303. The shape of a magnetic field is show
with D. Directed to the left
A. magnetic force 309. A device that uses a free-moving mag-

B. magnetic poles netic needle to show direction is a:
C. magnetic field A. lodestone
D. magnetic field lines B. magnet
304. An object that is made of which material C. compass

is likely to be attracted to a magnet? D. magnetic field
A. nitrogen
310. Which metals are attracted to magnets?
B. nickel
A. iron, nickel, cobalt
C. paper
B. gold, silver, platinum
D. plastic
C. copper, magnesium, aluminum
305. There is a magnetic field around a current-
D. none of above
carrying wire.
A. true 311. In order for there to be a flow of charge
from one place to another, there must be
B. false
a
C. maybe ?
A. conductor, such as a wire, connecting
D. none of above the two places.
306. The region of space surrounding earth B. potential difference between the two
that contains its magnetic field. places.
A. Magneto C. Both A and B above
B. Magnetosphere D. none of above
C. Magnetasphere
312. What is a magnetic pole?
D. Ionosphere
A. the ends of a magnet
307. What type of device converts mechanical
B. a region in which the magnetic fields
energy into electrical energy?
of individual atoms are lined up
A. solenoid
C. the region around a magnet in which
B. electric motor magnetic forces can act
C. transformer D. a bar of iron wrapped with a coil of
D. generator wire carrying an electric current

313. The direction of a gravitational field is 318. A loop of wire is carrying electric current,
which creates a magnetic field. The mag-
A. in the same direction as gravitational
netic field is strongest
attraction.
A. near the wire
B. away from the center of gravity of an
object. B. near the source of the electric current
C. opposite to the direction of gravita- C. far away from the loop
tional attraction.
D. at the center of the loop
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. none of above
319. When current passes through a wire, a
314. A can travel at over 300 miles per magnetic field is created around the wire
hour and levitates above the rails. only if the
A. super train A. wire is absolutely straight
B. locomotive B. wire is in a curved loop
C. maglev train C. current comes from a batter
D. aircar D. a magnetic field is always present
around a current carrying wire
315. When two same poles are faced to each
other, they 320. The compass’s NORTH needle will always
point to geographic because Earth’s
A. Attract
magnetic pole is there.
B. Repel
A. East / West
C. Attract and Repel
B. Nonsense, Earth does not have a mag-
D. Do nothing netic field!
316. A horizontal wire carries a current out of C. West / East

the page. When viewed from above, what D. North / South
direction is the magnetic field?
321. Generators use to create Electricity
A. Out of the page
A. Electricity
B. Left
B. Magnetism
C. Clockwise
C. Wires
D. Counter-clockwise
D. none of above
317. Which of the following elements is NOT
magentized temporarily in the presence of 322. What is the region around a magnet in
a permanent magnet? which magnetic forces can act
A. carbon A. magnetic field
B. Cobalt B. magnetic domain
C. Iron C. magnetic pole
D. Nickel D. electric motor

323. Earth’s gravitational field extends 328. The presence and strength of a magnetic
A. only above and beyond Earth’s surface field is denoted by:

and cancels inside Earth A. magnetic lines.
B. both inside and outside Earth and B. magnitude of voltage.
throughout the entire universe C. speed of current.
C. neither of these D. number of electrons.
D. none of above
329. Moving a permanent magnet through a
324. What is electromagnetism? coil of wire will
A. the relationship between electricity A. demagnetize the magnet
and magnetism B. the wire will become an electromagnet
B. the process by which electric current C. the magnet will become electrified
is produced by a changing magnetic field
D. a current will be generated in the wire
C. a bar of iron wrapped with a coil of
wire carrying an electric current 330. Generators are devices that convert
D. a device that uses an electromagnet to energy into energy.
convert electrical energy into mechanical A. chemical; mechanical
energy B. mechanical; electrical
325. A simple is a good example of mag- C. electrical; mechanical
netism. D. potential; kinetic
A. electric field
331. A refrigerator magnet is an example of
B. bar magnet a:
C. north pole A. magnetic material
D. field line B. permanent magnet
326. A solenoid with 500 turns, 0.10 m long, C. horseshoe magnet
carrying a current of 4.0 A and with a ra- D. temporary magnet
dius of 1 cm will have what strength mag-
netic field at its center? 332. Which of the following will not attract or
A. 31 x 10-4 T repel each other?
B. 62 x 10-4 T A. two magnets
C. 125 x 10-4 T B. a magnet and a stationary charge
D. 250 x 10-4 T C. a magnet and a current-carrying wire

D. two current-carrying wires
327. The electric and magnetic fields in an elec-
tromagnetic wave travel each other. 333. A magnet has a pole and a pole.
A. parallel to A. north, south
B. perpendicular to B. east, west
C. at right angles to C. positive, negative
D. in spite of D. red, blue

334. Magnets can be used for 340. The magnetic is the area around a
A. holding refrigerator doors shut magnet where the force acts
B. holding papers on a white board A. domain
C. holding pins for sewing B. pole
D. all of the above C. field

D. generator
335. A compass needle shows us the magnetic
NARAYAN CHANGDER
field of 341. Where is the magnetic field the strongest
A. the sun on a bar magnet?
B. Earth A. North Pole
C. the moon B. South Pole
D. a magnet that is near by C. middle

D. at both poles
336. What is a machine that converts mechan-
ical energy into electrical energy 342. What characteristics do magnetic sub-
A. generator stances have?
B. transformer A. They can give you a “shock” when you
touch them
C. amplifier
B. They can push or pull objects without
D. electric motor touching them
337. Mark 2 correct answers:Which is true far- C. They are always black and cold to
ther from a magnet? touch
A. Field lines are closer together. D. They fall faster than other objects
B. Field lines are farther apart. when you drop them
C. The magnetic field is weaker. 343. If an object is placed exactly halfway be-
D. The magnetic field is stronger. tween Earth and the Moon, it would fall
toward the
338. Magnetic force is strongest at A. Earth.
A. the north pole B. Moon.
B. the south pole C. neither of these
C. both poles D. none of above
D. the middle of the magnet
344. Causing a current to flow through a wire
339. the ends of a magnetic object, where the by changing the magnetic field near the
magnetic force is strongest. wire is called
A. Magnetic Force A. radiation
B. Magnetic Field B. convection
C. Magnetic Pole C. induction
D. Magnetic Area D. conduction

345. The compass needles are turned by mag- B. neutrons

netic forces caused by electric current. The C. domains
magnetic forces caused by an electric cur-

rent are one kind of D. cells
A. gravitational force 351. Magnetic fields are strongest
B. gravitational field A. at both poles
C. electromagnetic force B. at the north pole
D. none of above C. at the south pole
346. “Opposite” magnetic poles D. between the poles
A. run 352. Which of the following conditions are nec-
B. attract essary for a magnet inside a wire loop to
produce an electric current?
C. stay
A. The wire loop must already have a cur-
D. repel
rent running through it.
347. Magnetism is a type of B. The magnet must be in motion.
A. force C. The wire loop must be part of an open
B. book circuit.
C. plant D. The magnet must be stationary.
D. animal 353. What is the name of a magnet that stays
magnetic only while it touches a perma-
348. The discrepancy between the orientation
nent magnet, or one that is magnetic for
of a compass and true north is known as
a very short time
the
A. Temporary magnet
A. radioactive effect (hulkify!)
B. Permanant magnet
B. magnetic declination
C. Electromagnet
C. magnetic effect
D. Magnet
D. magnetic discrepancy
354. Which of the following are ferromagnetic
349. How are magnets and electricity re-
elements?
lated?
A. nickel
A. Magnets can be used to make electric-
ity. B. iron
B. Electricity can be used to made a mag- C. cobalt
net. D. all of the above
C. Both A and B are true.
355. To reverse current direction in a motor the
D. none of above conducted current goes
350. A material is magnetic if its are A. through the commutator to the arma-
aligned. ture
A. protons B. through the armature

C. through the brushes to the commuta- C. Negative to Negative

tor D. Positive to Positive
D. in the direction of rotation
361. Inside of magnets there are tiny magnets
356. The coil of current-carrying wire with an called
iron core is called a(n) A. atoms
A. ferromagnet B. domains
B. electromagnet
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. mini magnets
C. compass D. none of above
D. maglev
362. Which statements describe the character-
357. A plant generating electric current istics of a magnet? Select four options.
A. transmits alternating current at high A. A magnet attracts objects containing

voltages, but is used at low voltages iron.
B. transmits direct current at high volt- B. A magnet attracts objects containing

ages, but is used at low voltages aluminum.
C. A magnet repels other magnets.
C. transmits alternating current at low
voltages, but used at high voltages D. A magnet attracts other magnets.
D. transmits direct current at low volt- E. A magnet aligns with Earth’s north
ages, but used at high voltages pole.
358. A permanent magnet 363. Earth’s protects Earth from charged

particles from the Sun.
A. has no magnetic domains until a mag-
net is near it A. magnetic field
B. has magnetic domains aligned only B. magnetic equator
when another magnet is near it C. magnetic force
C. has magnetic domains aligned all the D. magnetic pole
time
364. What is the traditional color for North on
D. has no magnetic domains a compass?
359. Which material is NOT necessary to make A. red
a simple motor? B. white
A. Battery C. blue
B. Magnets D. black
C. Steel nail
365. materials that fewrromagnets may be
D. Copper wire made from
360. Which direction does conventional current A. soft iron
flow? B. iron and cobalt
A. Positive to negative C. alnico
B. Negative to positive D. none of above

366. What does neutron mean? 372. Law says that a current produced by
A. negative charge and located on the an induced emf moves in a direction so
that its magnetic field opposes the original

change in flux
B. positive charge located in the center.
A. Lenz’
C. has no charge and located in the cen-
ter of the atom. B. Faraday’s
D. none of above C. Ampere’s

D. none of above
367. Surrounding every moving electron is
A. an electric field 373. Which way will NOT increase the
strength of the magnetic field of an elec-
B. a magnetic field
tromagent
C. an electric and magnetic field
A. increasing the current
B. using a stronger ferromagnetic core
368. Magnetic field strength is C. winding the coils closer together
A. strongest close to a magnet D. decreasing the number of loops
B. constant everywhere
374. Magnetism is generated by moving
C. strongest far from a magnet
A. protons.
D. none of above
B. electrons.
369. Which materials is not magnetic?
C. neutrons.
A. plastic
D. elements.
B. iron
C. cobalt 375. Which statement about Earth’s core helps
explain Earth’s magnetic field?
D. nickel
A. Earth’s core is composed of magnets.
370. Electrical resistance is measured in B. Earth’s core is composed of iron and
A. volts. nickel.
B. amperes. C. The outer core is solid.
C. watts. D. The inner core is liquid and moving.
D. ohms.
376. Which factor will not affect the magbetic
371. A magnet cannot not move which of the field strength of a solenoid carrying an
following objects? electric current?
A. a paper clip A. Thikness of wire
B. a nail B. Number of wraps
C. a toothpick C. strength of the current
D. a staple D. core type

377. An electromagnet is made by placing a 383. What type of magnet exhibits magnetic
within a coil of wire with an electric properties all the time?
current. A. paperclip
A. magnetic core B. temporary magnet
B. piece of wood C. string
C. compass D. permanent magnet
D. balloon 384. What letter represents the magnetic
NARAYAN CHANGDER
378. Which of these can be used to show a field?
magnetic field of a bar magnet? A. M
A. Compass, paper and pencil B. V
B. Iron filings C. B
C. A coil of wire D. i
D. Lead filings 385. In order for two magnets to pull together
or attract, their poles must be:
379. a magnet’s push or pull
A. lined up.
A. magnet
B. opposite.
B. magnetic force
C. the same.
C. magnetic pole
D. sticky.
D. magnetic field
386. A material that is not attracted to a mag-
380. Which direction do electrons flow? net is
A. Positive to Positive A. attract
B. Negative to Negative B. magnetic
C. Positive to Negative C. non-magnetic
D. Negative to Positive D. repel
381. An example of a good conductor is 387. The region around a magnet where the
magnetic force is exerted is called the
A. copper
A. Magnetic region
B. sand
B. Magnetic place
C. plastic C. Magnetic force
D. none of above D. Magnetic field
382. The needle of a compass always points 388. magnetic field outside a magnet runs
to which direction? from
A. south A. south pole to north pole
B. east B. north pole to south pole
C. west C. neither north pole nor the south pole
D. north D. any of the pole

389. Which poles repel? (mark 2 correct an- B. pull them apart
swers) C. spin them around

A. North and South
D. drop them
B. South and North
C. North and North 395. What does electrical currents mean?
D. South and South A. the point where the magnetic field be-
gins and ends on a magnet
E. None of these, only magnetic
monopoles will repel. B. electrons flow from one place to an-
other
390. Why shouldn’t bar magnets be rubbed to-
C. a series of electrons that flow from the
gether?
north to the south pole
A. It can make the magnetic field too
strong. D. none of above
B. It can weaken the magnetic field. 396. If you hold two magnets a short distance
C. It can change the magnet’s color. apart and let go, which of the following is
a possible result? CHOOSE ALL THAT AP-
D. It can create too much oxygen.
PLY!
391. One end of a bar magnet is referred to as A. they will snap together
its and is labeled (mark 2 answers)
B. they will be pushed apart
A. south pole, N
C. they will remain motionless
B. north pole, S
D. they will become an electric circuit
C. north pole, N
D. south pole, S 397. Even in a magnetic material where the
magnetic fields of atoms line up together,
392. An device with a magnetic needle which it’s possible that one chunk of the mate-
spins freely and generally points north rial will have all its atoms lined up point-
A. Compass ing one way, and another chunk will have
all its atoms pointing another way, and so
B. Magnetic Declination
on. What do we call these “chunks”?
C. Thermometer
A. domains
D. Bar magnet
B. families
393. used to create a magnetic field
C. classes
A. force
D. kingdoms
B. generator
C. magnetism 398. As more lamps are put into a parallel cir-
cuit, the overall current in the circuit
D. electricity
A. increases.
394. For attracting magnets, the way to in-
B. stays the same.
crease potential energy within their field,
you should C. decreases.
A. move them closer together D. none of above

399. An electromagnet is a solenoid with an 404. The force of magnetism is stronger when
core. magnets are
A. copper A. cold
B. wire B. round
C. iron C. closer together
D. none of above D. farther apart
NARAYAN CHANGDER
400. What areas of a magnet have the 405. Which factor will not affect the magnetic
strongest magnetic effect? force strength of a solenoid? .
A. the middle A. thickness of wire
B. the poles B. strength of current
C. the sides C. core type
D. the magnetic field lines D. number of wraps
406. How is a permanent magnet DIFFERENT

401. What will make an electromagnet
from a temporary magnet?
stronger?
A. A permanent magnet attracts materi-
A. increasing the number of coils
als made of iron.
B. decreasing the number of coils
B. A permanent magnet has poles.
C. adding another battery
C. A permanent magnet has a magnetic
D. adding more magnets field.
D. A permanent magnet keeps its mag-
402. What is the name of a magnet created by
netism for a long time.
wrapping a current-carrying wire around a
ferromagnetic core? 407. If a compass is placed in a magnetic field,
A. Electromagnet its NORTH seeking needle will point
B. Magnetic Pole A. Toward magnetic South (which is geo-
graphic North on Earth)
C. Voltage
B. Toward magnetic North (which is geo-
D. Electric Current graphic South on Earth.)
403. A stationary electric charge produces C. East
A. a magnetic field but not an electric D. West
field.
408. For Right Hand Rule #1 the thumb repre-
B. an electric field but not a magnetic sents the direction of the ?
field.
A. Force (F)
C. both an electric field and a magnetic
field. B. Current (i)
C. Velocity (v)
D. neither an electric field nor a magnetic
field. D. none of above

409. Normally, atoms are electrically neutral 415. Certain materials respond to magnetic
because there are fields by becoming themselves. is
one of these materials.

A. more protons than electrons
B. more electrons than protons A. magnetic, Plastic
C. equal numbers of protons and elec- B. electronic, Iron
trons
C. magnetic, Iron
D. equal numbers of protons and neu-
D. electronic, Plastic
trons
410. Which refers to the ends of a magnet 416. The strength of a magnetic field inside a
where the forces are strongest? coil of wire can be increased by:
A. attracting forces A. increasing the current through the
B. opposing forces wire coil
C. magnetic fields B. increasing the number of loops in the

coil
D. magnetic poles
C. wrap the coil around and iron wood
411. Where is the strongest attraction force of
the magnet? D. all of the above
A. at the poles 417. What three things did we need to make
B. in the middle an electromagnet?
C. above the magnet A. iron core, wire, power source
D. below the magnet B. wire, swtich, water
412. Magnetic fields go out from the pole C. iron core, lemon, wire
and into the pole
D. power source, Olympic gold medal,
A. north; south wire
B. south; north
418. Magnetic fields are strongest
C. south; north
D. none of above A. between the poles
B. at the north pole
413. When two magnets attract, they
A. push apart C. at the south pole
B. change color D. at both poles

C. get colder 419. When the north pole of one magnet is
D. pull together put near the south pole of another magnet
they
414. is when a force pushes apart
A. repel
A. attract
B. repel B. flip
C. magnetic C. fall
D. poles D. attract

420. If two magnets are placed so that a north 426. A stright wire carrying a current of 7.2
pole and a south pole are facing each other, A, has a field of 8.9 X10-3 T perpendicu-
they will each other. lar to it. What length of wire in the field
A. date will experience a force of 2.1 N?
B. spin A. 2.6x 10-3 m
C. repel B. 3.1 x 10-2 m
D. attract C. 1.3 x 10-1 m
NARAYAN CHANGDER
421. A magnetic pole is located on each of D. 3.3 x 10 1 m
a bar magnet. 427. Any attraction or repulsion between mag-
A. middle nets is called
B. side A. Electric Resistance
C. end B. Electric Current
D. top C. Magnetic Force
422. are the groups of atoms in a mate- D. Voltage
rial that all have their magnetic fields spin-
ning/pointing in the same direction (N) 428. An electric motor converts electrical en-
ergy into
A. Magnetic field
A. magnetism
B. Ferromagnetic materials
C. Magnetic core B. motion
D. Magnetic domain C. gravity

D. friction
423. A uses fuel such as gasoline to pro-
duce mechanical energy. 429. As the distance between two magnets in-
A. motor creases (they get farther apart), the force
between them:
B. alloy magnet
C. guitar A. Increases
D. engine B. Decreases
C. Stays the Same
424. Name the metal that is magnetic?
D. none of above
A. Aluminum
B. iron 430. If your mass, the mass of Earth, and the
C. gold mass of everything in the solar system
were twice as much as it is now, yet every-
D. silver thing stayed the same size, your weight
425. What are the poles in a magnet? on Earth would
A. left and right A. be the same.
B. up and down B. double
C. north and south C. quadruple.
D. east and west D. be eight times as much as now.

431. A current-carrying wire produces a A. The potential energy in the system in-
field. creases.

A. thermal energy B. The kinetic energy in the system de-
B. potential energy creases.
C. magnetic C. Some of the potential energy is con-

verted to kinetic energy.
D. dark matter
D. Some of the kinetic energy changes to
432. The north geographic pole of Earth is actu- potential energy.
ally near the pole of Earth’s magnetic
field. 437. means a force that pulls together
A. north A. attract
B. primary B. repel
C. secondary C. magnetic
D. south D. poles
433. Where on a magnet is the magnetic field 438. Magnets can exert force over a distance
the strongest? because of its
A. Both magnetic poles A. size
B. Center of the magnet B. shape
C. Magnetic north pole C. magnetic field
D. none of above D. density
434. A material that exerts force on others of 439. The ability to make things move or
its kind and attracts iron is change
A. ferromagnetic material A. Transfer
B. magnet B. Energy
C. motor C. Convert
D. none of above D. Repel
435. When you break an iron magnet into two 440. Like poles each other while unlike
pieces, you get poles each other
A. two north poles and two south poles A. attract, repel
B. two south poles B. repel, attract
C. two north poles C. oppose, connect
D. a piece of iron that is no longer mag- D. none of above

netic 441. What’s the most important function of
436. What happens to the energy in a sys- Earth’s magnetic field?
tem of magnets when the magnetic force A. Earth’s magnetic shield deflects aster-
causes two magnets to move? oids and meteors

B. Earth’s magnetic shield keeps energy 447. Within the atom, which subatomic parti-
from escaping into space cle acts as a tiny bar magnet?
C. Earth’s magnetic shield deflects the A. Electron
solar winds from the Sun B. Neutron
D. Earth’s magnetic shield helps birds C. Proton
and other animals navigate
D. Lepton
442. Which type of magnets are found in many
NARAYAN CHANGDER
cranes? 448. “North” and “South” are the names of a
magnet’s two
A. Bar magnets
A. energy levels.
B. Electromagnets
B. magnetic poles.
C. Permanent magnets
C. isolated variables.
D. none of above
D. model systems.
443. Which is NOT a property of a magnet?
449. How many poles does a magnet have?
A. all magnets have two poles
A. 2
B. all magnets have a force of attraction
or repulsion B. 13
C. all magnets are surrounded by a mag- C. 17
netic field D. 4
D. all magnets can be turned off
450. What must occur for a magnetic field to
444. If the north poles of two magnets are induce an electric current?
placed near one another, there is A. The magnetic field must be really big
A. attraction between them B. The magnetic field must be stable
B. repulsion between them C. The magnetic field must be changing
C. no interaction between them D. The magnetic field must be from a per-
D. none of these manent magnet
445. The end of a magnet, where magnetic 451. The source of all magnetism is
forces are greatest is the? A. moving electric charges
A. magnetic poles B. ferromagnetic materials
B. magnetic field C. tiny domains of aligned atoms
C. lines of force D. tiny pieces of iron
D. North and South
452. Every magnet has both a pole and a
446. Magnetic poles that are alike ? pole.
A. repel each other A. North, South
B. attract each other B. East, West
C. stregthens magnetic field C. Positive, Negative
D. loses its magnetism D. Positive, South

453. Magnetic field lines 458. An electromagnet is

A. Extend from the north pole to the south A. able to attract all metal substances

pole B. only operating when the current is on
B. Extend from the south pole to the north C. made with bar magnets
pole
D. a permanent magnet
C. crossover each other
459. What is a permanent magnet?
D. are weakest at the poles
A. Has magnetic properties for a long
454. Sometimes the north and south poles of time
atoms in a material will line up. What is B. is magnetized by an electric current
the term for the region where this occurs?
C. is not magnetized
A. domain
D. does not have a north or south pole
B. ferromagnetic
460. Magnetic domains are
C. magnetic field
A. regions that may or may not be magne-
D. magnetic pole tized.
455. If a magnet is broken into two pieces, B. clusters of atoms randomly aligned
what happens to the magnetic poles? C. regions of atoms magnetically aligned
A. One piece will have a north pole, while D. blocks of material
the other piece will have a south pole.
461. Which is NOT a type of ferromagnetic ma-
B. Each piece will still have a north pole terial?
and a south pole.
A. aluminum
C. Each piece will have only a north pole.
B. iron
D. Both pieces will no longer have any
C. nickel
magnetic poles.
D. cobalt
456. a force by which objects are attracted to
other objects or repelled by other objects 462. A current that travels back and forth in a
circuit is a
A. attract
A. Direct Current
B. Magnetic Fields
C. Poles
C. Fancy Current
D. Magnetism
D. none of above
457. A compass needle points north because of 463. An electric current flows through a con-
Earth’s magnetic field unless tinuous loop known as a
A. it is close to a wire with a current A. Circuit
B. it is close to any wire B. Field
C. it is close to a battery C. Domain
D. none of above D. Switch

464. What is the difference between a bar 469. In an electric generator, which part has
magnet and an electromagnet? some outside force make it spin so it spins
A. Bar magnets are permanent, electro- the generator?
magnets are temporary A. Turbine
B. Electromagnets are permanent, bar B. Permanent magnet
magnets are temporary
C. Electromagnet
C. Bar magnets have a current going
D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
through them, electromagnets do not
D. None of the above 470. What happens when the south poles of
two magnetic fields overlap?
465. poles attract.
A. Attract
A. north
B. Repel
B. unlike
C. south C. Conduct
D. like D. Insulate
466. Which effect does the right hand rule 471. A coil of wire acts like a magnet when
identify? flows through it.
A. The direction of lines of force surround A. water
a current carrying conductor B. current
B. the direction for reluctance in a cur-
C. voltage
rent carrying conductor
D. food
C. the direction for retentivity in a current
carrying conductor
472. Iron, cobalt, and nickel are the metals
D. the direction for residual magnetism in which are
a current carrying conductor
A. the three most common magnetic sub-
467. A magnet will attract scissors if the scis- stances
sors contain: B. most easily melted
A. copper C. electric insulators
B. aluminum D. used in making slushies
C. gold
473. A 3.25 A current is moving through a
D. nickel
loop with 5 turns. What is the radius of
468. Which two metals will be attracted by a the loop that produces a magnetic field of
magnet? 3.4x10−4 T at its center?
A. iron and steel A. 0.03 m

B. gold and silver B. 0.25 m
C. aluminum and lead C. 0.50 m
D. copper and cobalt D. 0.75 m

474. When two magnets repel, it means that 480. The Earth produces its own field.
they A. spectrum

A. change color B. electric
B. pull together C. magnetic
C. push apart D. progressive
D. get colder
481. What would we call a nail that can pick
475. What are the ends of a magnet called? up a paperclip because it is touching a mag-
net?
A. magnetic pole
A. temporary magnet
B. magnetic field
B. poles
C. magnetic domain
C. force
D. electric motor
D. detector
476. A compass always points toward:
482. Permanent magnets have a weaker mag-
A. south. netic field if
B. magnetic south. A. All of its magnetic domains are aligned
C. east. B. Some of its magnetic domains are not
D. magnetic north. aligned.
C. Its magnetic domains are aligned in
477. Electrical potential energy per charge is opposite directions
electric
D. It has magnetic electrons in its atoms.
A. force.
483. Magnetic field lines about a current-
B. power.
carrying wire
C. potential.
A. extend radially from the wire
D. work.
B. circle the wire in closed loops
478. Which direction does a compass always C. both of these
point? D. neither of these
A. north
484. What type of materials are needed to cre-
B. south ate an electromagnet?
C. east A. battery, light bulb, plastic straw
D. west B. battery, coil of wire, iron core
479. When two magnets pull apart or push to- C. generator, iron core, switch
gether it is called D. switch, source of electricity, compass
A. magnetic force
485. pushes an object away Magnetic field-the
B. magnetic poles area or power around a magnet
C. magnetic field A. Attract
D. magnetic field lines B. Repel

C. Force 491. Which letter is the symbol for the mag-

D. Poles netic field?
486. For the electromagnet to attract and A. A

then repel the permanent magnet in the B. B
speaker, what has to happen?
C. N
A. The electric current must be turned off
and on. D. U
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. More coils must be added to the elec-
492. What makes something magnetic?
tromagnet.
C. Noises sent through the speaker must A. its weight
be very loud. B. its atoms
D. The electric current must reverse di-
C. its size
rections.
D. its shape
487. A material that has a strong attraction to
magnets is called a
493. What happens when the north and south
A. Ferromagnetic Element poles of two magnetic fields overlap?
B. Circuit A. Attraction
C. Conductor
B. Repulsion
D. Insulator
C. Resistance
488. What are the two magnetic forces?
D. Current
A. attraction
B. equilibrium 494. What causes the magnetic field to form
C. magnetic acceleration in an electromagnet?
D. repulsion A. Electromagnets are only called mag-
nets because electricity is involved.
489. The strength of a magnetic field gener-
ated by an electric current is B. The domains of the magnet become
A. equal to the current aligned
B. not related to the current C. The magnetic field is absorbed from

another magnet
C. directly proportional to the current
D. inversely proportional to the current D. Electric current flowing in a wire
490. When two objects that do not easily con- 495. the greater the distance between two
duct electricity rub against each other, the magnets
friction can cause
A. the stronger the force between them
A. Electric current
B. the weaker the force between them
B. motion
C. light C. the force between them isn’t affected
D. static charge D. none of above

496. What happens when two north poles of B. 40 N.

a magnet are placed together? C. 120 N.

A. they repel
D. 360 N.
B. they attract
C. they cancel each other out 502. The force on an electron moving in a mag-
netic field will be the largest when its di-
D. the strength of the magnet is doubled rection
497. Which of these will magnetise a piece of A. is at an angle other than 90 degrees to
iron? the magnetic field direction
A. Place in a coil with d.c. current flowing B. is perpendicular to the magnetic field
B. Hammer in a strong magnetic field C. is the same as the magnetic field
C. Place in a coil with a.c. current flowing D. is exatly opposite to the magnetic field
D. Hammer away from a magnetic film (180 degrees)
498. What causes electricity? 503. What happens when you touch a metal
A. moving neutrons doorknob after rubbing your shoes on the
carpet?
B. moving protons
A. The doorknob sends a burst of electric
C. moving atoms current into your body
D. moving electrons
B. Millions of electrons go from your fin-
499. What condition is necessary for an elec- ger into the doorknob
tric charge to have a magnetic field around C. The doorknob sends millions of elec-
it? trons into your finger
A. it must be in a copper wire. D. Your finger becomes negatively
B. it must be isolated from the opposite charged
charge.
504. The ends of a magnet where the field is
C. it must be moving. strongest is called what?
D. it must be motionless. A. magnetic field
500. Magnets create pushing and pulling B. dependent variable
A. Repel C. magnetism
B. Attract D. magnetic poles
C. Forces
505. rule can be used to determine the
D. Metal direction of the induced current pro-
501. An asteroid exerts a 360-N gravitational duced.
force on a nearby spacecraft. If the space- A. Fleming’s Left Hand Rule
craft moves to a position three times as far
B. Fleming’s Right Hand Rule
from the center of the asteroid, the force
will be C. Right Hand Grip Rule
A. zero. D. none of above

506. All magnetism is caused by D. It would produce a gravitational field

A. stationary electric charges. 512. What is found at both ends of a bar mag-
B. gravitational fields. net?
C. moving electric charges. A. magnetic poles
D. magnetic fields. B. magnetic coils
C. ferromagnets
507. Earth’s magnetic field is strongest at the
and weakest at the D. electromagnets
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. equator, poles 513. Earth acts like a giant magnet due to
B. north pole, south pole A. gravity
C. poles, equator B. geothermal activity
D. south pole, north pole C. convection currents in the molten core
508. Two objects will attract one another D. solar radiation
when they have 514. Magnetism is produced by the motion of
A. like charges electrons as they
B. no charge A. move around the nucleus
C. opposite charges B. spin on their axes
D. the same amount of charge C. both A and B
D. neither A or B
509. The area of magnetic force around a mag-
net is known as its 515. Material that allows electric current or
A. Magnetic Field heat to flow through easily.
B. Magnetic Fan Lines A. electromagnetic field
C. Magnetic Area B. conductor
D. Magnetic Location C. open circuit
D. electric current
510. What is kinetic energy?
A. The energy that is stored in an object 516. Mr. Garcia uses magnets to hold a poster
or system on a steel filing cabinet because a main
component of steel is
B. To push objects away from each other
A. iron.
C. The energy that an object has because
B. carbon.
it is moving
C. plastic.
D. To move from one object to another
D. glass.
511. What would happen if I move a bar mag-
net in and out of a coil of copper wire? 517. Which item is magnetic?
A. Electric current would disappear A. iron
B. The magnet would explode B. paper
C. Electric current will flow through the C. plastic
wire D. pennies

518. The magnetic field lines around a bar mag- C. the interaction between electrical en-
net ergy and magnetism

A. are perfectly straight D. the appearance in nature of objects
B. are only perpendicular to the magnet that have both electric and magnetic fields
C. spread out from one pole and curve 523. What are domains like?
around to the other A. auroras
D. cross back and forth over one another B. molecules
519. A force that can act at a distance is called C. iron filings
A. non contact force D. tiny magnets
B. friction 524. Which element is magnetic?
C. balanced A. calcium
D. none of above B. chromium
520. If you put a small compass in a magnetic C. carbon

field, the compass will D. cobalt
A. swing randomly 525. Which material will magnets attract?
B. line up in a direction parallel to the A. copper
magnetic field lines
B. wood
C. line up in a direction perpendicular to
the magnetic field lines C. iron
D. seek electrical charge concentrations D. plastic
526. What is an amplifier?

521. What did Faraday’s experiments with
magnets and electromagnetic induction A. an electronic device that increases the
demonstrate? strength of an electric signal
A. Strong electromagnets make electric B. a machine that converts mechanical
current. energy into electrical energy
B. Electric current is made when the mag- C. a device that uses an electromagnet to
netic field changes. convert electrical energy into mechanical
energy
C. Strong electric current makes electro-
magnets. D. a device that increases or decreases
the voltage of alternating current
D. Magnetic fields are made when the
electric field changes. 527. When you bring two magnets together,
they exert a push or pull called a on
522. Which of the following is the best defini- each other.
tion of electromagnetism?
A. polar force
A. The use of electrical energy to create
magnets B. air force
B. the use of magnets to generate elec- C. magnetic field

tric currents D. magnetic force

528. A compass taken to Earth’s moon does 533. Which type of magnet loses magnetism
not point in a specific direction on the outside of a magnetic field?
moon.What is the most likely reason for
A. a strong magnet
the difference between how the compass
works on Earth and on the moon? B. a temporary magnet
A. The moon lacks an atmosphere. C. a permanent magnet
B. The moon contains no rocks that have D. an electromagnet
iron.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
534. In magnetic materials, all of the are
C. The moon does not have a strong mag- pointing in the same direction.
netic field.
A. doors
D. The moon has no bodies of water.
B. electrons
529. What material attracts iron? C. domains
A. magnet D. orbits
B. magnesia 535. What is a generator?
C. magnetite A. a machine that converts mechanical
D. aurora energy into electrical energy
B. an electronic device that increases the
530. Magnetic fields are produced by strength of an electric signal
A. moving particles on earth C. a device that increases or decreases
B. charges at rest the voltage of alternating current
C. moving particles D. a device that uses an electromagnet to
convert electrical energy into mechanical
D. moving charged particles
energy
531. Which best describes electromagnetism? 536. the strongest point on a magnet; each
A. the electrical component of a magnet magnet has a NORTH and SOUTH pole
B. the flow of electric charges between A. Force
two magnets B. Magnet
C. the interaction between electrical en- C. Pole
ergy and magnetism
D. Magnetic Fields
D. the flow of a magnetic field between
electrons 537. What is a magnetic field?
A. the geographic poles of the earth
532. A compass needle acts like a
B. the shape, strength, and size of a mag-
A. Magnet
net
B. Guide
C. an area of magnetic force around a
C. What? magnet
D. none of above D. a street sign to help direct you

538. The area around a magnet in which mag- 543. Probably the most useful thing about
netic forces can act is? electromagnets is that they can be turned
and

A. motor
A. on, off
B. magnetic field
B. positive, negative
C. magnet
C. north, south
D. magnetic poles
D. on, negative
539. The is Earth’s magnetic field that pro- 544. Magnetic poles that are unlike and
tects us from the sun’s harmful radiation magnetic poles that are alike
and solar wind.
A. run; stay
A. Magnetosphere
B. attract; repel
B. Biosphere
C. stay; repel
C. Hydrosphere D. repel; attract
D. Heliosphere
545. Rate this statement:No force due to
540. What is the magnetic attraction or repul- Earth’s gravity acts on astronauts inside
sion of a magnet called? the orbiting space station.
A. the magnetic domain A. always true while in orbit

B. sometimes true while in orbit
B. the magnetic field
C. always false
C. the magnetic pole
D. none of above
D. the magnetic force
546. How can we see a magnetic field?
541. What is the name for any object that at-
A. by painting the magnet red and blue
tracts the metal iron?
B. by melting the magnet
A. Magnet
C. by putting the magnet into super-
B. Circuit cooled fluid
C. Conductor D. by putting iron filings over a magnet
D. Insulator 547. What is a magnetic domain?
542. What is a transformer? A. a region in which the magnetic fields
of individual atoms are lined up
A. a device that increases or decreases
the voltage of alternating current B. the region around a magnet in which
magnetic forces can act
B. an electronic device that increases the
C. the force of attraction or repulsion of
strength of an electrical signal
substances, especially those that contain
C. a device that uses an electromagnet to iron, due to the arrangement of their elec-
convert electric signal trons
D. a machine that converts mechanical D. the part of the atmosphere affected by
energy into electrical energy Earth’s magnetic field

548. Which object would a magnet attract? C. electrons

A. a glass bottle D. nucleus
B. a piece of paper 554. A motor spins because of the combination
C. a metal paper clipcompass of
D. a rubber erasermagnetic field A. Electricity and magnetic forces
549. Which of the following determines B. Metal and magnets

whether or not a material is magnetic?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. Gears and wires
A. the density of the material D. Batteries and electricity
B. the weight of the material on Earth 555. Magnetic force between two magnets
C. the alignment of atoms in the material gets weaker the more between them.
D. the number of elements that make up A. distance
the material B. attraction
550. repel C. metal
A. to push objects away from each other D. lightsabers
B. to provide evidence that goes against 556. The magnetic field lines of a bar magnet
a claim spread out from the
C. an object, diagram, or computer pro- A. north end to the south end.
gram that helps us
B. south end to the north end.
D. when two objects come close together
C. edges to the center.
551. The closer together a magnet’s magnetic D. center to the edges.
field lines are, ?
A. the stronger the magnetic field 557. what is the unit of magnetic flux
B. the more attracted they are to each A. Wb

other B. W
C. the more they repel each other C. T
D. the more it loses its magnetism D. wb/m2
552. Magnetism is caused when electrons 558. What is an electronic device that in-
A. decay creases the strength of an electric signal?
B. spin and move around the nucleus of A. amplifier

an atom B. generator
C. remain stationary C. transformer
D. change into protons D. electric motor
553. What subatomic particle causes mag- 559. Which of these equations shows the force
netism in an atom? on an individual charged particle?
A. protons A. F = Bqv sin θ
B. neutrons B. F = BIl sin θ

C. B = µo nI 565. In order to make an electromagnet, you

need a
D. none of above

A. battery, nail, and magnet
560. What is a material through which elec- B. battery, wire, and nail
trons cannot move easily?
C. magnet, nail, and wire
A. Conductor
D. all of the above
B. Insulator
566. Moving a magnet near a wire will
C. Magnet
A. magnetize the wire
D. Circuit
B. induce a current in the wire
561. The Earth’s magnetic field is most useful C. have no effect
for
D. cause the wire to cool
A. deflecting solar wind
567. Select the statements (more than one)
B. keeping track of time
that are true.
C. creating sunny weather A. Magnets stick to ALL metal objects.
D. making it look cool in front of the other B. Two magnets can attract and repel
planets each other.
562. Unlike poles of a magnet C. A magnet has either a North pole or a
South pole, but not both.
A. attract
D. A magnet has an invisible magnetic
B. repel field extending from both poles.
C. cancel each other out
568. An asteroid exerts a 360-N gravitational
D. none of above force on a nearby spacecraft. The 360-N
force on the spacecraft is directed
563. Where is the magnetic force on a rectan-
A. toward the asteroid.
gular magnet the greatest?
B. away from the asteroid.
A. at the poles
C. toward the Sun.
B. in the middle
D. none of above
C. above the magnet
569. The frequency of AC current in North
D. below the magnet
America is
564. On a bar magnet, where is the strongest A. 120 V.
magnetic force? B. 50 hertz.
A. On the ends of the bar magnet C. 30 V.
B. On the top of the bar magnet D. 60 hertz.
C. On the bottom of the bar magnet
570. Ancient people discovered magnetic rocks
D. The bar magnet does not have a mag- called lodestone. What did they use them
netic field. for?

A. fires 576. What is known as the difference between

B. compasses the earth’s magnetic pole and its geo-
graphic pole?
C. sculptures
D. weapons A. magnetic declination
571. A magnetic force is: B. magnetic difference

A. a force produced when magnetic poles C. geographic decline
interact.
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. geographic increase
B. a force produced when magnetic poles
remain constant.
577. Which poles are attracted?
C. a force produced when magnetic poles
attract only. A. north and north
D. a force produced when magnetic poles B. south and south
stay the same.
C. north and south
572. Poles that are the same each other.
A. Attract D. none of above
B. Repel
C. Poles magnetic field?
D. Connect
A. a measure of the length of a magnet
573. Attract
B. the force that pushes two magnets
A. To pull objects close to each other
away from each other
B. to push objects away from each other
C. an invisible region that surrounds the
C. to change from one type to another
north pole of a magnet
D. an electric current
D. a region around a magnet in which you
574. An electric field gets stronger as you can measure magnetic forces
A. get farther from a charge
B. remove electrons from a negatively 579. When a compass is near a bar magnet,
charged object what happens to a compass needle as you
move the compass around?
C. add electrons to a positively charged
object A. The compass needle always points
D. get closer to a charge north.
575. As earth’s magnetic poles move what B. The compass needle points in random
happens to the magnetic declination of a directions.
given location
C. The compass needle follows the pat-
A. it will always remain constant tern of magnetic field lines
B. it will return to zero
D. The compass needle’s north pole al-
C. it will change ways points to the north pole of the mag-
D. it will always double net.

580. Materials which can be made into mag- 585. Which of the following elements are fer-
nets for a short period of time when placed romagnetic?
in a strong magnetic field are called

A. iron, nickel, and cobalt
A. gas
B. iron, aluminum, and steel
B. temporary magnets
C. iron, copper, and gold
C. plastic
D. platinum, lead, and aluminum
D. conductors
586. In our study of electricity and magnetism,
581. What happens when two bar magnets re- we use the RIGHT hand rule. We point our
pel each other? thumb in the direction of the , our fin-
A. The poles of the magnets pull toward gers show us the direction of the
each other. A. current / magnetic field
B. The poles of the magnets push away B. field / current
from each other.
C. compass / needle
C. The centers of the magnets pull to-
ward each other. D. needle / compass
D. The centers o the magnets push away E. Nonsense, there is no right hand rule!
from each other.
587. In a magnetic material, whole regions
582. A is any material that attracts iron or of the material in which the electrons are
objects made of iron. aligned in the same direction are called
A. magnet A. electronic colonies
B. rock B. magnetic field generators
C. gravity C. magnetic domains
D. liquid D. polarized magnetite
583. what forms when particles from the sun 588. What type of equipment is used to mea-
hit oxygen and nitrogen atoms sure the current induced when a wire
passes through a magnetic field?
A. south pole
A. a transformer
B. aurora
B. a galvanometer
C. North Pole
C. a generator
D. magnetic field
D. an insulated wire
584. The closer you are to a magnetic, the
the magnetic field. 589. Magnets always have pole(s).
A. weaker A. one
B. stronger B. two
C. brighter C. three
D. dimmer D. four

4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric current 458
590. What are the 2 types of waves? A. attract each other

A. Transvese B. repel each other
B. ocean C. strenghthen the magnetic fieold
C. converse D. loses its magnetism
D. longitudinal
595. what is the earths magnetic field useful
591. The ends of the magnets are called for
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. attract A. deflecting the solar wind, charged par-
ticles that come from the Sun.
B. repel
C. magnetic B. wind
D. poles C. sun
D. light
592. Permanent magnets can be demagnetized
by them past the Curie point (approx- 596. When the atoms of a substance align
imately 1, 060 ◦ F). their magnetic fields with each other, they
A. heating are called
B. freezing A. ferromagnetic
C. shaking B. anti-ferromagnetic
D. solidifying C. a compass
593. Which unit is a measure of a magnetic D. a lodestone

field.
597. Materials that allow the charges of an
A. meter electric current to move freely through
B. milligram them are called ?
C. telsa A. conductors
D. ampere B. insulators
C. electromagnet
594. Magnetic poles that are unlike, do
what? D. magnetic field
4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric

current
1. how does an electric current produce a 2. The magnetic field B inside a long ideal
magnetic field? solenoid is independent of:
A. with friction A. the current
B. when electricity is in motion B. the core material
C. when electrical charge is in motion C. the spacing of the windings
D. with force and friction D. the cross-sectional area of the

solenoid A. Steel
3. Which of the following are two kinds of B. Iron

magnets? C. Plastic
A. atoms, domains D. Copper
B. magnetic fields, magnetic poles
8. The nature of magnetic field line passing
C. ferromagnets, electromagnets
through the centre of current carrying cir-
D. magnesia magnets, magnetite mag- cular loop is:
nets
A. circular
4. Calculate the magnetic field due to a B. ellipse
straight conductor of infinite length carry-
ing a current of 3 A at a point 5 cm away C. parabolic
from the center of conductor? D. straight line
A. 0.6 x 10-5 T
9. An Electric charge in a uniform motion pro-
B. 1.2 X 10-5 T
duces
C. 3 X 10-5 T
A. An Electric Field only
D. 12 X 10-5 T
B. An Magnetic field only
5. Which of the following correctly describes C. Both Electric Field & Magnetic field
the magnetic field near a long straight
wire? D. Neither of them
A. The field consists of straight lines per- 10. The magnitude of the force on a current
pendicular to the wire. carrying conductor in a magnetic field can
B. The field consists of straight lines par- be increase by all of the following EXCEPT
allel to the wire.
A. use longer wire
C. The field consists of radial lines origi-
nating from the wire. B. increase current
D. The field consists of concentric circles C. use stronger permanent magnet

centred on the wire. D. use wire with larger cross sectional
area
6. A superconducting solenoid is to be de-
signed to generate a magnetic field of 11. When will a current carrying conductor
5.00 T. If the solenoid winding has 1000 placed in a magnetic field experience a
turns/m, what is the required current? zero force?
A. 1000 A
A. when placed parallel to magnetic field
B. 1990 A
B. when placed perpendicular to mag-
C. 3980 A netic field
D. 5000 A C. when placed aligned with the magnetic
field
7. What type of core is best for electromag-
nets? D. when placed at an angle of 600

12. A long straight cylindrical shell carries cur- 17. Solenoid A has length L and N turns,
rent i uniformly distributed over its cross solenoid B has length 2L and N turns, and
section. The magnitude of the magnetic solenoid C has length L/2 and 2N turns.
field is greatest: If each solenoid carries the same current,
rank by the strength of the magnetic field
A. at the inner surface of the shell
in the center of each solenoid from largest
B. at the outer surface of the shell to smallest.
C. inside the shell near the middle A. A, B, C
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. in hollow region near the inner surface B. A, C, B
13. A straight wire of length 0.5m and carry- C. B, C, A
ing current 1.2A is placed in uniform mag- D. C, A, B
netic field of induction 2T, applied perpen-
dicular to the length of the wire. The force 18. What should one do to maximize the mag-
on the wire is nitude of the magnetic force acting on
A. 2.4 N a charged particle moving in a magnetic
field? I. Maximize the strength of the
B. 1.2 N magnetic field II. Minimize the particle’s
C. 3.0 N velocity III. Ensure that the particle is mov-
ing in the same direction as the magnetic
D. 2.0 N
field lines
14. According to right hand thumb rule the di- A. I only
rection of magnetic field in a current carry-
B. I and II only
ing circular coil is denoted by
C. All the options
A. Thumb
D. I and III
B. Middle finger
C. Curl finger 19. No force acts on a current carrying conduc-
D. First finger tor when it is placed-
A. perpendicular to the magnetic field
15. All of the following are application of elec-
tromagnet EXCEPT B. parallel to the magnetic field
A. microphone C. far away from the magnetic field
B. circuit breaker D. inside a magnetic field
C. electric bell 20. The property of current carrying wire pro-

D. ear phone ducing magnetic field called ‘Magnetic ef-
fect of electric current’ was discovered
16. The application of catapult effect is first by
A. microphone A. Isaac Newton
B. generator B. Hans Christian Oersted
C. electric bell C. Richard Feynman
D. direct current motor D. Albert Einstein

21. Which statement about magnetic 26. Biot Savart law states
monopoles is false?
A. Magnetic field has a net outward flow

A. A monopole is a hypothetical separate
north pole. B. Magnetic field has no net outward flow
B. Research scientists use them for inter- C. Magnetic field and electric field are
nal medical testing applications. normal to each other
C. A monopole is a hypothetical separate D. Total magnetic flux coming out of a sur-
south pole. face is total current enclosed
D. They don’t exist.
27. Fleming’s left hand rule used to determine
22. what current must flow in an infinitely
A. direction of electric current
long straight wire to produce a magnetic
field of 4 × 105 T at 8 cm from the wire? B. direction of pole
A. 1.6 A C. direction of magnetic force
B. 16 A D. direction of magnetic field
C. .16 A
28. When a current-carrying conductor is in
D. 160 A
a magnetic field of a permanent magnet,
23. Magnetic field inside a long solenoid carry- the interaction between the two magnetic
ing current is fields produce
A. same at all points (uniform) A. a current on the conductor
B. different at poles and at the centre B. a force on the conductor
C. zero C. a electricity on the conductor
D. different at all points
D. a pole on the conductor
24. A long, straight wire is carrying a current
of 5.0 A. At what distance away from the 29. What advantage does an electromagnet
wire would the magnetic field be 2.5 x 10- have over a magnet?
5 T? A. It can be switched on and off
A. 0.8 m
B. It is stronger
B. 0.04 m
C. It is easier to change shape
C. 0.02 m
D. none of above
D. 4 m
E. 0.5 m 30. If current is passed in a spring with a
weight hung on it, then the spring
25. Which statement COULD NOT be used to
describe a uniform magnetic field? A. will be compressed
A. Field lines point in the same direction. B. will expand
B. Parallel field lines C. compression and expansion both will
C. Field lines get closer together. occur
D. Field lines do not change direction. D. no change in the state of the spring

31. Moving charges, or an electric current, pro- C. Into page

duces a magnetic field. D. Out of page
A. Gauss’s Law
37. Which object would NOT attract a mag-
B. Ohm’s Law net?
C. Ampere’s Law A. an iron scissor
D. Law of Conservation of Magnetism B. a steel nail
32. The magnetic field lines due to a straight C. an aluminium wire
NARAYAN CHANGDER
wire carrying a current are D. a nickel plate
A. straight 38. Magnetic field produced around a straight
B. circular conductor due to current in it is given by
C. parabolic A. Fleming’s right hand rule
D. elliptical B. Right hand thumb rule
33. Who was the first to observe the magnetic C. Clock rule
effect of electric current? D. Fleming’s left hand rule
A. Faraday 39. Which of the following actions would
B. Oersted double the magnitude of the magnetic
force per unit length between two parallel
C. Volta
current-carrying wires? Choose all correct
D. Ampere answers.
34. The relative strength of the magnetic field A. Double one of the currents.
is shown by the degree of closeness of the B. Double the distance between them.
field lines. C. Double both currents.
A. false D. None of the above
B. true
40. The strength of the magnetic field at a
C. can’t say point x near a long straight current carry-
D. none of above ing conductor is B. The field at a distance
x/2 will be
35. How do you make an electromagnet
A. B/2
stronger?
B. B/4
A. Add a motor and/or lightbulbs
C. 2 B
B. Add more light bulbs and/or wire coils
D. 4 B
C. add more wire coils and/or a switch
D. add more wire coils and/or batteries 41. What happens to the strength of a mag-
netic field as you move away from the
36. A wire has current travelling to the right. magnet?
What is the direction of the magnetic field A. The strength of the magnetic field in-
above the wire? creases.
A. Up B. The strength of the magnetic field
B. Down doesn’t change.

C. The strength of the magnetic field is 47. Two magnetic poles that are the same
doubled. each other

D. The strength of the magnetic field de- A. Attract
creases.
B. Repel
42. Which part (s) of the DC motor connect the C. neutral to
power supply to the split-ring and coil?
A. Carbon brushes
B. Magnets 48. The motion of a current carrying conductor
in an magnetic fields can be determined by
C. Commutator
A. Right hand Grip Rule
D. Slip rings
B. Fleming’s Right Hand Rule
43. In the magnetic field equation, what is the
C. Fleming’s Left Hand Rule
variable µ ?
D. Direction of current flow
A. magnetic field
B. current 49. Application of the force on current carrying
C. permeability conductor in a magnetic field
D. radius A. Moving coil ammeter
B. dynamo
44. Calculate the magnetic field strength of a
solenoid with 500 turns, 0.10 m long, car- C. Dc motor
rying a current of 4.0 A and with a radius D. electrIc bell
of 10-2 m.
E. Dc generator
A. 31 x 10-4 T
B. 62 x 10-4 T 50. What happens when an electric current
flows through a wire?
C. 125 x 10-4 T
A. The wire begins to spin.
D. 250 x 10-4 T
B. Nothing happens.
45. The factors on which one magnetic field
C. A field of gravity is created around the
strength produced by current carrying
wire.
solenoids depends are
A. Magnitude of current D. A magnetic field is created around the
wire.
B. Nature of core material
C. Number of turns 51. What is meant by the term magnetic field
line?
D. All of the above
A. Line that shows direction of the mag-
46. What does the thumb indicate in flemings netic force
left hand rule?
B. Line that shows direction a metal ob-
A. Force ject will move.
B. current C. Line in between the magnetic poles
C. Magnetic field direction D. Line that shows the flow of electric cur-
D. none of above rent.

52. In the magnetic field equation, what is the B. in opposite directions

variable B?
C. perpendicular to each other
A. radius
D. parallel to the earth’s magnetic field
B. permeability
E. perpendicular to the earth’s field
C. current
D. magnetic field 57. Which rule is applied to find the direction
of motion of a current carrying conductor
NARAYAN CHANGDER
53. “a region around a magnetic material or
when placed in a magnetic field?
a moving electric charge within which the
force of magnetism acts”.This is definition A. right hand thumb rule
of
B. clock rule
A. magnetic field
C. Fleming left hand rule
B. magnetic charge
D. Fleming right hand rule
C. magnet
D. electromagnet 58. Two long parallel wires 40 cm apart are
carrying currents of 10 A and 20 A in the
54. The direction of the force on a current- opposite direction. What is the magnitude
carrying wire in an external magnetic field of the magnetic field halfway between the
is wires?
A. perpendicular to the current only
A. 1.0x10−5 T
B. perpendicular to the magnetic field
only B. 2.0x10−5 T
C. perpendicular to both the current and C. 3.0x10−5 T
the magnetic field D. 4.0x10−5 T
D. parallel to the current and to the mag-
netic field 59. The attraction or repulsion created by spin-
ning electric charges
55. Which of the following factors affect the
strength of force experience by a current A. electric generator
carrying conduct in a uniform magnetic B. magnetic force
field?
C. solenoid
A. magnetic field strength
B. magnitude of current in a conductor D. electromagnet
C. length of the conductor within mag- 60. A 5 C and 8 C charge give off a force of
netic field 2.5x109 N. What is the distance between
D. All of above them?
56. Two long, parallel conductors carrying cur- A. 11 m

rent liein a horizontal plane. The two con- B. 12 m
ductors attract oneanother. The two cur-
rents must be C. 121 m
A. in the same direction D. 144 m

61. Two parallel wires carry current in the C. kilowatt hour

same direction attract each other because D. tesla
of

A. Potential difference between them 67. Magnetic field arises due to
B. Mutual inductance between them A. flow of steady current through a cur-

rent element
C. Electric forces between them
B. flow of charges
D. Magnetic forces between them
C. flow of steady current through an infi-
62. Which particle would produce a magnetic nite wire
field? D. flow of steady current through a
A. a neutral particle moving in a straight closed loop
line
68. A solenoid of length 50 cm and 5000 turns
B. a neutral particle moving in a circle carries a current of 10 A. What is the mag-
C. a stationary charged particle netic field at the ends of the solenoid?
D. a moving charged particle A. 0.063 T
B. 0.126 T
63. What can demagnetize a magnet?
C. 0.006 T
A. high altitudes
D. 0.001 T
B. high temperatures
C. low altitudes 69. Which of the following are two effects of
Earth’s magnetic field?
D. low temperatures
A. compasspoints to geographic north,
64. According to right hand thumb rule the di- auroras seen at both poles
rection of magnetic field in a current carry- B. compasspoints to magnetic north, au-
ing straight conductor is denoted by: roras seen at both poles
A. Thumb C. compasspoints to geographic south,
B. Curl fingers auroras seen at the equator
C. Middle finger D. compass points to geographic north,
auroras seenat the equator
D. First finger
70. The magnetic field lines near a long
65. Some metals can be magnetic. Which of
straight wire carrying current are:
these can be magnetic?
A. Straight lines
A. Steel
B. Concentric rings
B. Copper
C. Spiral lines
C. Aluminum
D. Radial lines
D. Copper
71. force on a conductor carrying a current =
66. What is the unit of magnetic field? 5.37 N, magnetic flux density = 3.91 T,
A. ampere current = 4.33 A, length =?
B. watt A. 0.0851

B. 1.17 76. As electrons move, they make

C. 0.317 A. electromagnetism.
D. 0.106 B. auroras.
C. ferromagnetism.
72. force on a conductor carrying a current =
1.32 N, current = 4 A, length = 3.88 m, D. magnetic fields.
magnetic flux density =? 77. Name one factor that does not affect the
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. 0.0851 size of a force in on a current-carrying con-
ductor placed in a magnetic field?
B. 1.17
A. Gravity
C. 0.317
B. Magnetic flux density/size of magnetic
D. 0.106 field
73. force on a conductor carrying a current = C. Size of the current
2.43 N, magnetic flux density = 2.69 T, D. Length of the conductor
length = 8.5 m, current =?
78. What is true about electricity and magnetic
A. 0.0851 fields?
B. 1.17 A. Electricity is needed to create any mag-
C. 0.317 net.
D. 0.106 B. Electricity always creates a magnetic
field.
74. According to right hand rule to find force C. Electricity is stronger than a magnetic
exerted on a current carrying conductor field.
placed in magnetic field, the stretched
thumb indicates D. Electricity prevents magnetic fields
from occurring.
A. direction of force
79. A superconducting wire carries a current of
B. direction of current
104 A. Find the magnetic field at a distance
C. direction of magnetic field of 1.0 m from the wire.
D. direction of electric field A. 2x10−3 T
E. direction of motion of charge B. 8x10−3 T
C. 1.6x10−2 T
75. A solenoid is 3.0 cm long and has a radius
of 0.50 cm. It is wrapped with 500 turns D. 3.2x10−2 T
of wire carrying a current of 2.0 A. The 80. For the right hand grip rule for a
magnetic field at the center of the solenoid solenoid:The thumb points towards of
is: the magnetic field while
A. 9.9 ‘ 10-8 T A. positive pole
B. 1.3 ‘ 10-3 T B. south pole
C. 4.2 ‘ 10-2 T C. north pole
D. 16 T D. negative pole

4.3 Force on current carrying wire in magnetic field 467
81. magnetic flux density = 0.45 T, current = A. 0 T

1.37 A, length = 1.9 m, force on a conduc- B. 4.0 ‘ 10-4 T
tor carrying a current =?

C. 8.0 ‘ 10-4 T
A. 0.0851
D. 12 ‘ 10-4 T
B. 1.17
C. 0.317 83. What is the magnitude of the magnetic
force per unit length between a pair of par-
D. 0.106 allel wires separated by 2 m if they carry
82. Two long straight wires are parallel and each a current of 3 A? A.
carry current in the same direction. The A. 1.8x10−6 N/m
currents are 8.0 and 12 A and the wires B. 9x10−7 N/m
are separated by 0.40 cm. The magnetic
field at a point midway between the wires C. 4.5x10−7 N/m
is: D. 3x10−7 N/m
4.3 Force on current carrying wire in magnetic field

1. A charged particle is injected into a uniform 4. What does the thumb indicate in the right-
magnetic field such that its velocity vector hand palm rule?
is perpendicular to the magnetic field vec- A. Force
tor. The particle will :
B. The motion of positive charge
A. move in a straight line
B. follow a spiral path C. Current
C. move along a parabolic path D. Magnetic field direction
D. move along a waveform E. The motion of negative charge
E. follow a circular path 5. A 2.0 m wire segment carrying a cur-
2. When combining magnetic field, same di- rent of0.60 A oriented parallel to a uni-
rection will make the magnetic force form magnetic field of0.50 T experiences
a force of what magnitude?
A. Stronger
B. Weaker A. 0
C. Unchanged B. 0.15 N
D. none of above C. 0.30 N
3. The magnetic field at a point on the axis D. 6.7 N

of a long solenoid having 5 turns per cm
6. The speed of direct current motor can be
length when a current of 0.8 A flows
reduced by
through it is
A. 6.024x10-8 Wb/m2 A. increasing the amount of current
B. 5.024x10-8 Wb/m2 B. increasing the strength of magnet
C. 7.024x10-8 Wb/m2 C. increasing number of turns of coil
D. 8.024x10-8 Wb/m2 D. increasing the resistance of coil wire

4.3 Force on current carrying wire in magnetic field 468
7. A current-carrying wire of length 50 cm is- 11. When combining magnetic field, up and
positioned perpendicular to a uniform mag- down direction will make the magnetic
netic field.If the current is 10.0 A and it is force
determined that thereis a resultant force
A. Stronger
of 3.0 N on the wire due to theinteraction
of the current and field, what is themag- B. Weaker
netic field strength? C. Unchanged
A. 6.7 E-3 T D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. 1.8 E-3 T
12. The current in a solenoid is 30A, the num-
C. 0.6 T ber of turns per unit length is 500 turns
D. 1.5 T per metre. Calculate the magnetic field if
the core is air.
8. The force exerted on a current-carrying A. 18.84T
wirelocated in an external magnetic field
is directlyproportional to which of the B. 18.84mT
following? I. Current strengthII. Field C. 1.84mT
strengthIII. Length of the wire
D. 1.84T
A. I only
13. When combining magnetic field, opposite
B. II only
direction will make the magnetic force
C. I and II only
A. Stronger
D. I, II and III
B. Weaker
9. Which of the following is the function of C. Unchanged
the commutator in a direct current motor?
D. none of above
A. Change the direction of the current in
the coils 14. When combining magnetic field, down and
down direction will make the magnetic
B. Change the direction of the motion of force
the coils
A. Stronger
C. Produce uniform magnetic field
B. Weaker
D. Increase the speed of rotation of the
coils C. Unchanged
D. none of above
10. The direction of magnetic field produced
around a straight conductor due to current 15. How to determine the direction of mag-
in it is given by netic field around the wire or coil?
A. Fleming’s right hand rule A. Left hand grip rule
B. Right hand grip rule B. Right hand grip rule
C. Clock rule C. Fleming’s left hand rule
D. Fleming’s left hand rule D. Fleming’s right hand rule

4.4 Electric motor 469
16. Two wires, both have current flowing up- B. Motion

ward. What is the force between the
C. Current
wires?

A. Towards each other D. Magnetic field direction
B. Away from each other
18. The unit of magnetic field is
C. Both move left
A. weber
D. Both move right
B. guass
17. What does the thumb indicate in Fleming’s
Left Hand Rule? C. tesla
A. Force D. farad
4.4 Electric motor

1. What are the three basic parts of an elec- 5. This transforms mechanical energy into
tric generator? electrical energy.
A. communicator, stator, and motor shaft A. Generator
B. armature, brushes, and battery
B. Electromagnet
C. stator, rotor, and commutator
C. Motor
D. battery, armature, and DC power sup-
ply D. Circuit
2. Coal is burned to heat water so that the

6. The wiring and connectors that carry the
can turn turbines.
power to a motor must be in good condi-
A. fire tion. When a connection becomes loose,
B. steam oxidation of the copper wire occurs. The
oxidation
C. water
D. heat A. has no effect on the electrical connec-
tion
3. Which of the following is NOT part of an
electromagnet? B. acts as an electrical resistance and
causes the connection to heat more
A. Wire
B. Iron C. decreases the resistance
C. Toothpick D. none of the above

D. Power source
7. Like poles of a magnet do what?
4. Can we use any hand for this purpose?
A. repel
A. No
B. attract
B. Only with magnetic fields
C. Yes C. nothing
D. Only when current is involved D. none of above

8. What is the function of a brush? 13. Power stations use generators to produce
electricity on a large scale. Mechanical en-
A. To change the current
ergy is provided by rotating turbines that
B. To bring the current to the commutator can be powered by:
C. To cause a force A. high-pressure steam-in coal, oil, gas
D. To supply power and nuclear power stations
B. wind-in wind turbines
9. The recommended way to discharge a ca-
C. falling water-in hydroelectric power
NARAYAN CHANGDER
pacitor is to
stations
A. place a screwdriver across the termi- D. All of them
nals
14. Capacitors wired in series with the start-
B. assume it will discharge itself over a
ing winding provide a(n)
period of time
A. longer starting time
C. use a 20, 000 ohm 5 watt resistor that
has had insulated leads soldered to it B. greater starting torque
D. use an ohmmeter C. aid in starting three phase motors

D. more efficient operation at full load
10. Identify a factor that would INCREASE an speed
electric motor’s force: E.
A. Increasing the voltage
15. What do we call a device that converts
B. Using a larger axle electricity into mechanical movement?
C. Lowering the current A. electric charge
D. Using aluminum wire instead of copper B. electric motor
C. electric current
11. How could you make an electromagnet
stronger? D. electric plasma
A. Plug it up 16. A current magnetic relay opens and closes

its contacts based on the
B. Charge it
A. current in the start winding
C. Unwrap the coils of wire
B. voltage across the start winding
D. Use a bigger battery
C. voltage across the run winding
12. A motor has four leads out of it:two red D. current in the run winding
and two black. The resistance between
the red leads is 3 ohms. The resistance be- 17. What is a common mistake technicians
tween the black leads is 5 ohms. The black make when trying to remove drive assem-
leads are connected to the winding. blies?
A. Start A. trying to spin it clockwise

B. unscrewing it counterclockwise
B. No Answers are true
C. Many technicians make the mistake of
C. Common
trying to drive a motor shaft out of the as-
D. Run sembly fastened to the shaft.

D. doing it at the end of the day Friday. 23. What do you call a wire that is wound up
in a spiral or spring?
18. Which of the following is the correct expla-

nation of the electrical motor operation? A. A conductor
A. Electric motor uses electricity B. A coil
B. The operation is based on the principle C. A bulb

of electromagnetism D. A magnet
C. The motor converts electric energy
into mechanical energy 24. There is one device listed that does not be-
long. Which one does not include a mo-
D. All of the above tor?
19. Two common reasons for motor failure are A. hand mixer
improper pulley alignment and B. toaster
A. Motor Tension
C. blender
B. Belt Tension
D. ceiling fan
C. Voltage Tension
E. electric can opener
D. Current Tension
25. Fleming’s left-hand rule is used to indicate
20. Which of the following is a power source?
A. battery A. Direction of force.
B. solar cell B. Direction of magnetic field.
C. fossil fuels C. Direction of current.
D. all of these D. Direction of force, magnetic field and
current.
21. Hydroelectricity is when the energy from
moving is converted to electrical en-
26. Give two ways you can reverse the direc-
ergy.
tion of a basic dc motor?
A. wind
A. Reverse the current
B. sun
B. Keep the current the same
C. water
C. Reverse the magnetic field
D. rocks
D. Keep the magnetic field the same
22. What do you call a device that creates a
rotating motion using electricity and mag- 27. What are the two metal semi circles
nets? called?
A. An electromagnet A. Brush
B. An electric motor B. Commutator
C. An electric generator C. Coil
D. An electric circuit D. Electromagnet

28. What is it called when humans generate 33. He was credited for his discovery of elec-
electricity by using the heat of the Earth? tromagnetic induction.
A. Geothermal Energy A. Thomas Edison
B. Hydroelectric Energy
B. Benjamin Franklin
C. Radiation Energy
C. Nikola Tesla
D. Solar Energy
D. Michael Faraday
29. What must happen for an action to be con-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
sidered work? 34. Which of these pairs of devices operate in
A. force applied & energy created reverse of each other?
B. force applied & distance moved A. generator and motor
C. force applied & matter destroyed B. generator and electromagnet
D. force applied & mass increased
C. motor and electromagnet
30. What do you call a device that gener-
D. electromagnet and resistor
ates electrical current when a wire coil is
wrapped around an iron core and rotated
35. In a motor, a provides the necessary
close to a magnet?
push to make current flow.
A. car
A. crane arm
B. magnet
C. motor B. copper wire
D. generator C. battery
31. What causes the conductor to move? D. piece of iron

A. The interaction between the current
36. What do you call a device that produces
and the conductor
an electric current when a coil of wire is
B. The interaction between the magnetic wrapped around an iron core and rotated
field around the conductor and the perma- near a magnet?
nent magnets
A. magnet
C. The interaction between the force and
the magnetic field B. car
D. The interaction between the magnet C. generator
and the air
D. motor
32. What device turns electrical energy into
mechanical energy? Remember:electrical 37. A device that increases or decreases the
energy is electricity, mechanical energy is voltage of alternating current is a
movement
A. generator
A. a solenoid
B. motor
B. a motor
C. an electromagnet C. transformer
D. an electric generator D. turbine

38. He was credited for discovering that elec- 44. What is a component?
tric currents create magnetic fields, which A. A part or element of a larger machine
was the first connection found between

or device.
electricity and magnetism.
B. The whole machine or device you can
A. James Maxwell use.
B. Hans Christian Orsted C. A man-made magnet.
C. Michael Faraday
D. A device that makes a rotating axel us-
D. Alessandro Volta ing electricity and magnets.
39. This object transforms mechanical energy 45. When a force moves an object, the action
into electrical energy is called
A. Circuit A. energy
B. Generator B. work
C. Motor C. force
D. Battery D. circuit
40. This type of energy is stored in a battery 46. How can the size of an induced current be
A. chemical increased? MARK THE WRONG ANSWER.
B. mechanical A. Increase the speed at which the coil
C. electrical rotate
D. thermal B. Increase the strength of the magnetic
field
41. A motor’s speed is determined by
C. Increase the number of turns in the
A. size screw
B. voltage D. Increase the total area of the coil.
C. amperage
47. What do you call an energy converting sys-
D. number of motor poles tem that transforms electrical energy into
42. The positive temperature coefficient resis- mechanical movement?
tor start device is a type of A. Electric motor
A. capacitor B. Electric field
B. variable resistor C. Electric generator
C. switching device D. Electric plasma
D. diode
48. What are the three basic parts of an elec-
43. When a wire loop is connected to a bat- tric motor?
tery, is produced in the loop. A. commutator, stator, and rotor
A. a “Dark Side” force field B. armature, brushes, and battery
B. an electric field C. commutator, armature, and brushes
C. a magnetic field D. battery, armature, and DC power sup-
D. a baseball field ply

49. Most motors are powered using direct cur- 54. How is a motor used in a shower?
rent (DC), which is produced by cells and A. to power the pump that pushes the wa-
batteries. ter
A. False B. to turn the water on
B. True C. to heat up water
C. Only some D. none of above
D. Only one
NARAYAN CHANGDER
55. Identify the MOST powerful electric mo-
50. Which of these is the commutator function tor:
in the generator? A. A 14 amp motor with two small perma-
A. Acts as a rectifier that converts AC volt- nent magnets
age to DC voltage within the winding of the B. A 6 amp motor with 4 large permanent
armature. magnets
B. Diminish the energy loss caused by C. A 14 amp motor with 4 large perma-
Eddy Current. nent magnets
C. Offer magnetic fields where the coil is D. A 10 amp motor with two large perma-
rotating. nent magnets
D. Provides electricity to the generator. 56. This type of circuit allows for electricity to
flow
51. The start windings have
A. closed
A. fewer turns than the run windings
B. open
B. more turns than the run windings
C. both
C. the same number of turns as the run
windings D. neither
D. larger diameter wire than the run 57. What does AC stand for?
windings
A. All Chill
52. When an electric current flows throught a B. Air condition
wire, the current produces a C. Alternating current
A. magnetic field D. Academic certification
B. force field
58. Which of the following do you need in or-
C. electromagnet der to form a circuit?
D. electromagnetic pulse A. power source
53. Which of these can apply a force without B. conductor
actually touching an object? C. resistor/load
A. motor D. all of these
B. generator
59. The difference between synchronous
C. magnetic field speed and full load speed is called
D. turbine A. Slip

B. Fall 65. Generators generate

C. Slip-fall A. electricity

D. Skid B. mechanical energy
60. While electric current is flowing through a C. heat
wire, what surrounds the wire?
D. chemical energy
A. a magnetic field
B. a glowing light 66. An electric motor:
C. neutrons A. Transforms electrical energy to me-
D. protons chanical energy.
B. Transforms mechanical energy to elec-
61. An open winding in an electric motor
trical energy.
means that
A. the winding is making contact with the C. Transforms chemical energy to radiant
motor frame energy.
B. one winding is making contact with an- D. Transforms radiant energy to chemical
other winding energy.
C. a wire in a winding is broken
67. The is a winding that, when energized,
D. the centrifugal switch to the start wind- will generate a magnetic field as there will
ing is open be current flowing through it.
62. When a loop of current-carrying wire turns A. Rotor
continuously in a magnetic field, is cre-
B. Stator
ated.
A. galvanometer C. Pinwheel
B. motor D. Glide
C. transformer
68. What device turns electrical energy into
D. voltmeter mechanical energy?
63. This device is used to open or close a circuit A. a solenoid
A. battery B. a motor
B. wire C. an electromagnet
C. switch D. an electric generator
D. solar cell
69. Which of the following principles explains
64. What component is not included in an ar- how an electric motor works?
mature assembly?
A. Magnetic force
A. retaining clip
B. commutator B. Magnetism
C. copper wire C. Electrolysis
D. armature plates D. Electromagnetism

70. Opposite magnetic poles (N S) will repel 75. A permanent split-capacitor motor has a
each other.
A. true A. start and run capacitor
B. false B. start capacitor only
C. run capacitor only
C. file for divorce
D. split phase capacitor
D. none of above
76. Which technology converts solar energy
NARAYAN CHANGDER
71. Which two forces are required to operate into electricity?
with generators and electric motors? A. Solar panels
A. electric and magnetic B. Wind Turbines
B. electric and thermal C. Generator
C. magnetic and radiant D. All of them
D. magnetic and thermal 77. In this circuit, the current only has ONE
path to follow; so if one light goes out,
72. The greater the number of windings (the they all go out.
number of times it is wrapped around) in A. Conductor
an electromagnet’s coil
B. Insulator
A. the stronger the magnet is C. Series
B. the less the magnet will pick up D. Parallel
C. the more current it takes to create the 78. What is the job of a current carrying con-
electromagnet ductor?
D. the slower the compass needle moves A. To give train tickets
to the wire
B. To activate the magnetic field
73. What do you call a device that creates elec- C. To direct an orchestra
tricity using a rotating motion and mag- D. none of above
nets?
79. When an electromagnet is placed into a
A. An electromagnet permanent magnetic field it experiences a
B. An electric motor
C. An electric generator A. Force
B. Current
D. An electric circuit
C. Voltage
74. Two common reasons for motor bearing D. none of above
failure are improper pulley alignment and
80. Electrons flow in what direction?
A. belts too loose
A. negative to positive
B. over-tightened belts B. positive to negative
C. wrong size belts C. right to left
D. wrong size pulley D. left to right

81. An electromagnet includes 86. What would increase the strength of an

electromagnet?
A. heat
A. Increasing the amount of current flow-

B. insulators
ing through the wire.
C. magnetism B. Inserting a wooden core inside the coil
D. electricity C. Changing the direction of the current
82. When a wire with a current is placed in D. Decreasing the number of coils of wire
a magnetic field, electrical energy can be 87. The flow of electric charge in a circuit is
transformed into.. called
A. Chemical energy A. heat
B. Mechanical energy B. electric current
C. Radiant energy C. sound
D. Thermal energy D. magnetic
88. Within an electric circuit, where do the
83. What are huge wheels that rotate when electrons come from?
pushed by water, wind, or steam?
A. The conductor
A. Circuits
B. The load
B. Magnets
C. The switch
C. Turbines D. The Power Source
D. Engines
89. The area surrounding a magnet that ap-
84. When John plugs in a toy and turns it on, plies a force without touching the object.
a marble is carried up to the top of a slide. A. magnetism
At the top, a marble is released and it goes B. magnet
down a slide. What kind of energy trans-
C. magnetic theory
formation occurs to make this toy work?
D. magnetic field
A. chemical to heat
90. What two forces are required for genera-
B. electrical to chemical
tors and electric motors to work?
C. sound to electrical A. magnetic and thermal
D. electrical to mechanical B. magnetic and radiant
85. When a general duty split-phase motor C. electric and thermal
reaches approximately 75% of its op- D. electric and magnetic
erating speed, the start winding is de-
91. Within an electric circuit, what do you call
energized by a
the component that is being powered?
A. circuit board A. The conductor
B. capacitor B. The load
C. centrifugal switch C. The switch
D. dual voltage switch D. The Power Source

92. Uranium atoms are split to create a 97. What are the electrical contacts called?
tremendous amount of heat in a power
A. Brushes
plant.
A. biomass B. Commutators
B. geothermal C. Coils
C. nuclear D. Electromagnets
D. hydroelectric
98. As water flows through a dam, a genera-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
93. Which word best fits this definition:the tor is turned and creates enough electricity
contacts between the armature and the for thousands of homes. This describes
source of power in a motor. A. biofuels
A. electromagnet B. hydroelectric energy
B. ferromagnetic
C. geothermal energy
C. force fie3ld
D. solar energy
D. brushes
99. The stationary portion of an electric motor
94. Select two ways to increase the strength
is called the
of an electromagnet:
A. Stator
A. Decrease the number of coils wrapped
around the iron core. B. Rotor
B. Increase the number of coils wrapped C. Glide
around the iron core.
D. Pinwheel
C. Decrease the size of the iron core.
D. Increase the number of batteries or 100. What causes a magnetic field within mag-
the strength of the battery. netic material?
95. What needs to be present for motion to oc- A. Electrons spinning in random direc-
cur in the motor effect? Tick all that apply tions.
A. Air B. Electrons spinning in the same direc-

tion.
B. Magnetic field
C. No one really knows.
C. Current
D. A conductor D. none of above
E. A turning force 101. The starting device usually used on sin-

gle phase, fractional horsepower motors
96. What is the metal center of an electromag-
requiring low starting torque is the
net called?
A. The current A. potential relay
B. The coil B. current relay

C. The wire C. centrifugal switch
D. The ferromagnetic core D. differential relay

102. Name the effect that causes a coil of B. direction of the magnetic field and the
current-carrying wire in an electric motor current.
to move.

C. direction of the the current only.
A. The electromagnetism effect D. direction of the magnetic field only.
B. The magnetic effect The direction of the force is relative to
both the
C. The motor effect
D. none of above 108. Three phase motors have
A. three start and three run windings for
103. This kind of circuit does not allow electric-
each phase
ity to flow
B. one start and one run winding for each
A. open
phase
B. closed
C. run windings only
C. both
D. a start-switch in each phase circuit
D. neither
109. A magnet is a piece of metal that attracts
104. How can a technician tell if a belt is slip- (choose more than one)
ping? A. iron
A. it is squealing B. plastic
B. you can smell a hot smell C. glass
C. the belt is slapping D. steel
D. any of the above
110. A split-phase motor that has a current re-
105. If a motor hums but does not start, there lay and a start capacitor is called a(n)
is a potential problem motor.
A. with the starting components A. Capacitor Start, Capacitor Run (CSCR)
B. with an open winding B. Capacitor Start, Induction Run (CSIR)
C. with insufficient supply voltage C. Induction Start, Induction Run (ISIR)
D. all of the above D. Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC)
106. What is created when a magnet moves 111. Materials that do not allow charges to
through a coil of wire? flow easily.
A. An electric current A. Conductor
B. An electromagnet B. Insulator
C. A solenoid C. Series
D. A ferromagnet D. Parallel
107. The direction of the force is relative to 112. Which of these is NOT a way to increase
both the the strength of a DC motor
A. direction of the the current and the A. Increase the current

heat produced. B. Increase the coils of wire

C. Increase the magnetic field strength B. Replace the bearings and shaft.
D. Switch to AC current C. Add a capacitor to the circuit for added
torque.
113. A generator is
D. Replace the entire motor.
A. a device that converts electrical ener-
gyinto mechanical energy 118. the red wire signifies what electrical po-
larity?
B. a device that converts mechanical en-
ergy into electrical energy A. on
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. a device that supply energy to another B. off
device C. positive
D. a device that changes heat into cold D. negative
114. A coil of wire that has a soft iron core 119. A machine that converts electrical energy
and that acts as a magnet when an elec- into mechanical energy.
tric current is in the coil is call a(n) A. Generator
A. Ferromagnet B. Motor
B. Electromagnet C. Parallel circuit
C. Permanent magnet D. Ohm
D. Temporary magnet 120. A generator:
115. What do you call the flow of an electric A. Transforms electrical energy to me-
charge through a conductor? chanical energy.
A. Magnetism B. Transforms mechanical energy to elec-
trical energy.
B. Rotation
C. Transforms chemical energy to radiant
C. An electric current
energy.
D. A magnetic wave
D. Transforms radiant energy to chemical
116. Explain electromagnetic induction. energy.
A. When a wire is moved across a mag- 121. Materials that allow charges to flow eas-
netic field, a current is produced. ily.
B. if a wire is moved over and away from A. Conductor
a magnetic field, a current is produced. B. Insulator
C. if a insulator with no current is moved C. Series
across a magnetic field, a current is pro-
D. Parallel
duced.
D. if a wire is moved across a magnetic 122. All of the following use an electric motor,
field, another magnetic field is produced. EXCEPT
A. radio
117. What is the best method to repair a
fractional horsepower motor that has bad B. blender
bearings? C. hair dryer
A. Replace the bearings. D. electricfan

123. In this circuit, the current only has TWO C. The switch
or more paths to follow; so if one light D. The Power Source
goes out, the other will remain lit.

128. What will happen if we make a coil longer
A. Conductor
and wider?
B. Insulator
A. the current will become stronger
C. Series B. the current will become weaker
D. Parallel C. andrew mcgurk said its good
124. The commutator is D. none of above
A. The spring-loaded connections that 129. What is formed when a wire in an elec-
keep contact with the stator tric circuit is wrapped around an iron core
B. the split ring that swaps the coils ends producing a magnetic field?
between positive and negative as the coil A. electromagnet
rotates B. generator
C. the magnets that cause the electro- C. magnet
magnet to attract and repulse
D. electric motor
D. the coil that is also known as the arma-
ture 130. A type of magnet that has tempo-
rary magnetic effect when electric current
125. gravitational potential → kinetic (water) flows through it. This refers to
→ kinetic (turbine)→ electricity is what
A. Electric
kind of power plant?
B. Electrostatic
A. hydroelectric
C. Electronic
B. nuclear
D. Electromagnet
C. coal
131. This conductor allows electricity to travel
D. electricity
through a circuit
126. Which of the situation below shows how A. battery
a basic electric motor works?
B. switch
A. The energy contained in the batteries C. bulb
of the vehicle is transformed into wheel
rotation. D. wire
B. Electrical energy converted into blade 132. When a Capacitor Start, Capacitor Run
rotation in the food processor and cut (CSCR) motor initially starts, what is the
down food. total capacitance acting on the motor? (As-
sume the run capacitor is 5 microfarads
C. Both A and B
and the start capacitor is 20 microfarads,
D. None of these if present.)
127. Within an electric circuit, what do the A. 4 microfarads
electrons flow through? B. 5 microfarads
A. The conductor C. 20 microfarads
B. The load D. 25 microfarads

133. Negative charged particles that create C. It does

electricity. D. Uses Electricity to cause motion (usu-
A. protons ally, rotational motion)
B. neutrons 139. How are electromagnets different from
C. atoms regular magnets?
D. electrons A. Their strength can be changed
134. Which of the following is a device that B. They can be turned on and off
NARAYAN CHANGDER
converts electrical energy into mechanical C. Their polarity can be reversed
energy? ‘ D. All choices are correct
A. electric bicycle
140. What do you call a device that converts
B. microwave oven mechanical movement into electricity?
C. rice cooker A. electric field
D. all of the above B. electric motor
135. Adding a stronger magnet to an electric C. electric generator
motor will have what effect? D. electric plasma
A. The motor will spin slower
141. Which of the following is the CORRECT
B. The motor will spin faster description of the operation of an electric
C. There will be no change motor?
D. The motor will explode A. The electric motor uses electricity.
136. The megger B. The operation is based on the principle

of electromagnetism.
A. is an ammeter that can measure very
small amounts of current C. The motor converts electric energy
into mechanical energy.
B. is a digital voltmeter that measures
very high resistances D. All of the above.
C. measures high voltage direct current 142. Electricity can be transformed into this
D. measures very high resistances type of energy by connecting a circuit to
a fan
137. Which part of a circuit allows electrical A. thermal
current to flow between the battery and
light bulb? B. chemical
A. load C. radiant
B. power source D. mechanical
C. resistor 143. What makes an electromagnet

D. conductor stronger?
A. Increase the number of wire wraps
138. What does a motor do? around the iron core
A. Moves up and down B. decrease the strength of the power
B. Rotates without Electricity source

C. remove the source of current 149. When energized, this becomes an electro-
D. lightning bolts hitting a tree magnet.

144. Which of the following does not describe A. terminals
an Electric motor? B. armature assembly
A. input is electricity C. commutator
B. used in electric car and bike
D. permanent magnet
C. converts electrical to mechanical
D. input is mechanical 150. What applies a force, a push or pull, with-
out actually touching an object?
145. Motors powered by mains electricity use
alternating current (AC). These motors A. Electric Current
use electromagnets rather than permanent B. Chemical Reaction
magnets.
A. True C. Magnetic Field
B. Only two of them D. Power Source

C. False
151. We can change the direction of current by
D. Only one of them in a circuit
146. If the needle of an ohmmeter used to A. by increasing the current
check a capacitor goes to the 0 ohms read-
ing and does not move, this would indicate B. by adding one more battery
that the capacitor is C. rotating the battery 180 degrees
A. Longer D. by increasing the voltage
B. Shorted
C. Mid-range 152. What is the part of a simple d.c. mo-
tor that reverses the direction of current
D. Brand New
through the coil every half-cycle?
147. Which power plant transforms energy A. The armature
in the following way? nuclear→ heat
(steam)→ kinetic (turbine)→ electrical B. The brushes
A. hydroelectric C. The commutator
B. nuclear D. The slip rings
C. coal
D. electric 153. A coil of wire spinning around a magnet
or a magnet spinning around a coil of wire
148. What form of alternative energy uses a can form
dam?
A. a permanent magnet
A. hydroelectric power
B. an iron core
B. geothermal power
C. biomass power C. a turbine
D. solar power D. an electric current

154. Which is NOT a distinguishing feature of 159. How can a technician determine if a run
an electric generator? capacitor has overheated?
A. An electric generator converts me- A. it is swelled
chanical energy into electrical. B. it turned yellow
B. An electric generator converts electri- C. it’s making noise
cal energy into mechanical energy.
D. the capacitance has increased
C. It generates electricity
160. When a Capacitor Start Induction Run
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. It is based on the principle of electro- (CSIR) motor is running and up to speed,
magnetic induction. what is the total capacitance acting on the
155. Start windings are placed with the motor? (Assume the run capacitor is 5 mi-
run windings. crofarads and the start capacitor is 20 mi-
crofarads, if present.)
A. 180 degrees out of phase
A. 4 microfarads
B. in phase
B. 5 microfarads
C. slightly out of phase
C. 20 microfarads
D. in series
D. 25 microfarads
156. Whether a material is magnetic or not de- E.
pends on which of the following?
161. Which is NOT a distinctive attribute of an
A. The material’s weight electrical generator?
B. The material’s mass A. Electric generator turns mechanical
C. The type of material energy into electric energy
D. The material’s density B. Electric generator turns electric power
into mechanical energy.
157. The leads of an ohmmeter using the R x
C. It provides electricity
100 scale are placed on the terminals of
a capacitor and then reversed. The needle D. It is based upon the electromagnetic
does not move. This would indicate that induction theory
the capacitor is
162. Electricity is the flow of
A. Open
A. electron
B. Closed B. protons
C. Open-Closed C. neutrons
D. Closed-Open D. atoms
158. What do you call a huge wheel (associ- 163. What component provides the pathway
ated with generators) that rotates when to carry electricity from component to com-
driven by water, wind, or steam? ponent?
A. Motor A. battery
B. Pipe B. switch
C. Turbine C. wire
D. Magnet D. iron nail

164. How do AC generators work? 169. You can make an electromagnet stronger
A. It uses heat to produce a current by in- by:Having a current in the wire.

duction. A. smaller
B. It uses rotation to produce a heat B. greener
wave by induction. C. larger
C. It uses rotation to produce a current D. water
by induction.
D. It uses rotation to produce a current 170. is compacted matter dug from under
by heat. the Earth’s surface that is used to provide
energy by burning it.
165. A split-phase has a winding and a A. Hydro
winding.
B. Coal
A. start, run
C. Nuclear
B. start, common
D. Geothermal
C. common, run
171. If a condenser fan motor grounds out, it
D. run, common
will usually
E.
A. trip a circuit breaker to shut off the
166. When plugged into an outlet, the clock unit.
lights up to show the time. What kind of B. keep running as the current is only go-
energy transformation is this? ing to ground
A. chemical to light C. run a little faster because the amper-
B. mechanical to chemical age draw will increase
C. electrical to mechanical D. cause the evaporator to ice up
D. electrical to light 172. Most electrical problems with an electric

motor are
167. What component becomes a temporary
A. short circuited windings, closed wind-
magnet when electricity is flowing through
ings, and grounded windings
the circuit?
B. short circuited windings. open wind-
A. iron nail
ings, and grounded windings
B. battery
C. none of the above
C. copper wire
D. all are correct
D. switch
173. A permanent split capacitor (PSC) motor
168. Which word best fits this definition:The that is running and up to speed will have
rotating part of a motor. the start winding
A. system A. energized
B. brush B. de-energized
C. electromagnet C. in series with the run winding
D. armature D. removed from the circuit

174. Which of the following does not describe 179. Ms. J’s students are complaining that it
a generator? is hot in the classroom. She plugs in the
A. converts mechanical to electrical fan and turns it on Which energy trans-
formation occurs?
B. used turbines
A. mechanical to electrical
C. input electrical
B. electrical to mechanical
D. input mechanical
C. chemical to mechanical
NARAYAN CHANGDER
175. Within an electric circuit, what do you call
the component that can break or connect D. electromagnetic to mechanical
the circuit?
180. What do you call a device that transforms
A. The conductor mechanical energy into electrical energy?
B. The load A. electrical charge
C. The switch B. electrical motor
D. The Power Source C. electrical generator
176. A motor will not start when power is ap- D. electrical current
plied. If the belt is removed, the pulley
spun, and power applied, and the motor 181. The brushes in an electric motor
continues to run, the first part to check is A. the split rings that rotate in a motor
the
B. the coil that create the electromag-
A. Starting Switch netic field
B. End Switch
C. Are spring loaded connectors that
C. Wall Switch carry electricity to the rotor by brushing
D. Switch Plate against the commutator as it rotates
D. the magnets surrounding the rotor
177. What word best fits this definition:A de-
vice which converts electrical energy into 182. What do you call a man-made magnet cre-
mechanical energy usually through the ro- ated by spinning electrons through a coiled
tation of an electromagnet in the field of a conductor?
stationary magnet.
A. An electromagnet
A. armature
B. An automagnet
B. system
C. A permanent magnet
C. motor
D. none of above
D. electromagnet
178. True or False:A motor can spin in only one 183. What type of energy transformation oc-
direction. curs in a toaster?
A. true A. chemical to electrical
B. false B. electrical to heat
C. motors do not allow spinning C. sound to chemical
D. none of above D. electrical to solar

4.5 Electromagnetic induction 487
184. If the resistance of the run winding de- 186. What does the second finger represent in
creases, the Flemming’s left hand rule?

A. motor probably will not start A. force
B. motor will draw too much current B. current
while it is running
C. field
C. centrifugal starting switch will not
start the motor D. voltage
D. load on the motor is probably too great 187. In a DC Motor, the coil of the rotor turns
185. The strength of the magnetic field of a into an electromagnet when
electromagnet can be increased by A. the rotor rotates inside the stator
A. Decreasing the number of coils. B. electricity (current) flows through the
B. Increasing the number of coils coil
C. Decreasing the current C. the rotor is turned by the axle
D. Increasing the resistance D. the it sits int the field of the stator
4.5 Electromagnetic induction

1. Which object(s) have electric fields? C. using the opposite pole of the magnet
A. Electric Charges D. using a weaker magnet
B. Magnets 4. Which of the following sentences is not
C. Both Electric Charges & Magnets true?
D. Electric fields do not exist A. Motors convert electrical energy to
mechanical energy
2. Which of the following can be done to in-
crease the induced current in the conduc- B. Generators convert mechanical en-
tor? ergy to electric energy
A. using a larger magnet C. A generator is connected to a battery
B. moving the magnet north pole first in- D. A generator uses slip rings while the
stead of the south pole motor uses split rings
C. moving conductor instead of the mag- E. Both motors and generators have
net brushes
D. using a coil instead of a single ring of 5. An ideal transformer has 12 V input volt-
wire age with 10 turns on the primary (input)
coil, The secondary (output) coil has 100
3. Which change would reverse the direction turns. What is the secondary voltage?
of the electric current generated through
electromagnetic induction? A. 0.12 V
A. moving the magnet slower B. 1.2 V 1.20 V
B. using more loops of wire in the C. 12 V

solenoid D. 120 V

6. A circular conducting loop is placed in a 11. An e.m.f. is induced across a wire when it
magnetic field perpendicular to the plane moves through the magnetic field between
of the loop. As the magnetic field de- the poles ofa magnet.Which electrical de-
creases at a rate of 0.040 T/s, an emf vice operates because of this effect?
of 2.6 mV is induced in the loop. Find the A. a battery
radius of the loop.
B. a cathode-ray tube
A. 0.02 m
C. a generator
B. 0.14 m
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. a motor
C. 4.5 m
D. 0.35 m 12. A wire of length 1.0 m moves with a speed
of 10 m/s perpendicular to a magnetic
E. 2.1 m
field .If the emf induced in the wire is 1
7. A capacitor is charged to a pd of 100V. V.The magnitude of the field is
What is its capacitance if 500 J of energy A. 0.01 T
is stored in it?
B. 0.1 T
A. 1000 F
C. 0.2 T
B. 10 F
D. 0.02T
C. .1 F
13. Electric charges must in order to create
D. .001 F
an observable magnetic field.
8. Which will produce a magnetic field A. exist
A. any wire with or without a current B. be moving
B. a wire formed into a coil C. be stationary
C. a wire carrying a current D. disappear
D. none of above
14. state the energy transformation in the
9. Where is the energy being stored in an in- generator
ductor carrying a steady current? A. Electrical energy to mechanical energy
A. In the electric field of the coil B. Heat energy to Sound energy
B. In the circuit C. Mechanical energy to Electrical energy
C. In the power supply D. none of these
D. In the magnetic field of the coil
15. Electromagnetic induction does not take
10. Which of the following must you have place when
in order to create electromagnetic induc- A. A magnet moves close to a coil
tion?
B. A coil moves close to a magnet
A. Battery & Electromagnet
C. A coil does not move repsect to a mag-
B. Solenoid & Permanent Magnet net
C. Battery & Copper Wire D. The strength of the magnetic field cut-
D. Solenoid & Nail ting through a coil is changed

16. The divergence of which quantity will be 21. The magnetic field energy of a coil having
zero? 500 turns is 25 J. The current in the coil is
5 A. What magnetic flux penetrates each

A. E
coil coil?
B. D
A. 10 mWb
C. H
B. 1 mWb
D. B
C. 20 mWb
17. Which describes the magnetic field pro- D. 2 mWb
duced by the current?
22. The relation of motional emf, when a con-
A. straight lines along the wire to the ductor is move in perpendicular magnetic
right moving the same direction of the cur- field, is:
rent
A. ε = Blv
B. straight lines along the wire to the left
moving the opposite direction of the cur- B. ε = qBl
rent C. ε = BlI
C. circles around the wire that go in at the D. ε = qvB
bottom of the screen and moves in a clock-
wise direction 23. Which changes will cause an increase in the
magnetic field of a solenoid? Check all that
D. none of above apply.
18. What do you need to build a working elec- A. using more wire loops
tric motor? B. using fewer wire loops
A. An extremely large magnet C. using a larger current
B. Fuel that can be burned D. using a smaller current
C. A wire that’s at least 5 meters long E. decreasing the spacing between loops
D. A source of electricity 24. In a closed conductive circuit contained in
an alternating magnetic field, an induction
19. What is a possible power source of a gen-
current arises, the magnetic field of which
erator?
is directed
A. Fan
A. just like an external magnetic field;
B. Plug
B. opposite to the outer field;
C. Battery
C. perpendicular to the outer field;
D. none of above D. so as to counteract changes in the ex-
ternal magnetic field.
20. The SI units of induced emf is
A. Ohm 25. Tonya is modeling the discovery of elec-
tromagnetic induction. Which procedure
B. Volt
should she use?
C. Henry
A. moving a magnet into a coil of wire in
D. Tesla a closed circuit

B. moving a magnet into a coil of wire in 31. Which of the following will induce a cur-
an open circuit rent in aloop of wire in a uniform magnetic
C. bringing a compass near a wire that field?
has no electric current A. Rotating the loop about an axis parallel
D. none of above tothe field
B. decreasing the strength of the field
26. The Faraday’s law states about which type
of EMF? C. Moving the loop within the field
NARAYAN CHANGDER
A. Transformer EMF D. All of the above
B. Back EMF 32. Which change will cause an increase in elec-
C. Generator EMF tric current produced through electromag-
netic induction?
D. Secondary EMF
A. using more wire loops in the solenoid
27. Determine the inductance of the coil if a
B. using the opposite pole of the magnet
5 V self-induction EMF occurs at a rate of
change of current of 10 A / s. C. using a weaker magnet
A. 5 H D. moving the solenoid slower
B. 0, 5 H 33. The phenomenon due to which there is an
C. 2 H induced current in one coil due to the cur-
rent in a neighboring coil is?
D. 0, 2 H
A. Mutual induction
28. A type of magnet that has temporary mag-
B. Steady current
netic effect when electric current flows
through it.This refer to C. Electromagnetism
A. Electric D. Self induction
B. Electronic 34. A solenoid with 200 turns and a cross-
C. Electrostatic sectional area of 60 cm2 has a magnetic
field of 0.60 T along its axis. If the field
D. Electromagnet
is confined within the solenoid and changes
29. Which of the following increases frequency at a rate of 0.20 T/s, the magnitude of the
of alternating induced current? induced potential difference in the solenoid
will be
A. increasing number of turns on the coil
B. using a stronger magnet A. 0.004V
C. rotating the coil faster B. 0.012V
D. increase area of the coil C. 0.12V

D. 0.24V
30. The loudspeaker is an application of the
A. Magnetic field 35. A coil having 500 square loops, each of
side 10 cm, is placed normal to a magnetic
B. Induced current field which is increasing at the rate of 1.0T
C. Magnetic force per s.The induced emf is
D. Electric charge A. 0.1 V

B. 0.5 V 41. If a secondary coil has 40 turns, and, a

C. 1 V primary coil with 20 turns is charged with
50 V of potential difference, then poten-

D. 5 V tial difference in secondary coil would be
36. What two forces are required for electric A. 50 V in secondary coil
generators & electric motors to work? B. 25 V in secondary coil
A. Kinetic & Magnetic C. 60 V in secondary coil
B. Magnetic & Electrical D. 100 V in secondary coil
C. Kinetic & Thermal
42. Lenz’s Law on electromagnetic induction is
D. Thermal & Magnetic a direct result of the conservation of
37. If the magnetic flux through the circuit A. mass
through the circuit is increasing, then in- B. charge
duced emf acts to the magnetic flux
C. energy
A. Increase
D. momentum
B. Decrease
43. How would you reverse the direction of
C. Zero the current flowing through the coil in Fara-
D. None of these day’s experiment?
38. if an inductor has N turns and is magnetic A. Use a magnet of opposite polarity
flux through its each turn when current I B. Move the magnet through the coil
is flowing, then self-inductance L is given faster
by formula: C. Reverse the magnet’s direction
I
A. Nϕ D. Use a larger magnet
B. N ϕ
Nϕ
44. What is the amount of current in an RC cir-
C. I cuit with a time constant of 2 s and a max
D. N ϕ I current of 5 A after .4 seconds?
A. 5 A
39. Electro motive force induced by motion of
conductor across magnetic field is called B. 4 A
A. EMF C. 3 A
B. motional EMF D. 2 A
C. rotational EMF 45. A transformer has 100 turns in the pri-
D. static EMF mary coil and 25 turns in the secondary
coil. When a 120 V is applied to the pri-
40. Vp x Ip = Vs x IsVp = 33kV, Ip = 2A, Vs mary coil, what is the voltage in the sec-
= 230V, Is =? A ondary coil?
A. 28.7V A. 480V
B. 3.48V B. 30V
C. 0.287V C. 20V
D. 287V D. 450V

46. SI unit of Magnetic flux is C. magnet in the generator

A. Waber D. plug where the generator is connected
B. Weber to the wall
C. Watt 52. The phenomenon of inducing voltage by

D. Tesla changing the magnetic field around a con-
ductor is called
47. The process of creating a current in a circuit A. generated voltage
by changing a magnetic field
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. Faraday’s induction
A. electric generator
C. transformer induction
B. electric motor
D. electromagnetic induction
C. electromagnetic induction
D. magnet 53. Which of Maxwell’s Equations describes a
changing electric field can create a mag-
48. Electromagnetic induction is the creation of netic field
a voltage when an electrical conductor is
A. Gauss’ Law
passed through a field.
B. Ampere-Maxwell law
A. magnetic
C. Faraday’s Law
B. Electric
D. Gauss’ Law for Magnetism
C. Gravitational
D. none of above 54. What is the relationship between electric-
ity and magnetism? Choose the best an-
49. Why is magnetic induction important? swer.
A. Electromagnets are very versatile A. Electricity is a form of magnetism.
B. Every electric motor uses induction B. Magnetism is a form of electricity.
C. Because it’s an easy way to produce C. They are two forms of the same basic
electricity force.
D. All of the above D. They are not closely related at all.
50. The voltage across the primary coil of a 55. What is used to measure electric current?
transformer that has 75 turns on it is
A. Doppler Radar
100V. What is the voltage across the sec-
ondary coil, which has 15 turns on it? B. Ruler
A. 500 V C. Galvanometer
B. 25 V D. Beaker
C. 125 V 56. Thrust a magnet into a coil of wire. While
D. 20 V the magnet is being moved toward the coil
51. A generator is used to light a bulb. Energy A. becomes an electromagnet

for lighting the bulb actually comes from a B. has a current in it
A. coil or wire C. both of these
B. mechanical intput to the generator D. neither of these

57. A coil of area 30 cm2 and 50 turns is B. current carrying conductors

placed perpendicular to the magnetic field C. induced emf
of flux density 0.7 T. What is the magnetic

flux linked with the coil? D. magnetic field
A. 0.021 Wb 63. Which of the following factors DOES NOT
B. 0.105 Wb affect the self inductance of a coil?
C. 1050 Wb A. The length of the coil
D. 1500 Wb B. The current flows in the coil
C. The number of turn of the coil
58. When a loop of wire is moved across a
magnetic field, the current is produced in D. The cross sectional area of the coil
it is called
64. Electromagnetic induction is caused by the
A. Induced current change in near a coil of wire.
B. Photo electric current A. surface area
C. Alternating current B. magnetic poles
D. Direct current C. magnetic field strength (magnetic flux)
59. According to Faraday’s law, the induced
voltage is proportional to D. none of above
A. the product of its number of loops 65. Which factors affect electromagnetic induc-
B. the cross-sectional area of each loop tion? (select ALL that apply)
C. the rate at which the magnetic field A. Strength of magnet
changes within loops B. The area of the coil
D. all three are correct
C. The speed of movement
60. Electromagnetic induction is change in D. Number of turns of coil
A. surface area E. The position of poles
B. magnetic poles
66. How can the size of the induced voltage
C. magnetic flux be increased? (choose as many as are cor-
D. none of above rect)
A. Increase the speed of the movement
61. How could you increase the voltage in elec-
tromagnetic induction? B. Increase the number of coils
A. Increase the iron core C. Increase the current
B. use a larger magnet D. Use a bigger magnet
C. Use a larger battery E. Use a stronger magnet
D. Flip the magnet around 67. Faraday’s Law states that the induced emf
62. Number of magnetic field line passes is proportional to Hide answers
through an area is the definition for A. the current
A. magnetic flux B. the cross sectional area of the coil

C. the rate of change in the flux of the coil 73. A device that converts electrical energy
into mechanical energy
D. none of above A. electromagnet
B. electromagnetic induction
68. The greater the amount of loops you have
C. electric motor
A. The less voltage D. electromagnetism
NARAYAN CHANGDER
B. The voltage stays the same 74. A device that is used to measure the
amount of current in a wire is called a
C. The greater the voltage
A. an electric current meter
D. There is no change
B. radiometer
69. Will a transformer work with direct cur- C. galvanometer
rent (d.c.) or alternating current (a.c.)?
D. speedometer
A. a.c. only
75. A(n) converts electricity into mag-
B. d.c. only netism, and back to electricity.
C. Both a.c. and d.c. A. electric transformer
D. none of above B. electric generator
C. electromagnet
70. Which object(s) produce magnetic fields?
D. electric motor
A. Electric Charges
B. Magnets 76. Square coil of side 16 cm having 200 turns
rotating in magnetic field of 0.05 T with
C. Both moving Electric Charges & Mag- peak EMF of 12 V will produce angular ve-
nets locity of
D. Magnetic fields do not exist A. 47 rad s-1
71. Self-induced EMF is sometimes also known B. 49 rad s-1

as C. 42 rad s-1
A. induced EMF D. 48 rad s-1
B. deduce EMF 77. The north pole of a bar magnet is mov-
C. back EMF ing towards the coil along the axis pass-
ing through the centre of coil and perpen-
D. both a and b dicular to the plane of coil. The direction
of induced current in the coil when viewed
72. In generators, is the input and is from the opposite direction of the motion
the output. of the magnet is
A. Kinetic; Potential A. Clockwise
B. Electric; Mechanical B. Anticlockwise
C. Potential; Kinetic C. No current in the coil
D. Mechanical; Electric D. Data insufficient

78. AC stands for current. C. By moving a coil towards stationary

A. alternating magnet

D. emf cannot be induced
B. alternative
C. alliterative 84. What causes magnetism?
D. none of above A. the sun
B. moving neutrons
79. does not use electromagnetic induction
C. moving charges
A. Cooktop Stoves
D. friction
B. Clocks
85. A magnet can move in a coil of wire to pro-
C. Traffic Light Sensors
duce electricity in which system?
D. ATM cards
A. Generator
80. The turn ratio (r) for a step-up transformer B. Motor
is C. Magnet
A. r = 0 D. Transformer
B. r > 1
86. A 4.0 m long cord is lying perpendicular
C. r < 1 to Earth’s magnetic field of 5.6X10-5 T. If
D. r = 1 the cord is carrying a current of 11.0 A,
what magnetic force is acting on the cord?
81. Electric current flowing through a wire pro-
A. 2.03X10-5 N
duces
B. 0.002464 N
A. static electricity
C. 2.46X107 N
B. an open circuit
D. 7.86X105 N
C. a permanent magnet
87. Faraday’s Law is used to
D. a magnetic field
A. deduce the direction of the induced
82. What is meant by a step down trans- current.
former?
B. deduce the magnitude of the induced
A. One where the output voltage is the e.m.f.
same as the input voltage. C. explain how an induced e.m.f. is pro-
B. One where the output voltage is larger duced.
than the input voltage. D. explain how a changing magnetic field
C. One where the output voltage is is produced.
smaller than the input voltage.
88. What would happen if you broke a bar
D. none of above magnet into 8 pieces?
83. Identify the phenominon by which an in- A. You would have 8 half magnets
duced emf can be generated: B. You would have 4 complete magnets
A. By moving magnet towards a coil C. You would have 8 complete magnets
B. By rotating a coil in a magnetic field D. They wouldn’t be magnets anymore

89. An electric motor changes electrical energy 95. What can electromagnets do that regular
to energy. magnets can’t?
A. mechanical A. Switch their magnetic fields
B. chemical B. Explode
C. potential C. Be turned off
D. electrical D. They are both the same in every way
96. If the magnetic flux density at the end of
NARAYAN CHANGDER
90. The emf induced by motion of conductor
across magnetic field is called a long straight solenoid is B, the magnetic
A. Potential Difference flux density at the centre in the solenoid
is
B. Electric potential
A. 0
C. Variable emf
B. 1/2 B
D. Motional emf
C. 1/4 B
91. The Flemming’s right-hand rule is used D. 2B
when
97. What repels the magnet in our hand when
A. motion causes current
testing electromagnetic induction?
B. current causes motion
A. an electromagnet
C. current causes potential difference
B. a current
D. motion causes magnetic field
C. a magnetic field
92. Which of the following is NOT a component D. a boo boo on our finger
of a basic motor?
98. The proces s of generating the current in a
A. A permanent magnet
conductor is called as
B. A rotating electromagnet
A. Electro motive force
C. A heat source
B. Electromagnetic induction
D. A power supply
C. generator energy conversion
93. The point form of Ampere law is given by D. induced voltage
A. Curl(B) = I
99. A device that transforms mechanical en-
B. Curl(D) = J ergy to electrical energy is a
C. Curl(V) = I A. generator
D. Curl(H) = J B. motor
94. Which item does NOT use an electromag- C. transformer
net. D. magnet
A. A Ferris wheel 100. Change of current of 1 A s-1 causes EMF
B. A doorbell of 1 V to be equal to
C. A galvonometer A. 1 H
D. A handheld compass B. 1 V m-1

C. 1 A C. Both (a) and (b)

D. 1 J D. Neither (a) nor (b)

101. What might happen if transformers
didn’t exist? 106. When an electric current runs through a
wire, a magnetic field is induced
A. The electricity in your house might
have an extremely high voltage A. Around the wire
B. Electricity could not be distributed B. Parallel to the wire
through power lines to people’s homes
C. Under the wire
C. Electricity could not be created at
power plants D. through the wire
D. The direction of the electric current in
your home might switch back and forth 107. What is the starting energy for a motor?
102. Field Induction means A. Electrical

A. Cows use magnets B. Mechanical
B. Electric and Magnetic Fields are in- C. Chemical
duced
C. Magnetic Fields are induced D. Potential
D. Electric fields are induced

108. Which best describes the ferromagnetic
103. If a transformer increases AC voltage, it material?
will also increase A. The magnetic poles of the atoms point
A. power in different directions.
B. energy B. The magnetic poles of its atoms point
C. megnetic field strength in the same direction.
D. none of the above C. The magnetic poles of its atoms are
grouped in domains that point in different
104. Faraday’s Law states that the induced
directions.
emf is proportional to
A. the current D. none of above
B. the cross sectional area of the coil
109. What does a moving charged particle ex-
C. the rate of change in the flux of the coil perience if it moves through a static mag-
netic field?
D. none of above
A. nothing
105. A rectangular loop and a circular loop are
B. an acceleration in the current direction
moving out of a uniform magnetic field re-
gion. In which loop do you expect the in- C. a deflection that is parallel to the mag-
duced emf to be constant netic field
A. Circular loop D. a deflection that is perpendicular to
B. Rectangular loop both the magnetic field and the current

110. A loop of area 0.45 m2 is in a uniform 115. Which of Maxwell’s Equations describes
0.03 T magnetic field. If the flux through an electric field can be created by a chang-
the loop is 1.1 x 10-2 Wb, what angle ing magnetic field?
does the plane of the loop make with the
A. Gauss’ Law
magnetic field?
B. Ampere’s Law
A. 25 degrees
C. Faraday’s Law
B. 35 degrees
D. Gauss’ Law for Magnetism
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 65 degrees
D. 55 degrees 116. The magnetic flux through an area is:
E. 90 degrees A. ϕ = B × A
B. ϕ = B · A
111. Which field can accelerate an electron,
but never change its speed? C. ϕ = A × B
A. Electric field D. There is no magnetic flux through an
area
B. magnetic field
C. both of these 117. A(n) electric current will create a
changing magnetic field.
D. neither of these
A. existing
112. Faraday’s Law states that the magnitude
of the induced e.m.f. is to the rate of B. direct
change of magnetic flux linkage with the C. alternating
solenoid.
D. stable
A. equal
118. A is an electrical device that converts
B. inversely proportional
AC electricity from one voltage level to an-
C. directly proportional other
D. none of above A. transformer
113. AC generators convert energy to B. primary coil

energy. C. secondary coil
A. pressure/force D. center tap
B. mechanical/electrical
119. A transformer has 35 V applied to its pri-
C. chemical/electrical mary induces 105 volts in its secondary.
D. kinetic/relative The secondary is composed of 99 turns.
What is the number of turns in the pri-
114. The Delta Symbol means mary?
A. Multiply A. 11 turns
B. Frat Party B. 22 turns
C. Change C. 33 turns
D. Divide D. 44 turns

120. Vp x Ip = Vs x IsVp =? , Ip = 2A, Vs = 125. A generator is used to light a bulb. En-

200V, Is = 0.1A ergy for lighting the bulb actually comes
from a

A. 0.1V
B. 10V A. coil or wire
C. 100V B. mechanical input to the generator
D. 40V C. magnet in the generator

D. plug where the generator is connected
121. A magnetic field of 5 mT threads a coil to the wall
with 10 turns and an area of 0.1 m2. The
field collapses to 0 mT in 0.20 s.Determine 126. Who discovered electromagnetic induc-
the EMF produced. tion?
A. 0.0025 V A. Hans Christian Orsted
B. 0.25 V B. Michael Faraday
C. 25 V C. James Maxwell
D. 0.025 V D. Heinrich Hertz
122. If velocity of a conductor moving through
127. A coil of resistance 400 ohm is placed
a magnetic field B is made zero, then mo-
in a magnetic field. If the magnetic flux
tional emf is:
linked with the coil varies with time (t) as
A. −Blv ϕ = 50t 2 + 4 . Current through coil at 2s
B. − Blv is
C. zero A. 0.1 A
D. − Blv B. 0.5 A
C. 5 A
123. Which of the devices is not based on elec-
tromagnetic induction? D. 1.5 A
A. Generator 128. If a transformer reduces voltage, it is

B. electrodynamic microphone called a transformer.
C. transformer A. step left
D. electric motor B. step right
C. step up
124. Which of Maxwell’s Equations allows
you to figure out an equation for the D. step down
electric field created by a distribution of
charge? 129. In physics, to “induce” something is to:
A. Gauss’ Law A. Make it more powerful
B. Gauss’ Law for Magnetism B. Create it
C. Faraday’s Law C. Turn it into something else
D. Ampere’s Law D. Reverse its direction

130. A coil in a magnetic field encloses a flux 135. An inductor

of 0.4 Wb when the angle between the A. stores energy in electric field
normal to the coil and the direction of the
B. Provides a specific value of inductance
magnetic field is 60◦ . What flux would go
through the coil if the angle were changed C. controls the current
to 15◦ ? D. Stores energy in a magnetic field
A. 0.61 Wb 136. The mutual inductance of a no pair of coil
B. 0.38 Wb depends on
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 0.52 Wb A. Medium
B. Size & shape
D. 0.77 Wb
C. Proximity of the coils
E. 0.98 Wb
D. All
131. emf is induced due to change in: 137. A device that transforms electrical en-
A. Charge ergy to mechanical energy is a
B. Current A. generator
C. Magnetic Flux B. motor

C. transformer
D. Electric Flux
D. magnet
132. Creating magnetism from electricity is
138. How does the function of a generator re-
called
late to the function of a motor?
A. magnetic fields A. They are the same
B. an electric motor B. They are opposites
C. an electromagnetic induction C. They both work the same way
D. an electromagnet D. They are not related at all
139. Step-up transformers
133. What is one way to increase the current
in a wire? A. improve the efficiency of the national
grid
A. Decrease the number of coils
B. reduce the voltage to a safe level for
B. Increase the number of coils the home
C. Move the magnet slower C. both
D. Take the wire off of the magnet D. none of above
134. Find the Maxwell equation derived from 140. Magnetic flux will be maximum if the an-
Faraday’s law. gle between magnetic field strength and
vector area is:
A. Div(H) = J
A. 0◦
B. Div(D) = I B. 60◦
C. Curl(E) =-dB/dt C. 90◦
D. Curl(B) =-dH/dt D. 180◦

141. A magnet is moved in and out of a coil of B. in the opposite direction

wire connected to a high-resistance volt-
C. clockwise
meter. If the number of coils doubles, the

induced voltage D. counterclockwise
A. quadruples 147. If a magnet is pushed into a coil, volt-
B. doubles age is induced across the coil. If the same
C. is the same magnet is pushed into a coil with twice the
number of loops,
D. halves
A. one-half as much voltage is induced.
142. Which object(s) have magnetic fields?
B. the same voltage is induced.
A. Electric Charges
C. twice as much voltage is induced.
B. Magnets
D. four times as much voltage is induced.
C. Both Electric Charges & Magnets
D. Magnetic fields do not exist 148. A(n) converts magnetism into electric-
ity.
143. What benefit is gained by the addition of
A. electric transformer
the iron core in an electromagnet?
A. It makes a strong magnet weaker B. electric generator
B. It makes a weak magnet stronger C. electromagnet

C. There is no benefit at all D. electric motor
D. It lets currents interact with each 149. As electrons move, they create
other
A. electromagnetism
144. What is the minimum number diodes re-
B. ferromagnetism
quired to convert and alternating current
into a direct current? C. magnetic field
A. 1 D. auroras
B. 2
150. Self inductance of solenoid is:
C. 4
A. L = µ0 nAl
D. 6
B. L = µ0 N 2 Al
145. Electromagnetic induction is due to
C. L = µ0 n2 Al
change in
D. L = µ0 NAl
A. surface area
B. magnetic poles 151. The induction coil works on the principle
C. magnetic flux of
D. electric flux A. self-induction

B. mutual induction
146. When current increases in a coil, the in-
duced current will be C. Ampere’s rule
A. in the same direction D. Fleming’s right hand rule

152. Electromagnetic induction occurs in a coil 158. What is inside a toy car that turns the
when there is a change in wheels?
A. electric field intensity in the coil. A. generator
B. magnetic field intensity in the coil. B. electric motor
C. voltage in the coil. C. electromagnet
D. the coil’s polarity. D. none of above
159. Which rule is used to find the direction of
NARAYAN CHANGDER
153. Passing a current through a solenoid will
produce magnetic field around a straight conductor
A. A magnetic field A. Flemming left hand rule
B. An electric field B. Lenz law
C. A current field C. Flemmings right hand rule
D. Nothing is produced D. Right hand thumb rule
154. A transformer actually transforms 160. AC generators have
A. voltage A. 2 slip rings
B. magnetic field lines B. 1 slip ring

C. 3 slip rings
C. generators into motors
D. 4 slip rings
D. none of above
161. No EMF is induced when?
155. Select the statements that apply to an
generator. A. When the wire is not moving
A. Creates direct current B. When the wire is parallel to magnetic
field direction
B. Creates alternating current
C. When no lines are cut by the wire
C. Has slip rings and brushes
D. all of the above
D. Has a split-ring commutator
162. An electric field is induced in any region
156. If you were to make a motor stronger, of space where a magnetic field is chang-
what should you do? ing with time.
A. Decrease the voltage A. True
B. Increase the voltage B. False
C. Disconnect the wires from the batter- C. Not enough information given
ies
D. none of above
D. Use a wooden rod instead of a wire
163. Large buildings typically have to cre-
157. A(n) converts electricity into motion. ate Electricity in case the power goes out.
A. electric transformer A. Generators
B. electric generator B. Electromagnets
C. electromagnet C. Solenoids
D. electric motor D. none of above

164. An electromagnetic wave consists of an B. Electromagnetic radiation

electric field vibrating at right angles to a
C. Electromagnetic conduction
magnetic field.

D. Radio waves
A. True
B. False 170. The mutual induction between two coils
C. Not enough information given. depends upon:
D. none of above A. area of the coils

B. distance between the coils
165. When do we have self induction?
C. number of turns
A. When the magnet moves into the coil
D. Does not depends on anything
B. When the coil moves into the magnet
C. When a constant current passes 171. Changing current in a coil produces e.m.f
through the coil in another, this phenomenon is known as
D. When a changing current passes A. e.m.f
through the coil
B. Self-induction
166. The carbon brushes in an electric motor C. Induced e.m.f
are used for
D. Mutual induction
A. Clean the dust
B. Reduce friction 172. Voltage can be induced in a wire by
C. Have always the same direction for A. moving the wire near a magnet.
the force B. moving a magnet near the wire.
D. Have always the same direction of ro- C. changing the current in a nearby wire.
tation
D. all of these
167. The S.I. unit of magnetic flux is
173. A(n) converts electricity into mag-
A. Tesla
netism.
B. Weber
A. electric transformer
C. Joule
B. electric generator
D. Newton
C. electromagnet
168. SI unit for self inductance, L is
D. electric motor
A. Tesla(T)
B. Weber(Wb) 174. Click all the factors affecting electromag-
netic induction
C. Henry(H)
A. Strength of magnet
D. Farad (F)
B. The area of the coil
169. What is it called when you can use a mag-
C. The speed of movement
netic field to create an electric current in a
wire? D. Number of turns of coil
A. Electromagnetic induction E. The position of poles

175. According to Lenz’s law the direction of B. A magnet is moved out of a coil of wire.
an induced current in a conductor will be C. A magnet is moved up and down out-
that which tends to produce which of the side a coil of wire.
following effects?
D. A magnet is held stationary inside the
A. enhance the effect which produces it coil of wire.
B. produce a greater heating effect
181. As the current decreases in the coil from
C. produce the greatest voltage
20 A to 10 A for 0.1 s, a self-induction of
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. oppose the effect which produces it 200 V. occurs in it. What magnetic flux
penetrates the coil at the instant when 15
176. The generation of a magnetic field by an
A current flows through it?
electric current is
A. 450 Wb
A. electromagnetism
B. 30 Wb
B. electricity
C. 45 Wb
C. solenoid
D. 22.5 Wb
D. none of above
177. At what speed would a 0.20-m length of 182. A 10-turn ideal solenoid has an induc-
wire have to move across a 2.5-T magnetic tance of 3.5 mH. When the solenoid car-
field to induce an EMF of 10 V? ries a current of 2.0 A the magnetic flux
through each turn is:
A. 20 m/s
A. 0 Wb
B. 0.2 m/s
B. 3.5 x 10-4 Wb
C. 5m/s
C. 7.0 x 10-4 Wb
D. none of above
D. 7.0 x 10-3 Wb
178. What does the index finger show you in
the Flemming’s right-hand rule? 183. A square of side ‘a’ metre lies in the
YZ plane in a region, where the magnetic
A. Direction of current field is given by B = Bo (3i + 3 j − 4k) T ,
B. Motion of wire where Bo is constant. The magnitude of
C. Direction of electric field flux passing through the square is
D. Direction of magnetic field A. 2Bo a2 W b
B. 3Bo a2 W b
179. Passing a current through a solenoid will
produce C. 4Bo a2 W b
A. a magnetic field D. −4Bo a2 W b
B. an electric field 184. Which of the following increases fre-
C. a current field quency of AC?
D. nothing is produced A. increasing number of turns on the coil
180. In which of these situation will the cur- B. using a stronger magnet
rent in a coil of wire be zero. C. rotating the coil faster
A. A magnet is moved into a coil of wire. D. increase area of the coil

185. Which of the following best describes 190. Which pairs of materials could be used to
EMF? create electromagnetic induction?

A. can be thought of as the difference be- A. Coiled wire, a magnet
tween two electrical states in an electric
field B. Coiled wire, a battery
B. the potential difference generated by C. A magnet, a battery
one or more cells or a changing magnetic
field D. None of the above
C. depends on the magnitude and resis-
tance of the current 191. “A current carrying coil placed in mag-
netic field experiences force”, device that
D. force that causes an electric charge to proves this law is
flow
A. DC generator
186. An alternating current has a peak value
of 50A. What is the rms value of this cur- B. DC motor
rent?
C. AC generator
A. 50A
D. both a and b
B. 35A
C. 25A 192. Magnetic flux involves and
D. 70A
A. magnetic field and surface area
187. A coil carries a current in a magnetic field.
The coil experiences a turning effect.Which B. induction and surface area
device uses this effect? C. magnetic field and induction
A. a d.c. motor
D. electromagnetic induction and surface
B. an electromagnet area
C. a relay
D. a transformer 193. Electromagnetic induction occurs in a coil
when there is a change in
188. In electromagnetic induction, what is be-
ing created? A. electric field intensity in the coil.
A. Magnetism B. magnetic field intensity in the coil.
B. Electrical energy C. voltage in the coil.
C. Mechanical energy
D. the coil’s polarity.
D. Chemical energy
189. Lenz’s law of electromagnetic induction is 194. Which device uses slip rings?
as per law of conservation of
A. a cathode-ray tube
A. Energy
B. a d.c. generator
B. Angular Momentum
C. Charge C. an a.c. generator
D. EMF D. a dc motor

195. A 60 turn square coil of area 0.042 m2 200. rule can be used to determine the di-
and a 40 turn circular coil are both placed rection of the induced current produced.
perpendicular to the same magnetic field.
The voltage induced in each of the coils is A. Fleming’s Left Hand Rule
the same. What is the area of the circular B. Fleming’s Right Hand Rule
coil?
C. Right Hand Grip Rule
A. 0.028 m2
B. 0.063 m2 D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. 0.083 m2
201. The voltage across the input terminals of
D. 0.034 m2
a transformer is 110 V. The primary coil
E. 0.075 m2 has 50 turns and the secondary coil has
196. Which is the device in DC Generators that 120 turns. The output voltage of the trans-
converts AC current into DC current former is
A. brushes A. 46 V
B. commutator B. 55 V
C. stator
C. 180 V
D. armature
D. 264 V
197. What is the time constant for a 50 mF ca-
pacitor connected to a 5 Kilo Ohm resistor.
202. In which of the following situations is an
A. 250 s e.m.f. induced in a conductor?
B. 10 s
A. The conductor is connected to a bat-
C. 100 s tery.
D. 25 s
B. The conductor is connected to a motor.
198. What is the main difference between elec-
tric charges and magnetic poles? C. The conductor moves through the air.
A. electric charges can be isolated, mag- D. The conductor is moved in a magnetic

netic poles cannot be isolated field.
B. electric charges cannot be isolated,
magnetic poles can be isolated 203. Julia produces a 2 mA current by mov-
C. electric charges both attract and repel, ing the south pole of a bar magnet into a
magnetic poles only attract solenoid. The solenoid contains 150 loops
of wire. Which change should Julia make
D. electric charges both attract and repel, to generate a larger current?
magnetic poles only repel
A. moving the magnet slower
199. Lenz’s law deals with:
A. Magnitude of emf B. using more loops of wire in the coil
B. Direction of emf C. using the north pole of the magnet
C. Resistance D. setting the magnet down in the
D. Direction of induced current solenoid

204. the primary source is connected to a C. electromagnetic induction occurs

and the secondary source is connected to D. all of these
a

A. galvanometer; power source 210. The net magnetic flux through any closed
surface, kept in a magnetic field is
B. galvanometer; transformer
A. zero
C. power source; galvanometer µo
B. 4π
D. transformer; galvanometer µo m
C. 4π
µo
205. You’re going camping, and you need a D. 4π m
source of electric current. So, you buy a
gasoline-powered: 211. A device consisting of a coil that is me-
chanically rotated in a stationary magnetic
A. Motor field is called
B. Generator A. a transformer
C. Inducer B. a motor
D. Electromagnet C. a generator
206. EMF can be induced in a wire by D. a dipole
A. moving the wire near a magnet. 212. Creating electricity from magnetism is
B. moving a magnet near the wire. called
C. changing the current in a nearby wire. A. magnetic fields
D. all of these B. an electric motor

C. electromagnetic induction
207. power = X
D. an electromagnet
A. resistance ; voltage
213. Provide the correct statements.1. EMF
B. voltage ; current
self-induction occurs when passing
C. current ; resistance through a DC coil;2. Self-induction EMF
D. resistance ; energy transformed occurs when passing through an AC coil;3.
EMF self-induction counteracts current
208. The direction of induced current is deter- flow;4. EMF self-induction counteracts
mine by using current changes.
A. Fleming’s Left Hand Rule A. 2 & 3;
B. Right Hand Rule B. 2 & 4;
C. Right Hand Grip Rule C. 1 & 3
D. none of above D. 1 & 4
209. When there is a change in the magnetic 214. In electromagnetic induction

field in a closed loop of wire A. magnetism causes electricity
A. a voltage is induced in the wire B. electricity causes magnetism
B. current is made to flow in the loop of C. electricity and magnetism cancel each
wire other out

D. a strong magnet creates a permanent C. energy

magnet D. power
215. What is produced from a changing electric 220. Why is a galvanometer used in an elec-
field? tromagnetic induction setup?
A. an electric field directed perpendicu- A. to help the current to flow across the
larly to the changing field conductor
B. a magnetic flux B. to detect the flow of charges
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. a magnetic field directed perpendicu-
C. to provide charges in the conductor
larly to the changing field
D. to maintain the amount of current in
D. lightning
the conductor
E. an electric field directed parallel to the
changing field 221. All of the following devices are examples
of generators EXCEPT:
216. One Tesla is also equal to
A. Turbine
A. W b m−2
B. Stationary Bike
B. W b m2
C. Air Conditioner
C. W b m
D. Wind mill
D. Has no unit
222. Faraday’s Law states that the induced
217. A metallic pendulum oscillating in a uni- emf is proportional to
form magnetic field directed perpendicular
A. the current
to the plane of oscillation
B. the cross sectional area of the coil
A. slows down
C. the rate of change in the flux of the coil
B. becomes faster
C. remains unaffected
D. none of above
D. oscillates with a changing frequency
223. The total number of magnetic field lines
218. Suppose the number of turns in a coil be passing through an area is termed as?
tripled, the value of magnetic flux linked
A. Voltage
with it
B. EMF
A. remains unchanged
C. Magnetic flux
B. becomes 1/3
D. Magnetic flux density
C. is tripled
D. none of these 224. The Lenz law is in accordance with the
law of conservation of
219. The d.c generator and a.c generator make
use of electromagnetic induction to pro- A. Charge
duce B. Mass
A. force C. Momentum
B. electricity D. Energy

225. An inductor is a circuit element that can D. to produce a uniform radial field in the
store energy in two coils

A. Magnetic field 230. Hystersis loss can be minimised by
B. Electric flux A. Steel with high silicon content
C. Electric field B. Thick wire
D. None C. Shell type core
226. A device that uses two coils around an D. All

iron core to change the voltage across a 231. When there is a magnetic flux in a closed
circuit is called a loop of wire, which one of these does NOT
A. voltmeter happen?
B. diode A. the poles of the magnet change
C. transformer B. electromagnetic induction occurs
D. generator C. a voltage is induced in the wire

D. electric current is made to flow in the
227. A square coil, enclosing an area with loop of wire
sides 5.0 cm long, is wrapped with 1500
turns of wire. A uniform magnetic field 232. Which of these does the galvanometer
perpendicular to its plane is turned on and measure?
increases to 0.85 T during an interval of A. Resistance of the device
3.0 s. What average voltage is induced in B. Voltage, current, Resistance and Con-
the coil? tinuity in a circuit
A. 0.25 V C. Voltage across the load
B. 1.24 V D. Current in the circuit
C. 0.97 V E. Current with the direction in the circuit
D. 1.06 V 233. If the magnetic flux linked with a coil
E. 0.55 V varies at the rate of 1Wb/ minute, the
emf induced is
228. The unit of magnetic flux is the
A. 1 V
A. Henry
B. 1/60 V
B. Tesla
C. 60 V
C. Faraday D. None
D. Weber
234. “An induced current always flow in a di-
229. The most important function of the soft rection that opposes the change in mag-
iron core in a typical transformer is netic flux that causes it”. this is the state-
ment for?
A. to lose heat generated by the two coils
A. Fleming’s left hand rule
B. to improve the flux linkage between
the primary coil and the secondary coil B. Fleming’s right hand rule
C. to suppress the back e.m.f. produced C. Faraday’s law
in the secondary coil D. Lenz’s law

235. Which of the following devices is most 240. If a transformer increases AC voltage, it
likely to contain an electromagnet? will also increase
A. gas stove A. power
B. flashlight B. current
C. digital watch C. magnetic field strength
D. refrigerator D. none of the above
241. Changing the magnetic field intensity in a
NARAYAN CHANGDER
236. An inductor coil having some resistance is
connected to an AC source . which of the closed loop of wires induces:
following have zero average value over a A. Resistance
cycle?
B. Voltage
A. Induced EMF in the inductor
C. Light
B. current D. Magnetism
C. both a and b
242. What is a possible power source of a mo-
D. neither a nor b tor?
237. To produce an induced emf, there must be A. Fan
a change in B. Crank
A. flux C. Battery
B. field D. Moving water
C. area
243. The coils a wire has the current
D. angle is able to be generated.
E. speed A. more; more
238. The phenomenon of inducing voltage by B. less; more

changing the magnetic field around a con- C. more; less
ductor is called D. less; less
A. generated voltage
244. Which of these is NOT a part of a DC Gen-
B. Fleming’s induction erator.
C. transformer induction A. Slip rings
D. electromagnetic induction B. commutator
239. What will be the direction of the induced C. brushes
current in a generator when the direction D. stator
of the motion is upwards while the mag-
netic flux is to the right? 245. The current in a coil varies at a constant
rate of 2 A in 50 minutes. A back e.m.f.
A. To the left
of 4 V is induced in the coil. What is the
B. Upwards self inductance for the coil?
C. Towards A. 0.025 H
D. Away B. 0.10 H

C. 0.40 H 251. The coil has 500 turns. When the cur-
D. 40 H rent is changed to 2 A, the magnetic flux
through each turn changes by 4 mWb. De-

246. in a closed circuit, electric currents are in- termine the inductance of the coil.
duced so as to oppose the changing mag- A. 2 H
netic flux as per
B. 0, 2 H
A. Law of conservation of mass
C. 1 H
B. Law of conservation of charge
D. 0, 1 H
C. Law of conservation of energy
252. The primary coil of a transformer has 80
D. Law of conservation of current
turns on it, and the secondary coil has 40
247. A step-up transformer increases turns on it. This is
A. power A. a step-up transformer
B. energy B. a step-down transformer
C. neither C. either of the above depending on the
relative input and output currents.
D. both
D. neither step-up or step-down
248. In a vacuum, electromagnetic waves
travel at speeds 253. Step-down transformers
A. greater than the speed of light. A. improve the efficiency of the national
grid
B. equal to the speed of light.
B. reduce the voltage to a safe level for
C. less than the speed of light. the home
D. none of above C. both
249. Electromagnetic induction is the result of D. none of above
a change in
254. Which one of the following is not one of
A. surface area Maxwell’s fundamental equations of elec-
B. magnetic poles tromagnetism?
C. magnetic flux A. Gauss’ law for electricity
D. none of above B. Coulomb’s law
C. Faraday’s law
250. Craig is modeling the discovery of elec-
tromagnetism. Which procedure should he D. Ampere-Maxwell law
use? E. Gauss’ law for magnetism
A. moving a magnet into a coil of wire in 255. The electricity delivered to our homes
a closed circuit from power stations is transmitted at high
B. Moving a magnet into a coil of wire in voltages and low currents because
an open circuitf A. it is safer for engineers to repair the
C. bringing a compass near a wire that overhead cables.
has an electric current B. it is cost effective in terms of energy
D. none of above lost.

C. electricity can travel faster along the 261. Which device use the concept of mutual
cables. inductance?
D. it reduces the resistance of the cables. A. DC generator
B. Transformer
256. Unit for self induction
C. Working coil galvanometer
A. Volt
D. Wheatstone bridge
B. Wb
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. T 262. Which of the following would be the most
likely power source for a generator?
D. Henry
A. Light Bulb
257. Eddy current can be minimised by B. Turbine
A. Laminated core C. Battery
B. Mumetal D. Nail
C. Thick wire
263. Which of the following will increase the
D. All strength of an electric generator?
258. Maxwell hypothesized that a changing A. Use a Bigger Magnet

electric field would produce a magnetic B. Move the Magnet Slower
field. and edited which equation:
C. Wrap More Coils
A. Gauss’s Law
D. Use a Bigger Battery
B. Faraday’s Law
264. The transformer is a device used to
C. Ampere’s Law the value of a voltage.
D. Magnetic flux through a closed loop A. steady
formula
B. resist
259. Which of the following correctly, relates C. change
the units for magnetic flux and magnetic
flux density? D. anchor
A. 1 Wb = 1 T m-3 265. Examples for mutual induction is

B. 1 Wb = 1 T m-2 A. Transformer
C. 1 Wb = 1 T m2 B. Generator
D. 1 Wb = 1 T m3 C. Both
D. None
260. A magnet will pick up an object that is
made of 266. Ampere’s circuital law is valid for
A. plastic A. varying current
B. iron or steel B. static current
C. glass C. alternating current
D. copper D. harmonic field

267. In large generators in power plants, E. are the antiparticles for magnetic
rotate inside a coil of wire to produce an dipoles.
electric current.

272. What is one way to increase the induced
A. Wind current in a coil close to a magnet?
B. Water A. Decrease the number of coils
C. Magnets B. Increase the number of coils
D. Circuits C. Move the magnet slower
268. What is the name of the device responsi- D. Take the wire off of the magnet
ble for determining the amount of electric-
273. The primary coil of a transformer has 80
ity produced in a motor?
turns on it, and the secondary coil has 40
A. Barometer turns on it. This is
B. Galvanometer A. a step-up tansformer
C. Spectroscope B. a step-down transformer
D. Odometer C. either of the above depending on the
relative input and output currents.
269. How can an electromagnet be helpful in a
junkyard? D. none of above
A. It can help the workers move around 274. Changing current in a coil produces emf in
the yard. the same coil. this phenomenon is known
B. It can covert electrical energy into me- as
chanical energy. A. Mutual induction
C. It can move heavy pieces of metal. B. Self induction
D. It can send out voltage waves. C. induced emf
D. induced current
270. Wire loop is rotated in magnetic field.
The frequency of change of direction of the 275. According to the Lenz’s law, if you pull
induced emf is the magnet away, then the induced current
A. once per revolution will
B. twice per revolution A. change the pull
C. thrice per revolution B. go with pull
D. four times per revolution C. oppose the pull
D. both a and b
271. Complete the following state-
ment:According to today’s scientists, mag- 276. Transformers transfer electric power
netic monopoles from one coil to another in order to
A. have no mass. A. Transform into electromagnets
B. have no charge. B. Transform from cars to robots
C. are found in abundance in the most dis- C. Transform one value of voltage into an-
tant parts of the universe. other
D. do not exist anywhere in the universe. D. All the above

4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 514
4.6 Electric generator & A.C.

1. Carbon brush is normally made-up of: 6. Lap windings is suitable for
A. graphite A. high voltage, low current
B. coal B. low voltage, low current
C. diamond C. High current, low voltage
D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. iron
7. DC Generators give
2. How is a solenoid different from mag-
nets? A. mechanical energy
A. solenoid is a permanent magnet B. Electrical energy
B. solenoid has a north and south pole C. DC Electrical energy

D. AC Electrical energy
C. the poles of a solenoid can be reversed
D. solenoid is a temporary magnet 8. Machines that convert electrical energy to
mechanical energy
E. the magnetic field lines around a
solenoid are similar to the bar magnet A. generators
B. motors
3. What would happen if I spin a wire inside
C. boilers
the magnetic field of a permanent mag-
net? D. transformers
A. Electric current would disappear 9. A device which converts electricity in to ki-
B. The magnet would explode netic energy is
A. generator
C. Electric current will flow through the
wire B. electromagnet
D. It would produce a gravitational field C. solenoid
D. electric motor
4. In India, the number of times AC changes
direction in one second is 10. The device that convert mechanical energy
into electrical energy is
A. 50
A. electrical motor
B. 100
B. electrical generator
C. 1/100
C. electrical transformer
D. 1/50
D. non of the above
5. The following are applications of electric 11. In a DC generator the current to the exter-
motor EXCEPT nal circuit is delivered through the
A. Power plants A. coils.
B. Water pumping stations B. battery.
C. Food processors C. slip rings.
D. Machine tools D. split rings (commutators).

12. The essential difference between an AC 17. A transformer has a potential difference
generator and a DC generator is that of 200V, and a current of 0.1A in the sec-
ondary coil. The potential difference in the

A. AC generator has an electromagnet
while a DC generator haspermanent mag- primary coil is 50V. Calculate the potential
net. difference in the primary coil.
B. DC generator will generate a higher A. 0.4A

voltage. B. 0.7A
C. AC generator will generate a higher C. 2A
voltage.
D. 1A
D. AC generator has slip rings while the
DC generator has a commutator. 18. The function of the field pole is
13. The operation of Commutator in DC Gener- A. increase Flux

ator is to B. increase the number of conductor
A. convert dc to ac C. send current to the armature
B. convert ac to dc D. spreads out the flux
C. convert fixed dc to variable dc
19. Which factors affect the amount of induced
D. none of above emf in the generator?
14. if resistance wire gets shortened what A. magnetic field, length of the active con-
happen !? ? ? ? ? ? !? ? !? !? !? ductor, speed of relative motion
? !? ! B. magnetic field, type of magnet used,
A. bulb gets brighter size of the conductor
B. blub gets dimmer C. speed of the relative motion and type
of conductor material
C. bulb gets dimmer
D. generator form factor and number of
D. the light gets turned off
coils in the armature
15. Faraday’s Law of Electromagnetic induc-
tion states that a current is induced in a 20. Where is alternating current used?
conductor when it is exposed to A. Factory
A. magnetic field B. Homes
B. changing magnetic field C. Hydro-electric dams
C. constant magnetic field D. Power stations
D. heat
21. Which of the following will induce the least
16. How can you increase magnetic field amount of voltage for the same specifica-
strength of field windings? tions of armature conductor?
A. adjust load resistance A. 500 turns
B. adjust armature windings B. 1000 turns
C. adjust carbon brush contact C. 2000 turns
D. adjust field rheostat D. 3000 turns

22. Which part of an electric motor changes 27. The function of the armature core
the current direction every half-turn? A. carries the load
A. Split ring B. convert current to dc
B. Slip rings C. houses the armature conductor
C. Brushes D. none of above
D. Battery 28. Find the effective current given that the
maximum current is 14A
NARAYAN CHANGDER
23. A generator is a device that √
A. 7 2 A
A. convert electrical energy to mechani- √
B. 14 2 A
cal energy
C. 7 ÷7 A
B. convert mechanical energy to mechan-
D. 0A
ical energy
C. convert mechanical energy to electri- 29. Which of the following source of energy is
cal energy most widely use to produce electricity.
A. solar
D. convert electrical energy to electriclal
energy B. steam
C. wind
24. When is the Flemming’s left-hand rule
D. nuclear
used?
A. When the magnetic field causes cur- 30. An electric generator
rent A. converts mechanical energy into chem-
ical energy
B. When the motion causes current
B. converts chemical energy into electri-
C. When the current causes motion cal energy
D. When the current causes magnetic C. converts mechanical energy into grav-
field itational potential energy
25. What is the key working principle of an a.c. D. converts mechanical energy into elec-
generator? trical energy
A. electromagnetic induction 31. The Ac generator is different from DC gen-

erator
B. magnetic induction
A. Ac generator has 3 slip rings
C. electrostatic induction
B. Ac generator has one slip ring
D. electric field C. AC generator has commutator
26. Which of the following does not affect the D. AC generator has two slip rings
magnitude of induced voltage? 32. Why are the field winding of the Series-
A. strength of magnetic field field, Self-Excited DC Generator usually
thicker than those in Shunt Field Self Ex-
B. speed of relative motion
cited DC Generator?
C. size of the commutator
A. to minimize winding resistance espe-
D. length of the conductor cially when higher load current is drawn

B. to maximize the production of mag- 38. Which ONE of the following changes may
netic field lead to an increase in the emf of an AC gen-
erator without changing its frequency?

C. to reduce eddy losses in the field wind-
ing A. Decrease the resistance of the coil.
D. to minimize cost of production B. Increase the area of the coil.
33. Which part of the generator where cur- C. Increase the resistance of the coil.
rent passes through to produce magnetic
field? D. Decrease the speed of rotation.
A. field
39. The part of the DC Generator where the
B. armature magnetic flux is produced when the field
C. commutator winding is excited
D. slip ring A. poles
34. Type of generator that needs an external B. armature
dc source for field excitation. C. carbon brush
A. separately excited
D. commutator
B. Self-excited Series
C. Self-excited Shunt 40. If the average power dissipate in a gener-
D. Self-excited Compound ator is 500W whats the maximum Power
rating?
35. A motor converts
A. 500W
A. mechanical energy to electrical energy
B. 100W
B. electrical energy to mechanical energy
C. 1000W
C. wind energy to thermal energy
D. none of above D. 250W
36. Brushes are made from: 41. The simple loop generator is different from
A. metal DC Generators only in terms of
B. copper A. brushes
C. carbon B. stator
D. gold C. armature
37. The AC voltage waveform is in the posi- D. commutator
tive direction for some period of time and
in the negative direction for some period 42. Electrical energy is transferred through
of time. What is the name given to this in a transformer.
waveform?
A. electric field
A. alternating wave
B. inverted wave B. rotor
C. hertz wave C. magnetic field

D. sine wave D. air space

43. Impedance is usually denoted by what let- D. make the turning of the coil easier.
ter?
48. How can the voltage output from an AC
A. Z
generator be doubled?
B. Y
A. Halve the speed of rotation but re-
C. R verse the direction of rotation
D. delta B. Double the speed of rotation
44. An Ac generator that delivers a peak po- C. Reverse the direction of rotation
NARAYAN CHANGDER
tential difference of 202 V is connected to D. Use half the number of coils
an electric heater with a resistance of 480
Ω . what is the effective current in the 49. The yoke consist of ALL the following EX-
heater. CEPT:
A. 0.298 A A. lift eye
B. 2.38 A B. terminal box
C. 1.60 A C. frame foot
D. 3.37 A Ω
D. armature
45. The direction of induced emf or current is
indicated by: 50. “DC” in a DC electric generator stands for
A. Fleming’s left-hand rule A. divisible current
B. Fleming’s right-hand rule B. direct current

C. Faraday’s law of electromagnetic in- C. direct cable
duction D. divine current
D. Ampere’s swimming rule
51. At what position during the magnitude of
46. In Fleming’s Right Hand Rule for Genera- the induced current is maximum?
tors, the “Thumb” represent the direction A. When the loop is vertical and making
of zero degree.
A. Force of the conductor
B. When the loop is horizontal and mak-
B. Magnetic field ing 90 degree.
C. Current C. When the loop is in between horizontal
D. None of the above and vertical position
47. The key purpose of the slip rings is to D. It is constant at all position
A. reverse the direction of current in the 52. What is the voltage from an AC genera-
coil every half turn. tor half a turn after maximum positive out-
B. reverse the direction of the current in put?
the external circuit every half turn of the A. Half the maximum output
coil.
B. Maximum positive output again
C. allow the coil to turn continuously with-
out losing electrical contact with the exter- C. Zero voltage
nal circuit. D. Maximum negative output

53. What does a galvanometer detect? 58. Which part of the DC Generator is also
called the frame?
A. Magnetism

A. yoke
B. Electric current
B. field
C. Voltage transferred
C. armature
D. Electromagnetic induction
D. poles
54. What are the functions of an automatic
voltage regulator? (Choose three) 59. A DC generator operates at 80 Hz.
The number of times the output voltage
A. overvoltage protection reaches a maximum in 1 second is
B. rapid response time with voltage sta- A. 40
bility
B. 80
C. undervoltage protection
C. 120
D. overheating protection
D. 160
E. power amplification
60. In A.C generator, by increasing the no. of
55. What determines the frequency of a.c. pro- turns in the coil,
duced by a generator? A. Decrease the Electromotive force
A. Speed of rotation of coil (EMF)
B. The number of rotations of coil in one- B. Electromotive force (EMF) remains the
second same
C. Both speed of rotation and number of C. Increases the Electromotive force

rotation of coil in one-second (EMF)
D. None of these D. Electromotive force (EMF) becomes

zero
56. What is the typical voltage ratings of main
61. Laminations of cores are often done in or-
generators?
der to
A. 440V, 60Hz
A. reduce eddy losses
B. 220V, 60Hz
B. increase generator voltage
C. 208V, 60Hz C. increase eddy current
D. 120V, 60Hz D. increase the strength of the generator
57. In a lap wound armature, the number of 62. Power ratings of emergency generators
parallel paths is equal to ranges from
A. number of poles A. 10kW to 100kW
B. 2 B. 20kW to 200kW
C. number of conductors C. 100kW to 2MW
D. 4 D. 10kW to 100MW

63. What object is needed to make a function- B. short shunt compound wound
ing circuit C. long shunt compound wound
A. Bulbs D. shunt wound
B. Crocodile Clips
69. The motion in DC motor can be increased by
C. A Power Supply (Battery)
the following factors (you may choose
D. Plastic more than one)
A. Using a stronger magnet
NARAYAN CHANGDER
64. In an AC generator, the wire loop which is
mounted so that it rotates within a mag- B. Increasing the potential difference
netic field is called the
C. Increasing the current
A. Coil
D. Increasing the number of turns on the
B. Armature coil
C. Slip Rings
70. What type of rotors are usually used in
D. Brushes large power, high speed turbine drives?
65. Who among these physicists developed A. cylindrical type
the principle of electromagnetic induc- B. salient type
tion?
C. armature type
A. Hans Christian Oersted
D. general purpose rotor type
B. James Clerk Maxwell
C. Michael Faraday 71. What is the energy involved in spinning?
D. Heinrich Hertz A. kinetic

B. electrical
66. What is another name for electromagnetic
induction? C. chemical potential
A. The motor effect D. thermal
B. The generator effect 72. To find the effective value (rms),
C. A solenoid A. multiply the peak value by 0.707
D. A flux capacitor B. multiply the peak value by 0.636
67. Separately excited field generators has C. multiply the peak value by 1.414
A. Permanent magnet D. divide the peak value by 0.707
B. Electromagnet 73. What is the function of the motor?
C. Residual magnetism A. Convert electrical energy to mechani-
D. none of above cal (kinetic) energy
68. Which type of Self-Excited DC Generator B. Convert electrical energy to thermal

is characterized by having one of its field energy (heat)
winding in series and the other in parallel C. Convert mechanical (kinetic) energy to
with the armature? electrical energy
A. series wound D. none of above

74. What does the Armature do? C. current collector

A. Turns the coils around D. bearing

B. Produces the input voltage 80. How does a moving-coil microphone create
C. Produce the voltage output electrical signals?
D. conducts the electricity A. An electromagnet vibrates inside a coil
of wire
75. We can increase the amount of current pro-
B. A coil of wire vibrates in a magnetic
duced in the generator by
field
A. Decrease the voltage
C. A magnet vibrates inside a coil of wire
B. increasing the voltage
D. A small battery vibrates in a circuit
C. moving the coil / magnet faster
81. A transformer is designed to step down
D. keep the coil in a powerful field
1320 V to 110 V. If there are 300 turns
76. Every magnet, regardless of its shape, has on the primary side, how many turns are
two on the secondary side?
A. magnetic poles. A. 1200
B. magnetic charges. B. 484
C. magnetic fields. C. 3600
D. magnetic needles. D. 25
77. What is the peak voltage when the maxi- 82. The acts as mechanical rectifier, con-
mum voltage is 100V? verting AC generated voltage into DC volt-
age.
A. 707V
A. commutator
B. 141V
B. rectifier
C. 7.07V
C. armature
D. 120V
D. carbon brush
78. generators what be they !!!
83. The part of the DC Generator that is also
A. Cool called the frame
B. Mega Cool A. yoke
C. Ultra Cool B. armature
D. An object that generates electricity C. poles
through rotational movement D. field
79. Which part of the DC Generator allows the 84. AC generator converts
collection of current from rotating commu-
tator? This device slides over the commu- A. Mechanical energy to electrical energy
tator. B. Electrical energy to mechanical energy
A. carbon brush C. Heat energy to mechanical energy
B. armature D. none of above

85. Select all that apply to AC electric genera- B. Separately Excited DC Generator
tors. C. Series Field Self Excited DC Generator
A. the direction of current changes D. Shunt Field Self Excited DC Generator
B. the direction of current remains con-
stant 91. Which type of Self-Excited DC Generator
is characterized by having one of its field
C. uses slip rings winding in series with the load and the
D. uses split rings other is in parallel with the armature?
NARAYAN CHANGDER
E. the magnitude of induced current is A. series wound
constant B. short shunt compound wound
86. AC generators produces no output current C. long shunt compound wound
at D. shunt wound
A. 0 coil position
92. What energy transformation takes place
B. 90 coil position in an electric fan’s motor?
C. 270 coil position A. Alternating current to direct current
D. none of above B. Direct current to alternating current
87. What do Batteries do in a circuit? C. Mechanical energy into electrical en-
ergy
A. Nothing
D. Electrical energy into mechanical en-
B. Provide Electricity
ergy
C. Use Electricity
93. Select all that apply to commutators.
D. Light Up
A. converts AC to DC
88. It describes how often or how frequently
B. converts DC to AC
a complete AC waveform is produced.
C. changes current direction every cycle
A. frequency
D. keeps current direction constant
B. speed
C. period 94. Simple loop generators produces no output
current at
D. time
A. 0 coil position
89. Electrical generator is application on
B. 90 coil position
A. magnetism C. 270 coil position
B. electromagnetic induction D. none of above
C. Lenz’s Law
95. When increasing the number of coils and
D. Faraday Law number of windings in each coil
90. Which type of Self-Excited DC Generator A. AC generators produce more electric-
has its voltage output dependent on the ity
load applied? B. DC generators produce more electric-
A. Permanent Magnet DC generator ity

C. both AC and DC generators produce C. Armature conductor

more electricity D. Electrical shielding

D. neither AC nor DC generators produce
more electricity 101. Magnetic field can be produced by using?
(select all correct answers)
96. How is contact between the coil and circuit
A. permanent magnet
maintained in an AC generator?
B. electromagnet
A. A split ring commutator connects to
each side for half a turn C. transformer
B. It cannot be maintained. D. rectifier
C. The alternator can only complete one
102. “AC” in an AC electric generator stands
revolution and must then be rotated in re-
for
verse
A. alternating current
D. Slip rings and brushes allow continu-
ous connection B. alternative current
97. At the power plant the turbine is connected C. actual current

to a ? D. alternating cable
A. DC Generator
103. A transformer has 100 turns in a sec-
B. AC Capacitor ondary coil. It steps up a potential dif-
C. AC Generator ference from 50V to 250V. Calculate the
number of turns in the primary coil.
D. Cooling Tower
A. 10 Turns
98. In separately excited field generators, the
B. 35 Turns
stator produces its magnetic field
C. 50 Turns
A. by external source of dc current
D. 20 Turns
B. by current from armature
C. by permanent magnets 104. What is the Stator in an A.C Generator?
D. none of above A. The moving coil thing
99. In self excited field generators, the stator B. Some sort of stationary part
strengthens its magnetic field C. The center of electrical connections
A. by external source of dc current D. Output of Voltage
B. By current from armature
105. Which of the following is/are parts of a
C. By permanent magnet typical DC Generator? select all that ap-
D. none of above plies
A. commutator
100. The function of the yoke
B. rectifier
A. protective shield or mechanical protec-
tion C. armature
B. South pole of magnet D. poles

106. How can you increase the amount of in- 111. What parts of the motor function to pro-
duced voltage in a generator? vide a force to create the mechanical en-
A. increase the speed of rotation (rpm) of ergy?
the generator A. commutator and brushes
B. decrease the speed of rotation (rpm) B. field magnets and armature
of the generator
C. DC power source and terminals
C. use bigger bearings for the generator
D. none of above
NARAYAN CHANGDER
D. use bigger commutator
112. Which principle does an AC generator
107. If a circuit is not complete, what will hap-
work on?
pen?
A. Electromagnetism
A. The Bulbs Glow
B. Magnetism
B. Will not work
C. 50% chance of working C. Electromagnetic induction
D. It will work D. Induced Magnetism
108. When a conductor cuts the magnetic flux 113. What is the name of the effect caused by
lines at? , the maximum voltage will be the wire when it is moved across a mag-
induced into the conductor. netic field?
A. 60 deg A. Induced magnetism
B. 90 deg B. Electromagnetic induction
C. 180 deg C. Electromagnetism
D. 360 deg D. Turning effect of coil
109. How can the direction of an induced po- 114. Alternating current differs from direct
tential be reversed? (select 2) current because
A. By changing the direction of the mag- A. it alternates from AC to DC.
netic field
B. the current alternates between 2 A
B. By using fewer coils
and 5 A.
C. By moving the magnet faster
C. it changes direction.
D. By moving the magnet in the opposite
D. the resistance fluctuates back and
direction
forth.
110. In Fleming’s Right Hand Rule for Genera-
tors, the “Forefinger” represent the direc- 115. The part of the generator where the cur-
tion of rent is induced.
A. Force of the conductor A. field winding

B. Magnetic field B. poles
C. Current C. commutator
D. None of the above D. armature

116. The direction of the induced current in the 122. Generators are machines that convert
coil of a generator depends on the into

A. length of the coil. A. AC, DC
B. speed of rotation of the coil.
B. mechanical energy, electrical energy
C. direction of the magnetic field.
C. electrical energy, mechanical energy
D. strength of the magnetic field.
D. chemical energy, electrical energy
117. For a transformer to work properly, it
must 123. In the Flemming’s left hand rule, the
A. be connected to alternating current. thumb is representing the
B. have a core made of Carbon. A. Direction of magnetic field
C. be connected to direct current. B. Direction of electric current
D. have infinite resistance.
C. Motion of wire
118. It is the sudden voltage drop in the gen-
D. Turning effect of coil
erator windings due to load current surges
on the generator.
124. The strength of magnetic field due to a
A. voltage dip solenoid can be changed by changing
B. voltage regulation in it
C. voltage terminal A. number of turns
D. voltage source B. Current
119. Why are all armature core laminated? C. Both number of turns and current
A. to reduce the generator size
D. none of above
B. it is cheaper to manufacture
C. laminating the core provides more me- 125. A generator is a device that converts
chanical strength A. mechanical energy into electrical en-
D. to reduce eddy current losses ergy.
120. The electricity generated from the power B. electrical energy into kinetic energy.
plant is
C. mechanical energy into kinetic energy.
A. Alternating Current
D. electrical energy into mechanical en-
B. Direct Current ergy.
C. Delayed Current
D. Alternating Voltage 126. The electricity generated from the power
plant is
121. Another term for ac generator.
A. Alternating Current
A. alternator
B. Direct Current
B. commutator
C. armature C. Delayed Current
D. stator D. Eddy Current

127. Which ONE of the energy conversions be- 132. In an AC generator, the contacts are
low takes place when a DC motor is in op- made from a soft but highly conductive ma-
eration? terial, usually carbon, and are called
A. Kinetic to electrical A. Coils
B. Heat to mechanical B. Armatures
C. Mechanical to electrical C. Slip Rings
D. Electrical to mechanical D. Brushes
NARAYAN CHANGDER
128. The part of the DC Generator that pro- 133. At no-load condition of a separately ex-
vides mechanical support for the poles cited dc generator, what will happen to the
A. yoke output voltage if field excitation current in-
creases?
B. armature
A. increases
C. poles
B. decreases
D. field
C. remains the same
129. A single winding conductor moves D. becomes zero output
through the magnetic field as it rotated
by a mechanical energy induces a voltage. 134. What is true of AC GENERATOR?
This phenomenon is known as: A. It works on the principle of electro-
A. Lenz’s Law magnetic induction
B. Kirchoff’s Voltage Law B. The mechanical energy of the rotation
C. Faraday’s Law of Electromagnetic In- is converted into electrical energy
duction C. A pair of slip rings are used in the AC
D. Fleming’s Left Hand Rule generator
D. All the above
130. In a generator armature makes one full
revolution, it goes through degrees of 135. When a coil is held stationary in magnetic
mechanical rotation. field, the induced current in it:
A. 0 A. continuously changes
B. 90 B. randomly changes
C. 270 C. remains zero
D. 360 D. becomes maximum
131. The part of the the DC Generator that 136. A generator develops a maximum poten-
gets excited when current is passed tial difference of 170 V. the effective po-
through it. tential difference is
A. Field winding A. 120 V
B. Poles B. 1004 V
C. yoke C. 12.0 V
D. commutator D. 1200.0 V

137. In D.C. generators, lap wound armature C. 0.05 Tesla

is used for: D. 0.03 Tesla

A. high voltage, high current
143. A rectangular coil of copper wires is ro-
B. low voltage, high current tated in a magnetic field. The direction of
C. high voltage, low current the induced current changes once in each
D. low voltage, low current A. two revolutions
138. When magnetic flux increases in a coil, B. one revolution
the induced current will be C. half revolution
A. in the same direction D. one-fourth revolution
B. in the opposite direction
144. Super heated steam is used to turn a
C. clockwise ?
D. counterclockwise A. Transformer
139. what current does a motor except? B. Battery
A. only AC C. Turbine
B. only DC D. Toothed Gear
C. both 145. What is an object that creates electricity
D. none from rotary movements?
E. both A. generator
140. how did you enjoy quiz? B. Motzart
A. good C. Motor
B. good D. Moter
C. good E. Motar
D. good 146. As a generator armature makes one full
E. good revolution, it goes through? degrees of
mechanical rotation.
141. If the coil is placed perpendicular to field
A. 0
lines then the number of lines passing
through the coil is: B. 90
A. Minimum C. 270
B. Maximum D. 360
C. Zero 147. Find the effective voltage given that the
D. May be maximum or minimum maximum current is 20V
√
142. Which of the following magnetic field will A. 10 2 A
√
induce largest amount of voltage? B. 5 2 A
A. 0.5 Tesla C. 20 ÷ 2 A
B. 0.3 Tesla D. 0A

4.7 Domestic circuits 528
148. Find the average power dissipated in a 150. Which basic part of a generator distin-
Generator if the maximum power output guishes AC from DC?
is 500W? A. Brushes
A. 500W B. Rotor
B. 100W C. Commutator
C. 1000W D. Stator
D. 250W
NARAYAN CHANGDER
151. Which ONE of the following actions will
NOT cause an increase in the induced emf
149. A transformer has 200 turns on the pri- in a coil if the coil is rotated in a uniform
mary coil and 50 turns in the secondary magnetic field?
coil. A potential difference of 48V is in-
duced in the secondary coil. Calculate the A. Rotating the coil faster
potential difference in the Primary coil. B. Increasing the strength of the mag-
A. 12V netic field
C. Increasing the number of turns of the
B. 192V
coil
C. 100V
D. Replacing the coil with a coil of lower
D. 198V resistance
4.7 Domestic circuits

1. Tick the chemical effect of elecric current D. EUR 40
A. boiling
4. The fuse rating used for appliances such as
B. motion geysers is
C. electro shock A. 5 A
D. Electroplating B. 50 A
2. According to new colour coding the colour C. 220 A
of live wire is D. 15 A
A. Brown
5. If you are available with fuses with
B. Black following rating250mA500 mA1A 2A
C. Red 5A10AWhich one would be most suitable
for protecting T.V of power 180 W at 240
D. Blur
V?
3. If electrical power costs EUR 0.12/kwh, A. 1A
and I use 9 x 108 Joules of electrical en-
B. 5A
ergy, what will I be charged?
C. 250mA
A. EUR 10
D. 10 A
B. EUR 20
C. EUR 30 6. M.C.B. s work on principle of

A. Heating effect of electric current 12. Earth wire is used

B. Chemical effect of electric current A. as a safety measure

C. Magnetic effect of electric current
B. to prevent shock due to leakage of cur-
D. Electroplating effect of current rent
7. If the earth wire is damaged C. in appliances having a metal body
A. The user will suffer from electric shock D. in place of neutral wire
B. The appliance won’t work
C. The appliance will overheat 13. What property of fuse wire enables it to
act as a safety feature?
D. none of above
A. it’s Boiling point
8. If electricity costs EUR 0.15 per kilowatt-
hour, how much does it cost to operate a B. it’s strength
router that requires 7.5 amperes of elec- C. it’s Melting point
tricity and is used in a 120-volt electrical
circuit for 2 hours? D. it’s Texture
A. EUR 0.27 E. it’s flexibility
B. EUR 0.68
14. At the time of short circuit, the current in
C. EUR 1.75
the circuit
D. EUR 12.31
A. reduces substantially.
9. As per old convention, live wire is , neu-
tral wire is & earth wire is B. does not change.
A. red, blue, green respectively C. increases heavily.

B. green, black, yellow respectively D. vary continuously
C. red, black, green respectively
15. Color of earth wire used in household
D. black, red, blue respectively
wiring is
10. Which of the following equations is an A. Blue
equation for power, involving current and
resistance? B. Green
A. P= I/V C. Red
B. P = IR D. Black
C. P = IVR2
D. P = I2R 16. If electrical power costs EUR 0.12/kwh,
and I use 250 kwh of electrical energy,
11. Which of the following describes the com- what will I be charged?
mon domestic power supplied in India?
A. EUR 10
A. 110V, 100Hz
B. EUR 20
B. 220V, 100Hz
C. 110V, 50Hz C. EUR 30
D. 220V, 50Hz D. EUR 40

17. What is the purpose of the Miniature Cir- 22. For a electric appliance of 5 A current you
cuit Breaker? will use fuse of which rating
A. Turn on/off electrical supply to the A. 7 A
whole house. B. 6 A
B. Trips power supply when it detects any C. 4 A
leakage current of more than 30mA in the
D. 5 A
earth wire.
23. Which is a result of overloading of electri-
NARAYAN CHANGDER
C. Cuts off power supply to a particular
circuit when a large current higher than cal appliances?
the rating s detected. A. high performance of equipment
D. Stops an electrocution from happen- B. inadequate current supply
ing. C. overheating of wires and fire may oc-
cur
18. Electric fuse is based on
A. heating effect of electric current
B. chemical effect of electric current 24. Main fuse in domestic wiring consists of
which type of fuse?
C. magnetic effects of electric current
A. Cartridge fuse
D. none of these
B. Porcelain fuse
19. Electric fuse is placed in series with the C. Radial fuse
wire. D. AC fuse
A. live
25. occurs when the live and neutral wires
B. parallel come in the direct contact
C. neutral A. Overloading
D. earth B. Short Circuit
C. Fluctuation of current
20. Live wire is generally the wire with
D. low voltage
A. Red Insulation
B. Green Insulation 26. In our country, the potential difference be-
tween the live & neutral wire is
C. Black Insulation
A. 220 V
D. Yellow Insulation
B. 110 V
21. CALCULATE A FUSE FOR A TV, WHEN C. 50 V
VOLTAGE-240VOLTS AND THE POWER-50 D. 440 V
WATT
27. At the time of short circuit
A. 4 AMP
A. Current increases, resistance de-
B. 5 AMP
creases
C. 1 AMP
B. Current decreases, resistance de-
D. 10 AMP creases

C. Current increases, voltage decreases A. EUR 2.50

D. Voltage increases, current increases B. EUR 6.80

28. Current in an electric circuit can exceeds C. EUR 10.20
it’s maximum limit when,
D. EUR 15.60
A. 1.One device is connected to the
socket. 32. A kilowatt-hour is equal to joules.
B. 2.Touching of two neutral wires.
A. 3, 600
C. 3.Insulation break down.
B. 360, 000
D. 4.Touching of two live wires.
C. 3, 600, 000
29. Earth wires are particularly important if
the case of an appliance is made of D. 360, 000, 000
A. Metal 33. Which of the following wires has a poten-
B. Plastic tial of 220V?
C. Wood A. Neutral Wire
D. Rubber
B. Earth Wire
30. The most important safety method used C. Live Wire
for protecting home appliances from short
circuiting or overloading is D. All of the above
A. earthing
34. In energy transformations, “wasted en-
B. use of fuse ergy” usually takes what form?
C. use of stabilizers
A. heat
D. use of electric meter
B. chemical energy
31. If the local rate for electricity is EUR 0.13
C. light
per kilowatt-hour, how much should the
electric bill be for 120 kilowatt-hours? D. sound waves

Khanacademy Class 10 Physics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Khanacademy Class 10 Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MOST POPULAR AROUND THE WORLD

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

DESIGNED FOR SURE SUCCESS

JAI SHREE RAM

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

It is my deepest gratitude and warmest

To my mother JOYTSNA CHANGDER

who has been a constant source of Knowledge and in-

The aim of this publication is to sup-

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

1 Light – reflection & refraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2 The human eye and the colourful world . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

4 Magnetic effects of electric current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

8. The velocity of light in vacuum is m/s C. lines

C. plane mirror 16. MCQ 04 Tracing paper is an example for

B. real 18. A ray is reflected in turn by three plain mir-

19. Which of the following correctly describes A. focus

D. The image undergoes vertical inver- B. transparent object

20. The angle produced as a source of light D. opaque object

21. Light exhibits D. length

C. Dual nature ( ray & wave both ) A. angle of reflection

D. particle nature only B. angle of incidence

29. The reflection by the rough surfaces is C. N= (360/angle between mirrors)-1

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

42. A positive sign in the value of magnifica- C. Both of these

B. object size = image size B. (d) Concave mirror as well as concave

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

B. -40m C. A concave lens has-4 dioptre power

65. Which term means to bounce off the sur- B. 45o

72. If the angle of incidence is 45o, what is A. 1.33

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

85. what is the difference between convergent C. Convex

B. convergent-focus light into different di- A. glows

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

D. Smooth & silvered opaque surface D. 5 cm

99. Why can’t you see your face on the pages

A. 30 C. Almost all of the light rays that reach

C. 60 D. Almost all of the light rays that reach

D. negative D. None of these

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

114. Law of reflection is A. plane

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

C. absorb 130. A concave mirror gives real, inverted and

128. Why the rainbow forms in the nature? C. v =-32cm, h =-5.2cm

A. Because of refraction D. v-32cm, h = 5.2cm

B. Because of dispersion 134. The law of reflection states that when a

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

147. What occurs when light hits a medium C. opposite

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

D. Change of energy of light D. focal

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

177. Light has the highest velocity in which B. Diffuse Reflection

PRACTICE BOOK» NOT FOR SALE

D. a parallel beam of light will be re- A. 20 cm/sec

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS

189. When you stand 3 m in front of a full C. Angle of coincidence

CHECK GOOGLE PLAY BOOKS FOR ANSWERS KEYS